OF
--                               1
AIND
PSYCHOLOGYX
Iil TWO VOLIJMES.
COM-IPISING
Philosophy of Mesmerism,         Electrical Psychology,
On Fascination,                  The Macrocosm.
Science of the Soul.
" All are the parts of one stupendous whole,
Whose Body Nature is, and God the Soul.
VOl.  f.
NEW YORK:
PUBLISHED BY SAMUEL R. WELLS,
No. 389 BROADWAY.
--— 4J








THE
MACROCOSM AND MICROCOSM;
OB, TIlT
UNIVERSE WITHOUT AND THE UNIVERSE WITHIN:
BEINGa
&N UNFOLDING OF THE PLAN OF CREATION AND THE CORRESPO)WDI
ENCE OF TRUTHS, BOTH IN
THE WORLD OF SENSE AND THE WORLD OF SOUL.
Kn Ltoo 3arts
BY WILLIAM  FISHBOUGIH.
PART I.
THE MACROCOSM; OR, THE UNIVERSE WITHOUT..
Nature 1m a harp of srvEn  TIMES szEsv   strings
On which, by God's own hand. Is gently olaved
The ever-varied music of the sphere?,
NEW YORK:
PUBLISHED  BY  SAMUEL R. WELLS,
No. 389 BROADWAY.
1874.




Eitered, accrJing to Act ct Conress, in the year 1S52. bt
WILLIAM FISHBOTJGII,
b the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the Unlted States for the Sc them Diaete
of New York.




PREFACE.
IN submitting the accompanying Treatise to the public, it may be
proper to precede it by a few facts and remarks relative to its origin,
plan, and purpose. In the summer of 1849, on retiring from the editorial charge of a Philosophical Journal, the writer announced his
intention to prepare and publish, as soon as convenient, a work on
Psychology-a subject then, as now, exciting much interest among a
class of readers with whom he had been holding weekly communion.
A manuscript of such a work was, during the few ensuing months,
nearly finished; but various circumstances and considerations arose to
prevent its publication, among the chief of which were, first, that with
the materials of psychological science then unfolded, I found it impose
Bible to bring the work to a desired state of perfection; and, secondly,
that facts and principles such I was then able, only, to set forth, were
already rapidly forcing themselves into general notice in another way.
I concluded, therefore, to await the unfolding of further light upon a
subject of which, at that time, no one could claim more than a very
superficial knowledge, and to postpone the publication of the results
of my investigations until they were further matured, and until the
state of the public mind, upon questions to which they related, gave a
fair indication that some particular use, not accomplished by other dcvelopments, might be possibly subserved in submitting them to general
perusal. These statements involve an explanation and apology to a
large portion of my former readers, who, as I learn, felt disappointed
at the non-appearance of the announced publication at the time it was
expected, and whose letters of inquiry respecting it I have, in some
instances, been reluctantly compelled to leave unanswered.
As investigations have been continued upon the great subject of
Psychology, together with its cognate and still higher themes, it has,
of course, greatly expanded; until, in the aspect which the question finally assumed, it was perceived to be impossible to give any adequate exposition of the great realm of being within man, without the




atv                 P iPREFACE.
aid of some more enlarged, systematic, and interior exposition than anJ
which was yet generally extant, of the great realm of being without
which serves to the former as a natural counterpart and exponent.
Feeling, therefore, an embarrassment at the thought of writing upon
the interior constitution, laws, and susceptihilities of man, without the
comprehensive basis of a general material philosophy so universally
harmonized and compacted, as to bring nature without into the obvious analogy of a single human being, and thus into an aspect in
which it might be constantly drawn upon for comparisons and illustrations, I accordingly determined to precede my proposed anthropological
Treatise by a general disquisition upon the realm of exterior being,
which I have called the " MACROCOSM," in contradistinction to the
human physical and psychical constitution, which I have called the
"MICROCOSM."  Both Treatises were, at first, designed to be submitted
in one volume; but as it was perceived that each would embrace a subject which is complete in itself, though intimately connected with the
other, it was finally determined to issue them separately.
In speaking briefly of the further objects and general plan of the present work, I will premise that the whole realm of created being, natural,
psychological, and even spiritual, forms (at least in the general sense)
one perfectly united System, consistent and harmonious in all its parts
and interactivities. To this proposition the reason and intuition of every
well-constituted human mind responds an instant assent. But a reliable conception of the universal plan of this complex unity of created
being, has hitherto undeniably been a grand desideratum of philosophy; and, reasoning superficially only from the objects which come
within the scope of the five exterior senses, and without the aid of any
grand fundamental and interior Principle to connect and harmonize all
things, in serial and graduated orders, from the common primary cause
to ultimate effects-men have cherished theories ever conflicting, ever
varying, and necessarily ever disfigured, more or less, with essential
errors and imperfections. I have ventured to hope that this defect in
the mode of philosophizing might prove to be in some good degree supplied by a discovery, the fundamental principles of which came into
my mind some four years ago, in a manner quite extraordinary, but of
which I need not now speak particularly. This discovery, which I have
called "the law of the seven-fold correspondential series," or "the
karmonial scale of creation," is, to some extent, unfolded and




PREFACE                                 V
applied in the present volume, though but a small portion f the avidences of its truth, and the instances of its applicability, are herein
exhibited.,
The main idea embraced in the discovery referred to is, that each
complete system, or sub-system of creation, however great or small, is
resolvable into seven serial parts or elemental degrees, corresponding
to the seven notes of the diatonic scale; that, as composed of such parts,
the systems are arranged side by side, or one above another, as so
many octaves, corresponding to the octaves in music; and that, like
them, each one serves as a general exponent of all the others, whether
on a higher or lower scale.  This idea, with its natural adjuncts, of
which I can not here speak particularly, by harmonizing and unitizing
all natural series and degrees of creation, also clearly illustrates the
~fact that all truths are involved in, and evolved from, one grand central Truth; that they are, indeed, but parts and degrees of that one
fundamental truth, which are ultimated in the various forms of embodiment which compose the sum total of created existence. By pursuing the method of reasoning which this idea unfolds, I have endeavored to make one portion of the system of nature expose the secrets of
another, and caused visible facts and invisible principles to mutually
cast their light upon each other.
That this method might be pursued in the most reliable manner, observations are commenced upon the surface of the system of things,
composed of those objects which are appreciable to the outer senses,
and thence, by facts known particularly to geological and astronomical science, I have endeavored to rationally trace the system of outer
being to its origin, to the primal condition of its materials, and to its
Divine Cause. Assuming, thus, a position at the center of the universal field of thought, where all principles converge to a common
focus, I have endeavored to survey, so far as possible, the vistas of
creative development which thence diverge in all directions, and ta
observe truth in its progressive, serial, and orderly unfoldings, from
center to superfices, from generals to particulars, from causes to effects,
from origins to ultimates.  Finding at this central position, the principles and germs of general unity and systematic order, which must of
necessity be perpetual throughout all subsequent unfoldings, I havm
attempted, through a unitary and systematic order of combined analysis
and synthesis, to show how the system of creation must have been




dQ1                 P   PREFACE.
gradually unfolded into its present form, and to illustrate the harmo.
nious principles, forms, movements, laws, and interactivities which
now characterize it as a whole and in all its parts.
It has thus been the object to draw the bold outlines of a comprehensive primordial philosophy, and to contribute, so far as possible, to the
establ'ihment of a system of thought, in which all truths may be viewed
in tb —:r serial, orderly, and mutually explanatory relations, from generale to particulars-a system whose internal, vitalizing principle will
constantly tend to the absorption of all truths, and the elmination of
all errors, in the same way in which the principles of music constantly
tend to the appropriation of harmonies, and the elimination of discords.
If I have succeeded even to the extent of unfolding, with general correctness, the most general principles of such a philosophy, the sure
guide-boards and indices to something vastly more perfect of the same
kind may be considered as established; and the key to all conceivable
truth, whether relating to nature without, the soul within, the spirit
world above, or to the Divine Author and Governor of all things, may,
in some sense, be considered as in our possession; for no one can essentially err in regard to either of these subjects, so long as he stands in
the light of a system which makes all truths the clear and certain exponents of each other.
I would invite particular attention to that feature of the present
volume, by which the fundamentals of an elevated theology are preserved and established upon the very basis of those facts in science
which have been thought to be rather pantheistic in their intimations.
Following, as it does, in some respects, a comparatively unbeaten
path, this Treatise can not, of course, reasonably claim entire exemption from errors and imperfections.  Such as it is, however, it is respectfully submitted to a candid and discerning public, with the hope
that any criticism it may excite may not be exclusively destructive, but
in some degree also constructive-that it may not only expose errors
and imperfections (which should be faithfully done), but suggest improvements-so that by the combined intelligence of many, some
closer approximations to the truth may be made than I dare presume
to have yet attained, notwithstanding the degree of confidence I ma)
have in the general correctness of the method which has been pur
sued, and the results to which it has conduced.             W. F.
WILLIAMSBURGH, Septemnber 7th, 1852.




CONTEN TS
Pansa. c.............................................................Page 6
CHAPTER I.
THE  COGNIZABLE AND  THE  COGNIZING.
Interior Faculties-Exterior Objects —At Equipoise-Correspondence of Outer and
Inner-Course to be Pursued............................................... 1
CHAPTER II.
DESCENDING  SCALE  OF TERRESTRIAL FORMS.
The Three Kingdoms-Geological Formations —Descent through the Strata-Allwuial,
Diluvial, Tertiary, Secondary, and Transition Formations-Thickness of Strata
-Simplicity of Older Fossils-Primary Rocks-Original Fluidity from Heat-Pres.
ent State of the Earth's Center-Primitive State of the Earth's Materials........ 14
CHAPTER III.
THE  NATURAL  HISTORY  OF THE  SOLAR  SYSTEM  ANALOGICALLY
RETRACED.
Connection of Geology and Astronomy-Common Source of the Planets-Nebular
Theory-its Conception by Herschel-Nebulous Stars-Further Proofs of the Theory
-Oblately Spheroidal Forms and their Signification-Gradation of Densities —Re
sidual Nebulous Matter-" Zodiacal Light"-Comets-Compte's Calculations-Kirkwood's Law-The Conclusion................................................ 22
CHAPTER IV.
THE NATURAL  HISTORY  OF THE  SIDEREAL UNIVERSE ANALOGICALLY  RETRACED.
Stars are Suns-Clusters-The Milky Way-The Heavens Sounded-Clusters beyond
Clusters-Their Shapes and Densities-Gravitation indicated-Proof of other Laws
-Variable Stars-Revolving Double Stars-Immense Periods of some of themUniversality of Revolutionary Motion-Motion of the whole Solar System-Maedler's
Central Sun-Still higher Systems-"Magellan's Clouds"-The System of all Systems-The Infinite and the Infinitesimal-Nebular Theory universally AppliedPrimeval Universal Chaos.........                                31
CHAPTER V.
MATERIAL BEGINNINGS AS POINTING TO A SUPER-MATERIAL CAUSE.
Matter, as Physical Substance, not Eternal-Logical Evidences of a Spiritual CauseThat this Spiritual Cause was Uncaused, Personal, and DivNE — Matter Formed from
Spiritual Substance-Motion not Inherent in Matter-Must have its Origin in Spirit
-IoN GoD..........,...............................................     44




viii                         CONTENTS.
CHAPTER VI.
PRINCIPLES OF UNIVERSAL SYNT-IESIS.
Practicability of a Synthesis-Effects contained in Causes-Material Germs and thei
Developments-Universal Materiality and Infinite Spirit-Reclamation of Science
from Pantheistic Tendencies-Divine Thoughts as Archetypes-Theory of Creation
thence deducible-What Man may know concerning God-The " Seven Spirits of
God"-Creations hence Sven-fold-Universal Correspondences-The Iiarmonial
Scale of Creation, and great Musical Organ-The Timbers and the Temple.... 51
CHAPTER VII.
THE  SEVEN  FUNDAMENTAL  LAWS, AND  THEIR  INTIMATIONS RE
SPECTING THE ORIGIN AND STRUCTURE OF THE UNIVERSE.
Primordial Matter-Origin of Motion-Its Seven Laws-Divine Love, Heat, and Ex
PANSION-Divine Wisdom, Light, and ATTRACTION-Origin of Central Sun-Origin
of Rotary Motion-Emanation-Law of CIRCULATION-Law of AGGREoATION-Con.
centric Nebulous Rings-Their Existing Analogues —Law of SEGREGATION-Segregated Masses-Stellar Clusters formed from these-Confirmatory Celestial Appear.
ances-Immensity of Creation-Analogy of Asteroids-General Formation of Sin.
-Formation of Planets-Summary of Evidences............................... 65
CHAPTER VIII.
THE SEVEN DYNAMIC AGENTS, OR POTENTIAL MEDIA OF NATUREHeat, Light, and Electricity-A Corresponding Trinity Inferred-Proved by Reichen.
bach's Experiments-Flames from Magnets, Crystals, etc.-Seven Colors of their
Light-Explains the Aurora Borealis-Heat Inferred-Ethereal Emanations, and
their Singular Effects-" Odic" Heat, and its Offices-" Odic" Light, and its Offices"Odic" Aura, and its Offices-The Latter a Universal Sympathetic Medium-Its
Identity with "Animal Magnetism"-Medium of Divine Action-Divine Embodi.
menr -Distinction between Nature and God................................... 91
CHAPTER IX.
DEFECTS OF PREVAILING COSMOLOGICAL THEORIES.
Newton's Idea of a Primary Impulse-Of Centrifugal and Centripetal Forces-Difficulties in respect to the Stability of the System-Their Solution-Lifelessness of Newton's System-It is a Dangerous Machine.................................... 113
CHAPTER X.
GROUNDS OF STABILITY AND GENERAL ECONOMY OF THE COSMI
CAL STRUCTURE.
New Theory Propounded-Illustrations-Life of the System-No Vacuity in Space-.
Equilibrium-PReuperative Force, etc................. 1............... 11




CONTENTS.                                  ix
CHAPTER XI.
PARTICULAR  CONSIDERATIONS  CONCERNING  THE  GENESIS  AND
MODUS OPERANDI OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM.
The Solar and the Universal Systems-Origin of Comets-The Zodiacal Light.... 129
CHAPTER XII.
SYNTHETICAL  VIEW   OF THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  EARTH, AND  ITS
GEOLOGICAL FORMATIONS.
Seven Stages of Progress-The CHAOTIC STAGE-Nucleation of Earth and MoonPolar Opposition-Analogy of Binary Stellar Systems-Common Ethereal Envelope
-Effects on Somnambulists, etc.-Common Center-Modified Theory of Tides-SE.OND STAGE-THIRD STAGE-FouiRTH STAGE-Atmospheric Conditions-Early Scenery
Described-FIFTH STAGE — New Red Sandstone-Frost-marks, Bird-tracks, etc.Diversity of Seasons-Marsupials-SIXTH STAGE-Inorganic and Organic ProgressSEVENTH STAGE, and Completion.........1........................ 131
CHAPTER XIII.
THE GEOLOGICAL AND THE MOSAIC REVELATIONS.
Antiquity of our Globe-Alarm of Theologians-Truths must Harmonize-Theology
and Science-Principles of Interpretation-Meaning of "Day"-Work of First Day
-Second Day-Third Day-Fourth Day-Fifth Day-Sixth Day-Sabbatic PeriodCoincidences-Correspondential Classification............................... 148
CHAPTER XIV.
THE MINERAL KINGDOM, OR THE KINGDOM  OF CHEMICAL FORMS.
Its Seven Divisions.......................................................   169
CHAPTER XV.
THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM.
Its Seven Divisions....................................................... 1
CHAPTER XVI.
THE  ANIMAL  KINGDOM.
Its Seven Divisions....................................................... 176
CHAPTER XVII.
THE WHOLE AND ITS PARTS.
Generals and Particulars-Comprehensive Classification-Illustration by Prismatic
Colors-The Temple Erected................1........................... 1
CHAPTER XVIII.
DUALISM OF PRODUCTIVE FORCES, OR THE DIASTOLE AND SYSTOLE
OF NATURE.
the Two Fundamental Forces-Examples in the Cosmical, Mineral, Vegetable, and
Animal Creations-Facts in Embryology-Progress of Organization-The Principle
Generalized-The Diastole and Systole-Ulterior Laws................. 185




XI                           CONTENTS.
CHAPTER XIX.
CIRCLES.
The Principle of the Circle applicable to all Things-Wheel  within Wheels-The
Machine not Self-propelling..................................... 194
CHAPTER XX.
THE DOCTRINE OF DEGREES.
Awedenborg's Philosophy-Degrees "Continuous" and "Discreet"- Improvement
suggested-Facilitates Investigation........:.................... 200
CHAPTER XXI.
THE DOCTRINE OF CORRESPONDENCES.
Foundation and Laws of Correspondences-Importance of the Doctrine....    208
CHAPTER XXII.
THE DOCTRINE OF PROGRESSIVE DEVELOPMENT.
A pending Controversy-Theory of the " VESTIGES OF CREATION"-Arguments for Law.
Creations-The Nebular Hypothesis-Chemistry-Geology-Fossilology-Plant-like
Crystallizations-Arbor Diace-Spontaneous Germination-Transmutation of Vege.
table Species-Entozoa-Animals Developed by Electricity-Rudimentary and Incidental Organs-Analogy of Human Fcetal and Zoological Developments-Theory
Deduced-Opposition Excited-Its Grounds-Aspects of the Question.......... 211
CHAPTER XXIII.
FURTHER VIEW  OF THE  SYSTEM' OF LIVING FORMS, AS SUGGESTING ITS MODE OF DEVELOPMENT.
The Light of our Philosophy-Progression and Retrogression-Embryonic Forms —
Their Progress and Significance-The Great Tree-Genesis of Animal Kingdom 224
CHAPTER XXIV.
LAW AGENCY AND DIVINE AGENCY.
Law Defined-Ite Universality-It is not Force-Archetypes and their Clothing-Human and Divine Builder-Divine Dwelling-places-Creation did not Develop itself
-Diagramatic Illustration-Overthrow of Pantheistic Speculations............ 234
CHAPTER XXV.
PROVIDENCES.
Proridences are Law-governed-Media determine Modes of Divine Action —Recep.
tacles modify Influence-The "Light of the World"-New Beginning Principle —
Miracles-Truths Sacred wherever found.................................. 249
C ONLUsION  OF THE VOL.....................................................




THE MACROCOSM;
OR,
THE  UNIVERSE   WITHOUT.
CHAPTER I.
THE COGNIZABLE AND THE COGNIZING
THE starting point of all thought and investigation with
every human being, is his own interior consciousness. This,
to every one, is the most absolutely fixed of all facts-the
most positively certain of all certainties; and it is hence the
position from  which all other certainties and uncertainties,
probabilities and improbabilities, possibilities and impossibilities, are estimated. But as from our individual centers of
consciousness and intellection, we open our eyes and looK
without us, we find ourselves surrounded by appearances of
various forms and conditions, near and remote, which act
upon our physical, intellectual, and moral natures, and are reacted upon by us; and these active and re-active influences
are, in some sense, at a constant equipoise. There is thus
a universe without, and a universe within us-a universe of
cognizable forms, principles, and conditions, and a uni.yrse




12  THE COGNIZABLE AND  THE  COGNIZING.
of cognizing faculties, the one being related to, and corre.
sponding with, the other. It is a legitimate object and privilege of every inquiring mind to understand, in some degree,
both of these universes; and in order to do this to the fullest
extent, one must investigate each with a constant regard to
its analogies with, and relations to, the other. For the purpose of mapping out, if possible, certain great outlines of
the one united and. harmonious system of truth as embracing
both of these departments, an investigation of this kind is
now proposed.
The forms of the outer universe are included in a few simple and comprehensive classifications, as they are arranged
above or beneath each other in the scale of creation. Those
beneath man, and which at present form the special subject
of investigation, are embraced in the comprehensive divisions
of animal, vegetable, mineral, geological, and astronomical or
cosmical forms. Of these, singularly and in united groups,
together with their more superficial properties, the interior
soul gains a perception through some one or more of the.
sensational channels, known as Touch, Taste, Sight, Hearing,
and Smell.  Proceeding upon the basis of the impressions
received through these avenues of sense, the ratiocinative
faculty becomes the medium of some knowledge of the purposes and mutual relations of these, and of the laws by which
they are governed; and, availing itself of the contributions of
both Sense and Reason, at the same time that it draws, from
its own interior and independent resources, the faculty of
Intuition decides upon their causes, their life forces, and their
more interior significations.
Conforming, therefore, to what, in this work, will be recogtized as the true method of reasoning, it shall be our first




COURSE  TO  BE  PURSUED.                     13
endeavor, oy the aid of Sense, Reason, and Intuition, to trace
analytically the descending scale of creation, from exteriors to
interiors, from effects to causes, from ultimates to origins. If
we can succeed by this process in establishing any reliable
conclusions relative to the first, the elemental, and hence
germinal form  and condition whence sprang this universal
system  of things, we may then, in the light of these conclusions, proceed to retrace our steps synthetically upward
through the successive.eries and degrees of natural unfolding,
and in a general way discover how the system of creation, in
its present completed form, came to exist, and also what are
the prominent principles of its constitution and government.
It is obvious that these combined processes of Analysis and
Synthesis, if correctly pursued, will be far more efficient in
unfolding the principles and laws harmoniously pervading and
governing all parts of the united system  of things, and in
exhibiting the vital relations and sympathies subsisting be.
tween all forms and kingdoms of nature, than either one of
these processes pursued singly, and without reference to the
other.
In pursuing this process of inquiry, strict attention, of
course, shall be paid to facts and principles already firmly
fixed upon a true scientific basis: but so long as these are
made the basis of further reasoning, and the line of investi.
gation is pursued in strict obedience to the established laws
of induction and the intuitions of the interior mind, I shall
not consider myself restricted fiom  exhibiting, and, in some
instances, perhaps, even insisting upon, the conclusions to
which this process may conduct, even though these may, in.
unaly cases, be unknown to the prevailing philosophy.
2




CH APTER II.
DESCENDING SCALE OF TERREST1'IAL FORMS.
AMONG the systems of forms which surround man in the
outer world, that most immediately related to him, and next
below him  in the scale of creation, is the Animal Kingdom.
Immediately beneath this, serving as a substratum on which
it rests, and the source from which it derives its subsistence, is
the Vegetable Kingdom. This, again, rests upon the Mineral
Kingdom, from  which, as the next degree below it in the
scale of existence, it deri es its nourishment and physical
"upport.
Then, beneath all these kingdoms, as an anterior condition
on which their physical developments, as complete systems.
necessarily depend, is the system  of Geological Formations.
These consist of various gradations, or of lower and higher
stratifications, which were developed by degrees, and in successive periods of time. Each geological formation above the
primary, contains petrifactions of plants and animals of a degree of organization corresponding to the degree of progression
in the earth's crust marked by the particular stratification in
which they are found, the lowest organizations being associated
with the most ancient fossiliferous rocks, and the highest with
the most recent, showing a coincident progress in the inorganic
and organic developments.  Let us now trace dow iward the
various geological stratifications, from highest to' lowest, in
order that our minds may, by successive steps, be conducfed




DESCENDING  VIEW.                      16
to the terrestrial conditions which preceded them all, and
served as the material Germ of their unfolding.
If we could find a section of the earth's crust in which all
the geological stratifications existed in their completeness, and
were arranged on horizontal planes, in their natural order of
superposition, and if we should then proceed to dig vertically
downward through the strata, we would first pass through
layers of loam, fine sand, and gravel, of no very great or very
definite thickness. We might find in this deposit the remains of plants and animals of existing species, together with
the remains of man and of his works. This is the most recent,
or what is called the Alluvial Formation.  Next we would
penetrate an irregular deposit of clay, sand, gravel, and small
anld large stones, more or less rounded by friction, and which
is called the Diluvial Formation.  We would next pass
through layers of clay, sand, gravel, marl, etc., in greater or
less degrees of consolidation, portions of which abound with
the remains of animals and plants of species now mostly extinct. These deposits have been roughly estimated as having
the aggregate thickness of about thirteen hundred feet, and
constitute what is called the Tertiary Formation.  Next we
would penetrate through deposits of chalk, and strata of marlstone, ironstone, red sandstone, etc., to the depth of not less
than five thousand feet, exhuming, as we proceeded, the
remains of huge saurians and other animals of a comparatively
low  organization, and which became entirely extinct before
the next superior formation commenced.  These strata, with
their distinctive fossils, are comprised in what is called the
Secondary Formation. We would then descend through a
system of deposites of not less than three thousand feet in
thickness, consisting of strata of limestone, slate, ironstone,
and mineral coal. constituting what is called the Coal F'or




16         OGEOLO'GICAL  FORMATIONS.
mation. We would after this descend, in succession, through
strata of limestone, called the mountain or carboniferous
limestone; through what is called the Old Red Sandstone, and
thence through what is known as the Silurian and Cambrian
systems of deposits. These stratifications, taken together,
have been estimated by Dr. John Pye Smith, as measuring a
thickness of not less than one hundred and thirty thousand
feet. They abound with fossils which, with perhaps slight
exceptions, and these confined to their higher portions, are
exclusively marine; and the character and magnitude of some
of these, and their invariableness of size and constitution as
they occur in all latitudes, show that a high and unvarying
temperature prevailed on all parts of our globe during the
period when they flourished, which could not have depended,
in any great degree, upon the solar rays, but is generally sup.
posed to have been caused by radiations from subterranean
fire, then more intense than at subsequent periods.  This
whole series of stratifications has been called the Transition
Formation, comprising, in the period of its production, those
changes in the physical conditions of the earth's surface, which
were necessary to qualify it for the production of terrestrial
vegetation and the healthy sustenance of air-breathing animals.
This completes the enumeration of the fossiliferous stratifi.
cations, which, according to some estimates, are of an aggregate thickness exceeding twenty miles! These all, including
the remains of the plants and animals which subsisted during
their respective epochs, were quietly deposited at the bottoms
of oceans, estuaries, and lakes, and subsequently consolidated
and petrified, and thus, as faithful records of the natural histo-y of our planet, they have been preserved through the
untold ages which have elapsed from the period of their li-ing
existence until present time!




DISTURBANCES OF  THE  STRATA.                   17
As we have thus proceeded through the descending scale of
geological and paleontological creations, we have seen that
animal and vegetable organisms, whose remains are entombed
in the rocks, become more and more simple.  In the lowest
of the fossiliferous rocks, the principal animal remains are of
the class called the Radiata, which somewhat resemble plants,
and form the connecting link with the Vegetable Kingdom;
while the plants are mainly of a simple species of sea-weed,
called fucoides. It is, however, presumable that more minute,
and still more simple species preceded these, but of which, in
consequence of the delicacy of their texture, all traces have
become obliterated.
Immediately beneath the fossiliferous rocks, we came to
thick strata of clay slate, hornblende slate, mica slate, gneiss,
etc., which contain no organic remains, and are called the
Primary Stratified Rocks.  Immediately beneath these last
strata, lies the Granite, which is unstratified, and appears to
be the original and parent rock, from the comminuted and
pulverized  materials of which, combined with  materials
descending from the atmosphere, and evolved from the central
mass of the earth, all the stratified rocks were subsequently
formed.
Some of my readers, who have not made geology a particular subject of study, may be disposed to inquire whether
any one has thus actually digged into the earth to the depth
of over twenty miles, and ascertained the character and order
of geological formations to be as I have described them? I
answer, no; nor would such a mode of exploration have been
necessary.  Owing to the immense and frequent disturbances
to mhich the earth's crust has been subjected, in different
ages, from the explosive forces of internal fires, all the older
strata have, in various places, been broken, and their upheaved




18           GEOLOGICAL  FORMI  TIONS.
edges have thus been exposed at the surface of the earth, and
may be measured with little difficulty.  And, although in
most, if not all, places, some of the strata are wanting, yeta
by observing a number of the associated links in the chain of
development in one place, and connecting and matching them
with corresponding sections of the chain found in other places,
and which extend higher or lower, the whole series may be,
and has been, re-constructed with approximate accuracy and
certainty.  And by comparing the lithological characters of
rocks, and especially the fossils which they contain, it is
found that the order of development is invariably such as
I have described, and is the  same in all parts of the
world.
It was said that the Granite, which seems to be the oldest
of the rocks, underlying, as it does, all the stratified series, is
itself unstra4ti ed. This is true, also, of its various modifications in the Porphyry, Basalt, and Greenstone.  These rocks,
therefore, could not have been formed, as other rocks were,
by sedimentary deposits at the bottom of oceans and lakes.
On the contrary, they bear unmistakable evidences of having
been originally in -a molten state from the action of intense
heat.  That no links may be wanting in the chain of our
further inductions, some of these evidences require to be
briefly stated, as follows:
It appears that, in; many instances, after thick beds of
stratified rooks, including some of the older members of the
fossiliferous series, were formed immediately over the granitic
rocks, the latter have flown upward, not only in hemispherical
and conical, but sometimes itn sharply angular forms, displacing the superincumbent strata, and producing mountain elevations. In the upheaving effort it has, apparently by injection,
filled up the smallest crevices of the contiguous rooks, free




FUSION  BY  HEAT.                     19
quently bursting through them in various directions, foiming
"dykes" and veins with numerous branches, from an inch to
hundreds of feet in diameter; and, coming up frequently
through the entire thickness- of the- strata, it has flown over
the top, where it has, often in large masses, subsequently con
solidated. These dykes are often found to contain imbedded
fragments of the identical rocks through which they appear
to have forced their passage in their upward movement. The
manner in which these fragments are imbedded, proves to a
demonstration, that the mass by which they are surrounded
was once in a fluid state, and that it subsequently became
solid, as we now find it.
That the: original fluidity of these injected rocks was pro
duced by heat, is evident from the following, among other
considerations: 1. The crystaline character of some of these
rocks is such as could have been produced only by heat.  2.
The chemical effects produced upon the stratified rocks by
contact of the unstratified ones, are similar to those produced
by dykes of recent lava.  3. -The- different unstratified rocks
insensibly pass into each other, and indeed into modern lavas.
Besides, the mineral composition of the rocks, as well as the
form  and position of the dykes, shows that their original
fluidity could not have been the result of water, which is the
only known natural element besides fire, to which their solution could possibly be attributed in any case.
But as the rocks of which we have spoken are primary
rocks, and serve as the basis of all stratified rocks in all places,
and as they must, therefore, have universally prevailed over
the surface of the earth before any other rocks were formed,
if their original state was that of igneous fluidity, it may be
assumed that such was the condition of the whole globethat it was one vast ball of molten lava! This is now genem




20         GEOLOGICAL  FORMATIONS.
ally the opinion of geologists, and is confirmed by the follow.
ing, among other considerations:
1. The earth is not a perfect globe, but an oblate spheroid,
flattened at the poles-the polar diameter being about twentysix miles shorter than the equatorial. This is the form which
it would necessarily have assumed from  the centrifugal force
caused by diurnal revolution, supposing it to have been originally in a fluid state.
2. There is good evidence that our planet is still a vast ball
of liquid fire, surrounded by a thin crust, which, in thickness,
bears no greater proportion to the general mass of the earth,
than the egg-shell bears to the general mass of the egg. From
careful observations which have been made during many
years, upon the temperature of deep mines and the waters of
artesian wells, in various parts of the world, it is found that,
after descending beyond the reach of solar influence, the temperature invariably increases, in allplaces, at the average rate
of about one degree Fahrenheit for every forty-five or fifty
feet of descent. And this rule uniformly holds good to the
greatest depths to which the earth has been penetrated.
Now, assuming fifty degrees as the average temperature at
the surface of the earth, and taking the mean ratio of increase
at one degree for every fifty feet of descent, we should, at this
rate, at a depth of a little more than sixty-five miles, reach a
temperature of seven thousand degrees, which would be sufficient to melt all known rocks. Supposing this state of igneous
fusion to extend from the comparatively thin crust of the earth
on all sides, to the center, we have still a mass of molten lava
of more than seven thousand miles in diameter. If we suppose
this mass to become sometimes agitated in its higher portions
by internal gasses, or by the percolation of water through
fissures in the superincumbent strata, we have a sufficient ex.




T'IE  PRIMITIVE  STATE.                    21
planation of earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, and of the immnense mountain upheavels which have occurred at different
epochs during the geological formations; while, aside from
the hypothesis of internal fusion, the solution of these latter
phenomena would be extremely difficult, if not impossible.
Thus have geologists reasoned, frcm substantial data, concerning the early state of our planet. But, though at this point
the data of retrospective reasonings become less certain than
those which have hitherto guided us, we may presume, as
highly probable, not to say absolutely certain, that not even
this was strictly the primitive state of our planet-that the
matter which composes it was in conditions anterior and germinal even to this; and if we extend backward our chain of
analogical inductions in a direct line, it will lead us to a condition of still more intense heat-heat that would be compatible only with the existence of matter in the form of vapor.
it is, then, to say the least, an hypothesis certainly not unreasonable, that the matter of our earth was once in the state of
igneous gas, fiom  the cooling, and condensation of which it
assumed successively the fluid, and then its present superficially solid state.  But for the present we offer this only as an
hypothesis to which analogies thus far developed, directly
point.  Such further and more conclusive evidences of its
truth, as scientific data now afford, will be incidentally brought
into view as we proceed.




CHAPTER III.
THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM AN.Y
LOGICALLY RETRACED.
ADMITTING that the foregoing hypothesis as to the original
condition of the earth's materials has any foundation in truth,
we find in it the link which connects geology with astronomy.
It must be borne in mind that the earth is only one member
of the great family of planets belonging to the solar system;
and it is fair to presume that the brothers and sisters of the
same planetary family have the same, or a similar, originespecially as they have the same oblately spheroidal form,
and observe the same laws of diurnal and orbitual rovolution.
If the earth, then, was originally in a state of igneous gas, so
(we may suppose) were tkey; and before the incipient pro
cesses of spheroidation commenced, the materials of all of
them may have commingled, and probably did commingle,
together in one undistinguishable mass.
Though this hypothesis of an original gaseous state of the
earth and planets rests upon a foundation of its own (being a
portion of the chain of analogous developments prolonged
directly backward from  the. links of substantial geological
facts), it is precisely in accordance with the nebular theory of
the origin of worlds and systems, which theory also rests upon
independent grounds of reasoning. As a conviction of the
general truthfulness of this theory is important as a basis of
ulterior ideas tc be presented in this treatise, the patient




RESOLUTION  OF  NEBULE.                  23
attention of the reader is solicited while we briefly explain
its nature: and unfold a summa-ry of the evidences on which
it is founded.
The idea that nebule, or loose masses of fiery vapor, which
seemed to be floating in the depths of immensity, might form
the materials out of which nature elaborated suns and planets,
was originally propounded as a conjecture, by Sir William
Herschel; but it was subsequently brought into more definite
and tangible form by Laplace,. Comte, Nichol, and others.
The theory supposes that loose masses of nebulous vapor, at
first without definite form or movement, gradually assumed,
by virtue of gravitation, a regular spheroidal and rotating form,
lightest at the circumference, and gradually increasing in density toward the center, at which point the greatest density is
attained. It supposes that such forms were the original forms
of suns —that the substance of these, in this diffused state,
originally extended from their present condensed, solar spheres,
to the outermost limits of the planetary systems which now
revolve about them; and that by the combined processes of
rotation and further condensation, successive and concentric
rings were formed on the outer limits of the nebulous disks,
of which we have a faint illustration in the rings of Saturn.
These rings, it is thought, subsequently became broken up,
when the matter composing them naturally agglomerated into
spheres, which, by an analogous process of condensation and
evolution of rings, produced planets and their satellites.
It is but just to remark that many of the supposed nebulce
which Herschel thought might form the materials of future
suns and systems, have subsequently, by the application of
powerful telescopes, and especially that of Lord Ross, been
resolved into stars, apparently so close together as to cause
the general hazy appearance which they present when viewed




24        THE  NEBULAR  HYPOTHESIS.
with the naked eye, or through a telescope:,f low power,
It is reasonably suspected that many of the still unresolved
nebulae might yield to a still higher telescopic power, were
such available to science and art; and acting upon this sup.
position, some few astronomers have abandoned the nebular
theory, in which they previously believed, and attempted to
prove its impossibility. But in reference to this change of
astronomical faith from  such a cause, Professor Michell
forcibly remarks, that "Herschel only adopted the [nebular]
theory after he had resolved many hundred of the nebulae into
stars; and, if there ever existed a reason for accepting tho
truth of this remarkable speculation, that reason has been
scarcely affected in any degree, by recent discoveries."
The phenomenon of nebulous stars, especially, still remains
in its unimpaired force, as an argument for the probable truth
of the theory in question. These stars are spherical bodies,
bright in the center, from which there is a gradual shading
off into undistinguishable dimness as the circumference is ap
proached. They exist in all degrees of apparent concentration,
from a diffused blur with a no very distinct nucleus, to a well
defined star surrounded by a haze. What can these bodies be
but masses of primeval matter, in various degrees of pro.
gression between their original, or most chaotic state, and that
of fully developed suns and planets?  But these are precisely the various conditions which the nebular theory supposes to take place during the different and progressive
stages of the process by which suns and planets are ultimately
formed.
A brief summary of the further proofs of the nebular theory
may be presented as follows:
1. It has already been remarked that the earth is an oblats
spheroid, flattened at the poles and bulged at the equator.




FORM   OF  PLANETS.                      25
This same fact is also observed in relation to other planets,
the outer ones, owing to the greater rapidity of their rotatory
motions, being much more bulged and flattened than the inner
ones. To the writer it is not a little surprising that this form
of planetary bodies has not, of itself, established among
astronomers the universal conviction that these bodies were
formed by a contraction of their materials from a previously
diffused state. Such, it appears, must necessarily have been
the case, if their superior equatorial diameter had, in its origin,
any connection with the centrifugal force produced by rotatory
motion.  For if the materials of the planet, while in an
originally globular form, had commenced being thrown outwaard
at the equator, by the centrifugal force generated by revolution, no known counter-force could have prevented them
from being all, or nearly all, thrown outward, and continually
farther and farther from  the center, until the planet would
have lost its identity. Especially would this have been the
result, if the original velocity of revolution had continued un.
diminished.  For it is evident that the farther a particle, or
collection of particles, is thrown from an axis around which
they, in a given period, may revolve, the greater is the centrifugal force generated by the rotation, and hence the greater
is its tendency to fly off still farther; while, on the other
hand, the farther a particle is thrown from  a center of
attraction, the less becomes the attractive or centripetal force
to retain it from flying off still farther.
The forces which produced the bulged form of planets at
the equator are undoubtedly the same as those which produced the rings of Saturn.  Now, the rings of Saturn com.
plete a revolution in 10 hours 32 minutes and 15 seconds,
vhile the primary itself revolves in 10 hours 16 minutes and
I second, or in a period of only 16 minutes and 14 seconds
3




26         THE  NEBULAR  HYPOTHESIS.
less. If, therefore, there was originally generated, by rotatory
motion, at Saturn's equator, an amount of centrifugal force
sufficient to throw off particles to the present position of the
rings of that body, certainly the immensely increased centrifui
gal force generated by the revolution of those rings in. about
the same period, would have thrown the same particles still
farther, and would probably have dissipated them into chaosespecially as the attractive force of the primary, at that distance, must have exerted considerably less influence upon
them.
The same reasoning applies with equal force to that ring, or
circle of attached matter, which rises above the line of sphericity at Saturn's equator, and also at the equators of other
planets, and of the earth. The acting forces are of the same
nature, and bear similar relations to each other in both places,
the only difference being a difference in the degrees of intensity with which they act in the different positions.
These considerations show that in all stages of the process
by which planetary bodies were formed, the attractive, contractive, or centripetal force, had decided predominance over the
centrifugal.  Supposing the two forces to have always acted
together after both became established, the centrifugal force,
it is true, must have always restrained and modified the
intensity of the centripetal, in the direction of the plane of
rotation, but could never throw farther into space a particle
which the centripetal or attractive, had succeeded, in defiance
of the opposing, force, in bringing from  a greater to a less
distance from the center.
The bulged form of the earth and other planets, therefore,
could not have been produced by a throwing cut of particles
at the equator, but rather by a drawing in of particles from
the poles, where the attrac ive force was comparatively uure




GRADATION'  DF  DENSITIES.                 27
strained by the centrifugal; while this latter force, attaining
its maximum. at the equator, meets and wards off the. gravi
tating particles in their rush toward the center, and thus the
two forces finally settle into an exact equipoise, of which the
oblately spheroidal form  of the planet is an equally exact
expression.
These considerations seem  to sufficiently prove that the
earth (before shown to have been originally in a state of
igneous, if not gaseous fluid) was formed by the predominating force of attraction, and hence contraction, acting upon
materials in a rarer state, and reducing them to their present
dense form. The attractive and contractive operation must,
of course, have proceeded through a progressive series of
analogous stages, which somewhere must have had a begin.
ning; and we can not conceive of any possible beginning short
of the greatest possible diffusion-a state of diffusion which,
originally applying to the materials of all planets, must have
brought them  all into the form  of one common vapory
mass. 
Though this argument, in proof of the nebular theory,
seems hitherto to have generally escaped the notice of
astronomical writers, it is one which, nevertheless, deserves to
be pondered and borne in mind.
2. Another argument for the same theory, is derived from
the regular gradations of densities of planets, from innermost
to outermost. Thus it is stated, on the basis of mathematical
calculations, that Mercury must be about the weight of so
much lead; Venus is nearly six times the weight of so much
water; the Earth, as a whole, is four and a half times the
weight of water; Mars is a little over three times the weight
of water; Jupiter is a small fraction over the weight of so
tnuch water; Saturn is less than half that specific weight, ot




28        THE  NEBULAR  HYPOTHESIS.
about the weight of so much cork; and Herschel manifests a
corresponding decrease of density. This regular gradation in
the specific densities of the planets, in the order of their
occurrence, from innermost to outermost, is precisely what it
should be, supposing that they were all formed by the operations of a common law, from  an original sphere of fluid
matter, which must have been most dense near the center,
and most rare on its outer extremities.
There is a similar relation between the distances of the
different planets; for, proceeding outward from Mercury, each
successive planet (including the asteroids as equivalent to one
planet) is about double the distance of the previous planet
from the sun. This curious relation of distances seems, in
like manner, to argue their production by a common cause,
and by the operations of a common law, of which the only
explanation yet found seems to be given in the nebular
theory.
3. If the theory in question is admitted as the true one, it
might accordingly be supposed, that after the evolution of
Mercury, which is the planet nearest the sun, there would still
be a residuum of nebulous or planetary matter in an unformed
state, surrounding the more dense mass of the sun. Accord.
ingly there actually appears to be an extensive mass of attenuated matter surrounding the sun, and is sometimes visible
immediately after sunset, or before sunrise, as a conic, luminous streak, projected from the horizon in the direction of the
path of the sun, and which is called the " Zodiacal light,"
4. There are still many planets, or wandering celestial
bodies, in a nebulous state, in which state they are called
"comets."  These appear to have been formed from  a re.
siduum of attenuated matter, after the agglomeration of the
denser materials took place




KIRKWOOD  S  LAW.                           29
5. M. Comte, of Paris, has proved, according to principles
by which periods of rotation maintain a relation to the mass
of the given rotating body, that the sidereal year of each planet
actually corresponds to the period in which the sun must have
rotated on his axis, supposing his mass to have extended to
the orbits of such planets; and he also ascertained that the
periods of rotation of the primary planets with their mass, in
a state of vapor, extending to the orbits of their satellites,
must, in like manner, have corresponded with the present orbitual periods of those satellites.
6. A new  planetary law  has recently been discovered by
Mr. Kirkwood, which seems to have an important bearing on
the question at issue.  This law, as I understand it, is, that
the square of the number of rotations of any given planet in its
year, is to the square of the number of rotations of any other
planet in its year, as the cube of the diameter of the sphere
of attraction of the first planet, is to the cube of the diameter
of the sphere of attraction of the second planet.*  Thus, for
instance, the number of rotations of the earth in its year, bears
a definite relation to the quantity of matter (or the amount of
attractive force) in the Earth, in Mars, and in Venus.
Here, then, is an indication of another relation existing between the forces and movements of the different planets, so
definite as to preclude every reasonable supposition that it
came by chance, and a relation which, in common with facts
before noticed, seems to refer all the planets to a common
parentage, and common law of production, which is accounted
for only by the nebular theory.  Certainly so many remark* The sphere of attraction of a planet, is a circle whose radius is determined by the
point between two contiguous planets in conjunction, where an object would be attacted to neither of them, but would be exactly poised between the two contending
forces. For an account of Kirkwood's discovery, see Sillilan's American Journal of
3cience, Vol. ix. Second Series, p. 395.




30        THE  NEBULAR  HYPOTHESIS.
ably concurrent facts, pointing to the same conclusion as to
the origin of our planetary system, can not reasonably be set
down as so many mere fortuitous coincidences.
Finally, the theory in question is the only one which does
not either involve inexplicable and inconceivable mysteries, or
suppositions totally unfounded in any of the known laws of
causation. This theory, on the other hand, commends itself
to human reason and intuition, without being encumbered with
any serious difficulties; and, as it is confessedly unphilosophical to look for an explanation of a phenomenon without the
sphere of known natural laws, when a full explanation may
be found within the sphere of those laws, the nebular theory
may be considered as established, at least until it is invalidated
by further disc veries.




CHAPTER IV.
THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE SIDEREAL UNIVERSI
ANALOGICALLY RETRACED.
FROM contemplations of our own solar system, let us now
extend our observations and reflections into the immeasurable
realms of the stellar universe beyond, and see what gleams of
light we can obtain in reference to the natural history of that
grand System  of systems, of which our own congeries of
worlds forms, as it were, but an atom.  Facts and analogies
which need not here be particularized, have established the
universal belief among astronomers that the so-called "fixed"
stars are but so many remote suns shining to other systems.
These are not distributed equally through the celestial spaces,
as though they had been scattered at random from an Omnipotent hand;but they are arranged in distinct clusters, or firmaments, so called, which have little or no apparent connection
with each other. Telescopic observations have proved that
the bright girdle called the "Milky Way," which surrounds
our heavens, is only a grand congeries of stars, so remote, and
owing to their remoteness fiom us, apparently so near to each
other, that their intermingling rays reach us only in the appearance of a confused whitish light.  Of this vast zone of
shining orbs, all the less remote stars, including our own sun,
are members, their varying directions being, in a measure, the
result of differences in their distances firom the point of observa.
ton, and hence, of the different angles at which they are viewed




32          THE  SIDEREAL  UNIVERSE.
Not only have the relative distances of various portions of
this grand cluster been proximately determined, but the spaces
beyond h.ave been sounded.  The process by which these resuits have been accomplished, may be easily brought within
the reader's comprehension by the following illustrations.
Suppose any given object is removed from a point of observation to a distance at which it is barely discernible by the
naked eye.  Now, a telescope which has the power of penetrating space to ten times the distance that can be reached
with the naked eye, would show that same object, witn the
same degree of distinctness, ten times as far off. Take, then,
a telescope of twenty degrees of space-penetrating power, and
remove the object twenty times its first distance, and it will
still be seen with equal distinctness and apparent nearness.
And so also of still larger telescopes and correspondingly
farther distances.
Now, when we gaze into the heavens on a clear night, with
the naked eye, we observe, in any given portion of the Milky
Way a distinct number of stars, the faintest of which are
barely discernible.  If the astronomer, then, takes a telescope
of ten powers, as compared with the unassisted eye, and surveys the same field, all the stars before observed will appear
with increased brilliancy, besides which many more will be
visible, the remotest and faintest of which may be presumed
to be ten times as far off as the farthest ones which previously
appeared.  He then takes a still larger telescope, and still
more objects appear, the remotest of which may, in like manner, be presumed to be situated in a relative depth of space
proportioned to the increased degree of telescopic power. Sc
correspondingly of a larger, and still larger, instrument, until
one is obtained which reveals no more stars, but only shows
those in the same field of view, in increased brightness. The




THE  HEAVENS SOUNDED.                      33
space-penetrating power is again augmented, and still no more
stars are brought into view.  The observer, therefore, legiti
mately concludes that he has reached the outer limits of the
great cluster to which we belong, and is now traversing the
blank void beyond.
But is he to conclude that he has sounded the system of
stellar creations to its remotest depths, and that beyond these
boundaries, there are no more vestiges of the Creator's
energy  Let him augment the optical power but one degree
more, and perhaps in the dim and awful distance he will behold a faint and scarcely discernible speck or streak of whitish
light.  In the excitement of irrepressible curiosity, he hastens
to direct to the spot the largest telescope the observatory
affords, and that same whitish spot glows into myriads of beautiful stars-another galaxy or Milky Way-another firmament, perchance, displaying its glories to its own unnumbered
worlds, and pealing its own notes of silent harmony, respon.
sive to the movements of all kindred systems!
As by the indefatigable exertions of the two Herschels, th
heavens have been swept by the' telescope in all directions,
more than two thousand five hundred of these isolated stellar
systems have been brought to light, some smaller and some
larger than the grand cluster in the midst of which our owr
sun and system are situated.
Let us now look at some of the phenomena which these vast
starry congregations present, and from which inference may
be drawn as to whether, in regard to their internal structure
anl laws, and hence their modes of origin, they have any thing
in common witn our own solar system, and whether the analogies of one may be applied in unfolding the mysteries of the
other.
And the first thing that naturally attracts attention in such




34          THE  SIDEREAL  UNIVERSE.
an investigation, is the shapes and apparent relative densities
of these starry clusters. By telescopic measurements of relative distances in relative directions, accomplished in the man
ner before illustrated, Sir William Herschel decided that the
great cluster, of which our own sun is a member, and of which
the greater portion of stars, owing to their immense distances,
seem  to rest on one general plain, and surround us in the
great zone called the "Milky Way," is of an irregular form,
approaching that of a circle, but thick in the middle, and thin
toward the edges, in one of which there is a horizontal split
or opening. Other clusters are of all conceivable forms, but
of these forms the round, or oblately spheroidal, most prevails.  Even in elongated, curved, angular, and branching
clusters, there are often apparently several centers of incipient rotundity. Generally these centers are well defined, and
toward them  the stars, though with an inappreciable motion,
are apparently flowing from all directions, becoming thicker
and more compressed as they approach, and being thinner,
and gradually shading off into invisibility, at more distant
removes.
The general uniformity in the appearances of these spherical
aggregations, aRd espacil!ly of their comparative denseness in
the center, which thcnce gradually and regularly diminishes,
in all directions, toward the circurmference, shows that theil
aggregation is governed by some grand law; and what can
this be but the familiar law of Gravitation-that identical law
which, in the same form of action, is so potent in our own
system, giving sphericity to every collection of fluid particles,
from tlhos which compose the planet, to those which form the
dew-drop   It is gravifying to find in those remote creations;sch distinct indications of a property which is possessed in
conmmon with our owl sytnem, and which binds the nearest




VASIABLE  STARS.                     35
and remotest forrs in the celestial spaces, in one comnnon
bond of sympathy and brotherhood.
But the discovery of the law of gravitation, as applicable to
these distant worlds as well as to the orbs of our cwn planetary
system, naturally engenders the presumption that the whole
series of laws and general operations with which gravitation is
here necessarily connected, applies to them also, with little or
no modification. And a further inquiry will disclose celestial
phenomena which tend greatly to strengthen this presumption,
if not to convert it into a positive conviction.
Contemplating our own solar system, we are struck with
the fact that revolutionary motion every where prevails. The
planets are constantly whirling upon their axes, and performing their grand orbitual circuits in the heavens. The sun himself rotates upon his own center, once in about twenty-seven
days. This revolution has been ascertained by the periodical
variation of the position of spots on his disk.
But several of the stars of our firmament exhibit a phenomenon similar to this, from which our sun's rotatory motion
has been inferred. That is, they alternately, and in regular
periods, give forth a greater and a less degree of Jight, as
though they had a brightest side and a side of a less degree of
brightness, which were alternately, and at regular intervals,
presented to us by a revolution upon their axes. This is one
of the facts which have confirmed astronomers in the otherwise
very natural presumption, that the stars are suns like our own,
and whose apparent diminutiveness is only owing to their
immense distances.
There are also many instances in which the varying relative
positions of two or more stars are such as to indicate a revolution around each other, and around a common center.  Some
of these stars have vart periods, as, for instance, the double




36         I[IIE  SIDEREAL  UNIVERSE.
star Castor, whose constituents revolve around each other in
215 years; Gamma, in the constellation of the Virgin; whose
constituents revolve in 628 years; Gamma of the Lion, whose
constituents revolve in 1200 years; and Mizar and Aleor, in
the tail of the Great Bear, which, according to Professor
Nichol, would probably consume not much less than the inconceivable period of 190,000 years in completing a single
revolution around each other! Others accomplish their revolutions in much less than 100 years.
By establishing the fact that rotatory and orbitual motions
are experienced by many of the stars, the extreme probability
is at the same time established on analogical grounds, that
similar motions are experienced, with, perhaps, some modifications, by all stars. We are, at least, not without strong,
not to say demonstrative evidence, that motions of this kind
are going on in the celestial spaces, on a much grander scale
than any we have yet described.  By comparing the positions
of the stars in the modern heavens with their positions as represented in ancient catalogues, Sir William  Herschel found
that in one quarter of the firmament, they were apparently
drawing nigher together, while in the opposite quarter they
were apparently receding from  each other. To account for
these changing appearances, Herschel conjectured that our own
sun, with all his retinue of planets, was moving in some grand
path toward a point in the constellation Hercules. After
much doubt and  many critical examinations, subsequent
investigators have succeeded in establishing this opinion on
an indubitable basis.
But in the hands of A'gelander, Struve, Peters, and especially of Maedler, the theory of this solar motion was made to
assume still more definite form. Inferring, with others, from
analogy, that the path described by our luminary must be the




MAEDLER' S CENTRAL  SUN.                    31
curve of an orbit around some remote center, the latter of
these astronomers betook himself to the examination of
ancient catalogues of stars, with a view to ascertain if there
was any discoverable district in the heavens where all the apparent motions of the stars were such as to comply with the
conditions which must necessarily characterize a central region.
Such a district was found; and the star ALCYONE, in the
cluster Pleiades, was decided to be its center. Around this
point, therefore, our own sun, and the whole firmamental
cluster to which it belongs, were supposed to be revolving
with immense velocity, in orbits coincident with- the general
plane of the Milky Way, and requiring no less than eighteen
millions of years to accomplish a single revolution!
Whatever diversity of opinion there may exist relative to
the legitimacy of the conclusion of Maedler, which locates the
center of alleged orbitual motion at the point occupied by the
star Alcyone, I believe it is now generally, if not universally
admitted by astronomers, that such orbitual motion does exist
around some center, not very remote from that region.
The evidence upon this point greatly strengthens the
analogy which, of itself, points to the conclusion that those
isolated globular and other clusters of stars, situated in the remoter realms of space, and which appear to have been aggregated by internal power of gravitation, are also scenes of perpetual rotatory and orbitual motion.  Did not these motions,
with their resultant centrifigal forces, exist to countervail, in
some degree, the force of internal gravity, those firmamental
clusters would doubtless exist in much more dense masses
than those in which they now appear.
But if this conclusion thus approximates to a certainty,
there are facts which point to a still more extended appli.
cation of its principles. In the southern heavens, and quite
4




88         THE  SIDEREAL  UNIVERSE.
detached from  the Milky Way, are two bright spots which
southern navigators have designated by the name of " Magel.
lan's Clouds."  During his astronomical residence at the Cape
of Good Hope some years ago, Sir John Herschel, by the aid
of his twenty feet telescope, succeeded in analyzing these objects, and found that each of them, and especially the larger
one, was a system of frmaments, combining many extensive
clusters into one! Of these, as systems, analogy would
authorize us to predicate internal gravity and general and particular rotatory and orbitual motions. But the magnitude of
this complex unity, however inconceivably great, may, after
all, be but an atom in the immensity of ulterior creations to
which it belongs; and, on the bases of its analogies, we may
rise to the ideal of a still higher system-a system which may
be supposed to embrace in its structure all the firmamental
clusters, nebula, and systems of systems heretofore known to
telescopic observers, and countless more besides.
Nor is the idea of such an all-comprehensive system of systems without the support of facts, as well as of analogies. It is
said that although nebule, resolvable and irresolvable, appear
in every quarter of the heavens, they appear in greatest
abundance in a comparatively narrow zone which encircles
the heavens, cutting the plane of the Milky Way at right
angles. This arrangement goes far to establish the idea of a
Frimament of firmaments, a Galaxy of galaxies, in which all
sidereal creations which have come within the reach of the
most powerful telescopes, are bound together in one common
structure, brought within the sphere of the same common laws,
and made to observe throughout, similar rotatory and orbitual
motions with those which prevail in our own solar sys.
tem, which latter may be considered as an epitome and
representative of the whole!




THE  GRIEAT  CENTER.                     39
We have thus seen that wherever the wonders of the
celestial spaces have been distinctly unfolded, the revolution
of satellites around planets, of planets around suns, of suns
around still greater suns, of systems around still greater
systems, of clusters around still greater clusters, is revealed
as an omniprevalent law. And seeing the complete unity of
plan and harmony of operations so far as we have gone —seeing the affectionate co-relations which are exhibited betweeu
molecules, and worlds, and systems, and all stellar congregations, with all their included parts-may we not prolong
the chain of analogy one link farther, and conclude that they
all, together with the myriads of similar creations'which dwell
in depths of space which no optical power can ever penetrate,
owe the bond of unity which connects them, and the harmonial influence which wields them  in their mighty courses,
to one grand Source of central power, whose attractions they
all implicitly obey, and from  whose genial radiations all
receive their life?  If the links of the analogical chain have
been found to closely adhere through all the labyrinths of
every realm  of being whose existence may be verified by
other processes, who shall begin to distrust that chain for the
first time, after it has conducted us safely thus far?
Though the hypothesis of a common Pivot and Center of
gravity of the whole universe may not, in the nature of
things, be susceptible of an ocular or complete mathematical
demonstration, yet there is interior evidence-I had almost
said even the evidence of intuition  that it is true in sorme
form; and  believe this ide  is now extensively received as
an article of astronomical faith.
Let no one suppose that amid these inconceivable distances and magnitudes, the fixed principles of reasoning lose
their validity and become untrustworthy.  It is true that in




40         THE  SIDErEAL  UNIVERSE.
these giddy flights, the imagination and conceptive powers
become lost and bewildered; but so they do, in a great degree, before we have traveled beyond the immediate neighborhood of our own mundane sphere. The distance fiom the
earth to our own sun is measured by millions of miles; and
even this, as one of the shortest of astronomical distances, the
magination can but faintly conceive. The distance from the
sun to the stars is measured by millions of diameters of the
earth's orbit; the distance from firmament to firmament is
measured by millions of interstellar spaces; the distance
even of the most interior firmament from the great Center of
all centers, may, in the efforts of the imagination, be measured
by millions, or even billions of inter-firmamental spaces; and
the circumference of the whole Grand Structure, may even
transcend all human conceptions of infinitude; yet form,
locality, relative position, center, circumference, and hence
limits, must exist as absolutely as they exist in tie smallest
spherule of matter visible to the human eye; and to the view
of an absolutely infinite Being, the whole Universe of universes may be of comparative dimensions not greater than a
single grain of sand! And if Ehrenberg could, by the aid of
the microscope, descry a whole animal kingdom  in a single
drop of water, each individual of the myriads of whose animated forms must have had eyes, teeth, stomach, intestines,
and all the appurtenances of a complete anatomical structure,
governed by unvarying physiological laws; and if by the
same means he could demonstrate that a particular geological
deposit, fourteen feet thick and miles in extent, was made ui[
almost exclusively of the skeletons of animals, forty-one bil!
lions of which could exist in a single cubic inch, then we mlay
rest assured that the principles of nature exist in no greater
completeness, and in no higherl r more inconceivable compli




A  GENERALIZATION.                        41
cations, in infi4.tes than they do in infinitesimals. We may,
then, without crowding out any natural principle, or doing
violence to any just method of reasoning, reduce the scale of
the universe, in our imagination, to dimensions convenient to
be contemplated on all sides, and follow out our reasonings
with ease and comparative certainty respecting its properties,
forces, Ilaws, internal arrangements, and progressive processes
of formlation, from beginnings to ultimates.
Considering, then, all general natural principles as applying
equally to greatest and to smallest analogous cosmical forms.
and to the whole universal structure as well as to its individual parts, we proceed to another branch of the chain of
analogical reasoning, which will speedily conduct us to the
primal condition of the substance from which the material universe and all it contains, was organized.
The nebular theory of planetary and solar formations, as
applying to our solar system, has been shown to rest on so
many probabilities as seemingly to justify the undoubting
conviction of its truth.  But if this theory is admitted as applicable to our own solar system, its applicability to formations in the sidereal realms will, after the foregoing system of
universal analogies has been traced out, scarcely be disputed,
especially as it was in the sidereal realms that the first facts
were observed which seemed to intimate its truth. And if all
planetary and solar agglomerations originated from previously
diffused nebulous masses, then, in view-of the unbroken chain
which, we have seen, binds all systems together as one system,
the following statement is its own sufficient proof:
As the satellites were formed from the same original nebulous mass fiom which the planets originated, so a prior state
of that mass was a state of unity and interdiffusion with the
mass which comrosed the sun.  The materials of that mass,




42         THE  SIDEREAL  UNIVERSE.
in like manner, were previously conne(,ted and interdlTfised
with the mass which formed the more interior sun around
which it revolves, and out of which were formed all such other
ultimate suns as, in common with our own, now revolve around
the same center. The substance of all suns and systems composing our firmament, may be supposed also to have been
previously interdiffused in one amorphous, undistinguishable
mass. So the substance of the suns and systems of all other
firmaments, together with the substance of the great central
sphere of universal attraction which binds and subordinates
them  all, was, in like manner, in an original nebulous and
formless state; and the whole universal substance was then
but one substance, so highly attenuated and expanded as to be
without definite forms, divisions, or compartments  an indefinable, universal MONAD! In short, as our own solar system is a child of the great Universal System, and is formed in
the image of its parent, the primal condition of the materials
of one, must have been precisely analogous to that of the
other; and if the solar system germinated from an original
nebule, so did the system of the whole universe.
But in thus unraveling the complexity of all material formations, and tracing them  all to an original, unitary, and
chaotic state, we at the same time unravel the complexity of
motion, and not only arrive at its original and simplest form,
but at astate in which it must necessarily have had no forma state in which its principles were as chaotic as original matter itself, or, what is the same thing, at a state in which no
established motion existed.
We have thus arrived by an easy, and, admitting our pre.
mises, an apparently certain, process, at the very root of the
Tree of universal material creations-at the great unitary
Germ of all firmaments, suns, systems, and worlds, with the




ANALYSIS  AND  SYNTHESIS.                     43
mineral, vegetable, animal, and human forms which dwell
upon their surfaces. If there has been any error in the foregoing reasonings, it has probably been an error in. the form
rather than in the principles of our conclusions, and the error
therefore does not essentially effect the main object contem
plated in this disquisition.  But of the truth of the position to
which we have arrived by this analytical process, from  ulti
mates to origins, or from effects to causes, additional evidences
will hereafter incidentally occur as we proceed, by an opposite
and synthetical process, from  causes to effects. The two pro.
cesses will serve as mutual correctives of each other; and by
the aid of both united, we hope to somewhat enlarge our
truthful conceptions in relation to those principles, laws, and
operations of the universe without, which naturally lie beyond
the province of mathematics and ocular demonstration, but
which, nevertheless, have their counterparts, representatives,
and exponents in the universe within.




CHAPTER V.
MArERIAL BEGINNINGS AS POINTING  TO A
SUPER-MATERIAL CAUSE.
HAVING thus traced the system of material creation through
a series of anterior conditions, comprehending periods which,
perhaps, no assemblage of arithmetical figures could express,
to a state in which the materials of all worlds, systems, and
firmaments, were in a condition of diffused attenuated vapor,
with no definite or established motions, the inquiry next
arises, Was even this the absolutely primitive state of material
things?  Did matter ever exist in any form or forms previous
to this state of chaos? or, if not, was it, in this state, eternal 1
or, if not absolutely eternal either in the state of forms or of
chaos, whence and how did it originate?
The idea that matter ever existed in any mundane forms
previous to this, and became subsequently dissolved, not only
has no analogy to support it, but seems to be contradicted by
an established law of nature. I refer to that law by which
amorphous or chaotic matter in motion has the general and
predominant tendency to assume and multiply forms. It is
not denied that motion of particles tends also to the dissolution of material forms, but that dissolution is always subservient to immediate and higher recombinations. The kingdom
of motion and forms, therefore, have ever been, and still are
(and we may confidently believe ever will be), making farther
and farther encroachments upor. the realms of chaos and




SUPER-MA TERIAL  CAUSE.                    4-5
inertia; and whatever is conquered by the former can never
be fully reconquered by the latter.  And this is because the
former power is positive, and the latter is negative.
If matter, therefore, was ever in a state of mundane or or
ganized forms previous to the chaotic state now under contem
plation, it must have for ever continued in that same general
state, and even to progressively unfold the tendencies by which
its forms were assumed; and no natural power could have
brought it back again to the formless state. The chaotic or
nebulous state in which we have seen it must necessarily have
existed at the beginning of the cosmical creation, may, therefore, be inferred to be its primitive state.
But that matter, even in this indefinite state, was absolutely
eternal, is an idea which analogy, so far as it speaks upon the
subject, distinctly contradicts.* The material of each form
and kingdom  in nature may be traced backward firom highest
to lowest developments, immediately beyond which latter it
loses itself in a more rudimental creation, which serves as its
groundwork.  Thus the animal kingdom, traced downward to
its lowest and simplest forms, finally loses its character as
animal; and merges into the vegetable; the vegetable, in like
manner, finally loses itself in the mineral; the mineral or
crystalline forms pass downward into the general amorphous
mass of planetary matter; planetary matter may be traced
downward through more rudimental geological conditions, and
through igneous liquid, and aeriform fluid, until its distinction
is lost in planetary nebula; this, in imagination, may be
traced, in like manner, until it is lost in the general gaseous
mass of the uncondensed sun; and so we may proceed, in retrograde steps, until we find the materials of all forms and
* let it be remarked, once for all, Ihat by " matter," I mean physical substance in
tontradistinetion to spiritual substance.




~46       MATERIAL  DEGINNINGS  AND
kingdoms are lost in the great common mass of original cha,
otic matter.
But in thus tracing back all forms and kingdoms to their
respective and immediate predecessors, we at the same time
trace backward the one and analogous kingdom of Universao
Matter as such (which includes all the other kingdoms), from
its highest to its lowest forms; and as there is a point beneath
which all kingdoms lose their identity, and their essences are
merged in an anterior kingdom, so analogy would seem to indicate that there is a prior point of attenuation and refinement
at which the great kingdom of Matter also loses its character
as matter or physical substance, and thus that it originated as
matter, from a prior source, as did all its included sub-kingdoms.  This idea would appear in greater clearness and force
of probability, if contemplated in the light of the doctrine of
Series, Degrees, and Correspondences, hereafter to be brought
into view; and it will receive incidental confirmation as we
proceed to consider the origin of Motion.
If (contrary to an extreme probability, not to say absolute
certainty, established in previous remarks) the hypothesis is
still insisted upon, that the chaotic matter of which this uni
verse is composed, consists of the dissolved elements of a previous material universe, the question will still arise, Whence
originated the matter composing that universe?  And so we
may extend our inquiries back through a thousand imagined
pre-existent universes; but the mind must come to a restingplace somewhere.  It is logically just as certain that there was
t first universe (if we are mistaken in supposing that this is
the first), as it is that there was a first vegetable form or class
of forms, which latter proposition is positively demonstrated
by facts in geology.  And after we have gone back in imagination, to an absolutely first universe, the question will still




SUPER-MATERIAL  CAUSE.                    47
return unanswered, Whence originated the physical substance
composing that universe?
As theline of progression traced backward necessarily leads
to a beginning of the system  of developments to which it
applies, so the line of causation, inversely traced, necessarily
leads to a First Cause, which is itself uncaused, though containing in itself the elements of all causes, and hence all existences.  And as the whole Animal Kingdom, for example,
necessarily rests upon the basis of a prior and immediately
corelated and correspondent Kingdom-the Kingdom of Vegetation-so the whole Kingdom of universal materiality, so to
speak, as necessarily rests upon the basis of a prior and immediately corelated and correspondent Kingdom.  This Kingdom, then, must be ultra-physical, in the same way as the
Vegetable Kingdom is ultra-animal; and it must differ in nature and constitution from the whole Kingdom  of physical
substance, at least as much as the Vegetable Kingdom differs
from the Animal, or as the impelling and moving essence of
the human mind differs from the impelled and moved essence
of the human body.
Now, unless we suppose this ultra-physical (and hence unphysical) Kingdom to be a Kingdom of Spirituality, there is
no conceptive power corresponding to it in the human mind,
and hence it is to the human mind a nothing, and can not even
be an object of thought, much less of faith.
But it may be asked, " Whence originated this Kingdom of
Spirituality, which it is here alleged must have served as the
basis of physical creation?  If we should answer that it
originated in a higher and ulterior spirituality, and that that
originated in a still higher, and that in a still higher; and if
we could thus prolong our thoughts to an absolute eternity
and in search of the Origin of origins, we would still have only




48        MATERIAL  BEGINNINGS  AND
epirituality-an.INFINITE REALM of Spirituality, beyond the
idea of which our thoughts could not possibly go.  We may
set it down, then, as a conclusion which all analogy affirms,
and which there is no conceivable reason to doubt, that this
whole realm of Materiality, originated in this prior and correspondent Realm of SPIRITUALITY.
Now, spirituality, in its interior nature, possesses the properties of affection, thought, and volition, and these, again, are
the attributes of personality. This ultimate, and hence infinite,
Realm  of Spirituality, therefore, involves the idea which we
mean to convey by the term GOD: and the infinite series of
degrees of spirituality of which the mind has just conceived in
its search after the Origin of origins, may be supposed to correspond to the infinite series of degrees of the harmonious
faculties of the one Infinite God, as these may be supposed to
be represented in their ascending scale, from the most exterior
portion of the Divine nature which connects with Materiality,
to the most interior portions of the Divine Soul, which projects, generates, and vitalizes all things.
In saying, therefore, that the whole Kingdom of Physical
Substance as such, originated in a prior and corresponding
Kingdom  of Spirituality, we, in effect, say that it originated
in a Source possessing affection, intelligence, volition, and hence
personality-in a Being, who, without any restraint or constraint
from outer and physical influences (which did not then exist),
could freely create, or abstain from creating, according to the
internal promptings of his own Infinite Mind.
But let me not be understood as arguing that the matter of
this universe was created by God out of nothing.  The mind
can not conceive of any such thing as nothing, or of something
coming out of nothing; and therefore the idea may be at once
dismissed from the mind as being itself a mental nothing. But




SUPER-MATERIAL  CAUSE.                       49
if we suppose that spirit is an essence, and that matter, as such,
was created out of this essence, there will at least in this
be no violation of the laws of thought; and the reasons on
which such suppositions may be grounded will incidentally and
more distinctly appear as we proceed.
There is a philosophy extant which insists that matter has
of itself an inherent power of motion, and that matter (or physical substance) is eternal. But that this assumption is untenable, is obvious from the following considerations: Motion in
matter, as shown before, necessarily tends to bring matter
into forms; and if motion was from eternity in eternal matter,
then matter must from eternity have been brought into forms
-nay, into the ultimate and highest forms which that motion
is qualified to engender. But as it is sensibly certain that
these highest forms did not exist forever, and rationally certain that they must have ultimately sprung from a state of
primeval chaos, it follows, of necessity, that motion in matte,
could not have been from eternity.
Moreover, if motion is an inherent property of matter, that
motion must be the result of a force adequate to produce it,
and that force must be either mechanical or chemical.  But
that matter contains of itself, and in itself, no mechanical force,
is self-evident. Conceive of any body of matter, whether an
atom or a world, being in a state of perfect rest: it is evident
that that body has within itself no mechanical force adequate
to move itself much less to act upon kindred bodies.  It is
clear, therefore, that matter has within itself, and originally of
itself, no mechanical force adequate to produce motion in
any case; and, therefore, if a body at rest is not acted upon
by an extraneous moving force, it will necessarily remain, for
aught mechanical forces can do, in precisely the same place,
and will possess precisely the same bulk and constituents, to




50            MATERIAL BEGINNINGS.
all eternity. This self-evident and generally recognized prop
erty of matter is called its inertia.
It is not denied that a chemical power-a power of expan.
sion and condensation, or of altering the internal arrangements
of particles-may  be lodged in bodies of matter; but this
power is only the striving of particlesfor an equilibrium.  But
unless there is a constantly active influence received from a
foreign source, the equilibrium  must necessarily be finally attained, and all action would then cease, never to be renewed
by any inherent force, simply because such force is exhausted.
If we then consider the whole universal mass of physical
substance, as the mass of particles supposed to be subject to
this internal chemical action, that action, and its producing
force, could not be eternal and unoriginated, because in that
case it would manifestly, from eternity, have attained to an
internal equilibrium, and all action would have ceased. These
considerations show that even chemical action, and therefore
chemical force, must have had a beginning, and therefore a
cause, in some power or contriving agent beyond themselves,
and outside of the matter in which they inhere.* But as there
was no other realm of physical matter from which they could
be supplied, we are driven to the only other alternative of supposing that they were supplied from a Spiritual Source-from
the personal Realm of affection, intelligence, and volition, which
we have before proved to be unoriginated, and hence infnite.
If this reasoning is correct, then the conclusion is obvious,
that all motion of whatever kind, as well as the physical substance acted upon by it, must have had an ultimate origin in
Spirit-IN GOD!
* It may be added, thaf'chemical forces, as inherent properties of original, amorphous, nebulous matter, must have been exceedingly weak, if in such matter such ius
bereut forces could have exieted at all, which is extremely doubtful.




CHAPTER VI.
PRINCIPLES OF UNIVERSAL SYNTHESIS
WE have now completed our descending view of the realm
of Being without us, and traced the material creation to its
super-material-hence spiritual-hence Divine, Cause. The
completion of this general analysis unfolds to us the true'basis
of all synthesis; and, keeping in view the Spirituality,' Self.
existence, and Divinity of the Original Cause, we may now
proceed to inquire, what may be known, or legitimately
believed, in relation to the origin, modus operandi, and government of Matter and Motion, and of all the subsequently
established creations, systems, and kingdoms now comprised
in the general fabric of outer Being'
I am aware, however, that many will be likely to consider
questions of this nature as too far above the sphere of the human intellect, to justify an attempt even at the most general
solution. But let us not be discouraged. It was intimated in
the outset of the present treatise, that nothing exists' in the
realm of being WITHOUT man, which has not an antitype and
correspondent in the realm of being WITHIN him, and that all
which exists without, and all which exists:within, possess
toward each other the relations of cognizable objects and
principles, and cognizing faculties. Besides, we have already
found reason to believe that Law is unvarying; and if so, it
may be traced in its operations, not only inversely from ulti.
mates to origins of creation's unfoldings, but also directly




52        PRINCIPLES  OF  SYNTHESIS.
from  origins to ultimates.  And as the wonderful powers
of analogy have conducted us with apparent safety through
the immense labyrinths of the stellar creations, in our eftorts
to trace them downward to their common source, we should
not despair of deriving some substantial aid from the same
mode of reasoning, when applied to the solution of those more
profound and important questions which are embraced in a
synthetical investigation of the system of Being.
As forming the basis of the process of investigation now to
be pursued, we here lay it down, as a self-evident proposition,
that each and every effect is germinally contained in its cause,
and hence, when developed, necessarily corresponds to its cause.
Were this not the case, neither cause nor effect could properly
be called such, and there could be no conceivable sequential
relation between the two.
For example, in the order of tangible developments by
which man is surrounded, the Vegetable Kingdom precedes,
and serves as the material source, of the Animal Kingdom. It
therefore forms the material element of the cause of the
Animal Kingdom, though a more essential element of the
cause of this and all other creations, is of a spiritual character,
supplied from a source that is above the particular creation to
which it applies, as will be further illustrated hereafter. But
the two kingdoms, sustaining toward each other, as they do,
the relations of the material element of a cause, and the
material element of an effect, stand, thus far, as mutual correspondents and exponents of each other. In like manner, the
Vegetable Kingdom stands as a material correspondent and
exponent of the Mineral Kingdom, which is its material source
and cause, and contains the fundamental principles of its con.
position and physical properties, though in a lower degree. So
the Mireral Kingdom, in like manner, has its physical corre



PRINCIPLES  OF  SYNTHESIS.                  53
spondent in the mass of amorphous planetary matter which
served as its source; and so, by like gradations, the chain of
analogy carries our minds backward through planetary nebula,
solar nebulae, etc., until we come to the one great, universal,
undivided mass of chaotic matter, which must necessarily
have contained within itself, undeveloped, the material elements of stellar systems, solar systems, planets, minerals,
vegetables, animals, and even the physical elements of the
human constitution. Though indefinite in the extreme, this,
in its occult properties and adaptations, must, as a universal
material Germ, have involved the physical correspondences of
all the creations which subsequently sprang from it, in the
same way as the acorn involves the physical correspondences
of the future oak; and by an intelligence capable of perceiving its interior properties and adaptations, it might have been
predicted, in a general way, what kind of creations were destined to spring from it.
But as the Animal Kingdom, physically speaking, was
previously contained in the Vegetable, and the Vegetable
Kingdom was contained in the Mineral, and so on throughout
the descending scale, so the great original, universal Kingdom
of unformed matter, and whose undeveloped properties and
principles were typical of all subsequent and subordinate
Kingdoms, was itself as one Kingdom, previously involved
in the infinite, eternal, and unoriginated Kingdom of Spirit.
uality, which, as before shown, constitutes the DIVINE PERSONALITY. This Kingdom of Spirituality-in other words,
the Divine Personal Being-comprises, therefore, not only the
material (or substantial), but the spiritual and volitional, and
hence the entire elements of the Cause of all things in universal
creation; and hence the Creator and the created must stand as
mutual exponents of each other.




54        PRINCIPLES OF  SYNTHESIS.
That the great Kingdom of universal matter, and what, for
the sake of perspicuity, we have called the great Kingdom of
universal Spirit, stand in relations to each other similar to
(though more comprehensive and perfect than) the relations
subsisting between any two conjoined subordinate kingdoms
in nature, is an idea which it is desired the reader should dis
tinctly comprehend, as it lies at the foundation of all true,
material, and spiritual philosophy, and will, as it is believed,
tend  to entirely reclaim  science from  the general tendency which it has long apparently had, to Pantheism  and
Atheism.
Considering that matter, as such, originated in the creative
efforts of Spirit, and hence Mind, there is another point of
view, from  whicu it will appear that matter, both in its
primeval state, and in all its subsequent states of mundane
forms, must necessarily have been in exact correspondence
with its Source and producing Cause. We know something
of the nature and operations of Mind, by experience and consciousness. We know  that the mind of the architect, for
instance, constructs an edifice within itself, or within its own
conceptions and thoughts-constructs it as an invisible and
spiritual edifice-before proceeding to give it a physical
form  in the outer world.  After the building is physically
erected, therefore, it stands as a precise image and correspondent of its archetype or conception which first existed in
the mind.
Applying these principles to the subject under present investigation, we may consider the Divine Thought as the Architect, and the universe, or any of its systematically organized
stages of development, as the Edifice. Not only, then, must
the archetype of the universe in its matuity, with all its har.
monious worlds ard3 systems, but even the archetypes of




PRINCIPLES'OF  SYNTHESIS. 5.
those atomic and infinitesimal forms constituting oiiginal
chaotic matter, have distinctly pre-existed in the Divine,
spiritual, and mental constitution.*
The Deity and the universe-the realm  of Spirit and the
realm of Matter-therefore, stand to each other in the relation
of Archetype and Antitype-of Cause and Effect-and therefore the two, as before remarked, stand as mutual exponents
of each other. In order, therefore, to arrive at some general
conclusions in reference to the constitution and principles of
creation as a whole, and also in respect to the constitution and
principles of its included and correspondent sub-systems, let
us first briefly interrogate Reason and Intuition in reference to
some such general facts as we can comprehend, respecting the
constitution of the Divine Being.
The only way in which we can obtain any definite and proper conception of the Divine Being, is by first conceiving of
a true and undegenerated human being-such being the culmi.
nating point of all Divine creations, and hence the embodied
representative of all the Divine affections. Although it is not
the intention to base the propositions of this work on the authority of inspired writings (whatever confirmations of such
writings may be incidentally developed in the course of our
philosophical investigations), we can not, in this place, avoid
noticing the biblical declaration that" God created man in his
own image," as impliedly sanctioning an endeavor on our part
to understand all that we may comprehend of God, by a comparison of the knowledge we have of man.  Spirit, indeed, is
essentially of the same nature wherever found, whether existing in a finite or an infinite degree, though it is acknowledged
* The idea of Archetyepes, as here presented, was originally conceived by Plato,
and formed a prominent feature of his philosophy; though the author here derives 
ft or sourcea independent of Plato's teachings.




56          PRINCITLES  OF  SYNTHESIS.
that it may exist in different shades of moral character as
resulting fiom different combinations, developments, and directions of the faculties.  Conceive, then, of a perfectly constituted man-a man whose physical, intellectual, and moral
natures are in harmonious development, and then conceive
this man to be expanded to infinitude, and you have the truest
and highest conception of God of which the human mind is
capable.
But it would be diverting the reader too far from the object
of this portion of our treatise, to enter at present into an
elaborate discussion of the question, What is man?  This
question shall be discussed at length in the second part of this
work. But for the present we must confine ourselves to a few
propositions which, to intelligent minds, will appear more or
less self-evident, and of the truth of which, as well as of the
ulterior positions which they will serve to illustrate, confirmation will accumulate as we proceed, until any reasonable
doubts with which some minds may at first regard them, will,
it is believed, be either greatly diminished or entirely dissipated.
Let it be apprehended, then, that the most general constituents of human personality, are three; viz., 1. Soul, or interior
vitality, which is the seat of the affections; 2. Spirit, or the
organized, pervading nerve-element, which, in its lower degrees, is the vehicle of sensation, and in its higher degrees, is
the seat of the understanding; and 3. Body, or vehicle of
outer manifestation and action.
Precisely corresponding to these are tne three most comprehensive constituents of the Divine Being; viz., 1. Interior
Soul, Life, or Love; 2. Spirit or Wisdom; 3. Outer sphere
or vehicle of operative Energy, the latter corresponding to the
body in man.




THE  SEVEN-FOLD  SERIES.                    57
But the constituents, both of the human and Divine person.
ality, considered in more detailed reference to elenents, forms,
and outer objectivities, are also, in each case, susceptible of a
sevenrfold division, which may be briefly stated as follows: 1.
Subjective Love, or Love as an abstract quality of the personal
essence; 2. Subjective Wisdom, or Wisdom  as an abstract
quality of the personal essence; 3. Subjective volition, or
volition as an abstract power of the two previous elements combined, and a procedure from  them both; 4. The essences
having the properties of Love, Wisdom, and Volition, embodied in personal organism; 5. Objective Love, or Love as
related to outer forms; 6. Objective Wisdom, or Wisdom as
related to outer forms; 7. Habitation, or a complete system
of outer objects and conditions related to the whole personal
nature and desires, and in which such nature and desires be
come embodied and represented.
In man the elements of this seven-fold classification contain within themselves many corresponding sub-divisions,
some of which are much more obvious than the foregoing
general divisions, as will be seen when, in the course of our
inquiries respecting the MIcRocosM or the universe within, it
comes in order to discuss them.  In God the elements of this
seven-fold division may be presumed to contain an infinite
number of sub-divisions, all of which are, in like manner, susceptible of corresponding seven-fold classifications; and their
co-relations and inter-communications may be supposed to
constitute the infinite harmonies and beatitudes of the Divine
soul!  Our object at this stage of our treatise, however, is
little more than to unfold the idea of these classifications as a
basis on which the great plan-work of creation may be conceived, leaving such evidenes of their truthfulness as exist in
the nature of things to'-e incidentally developed as we p roceed.




58            PRINCIPLES OF SYNTHESIS.
This seven-fold classification of the principles of the Divine
constitution, is probably what the inspired seer St. John had
referenoe to when he spoke of the " seven Spirits of God which
go out into all the earth."   And it was undoubtedly the outgoings and  efficient operations of these which produced the
various seven-fold Divine antitypes which were shown to the
same inspired seer under the forms of the seven churches of
Asia Minor; the Lamb with seven horns and seven eyes; the
book with seven seals, and their successive openings at seven
different epochs; the seven angels with seven trumpets; the
seven thunders; the seven last plagues, etc.*
If it be true, then, that there  are  these  seven  natural
divisions in  the constituents of the one Divine Being, it is
obvious  that  any  system   of creation  or operation  which
presents  a  complete  reflex  of  what is contained  in  the
Divine  Source  from   which  it sprang, must contain  a  representation and outer expression of each one of these Divine constituents, and  must therefore, as a whole, be also
seven-fold.
But we have seen that Nature, as a Whole, is divided into
many  Systems, Kingdoms, or more properly speaking, Discreet -Degrees, rising one above another. Each one of these
Kingdoms or Degrees (as will gradually be illustrated in what
follows) contains within itself the seven-fold series of parts,
as the natural evolution, and reproduction, on a higher scale,
* The number semn appears to have been anciently recognized as a general number
of completeness, and as such it appears to have been habitually employed by the
sacred writers. Thus, in their classifications, there were seven aays (or periods) ol
creation; seven days oI the werfek; seven years from one sabbatic year to anodler; sever,
times seven years from one jubilee to another, etc., (see by the aid of the concordance,
tLe numerous instances in which the number seven occurs in the Old and New Testa;
ments) Some of the ancient heathen nations, also, adopted the seven-fold classiflcea
tion as of extensive application, especially to spiritual and Divine things; and it wea
Wntroduced by Pythagoras from India into Greece.




flARMONIAL  SCALE  OF  CREATION.    59
of the seven-fold series of the Degree or Kingdom  im
mediately below it in the order of development; and all of
these, separately and collectively, are evolutions from, and
correspondents of, the Divine seven-fold Constitution) which
is the Originator and Cause of all. Each one of these sevenfold series, moreover, corresponds to the diatonic scale in
music, and which, with its seven constituent notes, is therefore
its natural oral interpreter and exponent. Thus the various
Degrees or Kingdoms of natural developments, may be considered as octaves, rising one above another. the same as the
octaves in music.  Each octave exactly corresponds to, and
harmonizes, note by note, with all other octaves, whether they
be on a higher or lower scale; so that if we filly understand
any octave, Degree, or Kingdom of natural development, we
have in it a measure and exponent of all others. Thus the
system  of nature, as a Whole, may be considered as one
grand Musical Organ, compassing all these octaves, andwhich,
in the hands of the Great Organist, the Divine Being, in
whose infinite series of octaves of Love and Wisdom, exists
the very soul and origin of all harmony, is capable of
sending forth every where those silent notes of harmony
and music which have been  perceived and  deeply felt,
by every truly elevated and interiorly developed human
soul!
The idea of the " music of the spheres," therefore, is not
merely a poetic fancy, but a sublime reality, whose basis and
origin are exhibited in the foregoing simple principles.
That this harmonial scale of creation, as corresponding to
the harmonial scale of degrees of Love and Wisdom of the
Divine Mind, is not a mere fanciful conception, will become
more and more obvious as we proceed. It will be shown.
tha' not only does each one of these degrees or octaves of




60         PRINCIPLES  OF SYNTHESIS.
creation, by its correspondence with all others, serve as theiy
natural exponent, but that each octave, if its constituents
are correctly classified, rests upon internal evidence of its
own.  And if this serial order of graduated progression is
duly recognized, and its laws are properly understood, we
may use any seven-fold classification, known to be correct, in
correcting the errors of others, just as the musician would
correct the discords of one octave by the harmonies of
another.
But before proceeding further, we must speak briefly of
the laws which, as we proceed, will be seen to govern the
septinary classifications, and by which it may be generally
known whether any classification is correct.  In each correct
classification, the members, in their numerical order, may, in
general terms, be distinguished as follows:
Number ONE is the number of simple unity.
Two is the number of productive unity, and in general
terms comprises positive and negative, active and passive, or
male and female, principles.
THREE is the number of self-sustaining unity.
FOUR is the number of Organization.
FIVE is the number of exterior completeness. There being
five exterior properties to outer things, man, hence, has five
exterior senses, whose object is to give information of them to
the interior soul. As the five exterior properties also exist,
with express reference to two interior and higher properties,
the number five is also a number of aspiration, as will be
better understood hereafter.
Six  is the number of subordinal association, and of
harmonial, peripheral revolution, as around a governing
center.
SEVEN is the number of final completeness, embracing both




NTUMERICAL  CLASSIFICATION.                          61
exteriors and interiors. Hence it is the pivotal and governing
number of the series.*
This septinary classification may also be embodied in the
triad.  Thus the first, second, and third  members of any
seven-fold series, form  one trinity, and therefore may count as
a unit; the fourth, fifth, and sixth members form a second
trinity, and "ount another unit; while the seventh member,
which is always equal. or rather superior, to all the rest put
together, forms a third unit, and completes a general trinity.
As a guide to correctness in any septinary classification, it is
important to observe that the first and second trinities in the
series, should bear a certain general and particular correspondence with each other.
Whatever obscurities may at first exist in the foregoing
statement, will be abundantly  clarified by  the illustrative
examples which will incidentally occur as we proceed. It is here
given mainly as a hint to the reader, that the classifications in
which we shall have to deal, are not arbitrary, but founded
in the nature of things.  Considering, therefore, that each
natural seven-fold series corresponds to, and illustrates every
other, and that this septinary arrangement runs through every
complete creation, system, and Kingdom in nature, the degree
of reliance which may be placed on the legitimate results of
the method of investigation now  proposed, as well as the
character and extent of those results, as compared with what
may be obtained by other processes, may be illustrated as
follows:  Suppose  there  are a large number of timbers,
hewn, squared, morticed, etc., and piled confusedly together.
* The ancient inspired records also deal largely in the number twelve and its
multiples, as an interiorly significant number. It may be remarked that the number
twelve is evolved from the seven-fold series, and is simply the number of six pro.
iuctive unities, or positive and negative, active and passive. or male and female
orinciples. It is therefore, also, a number of subordinal association.
6




62        PRINCIPLES  OF  SY.NTESIS.
The superficial observer, uninstructed  in  the  synthetical
principles of architecture, may take most accurate imeasure.
ments of each of those timbers, and may give most correct
descriptions of their shapes, abstract qualities, etc., just as
science, as ordinarily pursued, gives accurate descriptions of
abstract facts which constitute the timbers of the great temple
of Nature. Such an observer, however, may not be able to
discover any intended connection between many of those
timbers; may be able to form little or no idea of the form,
proportions, or correlative parts of the building which they
would constitute, if all put together, and may even doubt that
they were ever all intended to go together in any definite
form; and that science which merely analyzes, but does not
synthesize, experiences much the same difficulty in viewing
the timbers of the temple of Nature. But suppose, now, that
a skillful architect comes on the ground: he views those apparently heterogeneous timbers, not only analytically (or in
isolated detail), but also synthetically, or in their relations to
each other; and, by the observance of simple rules, he proceeds-without any paring or forcing-perhaps without even
the "noise of the hammer"-:-to erect a magnificent and
glorious temple, in which there is a place for every timber,
from greatest to smallest, and a timber for every place which
requires one. Then even the previous superficial and merely
analytical observer of the timbers will know, if he surveys
the edifice, that those timbers were intended to go together
precisely in the relations in which he now finds them; and
that the rule or theory by which they are brought together,
is true.
Suppose the observer noticed, however, that in the erection
of the building, some of the timbers were a little pared,
or forced, or warped, in order to make them  join with




THE  TEMPLE  AND  ITS PARTS.                    63
others: still, if the building, when erected, exhibits unmis
takable indications of order, and symmetry, and harmony
of its numerous parts, it stands as evidence of general truthfulness of the architectural rules by which it was erected;
and, if it is then known that the hewer of those timbers was
absolutely perfect in his art, the inference would be legitimate,
that the paring and distortion used in putting them together,
were owing to the ignorance or unskillfulness oi the part
of the builder, by which a joist or a post was occasionally
inverted, or made to take the intended place of another of
somewhat similar form.
Now, all natural facts (which, it must' be  confessed,
the science and philosophy of the day view in an aspect
somewhat heterogeneous) are timbers of the great temple of
Nature.  If we can find a method of classification, therefore,
by which these various facts, as timbers, may be, without
any warping or forcing, brought into  the  form  of one
grand system, among the myriads of the complicated parts
of which there may be observed a mutual dependence and
harmony so perfect, that the loss of a single part would
sensibly mar the symmetry of the whole; then we may be
assured  that this method is the true one, and that the
structure erected by it is a structure of truth.  Now, a
system of classification of this kind must exist somewhere in
nature, if it be admitted that nature is not, after all, a more or
less heterogeneous and disconnected mass. If the reader can
not believe, with me, that the doctrine of the seven-fold series
and its naturaJ adjuncts, as herein briefly unfolded, constitutes
that system, it is confidently believed that he will at least find it
immensely suggestive, compelling nature, in many instances,
to tell her own story, and to give up secrets which sc;ence
and philosophy have hitherto been inadequate to wrest from




64        PRINCIPLES OF  SYNTHESIS.
her grasp. For the several years which have elapsed sinre I
was so fortunate as to be led to the discovery of this method
of correspondential reasoning, I have pursued it with results
which, to my own mind, at least, have been intensely satis.
factory; and, I confess, that withcut its aid I could not have
had any conceptions which might have been regarded even as
an approximation to a solution of many of the questions
discussed in this work.




CHAPTER VII.
THE SEVEN FUNDAMENTAL LAWS, AND THEIR INTIMATIONS BER
SPECTING THE ORIGIN AND STRUCTURE OF THE UNIVERSE.
DEEMING the foregoing a sufficient exposition of the prin.
ciples which shall guide us in our further inquiries, we now
proceed to our proposed synthetical investigation of the system
of being without us. Pursuing the natural order of progression, from fundamentals and generals to ultimates and
particulars, we will first institute some comprehensive inquiries respecting the origin, structure, government, etc., of
the physical universe as a whole; and afterward, similar
inquiries shall be pursued in relation to the Solar System, the
planet on which we dwell, and the various systems of inanimate and animate creation which exist upon its surface, of
which the ultimate and highest is the human organization.
And, in view of the new method of reasoning which we
have unfolded, let it be borne in mind that if the origin, constitution, laws, functional operations, etc., of any one of the
systematic creations proposed for investigation, can be elucidated directly and more clearly than any other, it will serve
as a correspondential guide to the further elucidation of all the
others. Thus, with a proper classification of the corresponding series and degrees of nature's unfoldings and operations,
the known will cast the whole light of its analogies upon the
unknown-just as each timber of a temple hints the shape and
nature of the timbers with which it is to be conjoined, and




66         3LAWS AND  DEVELOPMENTS.
thus serves as a guide to the erection of the edifice; or, as a
single fossil bone of an extinct and previously unknown
animal, enables the comparative anatomist to describe with
accuracy, the animal as it lived and moved upon the earth in
its organic completeness.  Our method, if successfully pursued, will, moreover, develop the unity of principle pervading,
in different degrees, all creations, from lowest to highest-the
unity and harmony, therefore, of the one and only system of
universal truth; and, as we pursue the revelations of the
physical universe, from its rudiments to its higher unfoldings,
our thoughts, from the accumulating analogies, will gain such
an upward impetus as may hereafter carry them  directly
through the line of those higher and corresponding truths,
which relate to man physiologically, psychologically, spiritually-socially, politically, and religiously.
With respect to the origin, structure, laws, etc., of the universal cosmical system, we commence our reasonings with a
postulate which, whether strictly true or not, can not lead us
into important error in our subsequent deductions, since we
have so many correctives of inharmony, as involved in the
general series of corresponding and harmonious octaves of
developments through which the path of our investigations
will lead us. The postulate is, That God, from the prompt
ings of his own interior soul, which is Love, under the
direction of his Wisdom, which gave order and form to the
operations of Love, formed from the most exterior, or, if the
expression may be allowed, the least Divine and most nearly
physical, portion of his own personal emanations, as many degrees, varieties, or perhaps classes of atomic particles, as corresponded to the general seven-fold harmonies of his own
Infinite nature. The supposition that the varieties of these
primitive atoms are, in number, just seven, or a multiple of




PRIMORDIAL  MATTER.                      67
seven, is admitted to be purely a priori, but is a legitimate
deduction from  principles before established: it is here
offered as an introduction to propositions more certain, and
from which it, in its turn, will receive confirmation; though,
if it could be proved to be untrue, it would not essentially
affect our main argument.  These varieties of atoms, then
(whatever their number may have been), may be supposed to
have constituted Matter in its primitive state, which probably
was characterized by none of the distinctive properties of oxy,
gen, hydrogen, nitrogen, calcium, potassium, or any others of
the so-called " elements" known to chemistry.  In being
evolved, in particleized form, from  the emanated personal
Essence of the Divine Being, the substance thus particleized
ceased to constitute any necessary portion of the Divine
Person, and formed a Realm or degree of Being by itself, but
still a Realm of Being corresponding to, immediately connected
with, and capable of receiving direct influx of vital energy from,
the great Personal Realm of Spirit from which it proceeded.
This vital influx, however, may be supposed to have been
altogether optional on the part of the great Generative Spirit,
even as was the evolution and particleization of essence
itself; and, without the direct communication to it, of an impelling energy from the Divine source of all energy, matter,
thus constituted, would, as before shown, have forever remained inert.
We are next, therefore to inquire into the origin and laws
of MOTION in this primeval chaotic mass.
Admitting, what was before proved, that inertia is an
inseparable property of matter left solely to itself, it is selfi
evident that Mlotion could have been the product- only of a
Force adequate to overcome the tendency of matter to remain
fixed. Though force is essentially of the same general nature




68         LAWS  AND  DEVELOPMENTS.
Ill whatsoever direction it may act, there are several modifica.
tions of the dynamic agents in which force originates. These,
requiring, as they do, a separate chapter for their proper elucidation, shall only receive such allusions in this place as will
be necessary to the explication of the laws by which force
acts in producing motion, aggregation, segregation, reciprocal
transference, and structural stability.
It has before been repeatedly remarked, that the universe
without corresponds to the universe within man, and that
therefore all principles and developments of the outer universe
may be conceived of by the fully unfblded human faculties.
This is because man is, physically and spiritually, an epitome
of all previous Divine unfoldings, and therefore is a microcosm
or little universe of himself. Though it is proposed to consider the discreet degrees of creation in their natural order of
unfolding, tracing each octave as it passes upward and merges
into a higher and corresponding one, until the whole merge
(loosely speaking) into man; yet, for the purpose of illustrating the foices and laws of the physical universe by the same
forces and laws which, in an ultimately sublimated degree, apply to man, we will here so far anticipate the appropriate
subject of the second part of this work, as to exhibit the following self-evident truths respecting the human economy.
In man (the microcosm or little universe) there is, 1. Passion or Love, which corresponds to Heat; 2. Intelligence or
Wisdom, which corresponds to light; 3. Nerve-essence, which
corresponds to electricity (these three forming a trinity); 4.
The agent which attracts circulating particles, and deposits
them  in the solid portions of the organism; 5. The agent
which removes particles from lower tissues, and deposits them
in higher; 6. The agent which acts and re-acts sympathetically
oetween one organ and another (these three forming a second




DYNAMIC  AGENTS AND  LAWS.                    69
and corresponding trinity of dynamic agents); and. 7. The
interior, unitizing, and vital agent, which pervades and governs
all the preceding.
Accompanying, and precisely answering to, these seven
dynamic agents in man, are seven laws, or modes, by which the
former operate.  These are, 1. Expansion, governing all diastolic movements; 2. Contraction, governing all systolic movements; 3. Circulation, governing all rudimentally reciprocating movements (first trinity); 4. Aggregation, governing all
depositing and organizing operations; 5. Segregation, governing
all ascending movements; 6. The law governing all sympathetic movements (second trinity); 7. The law of all vital,
unitizing, and governing operations, the vital and spiritual
constitution as a whole being here the mover.
Now, in the macracosm, or great universe, we have, 1.
Heat, which corresponds to Passion or Love; 2. Light, which
corresponds to Intelligence or Wisdom; and 3. Electricity,
which corresponds to nerve-essence, in the little universethese forming a fundamental trinity of dynamic agents as
operative in outer nature. There is also a second and corresponding trinity of dynamic agents in nature, and also a seventh
and vitalizing agent, as corresponding to the same in man;
but these important agents shall be illustrated  hereafter.
Assuming their existence for the present, however, we may
remark, that, corresponding to these seven dynamic agents,
there are also seven laws which govern the outer universe, and
all its correspondent sub-creations, whether in the animate or
inanimate departments of being. These laws, indeed, are the
same throughout with those which we have seen to apply to
man, though in lowel creations they exist in lower degrees of
development.  They may be exhibited, with their ternary relations, in the following table 




TO          LAWS AND DEVELOPMENTS.
PRIMARY TRINITY.                SECONDARY TRINITY.
1. Expansion.                       4. Aggregation.
2. Contraction or Attraction.       6. Segregation.
3. Circulation.                     6. Sympathetic reciprocatioa.
7. Vital complex unity
Here, it will be perceived, is a regularly graduated progression in the order oC elements, ascending from  first to last, as
it were, through the different stratifications of one complete
system.  They maintain relations to each other similar to the
relations of the different parts of a tree; viz., the first is the
root of the series; the second is the trunk; the third is the
branches; the fourth the leaves, and the completion of the
organic -form  of the tree (wherefore, No 4. in any sevet, fold
series always corresponds to aggregation, organization, or association); No. 5 commences the segregative or reproductive
process, and corresponds to the flower buds; No. 6 corresponds to the flowers, and No. 7 always corresponds to the
fruit, embodying in itself the sublimated elements of the whole
tree, together with the seed or germ of a future and corresponding creation.
The first trinity in the series approximately corresponds to
the second, but the correspondence is rather by way of counterpart, or antithesis, than in any other way which may be
easily defined; and in the general trinity, comprehending the
whole septinity, may be observed a general correspondence
with the sub-trinities.*
These, let it be borne in mind, are claimed simply as the
fundamental and all-compnrehensive laws of natural and moral
* These general principles of classification, not only in respect to dynamic agents
and laws, but their corresponding forms and developments, are ap plicable to all natural
series or octaves, and by duly comprehending and observing them, with the pecitiar
and relative characteristics of their parts, we may be able always to distinguish tor
som false classificationa




PRIMEVAL  OPERATIONS.                    71
existence, saying nothing of those numerous sub-modes of ope.
ration, commonly called laws, which grow out of them. The
essential principles of these general laws, in their simple and
combined states, and in their various degrees of sublimation
and ascension, as applicable to the different degrees of creation,
will, we apprehend, be found to involve a sufficient explanation
of every mode in which original Divine Force operates in the
production of the various phenomena of creation.
Considering, then, that the primeval chaotic materials, out
of which the universe was formed, did not originally, and of
themselves, possess any force or motion, we proceed, in the
light of the foregoing principles, to inquire more particularly
Whence, and how, originated the forces, laws, and motions'from whose diversified operations has resulted the stupendous
system of being by which we are surrounded, and of which
we are a part?-and what was the order of progressive development, and what is the general structural form of the cosmical universe, which must have legitimately resulted from these
causes? And, as it has been before shown that all the principles that are involved in the infinite, may be epitomized in
the infinitesimal, we may, for the sake of convenience, and
without injury to the argument, reduce the subject of our contemplations to an imaginary scale of magnitude which may
easily be conceived by the human mind, and which will allow
of all progressive operations being surveyed as from a single
stand-point.
The influence which may. most naturally be conceived to
have first acted upon primordial matter to impel it to ascending
levelopments, was Divine Love. Now, Divine Love corresponds to Heat-is, indeed, spiritual heat itself, and thus is the
first expansive impulse of mind. It is so in man, as well as in




72           LAWS AND DEVELOPMENTS.
the Deity; and its correspondence with physical heat is instinct
ively recognized by the human mind, and  is implied in the
phraseology with which men naturally speak of it. Thus we
speak of one in whom the love or passional principle predominates, as a "warm-hearted  man," as an "ardent enthusiast,"
or as a man of "fiery disposition."   On the principle, therefore, that all bodies are developments from an interior soul,
and all natural phenomena have an ultimate spiritual origin, we
may conceive that while the great Kingdom  of Matter was in
such immediate relation and juxtaposition to the great Kingdom of Spirit, its Cause, Divine Love (or Divine Spiritual Heat)
flowed directly into the Realm  of Matter, and  especially into
its seventh  or highest and proximately vital degree as being
most in affinity with the Divine Spirit itself, and that the
effect of this influx was an immediate generation of a corresponding natural heat.*  This heat must necessarily have been
attended by an immediate expansion of the recipient particle
or collection of particles, and  by the evolution of a magnetic
or magnetoid atmosphere partaking of the nature of the particle's interior vitality.  Divine Wisdom   (or spiritual light)
entering  with, and  acting through, the Love, pervades this
atmosphere, and brings it into the nature of physical light, to
which wisdom  corresponds.t
The expansion resulting from the heat must-necessarily have
* That naftral heat may be produced by what we have here termed spiri4uaZ heat,
is shown by the fact, that when passion flows from the interior soul into the nervous
tissues of the human body, it raises the general temperature of the body, quickens the
circulations, produces a flush of the countenance, and a burning of the cheeks, and, ir
general, greatly increases the physical powers. It may be remarkde, that the generaprinciples of this portion of our theory were taught by the celebrated Swedenborg, though
we have arrived at them by an independent process of induction.
t It is well known that natural light consists of seven prismatic rays; and this fac
hints at the corresponding sevo~,fold nature of Divine Wisdom, and hence, also, ot
Divine Love, its inseparable associate.




ORIGIN: OF  CENTRAL -'SUN.                 T3
produced a comparative vacuum-that is, a vacuum in respect
to those essences which were subjected to the expansiot, and
therefore produced a tendency to an absorption or rushing in
of corresponding essences composing neighboring particles,
and which had not yet, in the same degree, been'acted upon
by the expansive force. Moreover, the active light-sphere (or
Wisdom-principle) which is an orderly procedure. from Heat
(or Love), or accompaniment of, and the administrator ito, its
wants, formed a recognizing and sympathetic connection between the particle first acted upon and'the particle'immediately conterminous; and by an envelopment of the relatively
passive particle in the light-sphere of the relatively' active one,
the former would become assimilated to the latter, and, floating to it through the circulating currents of the enveloping
light-sphere, in the same way that the particle of iron floats
to the magnet through currents of the magnetic essence, it
would become incorporated with it as a part of the same
body.  Thus, as each particle is made the- recipient of the
essence of Divine Love, it lovingly opens its heart, and extends its ethereal arms to receive and embrace its brother, and
the two thus become one. And being thus. united, and becoming recipients for a further influx of heat, the same operation that before took place, is now repeated on a little larger
scale, and more particles are attracted.  And so the process
continues to be repeated, until the minute nucleus of a CENTRAL SUN is fully established, which, by a continuation of the
same process of unfolding, goes on to complete development,
forming the whole universal mass of physical substance into
one coherent and undivided: Body, dense in the center, and
gradually shading off into extreme levity toward the circum.
ference. 
If, instead of supposing this operation to commence in in
7




LAWS  AND  DEVELCPMENTS.
finitesimal particles, we suppose it to commence in a few
cubic Meet, or in hundreds, or thousands, or millions of cubic
miles of central matter, or if we suppose (what is protablj
more nearly the truth) that all particles in the universal mass
were simultaneously vitalized, but in different degrees, by the
influx of Divine spiritual heat, and that each commenced
forthwith, a tendency toward particles more vitalized than
themselves, and all a tendency toward the particle most vitalized, the principle involved will be the same, and the ultimate
result of the operation will be the same.
If the foregoing theory of the initial steps of the creative process is true, it not only affords us an example of the incipient
operations, but an illustration of the very cause of gravitation,
of which latter I believe no adequate explanation has yet been
afforded by  any of the common philosophies of the day.
There are, however, in subsequent stages of the creative unfolding, higher elements and forces which enter into, modify,
and render more definite, the phenomenon of gravitation, as
will be seen.
The manner in which two streams of particles flowing from
opposite directions toward a common center, tend to produce
a rotatory motion in any collection of central particles, has been
explained by those who have written on the nebular theory of
the origin of worlds and their motions.*  The idea may be
apprehended from  the following illustration: Suppose that
two balls of equal weight, are rolled with equal velocity, over
the floor from opposite sides of a room, and that they at the
same instant impinge upon a third ball lying at rest in the
center of the floor.  If the two strike the ball at rest in a line
exactly cutting its center, no motion will be generated in the
* See particT larly Nichol's " Architecture cf the Heavensl"




ORIGIN  OF  ROrARY  MOTION.                   7f
latter ball.  But there are a great many chances against both
balls striking in such a line, and if we suppose a constant stream
of balls (corresponding to particles) flowing inward toward the
central ball, the probability of the latter being soon struck a
little out of the line of its center, would amount to an almost
absolute certainty. In case this should happen, a rotary motion of the central body would necessarily take place as a result of the momentum of the body or bodies impinging upon
it, especially if the latter bodies, as a result of magnetic or
other attraction, attach themselves permanently to the surface
of the former while still under the influence of this momentum.
Suppose, then, there is a constant stream of bodies flowing
inward from all directions toward the central body, as is supposed to be the case with particles of nebulous matter flowing
inward toward a common center; the rotation of the central
mass itself when once established, will, by the friction of its
revolving atmosphere, if from no other cause, be sufficient to
throw the approaching end of every radial line of gravitating
particles out in the same direction from its center, and thus the
momentum of every impinging particle will add to the tendency to central rotation. As the particles gradually establish relations with each other, through their tarious degrees
of attenuation from center to circumference, rotation will
gradually be established throughout the whole mass, the motion being relatively swift at the center, and gradually growing slower at every remove toward the circumference, where
it is the slowest.
The idea has been illustrated by a reference to the effect
produced by different currents of water flowing toward a common center, which effect is well known to be that of a whirl,
rapid at the point of meeting, and growing more tardy at




76.L LAWS  AND  D:EVELOPMENTS.
every remove from said point, until it dies upon the shore, or
is lost in the general motion of the stream.
If we have in these principles, as we appear tohave, a suf
ficient account for the origin of all rotatory motion in the
celestial spaces, it were.certainly unphilosophical to look for
its origin in any foreign or arbitrary impulse..
All the phenmena we have thus far considered, therefore,
may be traced to the operations of two laws, viz., Expansion
and Attraction- the first. being based upon: Heat, and the
second upon Heat and Light combined-which elements, again,
owe their origin to, the: corresponding principles of Divine
Love and Wisdom, or spiritual Heat and Light.  We come
now to consider the operations and results of a third law-the
lawa ofl Circulation.
While men of science have minutely traced the operations
and phenomena of gravitation,. they have taken comparatively
little cognizance of- any reactive force from  the. attracting
body. Yet, without the aid of a reactive or emanative force,
to counterbalance, in some measure, the gravitative power, it
would: be impossible to conceive, on rational principles, of the
formation of any other body than the first and -universal-Body,
which would selfishly absorb all materials, and give forth none.
But it would.only be in accordance with universal analogy, to
suppose that while this: constant secretion was going on, there
was also as constantly.kept up:a- countervailing process of excretion. Particles absorbed into the central mass (or, what is
the same thing, the denser portion of the whole united mass),
would, by the action of its superior vitality, undergo a quasi
process of digestion, and portions of their essence would be,
come refined and sublimated, and would bhesent off again into
space, to the opposite materials of which they would in their
turn be.aftracted, *i the same way as positive and negative




LAW   OF  CIRCULATION.                    77
electricities are mutually attracted. As all gravitating particles can  not go absolutely to the center (some being crowded
out by others), and all emanated particles can not, for a similar
reason, recede to the circumference, so each finds an equilib.
rium, and takes a position, between center and circumference,
according to its specific density or levity. And now, a similar
process of digestion necessarily goes on among gravitating
and emanating particles which find their common equilibrium
at any given distance from the center, and by their mutual
action and reaction, another change and excretion takes place,
and the rejected particles, being in a state exactly opposite to
that of the particles thrown off from the great Center, now
gravitate again toward that Center, there to experience and
produce still further changes. Thus there is a constant action
and reaction, flux and reflux, between center and circumference, and between all intermediate parts of the great mass;
and the law governing this reciprocatinlg movement is what we
mean by the law of Circulation. It corresponds to circulation,
or to the flux and reflux of venous and arterial blood to and
from  the heart in the little universe, or the human system,
even as the laws of Expansion and Attraction (or contraction),
before considered, correspond respectively to the diastolic and
systolic motions of the heart, lungs, and perhaps the minute
vesicles, or' corcula," of the brain.  Being the third law of
the universe, it corresponds to the third element of the Divine
essential Constitution, which is the Divine Sphere of operative
Energy, which, again, corresponds to the nerve-essence in man,
and which latter corresponds to Electricity in the universe
-this being actually the agent mainly concerned in the production of the phenomenon now under special consideration.
The laws of Expansion, Contraction, and Circulation, there.
lre, form a trinity, as dependent upon the triune elements




78         LAWS  AND  DEVELOPMENTS.
of Heat, Light, and Electricity; and which latter are related
to the corresponding three-fold Divine spiritual elements of
Love, Wisdom, and Vehicle of operative Energy,
The Fourth law, is a law of Organization, and brings the
elements and motions previously developed, into a state of
systematic and serial Aggregation.
Before rotatory motion is fully established in the mass of
matter, the gravitating and emanating particles would proceed
toward, and from, the center, in nearly straight lines. But
after said motion is fully established, and becomes general
throughout the mass, both kinds of particles would proceed in
aberrent or curved lines, the curves corresponding to the direction of motion in the revolving matter-in the same manner
in which a person attempting to row a boat in the direction of
a radius of a circle or vortex of water flowing round a center,
would, if he kept the side of his boat always square to thv stream,
be carried out of a direct line a distance proportioned to the
rapidity of the current, and would thus describe a curved path.
But it is evident, for reasons already intimated, that neither
can all the gravitating particles take, at any one time, a
position entirely at the center, nor can all the emanating
particles take a simultaneous position entirely at the circum.
ference, but that each will assume a position with reference to
the two extremes, where it finds an equilibrium, and will keep
this position until a change fits it for another. Suppose, then,
that a gravitating and emanating particle are in exactly op.
posite states to each other in respect to their degrees of
positiveness or negativeness: it is evident that both particles
would find a common equilibrium  only at the same distance
and position between the center and circumference.  They
would there meet, and by virtue of their elective affinities,
form a union as male and female particles, and would assume




CONCENTRIC RINGS.                        79
t circular or orbitual motion, coincident with the rotating
motion of the general mass, which MOTION the united momenta of their previously gravitative and emanative movements
would tend to sustain.
Now, supposing that there were originally just seven kinds
or classes of atomic particles (no matter into how many more
kinds or classes-these were susceptible of being subdivided),
it is easy to perceive that the foregoing principles would
probably involve something like the following results: one class
of atoms, rejecting the immediate companionship of all others,
would cluster around a central point, and form  a sun.  Each
of the other six classes of atoms, in like manner, rejecting the
immediate companionship of other atoms, while obeying the
impulses of its internal and strongest affinities, would assume
a general distance fiom the center determined by its specific
point of equilibrium, and there, contracting  upon  itself,
would form a mass of its own, in the general shape of a ring,
surrounding the interior solar mass. Here we have a law of
deposition and aggregation, corresponding to the law by which
particles, circulating in the human blood, are deposited and
aggregated in the form of muscle, cellular tissues, etc.
The universal system, as thus definitely organized, would,
therefore, supposing that there are seven general varieties of
matter, present the form  of six concentric rings of nebulous
matter, surrounding the seventh formation, which is the central
sun.  But if there were a greater or less number of kinds of
matter, there would be a correspondingly greater or less numner of rings, but all constructed on the same principle. Of
this annular structure we have a general analogue, though on
a small scale, in the rings of the planet Saturn, and also on a
larger scale, in the annular nebule, (of which there are a few
examples in the heavens.




80         LAWS  AND  DEVELOPMENTS.
It should be added, how ever, that the idea of this concentric
annular form of structure can only hold when associated with
the supposition, that the primitive point of general gravitation
was at, or near, the center of the chaotic mass.  If the gravi.
tative point was far out of the center, then the evolved
masses, instead of assuming the forms-of circles, would assume
the form of ellipses, having a preponderance of their materials
on one side of the sun, where, indeed, the whole might be subsequently drawn by the superior gravitating force of their
major quantity, and form  a separate revolving mass.  In
either case, however, the fundamental principles involved
would be the same.  But of the general prevalence of the
annular, or, at least, elliptical form of structure, in the sidereal
realms, there is a sufficiency of ocular proof, as incidentally
exhibited in a previous chapter.
The FIFTH law, governing a corresponding fifth development, is the law of SEGREGATION, by which the materials of
the previous annular formations, obeying higher and more
specific elective affinities, separate into different masses, of
higher and lower degrees of refinement.
The nature and modus operandi of this law, may be understood by the following considerations: The completion of the
last or circular formation, brings the materials of the universe
to a triune degree above their primeval or chaotic state.  Of
course, therefore, not only the essences, but the activities and
inter-activities of the whole structure, are more refined,
diversified, and systematic. Each nebulous ring is now itself
a comparatively independent theater of molecular force and
motion, and all of them  act upon each other by their gravi
tative and emanraive forces, while the central sun, as the
great heart of the system, continues to send forth his vivify
ing and generatl!ye influence to all




SEGREGATE D  MASSES.                       81
It is easy to conceive that the annular. masses, being not
only internally active, but penetrated in va'ious directions by
the refracted emanations from  the central sun, would be
liable to be rarefied at particular points and condensed at
others, and thus to be shrunken and cleft apart, at particular
lines and angles, and that by inherent action of the particles
of the rings themselves, contraction would take place ifrom
these lines of cleavage, and that the materials previously
united, would thus be segregated into separate masses. These
masses would, on the same principle, be liable to be subdivided into inferior masses of greater or less number, in
proportion  to their respective original tmagnitudes.  This
whole process of segregation or fragmentation, is faintly
illustrated by the breaking up of the clouds after a storm, and
their resolution into separate masses.
According to principles before  explained, each  general
mass, owing to its particles gravitating to a common center
within itself, would assume a general rotatory motion which,
for reasons which mathematicians will readily conceive, would
necessarily coiform  in its direction to the revolution of the
great ring of mundane materials to which it belonged, and
each sub-mass would have a particular rotating motion of its
own, which would conform to the motion of the general mass
to which it belonged, i. e., supposing that there were not in
either case any particular or. iwcide.ntal causes of disturbance.
Thus genei'al masses and their included sub-masses, with their
general and particular centers of gravitation and revolution,
would, by further progression, form  general stellar systems,
and their included sub-systems, and finally, also, systems of
planets and satellites, all of which latter would be evolved by
the progressive unfoldings of the same p'inciples heretofore ex,
plained us governing the formation of the universal structure.




82         LAWS  AND  DEVELOPMENTS.
In this way, therefore, as may be rationally  supposed.
originated all the nebulae, clusters, stellar systems, or firma
ments, which the telescope has revealed, together with untold
millions of others of like nature, which lie forever concealed
from  mortal vision! In other words, each one of these
originated from a fragment of the periphery of a great wheel
or circle of nebulous materials, surrounding the great Center
of all centers.
This hypothesis, relative to the origin of the stellar clusters,
is not without strong confirmatory evidence in celestial appearances.  I have suggested that the vivifying emanations
from  the central sun, acting upon the angular masses of
nebulous matter, would produce planes of rarefaction and
cleavage in various directions, from which planes each resultant insulated mass, as also each of its subordinate and ineluded masses, would contract upon its own center.  It is
evident, therefore, that each general mass, with its included
sub-masses, would first be of an angular form-on the same
principle on which any cooling and contracting substance
tends to separate into angular masses, and as is sometimes
exemplified in the cleavages of igneous rocks.  But, by the
force of internal gravity, and the rotatory motion which,
according to principles before explained, would naturally
result therefrom, these nebulous masses would all tend,. as
they progressed, to assume the elliptical or spherical form.
Now, this is precisely what is observed in relation to the
nebulous and stellar masses of space.  Some are of exceedingly irregular form, having long and sharp projections from
their sides, and are of irregularly alternating degrees of density
in their centers, as though they had, by variously intersecting
forces, been subdivided into numerous inferior compartments.
Commencing at these extreme irregularities, there are a1




PROC.RESSION OF FORMS.                                     83
Mntermediate degrees of symmetry in  shape, down to the perfectly globular shape, to which  the prevailing  forms of these
stellar masses manifest more or less approximation.  Judging
fromn  appearances, therefore, one would  say that these masses
are  evidently  in  all degrees  of progression, between  rudimental and  ultimate  forms, and that, in general, those of the
most angular forms are the least, while those of the globular
form   are  the  most, progressed.*   This  is all manifestly  in
exact harmony with  the  hypothesis  of nebular and  angular
segregation, and subsequent firmamental, solar, and planetary
conglobation, which we have proposed.
Moreover, these  nebular or stellar masses, although  they
appear in all directions in the heavens, are said to appear, as
already intimated, in greatest abundance in  the direction of a
particular plane, which  cuts the  plane of our Milky Way at
right angles.   In  the  direction, perpendicular  to  this plane,
they grow comparatively thin (as do the stars in the direction
* In illustration of the progression from angularity and ellipticity to sphericity in
these bodies, I may quote the following from the splendid work of Sir John Herschel,
embodying the results of his observations at the Cape of Good' Hope. With reference
to the engraved figures of two particular nebula existing in the southern heavens, he
says: "These figures exhibit elliptical nebulae, normal in their character-that is to
say, in which, as the condensation increases toward the middle, the ellipticity of the
strata diminishes, or in which the interior and denser -portions are obviously more
nearly spherical than the exterior and rarer. A great number of such nebula, of every
variety of ellipticity and central condensation, are figured in my northern catalogue.
Regarding the spherical as only a particular case of the elliptic form, and a stellar
nucleus as only the extreme stage of condensation, at least nine-tenths of the whole
nebulous contents of the heavens will be found to belong to this class; so that, as
regards a law and a structure, the induction which refers them, as a class, to the
Operation of similar causes, and assumes the prevalence within them, of similar
dynamical conditions, is most full and satisfactory. To abstain altogether from speculation as to what may be the nature of those causes and conditions, and to refuse all
attempts to reconcile the phenomena of so large and so definite a class of cosmical
existences, with mechanical laws, taken in their most general acceptation, would be to
err on the sde of excessive caution and philosophical timidity."-H-EnScaHEL'S Resanft
" tXe Cap)e of Good Hope, p. 22.




84        LAWS AND  DEVELOPMENTS.
perpendicular to the plane of the Milky Way), suggesting the
idea of a very remote  approximation to the horizontal
boundary of the stratum.  Though it is a thought bordering
on the confines of the human conceptive powers, and thus
penetrating somewhat into the realms of uncertainty and doubt,
it may still be propounded as a query-Whether the plane of
this grand stratum of sub-universes, may not indicate the
direction of the plane of the great Ring of original nebulous
materials, fiom which these nebulae and stellar systems be.
came segregated and resolved into their present forms, and
whether all firmamental creations, revealed by the telescope,
may not thus be included within a comparatively small
fraction of a segment of one of the great cosmical rings which
surround the Center of all centers?  Though a question so
profound can probably never be finally decided by the human
intellect, the indication of this grand plane of cosmical formations, tends, so far as it bears upon the subject, to confirm
our hypothesis, that all visible nebulas and stellar systems,
are segregations from one general mass of nebulous matter,
originally existing on one general plane; and the analogies of
all known definite motions and formations in the stellar
spaces, point to the idea of a circular or elliptical form as
characterizing this grand plane of creations.
While this theory gives definite form and order to the subject of our contemplations, it opens the mind to the most
sublime conceptions of magnitudes and distances.  Herschel
estimated that his great telescope would reveal the existence
of a star so far removed into space that light, traveling at
the rate of twelve millions of miles in a minute, would require
three thousand five hu.dred and forty-one years to pass from
that star to our earth.  Such, therefore, may be supposed to
be the approximate distance of the remotest of those luminous




IMMENSITY  OF  CIEATION.                      8S
masses whibh were resolvable into stars by his telescope.
He, however, computed that his large telescope would follow
one of those large clusters, as a general mass, if plunged so
deep into space that its light would require three hundred
and fifty thousand years to reach us; and, it is thought that
the great telescope of Lord Ross would pursue the same
object to ten times that distance, or a distance which light,
with its inconceivable velocity of motion, would consume
more than three millions of years in traversing!*  This,
therefore, may be assumed as the proximate distance of the
remotest nebulae rendered visible by Lord Ross's instrument.
If, as is probable, all stellar creations, included in a sphere
bounded on all sides by this enormous distance, constitute
only a small fraction of a segment of one such circle of
creations as we have supposed to surround the great common
Center of attraction, it would not be advisable for the reader
to attempt to conceive of the dimensions even of one of those
whole circles, much less of the whole universe; which latter,
however, if created, must be inferior to the Creator, and thus
finite.
But, applying the same general laws to the creation of the
solar, and the creation of the universal, system, it may be
asked, " Why is it that either the unitary agglomeration represented by single planets, or the multiplied segregated division
which we have supposed to be represented by nebulae and
stellar clusters, did not take place uniformly in both systems
as the formation from  the materials of the nebulous rings?"
The answer, I apprehend, may be found in the different codition;z  of the rings in the two systems, as involved in their
different magnitudes. In the great system of systems, the dis* Se Mitchell's Planetary and Stellar World," p. 286-7.
8




86        LAWS  A  D  DEVELOPMENTS.
tance of particles at any two extremes, milst have been so
great as to prevent then. from having any applreciable attrac
tion for each other. Some tendency to draw together and form
a single permanent mass, indeed there must have been; but
this tendency at the more distant points in the mass, must
have been so small, and the activity of particular districts, especially after incipient nucleation, must have been so great,
and so rapidly increasing, as to give rise to subsequent and
numerous mundane forms and systems-the very thing pro
posed in our theory of segregation, and confirmed by appearances in the heavens.
But in the solar system, the distance from  one extreme of
the annular formation to the other, was comparatively small;
and besides this, we may suppose that the varieties of matter
in so small a mass, were less extreme, and that their affinities
were more intimate, than in the universal mass previously
spoken of. There was, therefore, not only a possibility, but a
high degree of probability, that the materials of each of the
rings of nebulous matter formed around our sun, would assume
the form of one mass, which would subsequently move in an
3rbit whose plane and distance would be coincident with the
previous ring.
But, admitting the nebular hypothesis, the multipled segregative process actually does seem to have taken place in one
instance even in our solar system, and given rise to several
planetary bodies as the products of one ring.  It is scarcely
necessary to say that we refer to those strange bodies called
the asteroids, which revolve at almost equal distances from
the sun, between the orbits of Mars and Jupiter, and of which
there is now known to be fifteen or sixteen in number.  That
these bodies must have orig:nated fiom one primitive mass of
planetary matte., there can be but little doubt, as such an




ASTEROIDS.  SOLARIZATION.                     87
hypothesis is necessary to preserve the uniformity of the sys
tern, and to supply the vacuity that would otherwise have
existed between the orbits of Mars and Jupiter.
If, therefore, instead of being without progeny, and levolv
ing in solitude (which can only be owing to their diminutiveness), each asteroid were attended by a numerous family of
children and grand-children (or satellites and sub satellites),
and revolved around one of their number, while performing
their general circuit around a superiori center, they would exactly illustrate, on a small scale, our idea of the segregated
stellai clusters of the universe-each of which latter may be
supposed to revolve, as one general body, like the asteroids, in
an orbit generally coinciding as to plane, and distance fiom the
great and common Center, with the plane and distance of the
great ring of nebulous materials in which it had its parentage.
But it should be understood, that the fifth stage in the process of creation, considered merely as a process of segregation,
is complete with the formation simply of separate'angular
masses and sub-masses, from the general materials of the nebulous rings.
The sixth process in the creative procedure, is a process of
solarization, or one by which these previously segregated and
indefinitely formed masses and their sub-divisions, become
establisled suns.  This process is accomplished by gravitations to, and emanations from, central points in the segregated
masses, on principles essentially the same with those previously explained as applying to the formation of the first great
central Body; but in this higher process, the operations may
be supposed to be more refined and regular in proportion to
the superior refinement of the elements and dynamic agents
which are involved. These suns assume specific distances and
orbits determined by the laws of equilibriuia, anzd con.




88          LAWS  AND  DEVELOPMENTS.
mence their harmonicus actions and reactions upon each other
developing a sixth law-the law of universal cosmical sympa
thy and. reciprocation-corresponding to the nervous sympathy
and reciprocal action existing between the different organs of
the human body, the little universe.
The seventh and last law and process in this series of universal creations, is that by which planetary masses-bodies
destined to become ultimately habitable  were evolved from
the previous solar masses. Of course it is to be supposed
that these bodies were produced fiom the solar masses by evolutions of nebulous rings, and by agglomeration of the materials
of these, according to principles before explained.  This development completes the fundamental structure of the material
universe as such, and serves as the Basis and material Germ
of all subsequent and more refined unfoldings.
The different stages through which the universal mass of
materials have passed, from germinal to ultimate forms, may
therefor6 be summarily represented in the following formula:
PRIMARY TRINITY.              SECONDARY TRINITY.
1. Heat-pervaded chaos.       4. Concentric nebulous rings.
2. Luminous attractive nucleus. 5. Segregated masses(from rings)
3. Electro-interactive spheroid.  6. Suns and clusters of suns.
ULTIMATE
7. Habitable worlds.
It is true that we can have no final and absolutely sensuous
demonstration that such is the structure of the universe, because the telescope, with all its magic powers, has probably
revealed, as it were, but an infinitesimal fragment of the great
united SI stent.  Yet. considering that the telescope has expli.
citly revealed that the same laws of gravitation and revolutionary motion which apply to our own planetary worlds, apply




SUMMARY  OF  EVIDENCES.                       89
also to the most distant clusters of stars, thus binding all systers and firmamnents together in one family relation, and referring them to a common parentage-considering, therefore,
that our own solar system is of itself a li'ttle universe, exemplifying all the principles involved in the great universe, of
which it. is a child and antitype-and considering, as we may
now well do, that the nebular hypothesis of creation is the
correct one, and that laws are uniform throughout the whole
realm  of being —the preponderance of analogical evidence
must, we think, be admitted to be in favor of the generav
truthfulness of the theory here propounded.  For, in the first
place (admitting the nebular hypothesis), our own sun, en
throned in the midst of our system, affords an ocular proof
that matter in a primitively diffused state, and obeying the impulses breathed into it from the Divine spiritual source, will
assume a central, gravitating, and rotating Nucleus; and this
hints at the great Nucleus, which, on the same principles, seemingly must have necessarily been formed in the midst of the
originally chaotic materials of the whole universe. Moreover,
the rings of Saturn show the forms naturally first assumed by
the attracted and emanated materials of a central body, which
forms will be of varying distances from the central body, according to their specific degrees of density or levity. Some
such forms seemingly must have necessarily been. elaborated,
not only by our own central sun, but by all other suns of sufficient magnitude and activity, and especially by the great Sun
of all suns. But such annular forms, of course, can be preserved through subsequent condensation, only in case of the
nicest oluilibrium  in their materials and motions, such as is
characteristic of Saturn's rings.  If there is any considerable
inequality in either of these particulars the annular mass, in
contracting, will inevitably resolve itself into the form of one




90         LAWS AND  DEVELOPMENTS.
or more bod'es, whose orbit of revolution will be such as was
described by the position of the previous ring.
This consideration not only explains the origin of the planets
satellites, and asteroids, of our own solar system, from the
materials of previous nebulous rings, but suggests that anal.
ogous singular and multiple conglobations must, seemingly of
necessity, have, in like manner, been formed in the sidereal
spaces, from the materials of nebulous rings surrounding their
respective centers, these all being subordinate to a final and
common Center, as all created things proceed from a final and
common Cause.
We may, therefore, say, that there are many avenues open
toward the hypothesis we have propounded respecting the
origin and structure of the universe, and many guide-boards
(or facts and principles), pointing along these avenues, all in the
same direction; while, if the mind attempts to travel in a different direction, and in quest of other conclusions, it not only
finds no such guide-boards to direct it, and no such avenues
open for its passage, but it is constantly obstructed by barriers
of philosophical difficulty, and each of the steps of its progress
is planted only on the miry and treacherous ground of assumnp
tion.  While, therefore, the mind is ever held open to the reception of new light, and a willingness is pyeserved to abandon,
any present errors for the sake of subsequently unfolded
truths, it would seem that we might, without subjecting ourselves to any just charge of philosophical rashness, settle in
the present conviction that the foregoing hypothesis, at least
as to its general and most essential princiules, can not vary
much from the truth.




CIHAPTER VIII.
THE SEVEN DYNAMIC AGENTS OR POTENTIAL MEDIA
OF NATURE.
To facilitate a clear conception of the relations of the Deity
to, and his mode of acting upon, the universe, as well for
other important uses, we will now  endeavor to attain to
some further conceptions of the dynamic agenits immediately
connected with the seven general laws, and their corresponding seven-fold  developments, considered in the foregoing
chapter.
It was before intimated, on grounds which appear even to
transcend mere probability, that the agents immediately coneerned in generating in the universal chaotic mass, the first
three phenomena of Expansion, Contraction, and Circulation,
were Heat, Light, and Electricity.  By the agency of these
three principles, we have supposed that the mass was suc.
cessively developed  from  a chaotic, to a nucleated, and
spheroidal form. Another and corresponding trinity of agents
was hinted at, which will now form the subject of special con.
sideration and illustration.
In unfolding the doctrine of the seven-fold series, it was
shown that the fourth, fifth, and sixth members of such a
series, composing a Secondary Trinity, bear a certain corre.
spondence, respectively, to the first, second, and third mem.
bers, which compose a Primary Trinity.  Thus, as the Pri.
mary Trinity of conditions in the universal material mass,




92               DY)NAMIC  AGENTS.
consisted of the chaotic, the nucleated, and the spheroidal, sa
the Secondary Trinity (comprising nebulous rings, segregated
and contracting fiagments, and developed solar forms) may
be characterized as secondary chaos, secondary nucleation, and
secondary spheroidation.  This being so, and the dynamic
elements of the first Trinity being Heat, Light, and Electricity (each probably in a gross degree of development), a
carrying out of identical principles will lead to the supposition
that the dynamic agents peculiar to the Secondary Trinity,
are such as would correspond to IHeat, Light, and Electricity,
in a secondary degree of development, so to speak, without,
however, supposing that they are absolutely identical with
Heat, Light, and Electricity, as these terms would ordinarily
be understood.  This, however, is a mere deduction from
principles and correspondences; let us now see if there are
any substantial facts to support it.
Such facts are involved in a series of interesting and most
important discoveries, made by BARON VON REICEENBACH, a
few years ago, and of which we will now speak briefly.  The
course of experiments which led this ingenious philosopher to
the discoveries in question, was commenced by testing the
properties of magnets.  By the assistance of a nuinber of
delicately organized persons, mainly cataleptic patients, in
whom the senses, especially sight and feeling, were in an uncommon degree of exaltation, he ascertained that from either
pole of an open magnet, there was constantly given forth a
luminous, flame-like appearance, visible in a dark room, but
only to such as possessed this uncommon acuteness of vision.
The flames sent forth from  the poles of a large horse-shoe
magnet, capable of supporting ninety pounds, were described
as about eight inches in mean length, mingled with: irride-cent
colors, and gently flickering and waving, shortening Xnd




REICHENBACH S EXPERIMENTS.                     93
elongal ing, and yielding when blown upon, and when the
hand or any other solid body was passed through them.
The whole appearance was described as being exceedingly
beautiful.
This experiment was repeated with many different observ
ers, from all of whom the same general description was ob
tained-the accuracy of which was further tested by varying
the experiments without the knowledge of the. observers, and
noting the corresponding and uniform variations of the appearances described.
But, in order to obtain still further assurance that those
luminous appearances described by others were real, though
invisible to himself, the experimenter, by the aid of another
scientific gentleman, instituted the following additional test:
A very sensitive daguerreotype plate was prepared and placed
opposite to a large open magnet, in a closed box, enveloped
in thick bed-clothes, so that not a particle of ordinary light
could enter it. After the lapse of sixty-four hours, the plate,
when exposed to mercurial vapor, was found to be distinctly
affected, as by light. Another plate had been, at the same
time, similarly prepared, and inclosed in a dark box, withouti
a magnet, and after a similar length of time this was found to
be entirely unaffected.
The light was also subjected to the test of the convex lens,
and was found to be converged and thrown upon the wall in
the same way as any other light, but at a considerably greater
focal distance, which fact of itself proves that the luminous substance was different from ordinary light.
By tests similar to those which were employed with the
magnet, it was subsequently ascertained, with equal certainty,
that similar lights were also emitted from crystals. The flames
isuing from the points of large crystals were described by




94               DYNAMIC  AGENTS.
those who could. see them, as being somewhat in the shape of
a tulip, and singularly beautiful. One young lady used, whelr
ill, to lie awake nights enjoying the sight of the beautiful flame
emitted from a large rock crystal which had been left in her
room. But bodies confusedly crystalline exhibited but little of
this phenomenon, and bodies entirely amorphous exhibited
none, but nevertheless gave forth, in common with crystals,
magnets, and other things, a still more subtle influence, which
will hereafter be described.
Our experimenter subsequently introduced other tests with
the view of ascertaining to what extent this newly-discovered
force prevailed in nature.  He extended the end of a wire
through the keyhole of the door of a perfectly darkened room,
in which he placed a person whose senses were sufficiently
acute to detect any luminous or other phenomena which might
present itself as the result of any experiment.  The other
end of the wire he attached to a metallic plate, which, without
letting the observer placed in the room  know what he was
doing, he would push out into the rays of the sun, or of the
moon, or of the planets, or fixed stars; or would place an
animal, a plant, or his own hands, upon its surface; or would
subject it to chemical action, or the action of heat, cold, or
electricity. He found the results of all these experiments
nearly uniform in one particular, viz., in respect to the emission of a narrow tuft of light several inches in length, from
the end of the wire, which would begin to be visible soon
after the agent experimented upon was brought to bear upon
the plate. Indeed, whatever possessed in itself the least moo
lecular force or action, was found to be capable of evolving a.
greater or less degree of this luminosity.
Other processes gave an analysis of these lights, and showed
remarkable relations in their constituents, to different points




SEVEN-FOLD  LUMINOSITY.                       05
in the terrestrial and celestial spheres. It was found, for example,
that the flames from the poles of a large electro-magnet (which
were much larger and brighter than those emitted from the
permanent steel magnet) would, after the galvanic circuit was
completed, slowly and gradually resolve themselves into distinct stratifications of color, presenting, in fact, the seven-fold
luminosity of the rainbow, with the red below and the violet
above.  These colors, again, were found to vary with the
varying distances at which they were viewed-the whole of
the appearances, when taken together, showing that each one
of the differently colored radiations terminated, for the most
part, at a certain distance from the common center of luminosity. This distance, though Reichenbach did not remark it,
was probably nearly the same all around; the differently
colored rays thus forming a system of concentric spheres of
light.
Guarding against errors which might arise from variations
in these colors as resulting from the varying distances at which
they were viewed, our philosopher was now prepared' for
another interesting step. Having previously found that a magnetic bar, with poles in the direction of the dip, always emitted
different colors from  those it gave in the meridian, he proceeded to ascertain what effect other positions of the pole
would have upon the character of the luminosity.  For this
purpose he caused a magnetic bar to revolve lengthwise, first
in a vertical circle in the direction of the magnetic meridian,
then in a vertical circle in a direction east and west, and lastly,
in a horizontal circle.  He found that in each case different
colors were evolved according as the magnet was pointed in
different directions, and that a. it passed, in each caso, through
a complete circle, it evolved, in regular succession, all the colors
f the rainbow!




96               DYNAMIC  AGENTS.
By subsequent electro-magnetic exl)erimerlts with an arti
ficial globe called the terrelle, Reichenbach succeeded in pre
cisely reproducing the appearances of the aurora borealis, and
may be considered as having probably afforded a complete
solution of that interesting phenomenon.
We find in these remarkable facts a complete verification of
our previous hypothesis, so far as it relates to an essence
which may be called secondary light.  While this light is, in
some particulars, similar to ordinary light, it differs from it
totally in others, as the foregoing description renders obvious;
and it therefore may be judged to belong to a somewhat diferent degree of natural developments.  Considering this, therefore, as one of the members of our supposed Secondary Trinity
of imponderables, we shall now see that our hypothesis, so far
as it relates to the other two members, is not without the support of similar facts.
When a horseshoe magnet was closed by an armature, all
appearances of a luminous flame would immediately cease,
but would be instantly reproduced on the removal of the
armature. This establishes the probability that the same force
which in the open magnet generates the luminosity, is, by the
application of the armature, simply rendered latent, so far as its
flame-generating power is concerned, but that it nevertheless
still exists in the closed magnet, and acts as an internal principle, or as a principle. corresponding to fire or heat. This
view is further confirmed by the fact that one of Reichenbach's
subjects saw even closed magnets, and. indeed, metals of all
kinds, luminous in the dark, as though they had been heated
to incandesence-without, however, giving forth any flame-like
scintillations.  Such, then, are the evidences of a Secondary
Freat.
But still more conclusive indications were obtained of au




EFFECTS  OF  MAGNETS.                     97
eletroid, or electricity-like agent, as connected with the identi.
cal sources of these other phenomena.  It was found that
magnets, crystals, or whatever afforded the phenomena of this
attenuated light, together with many things which did not,
also emitted an influence or aura which was capable of acting
decidedly upon the nerves of a certain proportion of persons
This aura was described as warm or cold, according as it was
received from either pole of the magnet or crystal, or according to the positive or negative quality of any other source
from which it was obtained. It was found capable of acting
at'a distance, and of being transmitted through conducting
media, and of sometimes acting so powerfully upon the sensi
tive as to produce catalepsy and dangerous spasms. Thus,'t
one time, during the illness of one of Reichenbach's employ es:
he held a large magnet, capable of supporting ninety pounds,
at the distance of six paces from her feet, as she lay on her
bed, with her physician by her side. While the armature
was attached to the magnet she felt no peculiar sensation, but
the instant it was removed she fell into tetanic spasms and
complete unconsciousness from  its action.  The  armature
being again attached, the girl slowly recovered her senses,
and her physician advised that the experiment should not be
repeated.  Another lady, subject to attacks of catalepsy,
could instantly detect the approach of an open magnet,
though the latter was brought, without her knowledge of the
intention, near the head of her bed, on the opposite side of
the wall.
Magnets, crystals, etc., were also found to powerfully attract the hands of cataleptic patients, even during the unconsciousness of their fits.
It was also ascertained that amorphous bodies, in common
with others, sent forth this ethereal influence; though, as before
9




98              DYNAMIC  AG ENTS.
shown, they gave forth no light.  And here it was more fully
ascertained, that the ethereal emanations from  different sub.
stances, were specifically different as to their effects upon the
human nerve, thus affording indications of the distinctive
characters of the emanating sources.  One peculiarity of
amorphous (that is to say, uncrystallized and unorganized)
bodies was, that their exhalations gave a nauseous, accompanied by either a cold.or warm, and sometimes also a prickly,
sensation, to persons whose nerves were in a sufficiently
sensitive state to test them; and some bodies imparted these
sensations in a greater degree than others.  In the investigation of this point, Reichenbach took the trouble to try more
than six hundred bodies with reference to their nauseating?orce. The young lady through whose aid the tests were
made, could easily give to every substance its proper place in
The scale of force, and this she could repeat, without failure,
after intervals of several days.  "It soon appeared," says our
philosopher, "that these bodies arranged themselves according to their electro-chemical value, and, indeed, in suchwise
that the highly electric stood at the top, and the indifferently
so at the bottom of the scale, without regard to their polar
opposition."
When the same substances were tried on this same young
lady while in a state of catalepsy, "the results were the same
in kind, but in degree much stronger. The substances at the
top of the scale, laid in her hand, caused violent spasms,
whereby they were thrown at a distance, and her hand then,
as usual in catalepsy, retained the new position..    It was
soon observed that many substances began to act before they
touched the hand, and it was enough to place them near it."
These experiments were repeated, not only with other
nervous patients, but with several gentlemen in a state of per,




EMANATIONS  FROM   MEDICINES.                    99
feet health, with results differing from  the above no mor@
than what might easily be acccunted for by the different de.
grees of susceptibility in the experimenters.  The different
substances tried are enumerated by Reichenbach according to
their specific effects but it will here be sufficient to say that
sulphur was found to be the general representative of those
which, without contact, gave the sensation of cold, and gold
of those which gave warmth; and almost every one whose
hand was made to pass over small plates, coated respectively
with these substances, felt, in some degree, these corresponding sensations, and some felt them quite vividly.
Without any knowledge of Reichenbach's investigations,
Dr. J. R. Buchanan, of Cincinnati, was engaged, about the
same time, in a similar course of experiments with amorphous
bodies, and developed results similar in character, but in some
respects even still more decisive. Without here entering into
the details of his experiments or inquiries, it will be sufficient
to state that they resulted in establishing the fact, that
medicines, holden in the hand of the patient, even when
wrapped up in paper and concealed from view so as to guard
against the effects of imagination, will, in a large proportion of
cases, have all the effects that the same medicines will have,
taken internally.  Out of about one hundred and thirty
medical students belonging to a class which attended the
lectures of Dr. Buchanan, forty-three declared themselves
fully affected by this experiment, to which they had been subjected during the delivery of one lecture.*
Similar phenomena have been observed as the results of
similar experiments in other instances, but we have no room
for further details on this branch of our subject.  In all such
* ee "Buchanan's Journal of Man" for February, 1849, Art. 1.




100               DYN.tiMIC  AGENTS.
cases the action of the medicines is doubtless due to an ab
sorption of their subtle and characteristic emanat.ons, through
the pores of the skin, whence they are diffused through the
nervous medium  of the system, acting upon the vital forces
which control all the functions of the physical organism.
By experiments which placed deception out of the question,
it was found that these ethereal influences of different sub.
stances, could be conducted through wires to a distance of
from three to one hundred and thirty-two feet, so as to be dis.
tinctly perceived by the more sensitive of Reichenbach's experimenters.
But a fact still more important in its bearings was, that different bodies placed in contact with, or in close proximity to, each
other, would mutually impart their influences to each other, so
as to modify or totally change the effects which they would
otherwise produce upon sensitive patients. In other words,
and to use a figure of speech that will be perfectly understood,
they would mutually magnetize, or mesmerize, each otherwould enter into a sort of rapport or reciprocal sympathy, by
an interdiffusion of their spheres or ethereal emanations. Thus
it was found that sulphur, which of itself would impart a cold
and prickling sensation to impressible persons, even at a dis.
tance of several feet, and without a conducting wire, would, by
contact or close proximity to  other substances, empower
them, for a time, to give forth a similar influence, even though
their own proper influences might be of an opposite, though
less powerful, character; and so of other substances, and their
modifying influences upon others.*
The general reliability of the foregoing and other alleged
* For further details of these interesting experiments and their results, the reader is
referred to Reichenbach's' Physico-Physiological Researches on the Dynamics of Ma.
aefmto," etc., New York J. S. Redfleld.




COMPLEXITY  OF  rHE  FORCE.                 101
results as obtained by Reichenbac/h, will not be disputed by
those who know the character of the experimenter, or who,
from a careful perusal of his report, have noted his exceedingly
cautious mode of proceeding. Reichenbach is known through
out Europe as a chemist second only to Liebig himself, and,
speaking of this same course of investigation, Professor
Gregory declares that "it was not possible for any experiinents or discoveries to be presented to the scientific world by
one more entitled to confidence in every point of view." Besides this, his more important experiments have been repeated
by others, and their results verified, in many instances, both
in this country and in Europe.
Availing himself of the plasticity of the German language,
Reichenbach designates the new force (rather forces) which he
discovered, by the German suffix "od," and indicates the
sources whence this force is obtained, by their names prefixed
to that syllable, as " magnetod," " crystallod," " thermod,"
"photod," etc., as respectively indicating a connection of the
force with magnets, crystals, heat, light, etc.  In the English
language, therefore, this new imponderable has been rather
clumsily designated as the " odic force," or " odylic force."
But the various phenomena exhibited by this so-called force,
show that it is not simple but complex, or rather that it involves a number of distinct forces. Its rudimental existence
in the closed magnet, as also in various unmagnetic bodies,
was not only intimated by the luminous and incandescent appearance of the bodies of metals, before spoken of, but is also
implied as an antecedent of the luminous, flame-like appearance which it engenders at a further stage of developmentjust as the existence of common caloric is implied as an antecedent of common flame.  The light itself is a second development; and the ethereal aura which, without any luminous




102                pYXAMIC  AGENTS.
phenomena, acts upon the human nerve, is a third. The three,
therefore, may be variously characterize  as "odic heat,"
"odic light," and " odic electricity," or "odic ether;" and here
we have our previously conjectured Secondary Trinity of
dynamic agents, corresponding to the Primary Trinity, which
consists of Heat, Light, and Electricity, as these terms are
ordinarily understood.
In the same way in which the Primary Trinity of dynamic
agents is concerned in the Primary Trinity of each system of
physical developments, the Secondary and corresponding Trinity (in connection with the Primary, which is still and always
in force) is concerned in each secondary and corresponding
Trinity of developments, with their peculiarities.*
Thus the principle which we have called " Odic Heat," may
be considered as the internal love-principle by which particles
associate in organic forms, and therefore is the fundamental
dynamic principle connected with the fourth law-the law of
Aggregation or Organization, whether relating to the universe
as a whole, or to any of its definitely constituted parts.
The " odic light" appears to be expressive of the ethereally
aspirative operations of the organic structure from  which it
proceeds.  It was before mentioned that this light consisted
of the seven different colors of the iris, which seemed to surround the center of luminosity as so many concentric spheres
of light; and that when Reichenbach caused a magnetic bar
to revolve lengthwise on horizontal and vertical planes, the
light exhibited successively all the different colors of the rainbow, as the magnet was pointed in the different directions in
respect to the earth and heavens, which lay in the plane of the
* It in not claimed that these dynamic principles apply identically to each and
every sever-fold system of developments, as to some systems they apply only by thell
natural representatives, analogues, or correspondents




POLARITY,  AFFINITIE-S   ETOC                 103
circle. I can not but regard these results as exceedingly interesting and important, as showing the relative degrees and
states of polarity of particular points and directions of the
earth's surface, and of the surrounding and celest..al spacesthus, as suggesting the different qualities or states of the materials of which the earth and all correlative creations are
composed-thus, as suggesting the correlative affinities and
forces by which these materials became associated in their
present structural form-and finally, as suggesting something
of the perpetually repeated round of changing influences and
ethereal forces through which (in analogy to the revolving
magnet) the earth and all celestial bodies pass in performing
their rotary and orbitual revolutions. If there is any validity
in these suggestions, then these degrees of polarity, states and
affinities of matter, changing ethereal forces, etc., all exemplify
the seven-fold series as corresponding to the seven colors of the
iris, which, in the experiment referred to, were successively
given forth by the revolving magnet.  And, applying these'emarks (as analogy would justify us in doing) to all mundane
organizations-to the solar system, the sidereal systems, and
to the whole universe as one Body-as well as to the earth,
we have in the "odic light," a universal dynamic correlative
of the fifth law-the law of segregation, or the law by which
unity is divided into parts of different and connected gradations.
Concerning the third member of this trinity of agents-the
"odic," electroid, or ethereal emanation which was found to
produce such marked and singular effects on the sensitive human nerve, the following remarks may be submitted:
1. All things subjected to careful experiment, whether in
the animal, vegetable, or mineral Kingdoms, or in the
celestial spaces, we,'e found to send forth this subtile eman.




104               DYNAMIC  AGENTS.
ation, which in each  case may  be called  the sph re,  t
ethereal atmosphere, of the substance or form from whieo it
proceeds.  It may  therefore be  presumed, on analogical
grounds, that things also not available for experiment, and
that, indeed, absolutely all things, from atoms to worlds and
systems, and even the whole universe, considered as a Unit,
are in like manner. characterized by a surrounding and per
vading ethereal sphere.*
2. The emanating spheres of smaller bodies associated with
larger ones, must necessarily be included in the emanating
spheres of the larger bodies on which they rest or depend.
The sphere of a single particle of mineral matter, for example,
is comprehended and encircled in the general sphere of the
whole crystal of which it forms a part; and the same remark
applies to particles and organisms in other kingdoms in
nature.  The spheres of all minerals, vegetables, animals,
etc., separately and collectively, are involved and comprehended in the general sphere of the earth; the sphere of the
earth, together with the spheres of all other planets, with
the satellites and comets, is involved and comprehended in
the general sphere of the whole solar system; that sphere is
comprehended in the general sphere of the great stellar vortex
in which, accompanied by myriads of like systems, it moves;
and that sphere is comprehended in the general sphere of the
whole Universe; and that sphere is, in like manner, enveloped
in, and pervaded by, the great sphere of the infinite Divine
Being, which is the Essence of all essences, the Force of all
forces, and the Vitalizer of all vitalities! Here, then, is a
* This doctrine of "spheres " was taught by Swedenborg, and by others since hia
day. It may almost be said that it has a sufficient foundation in the developed intuItions of the human mind, and it woull stand even independent of Relchenbabh'a
mat conclusive scientific verifications.




DOCTRINE  OF  SPHERES.                   i05O
progressive gradation from the smallest to the greatest, from
the infinitesimal to the Infinite, fiom  the atom of matter to
the incomprehensible fullness of a Divine Spiritual Being.
3. The spheres of all bodies in the universe, from smallest
to greatest, while they are generically similar, are specficazlly
different, and the sphere of each body corresponds to that
body's internal character. This is a conclusion which, as regarded merely by the reasoning powers, is necessitated, by the
obvious differences in the intrinsic nature of things, and it is
confirmed by the differences in the efiects produced by the
ethereal emanations of medicines and other substances, and
even by the heavenly bodies, and by different districts of the
celestial hemisphere which were subjected to tests.
4. As it was proved that the spheres of sulphur, gold,
medicines, etc., acted and reacted upon, and mutually modified, each other, and this, too, when the solid bodies were a
distance apart; so, carrying out this principle, it may be presumed that the spheres of all bodies, terrestrial and celestial,
from smallest to greatest, from  atoms to worlds, stellar systems, and the whole universe, in like manner, act and react
upon, and modify each other, according to their relative degrees
of magnitude and power.  And this mutual interdiffusion of
spheres, and their harmonious and reciprocal action and reaction upon each other, while each particular form and system
preserves its own identity, constitute an important part of the
physiological and functional operations of the great Anatomicca
Structzre of Creation, and which, as before intimated, corresponds, in principle, to a single human body.  The great
ethereal Sphere of all spheres may be considered as the
sympath;etic nerve-essence of this Anatomical Structure, viewed
as a  lwhole, while the sphere of each sun, world, and atom,
mry be considered as it. own partiZctlar ierve-essenCe; and it




106              DYNAMIC  AGENrs.
is through these nerve-essences that each part of the whole
Body sympathises with all other parts, and that the equili.
brium and harmonious functional operations of the whole sys.
tern are preserved.
This subtile and variously qualified electroid or magnetoid
element, therefore, being the sixth in the seven-fold series of
dynamic agents, is intimately allied to the sixth general law,
which we have seen is a law of harmonial and sympathetic
reciprocation.
It is true that the discoverer of these previously unknown
subtile agencies did not exhibit, and perhaps did not, to
any extent, perceive) their cosmological bearings, especially
as these are attempted to be set forth in the foregoing remarks.  His main object appears to have been to develop
facts, leaving the more comprehensive conclusions to which
these might naturally conduce, to be unfolded by subsequent
investigations, and by others as well as by himself; and as
his facts, by their publication, and their verification by the
parallel experiments of others, have become the property of
the world, any one may elaborate and synthesize them who
has the inclination and mental qualifications to do so.
In respect to this " odic," or magnetoid element, which pervades, and emanates from, greatest and smallest things, the
following additional and important remarks may be submitted: As this influence, proceeding from various bodies,
near and remote, was found to have such remarkable effects
upon the sensitive human nerve, it may be considered as
being closely allied, in its general nature, to the nervous influence pervading the human body, and emanating from it as
an "odic' sphere.  Indeed, Reichenbach actually proved its
identity, in the general sense, with the medium through which
one human being produces those effects upon another coI.m




MODE  OF  DIVINE  ACTION.                  107
nonly known as " magnetic " or " mesmeric;" and the world
is indebted to that philosopher for physical demonstrations in
this department, which place the fundamental doctrines of
Animal Magnetism beyond all possible doubt.
Now, operations called "magnetic," as performed by one
human being upon another, are known to depend greatly, for
their character and efficiency, upon the exercise of the will.
If, therefore, the medium through which such magnetic operations are performed, is generically the same with the " odic"
spheres given forth by all bodies in nature, do we not find in
this "odic" element the general connecting link between mind
and matter?  If, upon the basis of this certainly plausible
idea, we should suggest that this everywhere present " odic"
element, as associated with the different bodies in nature, and
with nature as a Whole, may hereafter prove to be a medium
through which mind can, in certain conditions, and to a certain
extent, act upon and move outer tangible matter, without the
contact of the physical organs, the suggestion would doubtless
be met with general incredulity, especially by those who are
not familiar with certain strange phenomena of our day. It
could not be esteemed more incredible, however, than would
have been an assertion made fifty years ago, that by a
peculiar mechanical contrivance, a certain subtile agent in
nature might be efficiently employed in the accurate and
instantaneous transmission of thought to the distance of a
thousand miles! But not to press these thoughts for the
present, if our foregoing generalizations are correct, then we
hazard little in saying, that as the all-pervading "odic"
sphere of the universe, as a whole, in its ultimate degree, con.
nects with the sphere of the Deity, so the Deity, through this
medium, acts utpon the universe, in the same way as any two
iuxtaposed substances or forms in nature act upon each other




108              DYNAMIC  AGENTS.
through their "odic" spheres, and as was illustrated by ex.
periments before related. And as the Deity, moreover, is a
personal and intelligent Being, he may through this medium
act, not only spontaneously, but volitionally and directly, upon
the universe, or upon either of its corresponding sub-creations,
and control it to any extent which may comport with the
integrity of his general plan.
But we come now to another point: As each previous stage
of creation, with its peculiar law of developments, from the
first to the sixth, was thus accompanied with, or related to, a
corresponding dynamic agent, the same fact may be supposed
to hold with reference to the seventh stage, which, in the cosmical creation, as before shown, consisted in the development
of habitable worlds.  And as this is the final development of
the sevenfold cosmical series-and brings the physical structure of the universe as such, to a completeness-so we may
suppose that the dynamic principle related to this development, is also the ultimate and completion of its series. And
being the last of a series in which there is observed a progressive refinement from the first, at least to the sixth, it may be
supposed to unite in itself the principles of all the others in a
still superior degree of refinement.
Bvi we have seen that the series of universal cosmical developments included in what we have called the great Kingdom  of Materiality, must have been based upon, and have
sprung from, an antecedent, unoriginated, and infinite Kingdom
of Spirituality, which we call GOD.  If this same Principle,
like the vital elements of the germ of a tree, lies at the basis,
and is reproduced at the completion, of the unfolding, then
thiP seventh dynamic principle, concerning which we are now
inquiring, can be nothing less than a degree of the seven-fold
~lewents o(f the originally generative Divine Spirit, now em




DIVINE  EMBODIMENT.                    109
bodiea in cosrical investiture.  Viewed in this light, this
seventh dynamic principle may be called Soul or Vitality-the
Soul or vital Principle of the cosmical universe, or the Principle by which it, as a universe, lives and performs all its normal
movements!
Let me not, however, be understood as intimating that the
all of God was thus embodied in the universal cosmical structure. Neither the universe of material worlds, nor of heavens,
nor the heaven of heavens, can contain HIM who is absolutely
INFINITE, and it must have been, comparatively speaking, an
exceedingly small ray from his interior and ineffable effulgence
that sufficed to give birth to, and move and regulate, the material structure which we have been contemplating, however
sublime and inconceivable to human intellect this may be.
Nor was the Divine embodiment of which we speak, necessarily an embodiment which, in its immediate exterior mani
festation, would take the form of what is generally understood
by intelligence; though intelligence, as an attribute of a much
higher and more interior degree of the Divine Spiritual Constitution, was the projecting, planning, and (acting through the
ultimately refined " odic" spheres, or quasi nerve-essences of
his creations, before spoken of) is the constantly supervising
and all regulating Principle. The Divine qualities as intelligence were subsequently and, at a much higher degree of
creative progression, finitely expressed in the human microcosm, which is expressly declared to be an "image of God."
It is, however, here submitted as a truth which, it is believed, will become more evident in proportion as its foundation and bearings are better understood-that the identical
principles of what we know  as intelligence, are embodied
(though not as intelligence) in each kingdom  or system of
creation below wran, and finally in the universal kingdom of
10




110              DYNAMIC  AGENTS.
$osmical forms; these various descending embodiments bearug to each other the relations of descending octaves. Thus
what is called intelligence in man, is called instinct in animals,
But plants also, have a kind of instinct; and so in lower degrees,
have minerals, worlds-the whole universal System of worlds
-each embodying and representing a lower degree of what
may receive the general designation of Love, Wisdom, and
Volition; or Expansion, Attraction, and Circulation; the lowest
triune degree of which is embraced in the functions of Heat,
Light, and Electricity.
The seventh dynamic principle of the universe, therefore,
which pervades and governs all other principles, is only an
embodiment of that degree or octave of the principles of the
Divine soul which is in immediate relation with, and serves
to control the functional operations of, the universal cosmical
Body; while the higher degrees of the seven-fold Divine harmonies, flowing downward from the infinite sources of Divinity, are left to be embodied and represented in subsequent and
more refined creations, or remain at infinite removes above
the sphere of all terrestrial and celestial forms.
Of the doctrine intended to be conveyed in these remarks,
a more distinct and enlarged understanding will be obtained
as we proceed.
But, presuming that the reader already sufficiently compre.
hends the fundamental principles herein set forth, he is desired
to bear constantly in mind, that the dynamic principles of the
cosmical creation, were not developed by the creation itself,
but developed it; and the same may be said of the vitalizing
and moving elements of all degrees of material unfolding.
The dynamic principles (constituting, indeed, what may, in the
aggregate, be called the general Soul) are thus the immediate
Cause of the outer development (or Body), which is the Effect.




LAWS.  NATE. E.  GOD.                    111
And here it may be remarked, that if there is any relation be.
tween Cause and Effect, it must not only be a relation of
generals, but of particulars; and thus the Cause must be a
precise archetype of which the Effect is an antitype or em.
bodied representative; and hence the two must, throughout,
precisely correspond to each other. Every degree of creation,
therefore, may be considered as a precise outer expression of
the corresponding degree  of Divine Love, WNisdom, and
Energy which vitalizes and governs it, and in which it was
previously contained as an archetype.
Moreover, these interior Divine dynamic principles, together
with their prescribed modes of action, constitute the operative
laws of nature.  According to this view, while there is a law
for every class of natural and even spiritual phenomena, and
all things may be explained without a resort to contra-natural
or contra-legal agencies, laws, on the other hand, are not those
lifeless, unintellectual fatalities which they are represented to
be in prevalent philosophies of the day, but they are the ex.
press modes of perpetual Divine volition.  In looking, there.
fore, upon this universe, with all it contains, as law-governed,
we may, at the same time, look upon it as God-governed. But
3n this point, more in its proper place.
If this view is correct, then there is, in reality, no necessary
antagonism  between materiality and spirituality, nature and
heaven, reason and revelation, science and theology, but each
may be regarded, when correctly understood, as the exponent
of the other.  Quite distinct, however, is this view from that
gross speculation which makes of God nothing more than the
ultimately sublimated and self-moving essences of the natural
universe-a kind of universal hyper-galvanic battery which,
by its perpetual and self-generating action, produces solar and
planetary revolution, terrestrial changes, and those movements




112               DNAMrIC  AGOENTS. -
in the refined essences of the human brain which constitute
Thoughts.  In our philosophy, God is God, and nature is nature-the two being eternally distinct, though intimately ooma
rected and co-related with each other.




CHAPTER IX.
DEFECTe OF PREVAILING  COSMOLOGICAL THEORIES
IF the foregoing theory of the origin, structure, dynamic
agents, and laws, of tne universe, has any foundation in truth,
it can scarcely fail to throw important light upon some still
ulterior questions relating to the prescribed distances, motions,
reciprocal attractions, etc., of planetary and sidereal creations.
It may even show that some time-honored theories upon these
subjects, however sanctioned by the authority of great names,
are, in certain particulars, radically defective; and this it will
do, if at all, by transcending them  in the ease, naturalness,
and completeness with which it accounts for certain existing
phenomena.
It was supposed by Sir Isaac Newton, that all rotatory and
orbitual motion of the heavenly bodies, originated from a primary and external impulse received from the hand of the Creator, as they were launched into space. To this was added the
philosophical axiom, that any body put in motion in a vacuum,
will continue forever to move in a straight line, unless deflected from  its course by some other force.  This deflecting
force, as applied to the motions of the planets, Newton found
in the law of gravitation, which was by him  proved to apply
to all planetary bodies.  By the precisely counterbalancing
action of these two forces, called the centrifugal and centripetal
forces, the motions of the planets were supposed to be regulated in circular or elliptical orbits round the sun, the specific




114         DEFECTS  OF  PREVAILING
distances of these being greater or less according to the near.
hess or remoteness of the point where these two forces were
exactly balanced against each other.
But Newton soon found this theory, seemingly perfect in
other respects, encumbered with difficulties in respect to the
stability of the system.  He found that the different planets
were not only attracted by the sun, but mutually attracted by
each other. These different attractions, varying in intensity in
the inverse ratio of the squares of distances, according to a
law discovered by Kepler, were accompanied by perturbations,
producing irregularities in orbitual motions which were subject to secular increase. The system, thus, left toits own internal provisions, seemed to prophesy its own progressive
derangement, and its ultimate entire disorganization; and
Newton felt impelled to call upon God to avert such a catastrophe, by supplying a force from without, which he supposed
did not exist within, the system.
The calculations of subsequent mathematicians, however,
served, in a good degree, to dispel these gloomy forebodings,
and led to the conclusion that the irregularities and apparent
incipient derangements in the motions of the system, would
finally reach their maximum, after which there would be a
gradual return to the condition of primeval equilibrium; that
thence there would be a progressive tendency to irregularity
in the opposite direction, to be succeeded by another reaction;
and that the perpetual vibrations of these irregularities, like
the oscillations of a mighty pendulum, would serve to mark
the hours and moments of eternity!
This conception of the laws, internal arrangements, and
movements, of the system, together with the apparent mathe.
matical evidences which have been arrayed in its support,?an not otherwise than be regarded as one of the greatest




COSMOLOGICAL  THEORIES.                   115
triumphs of human genius.  Yet, even while overwhelmed
with a sense of its sublimity, one can not well suppress a sense
of sadness as he contemplates its cold, mechanical lifelessness
-I had almost said Godlesessness! Contemplated in this light,
the universe appears somewhat analogous to an ingeniously
constructed machine, which is wo'ind up, and left to go of
itself, while its maker withholds a.! further exercise of power
from it, and forever withdraws all immediate personal care
over it, as being unnecessary. With this philosophy impressed
upon our minds, we look up into the heavens, and, though we
behold incessant motion and activity in every direction, we
see no necessary evidence of immanent life or spirit-nothing
with which our souls can sympathize as the present pervading
Animus and constantly impelling Cause of the phenomena we
behold; and it is only by an almost painful stretch of the
powers of inductive reasoning, that we can attain to any substantial conviction of a spiritual or voluntative Cause, as having
been connected with the system even at its origin!
It may be added, that thousands of persons, on arriving at
a full comprehension and conviction of the truth of the Newtonian theory of a merely mechanical universe, and of vacuity
in the interplanetary and interstellar spaces, have anxiously
inquired, " Where and what, then, is that spiritual world to
which our interior natures aspire, and for which Revelation
encourages us to hope?" and nature, viewed in this aspect,
has not only refused to respond in language which appeals to
the conceptive and reasoning powers, but has interposed a
cloud of darkness and doubt between the inquirer and the subject which he seeks to comprehend! In its efforts to satisfy
the irrepressible yearnings of the spirit within, Fancy has
erected a formless, unextended, unsubstantial-even unaerial
— figment, that bears no -relation to space or the material uni



116         DEFEC  S  OF  PREVAILING
verse, or to any of the rational faculties of the soul; and in
this mankind have been told to have faith, as the place or state
of future human destination! But a rational faith in such an
utter inconceivability is out of the question, and an extra.
rational and mere dogmatic faith, in such an idea, can not
generally, if ever, be kept fiee from superstition, and hence,
from  a greater or less degree of mental degradation and'slavery. Hence, in case of full adoption of the Newtonian
system of cosmogony, a determination to follow only the convictions of reason will necessarily tend to skepticism with
reference to spiritual, and to s')me extent even with reference
to Divine things; and there is no latent force in the theory
which, by any developmen-, can ever correct this mental aberration.  In the spirit and tendency of this merely mechanical mode of philosophizing upon the universe, may, I
apprehend, be found the main cause of the growing materialism
and skepticism of these modern days, especially among minds
called scientific.
Subjected to the test of rationality, however, the Newtonian
system, in at least one of its features, seems to be almost as
bad off as the only spiritual and theological theories that can
be rationally associated with it. It predicates mutual gravitation of any two distant bodies, while it fails to recognize, if it
does not, by implication, entirely preclude the idea of, any
intervening gravitating agent.  But that any two bodies can
in any way act upon each other, either without immediate
contact, or the intervention of some substantial medium by
which they can touch each other, is utterly inconceivable, and
can no n' ore b   supposed than any effect can be supposed to be
disconnected with an adequate cause.  We do not, however,
charge the theory with absolutely and necessarily precluding
such a medium; but by manifesting, at its very starting point




COSMOLCGICAI  THEORIES.                   117
such a strong inslination to the idea of absolute vacuity in the
interplanetary spaces, it not only fails to provide such a medium, but, in effect, discountenances the idea that such exists.
In the theory which we have maintained in the preceding
pages, however, the medium  in question is abundantly provided.
Moreover, the system as conceived by Newton can not, after
all, be contemplated without some degree of apprehension in
regard to its safety. For, notwithstanding the figurings of sub.
sequent mathematicians respecting the reaction which tends to
restore lost equilibrium, if we do away with the immediate
immanence of Divine Vitality-in other words, with the im
mediate presence and agency of that degree of the Divine Essence and Power of which the universe forms a suitable
habitation, and which is necessary to the life and functional
operations of the latter as of one Body-then there are many
chances against the existence of an absolute equilibrium in the
different parts and forces of the great Whole: and if there is
ever a disturbance of the equilibrium to an extent which can
not be entirely restored by a counter oscillation, even though
this be only the fraction of the weight of a planet, or even the
amount of a single pound, the disturbance will progressively
aggravate, and a universal catastrophe will be the final and
inevitable result!
If, therefore, the stability of the universe depends merely
upon the nice counterpoise of the centrifugal and centripetal
forces, as independent of this constant Divine Force, and of
any elastic, active, and reactive medium to keep the various
celestial bodies within prescribed boundaries, then human reason can not withhold the suspicion of danger as it contemn
plates the stupendous Machine, or suppress the apprehension
that it may one day fly to pieces, and involve us all in the




118          NO  VACUITY  IN  SPACE.
common wreck! This apprehension greatly increases, when
it is considered that Newton's hypothesis of absolute vacuity
in the spaces through which the celestial bodies move-an
hypothesis upon which, according to him, the equilibrium
between the centrifugal and centripetal forces necessarily
depends-has proved unfounded, and that the phenomena of
retardation of comets in their orbits, has proved that the interplanetary spaces are pervaded by an attenuated fluid or
ether, capable of exerting some resistance to their progress.
It is here submitted, with all due deference to the superior
intelligence of many who have never entertained a doubt of
the entire truthfulness of Newton's theory, that that theory,
at least without essential modifications, would probably never
have been propounded by Newton, or adopted by others, had
the theory of the nebular origin of the universe, with its accompanying evidences, and natural corollaries, been previously
subjected to familiar contemplation.
We now proceed to briefly unfold a theory respecting the
foregoing subjects, which, whatever may be its imperfections,
seems to the wliter, at least, much less encumbered with difficulties than the merely mechanical theory of Newton, while
it is certainly more compatible with the idea of an immediate
and universal Divine superintendence.




CHAPTER X.
GROUNDS OF STABILITY AND GENERAL ECONOMY 01
THE COSMICAL STRUCTURE.
As a preliminary step toward a due comprehension and
appreciation of the theory now to be offered respecting the internal forces, movements, grounds of stability, and general
economy of the universe, the reader is requested to bear distinctly in mind that principles operate indifferently upon a
large and a small scale-that the magnitudes and distances of
the objects to which they apply, are absolutely of no conse.
quence as affecting the essential nature of their operations.
Now, in the light of this truism, let us suppose some simple
vegetable form-say an apple-to be placed under a microscope so exceedingly powerful as to magnify it to the apparent
size of that immense spheroid of stellar orbs with their planets,
which is known to usas the Milky Way, and in the midst of
which our world is situated. We will suppose that the pores
of the apple would, in that case, appear of a magnitude equally
great with the interplanetary and interstellar spaces, and that
the molecules would be magnified to the apparent size of
worlds. Moreover, the internal motions of the molecules, observing the natural order of vegetative circulation and progression, would bear a certain resemblance to the rotatory and
orbitual motions of suns and planets, and all, obeying the law
by which the distinct stratifications and compartments of the
pple are formed, would give an appearance somewhat similar




120           GENEIRAL  ECON DOMY  OF
to distinct systems, and systems of systems of suns and
planets, as these are successively brought into the field of a
telescope.  Suppose, that after this optical arrangement is
completed, some learned Newtonian astronomer, who is entirely ignorant of its nature, is invited, on some clear even.
ing, to look through the instrument, which is represented to
him as a newly invented telescope, instead of a microscope.
The astronomer gazes with wonder and astonishment, and
thinks he has obtained a new and favorable view of some
stellar and planetary creation which has not before appeared
to him exactly in the same aspect.
"Well, Mr. Astronomer," demands an inquirer, "what is
your opinion respecting the origin of the motions, the laws of
operation, and the source of stability, of the system which you
are now surveying?"
"Why, undoubtedly," replies the astronomer, "the same
principles are applicable here that apply to all planetary and
stellar creations;" and if he added no more, he would thus
far be correct. But he continues, " Undoubtedly each one of
those bodies received a certain mechanical impulse as it was
launched into space from the hand of the Creator. Each one
moves in a vactum, and would have continued its primitive
motion in a direct line forever, had it not been deflected from
its course by an equal and perpetually operative force of grav.
itation, whence its present motion is in a circular or elliptical
orbit. If either one of those revolving bodies," continues
the sage astronomer, "were arrested in its orbit, and the cen.
trifugal force were thus destroyed, gravitation would immedi.
ately draw it to the central sun, and this would probably so
derange the equilibrium of the system  as to ultimately pro.
duce a universal catastrophe!"
If the astronomer is now shown a direct view of the real




'ILE  COSMICAL  STRUCTURE.                  121
subject of these speculations-is shown that it is merely an
apple-he will consider this as of itself a sufficient refutation
of his speculations, so far as that object was concerned; because he considers the internal molecular motions of the apple
as being governed by a principle of life, and this he regards
as of itself amply sufficient to keep up the equilibrium of its
particular parts.
But each cluster, or firmament, of suns, with its planets, is,
in principle, but an apple on a large scale. Some of the more
distant, and less easily resolvable, nebulae, indeed, appear to a
telescope of small power, almost in the identical form  and
size of an apple; and, viewed apart from all other considerations than those suggested by their own proper aspects, as the
white, milky spots, which they present to telescopes incapable
of resolving them, one might have easily conceived that they
were agitated by internal motions; but the conception that
these internal motions were referable to external and mechanical impulses, and that the moving bodies (which the distance
of view reduces to molecules) were sustained in equilibrio by
counter impulses, according to the Newtonian theory of planetary motion, would have been as unnatural and far-fetched,
as would be precisely the same theory applied to the internal
molecular motions of an apple.
Indeed, it is conceivable that one might be miraculously
elevated above the whole plane of sidereal creations to a
distance so great that, as he looked down upon the whole universe of firmaments, the whole might present one unresolved
mass apparently, from that distance, no larger than the size
of an apple.  Now, when we remember that in the workings
of principles there is absolutely no distinction made between
great and small bodies, how naturally may it be supposed that
the whole universe, with all its included sub-universes is per
11




122           GENERAL ECONOMY OF
vaded, like the apple, by an internal principle of Life, anr.
that this is the cause of all1 its internal motions, and the sustainer of equilibrium among all its constituent orbs, which, to
it, are in reality no more than what the molecules are to the
apple!.. 
But let us endeavor to obtain a more distinct view of some
of the constituent elements embraced in this general theory:
Our theory, before propounded, of constantly emanative, as
well as constantly gravitative, forces as connected with planets,
suns, systems, and firmaments, seems, if correct, to necessitate the conclusion that universal space is constantly filled
with substance. This:substance is in the solid, fluid, aeriform,
and ethereal states.  In its: densest state, it may be. supposed
to be indefinitely more dense- than the heaviest substances
known upon earth, and in its rarest state, it may be supposed
to be indefinitely more rare than electricity, and between these
two extremes, there are probably all intermediates. - The uni.
verse may thus be regarded as only one vast: ethereal Body,
having in its general mass- innumerable points of condensation,
which are suns, planets, etc...-.....Now, the force which originally induced nebulous circles,
firmaments,. suns, planets, satellites, etc., to assume their respective orbits at specific distances from  their primaries, and
which perpetually operates (with some modifications, according to different stages of progression) to keep these bodies in
those general orbits after they are assumed, may, in a degree,
be conceived by the following illustration: The ponderable
atmosphere of the earth at a level with the sea, is relatively
dense, while at the tops of the highest mountains it is rela
tively rare; and at an altitude of forty-five or fifty miles, atcording to-received estimates, its existence ceases to be. appreciable.  Hydrogen gas is much lighter than the ponderable




T fE  COSMICAL  STRUCTURE.                 123
terrestrial atmosphere at a level with the sea;; and when confined in a balloon, it ascends, with its envelope, to an altitude
determined by the degree of buoyancy of gas and balloon
united, and there it floats until: dissipated.' Now, each solar
and planetary body in space, is surrounded by a calorific
luminous, electric, and ethereal atmosphere, which, in like manner, varies in density and power with the distance from the
center of condensation; and, by virtue of the respective
super-aerial atmospheres of any two bodies sustaining to each
other the relations of primary and secondary, the secondary
body assumes an orbitual distance from  the primary, which,
as in the case of the balloon, is governed by the law of equilibrium-which distance, however, is somewhat modified by
centrifugal force.              -  -:':  
This illustration of the balloon, however, is very imperfect,
and only serves to enable the reader to approximate to a conception of the true idea; for we are not to corisider any planet
or other celestial body, as having the same degree of:afinity
for its primary as the balloon has for the earth, or as being
attracted to it in exactly the same way, or as it would be, if
there were no greater dissimilarity between its matter and the
matter of the primary, than there:is between the matter of
the balloon and that of the earth.': But each celestial body is
composed of materials, and possesses calorific, electric, odic,
and other forces and properties, and hence affinities, peculiar
to itself, and which, in:general, differ from those of any other
given body in proportion to the distance of its natural situation. Moreover, each planet, sun, etc., as before intimated,
is only the condensed center of a general ethereal body of no
particularly defined circumference, but whose refined emanations, growing more rare with each remove from their centers,
extend indefinitely into space. In this way, each body inter



124           GENERAL  ECONOMY  OP
communicates with, and acts upon, all kindred bodies, and is
acted upon by them in return; the action consisting in an in.
terblending of the forces and  properties of the different
bodies.  When this interblending is harmonious, the action is
attractive; when it is conflict'ng, it is repulsive. Beyond cer
tain limits of distance, the interblending actions of any two
bodies, however dissimilar in constitution, is always harmonious-and hence attractive; within those limits of distance,
the action is crowding and conflicting, and hence repellant.
Suppose, then, that by some controlling arm, or some acci
dental impediment, a planet were suddenly arrested in its
orbit, and were thus relieved from the influence of centrifugal
force: it would immediately be drawn toward its primary
with a force which would uniformly increase as the square of
the distance decreased, provided no counteracting force'were
developed by the approach to the central body. In falling inward, however, although the attractive force would, for a time,
betincreased (that is, until the previous centrifugal displacement was overcome), its elastic atmosphere would begin to
crowd more and more upon the elastic atmosphere of the sun,
and even its own solidified particles, by the increased calorific,
photic, electric, odic, and vital action due to the proximity of
the two bodies as centers of such action, would, in themselves,
develop an emanative or repellent force in respect to the primary; and, owing to these causes, the secondary body could
not approach within a certain distance of its primary, within
which distance the repellent force would be superior to the
attractive.
The same idea is involved in the theory (before propounded)
of the process by which secondary bodies were formed from
primaries-and which supposes that the secondaries are coin..
posed of'n equal quar.tity of attracted and emanated particles.




THE  COSMIOAL  STRUCTURE.                   125
As each indzvidual of these, acted upon by centrifugal force,
finds its equilibrium at the particular point where, by the union
Df all, the secondary body is formed, so the united mass of particles in the body thus formed, has no more tendency to draw
nearer to the primary than it has to emanate further from it.
Suppose, then, any particular secondary body should be
violently arrested in its orbit: it would evidently sink into
the ethereal atmosphere of its primary a distance measured
by its previous centrifugal displacement, which, in most cases,
would be considerable; but at some point between its former
orbit and the primary, it would attain to an exact equilibrium
between the attractive and emanative or repellent influences,
and there its inward motion would stop. If held there by
violence, and prevented from partaking of the general vortical
motion of the system, it would be to the cosmical system what
a mass of displaced particles, or a splinter of foreign matter,
would be to the human system; and the effect would be, an
inflammation, suppuration, and dissolution, of the part. For,
it is evident that in such a case the body would accumulate
heat and other repellent elements from the primary, more
rapidly than it could relieve itself of them, and sooner or later
these accumulations would be beyond its powers of endurance.
The particles in that case would separate in detail, and would
either be-digested and assimilated with the general mass of
the primary and its atmosphere, or, assuming the general revolutionary motion of the system, would be again thrown outward by the resultant centrifugal force, and would reaggregate
themselves at their original distance, and the planet would be
formed anew.
For an explanation of the principles on which all rotatory
and orbitual motion may originate, the reader is referred to an
earlier stage of this treatise, in which we spoke of the first




126          GENERAL  ECONOMY  OF
assumption of rotatory motion in the universal mass: and, by
considering the universe still as one general Body, interiorly
gravitating and emanating as in the beginning, he may conceive
how these motions, not only of the great general Body, but
of all its included and correspondent sub-bodies, is perpetually
sustained by a constant supply of the same forces which ope.
rated in the beginning, and which constantly inflow from the
inexhaustible sources of Divine Spiritual Heat and Light,
which mean Love and Wisdom, and which constituted the
Alpha and Omega, the first and the last, the beginning and the
ending of this grand creative operation! What can be a more
natural thought than that the universe is constructed, and that
all its functional operations are carried on, according to the
foregoing principles! and what hypothesis relating to this
grand subject is so free from difficulties!
If the universe is actually constructed on these principles,
it manifestly possesses (under the operations of its pervading
Divine Life) a self-regulating power which must necessarily
give it the utmost conceivable stability-the stability of an
almost infinite living Organism, exempted from all external
causes of death! Let planets be crowded out of their orbits,
if such a thing were possible (which it is not), and they will
either spontaneously return again, or new arrangements will be
assumed among their associate bodies, which will be according
to the law of equilibrium, and equally harmonious with the
previous condition. Let planets, or even whole systems, by
any imaginable means, be stricken out of existence: there
would be an immediate supplying of the vacuum-a healing
up of the part-and scarcely a cicatrice would remain. In short,
let the system, by some imagined foreign force, be wounded
and deranged in almost any conceivable way: it would still
contain an internal power of recuperation. But as a Divinely




THE  COSMICAL  STRUCTURE.                 127
constituted Fabric, destined to unspeakably noble and glori
ous ends, it is entirely free from all causes of material dis.
turbance, and will live on until its highest purposes are fully
attained, when, as one Grand Man, it will change its whole
mode of being for one which is more spiritual, more Divine,
and inconceivably more glorious!




CHAPTER XI.
PARICUTLAR CONSIDERATIONS CONCERNING THE GENEBIS AND
MODUS OPERANDI OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM.
LITTLE more needs to be said, by way of applying the fore.
going principles to the genesis and modus operandi of our own
Solar System. It has been before intimated that the identical
principles are involved here that were concerned in the origin
and government of the universe, as a whole, with some
modifications in the form of their results, as owing to differences of conditions, and that the seven-fold series is observed
in the laws, operations, and successive stages of unfolding, in
both instances. In both instances there are the successive and
ascending degrees of Chaos, Nucleation, Spheroidation, Circular Agregation, Segregation, Secondary Spheroidation, and the
complete and ultimate cosmical unfolding. In both cases the
dynamic agents of Heat, Light, and Electricity, with thei
corresponding triad of odic elements are involved, to which,
in both cases, is superadded the all-pervading and controlling
Divine Life Principle.
The chief differences in the specific forms of developments
in the two cases, lies between their fourth, fifth, sixth, and
seventh degrees. In the series of developments through which
we have supposed the universe, as one whole Body, to have
passed, we have supposed the fourth development to be that
of nebulous rings, surrounding the primary spheroid-or, at
least, segments of rings so large, and of such various parts, as




THE  SOLAR  SYSTEM.                       129
to preclude the possibility of an aggregation of the materials
of either ring or segment, into one spheroidal body; while, in
the Solar System, the size and other conditions of each of these
cycloidal nebulae  were, with apparently one exception, such as
to admit of an aggregation into one spheroidal body.  The
exception here referred to relates tu, the mass of materials
fiom which originated the asteroids.  The fifth or segregative
process in the universal development, consists, according to
our hypothesis, of the division of each nebulous ring or segment. into a multitude of angular and indefinitely formed
masses; whereas the fifth and corresponding development in
the Solar System, consisted (in every case except that of the
asteroids. as before mentioned) simply of the brealking up of
the nebulous ring, and the assemblage of its parts into one
body. The processes of the sixth developnent, both of the
Universe and of the Solar System, were perfectly identical,
except that in the former case solar spheres, and in the latter,
the gaseous and incandescent spheres of nascent planets, were
the result.  The seventh development of the universe-consisted of the unfolding of the identical forms which were the
product of the sixth development of the solar system, viz.,
the forms of nascent planets, as aforesaid; whereas the seventh
development of the solar system, consisted of the superficial
solidification of those bodies, and such other changes in them
as prepared them for the introduction of the first and lowest
of the organic forms, by  which they  were subsequently
tenanted.
But although the Universal System  and the Solar System
thus each consists of a complete octave of developments, each
octave has its own particular key-note, which differs fiom that
of the other.  That is to say, they do not begin at the same
place in the staff, nor does one begin where the other ends.




130             ORIGIN  OF  COMETS.
This, however, does not in any respect destroy the corre
spondence of the principles which both involve.
After the sun and planets were thus formed by agglomer,
ations and condensations of the originally diffused mass of
chaotic materials, there would naturally still remain in diffusion through the general sphere of the system, a quantity
of mundane matter, so great as to be liable, under the further
action of the law of condensation, to ultimately assume forms
more or less distinctly visible. This consideration hints at
the origin and character of those erratic, and in some cases
apparently almost lawless bodies, called comets. These are
mere excrescences upon. the system-incidents of previous
developments; and their anomalas of constitution and motions
are probably the results of their borderings upon the extreme
confines of the forces and laws provided for the government
of the system.  Aside from  some illustrations of cosmical
laws which they afford, they probably subserve no purpose
which is much more important than that of the amusement
of astronomers.
This idea of residual nebular matter also accounts for that
singular nebulous and oblately spheroidal envelope of the sun,
which is called the " Zodiacal Light." Probably neither the formation of this nor of the comets, was specifically contemplated
in the original plan of the Creator, but the development of
each was incidental to the uniform operations of established
laws.
As originated our own solar system, so we may suppose
originated all other solar systems in space, with differences in
the forms of the operations and results of identical principles,
according to d'fferences in material conditions and local
circumstances.




CHAPTER XII.
SYNTHETICAL VIEW  OF THE ORIGIN OF THE EARTH
AND ITS GEOLOGICAL FORMATIONS
THE last developed forms of the universal cosmical struc.
ture, viz., the distinctly segregated masses of planetary matter
before described, may be viewed in the light of Seed of the
great Tree of previous Being, and Germs of a future and corresponding creation.  By means of a generative influence
constantly descending from  the Divine Spirit, as the Source
ofall subordinate existences, a corresponding octave of unfoldings now ensue, which may be called the geognostic unfoldings. The successive stages of these, which, like other systems
of creation, form a seven-fold series, seem, both in the light of
principles and facts, to observe the following  order and'
relations 
PRIMARY TRINITY.               SECONDARY TRINITY.
1. Chaotic or unformed fiery  4. The" Transition Period," chavapor.                          racterized mainly by aerial
developments and changes.
2. Spheroidal nucleus (liquid  5. The " Secondary Period," chaand gaseous).                   racterized by distinctions of
climates and  seasons, and
theircorresponding sedimentary deposits.
8, Granito-aqueous, or, super-  6. The "Tertiary," or, the vol.
ficially solidified and oceanic.  canic, lacustrine, fluvatile,
and abrasive Period.
ULTIMATE.
7. Recent or Alluvial Period,




132          ORIGIN  OF  THE  EARTH
In our descending or analytical view of creation, we apoke
briefly of some of the more superficial characteristics of these
terrestrial developments; but we will now glance at the aspects in which they will appear in the light of the a priori and
d posteriori processes of reasoning combined.
1. THE CHAOTIC STAGE.-In our analytical and analogical
view of the terrestrial system, we found abundant reason to
believe that our earth was formed from a mass of primeval
fiery vapor, as expressing material conditions antecedent to the
fiery liquid mass, of which, facts prove that our globe once
consisted. Following the further and obvious teachings of
analogy, as well as the intimations of certain celestial phenomena, we were led to the conclusion that this mass must
have been a result of a previous aggregation and segregation
of the materials of the solar atmosphere, of which an explanation is involved in the now apparently well-established theory
of the formation of the nebulous rings, and their subsequent
changes.
It seems' to be a well-founded opinion of believers in the
nebular theory, that the gaseous cycloid, whose condensation
resulted in the formation of the earth, must have originally
been nearly of the same shape and circumference with the
present orbit of the earth.  Now, the earth's orbit is not an
exact circle, but an ellipse, with the sun in one of its foci.
Consequently, at the separation of the materials of this ring
or cycloid at one part of its rim, and their aggregation at the
opposite part, whether this occurred at the perihelion or
aphelion point-the common mass thus formed must have
taken the elongated or ellipsoidal shape, and preserved superficially all the general geometrical properties of the previous
eircumsolar zone, on a reduced scale.
The first distinct form assumed by the materials of out




AND MOON.                              133
nascent planet, therefore, must have been that of an ellipsoid,
or, perhaps, more properly speaking, that of an egg somewhat
flattened in the direction of its shorter diameter. The two
ends of this ellipsoidal body, preserving, respectively, the
general qualities of what were its aphelion and perihelion
points when, during its previous and higher state of diffusion,
it encircled the sun, must now sustain toward each other the
relations of positive and negative.*   The atoms having  the
strongest affinity for the positive influence, therefore, would
naturally flow toward the positive end; and those having the
strongest affinity for the negative influence would flow toward
the negative end.  There would, therefore, be a tendency of
the particles to agglomerate and condense in the form  of a
separate nucleus near either end of the general body, or, more
accurately speaking, probably in either focus of the ellipse. If
the particles are sufficiently diverse from each other as to their
extreme degrees of positiveness or negativeness, and other
circumstances are favorable, the tendencies to agglomeration
and condensation at these two points, may result in the formation of a primary planet and  a satellite; or, if there  are
several degrees of matter widely distinguished by their relatively positive and negative qualities, a correspondingly complicated operation of the same principles and forces, may result in the formation of several satellites.
The idea of a tendency to, and condensation in, the foci of
the egg-shaped nebulous mass, thus forming a primary and a
satellite, and that this tendency indicates a law, is in precise
* In employing the terms " positive" and " negative," as above, it is not intended to
restrict the idea of the polar relations which they express, to a connection with electricity or magnetism. These relations may be supposed, in some sense, to subsist between the two extremes in the development of each of the imponderables. Reiclenbach, as we have seen, flund unmistakable indications of these polar relations existing
in the " odic" element, will its different varieties, by him discovered.
12




134           ORIGIN   OF  THE  EARTH.
accordance with, and explains, the fact, universal in the sola.
system, and doubtless in other departments of the cosmical
creation, that when bodies (whether planets or satellites) revolve in elliptical orbits, their primaries, or centers of gravity
are invariably situated in one of the foci of the ellipse,' pre
cisely where, according to our theory, such bodies must, in all
probability, have been originally formed.  It may be added
that, of the fact of this focality in the situation of primaries
with reference to the elliptic orbits of their secondaries, no
other hypothesis than the general one now under consideration
affords the slightest explanation.
Considering the earth and the moon as having, in this:way,
been formed respectively by condensations in the foci of the
same original nebulous mass, their origin and relations may
be considered as hinting at, if not exactly representing,-the
origin and relations of the two bodies of what are called
double stars, or binary systems. The diversity of colors generally observed as characterizing the two constituents of such
systems-the larger body being, in most cases, relatively red,
and the smaller relatively blue, as though they had divided
the prismatic colors between them-strongly intimates, of itself, something like a polar opposition in the materials of which
they are respectively composed, and gives additional weight
to the hypothesis of their original and nebulous connection.
The hypothesis of an original union in one nebulous body
of the materials of the earth and moon, seems, indeed, to be
necessary, if there is admitted to be any truth in the nebular
theory. But, if this hypothesis is true, it suggests a connection of a nature heretofore little suspected, as even now sub.
sisting between the earth and moon.  Taken in connection
with our doctrine of constant emanation, as well as constant
gratitation, of particles governed by the laws of assimilation,




ETIIEREAL ENVELOPE.                               1]05
elimination, and  polarization, it encourages, if possible,c even
more than a suspicion, that the earth  and moon are but condensed and oppositely polarized  points in  one common mass
of ethereal, mrsanetoid, or "odic" substance. Such an ethereal
mass, considered as the common calorific, photic, electric, odic,
nervoid, and vital sphere or atmosphere of the earth and moon.
would seem  to  be a necessary existence, according to principles involved in the discoveries of Reichenbach; while, on the
other hand, and in a still more emphatic sense, the earth and
moon in their present state, may be supposed  to  consist of
precipitated particles originally  held  in solution in their now
enveloping ethereal and imponderable menstruum.'
This field  or realm   of segregated  ether supporting  these
new  condensed points, may, in its present state, be considered
as an ultimate refinement of the primeval nebulous mass from
which  our world  and its satellite  had  their common  origin.
Though its ultimate attenuations, intercommingling with those
of kindred bodies (yet still preserving their identity) may be
supposed to extend indefinitely into space, the relatively dense,
* It is well ksnown that particular positions of the moon in respect to the earth, are
accompanied with marked effects upon somnambulists, cataleptics, and persons disposed to insanity; and it has from time immemorial been believed that certain lunar
positions have also a decided influence upon the vegetable and animal kingdoms.
During elipses of the sun, when the moon has been directly between that luminary
and the earth, hungry animals have been observed to suddenly cease eating, and become
apparently sad and dejected; and when eclipses have been total, birds have sometimes
been known to fall dead from their perches. Now, neither of these effects can be supposed to resu t from any modification of the force of grclitation as owing to the relative positions in such cases, of the earth, moon, and sun. But if we suppose, as is supposed above, that the earth and moon are enveloped in a common "odic" sphere of a
nervoid and semi-vital character, and that this changes in its polar relations and consequent qualities of influence upon living organisms, with every change of relative
position of the earth, moon, and sun, we have an easy solution of the phenomena in
question. The supposition of such a change of influence would seem to be countenanced by the results of Reichenbach's experimerrn with the revolving magnet, befbri
ipoken of.




136          ORIGIN  OF  THE  EARTH.
or trie rationally more obvious, portion of the body, still re.
tains, in all probability, the general shape and size of the
original nebula. If we suppose this spheroid of imponderable
matter to be rotating on its own proper axis once in twentyseven days, seven hours, and forty-three minutes, carrying the
earth and moon with it as its condensed foci, we have, in such
supposition, an explanation of the motion of the moon round
the earth as it appears to us, and of the motion of the earth
around the moon as it would be mathematically evident to an
inhabitant of the latter body. If this supposition is correct.
then neither body ought to move round the other as an abso.
lutely fixed point in the system, but both ought to revolve
around a common center-the axis of their common ethereal
and enveloping mass. But, considering the superior attractive
force of the earth over the moon, together with the superior
density of that whole end of the ethereal mass in which the
earth is situated, to that of the end in which the moon is
situated, this center of common revolution can probably vary
at most but a few hundred miles from the center of the earth,
and may be very nearly coincident with it.
I believe that astronomers are now pretty generally convinced that in binary stellar systems, one body not only
revolves around the other, but that the two bodies revolve
round a common center, situated somewhere between the
centers of the two, and nearest to the center of the larger one;
and to these motions, those of the binary system of the earth
and moon would, according to the foregoing hypothesis, present an exact analogy.
The earth, being the major or positive focal condensation of
the general ethereal and enveloping spheroid, has asumed
sufficient independence to admit of a diurnal revolution on its
own proper axes; but the moon, being the minor and nega




HINT  vONCERNING  TIDES.                   137
tive focus, still cont'nues in subjection to the force of the
general ethereal mass which is positive over it; and therefore,
keeping the same side always to the earth, it rotates only with
the rotation of the general mass.
If our hypothesis is correct, then not only ought the sides
of the moon turned to and from the earth, to be in opposite
polar relations, but there should be a slight elongation of the
moon in the same direction, presenting, in fact, the dwindled
and miniature form  of the original nebulous or present
ethereal spheroid.  On the same principle there mus- have
been a tendency to elongation in the form of the earth, while
the particles which compose it were in process of aggregation.
This tendency, however, so far as the solid, or less mobile materials of the earth are concerned, was corrected by its rotation on its axis, by the perpetual action of which, during
the period in which the earth passed from a fluid to a superficially solid state, the surface of the earth was rolled into
general rotundity.  But the mobility of the watery portions
of the earth's surface, was such as to preserve, in a degree,
their freedom to observe the original tendency to ellipticity,
which tendency is now manifested in the form of tides.  For
tides are only elongations of the mobile portions of the earth's
substance, in what we have supposed to be the direction of
the longer axis of the ethereal spheroid, which axis would
necessarily be in the direction of the earth and moon, admit.
ting these bodies, as points cf condensation in the general
body, to occupy generally the two foci of the latter.  There
are, doubtless, for the same reasons, atmospheric tides which
are greater than the oceanic tides in proportion to Ahe greater
mobility of the atmospheric particles; and had not the earth
assumed a rotatory motion (from causes identical with those
which produced a similar motion in other bodies, and which




138             ORIGIN OF THE EARTH
have been before explained), it would doubtless have con
densed (as we have supposed the moon to have done), in a
permanently oval form, whose opposite ends would, if the
expression  may  be  allowed,  have  represented  solidified
tides.*
With the evolutions and condensations above supposed, or,
at least, with something not essentially differing from  them,
the materials of which our earth is composed, may be supposed to have passed out of their first or chaotic state.
2. The SECOND  stage of the earth's developments, as obviously the next orderly stage of progression from  the first,
was that of a spheroidal igneous nucleus.  This stage, indeed,
commenced the moment the nucleus began to appear; for
then the general body, by the distinction developed in its
parts, began to pass out of the state of absolute chaos.  It
may be considered. that this development closed when the
outer limits of this igneous nucleus became distinctly defined,
and when its merely molten and fluid substance became fully
distinguished from its gaseous envelope. 
3. The THIRD stage may be denominated the granito-aqueous,
it being the stage characterized by the formation of the first
granite crust, and by the development of the oceans by which
the latter was generally covered. This, completing as it did
the first Trinity of terrestrial developments, brought the earth
from  a previously elastic and yielding, to a solid and perma* These suggestions, tending, as they do, to an essential modification of the Newtonian theory of tides, might be greatly fortified by additional considerations; but to
present these in their proper force, discussions would be required which would be too
occult for a popular treatise.
t The foregoing considerations in respect to the first and second stages of the earth's
formation, are admitted to be mainly a priori, but to those who can perceive effects
as involved in their causes, they will not be without weight. In respect to the remains
ing stages of development, we will not only have the evidence of cacses, but of theil
effects, as still observabl in the earth's crust.




EARLY  ATMOSPHERIC  CONDITIONS.  139
nent state, and thus completed its constitution merely as a
planetary body.
4. The FOURTH stage was characterized mainly by aerial developments and changes. It embraces that vast period during
which the rocks of the Cambrian, Silurian, Old Red Sandstone,
and Carboniferous systems were formed.  At the commencement of this period, the atmosphere must of necessity have
been in an exceedingly crude and impure state. Besides other
gross and noxious elements, it must.have borne in its bosom
all, or nearly all, of the carbonic acid gas which subsequently
became condensed in the mountain limestone and various
other limestone deposits, and the carbon of which, parting with
its oxygen, became embodied in the immense beds of mineral
coal, found, more or less, in almost every quarter of the earth.
An atmosphere thus surcharged with this noxious vapor, -must
nave been incompatible with the existence of any forms of
organic life, except those of a low order; and accordingly we'ind that the plants and animals of this vast period were, as
shown-by their fossil remains, exclusively such as inhabited
the ocean and the marshy and frequently submerged places in
its vicinity-situations intermediate between the properly
marine and the properly terrestrial.
It was, doubtless, owing mainly, if not wholly, to atmos
pheric causes that the solar rays during this period had but
little influence upon the surface of the earth, and that a nearly
uniform  temperature prevailed at all latitudes and at all seasons.  Geologists have usually attempted to account for the
high degree and general uniformity of this temperature, as
indicated by the universally tropical nature of the plants and
animals of this period, by referring it to a radiation of the
internal heat of the earth, which it is supposed must, at that
early period, have been much more intense than in subsequent




140         ORIGIN  OF  THE  EARTH.
times., But the mystery seems to be quite as well, if not bet
ter, accounted for in the consideration that while the atmosphere was so excessively dense as it must have been while
loaded with so much carbon and carbonic acid, its pressure
must have been correspondingly great; and it is well known
that every increase of atmospheric pressure is attended with an
increase of heat. It is not improbable, however, that both
of these causes had something to do in the production of the
superior heat of these times.
The scene which would have been presented to a human
spectator, could such an one have been placed upon the surface of the earth at this time, would have been gloomy and
cheerless in the extreme. He would probably at no time have
beheld either clouds or decided sunshine, but a dim and undefined luminescence, caused by the sunbeams in passing athwart
the thick and stagnant atmosphere. No star-beam could have
penetrated the dense aerial envelope to relieve the gloom of
night; and, for the same reason, the range of horizontal vision,
even at noonday, must have been  confined within narrow
limits. All diversity of landscape must, in the earlier part
of this period, have been merged in one wide waste of waters.
This, however, was, in later times, partially relieved by extensive districts of low, marshy land, on which the soft and succulent vegetation grew with the rankest luxuriaxce. No bird
yet winged the air, or gladdened the forest with its song; no
beast prowled through the thick jungles of fern and sigillaria,
and no herds lowed upon the fields of moss and equiseta; and,
except the rolling of the ocean waves, the plashing of the finny
tribe, and the occasional rumblings of subterranean fires, the
most profound and gloomy silence reigned over the face of the,
globe!
If, therefore, in the first stage of the first Trinity of devel.




NEW  RED  SANDSTONE.                    141
opments, the whole mass of terrestrial materials was in a state
that may be designated as chaotic, we find here, in the first
stage of the second Trinity, a corresponding condition as relating to the whole mass of atmospheric materials, and of its
accompanying developments as the initial steps of terrestrial
organic creation. Taken as a whole, however, the changes of
this period brought conditions on the earth's surface inteo
something like a systematic, or what may be called rudiment.
ally organized, form.
5. The FIFTH development was characterized by distinction
of climates as prevailing in different latitudes, and by warm
and cold seasons, as owing to the revolution of our planet
around the sun; hence, also, by new kinds of geological deposits, and higher degrees of organic life..This development
was comprised in the period commencing with the New Red
Sandstone, and ending with the close of the Chalk formation.
The records of the general conditions of this period are very
distinctly preserved upon the leaves of the rocky book.  On
the laminaee of the New  Red Sandstone rocks in various
localities (and especially in the valley of the Connecticut
River), are found the distinct footprints of birds of various
species. These appear to have been impressed upon the sandy
and clayey margin of an ocean at low tide, and to have been
covered up by successive thin layers of sand and clay drifted
in by the swelling tide. On the same rocks occur marks whose
angles and other characteristics clearly prove them to have
been made by frost.  They are in form exactly identical with
those which are now produced by frost in the mud upon the
oorders of a stream. These appear to have been covered over
and preserved, in like manner with the tracks, by the detritus
swept in by the returning tide.  But it is noteworthy that,
although these tracks and frost maiks occur in abundanc




142           ORIGIN   OF  THE  EARTH.
above and below each ether in the same system of rocks. the
two are never found upon the same lamina-as though the
birds, during the frosty season, were entirely absent, having
migrated to a warmer climate, to return again with the return
of summer.
On the same strata are also sometimes found impressions
which could only have been made by the pattering of raindrops during the passage of a small shower-cloud; and the
forms of these sometimes even infallibly indicate the course
in which the wind was blowing at the time!
Here, then, is the earliest distinct indication of the prevalence of atmospheric conditions somewhat similar to those
which now obtain upon the earth's surface.  We find, here,
unmistakable evidences of summer and winter, warm and cold
latitudes, rain, winds, clouds, and sunshine-conditions which
clearly could not have existed to any great extent, during any
previous period. 
Concerning the relics of the olden time, from which these
atmospheric and terrestrial, conditions are inferred, professor
Hitchcock (to. whom the scientific world is much indebted for
bringing them  to light) remarks:   It is a most interesting
thought, that while millions of men, who have striven hard to
transmit some trace of their existence to future generations,
have sunk into utter oblivion, the simple footsteps of animals
that existed thousands, nay, tens of thousands, of years ago,
should remain as fresh and distinct as if yesterday impressed,
even though nearly every other vestige of their existence has
vanished.  Nay, still more strange is it, that even the pattering of a shower at that distant period, should have left marks
equally distinct, and registered with infallible certainty the
direction of the wind." 
* itchcock's Geology, p. 155




FIRST  MAMMALIA.                      143
The terrestrial animals of this period were almost exclu
sively oviparous, partaking largely of the sauroidal, or lizard
like type, which latter remark is even applicable to the birds.
Toward the close of the period, however, an animal appeared
which may be regarded as a transition link between the
oviparous and viviparous.  It was an animal of the class Marsupialia; in other words, an animal with a pouch, like that of
the opossum, or kangaroo, in which it sheltered and nourished its young for a season after their birth, the same
being yet too feeble and imperfectly developed to endure
exposure to the outer elements. It has hence been remarked
that, "though the young of this animal were born alive, they
were only half born, as it were," and needed a kind of sup.
plementary gestation to fit them  for life in the external
world.
Like the fifth development or member of every other sevenfold series, therefore, this is characterized by the assumption of
distinctness, or partition, in forms and gradations of forms,
fiom a state of previous and comparative indistinctness.  The
principle of segregation is here distinctly observed, the same
as it was in the fifth stage of the universal creation.  Each
one of these forms, being yet transitional and incomplete, is,
as it were, a nucleated point in the previously chaotic materials
and their involved principles; and therefore the whole development, being the second of the Secondary Trinity, has a certain correspondence to the second of the Primary Trinity,
which was characterized by a nucleation of the materials of
the earth as a whole.
6. The SIXTH stage of the earth's formation was comprised
in the whole period commonly termed the Tertiary and Diluvial periods.  It commenced immediately after that remarkable marine, terrestrial, and atmospheric change which mus




144          ORIGIN  OF  THE  EARTH.
necessarily have accompanied the great Chalk fformation, a <i
closed immediately prior to the commencement of the present
or Alluvial period.  It was distinguished from  the previous
stage of terrestrial developments, mainly by its lacustrine,
volcanic, and fluvatile conditions, and by the erosive, leveling,
and harmonizing operations which, especially near the close of
the period, occurred on the earth's surface. These conditions
were evidently an improvement upon previous ones.  The
earth became more extensively diversified by mountains and
valleys, forests. fields, and running streams. The quantity of
upland and fertile soil was greatly increased; the atmosphere
was freed from previous pestilential vapors; the climates were
rendered more salubrious, and all things were more compat.
ible with the existence of higher species in the organic king
doms.  Accordingly, even in the lower strata of this formatiol.
there are found the remains of animals of decidedly mammiferous species.  These are of the order Pachydsrmata
(thick-skinned), and of comparatively low organization. But as
conditions advanced and new strata were deposited, Higher
species successively made their appearance, organic life all the
while assuming more analogy to existing types, until, toward
the close of the period, there was, in many instances, an actual
shading off into species which now inhabit the earth. This
latter remark is equally applicable to the vegetable, as it is to
the animal, kingdom.
About the close of this period, there appears to have been
a remarkable fall of atmospheric temperature, accompanied
by a submergence of the greater portion of land in the
northern and temperate regions, in seas filled with floating
icebergs.  These icebergs, frequently reaching to the bottom
of the ocean, have scraped along over the earth's surface,
clashed violently aga'nst its prominenes, torn fragments of




DILUVIAL  AGENCY.                     145
rock from their original beds, pushed them along before them,
the friction rounding off their angles, and reducing many of
them to sand and pebbles.  Sometimes large masses of rock
would get wedged in between, or thrown upon the tops of,
blocks or projections of ice, and would be floated to great distances and scattered over the country.  Boulder rocks which
must have been transported in some such way, have been
identified with rocks " in place" to which they must have originally belonged, from a few hundred yards to several hundred
miles to the north of where they were found. Sometimes
boulders of great magnitude have been carried over steep and
high mountains, and are not unfrequently found lodged upon
their summits and scattered over their southern declivities;
and the long-continued passage of rooky fragments and detritus transported in this way, has worn scratches, and sometimes
deep groves in the mountain rock,-all of which have the same
general direction, which is nearly north and south-proving
that such was the general direction of the current. By this
operation, which was evidently long-continued, rugged mount.
ain escarpments were reduced; deep hollows were filled up,
and the face of Nature was made to assume fairer proportions.
In short, the terrestrial structure being generally completed,
this final operation (to illustrate a great thing by a diminutive
comparison) seems to have been the smoothing and sandpapering process to which it was subjected, before being
applied to its ultimate and principal use as the habitation of
its future tenant, MAN.
This superficial arnootmlng and rounding of the earth, and
its completion as a habitable ylobe, nelng the third member of
the Secondary Trinity of terrestrial developments, manifestly
bears a certain correspondence to the third member of the
Primary Trinity, or the granito-aqueous development, which
13




146          ORIGIN  OF  THE  E kRTH.brought the earth to completeness, considered merely as a
planetary sphere.
7. TIhe SEVENTH terrestrial development, which now ensues,
is that which is going on at the present time. It is characterized by sedimentary deposits from  existing waters, and by
the oceanic, terrestrial, and atmospheric changes which are now
imperceptibly going on; and its ushering in was accompanied
by the introduction of MAN, together with most of the animals
and plants of existing species. This, therefore, is the grand
culminating point of all terrestrial creations, and brings the
seven-fold progressive series to a completion.  It is the grand
point that was aimed at in the beginning of beginnings, and.
the great object the accomplishment of which each inter
mediate movement was intended to subserve; and now that
it is attained, the previous conflicts of elements-the clashings
of an impetuous nature, as if reaching forward and striving
impatiently for the attainment of its final destiny, are lulled
into repose. The: heavings of the earthquake and the spoutings of subterranean fire through the broken strata which were
so devastating in previous ages, have now in a great measure
subsided, or occur only in limited districts and at long intervals.  Mountain and plain, forest and field, ocean and atmos.
phere now  testify their common satisfaction with the end
which has been gloriously achieved; and man, undisturbed,
proceeds to beautify and adorn the earth, and, with no other
interruptions than such as are due to his own folly, pursues his.rounds of progress toward a destiny still more glorious and
sublime!
Of course the foregoing remarks in reference to the genesis
of the earth, are to be considered only in the light of a
gene-nil survey of the subject to which they relate, and as
being intended merely tP  establish general principles and




OUR  METHOD  AND  CONCLtUSIONS.   147
analogies to be used as aids in discovering or confirming ulterior and corresponding truths. Such being our main object,
we have abstained from descriptions of non-essential minutia
which may be found in the geological books. We have, how
ever, recognized all facts which have any essential bearing on
the subject of our speculations, and by the aid of these facts,
and of the general laws of causation and analogy which govern
them, and necessarily connect them with corresponding antecedents and sequences, we have inferred the general nature of
those necessary links of the system which are lost to sensuous
perception. Hence we have commenced with descriptions of
conditions far more primitive than those from which geological
writers in general have started, and by the aid of the correspondences existing between one system of developments and
another, as exhibited in the law of the seven-fold series, we
have endeavored to exhibit the roots of the tree of Geology
as growing upon the soil of Astronomy.
If the whole subject, as thus unfolded, exhibits a self-sup.
porting and self-proving consistency, it in no small degree
tends to establish the correctness and importance of the method
of reasoning from which it rece'ves its support.




CHAPTER X:II.
THE  GEOLOGICAL AND MOSAIC REVELATIONS.
ONE of the first thoughts which strikes the mind as it con.
templates the foregoing view of the natural history of our
planet is, that the developments spoken of could have been
accomplished only in periods too vast for human conception.
Admitting that the process of unfolding which finally resulted
in bringing our globe to its present habitable and mature
state, commenced when its materials were all in a state of diffused igneous gas, it is utterly beyond the power of man to
conceive the period which must thence have elapsed before
these materials were so far contracted as to admit of the first
superficial granitic incrustation. But after these untold
myriads of ages had quietly rolled into the depths of the past,
sedimentary materials, which, according to statements of Dr.
John Pye Smith, as the results of careful measurements, must
have had an aggregate thickness of not less than twenty miles,
took place, for the most part quietly, at the bottom of the
ocean. These materials, including the remains of plants and
animals of now extinct species, and whole races of which were
successively brought into being and swept away, were afterward slowly consolidated into the form of the existing fossillif
erous rocks.
As to the number of years or centuries which must have
elapsed during this mighty operation, we have the means of




ANTIQUITY  OF  OUR  GLOBE.                 149
making, in our calculations, only a remote and indefinite approximation.  During comparatively short periods of violent
physical revolution, conglomerates and other coarse and indistinctly stratified rocks may, in some instances, have been deposited with comparative rapidity. Older rocks were prob.
ably disintegrated by the combined agency of heat and water,
and ground to fragments by volcanic and marine agitation;
and, by violent currents, probably thus generated, they may
have been carried to lower levels, and sometimes formed thick
deposits in comparatively short periods. But these instances
are only exceptions to the general rule, while far the greater
proportion of the stratified rocks present unmistakable evidence of having been deposited in quiet waters. And these
deposits could not, in general, have accumulated much more
rapidly than similar ones which are going on at the present
time. Now, it is said that the lakes of Scotland shoal, by
sedimentary depositions, only at the rate of about Six inches
in a century.*  Making all reasonable allowance for the superior activity of early disintegrating and depositing forces,
the period which must have been consumed during the deposition of materials which have formed rocks of twenty miles
in perpendicular thickness, can be estimated only by millions
of years, especially when we take into account the long
periods of super-marine elevation and repose which sometimes
must have intervened between the close of one formation and
tne commencement of the succeeding one.
Our conception of the immensity of the periods of these deposits is augmented when we consider that beds of rocks
of great thickness, and sometimes whole mountains, many
thousand feet high, are made up almost entirely of sea-shells
and other organic matter-these mountains having originally
* iItchcock'3 Geology, p. 163.




150          GEOLOGY  AND  MOSES.
constituted the sea-beds, from which position they were sub
sequently elevated by subterranean forces. The animals and
plants, whose remains are thus preserved, "must have lived
and died" (says.Professor Hitchcock) "on (or near the spot
where they are found; while it was only now and then that
there was current enough to drift them  any considerable
distance, or break them into fragments; * * * and frequently
all the shells found in a layer of rock, lie in the same position
which similar shells now assume upon the bottom of ponds,
lakes, and the ocean; that is, with a particular part of the
shell uppermost."
Nor will we be astonished at these evidences of the high
antiquity of our globe, when we consider the immense periods
which seem to be consumed in its appointed movements in
space. For if there is any dependence to be placed upon the
observations and mathematical reasonings of Maedler and
others, tbh whole solar system is rapidly moving around a remote center, in an orbit so vast, that a single revolution can
not be accomplished in less than eighteen millions of years!
Considering this period as the annus magnus, or great year of
our planet and the family of orbs to which it belongs, it may
have accomplished several of these grand revolutions since it
assumed an individual existence, and still be only in the first
years of its existence-an existence which may continue
through as many such revolutions as there are days or hours
in the ordinary life of man! In fact, in the development of
the plans of an infinite God, who has a whole eternity as his
working period, it may emphatically be said, that " a thousand
years are but as one day."
But these wonderful deductions from scientific facts have
* Hitchcock's Geology, p. SS 90; also, Siliman's Appendix to Bakewell's Geology,
5 4.




TRUTHS  MUST  HARMONIZE.                  151
given alarm to many theologians, who have considered them
as conflicting with the Mosaic account of creation, as recorded
in the first chapter of Genesis. This account has by them
been considered as circumscribing the period of creation to six
literal days, during which it is supposed, that not only the
earth and all it contains, but the sun and planets, if not even
the fixed stars, were brought into being. They have hence
looked upon the statements and speculations of geologists
with disfavor, supposing that their tendency was to undermine the authority of the Bible. The present treatise, therefore, would be incomplete were I pass over entirely unnoticed
the question pending between geologists and theologians.
This question, however, I can now only consider in brief, exhibiting merely the general aspects of the controversy as they
appear to me.
But before entering directly into the merits of the question,
I would premise that all truths must be consistent with each
other, whether found in the Bible or in Nature. If, therefore,
there is any conflict unmistakably manifest between the teachings of these two authorities, it inevitably follows that one or
the other must be untrue; and the untruth is most rationally
predicable of that which is most liable to be tinctured by
human invention.
Now, the system of creation, though subjective and phenomenal when considered in relation to God, is positive and
independent when considered in relation to man. The pages
of the rocky book were inscribed by no human amanuensis,
and contain none of the whims and errors of perverted human
thought. When correctly interpreted, therefore, they are to
be relied on as infallible, and no theological teachings which
contradict them can be considered as the teachings of the
same God who wrote those imperishable pages with his own




152          GEOLOGY  AND  MOSES,
hand.  This consideration forces the conclusion, however re.
luctant we may be to admit it, that that system of theology
which can be thrown into a trepidation by the unfolding of a
fact in nature, and which, in any case, treats with hostility, or
even with disrespect, the positive deductions of science, cap
not, thus far, have any counterpart in the mind of that Being
who is the Author alike of nature and of heaven, and of the
one harmonious system  of truth which, in various and corresponding degrees, pervades and constitutes the life and
law of all things.
True theology, therefore, has no more favors to ask of true
science, than the latter has to ask of the former. Neither one
of these, in any case, is alarmed by, but always rejoices in,
any additional development in the other, because the two are
brothers in affectionate unity, and each one contributes to the
other of its own riches and strength, and neither can languish
withot weakening the other in a corresponding degree.
Some theologians, desirous of maintaining their preconceived interpretations of the first chapter in Genesis, have argued,
that since it is possible for God to do all things, it was
possible for him, with a single stroke of his omnipotent
power, to create the myriads of sea-shells, the impressions of
plants, and the skeletons of the higher animals, in their progressive order of superposition, in the rocks, just as we now
find them! This might be admitted, if it could first be con
ceived as possible for God to have had a previous will and
purpose in the generation of forms which, in such a case,
would have been, to human conceptions, so evidently useless;
— and so, with the same qualification, it may be admitted
that God might have created Herculaneum  under the beds of
lava, and the Egyptian mummies in their tombs, just as we
now find them:-but to consider it in the least degree probable




PRINCIPLES  OF  INTERPRETATION.  i53
that God actually did do either of these things, would be to
set all analogy at defiance, and to take an everlasting leave
of those guides to truth to which the human mind is largely
indebted for all of its substantial progress. If, however, we
abstain from  such a violation of the God-established laws of
our rational nature, we must admit in their full force the
manifest indications of fossilology and lithology, in reference
to the immense periods which must have elapsed during the
genesis of our globe, and of tl, various and successive races
of living organisms by which it was tenanted prior to the
introduction of man.
Having the utmost confidence in the inherent strength and
invulnerability of true theology, therefore, we affirm, without
any delicacy or evasion, that if the six days of creation,
spoken of by Moses, mean only six times twenty-four hours
of our time, then the chronology of the stages of creation, as
given by him, is manifestly untrue.  But with a perfect
willingness to find the account, true or untrue, as the case
may be, let us examine the account fearlessly and without
reserve, and endeavor to discover its real import.
In order to do justice in our interpretation of any writer's
language, we must, of course, have a due regard to the meaning which context, the nature of the subject, the circumstances,
objects, and personal condition, of the writer, and the modes
of speech prevalent among the class of writers to which he
belongs, conspire to fix upon his language.  This rule is so
obviously true, that no candid mind will fail to recognize its
propriety at once. Now, the book of Genesis (as is the case
with other books of the Bible) was written in an age and a
country in which symbolical language was much in vogue.  It
also claems, like other sacred books, to have been written by
a spiritually illuminated person, and for spiritual purposes;




.154          GEOLOGY  AND.MOSES.
and, admitting these claims, its peculiar forms of thought and
expression must be admitted to have been governed, to some
extent, by spiritual laws; and according to these same laws,
therefore, they must be interpreted.  Now, one way, and, in
some instances, the only feasible way, of conveying in human
language a deep interior idea is, by presenting it in the verbal
imagery of some familiar exterior fact, which embraces within
itself the identicalprinciple which is involved in such interior
idea. That this rule was observed in all the parabolic, and
much of the prophetic and descriptive language of the Bible,
no one who is familiar with the contents of that book can
deny.
Now, let it be observed, that if Moses himself, through
spiritual or Divine impressions, or any other means, had pos.
sessed any adequate idea of the immense periods which Ge
ology proves to have elapsed between the commencement of
the creation of our globe and the introduction of man upon its
surface, it would have been impossible for him to have conveyed to the unenlightened minds of the semi-barbarians of his
age and nation any adequate idea of the actual truth of the
case; and any attempt to do this, would only have been productive of misapprehension, and would probably have generated some of the wildest forms of superstition. The probability
is, however, that Moses himself had no adequate conception
of the immensity of the actual periods of creation; and considering him, according to his claims, as a revelator merely
of what was revealed, to him, this admission may be made
without affecting the truthfulness of the representations which
were by him recorded as he himself received them.
These considerations strongly favor the belief, even d priori,
that any truthful record of the natural history of creation
made in those days, and especially for spiritual purposes, and




"DAY"  MEANS  A  PERIOD.                  155
by a spiritual teacher, would have been couched in corresponr
dential and spiritual language, by which the principles and
spirit of the immense truths more interiorly involved, were
brought into a diminished form  of embcdiment, and thus
adapted to the rudimentary intellects to which they were ad
dressed.  Now, a " day" involves the principle of, and hence
spiritually means, one complete revolution.  But as each complete revolution, whether requiring a long or short period, only
involves the same principle or spirit, why may not the grea.t
revolutions or cycles of operation which comprise the different
periods in our earth's physical history be, in spiritual language,
called so many days?
That the word " day" is, in the first chapter of Genesis, used
in this spiritual sense, without necessarily signifying any thing
but the principle or spirit of a day (or a complete revolution
of indefinite duration), is further evident from the manner in
which the word is used in many other passages, not only by
Moses, but by other sacred writers. Thus we read in Genesis
ii. 4, 5, " These are the generations of the heavens and the
earth when they were created, in THE DAY that the Lord God
made the earth and the heavens, and every plant of the field,"
etc. Here the six minor revolutions or days are comprised in
one grand revolution or day, in the same way as several small
circles or periods may be comprehended in one large one.
The occurrence of the word " day" in this enlarged sense here,
effectually precludes the right of every one to circumscribe its
meaning necessarily to a period of twenty-four hours, as it occurs in the previous chapter in reference to the same subject.
Among the numerous other examples of a similar usage of
the term "day," which may be found in other portions of the
sacred writings, let the following suffice for our present pur~
pose: "And in that day there shall be a root of Jesse which




156            GEOLOGY  AND  MOSES.
shall stand as an ensign of the people; to it shall the Gentiles
seek: and his rest shall be glorious.  And it shall come to
pass in that DAY, that the Lord shall set His hand again a
second time to recover the remnant of His people."  (Isa. x].
10, 11.)  "And it shall come to pass in that DAY, that the
mountains shall drop down new wine, and the hills shall flow
with milk."  (Joel iii. 18.)  And Jesus says, "Abraham rejoiced to see my DAY; and he saw it, and was glad." (John
viii. 56.) In neither of these passages is it possible to restrict
the meaning of the word " day" to the period of the diurnal
revolution of the earth.  In candor, therefore, it must be
acknowledged to be at least extremely probable that the word
"day" is used in an equally enlarged and spiritual sense in the
equally spiritual language of the first chapter of Genesisespecially as there are so many other facts and circumstances
to corroborate such an interpretation.
Considering the six days of creation, then, as expressing six
periods of very long duration, let us inquire whether the incidents and characteristics of these periods as described by Moses,
bear any similarity to the incidents in the physical history of
our globe, as revealed by geological science; and whether the
Mosaic classification of periods and operations possesses that
evidence of truthfulness which consists in a conformity to the
law of the three-fold and seven-fold correspondential series.
In a previous general survey, ranging from the origin to the
full maturity of our globe, we have seen that there were seven
grand periods or stages in its development, as there are seven
stages in the development and compartments in the constitution of all perfect systems.  These periods, however, are not
throughout exactly coincident with the periods described by
Moses, inasmuch as the two descriptions embrace subjects
omnewhat different. It our general geological survey we have




WORK  OF  FIRST  DAY,                   157
endeavored to unfold the history of the developments of the
earth as such, speaking of the vegetable and animal creations
only incidentally; while the object of Moses appears to have
been to speak of the successive organization of those outer
forms and conditions with which man is immediately, either
sensibly or spiritually, connected. Hence, Moses passes over
the first two stages of creation, or the chaotic-gaseous and the
nucleated stages, mentioned in our generalization, with the
simple and comprehensive remark, that " In the beginning God
created the heaven and the earth," and commences his main
description at an epoch when the earth was probably in a
state of imperfect superficial consolidation, and when much of
the water of the ocean was still diffused, as vapor, in the thick
and turbid atmosphere.  The earth is hence described as at
that period " without form and void"-that is, without arrangement, and vacant —" and darkness was upon the face of the
deep."  This " darkness" may be conceived to have been a
natural consequence of the state of the atmosphere, which was
probably still so thick as not to be easily distinguishable from
the fluid portions of the earth, and from the water which rested
upon its surface, in which condition it would, of course, have
been completely impervious to the solar rays. The first Divine operation naturally required, therefore, was to produce
changes in, and precipitations from, the aqueous portions of
the atmosphere; such as would admit of the descent of some
degree of solar light to the earth's surface. This operation
is described by:Moses, in saying, "The Spirit of God moved
upon the face cf the waters: and God said, Let there be light:
and there was light."  This, according to the account, constituted the work of the first day. And here it may be remarked,
ohce for all, that thb phrase, " the evening and the mnorning,"
which is used as the standing synonym  of the different
14




158           GEOLOGY  AND  MOSES.' days" in this account, seems to stand simply for the begin.
ning and close of the different periods-a use of language
similar to that employed by us when we speak of the " eve" or
"morn' of a " new era."
It is said, that " God called the light Day, and the darkness
He called Night."'  In this passage, the words "day" and
"night" are probably (though not necessarily) used in their
ordinary acceptation, and point to a revolution of the earth on
its axis, and a successive illumination of its sides by the sun.
But owing to the thick atmospheric vapors which still continued to prevail to a great extent, the sun would doubtless
have still been invisible to a spectator, could such have been
placed upon the earth's surface, and the amount of solar light
that could have penetrated to the earth, was probably much
less than is now received, even through the thickest and darkest clouds.
The next work seems to have consisted in producing further
changes and regulations in the atmosphere, by which a more
distinct line of demarcation was established between the waters
intended to be suspended in the air, and those designed to
preserve a more condensed form  upon the earth's surface.
Moses, being obliged to make the most of the few words which
his primitive and meager language afforded, describes this
work by saying, " And God said, Let there be a firmament in
the midst of the waters, and let it divide the waters from the
waters."  Hebraists tell us that the word "firmament" is a
very improper rendering of the original word, which signifies
simply an expanse or space; "Consequently," (says Dr.
Clarke) "that circumbient space or expansion, separating the
clouds, which are in the higher regions of it, from the seas,
etc., which are below it."  During the high temperature of
the earth's surface, which Geology proves tV have prevailed in




SECOND  AND  THIRD  DAYS.                  159
those early times, there was probably every intermediate gradation between the most dense fluid and the most expanded
vapor, the fluid  and aeriform  substances having no very
marked line of distinction. While such was the case, the " cireumambient space" supposed, could have had no distinct existence.  A physical change which established the water, at.
mosphere, and aqueous vapor and clouds respectively as
such, was of course the next necessary step in creation's progress; and this is all that appears to be alluded to in the passage
before us as constituting the work of the second period or
" day."
It was probably during the period comprised within this
day, that the transition rocks beneath the coal measures were
deposited.  These contain the remains of animals and plants
of low types, which are almost exclusively marine.  But to
the creation of these, Moses seems to make no allusion, which
fact will not excite particular surprise, when we consider their
comparative unimportance to the grand object which he had in
view, which was simply to describe how the physical structure
and conditions by which man is more obviously surrounded,
came to exist.
The next work consisted in the partition of land and water
(or the elevation of the former), and the development of terrestrial vegetation.  "And God said, Let the waters under
the heaven be gathered together, and let the dry land ap.
pear: and it was so... And God said, Let the earth bring
forth grass, the herb yielding seed, and the fruit tree yielding fruit after his kind, whose seed is in itself upon the earth:
and it was so."  This was the work of the third great period
or day, and manifests a surprising agreement with the events
of the period of the great Coal Formation. The universal
prevalence of almost exclusively m trine, and the almost total




160           GEOLOGY  AND  MOSES.
absence of terrestrial, fossils in the previously deposited rocks,
proves that the ocean, up to this time, covered nearly the
whole surface of the earth-which is in exact agreement with
the Mosaic record, which implies that the partition of land and
water was not made until that period. But large areas of land
being then slightly elevated above the level of the waters,
these, as another strong corroboration of the record, were
covered by a profuse vegetation, which subsequently became
converted into the immense beds of mineral coal now found
to be so essential to the physical comfort and social progress
of the human race.
The next work is spoken of by the sacred cosmogonist in
the following terms: " And God said, Let there be lights in
the firmament of heaven, to divide the day fiomn the night;
and let them  be for signs and for seasons, and for days and
years.  And let them be for lights in the firmament of the
heaven to give light upon the earth: and it was so.  And
God made two great lights: the greater light to rule the day,
and the lesser light to rule the night: he made the stars
also."
To superficial readers, this passage has seemed exceedingly
paradoxical. The supposition that the sun, moon, and stars,
had no existence until the comparative atom which forms this
earth, had attained to the advanced stage of its development,
previously described, is, with any interpretation of the word
"day," so unphilosophical and unreasonable as to utterly
defy intelligent belief. Criticism, however, has shown that
the translation of the passage before us, does injustice to the
original, which does not necessarily mean that the heavenly
bodies were not created until the fourth day.  Professor
Hitchcock, who is a learned theologian as well as geologist,
Bays, upon this point: "If it be objected that, according to




WORK  OF  FOURTH  DAY.                   161
Moses, the sun, moon, and stars were not created till the
fourth day, it may be replied, that a more just interpretation
of his language shows his meaning to be, not that the heavenly
bodies were created on the fourth day, but that they were
then first appointed to serve their present offices; and that
they might have been in existence through countless ages."
Admitting such to be the true meaning of the passage, we
find, again, that the record marvelously coincides with the
indication of geological facts.  In our previous survey of the
natural history of the globe, we saw conclusive evidence that
up to the close of the Coal Period, a nearly uniform temperature prevailed upon the surface of the earth in all latitudes,
and that there could have been no distinction of warm and
cold seasons. This is evident from the fact, that the rocks
of that period, in all latitudes, contain the fossils of plants and
animals analogous only to those which now flourish between
the tropics. It is manifest that such a state of climate could
rot have been governed, in any great degree, by the rays of
the sun, which vary so much as to their intensity, in the different latitudes; and hence, as remarked in our previous
generalization, the sun's rays, during the Coal and previous
periods, could not yet have penetrated the atmosphere, thick
and heavy as it probably was, in such a way as would have
rendered that luminary visible to a human spectator, had such
an one been then placed upon the earth's surface.  For the
same reason the moon and stars must also, during those
periods, have been invisible. Up to that period, therefore,
the heavenly bodies could  not have ruled the seasons,
either as to their temperature or their distinct periodical
revolutions; and all the light which could have descended
from  them  to the earth must have been but dim  and indistinct.




162           GEOLOGY  AND  MOSES.
But in preceding pages it was shown, from the peculiar man
ner in which the impressions of frost-marks, the tracks of
migratory birds, etc., occurred, during the geological formation
immediately succeeding the Carboniferous Period (viz., the
New Red Sandstone formation), that distinctions of seasons
and climates must then clearly have existed, and hence that
the sun must then have exerted his direct power upon the earth,
which then, as now, varied in its intensity with the different
positions assumed by the earth during its orbitual revolution.
An atmospheric condition which could thus have admitted of a
direct descent of the solar rays, must also have rendered the
moon and stars distinctly visible to such of the earth's tenants
as had eyes to perceive them; and in these facts we have an
abundant verification of the Mosaic record, as to the work of
the fourth day.  It consisted simply in those atmospheric
clarifications by which the sun, moon, and stars were appointed, or allowed to exercise the office of, ruling the seasons, and
dividing time into distinct periods.
The direct rays of the sun being thus admitted to the
earth's surface, the latter consequently became habitable to
higher orders of living creatures. Accordingly, the next stage
of creation's progress is thus described: "And God said, Let
the waters bring forth abundantly the moving creature that
hath life, and fowl that may fly above the earth in the open
firmament of heaven.  And God created great whales, and
every living creature that moveth, which the waters brought
forth after their kind, and every winged fowl after his kind."
Some of the" moving creatures " here spoken of as introduced
into being, were probably wholly aquatic, and others were of
the lower orders of air-breathing animals. It is remarkable
that the remains of classes of animals here spoken of, first
begin to appear in the New Red Sandstone strata, which is




WORK  CF  FIFTH  DAY.                  163
tile formation next above the carboniferous system, and which
must have been succeeded, and measurably accompanied by
the clarification of the atmosphere, spoken of as the work of
the previous day. For it is in the Red Sandstone stratification that we find the footprints of frogs, tortoises, and birds.
The latter were mainly, as Professor Hitchcock intimates, of
the Grallae family, or the family of waders, and were therefore,
with the former, intimately connected with the water, as the
Mosaic account implies. There can be but little doubt, therefore, that these birds were the very "fowl " of which Moses
speaks.
The other part of the work of this period, according to the
common translation, consisted in the creation of" great whales,"
atc. This, admitting our definition of the word "day," forms
the only apparent discrepancy between geology and the
sacred cosmogony; for whales do not appear to have existed
before a somewhat advanced stage of the so-called Tertiary
Formation, and a very long period after this time. But
criticism resolves even this apparent discrepancy into a surprising harmony.  Dr. Adam  Clarke, who wrote before
geology was much cultivated, and hence without the slightest
idea of making out a harmony between its teachings and the
declarations of Moses, remarks upon the expression in the
passage before us: "Though this is generally understood by
the different versions as signifying whales, yet the original
must be understood, rather as a general than a particular
term, comprising all great aquatic animals."  Now  the
marine saurians were "great aquatic animals."  These, with
amphibious and terrestrial reptiles of enormous size, came in
during the deposition of the New Red Sandstone, and extensively characterized the whole so-called Secondary Forration. Thus the Mosaic account of the work of the fifth




164:          GEOLOGY   AND  MOSES.
day, or grand period, is also admirably verified by geological
facts.
Animals of the classes just described, both according to
Geology and Moses, preceded the more perfect land animals,
the mammalia, upon the stage of existence. The creation of
these latter is said to have constituted the first part of the
work of the following, being the sixth day, or period, which is
thus spoken of: " And God said, Let the earth bring forth the
living creature after his kind, cattle, and creeping thing, and
beast of the earth after his kind: and it was so.  And God
made the beast of the earth, and the cattle after their kind,"
etc.  The proof of the truth of this portion of the account is
found in the remains of the mammalial quadrupeds of the.ertiary Period, in the more recent portions of which we have
shown that there was an actual shading off of the animated
tribes into the existing species.  Moreover, the work;of this
day, or period, both according to Geology and Moses, was
completed by the introduction of Man into being, as the
grand ultimatum of all the creative efforts. Thence, so far as
that great series of unfoldings was concerned, ensued a period
of rest, and the present is that sabattic period.
The candid reader who has attentively followed me through
this investigation, will bear witness that I have made no effort
to explain away, or to change the true aspect of properly
understood facts, in order to make out a correspondence
between the teaching of science and those of Moses, but that
I have labored to simply set forth the facts of the two reve.
lations in their true aspect, leaving them  to confirm or refute
each other as they might. The coincidence between the two
revelations, therefore, which, from generals to particulars, has
here appeared so striking, is one for which no human collator
is responsible, as -it exists independently and unalterably in




DIVINE  ENLIGHTENMENT.                    165
the absolute facts of the case. All that is required to exhibit
one revelation as a substantial transcript of the other, is an ad
mission that the word " day " is used by Moses in the sense
of an indefinite period-a sense in which it is used in scores
of instances in the Bible, and a sense in which Moses unquestionably used it in Gen. ii. 4, where, in a more summary
allusion to these same works of creation, he speaks of "THE
DAY that the Lord God made tho earth and the heavens."
As it is next to an impossibility to suppose that all these
surprising coincidences could have been a mere work of
chance, the conclusion is scarcely avoidable, that the account
in the first chapter of Genesis, by whomsoever written, must
have originated in a source of intelligence in which a general
knowledge of the whole history of the creation was familiarly
embraced.
It is quite certain, however, that Moses Knew nothing, at
least in an exterior way, about Geology; for of this science
the whole human race has been ignorant until within the last
century. I apprehend that nothing short of an hypothesis of
a spiritual or Divine enlightenment, will be found adequate to
explain the origin of this biblical and wonderfully accurate
account of creation. Concerning the laws of such enlighten.
ment, some explanations may be submitted in a future work.
I have deemed it useful to show, in this summary manner,
the true bearings of geological science upon the initial revela.
tion of the Bible, partly to correct a tendency which, strange
to say, has been manifested in the modern spiritual mode of
philosophizing, to treat lightly this and other revelations of
the Bible, on account of the supposed " unprogressed " state of
their writers; partly for the purpose of further illustrating the
fact, that all true tneology and other species of doctrine,
whether found in the Bible or elsewhere, must conform to the




166            GEOLOGY AND MOSES.
unavoidable deductions of scientific facts; and partly for the
purpose of further unfolding that remarkable law of the threefold and seven-fold correspondential series, which runs through
all complete systems of truth, and of which the Mosaic generalization, properly understood, affords a conspicuous example.
That the seven-fold series of creative operations here spoken
of by the sacred writer, exactly conforms to the natural and
Divine law of sereal arrangement which we have heretofore
infolded, is obvious from  the correspondences between the
respective members of its Primary and Secondary Trinities,
which will be perceived by an inspection of the following
juxtaposed columns, and from the characteristics of the relations which each member of the series, from first to last, exhibits toward the others, which will be found to be the same
which the same members in other serieses respectively bear
toward their associates.
PRIMARY TRINITY.               SECONDARY TRINITY.
1ist Day. Diffused and rudimental  4th Day. Definite solar Light (by
Light: (" God said, Let there    the sun becoming visible.)
be light.")
2nd Day. Atmospneric and terres-  5th Day. Higher and first importrial distinctions, or more defin-    tant forms of oceanic, terresite line of demarcation between    trial, and  atmospheric  life.
condensed and vapory watir.    (" Great whales" or aquat(" Firmament.")                  ic monsters - saurians - and
"fowls.")
3rd Day. Appearance of dry land;  6th Day. Ultimate Tenants of
terrestrial vegetation.          dry land. (Mammalial quadrupeds and Man.)
7th Day. REST, and Divine habitation in the Ultimate of the creative
labor.
Here the correspondence between the works of the first and
fourth days, or periods, is perceptible at a glance, in that they
consisted of different degrees of illumination of the earth'#




CORRESPONDENCES.                       167
surface. The correspondence between the works of the second
and fifth days is obvious, but becomes still more marked by
the addition of a few facts which Moses, in his brief survey,
left out, but which are supplied by geological science.  The
second day, according to Moses, was characterized by the development of more marked distinctions between earth, water,
and atmosphere, expressed by the creation of the "firmament," or the super-terrestrial expanse; while geology shows
that the fifth day was characterized by the development of a
second degree of similar distinctions, whereby alternations of
climates and seasons, cold and heat, rains, winds, etc., supervened.  Moreover, the fifth day, according to the biblical
raccount, was characterized by the development of rudimental
land and aerial animals; while, according to geology, the
second day, after the incipient creation of light, was further occupied by the creation of the rudimental marine animals, or
the radiata, articulata, mollusca, and fishes of the so-called
Transition Formation.  The creation of these, Moses passes
over in silence, the reason of which may be conceived to con.
sist in their comparative non-importance, and in the fact that
in that unintellectual age, they were not, as facts in nature,
sufficiently conspicuous to excite general inquiry as to their
origin.
Further correspondences are also developed, by the aid of
geological science, between the third anid sixth days, but con
cerning these I need not particularize.
If the reader will now take the trouble to compare the mem.
bers of this series of creations as described by Moses, with the
members of any seven-fold series of creations or operations
which we have heretofore described, or which we may describe
hereafter, he will find that each member is to its series what
the same member of any other natural seven-fold series is to tfJ




168          GEOLOGY  AND  MOSES.
other members with which it is associated, and that between this
and all other serieses there is the same correspondence as there
is between any two octaves in music.  It is, be it remembered,
upon the fact of this correspondence between the serieses,
whether generally or minutely inspected, that we base our
conclusion as to the unity of plan which runs through nature,
pointing to an origin in the seven-fold and corresponding
harmonies of the one Infinite God, who, from His own Essence, has projected, from His own Life animates, and, from
His own Wisdom, directs, all things. It is in perfect harmony
with this supposition of a Divine originative and controlling
Power, that Moses, in the simple and untechnical language of
his times, refers the work of each of the successive periods of
creation to a Divine agency, and not to any force of develop.
ment inhering in nature as independent of God.
I may add, that if there actually is a perfect conformity
from generals to particulars, between the principles involved
in this seven-fold series of operations mentioned by Moses,
and those involved in every other seven-fold natural or
spiritual series, whether it be found in science or in the Bible,
this fact must be considered as strongly confirming, not to
say absolutely demonstrating, our conclusion that there is a
mighty law  here involved, and must go far to convince
reasonable skeptics of the truth of, at least, those portions of
the Biblical revelation which are found to clearly recognize
that law. Yet, from a close inspection of the sacred writings,
it will be found that this law is not only expressly recognized
in numerous instances, but that it runs through the whole
Divine plans of operation, in reference to the human race,
of which the Bible gives an historical and prophetic reflex.




CHAPTER XIV.
8IHE MINERAL KINGDOM; OR, KINGDOM OF OHEMICAIL
FORMS.
FROM the terrestrial creation, as a whole, we proceed to a
brief consideration of the general sub-creations which it
involves.  The first of these is the MINERAL KINGDOM.
The Mineral Kingdom, in its most enlarged sense, embraces all physical or terrestrial substances, with their various
forms and compounds.  Being thus general in its range, it is
hence a comparatively indefinite Kingdom; and it is for this
reason, I suppose, that I have experienced more embarrassment in reducing it to distinct classifications, than I have in
respect to any other system of being or operation; and, after
all, I can only pretend to a comparatively close approximation
to correctness in my conclusions.  Such an approximation,
embracing the most comprehensive serial arrangement of phy.
sical substances, is that exhibited in the following table:
PRIMARY TRINITY.              SECONDARY TRINITY.
1. Primeval gaseous or mundane 4. Secondary gaseous or terreschaos.                        trial atmosphere.
2. Igneous liquid.            5. Segregated, embracing rudimental crystalline forms, both
solid and atmospheric.
W. Solidified amorphous        6. Complete material arrangements and ultimate crystalline forms.
7. Governing imponderable8
15




170    THE MINERAL KINGDOM; OR,
If the reader will carefully inspect this table, he will here
find the same harmony of parts, the same correspondence between Primary and Secondary Trinities, the same order of
relations, and the same principles of serial association, which
he will find in all other natural seven-fold serieses heretofore
exhibited, or hereafter to be exhibited.
But a still more specific classification of mineral or physical
substances  embraces all the simple elements, with their
natural compound forms, as known to chemistry-as will be
seen by the following table:
PRIMARY TRINITY.              SECONDARY TRINITY
1. Alkalizable and oxidizable  4. Lowest combined forms (such
simples (such as Potassium,    as alkalies, acids, oxides, sulsodium, iron, lead, hydrogen,  phurets, carburets, etc.)
etc.)
2. Acidizable simples (such as  5. Binary compounds (such as
sulphur, phosphorus, carbon,   sulphates, carbonates, etc.)
etc.)
8. Flagrators,or alkalizers, acid-  6. Higher and ultimate comifiers, and oxidizers (oxygen  pounds.
and chlorine).
7 Pervading and enveloping electroid, or etheroid unit, as a homogeneous involution and evolution of all forms.
But the Mineral Kingdom, as commonly contemplated, is
circumscribed to the realm  of crystallized forms, and the
amorphous substances from which these immediately proceed.
A  theory of a septinary arrangement of the Mineral Kingdom, as viewed in this aspect, might be here submitted, but,
from not having made crystalography a particular branch of
study, I have not sufficient confidence in its conformity to
nature, and will therefore omit it.  Enough, however, has
been said to show that the Mineral Kingdom, in its more
general aspect, conforms to the seven-fold serial and oxed.




KINGDOM  OF  CHEMICAL  FORMS.   171
spondential law seen to apply in other cases and nothing is
here discovered to mar, but every thing illustrates, the harmony and unity of the great plan of creation.  With these
remarks, then, we will proceed to consider the Kingdom of
forms immediately succeeding the mineral, in the order of
development. -




CHAPTER XV.
THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM.
THE seven-fold constitution of the Vegetable Kingdom as a
whole, is illustrated by the seven progressive developments in
the growth of a single perfect tree, which consist of 1. The
root, or little appendages thrown out from the germ before the
stem. appears; 2. The simple stem; 3. The branches; 4. The
leaves; 5. The flower-buds; 6. The blossoms; and 7. The
fruit. The seven corresponding divisions of vegetable forms
may be traced as follows:
The first and lowest of these consists simply of confused
radical fibers, which do not necessarily appear above the surface of the earth. In constitution, this degree of vegetation is
but little superior to the finest forms of crystallization, from
which it differs principally in respect to its soft and succulent
nature, the frequent curvilinear directions of its fibers, and the
circular forms of their transverse sections. Of this lowest
kind of vegetation, we have examples in the slimy accretions
which occur upon the surfaces of rocks, logs, etc., submerged
in water; and of which the fibrous underground mould which
occurs in warm wet soil, impregnated with rapidly decomposing matter, constitutes the terrestrial representative.
The second division of vegetable forms is represented by
plants that have a simple stem or shoot projecting above the
earth, but no branches nor leaves.  Of these, some of the
simplest species of sea-weeds afford examples.




THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM.    173
The third division consists of the branching forms of sea
plants, of which the fucoides afford an example.
The fourth division consists of terrestrial herbacea, which
are characterized by fully developed leaves. But the lower
forms of this general division also embrace lichens, mosses,
fungi, etc.
The fifth division consists of arborescent cryptogamia, or
of those perennial plants in which the organs of fructification
are concealed.
The sixth division consists of the arborescent monocotyledonous, or of those flowering trees whose seed has but one lobe; and
The seventh division consists of the arborescent dicotyledo-.nos, or of those flowering trees whose seeds have two lobes,
and which are the most perfect forms of the vegetable kingdom.
This comprehensive classification, though new, is in accordance with the general order of succession in vegetable creations as indicated in fossilology, and is therefore natural.
Each one of these divisions, of course, is subject to sub-classifications, which sometimes run parallel with each other; but
an herbaceous and arborescent plant which possess the same
number of stanins, pistils, or cotyledons, evidently should not
simply on that account, be placed in absolutely the same class
or order.
That it may the more clearly be perceived that this classification conforms to the serial and correspondential law heretofore unfolded, we will reduce it to the following form:
PRIMARY TRINITY.              SECONDARY TRINITY
( JMarine forms.)            (Terrestrialforms.)
1. Radical fiber             4. Terrestrial herbacea (leafing.'
2. Simple stem               5. Arborescent cryptogamia.
8. Branching.                6. Flowering monocotyledonous.
7. Flowering dicotyledonous.




1T4        THE  VEGETABLE  KINGDOM.
Here it is seen that the first member of the Primary Trin.
ity, the radical fiber or the root principle, so to speak. of
vegetation, has its counterpart and sub-correspondent in the
first member of the Secondary Trinity, in the leafing plantsleaves being merely aerial roots. The second member of the
Primary Trinity, consisting of plants with a simple stem, has
its counterpart and sub-correspondent in the second member
of the Secondary Trinity-the organs of fructification in the
cryptogamous plants being connected with the leaves, and
being mere shoots from  them  as from a root. Considering
the cryptogamous plants in the Vegetable Kingdom as a whole,
as corresponding to the flower-buds of a single tree, the third
member of the Secondary Trinity,.showing the branchings
from  the flower-buds, as from a stem, bears a certain correspondence to the third member of the Primary Trinity, embracing merely the branching forms of vegetation, The seventh
member is not only of a more perfect organic structure, but
it embraces all the more perfect fruit-bearing trees which afford
nourishment to higher kingdoms, and therefore it may be considered as the crown of the whole Vegetable Kingdom. It is
thus seen that the grand and natural divisions of the Vegetable World, conform to the septenary and ternary serial law;
and its complete series will be found, on comparison, to corre.
spond generally and particularly with all other complete series,




CHAPTER XVI.
THE ANIMAL KINGDOM.
TIE Animal Kingdom follows as next in the orde: of progression, after the Vegetable Kingdom.  Its divisions, in their
regular order of ascension fiom  lowest to highest, and also,
generally speaking, in respect to their successive periods of
development as shown by fossilology, are as follows:
PRIMARY TRINITY.                SECONDARY TRINITY.
(Marine forms.)               ( Terrestrial forms.)
1. RADIATA (coral insects, crinoi- 4. REPTILES. (The lower forms
dians, star-fishes,  medusiae,   of this division embrace also the
etc.)                            terrestrial mollusca and articulata, such as snails, worms, insects, etc.)
2..ARTICULATA (sea-worms, trilo- 5. BIRDS.
bites, crabs, lobsters, etc.)
8. VERTEBRATED FISHES.           6. MAMMALIA.
7. MAN as a terrestrial being.
IN this table are represented three general divisiIns of marine forms, and three general divisions of terrestrial forms.
The first division of marine forms is to its sphere of existence
and to the divisions of marine forms which follow it, what the
first division of terrestrial forms is to its sphere of existence,
and to the divisions which follow it; and so also the one trine
in its sphere corresponds to the other trine in its sphere, both
in the complex and in the successive divisions of each.
It may be objected to the foregoing classification, that it




176          TIHE  ANIMAL XINGDOM.
leaves out one important division of the animal kingdom, viz.,
the Mollusca.  To this it may be replied, that the Mollusca,
especially in its lower forms, seem, to be but a higher branch
of the Radiata.  Some of the lower or univalve shell-fish
grow in clusters, or united compartments, almost as one animal, and in this essential characteristic are somewhat allied
to the polipiaria, which comprises one class of the Radiata.
This quality of growing in clusters or connected compart.
ments, is preserved even by some o0 the bivalves, such as
muscles, oysters, etc. The xdetached bivalves, having locomotive powers, seem to be an ascension fiom these; and the still
higher orders of mollusca, viz., the gastropoda and cephalopoda, seem to be but higher representations of the same system of creative design, which, as its lowest expression, evolved
the polipiaria and crinoids.
I have personally observed that the whilk, which is among
the higher orders of shell-fish, propagates through the medium
of a zoophitic, or vegetable-like, form, with an attached stem,
and containing leaf-like appendages or pods, in which the
young are brought to foetal maturity. The Radiata and Mollusca, therefore, may be considered as comprehended in one
general division of the Animal Kingdom, which division, however, should perhaps be designated by some term  of more
comprehensive significance.
It is thus seen, that the Animal Kingdom conforms to the
same serial and correspondential law which we have seen run
ning through all systems of creation previously contemplated,
and which we will hereafter perceive runs equally through still
higher developments.  And with this, as the highest system
of material creation, our more specific classifications of the
grand departments of the universe without us, is completed.




CHAPTER XVII.
TIlE WHOLE AND ITS PARTS
WE haze thus ascended, throug. progressive stages of observation and induction, from the basis to the apex of the
grand pyramid of outer creation.  From the commanding
position to which we have attained, therefore, it is proper to
take a general survey of the ground over which we have
passed, and to observe any general or particular facts which
may thence present thenmselves, as bearing, favorably or otherwise, upon the conclusions to which we have been led, or as
reflecting light upon still ulterior truths.
And first, a remark in reference to the method and order
of our previous investigations: It will be remembered that
we commenced with the observation of sensible facts, which
lie upon the exteriors of Nature, and proceeded to trace them
analytically to their elements and originative conditions, and
those to theirs, until we arrived at the primeval and common chaotic Germ  from which all things, by different ramifications, sprang. The nature and propriety of the reverse process which we thence pursued. with the naturalness of the
order of successive results to whih it led us, may be illustrated
as follows:
The astronomer discerns in the distant heavens a faint whitish
spot, which he calls a nebula. To the naked eye, it appears
dim, indistinct, and undefined.  le applies a telescope of
moderate power, and the outlines of the same object are a




178      TIE  WHOLE  AND  ITS PARTS.
little more defined.  With a still larger telescope, it appears
still more definite; and so he goes on increasing his optical
power, until the same object is resolved into myriads of mi.
nute stars, which appear like particles of diamond dust sprinkled
upon the blue concave.  By another increase of power, these
stars are made to exhibit appearances of internal systematic
arrangement.  This is as far as the most powerful telescopes
will go; but suppose that he had the ability to augment his
optical power indefinitely; each of those stars, which at first
appeared only as a shining point, may soon be made to glow
as a resplendent sun, revealing a multitude of planets swimming in the sea of light by which it is surrounded.  He now
singles out one of those planetary globes as the special object
of inspection; and as, by our imagined possibilities, the visual
power is enhanced through  other successive degrees, the
forests, the fields, the streams, the trees, the flowers, and even
the insects, which may exist upon the surface of that planet,
or the animalcules which sport in its stagnant waters, would
successively come into view.  Now, be it remarked, that all
these successive particularizations, even down to ultimate mi.
nutiae, are involved in that faint luminous spot, which, as a
most comprehensive general, is first seen by the naked eye in
the remote heavens.
Our process of synthetical investigation has been similar to
that just supposed, we having the advantage of the actual
presence and personal inspection of the minutie included in
the general subject of our thoughts. With a mental telescope
we have penetrated, not into the distance of space, but into
the corresponding distance of time, and beheld the universe in
the aspect of one common nebulous mass.  By following the
natural history of this one general mass through its st -
cessive aplproximations to our own pteriod, we have seen it




GENERALS  INVOLVE  PARTICULARS.  179
successively unfolding solar systems, geological developments,
mineral kingdoms, animal kingdoms, and human races, with
all things which they respectively include. It is to be observed that each of these successive particularizations is based
upon, and was included in, the next preceding general, as all
are based upon, and included in, the all-comprehensive General.
Moreover, that the order in which these particularizations,
Kingdoms, or sub-creations have been brought under review,
is not an order arbitrarily adopted for our own convenience,
but clearly one observed by nature herself, is evident froin
the fact, that no two systems or Kingdoms, as arranged in our
series of inquiries, can be transposed.  This illustration of the
relations of generals and particulars also clearly shows, that
all truths are but involutions and evolutions of one funda
mental truth-hence that all truths must bear certain relations
and correspondences to each other, from their origins through.
out their successive ramifications, even to their ultimates;
and that no truth can be fully understood, except in the
general and particular light of all others.
Moreover, if the serial order in which the grand divisions
of nature, as a whole, hlave been brought under review, is ace
cording to the order of progressive development observed by
nature herself, the sane is generally true of the serial order
of the seven sub-divisions which have been applied to each of
these grand divisions.  By a particular review of either of
these classified sub-divisions, the reader will find, for example,
that the first member of the series is naturally germinal, and
that the seventh is naturally ultimate, to all the others; and
that no two members of the series can be transposed without
deranging the harmony of the whole series.  And though we,
of course, claim no absolute exemption from  particular errors
and imperfections in the classifications which have been sub




180       THE  WHOLE    IND  ITS  PARTS.
mitted, it is nevertheless claimed that their manifest genera,
conformity to nature, together with their ternary relations
and correspondences, involved, after identically the same
general method, in each seven-fold series, clearly reveals the
presence of a grand structural or associative LAW which, in a
corresponding manner, and in different degrees of develop
ment, governs the numbers, relations, and succession of parts,
in every complete system of natural unfolding. Of this law,
as before repeatedly intimated, the diatonic scale in music,
with its seven notes, is the natural and oral exponent.
Having thus subjected the grand divisions of nature to review, and discovered the application of this principle of serial
and correspondential classification to them all, let us now see
whether the connected and successive creations thus brought
under review, will naturally fall into the form of one grand
System, in which our principles of serial arrangement will be
exemplified.  This may be best exhibited by the following
table:
PRIMARY TRINITY.              SECONDARY TRINITY
(Structural.)                    (Organic.)
1. Firmamental and sidereal uni-  4. System of chemical or comverse.                         prehensive mineralogical arrangements.
2. Solar systems.              5. Vegetable kingdoms
3. Geological developments.    6. Animal kingdoms.
ULTIMATE.
(Intellectual.)
7. HUMAN  RACES, as to their merely terrestrial constitutions,
affections, and thoughts.
Not only do we observe in this series a natural order of
succession of parts, which will not admit of addition, retrench.
ment, or transposition, but we also observe the same ternary




PRISMATIC COLORS.                         181
relations and correspondences which we have seen are involved in all the series previously examined. Thus the first
member of the series, which is rudimental-structural, corresponds to the fourth member, which is rudimental-organic;*
the second member is the transition-structural, and corresponds
to the fifth (the Vegetable Kingdom), which is the transitionalorganic; the third member is the (physically) perfect-structural,
and corresponds to the sixth, which is the perfect organic.
And the seventh is ultimate, exhibiting the perfection and
united sublimation of all-in this respect corresponding to the
seventh member of every other series, even as the first member in each series corresponds to the first member in all
others; the second to the second, etc. The same principles
of serial, septinary, and correspondential classification, thus
apply equally to the generals and the particulars of nature, at
least so far as such particulars have been brought under
review.
But while the respective members of each seven-fold series,
whether on a high or low scale, including the great series of
all serieses, correspond to the same members, as numerically
designated in all other serieses, these correspondences are of
different degrees of directness and  intimacy, according to
numerical relations more complicated than those which have
yet been brought into view. This, together with the manner
in which general and particular serial correspondences are
involved in one complete system, may be illustrated partially,
but sufficiently for our present purpose, by a reference to the
seven prismatic colors and their involved properties. It is
found that, by causing each of the seven colors of decomposed
* A crystal possesses a kind of molecular life, and has different parts, angles, and
poles, which perform different functions, as shown by Reichenbach; it may therefore
be considered as an organ:sm, though of the lowest kind.
16




182       THE  WHOLE  AND  ITS  PARTS.
light to pass separately through a second prism, they may be
still further decomposed, and form  a secondary iris, in which
each of the seven colors will again be visible. Now the first
or general iris represents the great System of systems, considered as one, while each included iris represents one of the
sub-systems involved in the latter, and which is also sevenfold.  In other words, the grand seven-fold System of nature
is composed of all its included and subordinate seven-fold
systems, in the same way as the grand iris is composed of
all the elements involved in its included irises, there being
in either case a similar interdependence of parts; and hence
there is the same unity in the System as a whole, that there
is in each one of its analogous and component sub-systems.
The grand System  of nature, and each one of its sub-systems,
then, correspond to each other in the same way as the grand
iris, and each of its included sub-irises correspond to each
other, according to their similar numerical designations.  But
while this is the case with the iris and its included sub-irises,
it is evident that one of these latter, based, for example, upon
the general red ray, would bear a different degree of correspondence to other seven-fold divisions of color, fiom  one
that is based generally upon the yellow, blue, or any other
ray; and the same is true of the great System of nature and
its sub-systems.
It was before shown that each seven-fold system of nature
is accompanied, in its development and functional operations,
by seven corresponding dynamic agents, and  also  seven
corresponding laws.  It may therefore be said that these
dynamic agents and laws are also, either identically or by
their natural representatives in different degrees of ascension,
subject to the same compreteensive and i -volved classifications
which we have just seen to apply to their corresponding




AGENTS,   LAWS,  DEVELOPMEN'TS. 
outer developments, as presented in the universal Fabric of
Being and its parts.  It would, indeed, be difficult to get a
set of terms sufficiently comprehensive, and yet sufficietl-ll
definite, to apply equally to all systems and sub-systems il.
volved in a universal classification; but if the reader will
consider the terms we may employ as being  themselves
correspondential, and as expressive merely of general princi:ples, he nmay find the general and particular systems of
nature, in their three-fold relations of Dynamic Agents, Laws,
and Developments, represented, with approximate truthfulness, in the following table:
DYNAMIC AGENTS.            LAWS.             DEVELOPMENTS.
1. Heat.                 Expansion.        Chaos.
2. Light.                Attraction.       Nuclei.
3. Electricity.          Circulation.      Forms.
4. Organic, or odic      Aggregation.      Incipient organism
heat.
6. Odic light.           Segregation.      Ascended   organic
forms.
6. Odic aura.            Sympathy.          Universal association.
7. Vitality.             Life.              Unity of totality.
Applying the fundamental principles of this classification,
in different degrees, to the universal system, and to all its
sub-systems, we have here a representation of the connection
and harmonial relations of the Whole with the parts, and the
parts with the Whole, of the Macrocosm  or the universe
without-corresponding to the connections and relations of
the parts and the whole, of the Microcosm, or the universe
within.  Here  then, is erected, "without the noise of the
hammer," that univ ersal Temple before spoken of; whose




184      THE  WHOLE  AND  ITS  PARTS.
timbers, hewn by God's own hand, consist of all those facts
and principles which lie in the Realm of Being without us,
and which mere analytical science necessarily views in ever
lasting isolation and confusion.




CHAPTER XVIII.
DUALISM OF PRODUCTIVE FORCES; OR, THE DIASTOLE
AND SYSTOLE OF NATURE.
FOLLOWING link by link the descending chain of analogy,
the conclusion was before arrived at, that in the beginning,
the materials of the universe consisted of one diffuse, chaotic,
or gaseous mass, without distinction of parts, or definite internal motions. Reasons were also submitted for believing that
these material conditions were not eternal, but that they
originated as emanations or projections of the more exterior
essences of the Divine Personal Constitution. It was shown
that, inasmuch as this whole mass of physical substance thus
originated from Divine spiritual substance, so physical Heat
in this substance originated from Divine spiritual Heat, which
is Love, and that physical Light originated from Divine
spiritual Light, which is Wisdom. It was also shown that
Heat is accompanied with a force or law of Expansion; and
that from Heat and Light combined, originated the force or
law of Attraction or Contraction. As Divine Love and Wisdom (forming a Duality, or productive unity, consisting of
positive or negative, or male and female Principles) constitute
the spiritual Alpha and Omega of all generative forces, so it
is apprehended that their physical counterparts, consisting of
the forces of Expansion and Attraction, may be found to main,
tain an equally fundamental relation to all modifications of
force, law, and operation, existing in the realm of created Being.




186           DUALISM   OF  FORCES.
If we again glance at the systems and sub-systems of opa
ration which nature presents, we will find abundant exemplifi.
cations of this fact.  Thus, as the forces of Expansion and
Contraction proceeded in their operations in the primeval
chaotic mass, the particles which were by nature fitted to reJnain in an aeriform or ethereal state, and those which were
naturally fitted for aggregation into dense forms, were separated.  The latter class of particles, by a general assemblage,
first formed the universal nucleus, and then, successively the
nebulous rings, segregated masses, and stellar and planetary
systems.  The telescope now reveals these masses of condensible materials apparently in all stages of progress in the
heavens, from the indefinitely formed and irresolvable nebula
to the globular cluster of stars. This latter is the form peculiar to the highest possible degree of cosmical perfection, and,
at the same time, the highest natural degree of cosmical condensation; and it may hence be supposed to be accompanied with
the highest naturally attainable degree of levity and purity in
the circumambient ether.   But these states are ultimate
achievements of the joint and constant action of the fundamental laws of EXPANSION and CONTRACTION.
We will find, on due consideration, that these same princi.
ples apply also to each creation included in the cosmical,
whether it be organic or inorganic.  Thus, in the Mineral
World, the metallic ore that is now segregated into distinct
veins, evidently must have originally existed in diffusion in
the surrounding rock. The particles which originally occupied
the present position of the mineral veins, must have been dispersed by a force of expansion (virtually or actually) which was
precisely equivalent to the force of mutual attraction which
brought the metalline perticles together in their place. The
same tendency of kindred and originally diffused mineral par




EXPANSION  AND  ATTRACTION.                    187
ticles to draw together into the form of dense masses, is, perhaps, still more forcibly illustrated by the flint nodules found
in beds of chalk, and which are generally of a more or less
rounded form, evidently indicating an original state of solution
in the surrounding mass, from which they have become con.
densed, as they are now found.
The first forms assumed by the vegetable materials that exist
in the world, were also diffuse and chaotic.  Such were the
marine accretions of germinal slime, with their radical fibers;
and subsequent efflorescent, simple, and microscopic stems.
Several gradations of plants as they rise above these, are still
of imperfect exterior forms, of a loose and succulent nature,
and of an internal structure entirely cellular-indicating, as
yet, but small progress in the condensive principle. In these,
however, the whole Vegetable Kingdom as one creation, has
its incipient and rudimental development.  Further segrega.
dons and condensations of the vegetative elements are decidedly manifested in the subsequently formed terrestrial plants
possessing a vascular tissue and ligneous fiber.  But as creation proceeds, still higher forms, possessing more marked and
widely diversified characteristics, are gradually developed,
until the flowering and dicotyledonous plants of the present
era came into being; and these show the closest possible connection of congenial, and the most perfect elimination of
heterogeneal vegetable elements.  Hence, they exhibit the
ultimate degree of the Condensive and Expansive principle
which can be naturally applied to the Vegetable Kingdoin.
In the Animal Kingdom, including the human, the same
principles are distinctly operative; and this, too, both with
reference to the individual organism, and the whole collection
of living beings. Professor Agassiz, who has investigated the
subject of embryologj perhaps more thoroughly than any




188               DUALISM    OF  FORCES.
other man, tells us, that aftei the fecundation of the ovum of
any animal, and its division into cells and layers, the organ
of circulation proceeds to its incipient development from the
middle layer of the germ.  " First," the blood appears by a
simple process of liquefaction of the cells. It can be seen
under the microscope how the particles, or the cells of that
layer, begin to loose at the outer margin, and to move between
themselves, and to run in particular directions, and to combine
into currents, and those currents to assume particular directions, before there is a heart, and before there are blood-vessels. It
can be seen in every chicken under so low a magnifying power,
that no one should lose the opportunity of seeing this wonderfil sight. When blood corpuscules move from  the center toward
the margin of the germ  [Expansion], the other cells, which be
come loose in the periphery of the germ, begin to move toward
the center [Contraction]. In the beginning, there being no current circulating, the two collections of fluid meet, and finally
become regular currents, by means of channels through which
the blood runs for a regular circulation.*
These fundamental, expansive, contractive, and circulatory
motions are subsidiary to the development of a fourth operation, by which affinitized particles floating in the circulating
menstruum  are brought into conjunction, and deposited in the
form  of solid  tissues.  They are at first aggregated on all
sides of the circulating channels, and form  the blood-vessels,
the ramifications of which (says Agassiz) are at first constantly
* Agassiz's Lectures on Comparative Embryology. Here we have, in the words of
one who wrote without any view to the distinctive philosophy of the present treatise, an
illustration of the successive origins of the laws of Expansion, Contraction, and Circulation. Considering these facts and principles as equally applicable, on a large scale,
to the great fecundated germ or ovum of the cosmical creation, it will illustrate per.
Iectly the incipient process by a prolongation of wh',h the universe received its presenl
malture form.




PROGRESS  OF  ORGANIZATION.                  189
changing. But one portion of the central vessel soon becomes
enlarged, and assumes the form of a simple elongated sack.
This, centralizing and expressing in itself the previously diffused
expansive and contractile forces, performs a constant succession
of diastolic and systolic motions, and constitutes the rudiment of the future heart.
Other processions from  the blood-vessels form, in like
manner, the rudiments of the alimentary canal, the liver, the
lungs, the brain, etc. These, by a constant rejection (through
the expansive or emanative force) of particles foreign to their
respective and appropriate composition, and as constant an
attraction and appropriation of the particles which they need,
finally arrive at the full maturity of their complex structures,
and together, form the complete living organism. The complete
organism, therefore, manifests the perfection of elimination of
unsuitable substances fiom  each particular organ (which substances, therefore, go to form other organs to which they are
suitable), and the perfection of condensation or aggregation in
each organ of those substances which are suitable to its own
composition.
The same remarks are, in principle, applicable to the whole
animated creation as to one grand Form. Its first and lowest
development, as shown by fossilology, consisted of polypiaria
and other radiated forms. Now, the polypi of a coral reef
may almost be considered as one extended animal, with little
distinction of parts.  The substances and functions of heart,
stomach, lungs, brain, etc., seem to be interdiffused and confounded with each other in such a way that one portion of the
structure is no more vital than another, and therefore, into
however numerous or small fragments this animal substance
may become divided or subdivided, each fragment, still chaot.
ically embodying in i 3elf all the principles of vitality and




190            DUALISM  OF  FORCES.
organization, continues to live anc grow as a distilct animal,
It, therefore, corresponds to the primitive cellular structure of
the impregnated ova of the higher animals.  In the higher
forms of the Radiata, the organs, with their functional operations, are perceptibly more distinct from  each other.  In the
Articulata, there is still more definite association of the elements of organs into their distinct and appropriate forms; but
this association is still so imperfect, that if the lobster or
crab, for example, loses a claw, it eliminates from  other portions of its system elements which form another claw-thus
showing that the claw-principle, so to speak, previously existed undeveloped, in the other parts of the organism, by a
draft upon which the recuperation is now produced.  And so
in each succeeding class in the ascending scale of animal creations, heart becomes more distinctly heart, brain becomes
more distinctly brain, and all the other organs become correspondingly more distinct and highly developed, and more fiee
from  those particles which properly belong to other organs,
until the perfection of living organization is attained in the
perfected human form, which may be considered as the whole
Animal Kingdom in the aggregate, with something more besides.
And so, reducing these specific subjects of contemplation to
one comprehensive view, it may be said, that in the beginning
the material elements of man, animal, vegetable, mineral,
planet, sun, and firmament, existed in common interdiffusion
in the great, universal, and undistinguishable mass of nebulous matter, in such a way that each part was lost in all other
parts.  The great mass, then, formed, as it were, one grand
Polypus, or one grand ovum, corresponding to the ovum of an
animal, and from it, after fecundation, and by means of a constant incubative and superior influence, the ultimate develop



S'IHERES  AND  SYMPATHY.                    191
mrent of the complex system in its mature form, was to arise.
Materials in the primitive and lowest degree of refinement,
draw together according to rudimental affinities, at the same
time evolving their uncondensible elements, and thus form
vast and indefinite nebulous aggregation, with their circumambient ether.  Further evolutions and condensations, and
consequent refinements, form, successively, firmaments, suns,
planets, mineral aggregations, plants, animals, and finally the
bodies of human beings-all of which, from first to last, have
directly or indirectly collected and selected their materials
from  the great mass of all materials, even as the nodules of
flint, before spoken of as embodied in the strata of chalk, have
collected their component silicious particles from the mass of
surrounding materials in which they must have been originally
diffiused!
The fact that, in the process of all formations, there is an
expansion and evolution of uncondensible elements from the
centers of their chaotic materials, as well as a clustering
around central nuclei, of those particles capable of constitut.
ing the tangible structure with its various parts, more fully
illustrates the doctrine heretofore advanced, that all forms
and organisms, fiom stellar assemblages, individual suns, and
planets, to crystals, vegetables, animals, and human beings,
are surrounded by an aromal counterpart or "sphere."  It
will be borne in mind, that it is by the inter-action of these
aromal counter parts, or spheres of different forms and organisms (and which are always expressive of the specific interior
qualities of the latter), that these forms and organisms are
brought into what may be called "magnetic sympathy" with
each other; and it is by the combined aromal spheres of all
organisms, forms, and systems, that the great inter-active
nerve-aura of'the universe. as on Body, is made upi




192           DUALISM  OF  ForCES.
The expansions and emanations from  centers perpetually
prevalent throughout the whole domain of fornms and organisms, may be considered as one general diastole; while the
contractions and precipitations upon centers, likewise universally prevalent, may be considered as one general systole;
and these motions, in their more progressed and periodically
alternating forms, are expressed in the secular expansions and
contractions of planetary orbits; in the oscillations of heavenly bodies between their aphelion and perihelion points; in
the ebbing and flowing of tides; in the inspirations and ex,
pirations of plants; in the dilations and contractions of the
human heart; and in the breathings and pulsations of
microscopic forms of life, which spoit in a single drop of
water.
In' attributing thus much to the laws of Expansion and
Contraction (or Attraction), it is not by any means intended
to supersede the septinary divisions of laws, as presented in
preceding pages.  Our object has rather been to show thaV
these two fundamental laws, being, as it were, male and female in conjugal unity, are the parents and grandparents of
all other laws. Thus it is from a combination of Expansive
and Contractive movements that the law of Circulation immediately ensues in every portion of the creation, even as the
same ensues in the animal and human systems, from the expansive and contractile motions of the heart: and as particles
are thus made to flow throughout each system, and are placed
in general intercommunication with other particles, there is
occasion given to the operation of the fourth law, oy which
mutually affinitized particles, whether in organic or inorganic
creations, unite together and form  the tissues of the perma
nent physical structure. Thence, after performing their appropriate offices, and undergoing specific refinements, they are




DIVINE  LOVE  AND  WISDOM.                193
taken up and re-deposited in higher and more complex masses
or tissues, or excreted entirely from the system, according to
the fifth law-the law of segregation-the same being also ap.
plicable, in different degrees, to each creation; then by mu.
tual impartations of essences and forces between these masses
or tissues, as necessary parts or organs of the system, a sixth
law is developed-the law of universal sympathy and harmonial reciprocation. Finally, all these laws and operations,
harmoniously combined, give occasion to the normal manifestation of the seventh and highest law-the law governing the
functions of the complex unity, and in: hich the principles of
Love and Wisdom, Heat and Light, Expansion and Attraction, with all their modifications and subordinates, are embraced in unitary form.
As these Expansive and Attractive operations are de.
pendent upon physical Heat and Light, and these are ultimately dependent for their geneation upon spiritual Heat
and Light, which are conditions of Divine Love and; Wisdom,
so it follows that Divine Love and Wisdom pervade nature
co-extensively with Expansive- and Attractive forces, and are
the fundamental and essential constituents of the life-principle
which inheres in every form of being.- Things live, therefore,
only in proportion to the degree in which they are recipienta
of the essences and forms of Divine Love and Wisiom; and
without these, all things would be dead.
17




CHAPTER XIX.
CIRCLES.
IT was befo e shown that the constant Expansive and
Contractive forces, particularly illustrated in the previous
chapter, call into requisition the law of Circulation, which
gives form  to the motion of particles impelled by the
previous forces.  By circulation is meant a proceeding from
a given point or condition, and finally returning to the same,
whether the line of progression described by the movement
is mathematically that of an exact circle or not; as is,llustrated by the flowing of blood from the heart, through various
channels back again to the heart.
But it is here to be particularly observed that the blood, in
passing from the heart, through various parts of the system
back again to the heart, deposits certain portions of its ele.
ments in various fleshy and osseous tissues along its path.
This example, taken from  the functional operations of the
Microcosm, or little universe, serves as a sure index of similar
operations which occur in the various departments of the
Macrocosm, or great universe, and leads to the remark,
that all regularly circulating materials, whether in the human,
the animal, the vegetable, the mineral, the geognostic, or the
astronomical department of creation, impart certain of their
elements to the ambient spaces through which they pass. It
is by the aggregation of such imparted elements that all
regularly developed forms in nature have their being; and as




CIRCLES.                       195
it was heretofore shown that all natural movements and developments observe a regular serial order of successive gra
dations, it follows, from the law of Circulation, that this serial
order, as applicable to each system or degree of nature, must
exemplify the circle. This idea of the universality of the circular constitution and movements of things, shall now  be
more particularly illustrated by facts.
Extending our observations to the heavenly bodies, we
see circular motion everywhere prevailing.  Satellites move
around planets, planets around suns, suns around still greater
suns, and an extension of the analogical chain renders it, as
before shown, extremely probable, not to say certain, that
all secondary bodies in universal space, revolve in common,
around one grand primitive Center and Source of attraction.
If this be the case, then, whatever particular movements the
secondary bodies may have assumed from the development
offorms of internal forces peculiar to themselves, these move.
ments are subordinate to the great material Source of move.
ment, and the forces by which they occur are only reproductions or ascensions, in specific and modified forms, of the
forces which primarily appertain to it.
But as the forces producing these primitive rotatory and
orbitual motions in the universe, are the final source of all
those diversified ramifications of circular movement, which
are manifested by subordinate systems, suns, and planets, so
the orbitual and rotatory motions of planets are the more immediate parents and dependencies of still more diversified and
minute systems of circular development.  From the orbitual
motion of the earth, for instance (and the fact also applies to
other planets), results a continually repeated circle of thermal
changes, which mark the various seasons of the year.  These
give rise to the various annual series of vegetable and other




196                    cIRCLES.
developents.  In the genial heat of spring, the seed that has
sunk into the.moist vegetable inould, expands and puts fbrth
successively the stem, the branches, the leaves, the flower.
buds, the flowers, and the fruit containing seed of the same
species of that from  which the plant sprang.  Then, as the
frosts of winter begin again to prevail, the life of the plant
becomes extinct; its ripened seeds are scattered upon the
ground, to become. the progenitors of other plants of the same
kind, and the materials of the plant also sink to the earth to
replenish:the vegetable mould from which.they sprang. Thus
the same general condition is again brought about with that
fiom  which the first plant sprang; and the germination,
growth, maturity, and decay of the plant, With the scattering
of.its seed upon:the- earth, exemplifies a complete circle.. So
with the putting forth of the foliage, the development of the
blossoms and fruit, and the final hibernation of arborescent
vegetation.:....                  - -  
Coincident, also, with the changes of the -seasons, are the
periodical awakenings of certain animal instincts, and also the
occurrence of' certain.conditions in the human, physical, and
mental economy.  These changes, occurring, as they do, in
regular serial succession, -and always returning to the point
froim which they started, exemp.ify, also, the Circle.
And so, from the alternations of day and night, which, with
their successive hours and. moments: mark a diurnal circle of
physical changes, still more minute circles of change ensue,
in the economy:of organic- beings.  Such:are the:circles of
wakefulness and sleep; of activity and repose; of organic
waste: and  recuperation, with  all theii intermediate  and
transitional stages, whether we apply the remark to the
vegetable, the animal, or the human creation.  And it may
even be said that every passage, from  one degree or stage to




CIRCLES.                       197
Another, in the progress of any complete circle of uhfoldings,
involves a circle or system of a minuter kind, until we get
down to the physiological functions' of the organism  of an
ephemeron, to the circuit of blood and organic deposits in
the system  of an anamalcule, or to the orbitual and axial
revolutions of an atom.
It may also be said that the progression from the origin to
the dissolution of any system, or to its passage into another
form, involves the circle; and this is equally true of the
universe as a whole, of its included stellar and solar systems
and individual worlds, and of the further ramifications of creation, constituting the mineral, vegetable, animal, and human
kingdoms, together with their various genera, species, and individual forms, respectively.
The minutest of these circles of movement and develop
ment, are included in, and are, in some sense, dependent
upon, the greater, and those are in like manner included in
and dependent upon, still greater (which, therefore, form
circles of circles), and all are included in the great Circle
which comprehends all movements and developments in the
universe, from its periphery to its center, firom  the whole
unimaginable vortex of being to a single atom  of matter,
and from  the very origin to the very end of all material
things.
The close of each comprehensive circle of operations marks
an era, not only in its own history, but also in the history of
its included circles, which are, to some extent, dependent upon
ite state for their own specific states.  For illustration, the
earth, during a single orbitual revolution, makes, to sense,
three hundred and sixty-five revolutions on its own axis, occasioning the same number of repetitions of the phenomena of
day and night.  But these days and nights, or circles of diur.




198                       CIRCLES.
nal change, vary as to their length, temperature, etc., with the
different stages of progress which are attained in the annuai
circle of revolution.  But, if the reasonings of Maedler and
others are to be relied upon, the whole Solar System, includ
ing the earth, is sweeping round a grand common center, which
is so distant, that a single orbitual revolution can not probably be accomplished in a less period than eighteen millions
of years. As such a revolution will constitute the great year
of the solar system, it is extremely probable that the progress
of this revolution will be marked with changes in ethereal
elements which affect climate and the various circles of organic
creation upon our globe, in a manner analogous to the influence of the orbitual revolution of the earth, upon the length
and other characteristics of the days and nights, and thence,
also, upon the annual developments in the vegetable and animal kingdoms.  This gradual alteration of the position of the
Solar System in the sidereal spaces, and the elemental changes
consequent thereupon, may of itself be sufficient in the course
of time to work an entire change in the character of organic
life upon our globe; and still mightier changes instill mightier
periods of time, may be wrought in the whole aspect of creation, physical and moral, by those inconceivably more stupendous revolutions to which all of these are subordinate.*  It
is by the combined influences of all other circles of movement
and creation, that each particular circle is precisely what it is;
and whenever there is any change in the functional operations
of any portion of the grand system  of Being, or of any of its
sub-systems, physical, mental, or moral, there is, according to
* Professor Nichol has suggested the idea that the marked changes of climate, and
nence of the organic and other productions of the earth, which occurred during the
geological periods, may not have been entirely disconnected with the movements of
the solar system through the stellar spaces. (See Nichol's " Architecture of the
U~.<WcJB.")s?




CIRCLES.                       199
the law of sympathy, necessarily some co-related change in all
circles of operation included in this, however inappreciable to
numan conceptions that change may be.
Thus do we see that the great system of universal Nature,
from its most comprehensive outlines as a whole, down to its
infinitessimal parts, is one compact system  of co-related
"wheels within wheels," which play harmoniously together, as
the various and mutually dependent parts of a most sublime
and magnificent Machine! It is a machine, however, which,
notwithstanding its perfection as a machine, is neither absolutely self-propelling, nor can it evolve its appropriate fabrics,
and thus fulfill the designs of its Maker, without the constant
and intelligent superintendence of a superior Power-even the
Power fiom which it received its origin-as has before been
intimated, and will be more particularly illustrated hereafter.
The general and particular numbers of progressive gradations which extend fiom beginnings to endings, and thus constitute each known circle of developments, o.r each known
form of a perfect series, that is inwoven with all others in the
texture of nature, have heretofore been maintained to be
THREE and SEVEN. The. reasons for considering these as the
numbers of perfection applicable to every complete system of
being, have been extensively illustrated in foregoing pages, and
teed not be repeated in this pla e.




CHAPTER XX.
THE DOCTRINE OF DEGREES.
TIIE exposition of the serial and circular order of nat ure's
operations and constituent parts, as given in the foregoing
chapter, prepares us for the more full comprehension of another
doctrine, which is of no less importance than the previous one.
I refer to the truth that each complete system of creation and
operation, from greatest to smallest, together with the whole
realm of being as one System, is resolvable into distinct Degrees,
associated with each other according to a certain definite order
-and that each complete System  as one comprehensive Degree, is connected, after the. same general order, with the one
immediately beneath, and. that immediately above it, in the
general scale. This doctrine of Degrees has been constantly,ntimated in foregoing discussions; but its importance as a
general guide to truth, demands for it a more direct and particular illustration, which shall now be given.
The writer's theory of Degrees was formed mainly from a
direct study of nature, and with but little immediate aid from
human suggestions beyond what was contained in the mere
word " Degrees," as applied to nature's unfoldings; but when
on the point of placing the present work, containing a chapter
on this subject, in the hands of the printers, my attention was
called by a friend to the teachings of EMANUEL SWEDENBORO
on the same subject.  So far as I understand what that celebrated philosopher has written upon this theme, I am delighted




THE  DOCTRfNE  F  DEGREES.                    201
In being abile to recognize it not only as entirely true, but highly
interesting and important; at the same time that I find in it a
confirmation of the principles involved in my previous thoughts
upon the same subject.  This, however, is said without the
intention to intimate any opinion as to the truthfulness or untruthfulness of the general writings of Swedenborg, concerning
which, indeed, I know comparatively little.
The doctrine of Swedenborg concerning Degrees, is essentially similar to that which I had conceived, the main difference, aside from  his peculiar terminology, consisting in his
exclusive use of the ternzary division, whereas I, as a general
rule, use the septinary, as involving the ternary.  In Swedenborg's writings, however, I find many features and applications
of this doctrine of which I had not before conceived; while,.n my own previously embodied thoughts upon this subject,
there were ideas which I have not yet found in Swedenborg. I
am, therefore, induced to so far modify the chapter I had
written on this subject, as to give a general reflex of what is
essential and fundamental in both forms of the conception, in
doing which I shall so far change my own previously adopted
terminology, as to avoid a confounding of ideas essentially
different, as originating with the Swedish philosopher and myself.
Swedenborg makes Degrees of two kinds, viz., continuous
Degrees, or Degrees of latitude, and discreet Degrees, or De
grees of altitude. Continuous Degrees, or Degrees of latitude,
are described as being " like degrees from light to shade, from
iheat to cold, fiom  hard to soft, from  gross to subtle, etc."
But Discreet Degrees are described as "entirely differant"
from these, in that " they are in the relation of prior, posterior,
and postreme, or of end, cause, and effect.  They are called
Discreet Degrees," continues'he writer, " because the prior is




202       THE  DOCTRINE, OF  IEGREES.
by itself, the posterior by itself, and the postreme by itself;
but still, taken together, they make a one."
Further illustrations of the same subject are given as fol.
lows: "It is well known by ocular experience, that each
muscle in the human body consists of very minute fibers, and
that these fasciculated, constitute those larger ones, called moving fibers, and that bundles of these produce the compound
which is called a muscle. It is the same with the nerves: very
small nervous fibers are put together into larger ones, which
appear like filaments, and by a collection of such filaments the
nerve is produced. It is also the same in the other compaginations, confasciculations, and collections of which the organs
and viscera consist; for these are compounds of fibers and
vessels, variously fashioned by similar degrees. The case is
the same also with all and every thing of the Vegetable Kingdom, and with all and every thing of the Mineral Kingdom;
in wood there is a compagination of filaments in three-fold
order; in metals and stones there is a conglobation of parts
also in three-fold order. These considerations show the nature
of Discreet Degrees, namely, that one is formed from another,
and by means of the second, a third, or composite; and that
each Degree is discreet from another."
Inasmuch as the second Degree in any trine, proceeds from
the first, and the third from the second, it was also taught by
Swedenborg, that "the first Degree is all in all in the subsequent degrees;" and that " the ultimate Degree is the complex,
continent, and basis, of the prior Degrees;" by which latter
phrase I understand to be meant, that in the ultimate Degree,
all the Degrees receive permanent, potential, and utilized embodiment.
This doctrine of Degrees is extended by Swedenborg to
avery department of existence, whether in the physical, moral,




THE  DOCTRINE  OF  DEGREES.    203
civil, psychological or spiritual worlds, and even to the infinite
Divine Constitution itself, of which they are the outbirths and
correspondences.  He, indeed, maintains that all and every
thing in each form  of being, from greatest to smallest, of
which triunity may be predicated, contains Degrees both continuous and discreet.  He maintains that the knowledge of
Discreet Degrees is of the greatest philosophical importance,
and that one who adequately possesses it, will thereby be
enabled to see causes without the previous indications of their
effects, and may even form  accurate conclusions respecting
things invisible, to which the same doctrine of degrees must
necessarily apply.*
Such, then, is the  doctrine of Degrees as taught by
Swedenborg.  But, though it is true, so far as it goes, I am
not aware that it even claims to be perfect in such a sense
as not to admit into its composition some additional considerations.  I do not suppose that Swedenborg  himself
meant to convey the idea that each one of his Discreet Degrees was itself an absolutely simple unity; and it is highly
probable that if he had been questioned directly on the subject, he would have admitted that each one of these was
itself of a three-fold constitution, especially as he has apparently carried the doctrine of the trine down even to in.
finitesimals.
Let Swedenborg's first Discreet Degree, then, stand for
what, in the septinary classifications given in the preceding
pages, has been called the " Primary Trinity;" let his second
Degree stand for our "Secondary Trinity;"and let his third,
or ultimate Degree, which he says is the " complex, continent
and basis of the prior degrees," stand for our seventh divisions
*  Swee  edenborg's " Divine Love and Divine Wisdom," from No. 179 to 24L




204      THE  DOCTRINE  OF  DEGREES.
which we have constantly, though in other terms, represented
as the complex, continent, and basis of all previous divisions'-and this view without the slightest violence to any essentiali
doctrine of Swedenborg, will bring the theory of Degrees precisely into the form in which I had conceived it. I believe
that while Swedenborg himself maintained that triunity was
predicable of all completeness, he also distinctly taught that
the number seven was the common number of completeness.
Consistently with this, then, it would seem  that he could
not avoid admitting that the septinity in some way involved the trine —of the truth of which idea a very small
portion of the existing evidence is spread through the foregoing pages.
The doctrine of Degrees of altitude, then, in the light of
principles heretofore established, and which doubtless Swedenborg himself would have admitted, may be presented in the
following modified form:
Let each component gradation in the seven-fold series be
called an Elemental Degree. 
Let each Trinity of Elemental Degrees (the Primary and
Secondary Trinities, as distinguished in foregoing pages) be
called a Discreet Degree; and
Let each seven-fold series, as a whole, be called a Complete
Degree. We have thus Elemental Degrees, Discreet Degrees, and Complete Degrees.
For example, let-the Mineral Kingdom be considered as
one Complete Degree, the Vegetable Kingdom as another,
and the Animal Kingdom as another; while each Trinity of
developments in each of those Kingdoms, as before repre.
sented, is considered as a Discreet Degree, and each member
of each of those Trinities is considered as an Elemental Degree; and the whole theory of Degrees- of altitude will




THE  DOCTRINE  OF  DEGREES.    205
appear in a general and particular form of embodiment that
will be intelligible to most minds.
Each Complete Degree, viewed in this light, will appear
connected with the contiguous Complete Degree, in the same
way as each Discreet Degree is connected with its contiguous
Discreet Degree, and as each Elemental Degree is connected
with its contiguous Elemental Degree; so that Nature, as a
whole, will exhibit the same ascending order of Complete Degrees (or systems) that is exhibited by the Elemental Degrees
composing any seven-fold series.  I can not avoid the thought
that this classification of Degrees, duly understood, would
present a new and important aid to a proper comprehension
of the ensemble, as well as the particulars of nature, with
her forces, modes of operation, and mutual relations of
parts.
In view of the circular constitution and order of procession
of each system  of being, as illustrated in the chapter immediately preceding this, we are prepared to further remark,
that Degrees of altitude of each of these kinds, result from a
spiral uprising, so to speak, of the circle of development, by
which the first Elemental Degree ascends to the altitude of the
second, the second to the third, and so on; or by which the first
Discreet Degree progressively rises to the altitude of the
second, and the second to the third, and by which one whole
circle of developments, in being completed, thus forming a
Complete Degree, passes out into another and higher circle or
Complete Degree. - -For example, one octave in music, which
may be considered as a series of Elemental Degrees of sound,
forms one Complete Degree of souid, and each other octave
forms another Complete Degree, superior or inferior to it, according as it is above or below it; and a similar remark is
applicable to the Mineral, Vegetable, and Animal Kingdoms,
18




206       THE  DOCTRINE  OF  DEGREES.
before referred to as contiguous and Complete Degrees of
creation, the higher of which arise, in some sense of the term
"plogression," out of the lower.
Of these latter Kingdoms it may be said, that they are all
in accord with each other, as different octaves in music having
the same key-note.  In other words, each Complete Degree,
Circle, or Kingdom, seems to be, member by member, an exact counterpart of the others, on a higher or lower scale; and
this may be said of many other Complete Degrees.  A Complete Degree, however, may take its rise any whore along the
circle of an antecedent Degree, in the same way as any note
in an octave may be taken as the initial note of another and
independent octave.  For example, it was shown in prezeding pages, that the seven-fold series of outer terrestrial
developments, as mentioned by Moses, commenced upon the
basis of the third development in the comprehensive geognostic series, which had been before described; and  many
more examples of a similar kind might be given were it
necessary.  But however the key-notes of different octaves
(or Complete Degrees) of natural developments may differ,
the octaves themselves all contain the same number of parts,
which have similar relations to each other, and occur in the
same order of succession; and therefore all are governed by
the same serial and gradational law.
The doctrine of Degrees might receive a much more extended illustration and application than is exhibited above,
but' as our object should first be to establish general principles, the foregoing must suffice for the present. Owing to
its novelty and somewhat abstruse nature, this doctrine
may, to the ordinary reader, be at first somewhat difficult
of full comprehensi-n; but I can confidently assure him,
that if, by the little perseverance of mental effort that will




THE  DOCTRINE  OF  DEGREES.                    207
be required, he succeeds in mastering it, he will find that
it will greatly simplify and facilitate investigation in every
other department of thought, whether in physics, psychology,
theology, or as relating to ary of their numerous cognate
subjects.




('1 HAPTER  XX1.
THE DOCTRINE OF CORRESPONDENCES,
As a natural sequence of the doctrines of Serial Circles, and
of Degrees, as presented in the foregoing pages, arises that
doctrine of CORRESPONDENCES which has been the guide to so
many important conclusions set forth in this work.  All perfect Series, Circles, or complete Degrees involved in the system of creation, must,.of course, proceed from the same final
Cause; and as they must thus correspond to the common final
Cause, they must hence, in some way, correspond to each
other.  Moreover, every complete Degree in the character of
a Circle, necessarily involves the same principles of constitution with all other Circles, and therefore must, in the general
sense, correspond to all others, whether they be on a higher or
lower scale.  And as each circle consists of the same number
of parts, which occur in the same order of sequence and relations, so each part of any circle corresponds, in the general
sense, to the similarly disposed parts of all other circles.
Thus it is, that if we acquaint ourselves thoroughly with the
characteristics and interior principles of any complete circle
or Degree in nature, we may, in a general way, make it the
exponent of all other circles or complete Degrees.  But in
order to pursue this correspondential method of inves;tigaticn
to the best advantage, and with the most accurate results in
the way of eliciting truth, we must, of course, have a due re.
gard to the relative positions in the whole grand scale or




CORRESPONDENCES.                      209
Circle of creation, occupied by the two circles which are the
special terms of comparison, and to the peculiarities of quality
and development incident to their respective positions.
The comparison exhibited in foregoing pages, between Primary and Secondary Trinities, or Discreet Degrees, as they
were subsequently called, shows that there exists also a general and particular correspondence between them; but this cor.
respondence is not so perfect as that which exists, genorally
and particularly, between the Complete Degrees or Octaves of
natural unfolding.
It may, moreover, be said that any two creations forms, or
developments, which involve the same principles of constitution and operation, correspond to each other, however various
may be the specific departments of existence in which they
may be found. An identity ofprinciples, indeed, is the essential basis of correspondence between higher and lower, or between ulterior and prior developments; and in the light of this
fact, all forms and developments in the material and exterior
world may be seen to correspond even to things of a spiritual
nature; and things of a spiritual nature may, on the other
hand, be seen to correspond to them. Indeed, if the science
of Correspondences were duly developed, nature would appear as if invested with ten thousand tongues, which would
continually be vocal with instruction.  Every kingdom  and
form; every shrub and tree; every leaf and flower; every
insect, beast, and bird; nay, every point of compass and angle
of direction from any given point, and. every curve, circle,
spiral, or other mathematical figure, would speak a distinct
language, and discourse of a separate truth; and the whole
grand system of Nature as One, would continually discourse
of its Infinite Divine Author, of whose creative Wisdom  and
Love it is but an outer expression and correspondent I




210             CORRESPONDENCES.
The doctrines of Scries, Circles, Degrees, and correspond.
ences, therefore, if properly developed and understood, would
be the most efficient of all possible aids to the discovery of
that grand system of general truth whose millions of parts are
all harmonious, mutually explanatory, and corroborative, of
each other. Let the leading minds of the age, then, bestow
due attention upon the development of these principles of investigation; and in proportion as they are comprehended and
applied in the world, the conflicts of the various parties in
philosophy, theology, and even politics, will be swallowed up
in one grand and harmonious system of thought, the credentials of whose truthfulness will be borne upon its very face, to
be seen and read of all men. With the aid of such a system,
properly unfolded, even the child might set out on its course
of progression, with the unadulterated truth, and even the
whole truth-which, though at first in a diminished form of
representation, and involved in comprehensive generals, would,
as the mind expanded, gradually magnify, and regularly and
harmoniously unfold into particulars, for ever and ever. The
harmony of thoughts thus brought about in the world, would,
in proportion to its degree, be necessarily accompanied with a
more intimate and spiritual conjunction with the Divine
Source of all harmony, from the perpetual infiowings of whose
Love and Wisdom, all the movements of human society, in
common with the movements of those planetary and celestial
spheres which now, without reservation, own the Divine sway,
would proceed without a jar, or a single note of discord. Ti.is
would be the long-looked for, and long-prayed for, reig, of
God upon earth!




CHAPTER XXII.
THE tOCTRINE OF PE.OGRESSIVE DEVELOPMENT,
ONE important object of this treatise, as doubtless has been
observed, is to exhibit the connection of nature with her interior, producing Cause, and pervading Life-force. The reader
who has attentively followed us in the previous discussions
having a bearing upon this subject, has observed that our
philosophy has uniformly tended to the idea of an intelligent,
voluntative DIVINE AGENCY, as concerned in the origin and
government of the outer system of things.  But as our object
should be to discover truth for the sake of truth, irrespective
of its character or consequences, it would be manifestly inl
consistent to ignore any facts or manifest principles of nature
which have been thought by any party in philosophy to
militate against conclusions such as those exhibited in our
previous reasonings.  As the next natural step beyond the
foregoing  investigations, therefore, we proceed to briefly
notice the merits of a pending controversy, embracing, substantially, the questions, whether the system of nature is the
result of the operation of an inherent force or law of progressive
development? or whether it is the result of a series of special
and independent exertions of Divine Power, with little or n7
regard to law?  Though these questions suggest; two opposite
views, neither of which we are able to adopt without some
important qualifications, it is-proper that they should here be
exhibited, together with the main features of the discussions




212        PROGRESSIVE  DEVELOPMENT.
they have engendered, in the form  in which they have ex
tensively occupied  the  minds of philosophers and theo.
logians of late years; and it may be, that in the light
developed  by  their conflicting  affirmative and  negative
arguments, a true modified theory will be brought into
view.
A few years ago there was published an anonymous work,
entitled, " VESTIGES OF THE NATURAL HISTORY OF CREATION,"
in which the idea that creation is the natural result of the
operation of certain fixed laws, is ingeniously maintained.
Though the author of that work does not reject the idea of a
remote, he rejects that of an immediate, Divine Agency, as
concerned in the generation and government of the outer
forms of nature; and as his positions, viewed in one light,
present, unintentionally, perhaps, on his part, a condensed
synopsis of the whole groundwork of the pantheistic and
materialistic philosophy, it is proper that they should here
be summarily exhibited.
Assuming the correctness of the nebular theory of-cosmical
creations (after epitomizing, in a cogent and felicitous manner,
the prominent points of evidence on which this theory is
based), the author urges this theory as exhibiting a succession
of law-governed changes, by which primordial matter was
resolved into stellar systems, solar systems, and planets, with
all their present general and particular movements in space.
The facts in Chemistry and Geology are then considered, as
showing that the present structure and physical arrangements
of our globe (together with all similar globes in space)
originated, probably, from  laws governing solid, fluid, and
vaporiform substances.
The progressive and law-determined development, also, of
rganic beings, both in the vegetable and animal kingdoms




VESTIGES OF  CREATION.                   213
with man at their head, is then maintained by arguments,
of the more important of which, the following is a brief
synopsis.
1. "We have seen powerful evidence," says the author,
"that the construction of this globe and its associates, and
inferentially that of all the other globes of space, was the
result, not of any immediate or personal exertion on the part
of the Deity, but of natural laws, which are the expressions
of his will. What is to hinder our supposing that the organic
creation is also the result of natural laws, which are in like
manner an expression of his will?  More than this, the fact
of cosmical arrangements being the effect of natural law, is f
powerful argument for the organic arrangements being so like
wise; for how can we suppose that the august Being who
brought all these countless worlds into form  by the simple
establishment of a natural principle, flowing fiom his mind,
was to interfere personally and specially on every occasion
when a new shell-fish or reptile was to be introduced into
existence on one of these worlds?"  The writer further arguesJ
that,," to a reasonable mind, the Divine attributes must ap.
pear, not diminished or reduced in any way, but infinitely
exalted, by supposing a creation by law."
2. The writer submits that the progressive succession of
organic beings, as revealed in fossilology, by which the lower
and more simple forms, as a general rule, precede the higher
and more complex, is in perfect harmony with the hypothesis
of development by lauw; whereas, on the supposition of
special Divine exertions, it might be supposed that there
would have been many specialities of Divine creation, as
essentially modifying the existing order of things.
3. Particular facts and analogies, as connected with the or.
g.nio kingdoms, seem to hint that forces are lodged in naBte




214       PROGRESSIVE  DEVELOPMENT.
from which the simpler species in the vegetable and animal
world may, under certain circumstances, derive their origin.
Reference is made to the vegetable-like forms of fiost on the
window, and to the shrub-like form of crystallization known
to chemistry as the Arbor Diance-also to the vegetable-like
forms of some of the ordinary appearances of the electric
fluid; and from these phenomena the writer argues the prob
ability that electricity is largely concerned in the origination
and growth, not only of crystals, but of plants, which astume
forms according to specific generative and other conditio;s.
Moreover, the growth of certain plants for which no seeds
were sown, and in situations where it is next to impossible
that such seeds could have existed, is thought to add probability to the theory of a possible spontaneous germination of
vegetable forms without the ordinary seminal mode of origination-provided such changes are suddenly made in the ingredients and conditions of a soil as a-e favorable to the
development of organic from  inorganic forms. The author
also mentions the singular facts that oats cropped down so as
t;o prolong the period of their growth, have been known to
progress, by regular transmutation, into the form of rye; and
that the cabbage is known to be, in its native state, a trailing
sea-side plant, totally different from the plant in its cultivated
form. These latter facts, with others, are thought to strongly
support the theory of a transmuctation of species fiom  lower
to higher forms.
4. The formation of entozoa, or animals within animals,
where their eggs could not possibly have been deposited, is
thought to argue powerfully for the independent generation of
the lower animal forms, when certain conditions obtain that are
favorable. This argument is thought to-be strengthened by
the fact that insects of a low species -(the acarus) were repeat.




RInDIMENTAnY   ORGANS.                        215
ed1y produced in abundance, apparently  solely by galvanic
processes instituted by Messrs. Crosse and Weekes; and in
one instance, a growth of fungi of a beautiful and previously
unknown species, was produced by the last named gentleman,
by the same process.*
5. Particular features of animal organization, which are ap..
parently useless and incidental, are also adduced in support
of the same theory of law-development. Thus female animals
of many species have certain organs which are necessary to
their sex; while the same organs exist rudimentally in the
males, to whom they are not necessary.  " For example," says
the writer, "the mamma of the human female, by  whom
these organs are obviously required, also exist in the male,
who has no occasion for them. It might be supposed that in
this case there was a regard to uniformity for mere appearance sake; but that no such principle is concerned, appears
from a much more remarkable instance connected with the
marsupial animals.  The female of that tribe has a process of
bone advancing from the pubes, for the support of her pouch;
and this also appears in the male marsupial, who has no pouch,
and requires none."   Other animals, and especially  among
those which form links between lower and higher orders in the
scale of development, have the rudiments of organs, to them
unnecessary, but which were necessary to animals beneath
them in the scale; but of facts of this kind I need not give
further details. These abortive and rudimentary organs, ex* These alleged results of the experiments of Messrs. Crosse and Weekes, were at first
almost universally scouted as absurd and impossible; but subsequent repeated experiments, performed during several years, seem to leave no doubt of their reality. I
perceive by a late communication, published in the newspapers, from Mr. F. F. Ogden,
United States Consul at Liverpool, that that gentleman has recently visited the labora.
tory of Mr. Crosse, and became entirely convinced of the truth of the: wonderftl repr
euatations concerning this newly produced i-set.




216       PROGRESSIVE  I E VELOPMENT.
isting where they are not necessary, must, it is thought, be
regarded as blemishes and blunders, on the supposition that
the beings who possess them were created independently and
by special exertion; but they are considered as precisely what
might have been expected on the supposition that creation has
proceeded through her various ramifications and transitional
stages, according to the energizing and directing influence of a
uniform law of development.
In further illustration and support of the theory of progressive development, the writer quotes the following startling
passage from Fletcher's Rudiments of Physiology, in which it
is shown that the general forms, and the order of succession,
of the developments in the animal kingdom, are represented
by the general forms, and the order of succession, of the de.
velopments of the human fcetus.  "It is a fact" (says Dr.
Fletcher), " of the highest interest and moment that, as the
brain of every tribe of animals appears to pass, during its de.
velopment, in succession through the types of all those below
it, so the brain of man passes through the types of those of
every tribe in the creation. It represents, accordingly, before
the second month of uterogestation, that of an avertebrated
animal; at the second month, that of an osseous fish; at the
third, that of a turtle; at the fourth, that of a bird; at the
fifth, that of one of the rodentia; at the sixth, that of one of
the ruminantia; at the seventh, that of one of the digitagrada;
at the eighth, that of one of the quadrumana; till, at length, at
the ninth, it compasses the brain of man. It is hardly necessary to say," continues the writer, "that all this is only an
approximation to the truth; since neither is the brain of all
osseous fishes, of all turtles, of all birds, nor of all the species
of any of the above order of mammals, by any means precisely
the same; nor does the brain of the human foetus at any time




THEORY  OF  OBGANIC  ASCENSION.   217
precisely resemble, perhaps, that of any individual whatever
among the lower animals.  Nevertheless, it may be said to
represent, at each of the above-mentioned periods, the aggre.
gats, as it were, of the brains of each of the tribes stated."
Although these facts were stated by Dr. Fletcher without
any view to the support of the development-hypothesis now
under consideration, it is remarkable that the series of animal
forms which he here traces as representing the series of suc.
cessive human foetal developments, is the very series which, in
the same order of succession, made their appearance on the
globe during the depositions of the fossiliferous rocks from the
earliest to the latest.
The foregoing are the principal arguments, fortified by many
minor facts and considerations, from which the author of the
"Vestiges" concludes that the whole system of creation, with
all its diversified forms, inanimate and animate, from its first
to its last stage of unfolding, was brought forth under the
operation of one grand law of progressive development, by
which " the simplest and most primitive type gave birth to the
type next above it," by which " this, again, produced the next
higher, and so on to the very highest, the stages of advance
being in all cases very small-namely, from one species only
to another, so that the phenomenon has always been of
simple and modest character."  He considers that after the
production of the first and lowest animal form, the higher
type was, in all cases, produced from  the lower, according to
the ordinary process of generation, and that its superiority to
its parent was, in each instance, owing to a prolongation of
the process of utero-gestati)n, aided by new and favorable
circumstances, by which the form next superior to the parent,
in the pre-ordained animal scale, was attainel.  A  similar
principle of transmutation was applied also to the Vegetable
19




218       PROGRESSIVE  DEVELOPMENT.
Kingdom, by which it was thought that higher forms ascended
from lower, until the highest were attained.
A theory so novel and startling as the foregoing, did not, of
course, escape the most vigorous opposition, from adherents
of prevailing theories in philosophy and theology. This opposition was specially inspirited by the alarm which was taken
by the dominant theology, which considered the theory in
question as a bold invasion of hei assumed prerogative as
a generally unquestionable guide in matters of religious faith.
The main:features of this opposition (which, we think, was
partly just and partly unjust) require here to be briefly represented, together with the essential points of argument in the
rejoinder which the opposition called forth from  the authoi
of the "Vestiges."
The book in question was charged with a "direct tendency
to expel the: Almighty from  the universe which He has made
— to degrade the god-like race to whom He has intrusted the
development and appreciation of His power, and to render the
revelation of His will an incredible superstition;" and, probably with quite as strong a desire to neutralize this alleged
tendency considered in the abstract, as to develop truth
regardless of its consequences, its- essential idea was pronounced " an opinion which has not a single fact in its favorwhich stands in direct. opposition to all the analogies of nature
-which is repugnant to the best feelings of mankind, and
subversive of all our most cherished convictions-a fraud com.
mitted upon the reason, and an insult cast upon the dignity of
our species."'
The zeal of the prominent opposers of this work, a-d thei:
~ lerih British Review for JiUy, 184B




NEBULAR  THEORY  OPPOSED.                   219
devotion to the one grand object of putting it down, as indl
cated in these and similar denunciatory expressions, may, in
some instances, have caused them  to unconsciously magnify
the seeming evidences against the theory it propounded, and
as unconsciously to underrate any real evidence which may
exist iti its favor. Candor requires, therefore, that we should
look at the merits of this, as well as of all controversies of a
similar nature, aside from all mere denunciation such as novel
theories, true or false, are ever apt to provoke-and in the
light of the plain facts and arguments which bear upon the
case, by whichsoever party these may be urged.
The nebular hypothesis of cosmical creations urged by the
author of the "Vestiges," as the initial portion of the universal system of creation supposed by him to be unfolded by
law, was objected to mainly on the ground that the Earl of
Rosse's telescope had succeeded in resolving into stars certain
nebula which were before considered irresolvable, and in con
siderably changing the apparent form and outlines of others,
which had previously appeared such as to countenance the idea
of agglomerating and rotating masses.  In view of such
" unequivocal facts," one principal reviewer regards it as a
"most unwarrantable assumption to suppose that there are in
the heavenly spaces any masses of matter different from solid
bodies composing planetary systems."  To this our author
replies that the resolution of a great quantity of previously
unresolved nebula, by Lord Rosse's telescope, " was, of course,
to be expected, and it is a fact, though in itself interesting, of
no consequence to the nebular hypothesis."  There are still
many nebula which even the stupendous powers of Lord
Rosse's instrument do not sensibly affect, and which probably
no increase of optical power ever to be attained by human
science or art, would be adequate to resolve. But the present




220      PROGRESSIVE  DEVELOPMENT.
position of the nebular theory in respect to its philosophical
credibility, is more fully represented in a previous portion of
this work.
The theory of progressive succession in the organic king.
doms, as advocated by the "Vestiges," is disputed mainly on
the following grounds: First, that fishes of a high organization
occur (as it is said) in the oldest of the fossiliferous rocks;
secondly, that in several instances the passage from a lower to
a higher system of rocks, is accompanied by an abrupt and
entire transition in the organic kingdoms, exhibiting none of
the links of progressive gradation which the theory of the
"Vestiges" supposes to exist; and thirdly, that in some instances several widely different and  previously  unknown
species seem to have been introduced at about the same epoch,
with apparently no links of connection between them.
To the allegation that fishes of a high organization occur in
the oldest of the fossiliferous rocks, the author, of the " Vestiges," in his sequel to that work, replies by quotations from
geologists, showing a discrepancy in their statements upon this
point, which, however, he shows may be explained by the fact,
that since the statements of some of them were put forth, "the
lower fossiliferous rocks have been divided into several dis.
tinct formations, in the lowest of which it is fully admitted
there are no vertebrata. He, moreover, argues that the
cephalopoda and gasteropoda, mollusks of a high organization,
whose remains are found in the oldest series of fossiliferous
rocks, might, as transmuted species, have come in soon after
the commencement of the formation of those rocks, as owing
to a "rapidity of generation" and " rush of life," which is
sometimes characteristic of certain of the lower orders of
animals.
In answer to the argument which negatives the idea of




OBSERVATIONS  GENERALIZED.                     221
connectil g links between lower aid higher species, and between widely dissimilar species existing in the same system
of deposits, he generalizes the field of geological observation,
and finds particular systems, both of rocks and their contained fossils, more fully and particularly represented in some
localities than others. By the facts which he develops in tiis
branch of the discussion, he succeeds in materially weakening,
though perhaps not entirely disproving, the assumptions of his
opponents, that the character of organic life has been subject
to frequent abrupt and entire changes.  He considers it probable, moreover, that " development has not proceeded, as
usually assumed, upon a single line, which would require all
the animals to be placed cne after another, but in a plurality
of lines, in which the orders, and even minuter subdivisions
of each class are ranged side by side;" and he argues that
"the development of these various lines has proceeded independently in various regions of the earth, so as to lead to
forms not everywhere so like as to fall within our ideas
of specific character, but generally, or in some more vague
degree, alike."
Upon the whole, the author reasserts his main position with
so much force and ingenuity, and brings to it such an accession
of evidence from the testimonies of geologists and naturalists,
as apparently to render the general onslaught of his opponents,
for the most part, a failure; and perhaps it would not be
unfair to consider their subsequent silence as, in some degree,
a tacit admission of this fact.
Though the author of the "Vestiges" acknowledges that
God is, in some sense, ever present with his creation, and
supports and rules it by his Providence, he admits this merely
as the intimation of an internal sense or feeling, for which he
does not pretend to have any philosophy. But in the absence




222       PROGRESS(VE  DEVELOPMENT.
of such a philosophy, those who have not this internal feeling
of the presence and overruling Providence of God (as many
have not), very naturally employ the whole force of facts and
arguments, such as have a very thorough development in the
book referred to, in support of the idea that nature develops
all her forms and phenomena, by an inherent force of her own,
independent of any superior influence, as received from a
Source without herself. Such theories can, of course, be successfully met only by the weapons of a cogent and well
grounded philosophy, as relating to the matters in dispute;
but as such a philosophy does not yet prevail, to any extent,
in the world, it hence follows, as a fact much to be lamented,
that faith in God and his overruling and universal Providences,
is, to a large extent, at the mercy of pantheistic and materialistic philosophies. Such philosophies are hence continually
growing more rife and rampant; and when those who know
for themselves, from intuition, that there is a God ever present
with, and ever ruling, the affairs of creation, find themselves incompetent to meet the arguments for the opposing views, they
are apt to grow impatient, and to descend to mere ridicule
and denunciation, and sometimes even to misrepresentationa mode of treatment which seldom  fails to excite the con.
tempt of those toward whom it is aimed, and even to confirm
them in their anti-religious theories.
Common sense should teach every one that.it is worse than
useless-nay, perverse and wicked-to close his eyes to plain
facts in nature, whatever may be their apparent theological or
philosophical bearings; and whoever would do such an act, is
plainly not so much devoted to the furtherance of truth as he
is to the maintenance of his own opinions.  Looking fully in
the face, therefore, as in duty bound to do, all the clearly
established facts exhibited by the " Vestiges of Creation," as




DISCREPANCIES TO  BE  HARMONIZED. 223
well as every other species of fact, let us see whether the
general philosophy of this work will afford any light by which
outer appearances, reflecting a natural law or force of development, and the interior sense of the human soul, respecting the
constant presence of God, and the exertion of his upholding
and directing power, may be. rationally harmonized. By way
of attempting the solution of all apparent discrepancies, as
involved in these subjects, we will, in the following pages,
endeavor to unfold the true theory of law agency and Divine
&geny, as it appears to us.




CHAPTER XXIII.
NflETHER VIEW  OF THE SYSTEM OF LIVING FORMS, AS SUGGESTING ITS MODE OF DEVELOPMENT
HAD the author of the "Vestiges of Creation" and his
opponents both understood the doctrine of Series, Degrees,
and Correspondences: as unfolded in the preceding pages of
this work, and had they duly observed the indications of these
doctrines in regard to the origin, constitution, and laws of
nature, the relations of visible effects to invisible and spiritual
causes, and the relations of the universe and all its sub-serial
and corresponding parts, to the Infinite Divine Spirit, as the
Projector, Originator, and Vitalizer of all, they might, by a
mutual, and in that case obviously'required, modification of
their views, have come to a perfect agreement on all essential
points, without compromising any true principle of theological
faith, or disregarding any real fact in science or true principle
in philosophy. The view which, as it appears to me, reconciles all real scientific facts, and all true philosophical and
theological principles, I will now proceed to briefly unfold.
I will premise by saying that the idea of progression, as a
general fact connected with the origin and movements of
creation, as a whole, and with the origin and movements of
each of its sub-serial and correspondent parts, seems to be
necessarily involved in the idea of successive movements or
unfoldings, from  beginnings  toward  predetermined  ends.
Every successive movement or effort is a closer approximation




PROGRESSION  AND  RETRlGOGRESSION. 225
to the proposed end of the whole series of movements, and is
therefore a decided progress fiom a previous and more rudimental state or position. Accordingly all philosophy and all
revelation concur in the acknowledgment that creation, from
its incipient to its present stage of development, has passed
through a regular series of progressive unfoldings; and this
fact is recognized as applying equally to the cosmical universe,
to the geological formations, and to the various systems of
organic forms, beginning with the lowest and ending with the
highest, whose remains have been successively entombed in
the rocks.
It is true there are occasional and apparent exceptions to
this rule-occasional instances of particular retrogression on
the one hand, and irregular and abnormal advances on the
other; but these are owing to local circumstances and isolated
influences, and when properly understood, they prove, rather
tLan disprove, the general rule.  The idea may be illustrated
by the following simile: Let a number of vessels, of different
clas-es, be supposed to sail from  the same port, at the same
time, and bound to the same place of destination. Wafted by
the same breezes, and floated by the same tides, they, for a
timle, make nearly equal progress, sail in nearly parallel paths,
and generally keep each others company.  But owing to
slight diversities in their sailing qualities, and incidental differences in their modes of manoeuvring, their courses gradually diverge from  each other, and they get into different
currents of ocean and of atmosphere, some of which are pro.
pitious and some the reverse. They are then farther dispersed
by  hurricanes; some of them, by violent gales occurring
only in their own7 localities, may be driven hundreds of miles
out of their co:rse, or in a retrograde direction; a few of
them may be ariven upon rocks cr quioksands, ar  lost out




226        SYSTEM  OF  LI'VlrNG  FORIMS
right; while others may be driven forward with equal vio.
lence, and reach their destined haven in an apparently irreg,
ularly short period of time.  Of course no one would con.
sider the diversities in the fates and successes of these different
vessels, or the fact that some were for a time driven back.
ward, that some were lost outright, and that others were
driven forward with a velocity which seemed to set all idea
of a regularly graduated motion at defiance, as any proof
against a general law of progression, as applied to the sailing
of ships from port to port, but the proof would, upon the
whole, be the reverse.
Allow these ships, then, to represent an equal number of
Divine archetypes, or pre-existing ideal forms of creation, so
to speak, which set out, at one and the same time, upon
the voyage of progressive development, all being bound to
one haven, viz., the realization of the clothing of an exterior
form; the diversities in their movements, presented in the
retardations and temporary retrogressions of some, and the
fitful and apparently preternatural accelerations of others, as
owing to the various currents and counter-currents of outer
influences, no more disprove the law of general progression,
with reference to them, than similar diversities of movement
prove the same thing with reference to the ships. When we,
therefore, find a few local examples of vertebral fishes among
some of the strata of the first series of fossiliferous rocks, or
when we find, in one or two instances, the remains of a
diminutive air-breathing reptile, in an upper member of the
Old Red Sandstone series, where, as it is stated, such have
recently been found;* or when, in human history, we find
examples of whole nations and races remaining apparently
stationary for thousands of years, while others have, at early
* See F-inburgh Philosophical Jo-rmal for April, IS52, pp 80-4.




EMBRYONIC  FORMS.                      227
periods, come to a high state of advancement in art, government, and social refinement, which were again succeeded by
universal ignorance and barbarism-we are not to consider
these examples as contradicting the doctrine of progression,
as a general principle, but as only the particular and local exceptions to the direct development of that principle in outer
forms.
Keeping in view, then, the doctrine of general Progression
as an undeniable principle applicable to the universal series
of creation as a whole, and to all its included and corresponding sub-series, we are prepared for further inquiries respecting
the order and method of progression, and the mutual relations
of the different parts or degrees of each series of creation to
which this principle applies. In making these inquiries, our
attention will be confined for the present to the Animal Kingdom, which will serve as a representative of all other serial
creations.
The fact alluded to by the author of the "Vestiges of Creation," that in the reproduction of the higher animals and of
man, the embryo passes through successive stages of development, in which the types of all the lower animals, beginning
with the fish (or, as some say, with the annalid or worm), are
represented in succession, until its own proper type is attained,
is certainly of great significance, as it bears upon the subject
under consideration.  But Professor Agassiz has made some
further discoveries in the department of embryology, which
would perhaps go to emphasize the conclusions to which this
fact would seem naturally to point. I would refer now particularly to the discovery that the embryos of animals of certain existing families bear, at a certain stage of their fcetal
progress, a distinct resemblance to the perfected individuals
of now extinct species of the same families, which existed in




228        SYSTEM   OF  LIVING  FORMS.
early geological periods.  From  his remarks on this subject,
I submit the following quotations:
"Embryology," says he, "by the metamorphoses which
take place in animals, assigns now a value to external forms,
and not only assigns them a value, but a chronological value,
by which it is possible to consider as lower those animals
which agree with the earlier forms of the germs."......
"The class of fishes which I have studied more particularly,
has shown me that the first types appeared under forms, and
with an organization, peculiar to embryos of that very class in
the present epoch, proving thereby, with perfect evidence, the
inferiority of the first created types, as well in their peculiar
class as in their department. But though of a lower order,
these types of ancient ages bore in themselves, from the beginning, the impression of the-plan that was to be successively
developed in the different epochs which have preceded the
order of things existing at present, and by whose realization
have been brought about those numerous families of Fishes,
Reptiles, Birds, and Mammalia, which now live upon the surface of the earth." Again: "All the information about the
fossils-all the information of former ages, will have to be
compared with those embryonic forms, in order to understand
more fully the analogy which exists between these earlier
types, and the successive changes which those of our day undergo to assume their final form.  If I am not mistaken, we
shall obtain from  sketches of those embryonic forms, more
correct figures of fossil animals than have been acquired by
actual restoration."*
These extracts from one who is an advocate of the idea. of
creations de novo at different geological epochs, certainly argue
* Agaasiz's " Lectures on Comparative Embryology," delivered before the Lowell In.
itute. Boston. Lee. xii




FACTS  IN  EMBRYOLOGY.                  229
much for a connection of some kind between the lower and
higher, or extinct and living, species of animals of the same
families, and pretty clearly show that the higher and existing
species are, in many instances, the result of an extension of th6
identical gestative process which, in its lower stages, was exemplified in the ancient species. Such being the existing evidence
of a connection between ancient and modern species of the
same families and genera, and that the modern species exist,
at least as a progressed sequence of the principles involved in
the ancient, we will now quote from the same author some
further illustrations of the analogies and co.nnections existing
between the different and successively created divisions of the
Animal Kingdom as a whole, with man at its head:'The unity of structure in vertebrated animals," says he,
"has been understood, and well understood, long before Em.
bryology had added any thing to show how deep this unity of
plan was impressed on that type. By the investigations of
Comparative Anatomy, it had been ascertained that the external
differences which characterize the class of Fishes, that of Rep.
tiles, that of Birds, and that of Mammalia, were only modifi
cations of one and the same structure-that the head of Fishes,
for example, though apparently so different from that of Man,
was made up of the same bones, arranged in the same manner, only sub-divided into more distinct points of ossification, with modified proportions, most of them  remaining
movable for life, but, after all, arranged upon the same uniform
plan."
In a previous paragraph, the same author says: " It was in
Physiology, a great discovery, when it was ascertained that
all Vertebrata, that Fishes, as well as Reptiles, as well as
Birds, as well as Mammalia, arose from eggs, which have one
and the same uniform structure in the beginning, and proceed
20




230        SYST EM  OF  LIVING  FORMS.
to produce animals as widely different as they are in the full
grown state, simply by successive, gradual metamorphoses;
and these metamorphoses upon one and the same plan, accord
ing to one and the same general progress."  Again: "It may
therefore be said, with perfect propriety, that the higher Vertebrates undergo changes, through which, in different periods
of their life, they resemble the lower ones; that there is a
period when the young bird has not only the form, but the
structure, and even the fins, which characterize the Fish. And
of the young Mammals the same may be said. There is a
period in the structure of the young Rabbit (in which the investigations have been traced more extensively than in other
species), when the young Rabbit resembles so closely the
Fish, that it even has gills, living in a sac full of water, breathing as Fishes do.. So that the resemblance is as complete as
it can be, though each of these types grows to a complication
of structure, by which the young Mammal, for instance, leaving behind this low organization of the lower types, rises to a
complication of structure, to higher and higher degrees, and to
that eminence even which characterizes mankind."*
These facts certainly show a unity of plan and a progressive
succession of, in some sense, mutually dependent forms, in the
system of animated nature, which countenances the idea that
the whole creation of lower animals is, as it were, the ftetus
of the whole human creation, and that the latter was thus developed by a process somewhat resembling that which the
author of' the " Vestiges of Creation" supposed to have taken
place, and which he calls " the universal gestation of Nature;"
yet we shall soon see that, so far from this theory dispensing
with the agency of a God, this universal gestative process
could not have proceeded even through its first stages, without
* Lecture on Comparative Embryology, Lee. xiL




THIE  GREAT  TREE.                     231'he constant influx of a vitalizing and energizirng Influence
from above all nature, and hence fiom  a source absolutely
Divine.
It may here be remarked that these facts, developed by the
researches of palaeontologists, embryologists, and physiologists, concerning the relations and order of succession of the
different divisions of the animriated tribes, are in perfect agreement with the general mode of philosophizing presented in this
work, by which all general facts in each system of creation,
and all systems of creation as grand facts, are arranged in a
harmonious serial order of progression, in such a way as to
show a thread of unity and correspondence running through all
systems, and through the grand system of systems, from  the
very origin to the very ultimates of all things.
This scheme of creation brings the Animal Kingdom, as well
as the Vegetable, and all other complete systems of creation,
together with the grand System  of all systems, under the
analogy of a TREE, with its seven serial and progressive parts,
consisting of Roots, Trunk, Branches; Leaves, Flower-buds,
Blossoms, and FRUIT.  It is thus strongly hinted that the
whole universal System of creation, with all its corresponding
sub-systems, including the Vegetable and Animal Kingdoms,
while under the constant vitalizing and voluntative influx of
Divine Love and Wisdom, which are spiritual Heat and Light,
grew up, as it were, from Germ to ultimates, in the same progressive and sequential order in which the tree grows from
root to fruit, under the constant influx of solar heat and light,
which are the natural correspondents of Divine Love and Wisdom.
But if this view is admitted, it will not of itself necessarily
decide the question as to whether each higher creation was in
all cases developed from  the parentage of the one immedi




232        SYSTEM  OF  LIVING  FORMS.
ately below it in the series to which it belongs. There is, ap.
parently, one exception to this order of parental extraction in
the developed parts of the superiorly organized tree: The
flower-buds, though they are the next superior development
to the leaves, are not an outgrowth from the leaves, but, in
common with these, they are the next superior outgrowth from
the branches; and the leaves, after performing their specific
functions,.die and drop off, without giving rise to any succeeding and superior form of developments. The flower-buds are
undoubtedly an ascension of the same essences and principles
which, stopping one step short of them, produce the leaves,
and which, in each case, ascend from all the preceding devel.
opments of the tree as represented in roots, trunk, and
branches.
It should be remarked, however, that in a less perfect class
of vegetable forms-the cryptogamia-the organs of fructification, involving, of course, the principles of the bud, are developed upon the leaves, which, in this instance, shows the
relations of parent and offspring between the two develop.
ments, and  preserves the  succession  between  them  unbroken.
Concerning the genesis of the Animal Kingdom, then, as
well as that of all other Series and Degrees of creation, it
may, so far as the known analogies of nature are concerned,
and without in either case affecting our views of the Divine
agency, be consistently believed, either that the higher tribes
in the Animal Kingdom  (as well as in the Vegetable and
other Degrees of Creation), at certain periods, and under certain revolutionary conditions or Divine impulsions hereafter
to be explained-proceeded by orderly descent, from the tribes
next below them, as their natural parents-or that they pro.
ceeded, at the same periods and under the same conditions




GENESIS  OF  ANIMAL  KINGDOM.    233
from the aggregate of all preceding developments of nature, as
constituting their general material germ, while they had no
special lineal connection with the forms next below them in
the series. Either of these suppositions would sufficiently
comport with the unity of the general plan which we have
before observed to pervade the works of creation. The
probability is, however, that both of these modes of production were, to some extent, observed in the origination of
the ensemble of the Animal and other Kingdoms; but in
neither case is it probable that any form or creation was unfolded, except upon the basis of a suitable preceding development, which, in some sense, served as its material germ, or
predisposing condition of development.
Unless we adopt some such theory as here propounded,
many natural facts-facts which the cause of true theology
and religion can never be subserved by denying-will remain
entirely inexplicable.




CIIAPTER XXIV.
LAW AGENCY AND DIVINE AGENCY.
IN the light of the foregoing remarks respecting the order,
successive developments, and relations of the organic tribes,
let us now press to a final and more specific decision, the
question, whether the system of Creation, as it now stands,
came to exist, in any sense, through the operations of Law?and if so, in what sense, and with what accompanying conclusions relative to the doctrine of Providences, or of Divine
interpositions?
But that we may pursue this inquiry intelligibly, we must
obviously first define precisely what we mean by the term
"Law."  Law, as it is understood by the best authorities,
means simply a rule of action, or a definite mode or method
in which force and motion proceed toward the accomplishment of an end. It is not, therefore, of itself, either force or
motion, but only the rule of action which these, in their
operations, are made to observe.
Now it may be safely asserted that there is no force or
motion, either in the universe of matter or the universe of
mind, which, in its operations, does not observe some rule,
some method, and hence some law.  If, indeed, there could be
any action or motion without method or law, that action or
motion would necessarily be chaotic, and would tend directly
to the total subversion of all law and order, and thus to reduce
all things to chaos. It is impossible for a man to conceive a




UNIVERSALITY  OF  LAW.                    235
thought, except in accordance with some law of thought.
Nay, it is self-evidently impossible even for the Infinite Mind
to conceive a thought, or put forth an action, except in con
nection with some definite mode or form, and hence law, of
procedure which that thought or action spontaneously assumes.
In the Infinite Mind, therefore, Law, in its spiritual sense, is
self-existent and eternal.  Thence it proceeds, by volition, in
outer creations, and assumes the forns of what are termed the
"laws of nature."  These, as modes, or rules of material
motion, commence at the lowest and most chaotic germs of
the physical universe, and (being constantly supplied by
voluntative and higher inflowings from their Infinite Spiritual
Source) proceed in regular order of ascending development,
through all subsequent motions and creations, until, in the
heights of the celestial universe, creation again merges itself
in that Infinite Divine Essence from  which it originally
sprang.  And as all motions are in accordance with some de.'finite rule, method, or law, hence all forms, creations, and con.
ditions, from  lowest material to the highest spiritual and
celestial, which, in regular serial orders, are developed by
means of those motions, are necessarily law-developed and
law-governed.  If this were not so, then creation, indeed,
would not exhibit any system or method in its arrangements,
such as is now apparent throughout its whole domains, but
the various forms of which it is composed, would necessarily
be totally disconnected and confused.
It is worthy of remark, that the idea of law as governing
the processes. of creation obtains predominance in proportion
to the development of the human mind.  Thus the child conceives that the grass is made to grow by an abstract interposition of the power of God, with which he is unable to connect
any idea of law. But as his mind unfolds, and the field of




236  LAW  AGENCY  AND  DIVINE  AGENCY.
his observation extends, he discovers that grass grows, in all
cases, under certain given conditions, and hence grows according to a fixed rule. He still, perhaps, believes that God, by a
direct and isolated f;at of His will, causes the rain to fill, the
thunder to peal, ant the lightning to flash; but a further development of his mind corrects this impression, and shows
him  that the rains, the thunders, and the lightnings, are de.
pendent upon a more general administration of the Divine
Power through atmospheric and electric media and conditions.
He still, perhaps, imagines that the sun, moon, and planets
are made to pursue their courses in the heavens by the direct
volitionary effort of God concentrated specifically and abstractly upon them; but when his mind is introduced to the
series of demonstrations presented in the science of Astronomy, he perceives that all these phenomena are in accordance
with a general method in which all aggregations of matter in
free space act. He still probably believes (according to a
common, and, as we have before shown, an erroneous interpretation of Sacred Scripture) that the earth on which he
dwells was directly spoken into existence by God, in the space
of six literal days, about six thousand years ago; but when
he attains a more enlarged understanding of the mechanical
and chemical forces which God has incorporated in the system
of nature, and reads the physical history of our planet as
written upon the rocks, he perceives that our globe has been
brought fiom a primeval chaotic, to its present perfected state,
by means of fixed methods of operation of matter, expressed
by the terms, "condensation," "abrasion,"  deposition," "s egregation," etc. And if the hypothesis (seemingly supported
by all analogy) that vegetable, animal, and even human organisms, came to exist through the instrumentality of equally
fixed and unvarying laws, is: now met by storms of opposi




LAW  AND  FORCE.                     237
tion and ridicule, it should be remembered that plecise'y
similar opposition, based upon precisely the same grounds,
attended a similar announcement when first made, with refer
ence to the origin and modus operandi of many forms and departments of nature concerning which the announcement is
now fully admitted to have been true; and the final triumphs
of Astronomy and Geology over the dragon of unscriptural,
as well as unphilosophical, opposition, which stood before their
parents to devour them as soon as they were born, should
stand as a warning against a too hasty decision unfavorable to
law-developments, as applied to all other departments, organic
and even spiritual, as well as inorganic and material.
Yet, when it is asserted that all things, as to their creation
and functional operations, are within the governing influences
of law, the sense in which we have defined the term "law,"
should be distinctly borne in mind; and for the sake of more
explicitness on this point, as well as to show that our position
involves no objectionable theological corrolaries, we will here
submit a few more considerations respecting it.
I have said that Law is not of itselfforce or motion-hence,
that it can create nothing or do nothing of itself; but that it
is simply the mode or rule by which force and motion act.
Hence, when we speak of the " law of Expansion," for instance,
we refer only to a mode of operation among particles or
substances, which is expressed by the term  " Expansion;"
when we speak of the "law of Gravitation," we only refer to
that particular mode of action among materials which the term
" gravitation" defines.  And we have a similar meaning when
we speak of any other law.  But the Force by which the action, proceeding according to these various laws, is generated,
remains yet to be accounted for; and this we will now attempt
to do, at the same time that we attempt to illustrate hoi




238   LAW  AGENCY  AND  DIVINE  AGENCY.
modes or laws of action came to be such as we see them. The
remarks now to be offered will, at the same time, illustrate
the direct agency which God has in- the process of creation, and
furnish the foundation of a true understanding of the doctrine
of Providence.
One feature of the present subject has already been presented, under an illustration which may again be called up, and
carried out into further particulars.  A builder, before proceeding to the outer construction of an edifice, first conceives
the general plan, and ideally perceives the general appearance
of that edifice in his own mind.  This conception is the archetype or pattern according to which the edifice, as an outer obiject, is to be erected; and its erection is a mere clothing of the
archetype or pattern, with outer material investiture. But this
clothing of the archetype can not be accomplished except by
the. voluntative and energizing influence of the soul, spirit, or
mind of the builder acting among the materials to be wrought
into the physical structure, which action may be either through
the medium of the builder's own muscles, through the minds
aind muscles of others, to whom his commands may be given,
or through a suitable machine which he has previously designed and prepared.  And when the building is thus erected,
it stands as an exact correspondent and embodiment of that
particular form and degree of intelligence and volition, which
were requisite to the conception of its plan, and the conjoining of its materials.  After the building is finished,
however, the builder withdraws all further action and influence fiom it, and it is left as a mass of perfectly dead and
motionless materials; but could  he permanently infix in
it such portions or degrees of his own energizing spiritual
essence as would be requisite to keep it in repair, and to con.
stantly refine and improve it, and to develop its ultimate




.i'...' -NG  OF  APICHETYfP S.               239
puripT.S^s  ~,  building would in that case be a living crea.
tion.
Now it was logically proved, in another part of this work,
that the Universe, or the whole great Kingdom of nmateriality
which it comprises, is not self-existent and eternal, but that it
as necessarily had a beyinning as any human or other physical
organism had-that it is therefore necessarily dependent upon
an antecedent and correspondent existence as its Cause; which
must have been, not inlfrior, but superior, to itself, even as
the natural sun is superior to the plant which its beams cause
to grow.  Being thus superior to, and the cause of, the whole
of material existence, we were forced to conceive of it as a
s8?per —material, s6'iter-universal, andl hence spiiritual Existence,
of which intelligence, personality, and hence Divinity, are
predicable.
This spiritual, intelligent, personal Divinity, whom we call
God, then, being antecedent to, and the Cause of, the univer.
sal system of creation, and sustaining toward it the same re.
lation which an earthly builder sustains toward a house proposed to be erected, must. in like manner, with the latter,
have conceived in his own mind the archetypes or patterns
of the universal structure, with all its included kingdoms,
systems, series, degrees, species, and essential forms, from
lowest to highest, before proceeding to clothe these with outer
investiture.  And as in the mind of the human builder, the
archetypes of the proposed house are, as it were, the spiritual
nuclei around which, by his own volitionary effort, the Inaterials are made to cluster, and thus finally establish the
structure as an outer creation, so in the mind of the Deity,
the archetypes of the Universal Structure, of Solal Systems,
of Geological Developments, of Mineral Kingdoms, Vegetable
Kingdoms, Animal Kingdoms, and the universal Human




24-0  LAW  AGENOY AND DIVINE AGENCY.
creation,with all the specific and essential forms which these
respectively include, were the spiritual nuclei, and  preexistent, interior realities, around which, lby the force of constant Divine volition, the requisite particles and essences are
madle to cluster, by way of establishing them in outer and
tangible forms.
Now, both with the human builder and his house, and the
Divine Builder and the system  of the universe, the archetypes conceived in the mind, constituted the laws or rules by
which outer materials acted in their aggregations into outer
forms; while, in both cases, the force by which those ma.
terials were impelled to act at all, originated in the volition
of the Builder. THere is the difference between Law and
Force.  Law of itself could not create any thing, though all
things were created according to Law. Force of itself could
not create any thing, though all things are created by the
application of Force.  It is by means of Force, as an impulsive principle, and Law, as a director of its impulsions, that
all things have sprung into being.
The idea may perhaps be rendered still more clear to some
minds, by considering the whole united system of archetypes
as one grand Mould, fashioned in the wisdom of the Builder,
into which, by the direct voluntative effort of the Builder,
materials are poured, by way of forming the outer structure.
But without the extra proceedings of pouring the materials
into it, the mould might exist for ever without giving rise to
the casting, while, on the other hand, all the efforts imagin.
able could not give rise to the casting, did not the mould
exist to receive it.
We have seen that if thb human builder, in clothing his
mental archetypes of a proposed structure, could permanently
infix in that structure that portion or degree of the energizing




HITMAN  AND DIVINE-BUILDER.                 241
influence of his own spirit, which would be requisite, by a
spontaneous internal action, to keep the structure in repair,
and at tne same time to refine and perfect it, the structure
would be, in some sense, a living creation. But although this
is not the case with the human builder and his work, it is
precisely the case with the Divine Builder and the universal
Edifice which he has established. Not only does the system
of creation as a Whole, but each of its included and corresponding sub-systems, contain a power of internal motion and
sustentation, infused by the Creator at its origin, and which is
now perpetually sustained by influx from  Him, and is ever
acting in parallelism with the original archetype, which constitutes its law. It was in view of this fact that it was argued,
in another part of this work, in opposition to the received
philosophy, that if the cosmical system could, by any foreign
agency, become deranged or thrown out of equilibrium in any
way, instead of the derangement progressing, and ultimating
in a total wreck of the system, the internal forces of recuperation would be such as to soon restore the wonted equilibrium,
and all things would go on as before. But on the other hand,
were the Creator to withold the influx of, and withdraw, his
vital energy from the universe, as soon as the momenta of existing forces and motions became exhausted, all things would
necessarily come to an eternal stagnation and" death!
I have said that the archetypes or pre-existent ideal patterns
of each creation, are the spiritual nuclei of the outer forms of
which that creation consists, and hence that they constitute
the laws by which Force acts in the aggregation of substances
for the development of their outer forms.  Now, as it was
before shown that each creation, both as to its exterior and
its interior and vitalizing constitution, is seven-fold, so each
creation, with its spiritual nuclei, life, and laws, is, in some
21




242  LAW  AGENCY  AND  DIVINE  AGENCY.
sense, a co-respondent and representative of the seven-fold
constitution of the Deity, or the "seven spirits of God'
spoken of in Revelation.  Each seven-fold creation, therefore,
is the same with all others as to correspondence, but is differ.
ent from all others as to degree; and each one conta.ins within
itself, as its vitalizing and energizing soul, a corresponding de.
gree of the seven-fold harmonies of Divine Love and Wisdom.
Let this latter point be distinctly understood; God exists
in the universal cosmical system as its soul, but does not exist there as God, but only in the quality and capacity of those
vitalizing and operative forces and pi hcLle!   of form, which
were necessary to the creation, and are now necessary to the
subsistence, internal motions, and constant improvement of
the general creation, as such; in Solar Systems, God exists in
the degree of those vital and motive forces which are necessary
to them, as such; in planets God exists, also, in his sevenfold harmonies, but only in a degree necessary to constitute
the vitality, and to originate the internal motions and other
functional operations, of planets, as such; in the Mineral Kingdom God exists as mineral and chemical Life; in the Vegetable Kingdom, as the principle of vegetable Life; in the
Animal Kingdom, as the principle of animal, instinctive, and
semi-intellectual Life, but not yet as God; in the Human
World he exists as the principle of human Life; but only in
a perfectly integral, pure, innocent, and harmoniously constituted Man, does He exist in his focalized and quantitaively
diminished, but qualitatively perfected Selfhood, as God.
But in a discreet degree above the whole universe of outer
creations, He exists in his August, Infinite, and Ineffable Selfhood, as the AlFha and Omega, the First and the Last, the
Beginning and End of all thirgs 
Though these investigations have been pursued, and these




DIVINE DVWELLING-PLACES.                     243
conclusions have been drawn, independently of the revelations
of the Scriptures, I can not abstain from marlkirg their perfect
parallelism with the language of Paul in the following passages: " One God, who is ABOVE all, and THROUJGH all,- and
IN You all." —Eph. iv. 6.'"And he is BEFORE all things, and
by him  all things CONSIST."-Col. i. 17.  "For OF hinm, nd
THROUGH him, and TO him are ALL THINGS; to whom be glory
for ever."-Rom. xi. 3. 6.Representing the Divine vitalizing
principle flowing into, and pervading man, as taking the character of man, the same as when flowing into, and vitalizing
animals, vegetables, minerals, worlds, it always takes the
specific character of its receptacle-David, addressing the
Deity, says, "With the merciful thou wilt show thyself merciful, and with the upright man thou wilt show thyself upright: with the pure thou wilt show thyself pure, and with
the firoward thou wilt show  thyself froward."-Ps. xviii.
25, 26.  This can not mean that God, in his true personal
character, is any other than merciful, upright, and pure, but
that his vitalizing and energizing inflowings into man (without
which man would be dead, body and soul) can excite the
qualities of mercy, uprightness, purity, etc., only as these
comport with the character of the receptacle. It is said, moreover, that God dwells "with him who is of an humble and
contrite spirit;" that is, dwells, not as a mere generator of
naterial force and action, as he dwells in the lower creations,
but dwells as God in his interior soul, as in a temple; whil.
the " fullness of the Godhead" dwelt "bodily" only in that
ever-to-be admired personage, who was absolutely without sin.
who expressly declared that he was in unity with the Father
-that he was in the Father, and the Father in him, and in
whose celestial purity, disinterested and unbounded love, and
life-long labors and sacrifices for the good of humanity, we




244  LAW  AGENCY AND  DIVINE  AGENCY.
have the only full and true manifestation of the moral attrl.
butes of the Deity.
The foregoing will probably serve to the reader as a sufficient illustration of the various degrees of the Divine Principle, as now embodied in the different and corresponding
Series and Degrees of the creations he has formed.  The
method of the successive origination of these various Series
and Degrees of creation, has also been incidentally implied in
what has been said; but as this is a point which bears upon
important speculations which are rife in these days, some
further illustration upon the subject may be useful.
The point to be illustrated and insisted upon is, that creation
did not develop itself, either according to inherent forces of
its own, nor are its development and its present internal operations, owing simply to the momenta generated by the first
imnpulses impressed upon matter by the Creator, while the
Creator himself "etired for eternity, as one would retire from
a clock that was, nce wound up and set a-going.  In case of
such retirement of the Deity, after the first impulse had been
given to materials, those materials would have moved only in
the direction, of the impulse, and only until the momenhtum.
generated became exhausted, and creation could not possibly
have passed one Elemental Degree beyond a first development.  Hence, each superior degree of creation must necessarily have been accomplished by the aid of forces outside of,
superior to, and altogether independent of; itself, which gave
the physical elements, involved in the previous development,
an upward attraction, and a tendency to aggregate in the
form of the next superior series of archetypes conceived i,
the Divine Mind.  And this is true in respect-to the develop.
ment of creation, as one Grand Series, and also in respect to
the development of each of its corresponding sub-series.




LABYRINTH  OF CREATION                   245
This whole subject, with other points in our general philosophy,
may be illustrated by the accompanying diagram.
Let the seven-fold triangular figure (one angle being within
another) which descends from the upper part of the diagram,
and whose most exterior angle comes to a point at the center
of the diagram, represent a seven-fold Ray or Glory emanating from the Divine Being. This we will suppose to represent
the Complete Degree of the Divine Soul, and Spirit, and Person, which was to generate, and to be in some sense embodied
in universal creation with Man at its head.  Resolved into
three Discreet Degrees, we will suppose that this Ray or
Glory consisted of Divine Spiritual Heat, which is Love, of
Divie Spiritual Light, which is Wisdom, and of Divine Po




24 tj  L t     A GEN  C I  AND  D [VI'N E  A G
tentializing Essence, which is the " complex, contin
basis" of the preceding, and hence the mecdium  of volitional
operation. We will suppose, then (what can not be essentially
erroneous), that froom the ernpyrean heights of infinite perfection, where God, before creation began, had from  eternity
dwelt in inconceivable greatness and perfection, this seven-fold
and three-fold Ray emanating fiom his own Person, descended
by volition, and at its lowest extremity, resolved its most exterior essences (represented by the outer triangle) into atomic
Iparticles, which, in forms and constitutions, corresponded to
archetypes previously existing in the Divine consciousness,
and which were designed to be wrought into the structure of
this universe and all it contains.  Let the central point in the
iaglrami, then, represent the atomic or lowest stage of creation,
this being the physical Germ  fiom  which the great Tree of
luniversal Being was to grow. From this central point, it will
hbe observed, proceeds a spiral line,, which, while constantly
receding from the center, winds around through six radii, and
completes the circuit of the diagram  on the center of the descending R'ay, on which it commenced.  This spiral line, in'
passing around, represents the inception, progress, and comple.
tion, of the first Circle, Series, or Complete Degree of Forlms.
From  the center of the descending Ray, and the apex of a
second and more interior triangle, the same spiral line thence
continues, and, completing another circuit while perpetually
receding from  the center, represents the course of the next
higher and corresponding Circle of creations.  And so, commencing every time at the point representing the completion
of the previous Circle (this, at the same time, being the focus
of a more interior Degree of the Divine genera.tive Principle):
it continues its corresponding circuits around the diagram, all
the while expanding from the center, and thus representinig the




TREE  OF  CREATION.                      247
course of higher and still higher creations, until the last is at.
tained, which is Man.
Now the descending Di ine creative Ray forms the seventh
radius of the circle, which represents the beginning and ending
of each Series or complete Degree of creations.  But the end
of each is represented as higher than its beginning, and as in
conjunction with, and subject tc the operative inflowings of
the next higher Degree of the Divine generative Principle,
which is represented by the apex of the next more interior
triangle. Each Circle of developments traced directly, or from
beginning to end, may be called a " line of gnatural ascent:"
each circle traced inversely, or fiom end to beginning, may be
called a "line of spiritual descent," representing the descent
or operative inflowings of the Divine vitalizing and formative
Energy, by which material elements involved in inferior
forms are refined, energized, and brought by an upward at.
traction into next superior, and thence still superior, and finally
into highest forms, according to the pre-existent archetypes of
said forms, or their Divine spiritual patterns.  Thus is the
great Tree of universal creation brought through all its succes.
sive stages of development unto perfection, by constantly descending influences from the Divine Spiritual Sun-in the same
way as the vegetable tree is made to grow from  germ  to ultimate, by the constantly descending influences of the naturalSun, which, however, is interiorly vitalized by the Spiritual.
But we think it ought to be entirely-obvious to every intelligent mind, that without these descending and vitailizing influences, neither Tree could proceed a single step in its ascending
development; and, moreover, if at any time during the course
of their development, this superior and indepededent influence
should be withholden, the development would necessarily and
immediately cease, ard stagnation and decay would ensue.




248   LAW  AGENCY  AND  DIVINE  AGENCY.
If the tree can not grow without the sun, it may be consid.
ered equally certain that nature as a whole, and hence, also, as
to its component parts, from greatest to most minute, has no
power of development or motion in and of itself. Hence all
power, as well as its directive influence, must be fiom above
nature, and hence from God; and hence all stellar systems,
solar systems, worlds, minerals, vegetables, animals, and even
animalcules, were created and are governed, not only by the
remote and indirect, but by the immediate and direct, agency of
God! 
These are among the considerations which we think completely overthrow  the pantheistic speculations with which
much of the philosophy of the day is more or less impregnated.
The diagram, also, by presenting a succession of continually
expanding circles, all having one center, and being constituted
after one principle, presents a clear and concise illustration of
the doctrines of Series, Degrees, and Correspondences, and will
serve thus to fix permanently in the mind a true idea of the
complexly-unitary constitution, and harmoniously interblending movements of the universe, as expressive of the Love,
Wisdom, and infinite  internal harmonies of its DIVINs
AUTIICR.




CHAPTER' XXV.
PROVIDENCE.
THOUGH it is shown in the foregoing pages, that creation
must have been developed, and must now be governed in
its operations, according to directive Wisdom  existing in
the forms offixed laws, there is nothing in the theory presented which contradicts, but every thing which confirms, those
deep intuitions of every well-regulated mind, respecting the constant Providence of God as concerned in the unfolding and government of his creation. If, as we have seen, law of itself has
no creative force, but is simply a mode of action prescribed and
predetermined by the archetypes and intentions conceived in
the Divine Mind; and if to the realization of each succeeding
stage of creation, however great or minute, an additional and
voluntative influx of Divine formative Energy, was absolutely
necessary; and; moreover, if the same constant influx is necessary to sustain the life and motions of the system after it
is in being-then it follows that every event, from the birth
of a world to the falling of a sparrow, or the rustling of a leaf
in the summer breeze, is, in some sense, a Providence-that
is, it was provided for in the pre-determined course of Divine
intelligent volition and causation.  But to prevent involving
creation in inextricable confusion, and to establish and preserve
an orderly relationship and affectionate interblending of all
forms, and a just and harmonious reciprocation in all their
offices and movements, God orders even his providences accord



250                  PROVIDENCE.
ing to laws, or, it may almost be said, he has made themn
synonymous with laws.
It may safely be believed that the present order and plan
of creation is the best that could have been devised by the
Divine Mind; for otherwise, the present plan would not have
been adopted.  But if it is the best, then it requires no fundamental change, and not even any modifications, except such as
may comport with a constant general progression on the basis
of the original plan. But while all progression in each department is dependent upon an influx or inhalation (hence
free bestowment by the Divine Being), of additional degrees of
that Divine vitalizing influence which is specifically suitable
to itself, and while all progression is in this sense providential,
God can not, either in causing a progressional or any other
change, and without deranging the established, and hence best
possible order of things, act providentially and directly upon
any department of creation, except through the nmedium  of
that particular kind of force or vitality of which the thing acted
upon is a suitable receptacle.
Thus, considering the universe in its most general aspect as
one grand Whole, God can not act directly upon it, or modify
its existing activities and tendencies, except through the medium of those forces and laws of Expansion, Contraction, Circulation, Aggregation, etc., in the degree in which they apply
to the universe as a whole.  He can not act directly upon
solar systems and worlds, except through the medium of the
same laws and forces in their higher degrees of unfolding as
applicable to solar systems and worlds; God can not act
directly upon Mineral creations, except through the forces and
laws of chemical affinities; He can not act directly upon Vegetable Kingdoms, except through the forces and laws of vegetable life;, He can' not act directly on the Animal Kingdom, o?




PROVIDENCE.                       251
any of its forms, except through the forces and lbws of animal,
sensational, and semi-intellectual life; He can act directly on
selfish and sinful human nature, only by those isolated and
disjointed motive forces which are adapted to reach and affect
the disjointed mental and moral constitutions of selfish and
sinful human beings; while God can act directly and fully as
God, in all his affectional, intellectual, and moral nature, only
upon a perfectly pure and sinless intelligence-a being fitted
for the harmonious influx of all the affectional, intellectual, and
voluntative principles of the Divine Soul-a being, hence,
who stands in the perfect image of God, and who, in principle,
is one with Him.  Hence, when such a being acts (and there
never was but one such a being), it may be said that God acts
with him, in him, and through him, and that his every act is in
the fullest and most Divine sense, a providence.
But as the infinite Divine, personal, and volitional Intelligence is above all things, and over all things, and is the inexhaustible Source of all streams of vitality and motive force
which flow into the various departments of His creation, it may
be rationally conceived, that by withholding his inflowings
into the universal system as a whole, he could cause universal stagnation and diss!;lution to ensue; or that by increasing
those inflowings, he could stimulate all firmamental developments and solar and planetary motions, to unwonted activity;
or that by diminishing his influence in one portion of space,
and increasing it in another, He could cause the dissolution of
some worlds, and the absorption of their materials by others;
or that by modifying his influences upon the electric, aerial,
and subterranean forces of a particular planet (such as our
own), he can cause floods to deluge the earth, or subterranean
fires to overwhelm cities, and destroy such human beings as
must otherwise stand as obstructions to true progress; or that




252                  PROVIDENCE.
in a similar way, he might cause a rarefaction of the atmo
sphere in one locality, and a condensation in another, and thus
cause a current of wind sufficiently violent to cleave the waters
of a gulf, and afford a dry passage for a particular people
through whom he designed to affect great purposes.
It will doubtless still be argued that such occurrences, if
they ever do take place, are results simply of the forces and
laws of nature.  In a qualified sense, this is granted, as we
have shown: before that. all action, whether physical or
spiritual, is according to some laws,; but we insist that it is
an exceedingly superficial view of the laws of nature, which
supposes that they are self-generative and self-active, or that
they can exist for a moment as separate from that Divine
vitalizing and spiritual Principle which, in an earlier stage
of this work, we showed was necessarily self-existent and
eternal.:
But if this self-existent, and all generative, and vitalizing
Divine Principle may operate upon mundane forces and developments in the way just described, he may, in a similar
way, control, modify, and direct chemical and mineral, or
vegetable, or animal, or spiritual forces and developments, by
a voluntary graduation of those influences, proceeding from
himself, as adapted to either of these departr;ents of his
creation.  And all such operations would be instances of
direct providences. 
But while it would be impossible for God, consistently
with the fundamental, which we have presumed to be the
best possible plan of creation, to act directly upon any one
department of being, by forces specifically adapted only to
another (as, for instance, to act directly upon mind, by that
Degree of attractive force known as "gravitation," or to directly control planets by the motive forces of moral and




PROVIDENCE.                       253
rational convictions), it is none the less conceivable that each
department of existence may be indirectly influenced through
the medium  of some other department, which is made the
receptacle of direct influence. Thus it may be conceived as
possible for God, by special and designed action upon a particular planet, to change the orbit of such planet, and thus
mediately change the orbits of all the planets with which it
may be associated, and thus to change their seasons, and thus
their inhabitants, if they have any, and thus even to produce
an endless concatenation of spiritual changes; or, that by
action upon one particular department:f the Mineral, Vegetable, or Animal Kingdom, He might change other departments of the same Kingdom, and thus indefinitely change the
relations existing between them all.
Similar remarks are especially applicable to the Divine
government of the Human world.  Notwithstanding every
human being, and the whole race, as one grand Man, was
designed to reflect the image of the Creator, human nature,
in its present state, is undeniably more or less depraved,
selfish, and inharmonious, and hence is not receptive of the
Divine influence, in its pure and harmonious state.  The
Divine spiritual influence, directly and immediately infused
into the human world, therefore, and without the mediumship
of a perfect human personage to harmoniously reflect, truly
define, and correctly apply, its principles, would necessarily
take a form of manifestation more or less characterized by the
imperfections of degenerate humanity as its receptacle-in the
same way as the Divine operative influence, flowing into
animal or still lower creations, takes a form of manifestation
peculiar to those creations.  On this principle, and this principle alone, it is conceived, we may account for the imper.
fection of the impressions which the Divine inspiration gave
22




"2-4                  P'Pv 0 V I D A N CE.
to Moses, and David, and the prophets, and the impe: iections
of the code of ethics, principles of government, and policy ir
respect to other nations, which grew out of these impressions;
for all these were evidently imperfect when judged by a
Christian standard.  Still, by means of such inflowings, as
the psychical and mental constitutions of these mediums
rendered  possible, God, without immediately  obliterating
existing evils, pressed these evils into the service of ultimate
good: and by arraying one nation against anothelr, subjecting
some to utter extermination, bumbling others, by long disciplinary chastisements, etc., so directed the general course of
human events as provide for the influx of more and more
light, and for the final coming of him who was emphatically
"the Light of the world."  And now  that that Light has
come, a similar course of indirect Divine providences is continued with reference to nations and individuals, evidently
with the view to the ultimate bringing of all under the full
influence of its life-giving b,,ams, and to the establishment
of that Divine Kingdom  in the world which shall "break
to pieces and consume all other kingdoms, and stand for
ever."
But if in this disjointed and degenerate state of the human
faculties, God can discharge the highest functions of his Divine government only by bringing the appropriate forces of
one human faculty, one person, one society, or one nation, to
bear upon another, it is equally true that in the perfect man,
God rules directly, personally and absolutely as God, in all his
harmoniously consociated affectional, moral,    a.nd intellectual
attributes-in the same way as he rules as mechanical, chemical, or vegetative Force, in difierent departments of natu.re
without. Nay, in such a being, as the ultimate and harmonious
eimbodime^lt -of all the principles of his Love and Wisdorn




P -r 0   ID EN a CE.  255
God absolutely dwells, in his integral and persontal onpicity, as
in a temple; and therefbre such a being is God in his focalized
capacity as adapted to a direct conjunction w1ith humanity.
All that authentic history informs us of the character, actions,
and teachings of Jesus goesto justify the belief that he was
such a divinely human and humanly divine personage.
It should be observed, that a perfectly pure and sinless intelligence, such as is here conceived, must, as viewed in a
humtan aspect, stand at the very arex of visible creation, or at
that point in a grand seven-fold circle of existence at which
en.dings merge into beginnings.   Hence, the Divine Soul;
focalizing in all its harmoniously combined principles, in such
a. being, would maintain the same relations to inferior physical constitutions, and to all outer physical substances which
lie within his sphere, as the Divine Being in his whole infinitude, sustains to the physical universe as a whole. Hence the
Divinity, in this focclized capacity, would maintain toward all
things within his sphere, the relations of a New  Beginning
Principle; and if God in his inin.itude, as the Beginning Principle of the universe as a wvhole, could, from his free volition,
make and unmake laws to govern the present system of things,
then God in the condescended form of his personal Being as
manifested through a suitable human organism at the end of
an old, and the beginning of a new  creation, may, in equal
consistency with the rules of Divine order, establish new laws,
or rather enact immensely higher degrees of old ones, as'
relating to such existences within his sphere as need such interference.  There is nothing irrational in the supposition,
therefore, that the Divinely human, or humanly Divine Principle (which arp, one and the sanme), could, by volition through
the outer organism which served as its medium, concentrate
its-vital energies  upon. tie diseased bodies of man, and evev'




256                PROVIDENCE.
the inorganic elements of the outer world, and produce sach
effects as are commonly designated by the word " miraculous,"
and that, too, simply according to that higher degree of laws
specifically adapted to such operations, and unfolded for such
specific purposes. Such would be instances of the highest
manifestations of indirect providences.
But if God dwells and rules, with a perfect and harmonious
display of all the principles of his nature as God, in a being
such as we have supposed, then it follows that the more any
man is like such a being, the more fully God " works within
him to will and to do according to his own pleasure," the more
he is under the direct operation of the highest order of Divine
Providences, the more he is raised, as it were, above the
sphere of mere material things and their laws, and the more
he becomes a medium through which the Divine Being, in his
affectional, intellectual, and volitional nature as such, acts upon
beings and conditions below him, to bring them up to the true
standard of healthfulness, harmony, and perfection!  And
when all human beings shall be fully united to God-shall
fully "dwell in him, and he in them," then all human beings,
with their outer conditions, and even the whole physical world,
divinely acted upon through their mediation, will undoubtedly
be spiritualized, and elevated one Discreet Degree, and peace
and plenty, and that universal harmony and love, which may
be considered as uncontaminated and unperverted outflowings
from the Divine Fountain of Infinite Harmony and Love,
will take the place of the corroding selfishness, the distracting
animosities, and the physical, as well as moral, diseases and
sufferings which now roll their desolating waves over the
earth.
Let it be distinctly understood that the foregoing theory of
Divine Providences is presented simply as a rational deduoc




PROVIDENCE.                       257
tion of philosophy, aside fiom  the teachings of Scri:cture.
The few scriptural phrases we have employed in this dis.
quisition, have been employed incidentally, solely in consideration of their appositeness, as expressing certain ideas which
have lain within the course of our reasonings. Being actuated by the sole desire of developing the teachings of phil.
osophy, with reference to these questions of theology, it is not
pretended that we have attained to a fEll unfolding of truth
upon the subject discussed, or even to so clear a presentation
of that measure of truth which has been found, as might have
been attained if we had freely availed ourselves of scriptural
aids.  But while, by the course we have pursued, our conclusions have been left unprejudiced in the view of such of
our readers as may be disinclined to admit the authority of
the Bible, we beg such readers, in candor, to observe, that so
far as the teachings of nature and philosophy have, in these
pages, been brought into view, there is' not that hostility be.
tween them and the teachings of the Bible, which unbelieverz
in the latter have generally supposed. to exist.  The objec;
of all investigations should be, not to establish the au.
thority of a Book, or of a philosophical creed, but to discover Truth; and if some of the most vitally important of
all truths are recorded in the Bible, it must be acknow.
ledged, even by all candid infidels, that while these are no
more, they are no less sacred, and while they should be
received with no more, they should be received with no
less avidity, than if the same truths were found any where
else.
What has been said respecting Providences, will serve to
give a general idea of a subject which is far from  being
exhausted in this discussion.  Instances of apparently still
more special providences, as affecting the  specific con.




258                  CONCLUSION.
ditions of individuals, can be intelligibly illustrated only
in view of certain psychological and spiritual laws, which
will form  the themes of appropriate remark when we pro
ceed to the consideration of the Microcosm, or the universe
within.
CONCLUSION OF THE VOLUME.
We have thus endeavored to exhibit a general view of the
various Series and Degrees of systematic creation which compose the aggregate of the outer realm of being-both in their
separate and united capacities, together with their relations to
each other and to their common Divine Cause and Governor.
We close this first part of our treatise with the following re.
marks:
1. If our Philosophy, as to its distinctive features, contains
no truth, it can at least do no essential evil, as it must be that
a system of unmitigated error, of so bold and conspicuous a
kind, and put forth in this unguarded manner, would exhibit
so many vulnerable points as to meet with its death wound
the instant it is exposed to the shafts of criticism. If it should
be entirely overthrown, however, there would still necessarily
remain some possible mode of systematizing and harmonizing
Nature and Truth in one general philosophic view, if it so be
that Nature and Truth are intrinsically systematic and harmonious; and the discovery of this mode is worthy of the
highest efforts of philosophic minds. I would respectfully submit, however, that promise of a discovery of this kind, can
only be given by some such process of serial, gradational, and
correspondential reasoning from  interiors to exteriors, as has
been pursued in the foregoing pages; and that so long as
men confine themselves to the ordinary processes of reason.
ing merely. from effects to causes, so long theiri conclusions




CONCLUSION.                       259
will, of necessity, be more or less divergent, and so long they
will, at most, be able to attain only the body of truth, without
its soul.
2. If our Philosophy cortains some truth and some error,
then its truths, bearing as they do upon subjects of the most
striking and important character, may, by exciting minds
capable of elaborating and extending them, yet form the nucleus of a grand system of true thought, which may be progressively brought to a state as near perfect as may comport
with the finiteness of the human mind.
3. If it contains a large preponderance of truth, and but
little essential error, then considerable progress has already
been made in developing the means of reconciling the jargon
of conflicting thought upon all subjects natural and spiritual,
and in demolishing the partition walls between the Jew of
Theology on the one hand, and the Gentile of Philosophy on
the other, and making of the twain one new man, thus making
peace.
We are next, therefore, in the light of facts, truths, princi.
ples, laws, correspondences, etc., developed in the preceding
pages, to proceed to consider a general theme of perhaps still
more interest, viz., the MICRocosM, or corresponding universe
within.  In the course of our investigations upon this subject,
we shall probably speak of man physically, psychologically,
individually, and socially, with a view of exhibiting his rela.
tions to all other things, his susceptibility to their influence,
and the conditions of his true progress and happiness.
Should not unforeseen influences prevent, this second Trea.
tise, or rather second part of the present one, will be reddy for
publication in the course of a few months.
END OF THE " MACROCOSM."












CHIRON  FASCINATIN3G  EStLAPIUS. B. C  928.
CaIRON the Centaur. a prince of Thessaly, has fascinated his pupil EscULAPrIU,
brother prince, for the purpose of discovering a remedy to cure the foot of Hercules,
which had been wounded by a poisoned arrow. An herb was prevised which saved
the hero: this plant, known from the circumstance as the Centaury, (Centaur's herb,)
gave name to a gensi, one species of which is our common blue-bottle. Chiron was
the great physician of his day, and derived his name from a Greek word, meaning
the hand, because he performed most of his cures by manipulating. His wonderFul
skill in horsemanship has made the poets represent him as a centaur, half man, half
horse. In after times, the medical fame of Esculapius far eclipsed that of his master,
Chiron, and he was early invested by the people with divine honors. His mode of
practising, called by his descendant Hippocrates, the secret means of medicine, caa
ba found detailed in the work.




OR THE'1II1LOSOPHY   OF  CHARI [NG
ILLUSTRATING
THE  PRINCIPLES  OF LIFE
IN CONNECTION WITH
SPIRIT AND MATTER.
BY JOHN B. NEWMAN, M.D.
AUTHBR Ol VA-AIO'JS WORKS OiT NNATURtAL HISTORY, iET
TENTH THOUSAND.
NEW YORK:
PUBLISHED BY SAMUEL R. WELLS,
No. 389 BROADWAY.
1874.




Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1847,
Br FOWLERS & WELT S,
Ia the Clerk's Office of the District Court;f the Southern District c
New York.




PREFACE
It ia related of Epimenides, one of the sages:f antiquity, that he feU
asleep in a cave, and remained in that state some 5 ears.  When he awoke,
everything was altered around him, and he scarcely knew where he was
During his absence he affirmed, that he had familiar intercourse with spirits, and obtained the gift of prophecy, etc.  He was reported able to dismiss his soul from his body, and recall it at pleasure. So high was his
reputation for sanctity, that during a plague in Attica, 596 B. C., the
Athenians sent for him to perform a lustration; in consequence of which
the plague ceased.
Some German students in the last century, wishing to raise the devil,
carried a pan of burning charcoal into a close room, and throwing in it
various prescribed substances, danced around it, chanting a magic formala.
One of them fell dead, and the rest, upon seeing his fate, fled with diffi.
culty; the incantation, they thought, had evidently been too powerful.
A professor in the same university accounted for the facts by the poisonous influence of fixed air (carbonic acid gas) generated by the ignited
carbon; and offered to produce the gas at pleasure.  He was instantly
accused from this of having intercourse with familiar spirits.
Science has long since endorsed the professor's solution, and to doubt it
at the present day would betray gross ignorance. Not so fortunate, however, was Epimenides, for it is only in our own times that his claims have
been acknowledged; and from the want of more extended information,
many are even now incredulous. Increasing light will induce belief, and
it is my earnest wish that the following pages may tend to that result.
Man, besides soul and matter, possesses an intermediate principle distinct firom and between both, called the life power: or in the words of
Bonard, " he is an intelligence served by organs"-these organs being the
servants of the life power, by which it operates upon the material world,
and is in turn operated upon by it. A proper knowledge of the life power
is a key to explain all the phenomena of fascination; and this it is the ob
Sect of the present work to communicate. A very concise but perfectly
lear idea of physiology is given, and in this the foundation is laid.




n~~VI   ~PREFACE.
The Delphic priestess inhaled fixed air to act on the life power in such
a manner as to cause the spiritual in the system  to preponderate over
the matrial, that she might the better give her responses.  In some cases
so great was the preponderance as to cause death; the priestess sharing
the fate of the German student (who accomplished his desire), and by tle
same means.  When the wished-for change is induced, new powers or
instincts, previously dormant, become suddenly developed; and like the
lower animals, who, when sick, run and devour the herb suited to their
case, a like faculty of properly prescribing remedies is perceived-the
spiritual world is often beheld, and its denizens sometimes give the sleep
wakers information of events that will shortly happen. History tells us
that the coming of Cortez, and his conquest of their nation, had been
told the Mexicans long before a Spaniard was ever heard of; and the
journals of the missionaries stationed at the Pacific isles will present similar facts.
We can now see why the brazier was used in the incantation of the
student, and the probability of Epimenides undergoing a change upon entering a certain cavern (likely by accident the first time) wherein fixed
air was generated. His powers of curing disease, having intercourse with
spirits, and predicting events, are thus explained. It should be remarked here, that none but those predisposed to the change, can experience
it; all artificial efforts to induce it. except in such, resulting in almost
certain insanity or death.
Like many others in my profession, I was a bitter enemy to fascination
till accidentally led to examine it; but having done so, found the phenomena it presented, though new and startling, in strict accordance with
the laws of life. In explaining my views, I have written for the people,
entirely dispensing with technical terms except in one or two instances.
That their perusal may clear up in the minds of others as many obscure
and mysterious points as they did in his own, and thus subserve the inter
ests of trluh, is the sincere desire of the
AUTHtR.
296 FIFra Sr-iEEI NEW YORK CITY.




CONTENTS.
ONVERSATION
CHARMINGX
Topular views on fascination-Influence of the imagination-Report of Jussieu to the French Academy-Records of the existence
of fascination for three thousand years-Process of fascination —
Choosing the name-Snake charming-Anecdotes-Man charmingAnecdotes-Rationale of fascination-Nervous vapor-Charming of
men-AMan can fascinate man-Man can fascinate the lower animalsThe lower animals can fascinate man-The lower animals can fascinate one another-Young persons sleeping with old-King DavidSchool-masters-Savage nations-Lower animals-Poetry,   -    11-24
CONVERSATION II.
DISCOVERY OF FASCINATION.
Adam acquainted with fascination-The town of Mansoul built by
King Shaddai in the country of Universe-Its privileges, and their
forfeiture-Locality of heaven —Material world contained in the spiritual-Encampment of angels-Stephen-Elisha and his servantIdolatry-Discovery of fascination after the deluge —Worship of Satan-Heathen magi the first fascinators, and their apotheosis-Mercury and his caduceus-Priests of India-Our Saviour accused of
stealing secrets fiom  Egypt-Cases of cures-Priests of EgyptLife principle-Matter governed by laws of its own-Vegetable
kingdom,                                     -.   25 38
CONVERSATION III.
PHYSIOLOGY.
That masn has two lives may be tdduced from the narrative of his
sreation-Seven properties of the living principle explained-Defiui



viii                        CONTENTS.
PAGS
tion of instinct-Illustrations-Human understanding -House of the
soul-Modelling of bone-Anecdote-Men taller in the morning than
at night-Two hundred, and forty-eight bones, and five hundred distinct muscles in the hurmav: body —Caterpillars-Elephiant-Embryc
-Diges've process-Stonmach and gastric juice-Liver and bilePansreas and their juice-Chyle, and its passage through the lacteals
and mesenteric glands-Wheels of life moving on iron axles-leart
pumps through it two hogsheads of blood per hour-One hundred
and forty gallons of air used per hour in respiration-Nervous system-Gadfly without feeling-Transmigration of the human em
bryo,   -                       -                  - -   39 -6
CONVERSATION IV.
DOUBLE LIFE OF MAN.
Nerves of animal and vegetable life-Heart insensible-Separation
of the two lives-Anecdotes-John Hunter-Colonel TownshendWescloff-Ganglion of the understanding —Phrenology-Seat of the
soul-Two brains-Organs of animal life double-Insanity-SleepSight without the eye-Hearing without the ear-Nervous vapor the
fluid used in fascination-Physicians should in all cases operate, or
superintend the operation-Six stages of fascination-First stageIdiosyncrasy-Anecdotes-Danger of slighting the warnings of antipathy-Second and third stages-Mr. Braid, of Manchester-Fourth,
fifth, and sixth stages-What are small causes-Egyptian priestsOrigen-Apollonius Tyanneus-Pythagoras-Hippocrates,        - 63-7%
CONVERSATION V.
SPIRITUAL STATES.
Trance of William Tennant-Delirium tremens a kind of tranceServant of Elisha-King Saul and the witch of Endor-Naaman and
Elisha-Power of the Jews to cast out devils-Solomon's knowledge
and charms-Eleazar casts out a devil in the presence of Vespasian
and Josephus-Sons of Sceva-Robert Cochran's method of imparting the Holy Ghost-Mormonism  exposed-Pretended miraclesSwedenborg and his theory-Value of dead physiology-Rejection
of the Trinity-Epistles not to be maltreated-Clairvoyance of Swedenborg, and his communication with the spiritual world —Shape o
the life power-Amputated limbs-Calvin's entrance to the spiritual
world —Seeress of Prevorst-Remarkable boy, -       -      - 80-91




CONTENTS.                           It
CONVERSATION VI.
STAGES IN DYING.
PAGE
Deah: is the sixth stage of fascination-No pain in dying —Illusrations-Dr. Adam  Clarke-Account of hanging-Decomposition
&he only sure mark of death-Premature interments-ResuscitationThespesios of Soli-Methodist communion-Dr. David Nelson, and
his Cause and Cure of Infidelity-Theories in regard to tne brainMaterialism-Death-bed scenes-Opening of the spiritual sightDifference between really dying and only thinking ourselves dyingIllustrative cases-The Infidel-The Christian-Different classes of
fancies belong to different individuals according to their belief,  97. 109
CONVERSATION VII
OPERATION OF MEDICINE.
Worms on the face-Purifying  the blood-Constanles in tne
body —Briny peaches-Self-moving porter-houses-Spontaneous comr
bustion-Anatomy-Physiology-Pathology-Operation of medicine
well known-Vis Medicatrix Nature —Natural histbry of the dormouse-Experiments upon it-Example of the conservative power
on the human system-Medicines-Arsenic-How to discover alterutions in the life power-Illustration-Active plan of treatmentExpectant plan of treatment-Fascination inducing disease-Explanation of the water cure-Homoeopathy-Hannehman a fascinatorWhy is Homoeopathy patronized-Action of salt on the blood in yellow fever-Transfusion of blood-Our bodies change every seven
years-Vaccination-True church of physicians,           - - 110-15
CONVERSATION VIII.
PREVISION.
Faculty of prevision-Organic prevision-Revealed previsionli ganic prevision shown in the lower animals-Anecdotes-Medi.
cal practice derived from brutes-Case of Pierre Cazot-Case of Socrates-The philosopher Cazotte's famous prediction-Passages in the
life of Joan of Arc attesting prevision-Experience of the statesman
fHeinrich Zsch)kke illustrative of revealed prevision-Anecdote, 12fi-14! 




8Ofg~ tCONTENTS.
CONVERSATION IX.
SOMNAMBULISM.
Philosophy of mystery-Somnambulism-Anecdotes-(Girl in Dresden- Source of life-Pain necessary in surgical ojerations —Somnambulism rescues fascination from the imputations of sorcery and
ite black art -Dendy considers mesmerism true-Pixey and fairyTailor's guardian angel-Marcus-Anecdotes-Performing dreamsMr. Koggenbach-Story of Professor Upham-Captain Brown-Mr.
John Wise-Somnambulism induced by disease-Alecdotes-Somnambulism induced by medicinal agents-Anecdotes-.Dances of
witches true, and nature of the ingredients thrown by them in the
cauldron-Anecdotes- Townshend's sleep-waking - Somnambulic
music for the flute-Cataleptic phenomena, -     -         144 —156
CONVERSATION X.
HISTORY OF FASCINATION.
History of Fascination-St. Martin-St. Anthony-Royalty of
France-James of England-Charles of France-Battle of JarnacVan Helmont-Valentine Greatraks-Gassner-Mesmer-Puseygar
-Perkins' tractors-United States —Fascination a key to the various'
superstitions of the world-George Bush-Dilemma of Swedenborg.-Directions for operating in fascination-Alarming symptoms should
not disconcert the operator-Illustrations-The object of fascination
(nrative not experimental-Newnham-Deleuze-Conclusion, 157-171
APPENDIX.
LETTER FROM  REV. W. H. BEECHER,
Attesting, by his own experience, without any previous k;wlsdge of the subject, the reality of the influence of fascination, phemiumena of previsio, clairvoyan e, etc.,    -   -.   - 172 —I




FASCINATION 
CONVERSATION  I,
CHARMING.
LALY. My dear doctor, I can never sufficiently thank
you for the relief you have afforded me by your treat
ment. I had been for years on the verge of the grave,
and without the expectation of ever being, even for one
day, free fiom pain. The first time you fascinated me,
I experienced an incredible change-my pains ceased
the heart beat regularly, and my appetite returned, and
what is better still, my improvement has been rapia
and thorough since then. I confess this freely, as it
will preface what I am afraid will give you some pain,
My friends attribute my recovery to imagination, and
seem to think I was not really ill, but only nervous;
and they suppose that a sufficient degree of irritation
would make me as bad as I was at first.
DOCTOR. They mentioned, no doubt, many wonderful
cases of the effects of imagination on the body.
LADY. Yes, and some as strange as my own  The
cases that had the most effect on my mind were that of
Joe, the Scottish drover, who was persuaded to believe
himself sick, and in consequence really became so-and
would have died had not the joke been discovered to
him —and that of the criminal whom  the physicians




12                 IMAGINArION.
pretended to bleed to death, and who actually died from
the fancied loss of blood.
DOCTOR. That imagination exercises a powerful influence upon our bodies, is an undoubted fact; but it is
equally a fact that it has full credit for all it performs.
Jussieu, one of the commissioners appointed to examine
this subject by the French Academy in 1784, states, as
the result of a series of assiduous and attentive investigations, that he had observed some facts that admitted
of physiological explanations; others which seemed to
militate against animal magnetism; a third series of
facts which he attributed to the imagination; and,
lastly, those which could lead to no other conclusion
than that of admitting a particular agent in their production.
LADY. I had no idea the subject was known as far
back as 1784; I thought it a new  discovery of the
present day.
DOCTOR. We have authentic records showing its
existence for upward of three thousand years.  I have
been examining some authorities, and, if you are sufficiently interested in the matter, will take considerable
pleasure in submitting the result of my labors to you;
and also explaining the connection of fascination with
the laws of life.
LADY. I am very much obliged to you for the offer,
and will hold you to your promise. To tell the truth, I
was on the point many times of asking the same thing;
for 1 find it to be the universal opinion'of every one I
am acquainted with, that, if true, it is something allied to
witchcraft, aind if not true, the greatest humbug of the
age; and, despite my own experience, I often feel very
uneasy about it.




VARIOUS NAMES.                13
DOCTOR.. do not wonder at your feelings; but, in
relation to its effect on the imagination, I would ask f
you believed in fascination before I saw you?
LADY. I had never heard anything aboui it. One
day, when you came in and found the medicine had as
usual produced no effect, after some conversation on
ordinary matters, you directed me to sit down and look
attentively in your eyes, at the same time taking hold of
my hands. In a little time a rather uneasy feeling stole
over me, which soon became pleasant and exhilarating;
before long I felt sleepy, a dreamy and triumphant
sensation succeeded, and my eyelids closed without the
power to open them.  My pains vanished, and when
you opened my eyes, I felt better than I had done for
years; and to the surprise of all my acquaintances, who
predicted a speedy-relapse, my recovery has been rapid
and permanent.
DOCTOR. Well, then, your case cannot surely be
attributed to imagination.
LADY. I never thought it could; but why do you
name your new science Fascination?  Others call it
Mesmerism, or Animal Magnetism.
DOCTOR. You are mistaken in supposing it to be a
separate science; it is only a part of medicine. And
besides the names you have mentioned, Mental Electricity, Neurology, Pathetism, Sychodunamy, and many
others, are in turn used to signify it.  The forces of
life, as I shall explain in another place, brook no interference from those of Chemistry or Mechanics, so that
such terms as Magnetism and Electricity are inapplicable,
Mesmer did not discover anything new. Neurology
treats only of the nerves. Pathetism is a term derived
from the Greek, meaning suffering  and Sychodunamy
2




14               SNAKE ChARMING.
is another word from the same language, meaning the
force of the soul. Now, as we have a word in our
language already expressive o the power in the lower
animals, I saw no necessity to add another, especially
as Fascination is universally acknowledged.
LADY. You surely do not mean the charming of
snakes?
DOCTOR. You have exactly expressed my idea; for
the power in man and the lower animals is exerted
through the same medium, and produces, to a certain
extent, the same results. Do you remember any cases
of the fascination of snakes?
LADY. Quite a number.  Professor Silliman mentions
that in June, 1823, he crossed the Hudson at Cattskill, in
company with a friend, and was proceeding in a carriage by the river along the road, which is there very
narrow, with the water on one side, and a steep bank,
covered by bushes, on the other. His attention at that
place was arrested by observing the number of small
birds, of different species, flying across the road and
then back again, and turning and wheeling in manifold
gyrations, and with much chirping, yet making no
progress from the particular place over which they
fluttered. His own and his friend's curiosity was much
excited, but was soon satisfied by observing a black
snake of considerable size, partly coiled and partly erect
from the ground, with the appearance of great animation, his eyes brilliant, and his tongue rapidly and incessantly brandishing. This reptile they perceived to be
the cause and centre of the wild motions of the birds.
The excitement, however, ceased as soon as the snake,
alarmed by the approach of the carriage, retired into
the bushes; the birds did not escape, but, alighting upon




SNAKE CHARMING.                 15
the neighboring branches, probably awaited the re-appearance of their cruel tormentor and enemy.
I have read of a man residing in Pennsylvania, who
returning from a ride in warm weather, espied a blackbird, and a large blacksnake viewing the bird.  The
latter was describing circles, gradually growing snaller
around the snake, and uttering cries of distress. The
bird had almost reached the jaws of its enemy, when
the man with his whip drove off the snake, and the bird
changed his note to a song of joy.
A gentleman himself told me that while travelling
one day, by the side of a creek, he saw a ground-squirrel running to and fro between the creek and a great
tree a few yards distant. The squirrel's hair looked
very rough, which showed he was much frightened;
and his returns being shorter and shorter, my friend
stood to observe the cause, and soon discovered the
head and neck of a rattlesnake' pointing directly at the
squirrel through a hole of the great tree, which was
hollow. The squirrel at length gave over running, and
laid himself quietly down, with his head close to the
snake's.  The snake then opened his mouth wide, and
took in the squirrel's head, when a cut of the whip
across his neck caused him to draw in his head, which
action, of course, released the squirrel, who quickly ran
into the creek.
Doc'ToR. Dr. Good mentions the curious fascinating
powei the rattlesnake, in particular, has over various
small animals, as birds, squirrels, and leverets, which,
incapable of turning off their own eyes from those of
the serpent-enchanter, and overpowered with terror ana
amazement, seem to struggle to get away, and yet pio
gressively approach him, as though urged forward oi




16                SNAKE CIHARMING.
attracted by a power superior to that of natura. instiut
till at length they enter, apparently without foreign
force, into the serpent's mouth, which had all along been
open to receive them, and are instantly devoured. The
larger kinds of various snakes have undoubtedly a simi.
lar power.  Dr. Barrow, in his Travels into the interior
of South America, asserts this to be a fact, well known
to almost every peasant in that quarter of the world;
and Vaillant, in his Travels into Africa, affirms that, at
a place called Swortland, beholding a shrike in the very
act of fascination by a large serpent at a distance, the
fiery eyes and open mouth of which it was gradually
approaching, with convulsive tremblings, and the most
piteous shrieks of distress, he shot the serpent before
the bird had reached it; still, however, the bird did not
fly, and on taking it up, it was already dead, being killed
either by fear or the fascinating influence of the serpent, although, upon measuring the ground, he found
the space between them to be no less than three feet
and a half. There is a case, much in point, inserted in
one of the early volumes of the Philosophical Transactions, which states that a mouse, put by way of experiment into a cage in which a female viper was confined,
appeared at first greatly agitated, and was afterward
seen to draw near to the viper gradually, which continued motionless, but with fixed eyes and distended
mouth, and at length entered into its jaws, and was
devoured.
LADY. If any of the lower animals could be fascinated by man, I should think that would be a certain
proof, not only of the reality of the power, but that it
did not exert its influence through the imagination.
DOCTOR. Animals of ate days have been frequently




MEN CHARMING.                   1)
fascinated for purposes of experiment, and a universal
rigidity of the muscles produced to such an extent as to
cause them  to resemble pieces of statuary, so that the
animal could be taken up and its whole weight supported
by one foot —and this state produced and continued at
pleasure.  Mr. Bruce, the great African traveller. distinctly states, from minute personal observation, that all
the blacks in the kingdom of Sennaar, whether Funge
or Nuba, are perfectly armed by nature against the bite
of either scorpion or viper. They take the horned serpents in their hands at all times, put them  into their
bosoms, and throw them at one another, as children do
apples or bells; during which sport the serpents are se)
dom irritated to bite, and when they do bite, no mischief
ensues from  the wound.  The influence exerted upon
them is so great that they are scarcely ever able to
attempt any resistance, even when eaten up alive, as
Bruce, assures us he has seen them, from tail to head,
like a carrot.  He also positively affirms that they constantly sicken the moment they are laid hold of, and are
sometimes so exhausted by this invisible power or fascination, as to perish as effectually, though not as quickly,
as though struck by lightning.  "I constantly observed,"
says he, "that, however lively the viper was before,
upon being seized by any of these barbarians, he seemed
as if taken with sickness and feebleness, frequently shut
his eyes, and never turned his mouth toward the arm of
the person that held him."
This power is often used by man to disarm the fury
of the most enraged or vicious quadrupeds.  This is
peculiarlv seen at times in the case of watchdogs ovet
wlhom some house-breakers have found out the secret of
exercising so seductive and quieting a power as to keer
2




18                 MEN CIARMING..hem'n a profound silence while the burglary is corn:nittec.  Lindeerantz, of Sweden, tells us that the na-.ives of Lapland and Dalarne are in possession of this
secret generally, insomuch that they can instantly disarm the most furious dog, and oblige him to fly from
them, with all his usual signs of fear, such as dropping
the tail, and becoming suddenly silent.
Grooms are sometimes found possessed of a similar
power over horses.  Mr. Townsend gives a striking
anecdote to this effect in his account of James Sullivan.
The man-an awkward, ignorant rustic of the lowest
class-was by profession a horse-breaker, and generally
nicknamed the whisperer, from its being vulgarly supposed that he obtained his influence over unruly horses
by whispering to them. The actual secret of his fasci.
nating power, it is very likely, was unknown to himself,
for it died with him, his son, who was in the same occupation, knowing nothing of it. It was well known to
every one that, however unbroken or vicious a horse or
even a mule might be when brought to him, in the short
space of half an hour he became altogether passive
under his influence, and was not only entirely gentle
and tractable, but in a very considerable degree continued so, though somewhat more submissive to himself;han to others.  There was a little mystery in his plan,
but unquestionably no deceit. When sent for to tame an
unruly horse, he ordered the stable-door to be shut upon
himself and the animal alone, and not to be opened
until a given signal. This singular intercourse usually
lasted for about half an hour; no bustle was heard, or
violence seemingly had recourse to; but when the door
was opened, on the proper sign being given, the horse
wvas always seen lying down, and the fascinator by his




NERVOUS VAPOR.                  I 
side, playing with him  familiarly as a child with a
puppy.  Mr. Townsend once saw nis skill tried on a
horse that could never be brought to stand for a smith
to shoe him. The day after Sullivan's half-hour lecture,
he went, not without some incredulity, to the smith's
shop with many other curious spectators, who were eyewitnesses of the complete success of his art. This, too,
had been a troop horse, and it was supposed, not without reason, that after regimental discipline had failed, no
other would be found availing. He observed the animal seemed afraid whenever Sullivan either spoke to
or looked at him. In common cases, the mysterious
preparation of a private interview was not necessary,
the animal becoming tame at once.
LADY. Has no person ever attempted to explain this
wonderful influence? for the facts seem to have been
known a considerable time.
DOCTOR. Yes, though some have doubted the facts;
for, as Dr. Good remarks, in the marvellous it is always
far more easy to doubt than to determine. By far the
best explanation, and one with which I entirely coincide,
is that of Major A. Gordon, of South Carolina, the
rationale of which I will enter upon after a little time.
In a paper of his, he attributes the fascinating power
supposed to be possessed by serpents, to a vapor which
they secrete, and can throw around them to a certain
distance at pleasure. He advances various facts in
support of this opinion, and observes that the vapor
produces a sickening and stupefying effect; and alludes
to a negro who, from  a peculiar acuteness of smell,
could discover a rattlesnake at a distance of two hun.
dred feet, when in the exercise of this power, from his
smell being effected by it, and who, on folowing such




20                MEN CHARMED.
indication, a.ways found some animal drawn within its
vortex, and struggling with its influence.
LADY. Does man possess the power of throwing off
a similar vapor?
DocToR. Undoubtedly; the instruments in both are
the same, and these instruments I will take occasion to
describe to you, and explain their mode of operation.
LADY. I should think it possible, in that case, for
animals, in some instances, to fascinate man.
DOCTOR. We have well-attested instances of their doing so. I remember reading, some time since, of a man
walking out in his garden, who accidentally saw a snake
in the bushes, and, observing the eyes gleam in a peculiar manner, watched it closely, but soon found himself
unable to draw his own eyes off. The snake, it appeared
to him, soon began to increase immensely in size, and
assume, in rapid succession, a mixture of brilliant colors
He grew dizzy, and would have fallen in the direction
of the snake, to which he felt himself irresistibly impelled, had not his wife come up, and, throwing her arms
around him, dispelled the charm, thus saving him from
certain destruction. There are too many of these stories to mention a tithe of them; so I will conclude with
but one more that is very generally known. Two men
in Maryland were walking together, when one found
fault with his companion because he stopped to look at
something by the road-side. Perceiving he did not heed
him, he returned to draw him along, when he perceived
the other's eyes were fixed upon a rattlesnake, which
had its head raised and eyes glaring at him. The poor
fellow was leaning toward the snake, and crying piteously, in a feeble t ne, "He will bite me! he will bite
me."  "Sure enough he will," said his friend, "if you




KING DAVID.                  21
do not run off. What are you staying here for?" Find.
ing him dumb to all entreaties, he struck down the
snake with a limb of a tree, and pulled his companion
violently away.  The man, whose life was thus providentially saved, found himself very sick for some hours
after his enchantment.
LADY. I must express my astonishment at the new
light in which you have presented the whole subject to
my mind. There can possibly be no cavilling at any of
the positions you have assumed.
DOCTOR. I give you the result of my own conclusions, after considerable study, and, from what has been
shown, I think we may prove four things:First: That man can fascinate man.
Second: That man can fascinate the lower animals.
Third: That the lower animals can fascinate one
another.
Fourth: That the lower animals can fascinate man.
Townsend remarks, that if we wish to seek for a
general instance of the power one human being possesses
over another, with regard to the influence of fascination,
we have only to look at the effects produced when
young persons sleep with old.  It is recorded of the
Psalmist, King David, that, when he became very old,
he got a young damsel to sleep with him, that, from her
vigorous life, he might obtain a supply to lengthen out
his days. Some painful instances of this kind caine under his own observation-one in which the future wellbeing of a person very dear to him was compromised;
and he was acquainted with an infirm old lady, who was.so perfectly aware of the benefit she derived from sleeping with young persons, that, with a sort of hoi rid vam
pireism, she always obliged her maid to share the same




22               SAVAGE MAGICIANS.
bed with her; thus successively destroying the health
of several attendants.
The celebrated German physiologist, Hufeland, has
remarked the longevity of schoolmasters. and attributes
it to their living so constantly amid the healthy emanations of young persons.
It may be well to mention, in this connection, the fact
that savage nations, generally, practice fascination.
They rub or pat one another when fatigued, and it
refireshes.  The wife of one of the Sandwich Is!and
missionaries, on a visit to this country, some years since,
exclaimed, on returning from a long and tiresome walk,
that had completely exhausted iier strength: "If I was
home, the native women, by patting me, would soon
give me complete relief from this weariness, and make
me feel as lively as ever." The rites and gestures of
savage magicians, the medicine-men of the wilds, over
their patients, which so much alarm  travellers, are
nothing more than fascinating passes to cure disease-a
method, too, that very generally succeeds.
Even among animals, it has been found that the
young cannot be too closely associated with the old
without suffering detriment.  Young horses, standing in
a stable beside old ones, become less healthy, and, in
time, weak and sickly.
LADY. And you say these wonders can all be explained, in accordance with what is already known of
the laws of life?
DOCTOR. With the utmost certainty.
LADY. But do you really think it possible that I can
ever understand them  I am fearful that I have not
strength enough of mind to pry into such mysteries.
DOCToR. The subject is not difficult, by any means,




SUBJECT EASY.                         23
and a moderate degree of perseverance is only neces
sary to master the whole.  If you like, we will spend a
tittle  time to-morrow  in  its examination, and, in  the
meanwhile, I will leave you Mrs. Abdv's lines on fascination, which prove, in a pleasing enough manner, that
there can be some poetry in the subject:He stands before a gathered throng, strange knowledge to unfold,
Charming the dazzled fancy like the fairy-tales of old;
Yet must he brook the idle jest, ihe cold and doubting sneer,
Ho hatl no beaten pati to tread, no practised course to steer.
The wondrous science that he strives to bring to life and light,
Is softly, faintly breaking from the misty shades of night;
And scoffing prejudice upbraids the pure and genial ray,
Because it doth not burst at once to bright and beaming day.
He tells the healing benefits that through this power arise;
How sweet and soothing sleep may seal the weary mourner's eyes:
How raging madness may be checked; how sufferers may obtain
The boon of deep oblivion from the keenest throbs of pain.
Anon he dwells on loftier themes, and shows how mind may claim
An empire independent of the still and slumbering frame.
Can ye doubt the proofs, ye careless throng, submitted to your view
Can ye hold them in derision, because yet untried and new?
Know that improvements ever wend a tardy course on earth;
And though Wisdom's mighty goddess gained perfection at her birth
Her children reach by slow degrees the vigor of their prime,
For the wisdom of this lower world requires the growth of time.
None wish ye on the statements of a single voice to rest;
The marvels ye have witnessed ye are urged to prove and test;
Survey them in their varied forms-inquire-observe-inspectWatch-meditate-compare-delay-do all things but neglect!
If ye bear in mind the lessons that to-day ye have been taught,
Ye need not lack materials for intense and stirring thought;
And my simple lay can little aid an orator's discourse,
So gifted with the energy Df intellectual force.




24                          POETRY.
But I ask ye if your cherished ones sharp anguish should endure
Which the stated arts of medicine had in vain essayed to cure;
Would it not grieve ye to reflect ye might those pangs allay,
But that, jestingly and mockingly, ye cast that means away?
Mistake me not-I prize not aught, however great or wise.
If held not in subjection to the God who rules the skies;
To me all knowledge would be poor, all splendor would be dim4
All boons unsafe, all joys untrue, unless derived from Him.
And if eagerly this wondrous power I witness and approve,
It is because I know no bounds to Heaven's amazing love.
And 1 cannot, by the pedant rules of critic caution. scan
The depths of those exhaustless gifts His mercy pours on msn




CONVERSATION  II.
DISCOVERY OF FASCINATION.
DocToa. I wish to prove, in our conversation to-day
that Adam was perfectly'aware of the power of fascination, together with clairvoyance, and those other mys<
teries that astonish so much the people of the present
day.
LADY. Why did he not communicate tnis knowledge
to his descendants, so that the matter might become
universal and undoubted?
DOCTOR. I cannot answer better than in the words
of that veritable historian, John Bunyan, who tells us
that King Shaddai, in the sixth day of the year one, built
in the country of Universe a fair and delicate town,
called Mansoul, and endowed it with corporate privileges-a town for building so curious, for situation so
advantageous, that there was not its equal on the face
of the whole world. Yea, it was so goodly, when first
built, that the gods, at the setting up of it, came down
to sing for joy. It was so mighty as to have dominion
over all the country round about it; for all were required
to acknowledge it for their metropolitan, and do it
homage. It had commission and power from the king
to demand service of all, and also subdue those who in
any way opposed it.
There were certain gates in Mansoul, by which access
could be gained to the celestial country round about it,
and communion held with the messengers who wero
3




2G               TOWN JF MANSOUL.
constantly coming and going from the court of Shaddai.
The inhabitants took full advantage of all their glorious
privileges, and conversed with the gods freely, so that,
all the time they continued under the dominion of its
builder, nothing but sounds of joy and praise were
heard; but when, as is well known, they rebelled
against his government, and swore allegiance to Diabolus, his enemy, a dreadful change came over them, and,
a.nong the other enjoyments of which they were bereft,
the gates were closed that opened to the celestial country, and no communication through them, unless under
extraordinary circumstances, ever allowed.  As the
gates became disused, they were gradually forgotten by
-he many, and, for thousands of years, all remembrance
of them lost.
LADY. Why, you do not surely think that heaven is
around us, and tha, if we could see through those gates,
we would behold its glories at once?  I have always
entertained the idea that the celestial country was an
immense distance off, and, when we died, there was a
long journey to travel before it could be reached.
Doc'on. That the material world is contained in the
spiritual, admits of direct proof, and a little reflectiol?
will convince us at once of the fact. You know we are
told, that the angels thai encamp round about them that
fear the Lord, do always behold the face of our Father,which is in heaven.  And were our senses not holden
until the time when we shall be caught up to meet the
Lord in the air, we might see the cloud of witnesses
surveying our heavenward race, and behold, as Stephen
did when he was martyred, heaven opened, ani Jesus.stting at the right hand of God.
LADY. I must confess it would please me better to




CELESTIAL GATES.
fnd some certain proof of this in the Bible, and also of
some one who had seen it, that woull be immediately,onvincing.
DOCTOR. You will be surprised, then, by an attentive
e:xamination of the sixth chapter of 2 Kings.  When
J'lisha's servant perceived his master's house surrounde. by tho warriors of the king of Syria, who evidently
came with a hostile intent, he was extremely frightened,
and cried, "Alas, my master! how shall we do?" And
Elisha answered and said, " Fear not; for they that be
with us are more than they that be with them." But as
this did not quiet him, Elisha prayed, and said, "Lord, I
pray thee, open his eyes, that he may see."  And the
Lord opened the eyes of the young man, and he saw;
and, behold, the mountain was full of horses and chariots
of fire round about Elisha.
LADY. I am satisfied, but cannot help expressing my
astonishment at the clearness of all the proofs you bring
forward to sustain your positions. Do you suppose they
practised fascination before the deluge?
DOCTOR. Though they might be aware of the exist,
ence of-the celestial gates, yet that the mode of opening
them, and also producing curative influence, was known
before the flood, it is, of course, out of our power to
determine; but that it was soon manifest after that pe
riod, is undoubted.
Though the immediate descendants of Noah were
aware of the being, and some of the attributes, of
Jehovah, yet their knowledge, handed down to posterity
only by tradition, became corrupt, and the invisible and
eternal One was lost sight of in the homage paid to
things of wood and stone; the charge of which, involv.
ing, as it did in their eyes, communion with superio



28               IIEATHEN WOSSIItP.
powers, was the most important office in the nation, and
one, too, which it was the earnest endeavor of all to
obtain.  Now, who so likely to obtain it as those who
pretended to be especial favorites of the gods themselves, proving their assertions in the most satisfactory
manner by the cure of diseases.  Accordingly, we fina
the heathen priests were the first fascinators.
LADY. But how did they discover the mode of doing
it?
DOCTOR. An attentive examination of the subject has
brought me to a conclusion that, most likely, will very
much surprise you.  I think the requisite knowledge was
imparted by Satan himself, either in a direct manner, or
by prompting the mind to a series of experiments that
led to the discovery.  He did this to increase his influence, so that a chosen few, on whom he could depend,
might guide the many in the ways of destruction
Proof of this, I think, can be found in the fact, naturally
abhorrent to humanity-for man has been defined to be a
religious animal-that all barbarous nations pay more
homage to the Spirit of Evil than they do to the Spirit
of Good. And, as a matter of course, their rites of worship are of the most revolting and blood-thirsty descrip
tion; extreme licentiousness characterizing their devo
tions, as well as suspension by hooks, etc., and the mur
der of infants and adults.
LADY. If fascination is a power imparted by Satan
why is it not sinful to have recourse to it?
DOCTOR. He did not impart the power, but merely
showed the fact of its existence.  It is a gift from Jeho
vah, and, as such, with all thankfulness, we make use of
it to subserve his honor and glory   The Lord makes
he wrath of man to Fraise hilm as wel as the wrath of




GODS OF INDIA.                29
Satan, who will no doubt find it in the end, like many
other of his projects. one of the most efficient means of
his overthrow.
Uniting, as the heathen magi did, ti e offices of priest
and physician, as well as king, (which last office they
afterwards voluntarily separated, though they kept it
subordinate to their own,) anid the number of known
remedies being then very few, they were mostly compelled to rely on fascination for giving relief in sickness.
Some of them possessed this power in so extraordinary a degree, and had their fame so widely extended,
as to be deified after death; having idol statues shaped
in their likenesses, to which divine honors were paid,
the qualities for which they were thus honored being
symbolized by an additional number of arms. Proofs
of this may be seen at the present day in the images of
the gods of India; Vichenow, Chiven, Parachiven, Ravenna, and many others, have four, six, and twelve
arms, all presenting the hands open, with the palms
inclining downwards, the fingers being in the most approved fascinating positions of the present day.
It is probable that the immediate application of the
hands was reserved for special purposes, curiouslyshaped rods of various kinds being mostly used to direct
the influences; thus the caduceus of Mercury, it was
supposed, had the power of putting any one whom it
touched to sleep; with it he deepened the slumbers of
Argus, after lulling him to a gentle repose by the sound
of his lyre, preparatory to cutting off his head. That
he sometimes dispensed with its use is evident from a
passage in Plautus, which makes him  say of Sosia
"What if I stroke him gently with the hand so as to put
him to sleep?"  May no  -he regal sceptre have he^n
3*




s0                 EGYPTIAN MAGI.
used, before the separation of priest and king, for the
same purposes as the caduceus of Mercury, and be,
as well as the royal touch for the cure of scrofula, the
last remains of the former union of offices?
LADY. Nothing can be more probable in this view o'
the subject.
DOCTOR. The magi, or wise men of India, the most
ancient fascinators of whom profane history gives any
account, practised mostly gestures and manipulations in
curing disease, though they often prescribed herbs.
LU DY. Is any particular account given of their curing
by fa scination?
Dc "TOR. Philostratus mentions the case of a young
man, whom a lion had injured in the knee to such an
exter? as to keep him in constant agony, and who went
to the magi to obtain relief.  They rubbed him gently
with their hands at intervals during a few days, when
he returned home perfectly cured.
Next come the priests of Egypt, who took the great
est possible advantage of the secret, and made the
knowledge of it the last and holiest rite of their ancient
magic, in the initiation of candidates. So celebrated
were they, that many persons, taking advantage of our
Saviour's temporary residence in Egypt, professed to
account for his miracles, by accusing him, according to
Arnobius, of being a magician; of making things by
secret means; and of stealing, from the sanctuary of the
Egyptian priests, the names of the powerful angels, and
their occult disciplines.
Patients flocked to these Egyptians from  all parts of
the world. Their mode of proceeding was to previously
prepare them by means of fasting and prayer, and then
wrap them  up in goat skins.  After the process of




CURATIVE REVELATIONS.              3^
fascination.hey were left to wait for sleep and pro
phetic visions; in some instances these did not occur,
but to provide for the emergency, there was a company ot
priests who slept for them, and revealed the dreams. A
record of each case, telling the name of the person, the
disease and the remedy, was engraved on the temple;
and these inscriptions, we are told, were, for a long while,
the sole record of practical medicine. Five of these
have been translated, the following two of which will
give an idea of what they were:
The god, in a nocturnal apparition, ordered the son of
Lucius, who was attacked with a hopeless pleurisy, to
take froan the altar some cinders, and, mixing them with
wine, make an application to the affected side. He was
saved; he thanked the god, and the people wished him
happiness.
A blind soldier named Valerius, after consulting the
god, received for answer: "Go in the temple, mix the
blood of a white fowl with honey, and wash your eyes
with it during three days."  He recovered his sight, and
thanked the god before the people.
LADY. What does it mean when it says they waited
for visions'?
DOCTOR. I must take a rather circuitous mode of
answering your question. We must now study a little
physiology, and, as I will avoid all hard names, and endeavor to simplify as much as possible, you will not find
it difficult to follow me in the explanations.
Mlan has three perfectly distinct elements in his corn
position-Matter, the Life Principle, and the Soul ci
Immortal part.
LADY. I thought life resulted from the union of all
the different organs, and that their being placed in




32              LIFE WITHOUT SOUL.
just such relations made the machine work harmroni
ously.
DOCTOR. That has been, and even now is, the opinion
of a great many, but when the system is growing, and
also in disease, some parts are always out of relation to
the rest, and the proportion and balance thus utterly
destroyed; and didlife only result from the union of all,
it muist cease in such cases at once to exist. The inductive and only true method of reasoning refers the
various operations going on within the body to a common cause, which source of action is called the life or
vital principle.
LADY. But how is this cause discovered?
DOCTOR. By the phenomena it presents to us; we
can perceive these phenomena only through the agency
of Matter, for which purpose alone, it would seem, matter was created.
LADY. As matter is governed by laws of its own, it
appears to me that, in experimenting upon it, you would
only be finding out those laws.
DOCTOR. The laws of matter, which are known as
the chemical and mechanical forces, differ entirely from
those manifested by it when organized.
LADY. Still I have not a clear idea of the vital principle. When I would separate it from the soul and matter, the two last continually force themselves upon my
mind, and make the whole subject very confused. If it
was only possible to observe the vital principle acting
with matter alone, without the soul's interference, I
could easily understand it.
DOCTOR. Your wish can at once be gratified, by
looking at the geranium on your window sill. Veget.
ables have only the vital principle and matter; but




LIFE IN PLANTS.                 33
perhaps 1 cannot do better than refer you to an article
on this subject prepared by myself for a literary magazine some' years ago. Will you read it aloud?
LADY. It was remarked by a philosopher, some years
ago, that it was scarcely possible to tell the difference between a dog and a rose. This statement, to the
greater number of my readers who have not reflected
on the subject, will appear hardly probable. Anecdotes
of the sagacity and faithfulness of dogs are known to
all; and I doubt not many of them in our city are possessed of more knowledge and practical information,
and are better members of society, than the swarms of
idle and vicious youth who crowd our streets.  How
then, with such facts before him, could Bonnet make
such an assertion? I will tell you. Our ideas ol the
intelligence of animals are derived from the proofs of
design we see them  exhibit.  Having a certain end in
view, they will choose, with the most astonishing dise~rimination, out of a number of means, the ones best
adapted to their purposes, and contrive to use these in
such a way as to be almost uniformly successful. Natural history is made up of facts in support of this position. Our next inquiry will be to find out whethei
plants ever show such instances of choice and foresight
and a little examination will prove that most unquestionably they do.
Strawberries, planted on moist ground, give out no
runners; but, on placing them in a dry soil with water
at some distance, we find runners travelling around until they discover it, and then remaining-a living aque.
duct-to supply the plant. If these runners are moved
round to the other side, they will soon regain theix
original position with unerring certainty. If you turn




34              INSTINCT OF PLANTS.
the under surface of a rose-leaf upward, it will, in a
little while, commence a return movement, gently twist.
ing, with a kind of effort, on its peduncle, as on a sort
of pivot.  The Abbe Martin transplanted a rose-tree
from one part of his garden to anvther, for the purpose
of experiment.  To the right of the new position, the
soil was hard, dry, and sterile; to the left, moist, rich,
and tender.  The roots, at first, radiated alike to the
right and left. But he soon discovered that the roots,
which had advanced to the right, bent backward toward
the fertile and mellow earth, as if divining that their
companions at the left had found better pasture. To prevent their intercepting nourishment intended for other
plants, he dug a ditch to stop the farther advancement
of the roots. Arrived at the ditch, they plunged perpendicularly below its bottom, ran around and advanced
anew  toward the point whence they had discovered
the rich soil.
Instances of their foresight in guarding against ex.
cessive heat, wind, and rain, are equally numerous
In France, the peasants train the carlina by their doors.
to serve as a barometer; its open flowers show clear
weather-but closed, an abundance of rain.  The shepherd's weather-glass has the same property. If it does
aot show its face to greet the sun on his ascension, the
sheep remain in the fold on that day. The four-o'clock
opens its flowers regularly every afternoon at that hour,
to show the laborer that, if he cannot afford a watch,
nature will provide him with the means of knowing the
hour without expense.  Such examples certainly prove
a faculty of judging according to the sense in plants.
And now  the inquirer asks, "What is the nature
of this DrincCDle, and in what does it differ from chem




VEGETABLE LIFB.                 35
ical affinity or attraction?"  A perfect exempiification
of this difference is given in the history of its creation.
And God made every plant of the field before it was in
the earth, and every herb of the field before it grew.
Dry land and seas, by this time, were divided, and the
forces of the inorganic world in operation. These forces
are called pullers-down of nature.  Exposed to their
influence, mountain and hill crumble to dust; and it is
owing to their agency that volcanoes and earthquakes destroy cities and swallow up nations. This is due, probably, to the shape of the ultimate atoms, which, fitting into
each other in different ways, occasion perpetual change.
But on the third day, a controlling influence, a new
set of powers,, the builders-up of nature, appear-cre.
ated, in kind and degree, different from  matter, yet
only manifesting their presence to us in connection
with it.  So far from  allowing these atoms to unite
according to their affinities, which would soon destroy
nature, they exercise the most despotic sway, controling them to the last. The chemical forces are in perfeet subjection while life remains; but the moment it
departs, dust returns to dust, the work of destruction
begins, and the body vanishes into ail
A beautiful example of this opposition is shown by
seeds, which are the simplest independent forms of the
union of the life power with matter. Take two of these,
and, having destroyed the vitality of one of them by passing an electric spark through it, place both in warm and
moist earth.  The dead seed, surrounded by all the conditions favorable to its decomposition, is speedily resolved
into its native elements, while the living one makes slaves
of its enemies, rapidly sprouts up amid the surrounding
desolation and hangs out its flowery banners as tokens




30                  JERMINATION.
of victory.  Seeds  etain life, almost any length of
time.  I noticed, this week, an account of an abundani
harviest reaped from  the growth of seeds found in an
Egyptian mummy, over two thousand years old.
A seed, finding itself in a warm moist place, suddenly
becomes aware that it has work to do, and sets about it
without delay.  The seed-case bursts, a stalk and leaves
appear above, while the root, sending off filaments,
remains below; at the end of each of these little filaments is a spongiole, or bundle of leech-like mouths.
These suck from the soil whatever they require, and
then act the part of a stomach in instantly digesting it.
A series of ascending vessels, or veins, are ready to
carry it to the leaves, to be further elaborated; when it
arrives there, its oxygen is given off, and a supply of
carbonic acid, obtained from the air, is combined with
it; and the pure blood, or sap, is carried by the arteries
to every part, to supply its necessities and form compounds.
Plants are manufacturing establishments; some make
the essential oils —as the cinnamon, sassafras, and rose;
others salts-as the sorrel, oxalic acid; the Peruvian'. irk-tree, quinine; and the willow, salacine.  Many a
dt )ised shrub has powers more deadly and dangerous
thabn a powder magazine; the laurel and peach yield
pruss * acid, one drop of which will destroy life; and
travell, s tell us that the atmosphere of the upas-tree is
fatal for miles around it.
The vital principle of each plant, being separate and
independent in itself, explains the reason why two of
them  the one a virulent poison, the other a table vege.
table-will grow side by side, and draw their nourish.
ment from the same source. It also shows the error of




USES OF PLANTS.                 37
our modern agriculturists, who treat these living exist
ences, endowed with a power of choice and foresight,
as if they were tubes, imbibing whatever was placed
near them by capillary attraction.
Man resembles a torch, in requiring oxygen to keep
him burning or alive; in return for this he throws out
carbonic acid, which to him is a virulent poisor. Now,
what prevents this gas accumulating in the air, and destroying the animal kingdom; and from  what source
shall the supply of oxygen be derived to answer our
continual demand?  Only from the respiration of plants;
which we may now see not only supply us with food,
but are absolutely necessary for our daily existence.
When the new Custom  House and Merchant's Exchange were erecting, they were the daily resort of
thousands who flocked to witness their gradual progress;
yet how  much more wonderful is the building of a
~egetable palace! Unseen workmen are urging it forward with untiring industry; column  after column
forms; story after story rises; staircase and hall and
gallery are soon fixed in their positions.  We think it a
great thing to have the Croton water brought into our
houses; yet in every one of these little chambers, there
are pipes to carry food and water and take away the
residue.  The vegetable house is made of the finest
wood, is elastic, and capable of bending to the breeze;
and, to defend it from the rain, covered either with water-proof varnish, or stuccoed over with the rares porcelain.  And all this time the spectator is not dis urbed
by noise or dust, the greater part of the work being carried on under ground.
When all is completed, no monarch on earth could obtain such a residence. The very paint of its walls, though
4




a8                 ROSICRUCIAN.
exposed to all kinds of impurity, is of such rare quality
that the king's stateliest robes cannot match it. " Consider the lilies of the field; they toil not, neither do they
spin; yet Solomon, in all his glory, was not arrayed like
unto one of these."  Nay, kings are even glad to obtain
ts essences at second hand, to perfume themselves.
The name of the inhabitant who owns the house is
written on a broad door-plate of surpassing beauty, so
that we can tell one from another. Books have been
written on the language of these door-plates or flowers,
and it is said that angels, by their means, write mysterious truths on hill and field. The poet, from the ear-.iest ages, has held the most sweet and loving converse
with them. But to the physician, the priest of nature,
they speak in a higher and more exalted strain.  In
them  he reads the success of his mission. By theil
means he can conquer the most obstinate diseases.
That nothing has ever been formed for show alone, the
truly useful will always be the truly beautiful. That
when their uses are perfectly understood, the fond dream
of the Rosicrucian shall not want verification: the
bone shall continue firm and the muscle strong; the eye
of youth retain its lustre; and as century after century
passes away, the lapse of time shall but witness our
triumph over the pullers-down of nature, and our increase in wisdom and love.  These happy children of
Flora, that have retained undimmed the influence (if
their Creator's smile, when first he pronounced his work
good in Eden, shall receive added radiance and more
dazzling glory as they again behold His face in the
dawning morn of the millenium




HOUSE OF THE SOUL.               39
CONVERSATION  III.
PHSYIOLOGY.
I)ocloOB The body is the house of the soul: in an
dpper story, confined to an inner chamber, close y imprisoned, and having no communication with the external world, except through the medium of the life principle, resides our immortal being.
LADY. But there is no mention of a double life in the
account of man's creation. Genesis ii, 7, says that the
Lord God formed man out of the dust of the ground,
and breathed into his nostrils the breath of life; and
man become a living soul.
DOCTOR. The Hebrew word, in that passage, for life;
is used in the plural; so that your objection but confirms the physiological view. It should read, breathed
into his nostrils the breath of lives.
LADY. Is the life principle immortal as well as the
soul?
DOCTOR. I believe it is, but only in consequence of
its connection with the soul, to which it is subservient.
It is an intermediate between spirit and matter, present.
ing to us certain phenomena, by which vte are enabled
t: recognize its possession of seven distinct properties
tlese are:VITAL AFFINITI
VIVIFICATION.
MOBILITY.
IRR'TABILITY.




40                    NS'INCT
INSTINCT.
SYMPATHY.
SENSIBILITY.
The first five are common to all animated natuieplants as well as animals; the last two, in consequence
of requiring a nervous system for their development,
be'ong only to animals.
Vital affinity and vivification are used in the organiza
tion of matter.  Mobility is the power of originating
motion, as shown in the circulation of the sap and
shrinking of the mimosa. Irritability, or excitability, is
the power of giving and receiving impressions-of acting upon matter, and of being, in turn, acted upon by
it-and is one of the most important of all. The instinctive property of plants has been already mentioned; that
of animals needs no illustration.  Sympathy and sensibility possess names sufficiently explanatory of their
powers.
LADY. But have not animals a separate principle of
instinct besides a life power?
DOCTOR. They have not.  Coleridge, who is the best
authority on this subject, remarks that instinct is the
power of selecting and adapting means to proximate
ends; and illustrates the point by taking the stomach of
a caterpillar, which, he observes, has the power of
selecting the appropriate means (that is, the assimilable
part of the vegetable congesta) to the proximate endwhich is, the growth or reproduction of the insect's
body. It does this by the vital power of the stomach.
From  the power of the stomach, he passes to the
power exerted by the whole animal; traces it, wandering from spot to spot, and plant to plant, till it finds the
appropriate vegetable; and again, on this chosen vege



INSTINCTIVE  NTELL[GENCE.           41
table he marks it seeking out and fixing on the part of
the p; ant, bark, leaf, or petal, suited to its nourishmentor (should the animal have assumed the butterfly form)
to the proper place of depositing its eggs, and making
provision for the sustenance of the little animals that
shall emerge from them. The power, thus exhibited, of
selecting and adapting means to proximate ends, according to circumstances, he considers as a higher species
of adaptive power, and calls it Instinct.
Then, citing anecdotes from  the writings of zoologists, he proves in the lower animals a power of selecting and adapting the proper means to the proximate
ends, according to varying circumstances; and this yet
higher species of adaptive power he calls Instinctive
intelligence.
In addition to these, he says that he finds one other
character common to the highest and lowest; namely,
that the purposes are all manifestly predetermined by
the peculiar organization of the animals, and both actions
and purposes are in a necessitated reference to the
preservation and continuance of the particular animal,
or the progeny.  There is selection, but not choice;
volition; rather than will.
LADY. I suppose wild men have their instinctive
faculties best developed, and that man, in proportion as
he becomes civilized, or under the dominion of reason,
loses those powers.
DOCTOR. You must remember that the manifestations
of instinct depend on the peculiar organization of the
animal. Man is not fitted to live in a wild state, for
then he is, of all animals, the most helpless. But Coleridge speaks directly on this point, and I will give you
his words, premising that he defines understanding as
4A




42                 UNDERSTANDING.
the "aculty that judges by the senses. He says, that if
we suppose the adaptive power, in its highest sta.e,
(instinctive intelligence) to co-exist with reason, free-will,
and self-consciousness, it instantly becomes understand
ing; in other words, that understanding differs, indeed
from the noblest form of instinct-not in itself. o? in it
own essential properties, but in consequence of its coexistence with far higher powers, of a diverse kind, in
one and the same subject. Instinct, in a rational, responsible, and self-conscious animal, is understanding.
Having now reviewed the characters of the servants.n the house of the soul, we will glance at their offices
in the building, and at the building itself. In comparing
the human frame to a self-moving house, the bones and
muscles should be represented as beams and pillars; the
stomach as the kitchen; the lungs as the ventilator, etc.
etc. The house must be furnished with bells and wires
to convey news, receive messages, and connect all the
parts together into a common whole; such offices are
performed by the senses.
The skeleton of the human body is composed of two
hundred and forty-eight bones; each of which is mod
elled with the utmost care for the various offices it has
to perform; and so close a relation does one bone bear to
another, that an anatomist can tell from seeing one, or
in some cases, even a part of one, with the utmost cer
tainty, the general form and habits of the animal to
which it belonged.  A  happy illustration of this fact
was shown some years since in England, by Mr. Con.
nybear, a philosopher of considerable eminence.  Having found a few bones of an extinct species of animal,
he set himself to work to construct the perfect skeleton,
Little attention was paid to his performance at the timed




BONES.                            43
but some years afterward, a complete skeleton of that
singular animal, thle Plesiosaurius, was discovered, and
found almost exactly  to  correspond  with  Mr. Connvy
bear's drawing 
la a, spinal column 
tapped by the skull; r
r, ribs connected by gris-       y  
lie (cartilage,) to the
breast bone, x; y y, collar bones (clavicles); b, 
the arm bone (huiner-.                         r 
us); c, the elbow; d,
tho radius; e, the ulna;
f, the wrist joint (com-    I "'c
posed of 8 small bones, 
in two rows)  g, the    -           S
finger bones (phalanges,                      )
19 bones); s s, hips or
pelvic bones, joining w, 
the sarum; i, the thigh g
bone united to the trunks
of the body by the joint
k; 1, the knee-pan (patella); k, the knee; m,
the tibia, and n, the fib-           i
ula, both small bones of
the leg; o, ancle, com-  1
posed of 7 bones; p,             ^' n7        I
toe bones (phalanges, 19
bones)          
BONY SKELETON.
The back bone and skuil are by far the most important anongr  the bones; they are the caskets in a hich
are deposited the spinal marrow  and brain-indeed, to




BACK BONE.
protect the nervous system from injury seems, in every
instance, the first intention of the formation of a skeleton.
The spine, or back bone, is composed of twenty-four
smaller bones, between the most of which is a layer of
gristle, so that while the indispensable conditicn of great
strength is preserved, a degree of motion is allowed.
The weight of the upper parts cf the body, presses
down this gristle during the day, thus accounting for
the singular fact that persons are always shorter at
night than in the morning soon after getting up. The
loss in height in different individuals varies from half an
inch to one or two inches.
LADY. I know  a gentleman who habitually loses in
height from one-half to three-quarters of an inch every
day; and, while speaking on the subject, told me an
anecdote relative to the practice pursued by British recruiting sergeants, who, when they found a man willing
to enlist, not more than half an inch under the requisite
height, made him lie in bed and fed him well for two or
three days, by which time his gristle became well swelled
out, and he was almost invariably sure to pass muster
when immediately presented at the station house.
DOCTOR. Every little protuberance and ridge we see on
bones give origin or hold to muscles, which attach themselves to them by means of strings or tendons. There are
nearly five hundred distinct muscles named by anatomists in the human body. This is probably underrating
the real number, for a caterpillar has over four thousand
muscles, and there are one thousand in the proboscis of
an elephant.  Muscles are composed of layers of cellular tissue, the compression of which at the ends forms tondons; while the cells in the middle are filled with fibrin,




MUSCLE.                             4^
MLUSCULAR SKELETON.
[f g is the sterno mastoid; its contraction makes the head approach the
chest; i i i, abdominal mus.les, to retain the parts in their places, assist
respiration, etc.; h, muscles on the chest, to move the arm toward it; I
extends the arm on a level with the shoulder; k is the muscle to raise the
fore-arm; a moves the fingers; b, the fore-leg; and c is the tailor's mus.
cle, by which he is enabled to cross his legs.]
The mode in which the nerves act on the mobility
of muscles, so as to  cause them  to thicken or contract,
is well shown in this cut.  One part of the muscle is attached to the fore-arm, and the other to the head of the




16                       DIGES liON.
arm; as it gradually contracts and shortens on itself, the
hand approaches the head
ARM.
[The figure represents the bones of the arm and hand, having all the
soft parts dissected off, except one muscle, 0 B I tf which the function
is to bend the arm; 0, the origin of the muscle; B, the belly; I, the
insertion; T T, the tendons; S. the shoulder-joint; E, the elbow. When
the belly contracts, the lower extremity of the muscle I is brought nearer
to the origin or fixed point, 0, and by thus bending the arm at the elbow
joint, raises up the weight, W, placed in the hand.]
When the human germ  or embryo is first excited to
action, it is not as large as a pin's head, yet, even small
as it is, the life power is in vigorous exercise; it stations
deputations of its properties in the proper places to form
their own instruments of action out of the minute pulp.
In a short time the heart and blood-vessels are formed
to carry nutriment to every part, and the bones, muscles, and other organs appear in succession.  Its first
care is to perfect all the arrangements that are necessary
for purposes of nutrition, which arrangements you will
understand better in the adult than in the infant, in whom
the parts are out of proportion.
When food is taken in the mouth, the saliva is poured
out from manufactories of that substance; it mixes with
the food, not only softening it, but also affecting on it an
actual change, which is the first real act of digestion.
When this Dfuid is deficient, its want is imperfectly sup.




SroMACH.                          47
plied in the other processes of assimilation.  This cause
alone would account for the dyspepsia, so prevalent
amonI   tobacco chewers and  smokers, who wantonly
exhaust a supply intended for other purposes than the
filthy use to which they apply it.
The second act is performed by the stomach, into which
the food descends from the mouth by means of a long tube
fesophagus) composed of a series of muscular rings
THE STOMACH.
[The stomach is capable of containing, generally, from one to two quarts
of liquid; cases occar, however-by want on the one side, and gluttony
on the other-in which this proportion is either much diminished or
increased.  It has two openings-the cardiac, C, (from cardium, the heart,
it being near that organ) and the pyloric, P, from the Greek for gate.
keeper, because it will not let anything but chyme pass it. S S, and B,
are arteries surrounding it, to give it a good supply of blood for making
the gastric juice.]
which, by contracting constantly above, push it before
them.  When there, the gastric fluid is poured out on it,
completely dissolving the whole, and changing it into
a greyish-looking fluid called chyme.  The stomach then
contracts, closing up the opening by which it entered C,




mail^S             XINTESTINES.
tie intestinal tube, from the mouth to its final termination, is oves
thfirty feet long. After leaving the stomach, it is divided into large and
small intestines.  R S, S T, are the latter, which end at T into the
Aarge, which are marked U U U W; and the termination X y is called'
the rectum, clasping which last are the strong muscle, Z Z, joining in e
continuous circular band below. M M M, shows the stomach; A A A
the liver, and its depository of bile, B, the gallbladder.1




VISCERA.
THS  LBR, GALL-BLADDER, PANOREAS, AND KIDNEYS.
[I, is the liver, turned up to show its under surface; G, the gall-blad.
der; P, the pancreas; K, the kidneys, which secrete urine from the blood,
which they empty into the bladder, B, by means of the tubes called
ureters U; S is the spleen, an organ at the present day considered merely
a reservoir of blood for the stomach.  The rectum, R, runs behind the
bladder toward its terminating point; V is the great vein carrying up the
refuse blood to b'e purified; A is the artery returning the same blood
purified, to meet the wants of the system.]
5




50                    MESENTERIC  GLANDS.
and thus forcing it out through the other orifice P.  Soon
after entering the intestines, a fluid is poured out through
a tube.  This fluid is composed of the secretion of the
liver (bile), and another secretion from the pancreas
(sweet breads); each  sending  a tube  trom   itself, the
tubes uniting into a common duct before opening into the
intestines. The liver has a repository for bile, called
the gall-bladder, so that it is capable of performing its
part in digestion  at any  moment.  It is supposed  by
many that the juice from  the pancreas merely  dilutes
the bile. but this is not very probable. This juice, when
TD
I ~I
U  Or
MESENTERIC GLANDS.
I I I I, portions of intestine; L, lacteals, which empty into the mesen
ery glands M G; T D, thoracic duct, which conveys the elaborated fluid
wlhich is, at this point, of a pale pinkish color) into the reservoir in the
neck   The spine, S. is shown in the back-ground.  The mesentery
glalnds exercise a very important part in digestion; they are sometimes
diseased in children, a fact which may be known by feeling on their bellies a number of little hard knots; in such cases, the child, if not curedno matter what the nourishment is-rapidly wastes away and dies. Dr.
Edson, the living skeleton lately exhibited at the American museum, died
in consequence of disease closing the thoracic duct, and thus preventing
any access of nourishment to his system. 1




HEART.                           51
poured on tl 3 chyme, separates it irt o two parts.he
chyle and ex crement.  The chyle, a this stage, so much
resembles milk, as to take its name from  a Greek word
meaning that article: it is instantly sucked up by millions of little leech-like vessels, called milk carriers,
(lacteals from lactus, milk,) which convey it to the mes'
enteric glands to be further elaborated; leaving them,
it is carried to a duct and finally mixed with a reservoir
of venous blood in the neck, from  whence it enters the
upper cavity of the right heart, is thrown into the lower
cavity, an.d then taken to the lungs to receive the last
stage of purification.
ff'
THE HEART.
[Man possesses two hearts, which are only placed together for the sake
of convenience. Each heart has two cavities, an upper and a lower one;
the upper cavity is called an auricle, from its resembling, in shape, an
animal's ear; the lower cavity is called a ventricle, from its shape, resem.
bling a belly. Ths sudden expansion of the receiving chamber, or anriclo




52                      WHEELS OF LIFE.
of the right heart, n, produces a vacuum, which is directly filled by tha
mixture of elaborated food and veinous blood fiom various sources, o, p q;
it instantly contracts and empties this blood into the distributing chamber,
or ventricle below; the ventricle b contracts upon itself, and sends the
blood into the pulmonary artery, k, to be carried to the lungs, 11; after
receiving a supply of oxygen, and throwing off its carbonic acid, it
returns to the left heart by four pulmonary veins, two of which are shown
at m m; the left auricle, r, expands, produces a vacuum, becomes filled,
contracts, and sends the blood into the left ventricle, a, which also contracts in turn, and throws the fluid into the aorta, c e, from whence it is
carried through all parts of the system. If the time that elapses between
the contractions of the heart be divided into four parts, three of these
parts will represent the period of the heart's activity, and one that of its
repose; it thus rests one-quarter of the time, or six hours in every twentyfour; it does this (in common with every part of the body that has
been exhausting its strength in working) to recruit. The artery that
supplies the heart with blood is called the coronal, s. Each cavity of the
heart holds two ounces; it commonly contracts seventy times a minute,
so that over TWO HOGSHEADS of blood are pumped through our hearts
every hour! That the irritation of the blood does not cause the heart to
contract, and that it possesses an inherent power of action in itself, are
shown by the fact that, when taken out of the body (of course, a very
short time after apparent death) and pricked, its first motion is to expand
The heart of a sturgeon was hung up to dry, and continued in motion sB
Jong that its rustling could be heard in any part of the house.]
Arrived at the lungs, it throws out carbonic acid and
takes in a supply of oxygen; it is then thrown into the
upper cavity  of the  left heart, which contracts, sends
it into the lower cavity, from whence the aorta receives
it, and it then makes its rounds in the system to supply
the wants of every part. Chemists tell us that an atom
of pure blood is composed of eighteen different elements;
and also that the atoms resemble a spangle in shape,
being thin and circular with a dot of iron in the middle,
occasioning Dr. Good's remark that the wheels of life
ran on'ron axles.
The arteries subdivide to an excessively minute degree, and the extreme branches terminate in little blad
ders.  Each of these little bladders or globular cells hag




LUNGS.                             5
g ill
THE LUNGS.
The windpipe, a, gives passage to the air; it ramifies into exceedingly
minute branches, e e e, which terminate in little cells, the masses of
which, in three distinct lobes, are shown at c c c; this is only on the
right side of the body; on the left side there are but two lobes, the space
required for the third being filled by the heart. By means of the muscles
surrounding the chest, the lungs are alternately expanded and contracted.
It has been found that we require one hundred and forty gallons per hour
of pure air for respiration. It is an error that the carbonic acid given out
from  the lungs poisons the atmosphere in crowded assemblies. Such
air has been analyzed, and found to contain as much oxygen as that in a
forest; the ill effects are produced from pent-up human exhalations.]
three openings, one for the artery, one for a vein, and
one for an absorbent.  When an atom  of blood arrives
in one of them, the absorbent takes from it what is required, and works it up to suit its own purposes; what is
eft is immediately sucked up by the vein and earned off
5*




54                A'ARTERIAL SYSTEM.
to be again mixed with the elaborated fool, and passed
through the lungs.
ARTERIAL SYSTEM.
You will remember ny mentioning, when speaking o
the development of the embryo, the fact of deputations
of the life power being stationed in different places to
form their own instruments of action; these instruments
are called glands and their office is to secrete from the




GLANDS.                    55
blood the different fluids required in the system;.hey
are merely a greater or less number of bundles of.ttle
bladders, acting in the mode I have just mentioned, and
endowed with specific properties to make certain sub.
stances. Thus the liver secretes bile; the lachrymal
gland, tears; and the salivary gland, spittle; and the
inside coat of the stomach, the gastric juice. Here is a
cut showing the mode in which the blood-vessels ramify,
GLAND.
I wish you to carefully examine these cuts and the ac
companying descriptions, as too much minuteness in
describing the anatomy of the organs, while explaining
the functions, would have made the subject very difficult
of comprehension.
LADY. I think I understand the nutritive functions
now, and I am glad to think that nothing but the nervous
system  remains between us and the sleepers in the
Egyptian temples, to whom I am impatient to return;
but I should like to know, if anything injurious should
enter in the channels of the circulation, how the blood
would get rid of it.




56                     NERVES.
DOCTOn. By means Jf the skin, kidneys, and lungs
which are all excreting glands, or organs, that throw
off offending matters.  But, to pursue our subject, we
i
NERVOUS SYSTEM.
must examine the nervous system. This cut of it will
give you an idea of the ramifications of the nerves over
the surface of the system.  The nerves, like every other




CEREBRO-SPINAL  AXIS.                       57
part of our system  when forming, begin  at,ne circuni
ference, and grow  toward the centre, as shown here:.!
t:
CE-rSiRO-SPINAL AXIS.
i View of the base of the brain, front portion of the spinal marrow, and
several attached nerves: a, cerebrum (large brain); b, cerebellum (little
b._. which is lower and posterior than the other); e, spinal marrow; y
medulla oblongata, the so-called bulging spinal marrow which swells out
as it enters the brain; 1, the nerves of smell; 2, nerves of sight; 3, 4, 5
6, nerves going to different parts of the head, of no particular interest in
this place; 7 is related to the nerves of hearing; 8, 9, nerves going to the
tongue and gullst, etc.]




58             MOTION AND SENSATION.
Those of the lower extremities, k k, unite in distinct
bundles before entering the spine; proceeding upward,
we find nerve after nerve running into the back-bone,
through holes bored for their reception, as n, c, 1, g, z,
show the nerves as they come from the superior extremities, or arms; m, those of the neck, etc.  The spinal
canal is already filled when the nerves enter it by two
kinds of nervous matter, the white and the grey; the
latter is supposed to be the origin of sensation and motion, as we invariably find, by tracing the nerves to
their terminations, that they end in it; and we know the
nerves are nothing more than communicating media.
LADY. By your course of reason, I would conclude
that cutting the nerve of a part, before it entered
the grey matter, would destroy all sensibility in that
part.
DOCTOR. And motion as well.  All distinct masses
of the grey matter in the body are termed ganglia 
the spinal cord, from its lowest part till some distance
upward in the neck, is composed of two ganglia, sensation and motion.  With regard to cutting the nerves,
that has been done so often, and so invariably with the
same result, that it has become an established point in
science, of no sensation of any kind existing, except as
connected with a superior essence. Sensation in the
lower animal seems even on a par with their intelligence.  The gadfly, Dr. Good remarks, when it fastens
on the hand, can be cut to pieces without its experiencing
any apparent pain; and the idea of Shakespeare has
been long ago exploded-that
— " the poor worm thou tread'st on,
In corporeal suffering, feels a pang as great
As when a giant dies,




I'l NAL CORSl. 5ca.
The nerve of sensation, and that of notion, are bound
in the same sheath, till within a. short distance of the
spinal cord; they then separate, and each enters its
own ganglion.  This cut shows a front section of the
spinal cord and nerves:SPINAL CORD AND NERVES.
A represents the spinal cord; B, the united nerves 
C, the branch for motion, travelling alone; D, that of
sensation, which always thickens into a knot in its
progress before entering its ganglion.
At the upper part of the spinal marrow, we find a
series of ganglia in pairs, one set behind the other, in
regular order, and always found in the same relations to
their parts; these are the ganglia of the special senses.
So much has observation been directed to these points,
and so true and unvarying is nature, that, by examining
the size of the ganglia of the animal, we can tell the
degree of perfection the several senses have attained.
In the eagle, we find the optic ganglion large; in the
hound, the olfactory; in the rabbit, the auditory; and in
all instances, the same re6u t iolds.




60         SfSID)E VIEW  OF THE BtkAitN.
The nerves supplying the teeth come from the thira
branch of the five pair marked in the side view 5'
4 —7
88
"   9
SIDE VIEW OF TT'E BRAIN.
LThe numerals correspond to those in the cut of the cerebro-spinal
axis. The tree-like and branchy appearance of the cerebellum, or lesser
brain, is well shown.]
Many of the lower animals have only two ganglia,
sensation and motion; as we ascend the scale, and find
animals possessed of special senses, so do we find the
corresponding ganglia present; still ascending, we find.a new pair of ganglia, which I will denominate those of
INSTINCTIVE  INTELLIGENCE; for, in proportion  as.the
animal exhibits marls of intelligence, do these ganglia
increase in size, and the enlargement gives shape to the
skull. So small-is this in some animals, that they have
a perfectly. flat skull on a line with the spine. As we
still ascend the scale, it continually enlarges, and the




TRA'SMIGRATION.                 61
skull protrudes above the spinal column, as may be seen
in the dog and horse,
In man, the ganglia of instinctive intelligence-or,
according to Coleridge, of understanding-is out of all
proportion, as regards size, to the others; it covers
them all, its bulging in front forming the forehead.
LADY. One might find some excuse, in what you are
saying, for the eastern ideas of transmigration; a constant and perfect ascent from the very lowest germ of
ife to man would give rise to some ideas of its being
one identical spirit-an immortal being undergoing its
education for eternity, and, in the highest and last stage
of material maturity, preparing for its future spiritual
existence.
DOCTOR. You will be much surprised to find that the
brain of the child before birth is not the miniature brain
of the man; but, on the contrary, rises, as you have just
guessed, from the lowest to the highest, passing through
the grades of animated existence till it arrives at its
present state in man, and even then continues growing,
if cullivated, as many well-attested cases have fully
demonstrated.  The head of Napoleon, after he became
emperor, was much larger than it was some years previous; a fact shown by two busts of him, now at Paris,
taken at different periods.
A Scotch gentleman once informed me that the eldest
son among the aristocracy of Great Britain is titled
from birth, and, at the death of his father, receives the
honors of the deceased without any delay; but that
with the heir to the throne it was entirely different-he
must be made ae knight, a baron, an earl, etc.; gradual
and successive steps giving himl rank-the laws, unless
these preirminaries are observed, -eclaring him without
6




62                TRANSM[GRAT. ON
any. I have never made inquiry to know whether this
matter was so or not, but, at any rate, it illustrates
the stages of the lords of creation, as they style tnemselves.
LADY. You have destroyed transmigration, as there
could be no occasion of retracing the steps if on.;e gone
over.




CONVERSATION IV.
DOUBLE LIFE OF MAN.
Docs,     You will remember the care of the life
power, when first excited, to complete all the arrangements required in nutrition. These arrangements are
called by anatomists the organs of vegetable or organic
life: such are the stomach, liver, heart, arteries, veins,
kidneys, etc. Another set is required for the soul: the
organs composing it are called the organs of animal
life: such are the brain and voluntary muscles.
LADY. To recall your former comparison, every thing
that relates to keeping the house in good order, and feeding its inmates, would belong to the vegetable organs,
while the animal are devoted to obeying the commands
of the soul.
DOCTOR. You comprehend my meaning.  The apparatus in animals that pertains to nutrition, though indirectly influenced by the brain, is a system within itself,
having its own set of nerves and ganglia. Its ganglia
differ from those of animal life, in being of a reddish
grey color, and lying among the soft parts; they are
distributed from the orbit of the eye to the lower part
of the back bone, and have a grand centre or brain,
called the semi-lunar ganglion, which lies behind the
stomach.
So sparsely are the nerves of sensation given to the
organs of vegetable life, that, in surgical operations
there is little or no pain felt after the skin is cut. Har




64              SEPARATION OF LIVES.
vey, tne 2emonstrator of the circulation of the blood
was acquainted with a young nobleman who, from dis.
ease, had the heart so exposed that it could even be
landled while beating: he found, to his astonishment,
that unless his fingers came in contact with the outer
skin, the young man was altogether unconscious of the
heart being touched.
The cut on page 65 shows the ganglionic system of
organic life. A A A A is the semi-lunar ganglion, or
brain of the system; the letters and numerals name the
different ganglia from the organs they superintend.
need not mention all these, my object being only to give
a general idea of the two lives, vegetable (organic)
and animal, that belong to our system.
LADY. Has a distinct separation ever taken place between the two sets of organs, so that one acted while
the other was quiescent?
DOCTOR. Yes; and quite enough to prove that the
body and the mind can exist independently of each
other. In concussion of the brain, sensation, thought,
and locomotion, the functions of animal life, are entirely
passive, while the organic continue with the usual activity and regularity. Sleep, which I will refer to again
in a short time, affords a less striking instance.
Dr. Good remarks that in cases of suspended animation, by hanging, drowning, or catalepsy the vital prin4
ciple continues attached to the body after all the vital
functions cease to act, often for half an hour, and sometimes for hours. In the year 1769, Mr. John Hunter
being then forty-one years of age, of a sound constitution, and subject to no disease except a casual fit of the
gout, was suddenly attacked with a pain in the stomach,
which was shortly succeeded by a total suspension of




GANGLIONIC SYSTEM. 
G&/GJAO'NIO E3YSTEM OF VEGETABLE LIF~m.
zj
3-.
GAGA'I  YTMO   EEAL   IR




66               VOLUNTARY TRANCE.
the action of the heart and lungs.  By the power of the
will, or rather by violent striving, he occasionally in
flated the lungs, but over the heart he had no control
whatever; nor, though he Was attended by four of the
chief physicians of London fiom the first, could the as.
tion of either be restored by medicine. In about threequarters of an hour, however, the vital actions began to
return of their own accord, and in two hours he was
perfectly recovered. Sir Everard Home observed that
in the attack there was a suspension of the most material involuntary actions; even involuntary breathing
was stopped, while sensation, with its consequences, as
thinking and acting, with the will, were perfect, and all
the voluntary actions were as strong as ever.
Dendy mentions cases in which this power of disconnection was voluntary. Colonel Townsend's case was
one of undoubted authority. That officer was able to
suspend the action of both his heart and lungs, after
which he became motionless, icy cold, and rigid, a glassy
film overspreading his eyes. As there was no breathing,
the glass held over his mouth showed no apparent moisture. Though all consciousness would pass away, yet
the colonel could re-animate himself when he chose.
Dr. Cleghorn relates the case of a man who could stop
the pulse at his wrist, and reduce himself to the condition of fainting by his will.
Though it is only in rare cases that the will has any
power over the nutritive organism, yet the emotions
always exercise a very considerable influence. Every
one has experienced the manner in which ill news spoils
the appetite. Some cases of the effects of imagination,
in producing fear, and thus exciting disease, we have
already reviewed, but a few more will not be out of




FATAL EFFECTS OF JOY.             67
place here. Platerus tells us of scme girls p:aying near
a gibbet, when one of them threw stones at a crin inai
suspended on it.  Being violently struck, the body
swung, and the girl, believing it was alive, and was descending from the gibbet, fell into violent convulsions
and died.
Wescloff was detained as a hostage by the Kalmucs,
and was carried along with them  in the memorable
flight to China. His widowed mother had mourned him
as dead, and on his sudden return, the excess of joy was
fatal instantaneously.  In the year 1544, the Jewish
pirate, Sinamus Taffurus, was lying in a port of the Red
Sea called Orsenoe, and was preparing for war, being
then at variance with the Portuguese. While he was
there, he received the unexpected intelligence that his
son (who, in the seige of Tunis, had been made prisoner
by Barbarossa, and by him doomed to slavery,) was
suddenly ransomed and coming to his aid with seven
ships well armed. He was immediately struck as if
with apoplexy, and expired on the spot. The same
effect was produced upon the door-keeper of Congress
during the revolution, who, on hearing the news of a victory won by his countrymen, fell back and expired in
ecstacy.
LADY. I suppose it is in the ganglion of the understanding that phrenologists map the seats of the various
properties of the mind.
DOCTOR. It is: they say that if there are separate
ganglia for the special senses, which are, after all, but
mere modifications of general sensibility, why should
not the same plan hold good in locating the different
properties of the mind, which may be called the special
senses of the understanding; and the anatomical analo.




68                   TIlE BRAIN.
gies favor this view. It had been said, be ore phrenol.
ogy was known, that the faculty by which the astrono.
mer calculated eclipses was as distinct in his mind, and
preserved its individuality as much, as the eye in his
body.
LADY. It would also account for the influence of
habit, our constant pursuit of one object fostering the
germ  of an organ to maturity.  What is the brain
made of?
DOCTOR. Its chemical constitution is principally al.
bumen. It is formed of an immense number of arteries,
veins, and nerves. Dr. Gall was the first to completely
unravel its complex web, which he was enables to do
after hardening its substance by long-continued boiling
in oil.
LADY. The ancients must have been aware, as well
as ourselves, that the height and prominence of the
forehead were the distinguishing traits of a high degree
of intelligence, when they made the foreheads of the
gods bulge out beyond an angle of ninety degrees.
DOCTOR. They were as close observers as ourselves,
and I am  inclined to think knew  almost as much.
Nearly in the centre of the brain is a substance, commonly about the size of a pea, called the pineal body,
which Galen considered to be the seat of the soul: an
idea that has been much ridiculed.  But an attentive
study of the brain has convinced me of the truth of
Galen's supposition; for it has communication, by means
of nerves, with the most important ganglia.  Ard I
think it reasonable to suppose the soul occupying a
superior and independent position, overlooking and governing the inferior powers; and precisely such a posi.
tion would be obtained )y a residence in the pinea




BEAT OF THE SOUL.                69
body; this opinion is confirmed by the fact, that in idiots
its means of communication are mostly cut off and
injured.
LADY.   Can disease of the body injure the soul?
DOCTOR. Ohly by acting on its means of communica
tion with the external world. We have considered the
soul to resemble a man shut up in a dark and central
chamber of his house; he has servants stationed at the
windows who tell him  what they see; an apparatus.
also superintended by servants, is fixed on each side of
his house, to collect sounds, which are then reported;
and the other senses communicate in the same manner.
Cut off from all personal observation, he can only judge
of the outward world from his messengers; when these
are true to their office, and the full growth of the brain
is attained, man is in complete possession of all his faculties; if he does not become eminent then, he never
will. For many years his messengers have been imparting news, and the time has come when they should
work up and mentally digest all this material. Knowledge digested becomes wisdom. For this purpose, the
avenues gradually close; the servants become old and
inactive; and at last —" sans hearing, sight, and taste"his communications with the external world are at
an end; he then moves around-a walking vegetable.
Where nature's laws are allowed free operation, we
never find abrupt transitions; all rises by a gradually
ascending scale; and as man bids adieu to this world,
another begins opening to his view, and the soul becomes gradually accustomed to its future mode of
existence.
LADY. While on this subject, I would like to know it
we have two brains?




Pn0              THECCRY OF INSANITY.
)OCTOR. Yes.  Dr. Wigans has lately wr'tten a very
interesting book on the subject: he argues that as we
nave duplicates of all the organs of animal life-such
as the eyes, ears, etc.-and as each of these produces a
distinct and separate impression on the orain, and were
so made the better to render us able to judge of, and
correct, erroneous impressions, by comparing the effect
of each, so the duality of the brain was intended for the
same purpose.
LADY. I can easily conceive why the senses shoukl
be double, as I have seen persons who were deaf in one
ear, and from that cause could not tell the direction
from whence the sounds they heard proceeded.  The
experiment, cited by Abercrombie, of placing a cent on
the edge of a table, and standing at the extreme distance
"rom the table to be enabled to knock it off with ease.
with both eyes open, by means of the finger when the
arm is stretched out-and the certain failure attending
the effort when one eye is closed-would prove the ne-,essitv of two optical organs.
DOCTOR. Dr. Wigans argues, in relation to the brain,
in a similar manner, and thus accounts very ingeniously
for all stages of insanity. He says, that as there are
two brains, and each receives from its nerves a distinct
impression, both, provided they are healthy, will convey
a correct and single report to the soul; but if diseased,
a very different and conflicting account reaches it, andt
acting first on one, and then on the other, produces
insanity, more or less complete in accordance with
the amount of disease.  He makes a madman, in this
sense, most truly, a "man beside himself"-who holds
series of conversations with himself, which, if the sep.
arate trains we:e followed out, we should find consistent




SLEEP.                     71
in themselves.  Let us allow the seat of the soul to be
the pineal body, and the theory of Ir. Wigans will be
verified.
LADY. Insanity, then, might be considered, in this
light, as a squinting of the brains!
DOCTOR. I am glad to perceive you understand the
llustrations.  We are now very near to our sick devoyes in the Egyptian temples.  But I must first make a
few remarks on the functions of the brain. The office
of this organ is to secrete the nervous fuid, by means of
which the mind holds communication with, and directs,
all the parts to which it is connected by nerves. Though
the organs of vegetable life have a ganglionic and nervous system of their own, still many fibres from the
Drain and spinal marrow are sent to them, and, as in
he case of the emotions, a powerful though indirect
nfluence is exerted upon them.  So long as we have
a supply of the nervous fluid, sensation, thought, and
locomotion (the functions of animal life), are in vigorous
exercise; but the moment the supply becomes deficient
or ceases, a partial or total failure of these powers,
depending on the quantity, is the direct result, and
slumber succeeds, to allow more of the necessary article to be secreted.  Whatever acts on the irritability
of the brain, so as to change or alter the nervous secretion, acts in a corresponding manner on all the
parts to which the changed fluid is carried by the
nerves.
The optic and auditory nerves are the principal servants that wait on the mind in conveying news. The
eye and ear resemble each other in being instruments
for the purpose of condensing vibrations, to make them
sufliciently intense to produce impressions on their sep.




72         SPECIAL SENSES DISPENSED WITH.
arate nerves, so that messages can be carriea to the
inner chamber.
LADY. Is light produced by vibrations, as well as
sound?  I have always considered it to be composed
of particles of matter.
DoCTOR. It is now proved to be merely the vibrations of an ether existing throughout all space, and
capable of being excited by luminous bodies.
LADY. If the optic nerve were uncovered, then we
might do without the eye, as the vibrations of light
would alone suffice to produce distinct images.
DocToR. We need not have recourse to so violent a
mode of reaching the special senses, which even then
would require something more to insure success.  The
material in ordinary life has the preponderance; but we
are so formed that the spiritual in certain cases may obtain the balance of power; in proportion as the latter
gains the ascendency do the servants become more
active and easily impressible, till at length a point is
reached where the apparatus for condensation can be entirely dispensed with.  In this state, the vibrations of
light that strike on the bony covering of the head will
find the nervous matter behind it sensitive enough to
convey impressions to the sensorium.  This state is commonly termed that of clairvoyance.
LADY. Can we, in any case, ever hear sounds without
the ear?
DOCTOR. Easily; and it does not require any preparation to produce that effect. Hold your watch in such
a manner inside the mouth that nothing is touched, and
no sound will be heard; but by closing the teeth on it a
loud ticking can be instantly perceived.  The sound
travels through the bony structure to the auiitory nerves




NERVOUS FLUID.                 73
LADY. You certainly present proof sufficient; it is as
fou say. This reminds me of a story I lead some years
ago about a merchant in Holland, who had not heard a
sound for years, till once, while smoking, the end of his
pipe accidentally touched a harpsichord, on which his
daughter was playing; to his astonishment, he was conscious of the music even to the lowest tones, and he
afterwards found that he could converse with any of his
family through the medium of a stick supported by the
teeth of each.
DOCTOR. As nature does nothing abruptly, the ascension of the spiritual over the material is gradual. The
influence that produces it in fascination is the NERVOUS
FLUID or vapor thrown off from the person operating.
This vapor acts upon the irritability of the patient; by
sympathy it is transmitted to the brain; the secretion of
that organ is changed; and the altered nervous fluid it is
making when sent to the various parts over which it has
influence by the nerves, produces a series of results
called fascinating phenomena.
LADY. Does not the loss of this fluid injure the fascinator?
DOCTOR. In some cases it does, but there are many
so gifted as to impart it without danger.  A sensation
of weakness ensues, which soon vanishes by a new supply of fluid from the continued secretion of the brain.
It is the patient that runs the greatest risk, for many persons take the office upon themselves without any ability
to discharge its duties properly, and much trouble often
ensues in consequence. So well is this understood, that
in Prussia it is a criminal offence for any but physicians
to operate. Cases have occurred, under my notice, in
which the chest has been paralyzed; in others, incessant
7




74                  FIRST STAGE.
vomiting produced, and convulsions ha e been very
common. Its true mode of action should be thoroughly
understood before it is practised, and then only by the
order and in the presence of the physician himself.
LADY. It is divided into stages, is it not?
DOCTOR. Yes, into six, each of which are again subdivided into six others, making thirty-six in all.
The first stage seems a mere quickening of the senses;
it is characterized by a sensation of coolness, and a feeling of more wakefulness than before. In your own case,
at this point, you felt, I remember, rather more uneasy
than before I commenced; but, in another instance, I
was told by the patient that it was impossible to operate
on him, so much was his mind filled with the idea of a
necessity of going to sleep in being fascinated. I had
doubted his susceptibility up to the moment he spoke,
but I was then convinced I was affecting hih r; and, in
fact, he was soon insensible. The quickening of the
senses is often shown without the agency of fascination,
as in fever, when the slightest noise will disturb a man,
whom, in health, the explosion of a cannon would not
move.
LADY. I have often felt so. Last week I had a severe
headache, and could not endure any motion whatever
around me, and, if I was touched by accident, was in
absolute pain.
])OCTOR. An extraordinary class of phenomena owes its
existence to a peculiar development of this susceptibility
I mean what is commonly called idiosyncracies, or peculiarities. I have heard Professor Revere speak of a
ladv who lived in a state of agony during the flowering
season (f plants; the pollen floating in the atmosphere
acted npon her irritability in such a manner as to pro



IDIOSYNCRASY.                  7r
duce serious disease, realizing in her own experience
Pope's idea of
Quick effluvia darting through the brain,
Die of a rose in aromatic pain;"
and, strange to say, his lines on more refined sensibility
and its consequences, have all been verified in this stage,
Some men cannot endure the presence, or even proxi
mity, of a cat; others abhor cheese. Stepping into a
friend's store one evening, while his clerk was absent, to
procure some ipecac, I was requested to weigh it out
myself, and replace the bottle on the shelf; should he do
it, he said, it would cause him  a week's illness.  And
this seems, too, an instinctive precaution, warning the
system against unseen evil, and to disregard which
would be dangerous. The friends of a young lady having tried in vain to induce her to eat cheese, enclosed a
very small quantity in some cake, which she swallowed
without suspicion; an alarming and long continued illness was the result.
The sense of chillness, felt in the first, stage increases, and the pulse begins to  rise rapidly; the
second stage continues but a short time, and finally
ushers in the third, which is denoted by a dreamy and
triumphant state of feeling.  If any pain exists it now
ceases, and the eyes close beyond the power of the will
to open.  The closure of the eyelids's, beyond doubt,
caused by fixing the eyes so steadily on an object as to
exhaust their nervous power.  Mr. Braid, of Manchester, England, has proved this fact; he considers that it
will account for all the phenomena of fascination.  His
writings, however, demonstrate exhaustion in a most
incontestible manner, but they most assuredly do nothing
else; it was labor lost, the facts being well known!ong




76           FOURTH AND FIFTH STAGES.
before, and never doubted. Your personal experience
only reaches this stage.
LADY. Is it possible to produce curative effects with
out reaching the third stage?
DOCTOR. The second and even first, when thus artificially induced, will often have a beneficial influence.
But it is a difficult matter to mark out and separate these
stages, closure of the eye not being sufficient evidence,
for it may not occur at all. I heard this morning of a
man who had three teeth drawn while in one of these
stages, and was shown the teeth. The fascinator, after
trying several times to close his eyes without success,
undertook to draw the teeth. Though at other times
exceedingly sensitive, the man firom whom  they were
drawn did not experience the slightest pain.
As the fourth stage is approached, rigidity of the muscles can be induced; the body and limbs may be fixed
in the most strange and painful attitudes without causing
any pain, and thus continue any length of time. Arrived at the fourth, sensation totally ceases; and a cataleptic state intervenes. Surgical operations can now be
performed without pain, or the knowledge of the patient.
The nervous system undergoes a remarkable change;
either the white matter is not capable of carrying, or the
grey of receiving, ordinary impressions.
The fourth is the highest state that man can induce
by artificial means; but some persons are so peculiarly
constituted as to continue ascending.  As they near
the fifth, clairvoyance becomes fully manifest.  Passing the fifth, the spiritual obtains the entire predominance, and the things of the invisible world are displayed
with more or less clearness, in proportion as they verge
dn the sixth which is death.




ANGEL OF DEATh.                 7.
LADY. Fascination seems to me to be a separation
between our animal and vegetable lives. As the ties
that bind the animal to earth are loosening, it gains
vigor and power; and qualities, the germ  of which we
have only been enabled faintly to discern below, expand to their full proportion, giving rich promise of
future capability.
DOCTOR. True: and at the sixth, the separation of
soul and body is completed, and the corruptible puts on
incorruption, and the mortal immortality.
LADY. Then perhaps the final separation of soul and
body is accomplished by an angel fascinating us, and
death's cold dart be, after all, a pass from a superior
being.  As I review the wonders I have just heard, it
appears to me exceeding strange that so minute a cause
as a pass in fascination should produce such astonishing
results.
DOCTOR. It is a very difficult matter to tell what small
causes are. A little yeast, mixed with a thousand gallons of malt infusion, will make the whole ferment.  A
grain of calomel will sometimes alter the irritability of
the whole system.  Why, then, should not the most
highly organized product in our bodies, acting, too, with
every advantage on the most sensitive powers of another, produce a strange effect?
But to return to our patients in the goat skins; you
will have no trouble now, I presume, in understanding
how it was that they had peculiar visions; for, if my
supposition of Satan first moving men to the discovery
of fascination be true, nothing can be more rational than
to suppose he also appeared, or some of his demons,
assuming the form of Esculapius, and prescribing the
proper remedies for diseases.  Though it must have
J*




gs78    ~     EMPEROR JULIAN.
caused him considerable chagrin to relieve coin, and in
any way promote human happiness, still it had the ad.
vantage of increasing the faith of his devotees, and the
number of his followers. That Satan exercised a direct
influence on the mind of the emperor Julian is evident,
by his deadly hatred of all that pertained to our Saviour,
and his mad attempt to refute his prediction in relation
to the Jewish temple.  Indeed, Julian himself tells us
that, when sick, he had often been cured by Esculapius
pointing out the proper remedies as he slept in that god's
temple.
It would be an easy matter to fill volumes with proofs
taken from the early history of the ancient nations;
proofs, too, which show, in the most convincing mannei
that fascination was universally known and practised by
the priests of the temples; and that it was principally
in this way they were enabled to retain their power and
influence over the people. Even Origen tells us that in
his day vast multitudes flocked to the temples of Esculapius for relief from infirmities; and distinctly intimates
that many remarkable cures were really performed. A
few instances from these early times are all we can consider at present.
Charles Radclyffe Hall gives to Apollonius Tyanneus
the palm as a mesmerizer.  He seems to have been a
man of prodigious fascinating power, and was not only
famous for curing diseases, and his powers of clairyoy.
ance, but also in foretelling events. While delivering a
public lecture at Ephesus, in the midst of a large assernbly, he saw the emperor Domitian being murdered at
Rome; and it was proved, to the sa2isfaction of all, that
while the murder was performing, he described every
circumstance attending it to the crowd, and announced




.HIPPOCRATES.                 79
Ihe very instant in which the tyrant was slain.  It i
recorded, that so great was his nervous influence, that
his mere presence, without uttering a single word, was
sufficient to quell popular tumults.
Pythagoras, also, ranks high, and not undeservedly.
After receiving his education in Egypt, he ever after
assumed the dress of a priest of Isis. It is related of
him that he could give relief from any pDain or disease;
his method consisted in passing the hands slowly over
the body, beginning with the head, retaining them  for
some time at a little distance from the place of disease.
In common with the philosophers of his day, he veiled
the real means of relief under the form of an incantation; for, while fascinating, he kept continuai;y uttering,nagical words.  His power over the lower animals
must also have been considerable; he is said to have
tamed a furious bear, prevented an ox from  eating
beans, and stopped an eagle in its flight.
Hippocrates, the father of medicine, was not himself
entirely free from the wish to keep this means of cure
secret.  He informs us that there are two distinct
parts in the practice of medicine-the common, such
as young herbs, and the secret; which latter must only
be divulged to particular persons, who are in favor
with superior powers.  He mentions, that when the
eyes are closed, there are times in which the soul can
discern diseases in the body; and also that the light we
derive fiom dreams is a gieat help in our progress to
wisdom




ZONVERSATION  V.
SPIRITUAL STATES.
LADY. 1 am glad to see you this r onr ing, Doctor
I wanted to ask you if cases ever occur red, in our day
of persons seeing the spiritual world   I remember
your remark of the celestial gates, in Mansoul, being
closed, but they were not taken away; why, then,
should they not be occasionally opened in the nineteenth
century, as well as the first?
DOCTOR. A little research will convince you that
such cases are anything but uncommon: that of William
Tennant, a Presbyterian clergyman, of Brunswick, New
Jersey, is well known, and of undoubted truth.
He tells us, that while conversing with his brother on
the state of his soul, and the fears he entertained for his
future welfare, he found himself, in an instant, in another
state of existence, under the direction of a superior
Being, who prdered him  to follow. He was immediately wafted along, he knew not how, till he beheld,
at a distance, an ineffable glory, the impression of
which he found it impossible to communicate to mortal
man.  "I immediately reflected on my happy change,
and( thought, Well, blessed be God! I am safe at last,
notwithstanding all my fears. I saw an innumerable
host of happy beings, surrounding the inexpressible
glory, in acts of adoration and joyous worship; but I
did not see any bodily shape or representation in the
glorious appearance.  I heard things unutterable.  I




TRANCE OF TENNANT.                81
heard their songs and hallelujahs of thanksgiving and
praise, with unspeakable rapture. I felt joy unutterable
and full of glory. I then applied to my conductor, and
requested leave to join the happy throng; on which he
tapped me on the shoulder, and said,'You must return
to earth.' This seemed like a sword through my heart.
In an instant, I recollect to have seen my brother disputing with the doctor.  The three days during which
1 had appeared lifeless, seemed to be of not more than
ten or twenty minutes. The idea of returning to this
world of sorrow and trouble gave me such a shock that
I fainted repeatedly.  Such was the effect on my mind
of what I had seen and heard, that if it be possible for
i human being to live entirely above the world and the
things of it, for some time afterward I was that person.
The ravishing sound of the songs and hallelujahs that I
heard, and the very words that were uttered, were not
out of my ears for at least three years.' All the kingdoms of the earth were, in my sight, as nothing and
vanity; and so great were my ideas of heavenly glory,
that nothing which did not, in some measure, relate to
it, could command my serious attention."
So numerous are the cases of this kind of experience,
that time would not be profitably occupied in considering them; but it will be well to dwell a moment on
another class, of opposite character, which is not less
frequent.
I have often seen men who, after a prolonged indulgence in every species of wickedness and blasphemy,
have suddenly experienced a change, which gave the
spiritual, in their system, the predominating influence.
At such times they become aware of the presence of.he devils, who }-v acting upon the corruptions of thei




82               DELIRIUM TREMENS.
hearts, have been successfully engaged In tempting
them to sin.
More heart-rending pictures than these, of agony ari
distress, are seldom or never witnessed. They have
many times described to me the shapes and gestures of
their tormentors, and the unholy thoughts they were
endeavoring to instil into their minds. While speaking
to me, they would often be seized with a frenzy of fear,
and would close the eyelids, and cover them with their
hands, in a vain attempt to shut out the horrible spectacle. An urgent desire to commit suicide in some
violent manner is generally felt, and many find it impossible to resist the temptation.  Multitudes, in this
way, are lost every year. I should remark, here, tha
delirium  tremens can be produced in many ways without the use of alcohol, as by tobacco and opium.
We are thus enabled to trace, in a measure, the deal
ings of heaven with our fallen race. The good man
worn down by disease and grief, as was Tennant, is not
allowed to despair; his heart is cheered, and he is encouraged to persevere by a view of the mansions prepared for him when his toils and troubles are ended
below.  The bad man is suddenly arrested in his career
of wickedness, by withdrawing the veil that covers
invisible things, and is thus shown his prompters in
vice, and the future companions he must assoc ate with
in eternity, whose torments he must share if he continues
in the way of destruction.  Happily, in some a change
is produced.  I know one to whom the warning sufficed,
and who, at the present time, is serving under the banuers of the Prince of Peace.
LADY. And this accounts exactly for the manner in
which Elisha's servant, t.at you mentioned some time




HEATHEN FASCINATORS.               83
since, had his eyes opened.  When Elisha prayed
"Lord, I pray thee, open his eyes," he must Lav e rmeani
the spiritual ones; for the others could discerr. the surrounding danger. I suppose the Saviour and iis aposties and prophets performed the miracles recorded in
Scripture by means of great ei.dowments of fascinating
power.
DOCTOR. On the contrary, there is so b:oad a line
of distinction drawn between the power cf performing
miracles, and that of fascinating, that it seeons impious
to confound the two.
The difference between the heathen fascinators and
the priests of Jehovah was well shown when they finally
failed to compete with Moses in showi.g wonders, and
were forced at the last to exclaim, "This; the finger
of God."
Passing Balaam and the prophets cf Bai, who comr
peted with Elijah, let us examine the wilch of Endor.
Artificially inducing clairvoyance, and thus holding intercourse with familiar spirits, was punalishalle by death
in Israel.
LADY. I would ask if you think the -vom-L. fascinatea
Saul?
DOCTOR. By no means; the whole scene in the 19th
chapter of Samuel has its counterpart in many a similar
transaction of the present day. A friend of mine once
wishing to obtain intelligence of a son who had been
dead about three years, went to the house of a clairvoyant.  At his request I was present. The husband of
the clairvoyant put her to sleep, and, in a lile time sne
announced the fact of her spiritual state, and soon afterwards ibund the gentleman's son. Messages were given
and received by both parent and chile, through the me



84               WITCH OF ENDOR.
dium of the clairvoyant, and my friend departed satisfied: although I still felt incredulous.
When Saul entered the woman of Endor's house, the
latter was evidently unaware cF his character; and it was
only upon a strong pledge she consented to employ her
art. The moment she, entered the clairvoyant state,
however, she was at once aware of the rank of her
guest, and exceedingly frightened at the consequences.
Our translation reads as if she was scared at Samuel, but
this was evidently not the case-witness the cry, " Why
hast thou deceived me? for thou art Saul."  When,
after he had succeeded in tranquilizing her personal
fears, she gave the description of her spiritual visitant,
Saul perceived that it was Samuel, and bowed himself
to the ground. The conversation occurred through the
woman, who, on being awakened when it was finished,
had so little recollection of all the occurrences as to be
totally unaware of his rank, and persuade him to eat in
her house and recover his exhausted strength.
The manner in which the magicians were enabled
o foretell events is graphically shown in the 22nd
chapter of the first book of Kings: " I saw the Lord
sitting on his throne, and all the host of heaven standing
by him on his right hand and on his left. And the Lord
said, Who shall persuade Ahab, that he may go up and
full at Ramoth-Gilead? And one said in this manner,
and another said in that manner. And there came forth
a spirit and stood before the Lord, and said, I will persuade him. And the Lord said unto him, Wherewith?
And he said, I will go forth, and I will be a lying spirit
in the mouth of all his prophets. And he said, Thou
shalt persuade him, and prevail also: go forth and
do Qo."




NAAMAN AND ELISIHA. 
Of course, then, when the king, rejecting the adv ce of
Jehovah's minister, sought counsel of his own seers,
they gave him the revelations of the false familiar.
And it was not the only time evil befell man, when, " as
the sons of God came to present themselves before the
LoRD, Satan came also amongst them."
When Naaman came to Elisha to be healed from his
leprosy, it was evidently with the expectation of visiting
a more powerful fascinator than any in his own country.
Elisha, to render him aware of his error, would not let
him enter the house, but as soon as the horses and chariot stopped at his door, sent out a messenger, saying:
" Go and wash in Jordan seven times, and thy flesh
shall come again to thee, and thou shalt be clean." But
Naaman was wroth, and went away and said: "' Behold,
I thought, he will surely come out to me, and stand and
call on the name of the Lord his God, and strike his
hand over the place, (in the context it reads, move his
hand up and down over the place), and recover the
leper."
LADY. I have always been struck with the narrative
myself, but your view explains the whole matter to my
eltire  satisfaction, and I do not wonder at the effect it
produced on Naaman's mind, to cause him to renounce
his idolatry, when he returned cured out of the river,
after his servants persuaded him to obey the prophet's
injunction.
DocTro. These instances will show how totally out ot
the power of all physiological explanations were the miracles.  i have before mentioned the accusation brought
against our Saviour of having gained his wonderful
powers by stealing magic secrets from  the Egyptian
temples   Had those who preferred the charge been as




86              CASTING OUT DEVILS,
open to conviction as the idolator Naaman, but little
observation would have convinced them of its ground.
lessness.
LADY. Did the magicians ever pretend to cast out
devils?
DOCTOR. Our Saviour presumes that power in common use amongst them when he says, (Matt. xii., 27,)
in answer to their remark of his casting out devils by
the power of Beelzebub: "And if I by Beelzebub cast
ou:- devils, by whom do your children cast them out?"
Josephus accounts for this power in speaking of Solomon, whose sagacity and wisdom he pronounces to exceed those of the ancients; "insomuch that he was in
no way inferior to the Egyptians, who are said to have
been beyond all men in understanding; nay, indeed it
was very evident that their sagacity was very much
inferior to that of the king's."  "God also enabled him
to learn that skill which expels demons, which is a useful science to men.  He composed such incantations,
also, by which distempers are alleviated; and left be.
hind him the manner of using exorcisms, by which they
drive away demons, so that they never return; and
this method of cure is of great force until this day.
For I have seen a certain man of my own country,
whose name was Eleazar, releasing the people that were
demoniacal in the presence of Vespasian, and his sons,
and his captains, and the multitude of his soldiers; and
the manner of the cure was this: he put a ring, that had
a root of one of those sorts mentioned by Solomon, to
the nostrils of the demoniac, after which he drew out
the demon through his nostrils; and when the man fell
down, he adjured him to return unto him no more, making still mention of Solomon, and reciting the ir canta



FASCINATION LAWFUL.               8"
tions which he composed   And when Eleazar would
demonstrate to the spectators that he had such a power,
lie set a little way off a cup or basin full of water, and
commanded the demon as he went out of the man to
overturn it; and thereby let the spectators know that
he had left the man.  And, when this was done, the skill
and wisdom of Solomon were shown very clearly."
LADY. After all, the practice of divination was forbidden by the Jewish law, and the penalty was death. If
it deserved so severe a punishment in those days, how
can it be harmless in our own?
DOCTOR. In former times, the higher powers of fascination were universally abused, and made to subserve
idolatry. Those who practised it, sedulously kept the
people in perfect ignorance as to its real nature. Even
when fascinating, the priests continually chanted magic
verses, to which all the curative powers were ascribed.
Still it appears to have been lawful to use it for benevolent purposes, as the physicians did not scruple to employ its influence for king David.
LADY. Casting out devils, from an account given in
Acts xix, 13, was not always attended with safety:
"Then certain of the vagabond Jews, exorcists, took
upon themselves to call over them which had evil spirits the name of the Lord Jesus, saying, We adjure you
by Jesus, whom Paul preacheth. And there were seven
sons of one Sceva, a Jew, and chief of the priests, which
did so; and the evil spirit answered and said, Jesus I
know, and Paul I know, but who are ye?  And the man
in whom the evil spirit was, leaped on them and overcame' them, and prevailed against them. so that they
fled out of that house naked and wounded."
DOCTOR. It was not only among the ancients thai




68~8         ROBERT COCHRAN.
false religions, based on assumptions and supporttd by
the pretended miracles of fascination, existed; there is
quite as much of this kind of imposture prevalent in
modern times.
Some years ago, in the town of Saco, in Maine, lived
Robert Cochran, a man who, by pretending to a more
than ordinary share of inspiration-working wonders,
curing diseases by the laying on of hands, and other
apparent miracles-created a schism in the church to
which he belonged, drawing after him  a ciowd of
zealous followers. Upon his death, as his mantle did
not descend to another, the society declined in numbers,
until, finally, nothing more was heard of the schismatics
for a long period.  Some time afterward, when the sect
had nearly been forgotten, a man-who, it was known,
had many years before embraced Cochran's tenets, and
had, since then, lived a life of perfect seclusion-entered
the town on business. Passing by a lawyer's office, his
attention was attracted by a gentleman in it fascinating
the lawyer's son. He stood, transfixed with astonishment, before the door, until the process was completed
and the boy asleep; when he exclaimed aloud, "My
God! that is the way in which Robert Cochran used to
give the Holy Ghost."
The Mormons rest their claims of being the true
church on the same basis: "Is any sick among you, let
him send for the elders of the church, and let them pray
over him, anointing heina with oil in the name of the
Lord, and the prayev  of faith shall save the sick man."
It is a notorious fact that the exhibition of this proof, as
they wish it to be supposed, of apostolic power, has been
the means of converting the majority of that deluded
sec. Some three years since, I attended a Mormon




MORMONISM.                   89
lady, who had diseast, of the heart, with marked success. One day, while operating, an elder of the faith,
who stood by, remarked that I possessed the gift of laying on of hands. I paid very little attention to his
remark at the time; but some weeks afterward, while
visiting a friend one evening, I heard a lady explaining
the tenets of Mormonism, and triumphantly quoting her
own case as an illustration of the fact of their possessing apostolic power, more especially the gift of healing
by laying on of hands; she had frequent attacks of
tic doloreux, and nothing except that rite of the Mormon
church had ever sufficed, for one moment, to alleviate
the pain.
She was speaking with considerable animation, and
had prod=ued a powerful impression on the minds of
those present, but was suddenly arrested, in the midst
of her interesting and enthusiastic discourse, by an
attack of that horrid disease. Finding that she was
suffering the most exquisite agony, I rose rather hesitatingly-for I dislike scenes-and offered to relieve
her, giving her the assurance that one of the Mormon
elders had pronounced me in possession of the gift. The
drowning will catch at a straw; and my proposition
was assented to, but evidently without any hope of
success on the part of the sufferer. In less than a
minute-for her system had been prepared by repeated
fascinations-she was powerfully under my influence,
and the relief was immeasurably greater than it had
ever been before. After awaking the lady, I explained
the whole matter to those present; and it is very probable that but few of my hearers ever undertook a pilgrimage to the holy city of Nauvoo.
In classifying the fanatical sects, the Swedenborgiana




gSO                 SWEDENBORG.
follow  ithe Mormons   Their name is derived frow
Emmanuel Swedenborg, a Swedish philosopher who
became clairvoyant in the fifty-third year of his age, in
1743. The ascendancy of the spiritual over the material occurred naturally in him, probably owing to some
defect in the constitution; for intense study and a
sedentary life paved the way for this change. Sweden.
borg rejected faith-that is, would not believe anything which could not be demonstrated to the under
standing-the  faculty that judges according to the
senses-and of course would not receive any religion,
the doctrines of which he could not perfectly comprehend.
He ardently desired a knowledge of the soul, and the
method he took to procure this knowledge gives a good
illustration of his character.  He tried to obtain his
wish by confining his experiments to the dead body.
To give his own words: "The body being her (the
soul's) resemblance, image, and type, for this purpose I
am resolved to study her whole anatomy, from top to
toe."  Had he but studied the laws of life in their living
operation, he would have escaped the errors he afterward blundered into.
LADY. Such a mode of operation seems to me about
as rational as going into a printer's office when he is
out, and trying to form an idea of his countenance from
an examination of the type lying around; or inspecting
a worn-out and cast-off steam-engine, with an idea to
investigate the properties of steam: life ir the one case.
and vapor in the other, (the only things that can give
the required infornlation,) being equally absent.
DOCTOR. Swedenborg, not finding his own observa.
Lions very satisfactory, calls t'? his aid the observations




MATERIALISM.                    91
of others, and professes, on this subject, to have ob.
tained the greater part of his knowledge from  books,
and those written by men who, like himself; from  the
shape of fibre and spiracle, endeavored to diagnose the
functions and mode of operation of each organ.  Itis
philosophical works are filled with such nonsense as
this, and, as he proceeds, there is a gradual and legitimate degeneration into downright materialism  of a
modified character; he proclaimed all life to consist in
an influx from Deity, and that a plant, a dog, and a man,
differ, in reality, or.ly in the shape of their receptacles.
Y.ou will easily understand how he gained this idea, by
considering the brains of different animals, and considering that of man as only a little more powerful and
complicated than his inferiors in the animated scale.
The study of living nature would have taught him the
difference between the faculty, judging by sense, and
that in which reason, fiee-will, and self-consciousness
existed.  Knowledge, on such a subject, gained from
the dead body, is only such
-" as putrefaction breeds
In fly-blown flesh, whereon the maggot feeds,
Shines in the dark; but, ushered into day,
The stench remains-the lustre dies away."
Swedenborg was a moralist.  His pride dispensed
with a crucified Saviour, and consequently a Trinity.
"The ti uth is, that the division of God, or of the Divine
essence, into three persons, each of which by himself, or
singly, is Glod, leads to the denial of God."  "It is as if
there should be Unity and Trinity painted as a man
with three heads upon one body, or with three bodies
under one head, which is the form of a monster.  If
any one should enter heaven with such an idea, ha wotul




92                 LAST JUDGMENT
certainly be cast out headlong, although he should saJ
that the head or heads signifled essence, and the body or
bodies distinct properties."
LADY. Do you not think that a person who is really
nonest in an erroneous opinion will be saved?
DoCToR. I do not believe that erroneous opinions of
the doctrines of salvation can be honestly entertained.
Our Saviour tells us: "He that doeth the will of my
Father shall know him that sent me." He has promised
his Spirit to guide us into all truth. Consequently, if
we really want instruction, by the perusal of the Scriptures, and prayer, with an active, watchful life, we can
obtain all we wish from Him who giveth wisdom to all
men liberally, and upbraideth not.
Following the example of many others who preceded
him, Swedenborg allegorized the Scriptures, with the
exception of the Epistles, which, sturdily resisting all
such attempts, he pronounced wanting in an internal
sense.  He fortifies the dogmas of his system by direct
consultation with, and advice from, the celestial powers.
Finally, buoyed up beyond measure, he declared that
the second coming of Christ was manifested in his person, and that his illumination (clairvoyance) ushered in
the last judgment, which took place, not on earth, but
in the spiritual world.  Among other interesting matters, we are informed, by him, that in the interior of
Africa exists a race of spiritual believers (the term he
applied to his disciples): that marriages take place in
heaven as well as upon earth, our Saviour's words on
that subject being figurative; that God resembles a man
in shape, his body forming the universe, each atom be.:ng a solar system; that a man consists of five spirits
one contained within the other. like a nest of anoth}e.




Q EEN OF SWEDEN.                 93
cary's pill-boxes; man is not naturally aware of his,
only he (Swedenborg) being permitted to see and
reveal the mystery; that there is a purgatory of thirty
years; that in heaven there are separate places for different nations; that, in heaven, God is seen by the
angels, with the right eye as a sun, with the left eye as
a moon; that there are lower animals in the spiritual
world; sickness exists there, etc., etc.
Several well-attested cases of Swedenborg's clairvoyant powers are recorded. Once, while dining with a
friend, at a place many miles distant from his own town,
he suddenly rose and walked out in the open air, seemingly in great agitation.  At length he entered the house,
apparently composed, and informed the company present
that there was a great conflagration near his own residence, and that he had been fearful for its safety; but it
had just been quenched within one door of his house.
The next post brought a full and perfect confirmation of
all he had said.
At another time, when the queen of Sweden was jesting with Swedenborg on account of his pretensions to
intercourse with the spiritual world, he offered to con.
vince her of the fact by any proof she could propose
She told him that the late king, her husband, at the moment of death, when she was alone with him, had whispered something important to her, and if he (Swedenborg) could tell her what it was, she would be satisfied
that le had spiritual communication.  The next afternoon, Swedenborg called on her, mentioned that he had
seen her husband, and had been informed by him what
were his last words, which he then told the queen.  Her
majesty immediately swooned away, anld, on recovering, expressed her astonishment: declaring that she




94                SPIRITUAL SHAPE.
had no longer any doubt relative to the philosopher's
power.
Swedenborg taught that the spirit gives shape to the
oody, and if any member (as a leg) is lost, still the per
fect spiritual shape is preserved.  Some persons confirm
this view by instancing cases where pain remains in the
toes after the limb to which those toes belonged has been
cut off.
LADY. Do such cases ever occur?
DOCTOR. Very frequently.  The next day, and sometimes for months after amputation, considerable pain is
felt in the excised member. After the nerves have habituated themselves to their new relations, it ceases.
Physiologists account for this singular matter in various
ways; but many consider the spiritual solution the best.
He also taught that after death, as the body remained in
exactly the same shape, it was very difficult, from the
preconceived notions of that state, for the deceased to
really believe they were in another world. He seems
to entertain much dislike to Calvin, whQse entrance to
the spiritual world he thus describes: "I have heard
(from the angels) that when he first came into the spiritual world, he believed no otherwise than that he was
still in the world where he was born; and, although he
heard from the angels who were associated with him at
his first entrance, that he was now in their world, and
not in his former world, he said,  I have the same body,
the same hands, and the Tike senses.' But the angels
instructed him that he was now in a substantial body,
and that before he was not only in the same, but in a
material body, which invested the substantial; and that
the material body had been cast off and the substantial
remained, which is man.  This, a'. first, he understood




SEERESS OF PREVORST.                95
but the next day, etc."  As we have spent sufficient
time on Swedenborg, I must conclude by mentioning
that his religion was evidently formed before his illumination, and that, clairvoyant only in a low degree.
his philosophy every where chimes in with his revelations.
LADY. Have others ever given to the world any
similar experience?
DOcToR. Many have done so; of whom  the seeress
of Prevorst is an instance.  In 183-, in the upper part
of our city, a boy resided in whom  this anomaly existed.  A Methodist minister lived in the same house,
and being much interested in the boy, would often take
him as a companion while visiting his charge.  The boy
would often cross the street to avoid the proximity of
some one passing; and, upon being asked the reasons
for his conduct, would reply, "that the person. was
wicked, and had given evil spirits power over him, and
he could see them flocking round, filling his mind with
evil suggestions."  Some time after this, two young
ladies passed a night in attendance upon a poor woman
who was dying; her children, a boy and two girls, wore
in the room.  Just before her death, she called the boy
to her, and, after a little conversation, they heard hei
remark, "Is that' all?"  While his mother was dying,
the boy fell upon the floor in a convulsive fit, in which
he continued, despite of all assistance, some ten minutes;
but at last rose, exclaiming, "Mother is happy, and I am
satisfied!" and was perfectly calm afterwards. The
ladies seized a chance, afforded by the temporary absence of the boy, to ask the girls what all this meant;
they replied, that their brother could see spirits, and their
mother, wishing to find out what some dark forms




ci^6   ~    PROPHETS IN ISRAEL.
arovund her bed were saying, he told her they merely
came to carry her off, when she replied, " Is that all?'
On inquiry, they found it was the same boy with whom
the Methodist minister was acquainted.
It is probable that the prophets in Israel, in ancient
times, had the powers of the inner man developed.
This change in the system seems to have been the test
Elijah gave Elisha, whether his request would be granted.
"And it came to pass, when the Lord would take up
Elijah into heaven by a whirlwind, that Elijah went
with Elisha from Gilgal," etc. " And it came to pass,
when they were gone over, that Elijah said unto Elisha,
4sk what I shall do for thee before I am taken from
thee. And Elisha said, I pray thee, let a double portion
of thy spirit be upon me. And he said, Thou hast asked
a hard thing; nevertheless, if thou see me when I am
taken from thee, it shall be so unto thee," etc. "And it
came to pass, as they still went on and talked, that behold
there came a chariot of fire, and horses of fire, and
parted them  both asunder; and Elijah went up by a
whirlwind into heaven, and Elisha saw it." etc,




CONVERSATION  VI.
STAGES IN DYING.
DOCTOR. As we have considered the various stages
of fascination, from a mere quickening of the senses to
death, it will be well to consider this last a little more in
detail; as, in doing so, we shall in a measure review the
)thers.
LAPY. Does the dying person pass through the six
stages in regular succession?
DOCTOR. I believe that is generally the case.
LADY. But how then do you account for the extreme
pain that is often felt in dying? The stages of fascination soothe pain-they do not cause it.
DOCTOR. That is very true; and when these stages
really commence there is no longer any pain; but up
o the first stage the fatal disease exerts unlimited sway
After the fourth commences, bodily insensibility is an
nevitable consequence; the violent convulsions of the
muscles do not cause suffering in the mind. Dr. Adam
Clarke. when relating his recovering from drowning,
stated to Dr. Lettsom that, during the period of his apparent unconsciousness, he felt a new kind of life. He
says, " Now I aver, 1st. That, in being drowned, I felt
no pain. 2d. That I did not, for a single moment, lose
my consciousness.  3d. I felt indescribably happy; and
though dead, as to the total suspension of all the functions of life, yet I felt no pain in dyinig; apd I take i! fin
granted, from  this circumtaxnc,   those whc die by
9




98               NO PAIN IN DYING.
drowning feel no pain, and that probably it is the easiest
of all deaths. 4th. That I felt no pain till once more
exposed to the action of the atmospheric air; and then
I felt great anguish and pain in returning to life, which
anguish, had I continued under water, I never should
have experienced," etc.
Dr. Moore cites Mr. Green, who, in his diary, mentions a person who had been hung and cut down on a
reprieve, who, being asked what were his sensations,
stated that the preparations were dreadful beyond expression, but that, on being dropped, he instantly found
himself amidst fields and rivers of blood, which gradually acquired a greenish tinge.  Imagining that if he
could reach a certain spot he should be easy, he seemed
to himself to struggle forcibly to attain it, and then he
felt no more.  Schiller, when dying, was asked how he
felt.  "Calmer and calmer," he replied.  Dr. Moore
says that when the vital flame flickered, almost extinguished, the heart faltering with every pulse, and every
breath a convulsion, he said to a dying believer, who
had not long before been talking of undying love, " Are
you in pain?" and the reply, with apparently the last
breath, was, "It is delightful!"  In another person, in
whom a gradual disease had so nearly exhausted the
physical powers that the darkness of death had already
produced blindness, the sense of God's love was so
overpowering, that every expression, for many hou:s,
referred to it in rapturous words, such as, "This is lifethis is heaven-God is life-Ineed not faith-I have the
promise!"
LADY. I would ask if there is any certain sign by
which we may recognize death so as to prevent bury.
ing alive?




PEST OF DEATH.                 99
DOCTOR. Only one, and that is putrefactio.. Dendy
cites several cases of prematule interment, some of
which I will mention:
On the exhumation of the Cimetiere des Innocents at
Paris, during the Napoleon dynasty, the skeletons were
many of them discovered'% attitudes struggling to get
free; indeed some, we are assured, were partly out of
their coffins. So noted was this matter in Germany, as
to give rise to a custom of placing a bell-rope in the
hand of a corpse for twenty-four hours before burial.
Miss C. and her brother were the subjects of typhoid
fever. She seemed to die, and her bier was placed in
the family vault.  In a week her brother died also, and
when he was taken to the tomb, the lady was found
sitting in her grave-clothes on the steps of the vault,
having, after her waking from the trance, died of terror
or exhaustion.
A girl, after repeated faintings, was apparently dead,
and taken as a subject into a dissecting room in Paris.
During the night, faint groans were heard in the room;
but no search was made. In the morning it was appa
rent that the girl had attempted to disengage herselffrom
the winding-sheet, one leg being thrust off from the tres
sels, and an arm resting on an adjoining table.
The emperor Zeno was prematurely buried; and
when the body was soon after casually discovered, it
was found that he had, to satisfy acute hunger, eaten
some fesh from'off his arm.
LADY. Have there not been cases in which recovery
has taken place?
DOCTOR. None that bear any proportion to the premature interments. A romantic story is told of a young
French lady at Paris, who was condemned by her father




100                BURYING ALIVE.
to a hated marriage, while her heart was devoted to
another.  She fell into a trance and was buried.  Undei
some strange influence her lover opened her grave, and
she was revived and married.  Dendy tells a story of
another strange lady, who was actually the subject of
an anatomist. On the existence of some faint signs of
vitality, he not only restored the lady to life, but united
himself to her in marriage.
Bourgeois tells that a medical man, in 1838, from the
sudden influence of grief upon the organic system, sunk
into a cataleptic state, but his consciousness never left
him. The lamentations of his wife, the condolence of
friends, and the arrangements regarding his funeral,
were all distinctly heard. Perfectly aware of all that
was going on around him, he was placed in the coffin,
and carried in solemn procession to the grave. As the
solemn words, " Earth to earth," were uttered, and the
first clod fell upon his coffin lid, so sudden an influence
was produced upon his organic system by terror, as to
neutralize the effect of grief-he shrieked aloud, and was
saved.
A story is related of a lady who fell into a cataleptic
state after a violent nervous disorder. It seemed to her,
as if in a dream, that she was really dead; yet she was
perfectly conscious of all that happened around her in
his dreadful state. She distinctly heard her friends
speaking and lamenting her death at the side of her coffin: she felt them pull on her dead clotles, and lay her
in it. This feeling produced a mental anxiety which
was indescribable. She tried to cry, but her soul was
without power, and could not act on her body.  She
had the contradictory feeling as if she were in her own
body, and yet not in it at the same time. It was as




RESUSCITATION.               10l
equally impossible for her to stretc n cut her arm or to
open her eyes as to cry, although she continually endeavored to do so. The internal anguish of her mind was,
however, at its utmost height when the funeral hymns
were sang, and when the lid of the coffin was about to
be nailed on. The thought that she was to be buried
alive was the first one which gave activity to her soul,
and caused it to operate on ner corporeal frame.
Abbe Menon tells of a cataleptic girl, who was
doomed to dissection; when laid on the table, the first
cut of the knife awoke her and she lived. Less fortunate, says Dendy, was Cardinal Somaglia, who, falling
into syncope from intense grief, it was decided that he
should be opened and embalmed.  As the surgeon's
knife punctured the lungs, the heart throbbed, and the
cardinal attempted to avert the knife with his hand; but
the DIE was cast, and he died.
A gentleman was apparently seized with apoplexy
while at cards. A vein was opened in both arms, but
no blood flowed. He was placed in a room  with two
watchers, who slept, alas! too long; for, in the morning, the room was deluged with blood from the punce
tures, and his life was gone.
LADY. Did the persons who recovered relate any
spiritual views?
DoCTOR. In some cases; but the most of them experienced nothing more than a separation between organic
and aliimal life, so complete, indeed, as to deprive them
of tie use of the voluntary muscles for a time. A re.
view of tlhse facts will justify the conclusion that interment is wrong until putrefaction commences.
Wonderful stories have been related in all ages about
the wonders of trance, or the fifth degree. Moore gives




102             TIIESPESIOS OF SOLI.
the substance of one from Plutarch: Thespesios of Sol
fell violently on his neck, and was supposed to be dead,
Three days after, however, when about to be interred,
he recovered.  From this time, a wonderful thange was
apparent in his conduct; for he had been licentious and
prodigal, but ever after was devout, noble, and conscientious. On his friends requiring the reason of this
strange conversion, he stated that during his apparent
death, his rational soul had experienced marvellous
vicissitudes; his whole being seemed at first on a sudden
to breathe, and to look about it on every side, as if the
soul had been all eye, while, at the same time, he felt as
if gliding gently along, borne upon a stream of light.
Then he seemed to meet a spiritual person of unutterable loveliness, who conducted him to various parts of
the unseen world, and explained to him the mysteries
of divine government, and showed him the manner in
which- wickedness meets its reward. This vision exerted all the influence of truth upon his mind, and entirely altered his character and conduct.
The Methodist denomination afford many strange
instances of singular experience, so well known that it
would be useless to repeat them. We will conclude
the degrees by a chapter from Dr. Nelson, who, in his
CAUSE AND CURE OF INFIDELITY, (a work published by
the American Tract Society, and which ought to lay on
the shelf of every family in the land, with the Bibie
and Bunyan's Pilgrim's Progress; a work, too, which
no child of mine, able to tell the letters, should ever fail
o peruse and commit to memory,) mentions several
cases of the opening of the spiritual eye. The unbeliever, at the point of death, sees the reality of those
things at wh'ch he formerly scoffed; he commences the




APPROACHING DEATH.                      103
passage of the river (a transition of the stages) with
stoical indifference, but before reaching the other side,
evinces the most terrible despair, and the parting spirit
Lids adieu in a wail of agony.  The follower of the
Man of Calvary  approaches the brink  with fear, but
ere long, the choral music of.the seraphim proves a cordial to his fainting spirit, he pants to enter the blessed
abodes he sees opening before him, and the rapturous
exclamation," Lord, receive my spirit!" announces that
he sleeps in Jesus. You are sufficiently prepared to appreciate the physiological state he describes without further explanation.
OBSERVATIONS ON MAN S DEPARTURE.
"While attending medical lectures at Philadelphia, I heard, from the
lady with whom I boarded, an account of certain individuals who were
dead to all appearance, during the prevalence of the yellow fever in that
city, and yet recovered. The fact that they saw, or fancied they saw,
things in the world of spirits, awakened my curiosity.' She told me of one, with whom she was acquainted, who was so
confident of his discoveries that he had seemingly thought of little else
afterward, and it had then been twenty-four years.  These things appeared philosophically strange to me, for the following reasons:-' First: Those who, from bleeding or from any other cause, reach a
state of syncope, or the ordinary fainting condition, think not at all, or are
unable to remember any mental action. When they recover, it appears
either that the mind was suspended, or they were unable to recollect its
operations. There are those who believe on either side of this question.
Some contend for suspension; others deny it, but say we never can recall
thoughts formed while the mind is in that state, for reasons not yet
understood.
"Secondly: Those who, in approaching death, reach the first state of
insensibility, and recover from it, are unconscious of any mental activity
and have no thoughts which they can recall.
"Thirdly: If this is so, why, then, should those who had travelled fur.
ther into the land of death, and had sunk deeper into the condition of
nodily inaction, when recovered, be conscious of mental action. and
remember thoughts more vivid than ever had flashed across their souls
in the health of boyhood, under a vernal sun, and on a plain of flowers?
"After this, I felt somewhat inclined to watch, when it became my
business year after year, to stand by the bed ci death. That which I saw




104                    STAGES IN TRANCE.
was notcalculated to protract and deepen the slumbers of infidelity, but
rather to dispose toward a degree of restlessness; or, at least, to further
observation. I knew that the circle of stupor, or insensibility, drawn
around life, and through which all either pass, or seem to pass, who go
out of life, was urged by some to prove that the mind could not exist
unless it be in connection with organized matter. For the same reason,
others have contended that our souls must sleep until the morning of the
resurrection, when we shall regain our bodies. That which I witnessed
for myself, pushed me (willing or unwilling) in a different direction,
Before I relate these facts, I must offer something which may Illustrate,
to a certain extent, the thoughts toward which they pointed.
" If we were to stand on the edge of a very deep ditch or gulf, on the
distant verge of which a curtain hangs which obstructs the view, we
might feel a wish to know what is beyond it, or whether there is any
light in that unseen land. Suppose we were to let down a ladder, protracted greatly in its length, and ask a bold adventurer to descend and
make discoveries. He goes to the bottom, and then returns, telling us
that there he could see nothing-that all was total darkness. We might
very naturally infer the absence of light there; but if we concluded that
his powers of vision had been annihilated, or that there could surely be
no light in the land beyond the curtain, because, to reach that land, a
very dark ravine must be crossed, it would have been weak reasoning;
so much so, that, if it contented us, we must be easily satisfied. It gave
me pain to notice many-nay, many physicians-who on these very
premises, or on something equally weak, were quieting themselves in the
deduction that the soul sees no more after death. Suppose this adventurer descends again, and then ascends the other side, so near the top that
he can reach the curtain and slightly lift it. When he returns, he tells us
that his vision had been suspended totally as before, but that he went
nearer the distant land, and it was revived again; that, as the curtain
was lifted, he saw brighter light than he had ever seen before.  We
would say to him:'A certain distance does suspend; but inaction is not
loss of sight: only travel on further, and you will see again.' We can
understand that any one might go to the bottom of that ravine a thousand
times; he might remain there for days, and, if he went no further, he
could tell, on his return, nothing of the unseen regions.
"Something like this was illustrated by the facts noted during many
years' employment in the medical profession.  A few cases must be
taken as examples from the list.
" I was called to see a female, who departed under an influence which
causes the patient to faint again and again, more and still more profoundly,
until life is extinct. For the information of physicians, I mention, it was
uterine hemorrhage from inseparably-attached placenta.  When recov.
ered from the first condition of syncope, she appeared as unconscious, or as
destitute of activity of spirit, as others usually do. She sank again and
revived: it was still the same. She fainted more profoundly still; and




ANECDOTES.                            10O
when awake again, she appeared as others usually io who have no.houghts which they can recall.  At length she appeared entirely gone.
It did seem as though the struggle was forever past.  Her weeping relatives clasped their hands and exclaimed:' She is dead!' but, unexpectedly, she waked once more, and, glancing her eyes on one who sat near,
exclaimed:' Oh, Sarah, I was at an entirely new place!' and then sunk
to remain insensible to the things of the place we live in.
"Why she, like others in fainting, should have no thoughts which she
could recall, when not so near death as she afterward was when she
had thought, I could not clearly explain.  Why her greatest activity of
mind appeared to happen during her nearest approach to the future
world, and while so near that, from  that stage, scarcely any ever return
who once reach it, seemed somewhat perplexing to me.  I remembered,
that in the case recorded by Dr. Rush, where the man recL.vered who
was, to all appearance, entirely dead, his activity of mind was unusual.
He thought he heard and saw things unutterable.  He did not know
whether he was altogether dead or not.  St. Paul says he was in a condition so near to death, that he could not tell whether he was out of the
body or not, but that he heard things unutterable.  I remembered that
Tennant, of New Jersey, and his friends, could not decide whether or not
he had been out of the body; but he appeared to be so some days, and
thought his discoveries unutterable.  The man who cuts his finger and
faints, recovering speedily, has no thoughts, or remembers none: he does
not approach the distant edge of the ravine. These facts appeared to
me poorly calculated to advance the philosophical importance of one
who has discovered from sleep, or from syncope, that there is no other
existence, because this is all which we have seen. They appeared to me
rather poorly calculated to promote the tranquility of one seeking the
comforts of' atheism. For my own part, I never did desire the consolations of everlasting nothingness; I never could covet a plunge beneath
the black wave of eternal forgetfulness, and cannot say that these observations, in and of themselves, gave me pain; but it was evident that
thousands of the scientific were influenced by the weight of a small pebble to adopt a creed-provided that creed contradicted Holy Writ.  I
had read and heard too much of man's depravity, and of his love for darkness, not to see that it militated against my system of deism, if it should
appear that the otherwise learned should neglect to observe, or if
observant, should be satisfied with the most superficial view, and, seizing
stroe shallow and questionable facts, build hastily upon them a fabric
for etei;rnity.' In the cases of those who, recovering from  yellow fever, thought
thay had enjoyed intercourse with the world of spirits, they were individlals who had appeared to be dead.'*The following fact took place in recent days.  Similar occurrences
i~pressed me during years of observation.  In the city of St. Louis, a
Lueaile departed, who had a rich portion of the comforts of Christianity




106                       SANECDOTES.
It was after some Kind of spasm, that was strong enough to have been
the death-struggle, that she said-in a whisper, being unable to speak
aloud-to her young pastor:'I had a sight of home, and I saw my
Saviour!'
"There were others, who, after wading as far as that which seemed to
be the middle of the river, and, returning, thought they had seen a d'f
ferent world, and that they had an antepast of hell. But these cases we
pass over, and look at facts which point along the same road we have
been travelling.
" I was surprised to find that the condition of mind in the case of those
who were dying, and of those who only thought themselves dying, differed very widely. I had supposed that the joy or the grief of death
originated from the fancy of the patient, (one supposing himself very near
to great happiness, and the other expecting speedy suffering,) and resulted
in pleasure or apprehension. My discoveries seemed to overturn this
theory. Why should not the professor of religion who believes himself
dying, when he really is not, rejoice as readily as when he is departing
if his joy is the offspring of expectation?  Why should not the alarm of
the scoffer, who believes himself dying and is not, be as uniform and as
decisive as when he is in the river, if it comes of fancied evil or cowardly terrors?  The same questions I asked myself again and again.  I
have no doubt that there is some strange reason connected with our natural disrelish for truth, which causes so many physicians, after seeing such
facts so often, never to observe them. During twenty years of observation, I found the state of the soul belonging to the dying was, uniformly
and materially, unlike that of those who only supposed themselves departing. This is best made plain by noting cases which occurred.
"1. There was a man who believed himself converted, and his friends,
judging from his walk, hoped with him.  He was seized with disease,
and believed himself within a few paces of the gate of futurity. IIe felt
no joy; his mind was dark, and his soul clouded.  His exercises were
painful, and the opposite of every enjoyment. He was not dying. He
recovered. He had not been in the death-stream. After this he was
taken again. He believed himself dying, and he was not mistaken.  All
was peace, serenity, hope, triumph.
"2. There was a man who mocked at holy things.  He became
seriously diseased, and supposed himself sinking into the death-slumber.
He was not frightened.  His fortitude and composure were his pride,
and the boast of his friends. The undaunted firmness with which be
could enter futurity was spoken of exultingly. It was a mistake.  He
was not in the condition of dissolution. His soul never had been on the
line between two worlds. After this he was taken ill again.  He sup
posed, as before, that he was entering the next state, and he really
was; but his soul seemed to feel a different atmosphere.  The horrors of
toese scenes have been often described, and are often seen. I need not




CASE OF ILLUSTRATION                         107
endeavor to picture such a departure here.  The only difficul.y in which
I was thrown by such cases was,' Why was he not thus agonized when
he thought himself departing?  Can it be possible that we can stand so
precisely oil the dividing line, that the gale from both this and the coming
world may blow upon our cheek?  Cal we have a taste of the exercises
of the next territory before we enter it?' When I attempted to account
for this on the simple ground of bravery and cowardice, I was met by
the two following facts:"First, I have known those (the cases are not unfrequent) who were
brave, who had stood unflinching in battle's whirlpool.  They had
resolved never to disgrace their system of unbeief by a trembling death.
They had called to Christians in the tone of resolve, saying:' I can die
as coolly as you can.' I had seen those die from whom entire firmness'
might fairly be expected. -I had heard groans, even if the teeth were
clenched for fear of complaint, such as I never wish to hear again; and I
had looked into countenances, such as I hope never to see again.
" Again, I had seen cowards die. I had seen those depart who were
naturally timid, who expected themselves to meet death with fright
and alarm.  I had heard such, as it were, sing before Jordan was half
forded.  I had seen faces where, pallid as they were, I beheld more
celestial triumph than I had ever witnessed anywhere else. In that voice
there was a sweetness, and in that eye there was a glory, which i never
could have fancied in the death-spasms, if I had not been near.
"The condition of the soul, when the death-stream is entered, is no'
the same with that which it becomes (oftentimes) when it is almost
passl:. The brave man who steps upon the ladder across the dark
ravine, with eye undaunted and haughty spirit, changes fearfully, in many
cases, when he comes near enough to the curtain to lift it.  The Christian
who goes down the ladder, pale and disconsolate, oftentimes starts with
exultation, and tries to burst into a song when almost across.
"CASE OF ILLUSTRATION.-A revolutionary officer, wounded at the
battle of Germantown, was praised for his patriotism.  The war ended;
but he continued still to fight, in a different way, under the banner of
one whom he called the Captain of his salvation. The applause of men
never made him too proud to talk of the Man of Calvary.  The hurry of
life's driving pursuits could not consume all his time, or make him forget
to kneel by the side of his consort, in the circle of his children, and
anticipate a happy meeting in a more quiet clime.
"To abbreviate this history, his life was such that those who knew
him believed, if any one ever did die happily, this man would be one
(if that class.  I saw him  when the time arrived. He said to those
around him:'I am not as happy as I could wish, or as I had expected.
I cann. t say that I distrust my Saviour, for I know in whom I have believed; but I have not that pleasing readiness to depart which I had
looked for'  This distressed his relatives beyond expression,  HM




108                       DYINIa FANCIES.
friends were greatly pained, for they had looked for triumph.  His do
parture was very slow, and still his language was:' [ have no exhilara
tion and delightful readiness in my travel.' The weeping circle pressed
around him.  Another hour passed.  His hands and his feet became
entirely cold.  The feeling of heart remained the same.  Another
hour passes, and his vision has grown dim, but the state of his soul is
unchanged.  His daughter seemed as though her body could not sustain
her anguish of spirit, if her father should cross the valley before the
cloud passed from his sun. She (before his hearing vanished) made an
agreement with him, that, at any stage as he travelled on, if he had a
discovery of advancing glory, or a foretaste of heavenly delight, he
should give her a certain token with his hand.  His hands he could still
move, cold as they were.  She sat holding his hand, hour after hour. In
addition to his sight, his hearing at length failed. After a time he appeared almost unconscious of anything, and the obstructed breathing
peculiar to death was advanced near its termination, when he gave the.oken to his pale but now joyous daughter, and the expressive flash of
exultation was seen to spread itself through the stiffening muscles of his
face.  When his child asked him  to give a signal if he had any happy
view of heavenly light, with the feelings and opinions I once owned, I
could have asked:' Do you suppose that the increase of the death-chill
will add to his happiness?  Are you to expect, that as his eyesight
leaves, and as his hearing becomes confused, and his breathing convulsed,
and as he sinks into that cold, fainting, sickening condition of pallid
death, that his exultation is to commence?'
" It did then commence.  Then is the time when many, who enter the
dark valley cheerless, begin to see something that transports; but some
are too low to tell of it, and their friends think they departed under a
cloud, when they really did not. It is at this stage of the journey that
the enemy of God, who started with look of defiance and words of pride,
seems to meet with that which alters his views and expectations; but he
cannot tell it, for his tongue can no longer move.
" Those who inquire after and read the death of the wife of the celebrated John Newton, will find a very plain and very interesting instance. where the Saviour seemed to meet with a smiling countenance
his dying servant, when she had advanced too far to call back to her sor.
rowful friends, and tell them of the pleasing news.
" My attention was awakened very much by observing the dying fan.
cies of the servants of this world, differing with such characteristic
singularity from  the fancies of the departing Christian.  It is no uncommon thiing for those who die, to believe they see, or hear, or feel, that
which appears only fancy to by-standers.  Their friends believe that it is
the overturning of their intellect. I am not about to enter into the discussion of the question, whether it is, or is nol, always fancy. Some
atU'bute it to wnore than fancy; but inasmuch as, in many instances, the




TEST  OF DEATH.                           109
Anind is deranged while its habitation is falling into ruin.s around it, and
inasmuch as it is the common belief that it is only imagination of which
I am writing, we will look at it under the name of fancy.
"The fancifil views of the dying servants of sin, and the devoted
friends of Christ, were  strangely different, as far as my observation
extended.  One who had been an entire sensualist and a mocker at religion; while dying, appeared in his senses in all but one thing.' Take
that black man fiom the room,' said he.  He was answered that there
was none in the room.  IIe replied:' There he is, standing near the
window.  His presence is very irksome to me-take him out.' After a
time, again and again, his rall was:' Will no one remove him?  There
he is-surely some one will take him away!'
"I was mentioning to another physician my surprise that he should
have been so much distressed if there had been many blacks in the room,
for he had been waited on by them, day and night, for many years; also
that the mind had not been diseased in some other respect: when he
told me the names of two others (his patients)-rmen of similar liveswho were tormented with the same fancy, and in the samle way, while
dying.
"A young female, who called the Man of Calvary her geeatest friend,
was, when dying, in her senses, in all but one particular.' Mother,' she
would say, pointing in a certain direction,'do you see those beautiful
creatures?' Her mother would answer:'No, there is no one there, my
dear.' She would reply:' Well, that is strange.  1 never saw  such
countenances and suchi attire.  My eye nlever rested on anything so
lovely.' Oh, says one, this is all imagination, and the notions of a mind
collapsing; wherefore tell of it?  My answer is, that I am  not about to
dispute or to deny that it is fancy; but the fancies differ in features and
il texture.  Some in their derangement call out:' Catch me, I am sink
ing-hold me, I am fulling.' Others say:'Do you hear that music? 0,
were ever notes so celestial!' This kind of notes, and these classes of
fantics, [elolgedl to different classes of individuals; and who they were,
was the item which attracted my wonder.  Such things are noticed by
few, and remembered by almost none; but I am inclined to believe that,
if notes were kept of such cases, volumes of interest might be formed.
"My last remark here, reader, is, that we necessarily speak somewhat
in the dark of such matters; but you and I will know  more shortly
Brth of us will see and feel fbr ourselves, where we cannot be mistaken,
hi the course of a very few mouths or years."'
[" Cause and Cure of Infidelity,' by Rev. David Nelson-American Trad
Society. Pages 264-276.]
10




CONVERSATION  VIL 
OPERATION OF MEDICINME
Lvnr. Here is a box of pills, sent me, this morning
ly a neighbor, who was in last evening when my son
entered, and having noticed a number of little black
spots on his face, said his blood was in a bad state, and
that these pills would purify it.
DOCTOR. Frequently washing the face will remove
the black spots, or worms, as they are commonly called.
You have, no doubt, often noticed an oily matter on the
face; the oil is made by minute glands lying under the
external skin; these glands send out a tube to carry the
oil to the surface; sometimes dust will collect on the
orifice of the tube, and form the black spots your neighbor observed on George; the oil thus prevented egress,
becomes hardened, and, when squeezed out, resembles a
worm from the shape of the tube.
LADY. What is the use of this oil?
DOCTOR. To grease or lubricate the external skin, so
as to prevent irritation either from atmospheric causes,
or the motion of the muscles under it. To return to the
pills, can you tell me of any mode by which they could
gain access to the blood, to effect such an important
object as purifying it?
LADY. I have always considered that medicines opeiated by changing the nature of the blood; but I now
see that they cannot approach it; to do so requires 9




SALT PEACHES.                111
passage through the lacteals, mesenteric glands, and
thoracic duct; and you have informed me that even the
pyloric orifice of the stomach will not allow any thing to
pass it, except properly-prepared chyme.
DOCTOR. Allowing, for a moment, the pills entered
the blood, what would ensue?
LADY. They would be instantly taken out of the circulation either by the lungs or kidneys, which are exreting glands, acting, I suppose, as constables to -emove
everything offending and unnecessary.
DOCTOR. There is a complete system of guards stationed in our bodies, to prevent the entrance of improper
substances, beginning with the warnings of taste; but
unhealthy agents, by presenting themselves too freQuently, will at last accustom the sentinels to their appearance, and can then enter with impunity, and without
danger of being ejected by the excretory organs.
This fact may sometimes be witnessed in the vegetable kingdom.  The late Dr. Mitchell, of this city, had
once sent to him a basket of saline-tasting peaches.
Around the base of the tree upon which they grew, a
quantity of brine had been thrown. The spongioles or
leech-suckers at the roots, at first, refused the salty matter admittance, but, their excitability (irritability) being
altered by continued contact, at last sucked them up,
and thus a strange phenomenon was the result.
Alcohol has produced the same effect on the human
system.  A surgeon mentions a case of setting fire to
the blood of a confirmed drunkard, which he had just
drawn, its strong odor tempting the experiment.
LADY. That drunkard was not much remon ed. I
should think, from a state of spontaneous combustion.
DOCTOR. Probably not; saturating the system with




1:12         SPONTANEOUS COMBUSTION.
alcohol is perhaps one of the first steps in "hat process.
Bone is composed of a mixture of phosphoric acid and
lime (phosphate of lime); as an acid is the union of a base
with a certain amount of oxygen, phosphoric acid is made
of phosphorus and oxygen.  When the chemist wishes to
exhibit intense combustion to his audience, he throws a
piece of phosphorus into a jar of oxygen gas, and produces a blaze rivalling that of the sun. In a healthy
state of the system, the life power controls all the elements, and, as shown in the vegetable kingdom, only
allows them to unite in a manner that subserves its own
purposes; but when lowered and debilitated by excessive stimulus, the power becomes weakened, and finally
lost in death; the elements then obey their natural
affinities, and a virulent internal combustion ensues.
LADY. The drunkard, in a double sense, then, is a
self-moving porter-house. Is it not very strange, that,
with all the clear and accurate information known relative to the organs and their functions. such profound
ignorance on the subject of the operation of medicine
should exist?
DoCTOR. You have quoted, almost verbatim, the corn
mon jargon of the day; it is used by those noted for
vague and confused notions on physiology.  I do not
think any man, who cannot give the rationale of the
medicine he prescribes, should be trusted to practice.
So far from being dark and in any way incomprehen
sible, it is easily explained, and the effects of medicine
capable of being predicted with almost mathematical
certainty.
The study of the different organs in the system, after
the life power has departed, is called Anatomy.  When
living and proper agents stimulate irritability, so as to




CON.SERVATIVE POWER               113
produce a healthy action of these organs, the study is
called Physiology.  When improper agents or stimuli
act on irritability, an alteration of the vital powers ensues, with a corresponding alteration of function, disease
results, and its study is called Pathology. In the latter
case, how do you imagine the system can become right
again?
LADY. Only, I should think, by the direct interposition
hf the Almighty?
Docl OR. After the Croton aqueduct was finished, the
pipes laid down, and the whole in successful operation,
do you suppose anything more was required?
LADY. Yes, a company of superintendents and laborers, to constantly inspect every part with the greatest
care, and instantly repair whatever breaks in the line, or
other damages might occur.  The water-works would
not even be safe without such a precaution.
DocToR. The life power has an exactly similar reserve-a distinct and powerful conservative principle,
called by the older physicians, who were well acquainted with it. the Vis Medicatrix Naturce.  Whenever a
part is injured, it is the office of this principle to come
forward and repair it; so very intelligent appears its
operation, that some have attributed the effects to a
special interference of the Creator, and others supposed
t was the rational soul.
LADY. The two seeds cited in your article on the
Vegetable Kingdom, to show the difference between the
forces of life and those of chemistry, brought instant
conviction to my mind, and the clear conceptions I then
acquired have proved serviceable since in pursuing this
subject.  Can you not illustrate the conservati7e  irin
eiple in a sinilar manner?
10*




114                   DORMOUSE.
DOCTOR. Have ycu ever read the natural history of
the dormouse?
LADY. It is one of the hybernating or winter-sleeping animals; in summer it is very lively and frolicsome; as autumn approaches, it becomes very fat; and
when cold weather sets in, retires to a concealed nook
to sleep out the winter, but comes forth in the spring
almost fleshless. While in the hybernating state, its
breathing is very slow, and its temperature the same as
that of the surrounding atmosphere.
DOCTOR. If a dormouse is taken from  its sheltered
hole, in the midst of winter, and placed in a receiver
surrounded with a freezing mixture, some very curious
phenomena will be evolved.  As the cold increases,
and the little portion it had is becoming absorbed, its
breathing will be proportionally slower, and the heart
pulsate more feebly; this state of things continues-the
animal constantly failing-until a point is reached where
remaining another moment would destroy life.  At this
very point an unseen power presents its workings, a
hidden spring is touched, and an evident change takes
place with extreme rapidity; the pulse becomes fuller
and faster; a warmth diffuses itself over the surface;
the eyes brighten and limbs contract; finally, in less
than three minutes, the little animal is as hot, and his
pulse as rapid, as in the midst of summer. Take the
dormouse now out of the receiver, and expose him to
the open air, and his torpidity gradually returns; it is
then best to restore him to his former nook. The con-;ervative power that preserved the dormouse from
leath, we name the Vis MEDICATRIX NATURE.'LADY. How  is this power developed in the human
body?




TRUE PHYSICIAN.                 11I
DOCTOR. Let us suppose a combination of peculiar
circumstances, as the poisonous air of a marshr (-arsk
miasmata), to act on our excitability, an injurious influence is immediately exerted upon the system; it sinks
quickly, a chill is felt, and this chill increases, lowering
and depressing us, till a point is gained (as in the dormouse experiment), from which we cannot descend'with
life; at this point the conservative power awakes; it acts
on the other powers, more especially on the brain; the
nervous secretion becomes altered and radiated to every
part; a change is induced, fever ensues, and with it a
long  a;ain of other symptoms which finally terminate
in piotuse perspiration, and a restoration to health.
LADY. Then fever, and the symptoms which  are
commonly considered  the disease itself, are nothing
more than signals of battle going on within for the purpose of liberating us from injurious influences. If such
be the case, why does the physician interfere in the matter at all, and of what use are doctors?
DOCTOR. The true physician remains a spectator, or
rather general, watching the battle's progress with a
careful eye; knowing each separate stage and crisis,
and how far nature can be trusted, he often does nothing
more than to clear the battle-field, (remove injurious influences,) and allow her to combat alone.
LADY. Suppose it becomes necessary for him  to
interfere?
DOCTOR. If nature cannot cope successfully with the
existing form of disease, it is his business to substitute
ano'her form which she can conquer.  It is a pathologial law that there can be but one disease at a time in.be system; and, acting oi. that law, he brings some
nfluence stronger than the original one to bear on esx




116                    ARSEN IC.
citability; in other words, he must produce a different
alteration of the vital powers, which he is certain the
conservative principle can rectify.
LADY. If it is stronger than the original one, why
should it not be still worse for the vis medicatrix to
combat?
DOCTOR. Each thing produces an influence peculiar
to itself; and our ideas of strength are only comparative.  What will powerfully depress excitability may
give the vis medicatrix little effort to overcome, and
vice versa.
There is a class of bodies, which, properly prescribed, produce a decided and powerful effect on excitability; an effect which experience has taught us it is
always in the power of the vis medicatrix to subaue,
and restore the system when laboring under their influence to health.  Such are the medicines, as opium, camphor, arsenic, and quinine.
LADY. Is arsenic a medicine?
DOCTOR. A very useful one.  You must not suppose
that its only use was to make stearine candles and German silver spoons. Nothing in nature was ever created
for murderous purposes; it is man who perverts them.
LADY. After the effect is produced on excitability by
the medicine, the original malady disappears; the physician is then treating -sickness he has himself induced,
and curing diseases of his own infliction.
DOCTOR. Exactly so; and this shows you what carn
and judgment should be exercised in selecting the right
medicine.  Cases occur in which, out of a list of twenty
purgatives, one alone is suited to the existing nature of,he complaint.
LADY. But, doctor, how  -an you discover all these




CASE OF DISEASE,               117
separate modifications of disease; how can you possibly tell what is going on within the system?
DOCTOR. In the same manner as we discover the existence of a life principle and its properties-that is, by
observing the phenomena they exhibit.
You will remember that every part of the body has a
separate office to fulfil, that there are two lives, an animal and vegetable, in action, developing distinct series
of phenomena, and that the study of all the functions in
health is physiology.
When pernicious influences act, and the whole train
becomes disordered, the physician, previously well acquainted with the results produced by healthy actions,
observes the changed appearances disease presents to
his view, and from these deduces his opinion relative to
the amount of injury, and acts accordingly.
LADY. Will you be kind enough to apply this to a
particular case?
DOCTOR. I was sent for, yesterday, to see a man, who
I was told had been ill for two or three days. On
entering the room, and observing his countenance
(often a sufficient index by itself to the experienced), its
wild and haggard aspect led me to look for abdominal
disease.
Sitting down by his bed, I inquired the history of the
case, and then proceeded (without his suspecting it) to
a regular examination.
The functions of animal life are sensation, thought,
and locomotion.  Everything had acquired a bitter
taste to him, and noise of any kind was agonizing; his
mina was wandering; and, to conclude with anima.
iae, he was feeble as a child.
Turning to the vegetable system, I found respiration




118                  SYMPTOMS,
more frequent than in health, but perfectly full, and no
pain about the chest; the pulse fast and rather weak,
but steady; this absolved the heart and lungs. Upon
examining the tongue, I found it covered with a thick
yellowish-brown fur, characterizing trouble in the liver;
and as the lining membrane for nostrils, mouth, stomach,
liver-tube, etc., is one continuous sheet, disease of one
part would soon extend along the whole surface by
sympathy, and, reaching the tongue, paint on ts surface
the cause of trouble for the information of the physician; the skin had a yellowish tinge, was at times cold
and moist, and at others hot and dry; the bowels and
liver, more especially the stomach, were very sensitive
to pressure, and vomiting came on every ten or fifteen
minutes, at which times he ejected a greenish watery
fluid, etc., etc.
The day of his attack, he had been eating a very
hearty dinner, with some unripe fiuit as dessert, and
then quickly returned to work (he was a stone-cutter)
beneath a hot sun; soon getting sick, he went home,
where an old woman, a. great doctress of the neigh.
borhood, had been summoned to attend him; she called
his disease janders, and every hour or two, during the
day, poured down his stomach strong tansy tea.
I concluded that his unwholesome dinner had been
imperfectly digested, and when the chyme wished to
pass the pyloric orifice, the sentinel tightly contracted
his muscular ring, and refused admittance by blocking
up the passage.  The hot sun, acting on the brain,
altered the nervous secretion, a share of which, being
radiated to the stomach, made matters worse; and the
etornach, finding itself utterly incapable, in such circurmstances, of re-digesting the food, cast it off entirely by




VIS MEDICATRIX NATURE.              119
thf esophaguss; the bile that was preparec o act on tile
chyme being poured out about the time it ought to be
there, and finding nothing to act on, altered the excitability of the sentinel at the pyloric orifice, and gained
admission into the stomach, from whence it was imme'
diately thrown out, sharing the fate of the food. Te
crown all, the tansy tea, by producing irritation, kept
ip the morbid action, involving all the parts connected
with the lining membrane, as the liver, etc.
I caused him to be removed into a cool and quiet
room; had his feet bathed with mustard and warm
water, to assist the action of a mustard plaster on his
stomach; and then caused a strong injection to be administered, leaving a powder to be taken at a certain
time afterward.  The vomiting  ceased, the  bowels
moved, a terrible headache (which I forgot to mention
in my notice of sensation) disappeared, etc., etc., and
the next morning found him  free from  all pain, but
rery weak.  This is called the active plan of treat-.ment.
Very frequently, a mere removal of injurious influences, by allowing the vis medicatrix free scope, will be
sufficient to cure.  This is called the expectant plan of
treatment.
LADY. Nature, after all, has to fight her own battles,
the physician generally d;cng nothing, except, by re.
moving injurious influences, to show fair play; the utmost he can perform is to substitute one morbific cause
for another. If it were not for the vis medicatrix, there
would be no science of medicine-we should all die off
as soon as injured.
DoCTOR. I am  glad that you understand so well
what I have been endeavoring to teach; you have now




120                  WATER CURE.
learned enough of the principles of medicine to pursue
the study as much as you choose.
LADY. Does fascination act by inducing a new disease?
D)OCTOR. Most assuredly; it forms no exception to
the mode of operation of the others, from all of which it
differs, however, by giving the vis medicatrix less effort
to displace its effects. I suppose this fact will make no
advice needed with regard to fascinating healthy per.
sons, as direct disease is thereby induced.
LADY. Why did I not get well directly after the first
fascination?
DOCTOR. From the influence of habit, and the same
causes still acting that produced your disease in the first
instance.  Directly after the effect of each operation
was over, and before the disease again seized upon you,
the system  had time to gain strength; as the intervals
increased, more strength was acquired, until, at length,
your frame was strong enough to resist the injurious
influence, and then your recovery was complete.
LADY. In what manner does the water cure operate?
A friend of mine was very anxious that I should try it;
he thought every case of chronic disease in the continent of Europe would soon be cured at Graefenberg.
DocToR.  I have very little doubt but that it would
have killed you.  You can no more expect one particular medicine, or plan of treatment, to cure all diseases,
than to find one book which would suit all readers; or
one coat capable of fitting all men. Wherever life is
present, variety is certain to be found, as well in dis.
ease as in health.  In certain cases, fascination, as a
curative agent, is invaluable; but, recommend it as a
succedaneum, and it is certain to do much mischief.




HOMOEOPATH Y.                 121
Hydropathy, as a curative agent, acts exactly on the
dormouse principle; it depresses until the vis medicatrix
rises to the rescue.  The process you will observe,
has already been gone through with at the first time of
the attack: it says to nature, " You have failed in your
attempt, try again."  In many chronic cases of long
standing it is certainly a valuable remedy; that it is a
new discovery, or that it will supercede all other remedies, are both ridiculous ideas.
LADY. I am aware, doctor, that you have attentively
examined homceopathy; and since such a golden opportunity presents itself for inquiry, I should be much
obliged if you would tell me what it really is worth;
many of my friends think its cures are almost miraculous?
DOCTOR. Cases of medical treatment under such circumstances, stand in the same relation to truth as the
tricks of a juggler to the deductions of science; such
reports, in fact, have elicited the remark that "medical
facts are medical lies."   V hatever militates against
common sense and exmtivtcq cannot be received ap
evidence.
LADY. Their infinitessimal Joes' leaa me to conclude
that their object is to let nt6-e, ii. all cases, take care
of herself.  Much harm  cannot be dcne except by
inducing delay.
DOCTOR. That alone should condtmPn ile wiIole mat.
ter, as no where are " delays so dangerous es in me'h
cine, a life often turning on an hour of time. iMy studN
of Hannehman has led me to. consider him  possesses
of remarkable talent, and that the whole system of ho
mceopathy is nothing more than a disguised recommendation of fascination. Do you remember how he tests the
strength of his medicines?
11




122                 FASCINATION
LADY. By the number of dilutions; t ie greater the
nunber, the more powerful the medicine.
DOCTOR. That simple fact should have led to the discovery of his meaning, the solution of his enigma. Ile
directs his medicines to be prepared by hand, and considers them increased in strength proportionally as the
hand is laid upon them: this is nothing more than a
practice, long known, of mesmerizing medicine for patients.
LADY. Still I should have thought that where so
much was at stake, he would have given some intimation of his secret more plainly than that; that he would
even in some cases direct them to fascinate.
DOCTOR. He has done so: where nature alone will
cure, or the expectant plan will suffice, he directs the
minimum doses; in more serious cases, you must, to use
his own words, "stroke the patient down with the palm
of the hand till relief be obtained."
His object, in concealing his real sentiments, was
doubtless to escape the ridicule of the age in which he
lived. If he possessed an acute sense of mirthfulness,
great must have been his merriment to have known that
glass factories in many countries, were solely employed
blowing his- little vials; thousands of apothecaries engaged in manufacturing medicines to fill those vials;
machines inventing to prepare nis triturations and dilutions; and, finally, hosts of the sons of Esculapius,
equipped with whole pharmaceutical establishments in
their coat pockets, visiting their patients, and who, ever
and anon, were drawing forth the organcn of him upon
whom they looked as more than mortal, to seek fresh
instructions regarding the best nethod of dispensing
sugar plums.




OMMO W 0N SALIa              123
It is rarely that persons wrill takel pains to examine
into any system of medicine; the small amount of medical knowledge out of the pale of the profession, owing
most likely to the small amount within, has given an
idea that the whole subject is nothing more than a system of guessing; and those entertaining this view are
rather pleased with homoopathy, as being a practice in
which wrong guessing cannot produce much detriment.
Another source of injury to the science of medicine
has been various hypotheses started by men who were
not properly versed in the laws of life. During the
prevalence of a certain deadly pestilence in the West
Indies, the blood was, in all cases in those affected, dark,
almost black.  A physician, who had been bleeding a
patient, found the dark blood, as soon as it gained the
bowl, become of a bright healthy-looking red; and, upon
examining the matter, found the florid appearance was
owing to some table salt which had been accidentally left
in the bowl; his sapient brain instantly conceived the
idea that it was the loss of muriate of soda (common
salt) in the blood that caused the fever. This fancied
discovery changed his whole plan of treatment, and his
after practice consisted in injecting solutions of salt
into the veins, and giving it by the stomach.  His fellow
physicians followed his example as soon as the matter
was published.  The uniformly fatal termination of all
cases treated in this absurd manner at length obliged
the doctors to relinquish the practice; but the hypothesis, like the bodies of ancient heroes, was accompanied
to the grave by thousands of victims slaughtered to its
honour.
LADY. What is the meaning of transfusion of blood 
DocTOn. It was discovered that where death would




124                 VACCINATION.
ensue from the loss of olood, taking a supply from the
veins of another and directly introducing it into that of
the patient, would  preserve life in many instances.
The French received it M;th open arms, and were eager
to embrace the advantages it offered.  Supposing the
secret of perpetual youth was made known, old age
hastened to fill its veins with the blood of juvenescence.
Though the majority who tried the plan fell victims to
its fatal influence, it still continued to be the enthusiasm
of the day till a prince of the blood royal was added to
the list of victims. The laws immediately made it a
penal offence, and it fell into disuse.
A knowledge of the laws of life would have prevented
all this victimizing, as it would also correct many popular prejudices.  You wished me, some time since, to
vaccinate your son George, because more than seven
years had elapsed since he had taken the cow-pox, and
I could not then explain the reason why I did not think
it was necessary.
Our bodies are perpetually changing; they are not
the same to-morrow as to-day.  This fact, which they
could perceive but not explain, puzzled the ancients:
"To be another, yet the same!" was the astonished exclamation of an old philosopher.  By the constant absorption and deposition of matter, it has been computed
that we undergo a total change every seven years; and
persons informed of this, think the effect of vaccination
worn off, when every particle of matter that was
present in the body at the time of the operation is departed.  The life pninciple is entirely forgotten in this
estimate; impressions made on it are indelible; every
particle of matter it directs to be removed, is replaced
hy an exactly similar particle; thus a depression in the




PRIESTS OF N.ATURE,              125
skin, or mark of any kind, often remains for life. When
perfectly vaccinated, the system is forever surely guarded against the attacks of small-pox; but when any
doubt exists relative to the former effect, it is well to
repeat the operation.
You must not be surprised to find doctors often disagreeing with this explanation -for there are as many sects
in medicine as in theology. Many of them, perhaps a
majority, consider the  human body a vast chemical laboratory, and scoff at the notion of a life power.  Some
of these affirm, and others deny, the existence of an immortal soul, by which last, when allowed to remain,
those who believe in it solve all the living problems
chemistry cannot explain.
Since'the days of Hippocrates, or r ather his ancestor
Esculapius, there has always been a church of faithful
priests of nature, who closely observed her laws "and
obeyed her dictates.  One after another of these has
added his quota to the general amount of information,
till, being fully prepared for generalizing, the great principles of health and disease have been established, which
no doubt will continue in force till this mortal puts on
immortality.  These true physiciains are known under
the name of VITALISTS, or observers of life.
Our opponents, when they talk of uncertainty and
confusion, but proclaim the chaos existing in their own
minds, on which the spirit of truth had never moved t
correct disorder, and impart life and light.
-;1*




CONVERSAT1ON  VIII.
PREVISION.
DOCTOR. The patient, while under the influence of
fascination, will, in some cases, often materially assist
the treatment by prescribing remedies for himself, his
instinctive faculties undergoing remarkable developments.
This power has been named PREVISION; but I think it
is susceptible of a two-fold distinction-that which re
lates to the organism, and by perceiving "a series of
organic movements, consequent one upon the other," and
thence foretelling results; and that which is probably the
communication of a superior being, in attendance upon
us, and whose revelations are made only for special
purposes.
We will name the first organic, and the second
revealed, prevision.
LADY. This organic prevision seems to me nothing
more than a development of the vis medicatrix nature.
DOCTOR. It certainly resembles it in many particulars, and the fact of its being possessed by the lower
animals to a considerable extent favors your view.
Bruce tells us that the African Arabs secure themse.ves from the mortal consequences attending the bite
of serpents, by chewing a particular root, and washing
themselves with an infusion of certain plants in water;
he gives a particular account of several of these plants,
vome of which seem only capable of acting against the




CURATIVE INSTINCTS.             127
power of the serpent; others, only against that of the
scorpion; and a third sort, against both; and all wil
operate both as an antidote and preventive.  Vargus
throws considerable light on the manner in which the
Arabs acquired the knowledge of these plants; he was
a gentleman residing at Santa Fe, (S. A.,) who was
accustomed to venture into the open fields and seize the
largest and most venomous serpents, from whose bite
he was perfectly protected by drinking a small portion
of the juice of the quaco-withy, and inserting some in
punctures made in his hands, breast, and feet. The
name of the plant is derived from the Indian term for
the serpent hawk, who was observed, before attacking
poisonous serpents, to suck its juice, which, when tried
for the same purpose by mankind, proved equally effi
cacious.
An old writer long since remarked that no fact appeared better attested, in the history of human knowledge, than that of a proficiency in the art of practical
physic, far beyond the scope of their other attainments;
forming a curious but unfailing trait in the character of
savages.  Now, whether that proficiency was attained
b) observations made on the instincts of the lower
animals, or the result of their own organic prevision in
a fascinated state, it is hard to discover; perhaps it was
compounded of both.
The apes of Abyssinia are reported to have, by trials
on themselves, first exhibited to men the laxative properties of the cassia fistula. A dog having had some
sheep's blood injected into his veins, was observed to
immediately begin eating grass; and this was considered by the transfusers sufficient evidence that the nature of each animal resided in the blood, and that the




128                TOAD AND SPIDER.
dog wouAd in future partake of the qualities of the
sheep. "A  gross error; the organic prevision of tle
dog warned him  that to produce vomiting was to obtain relief from the pain caused by his cruel tormentors,
hence his conduct; for he is commonly observed, when
sick, to eat a quantity of prickly grass, an expedient
that seldom  fails to answer the purposes of an emetic.
LADY. I was once called, while in the country, to
witness something of this kind.  It was a toad fighting
with a large spider; every time the toad was bitten, it
ran off, and, having eaten some plantain leaves, would
eturn to the fight.  A person present, while the frog
was trying to reach  the plantain, covered it up; he
swelled up immediately, and died in consequence.' am aware that hogs, after being kept for some time
without salt, refuse food, and greedily devour ashes or
cihders in great quantities.  Some time ago, I met with
an anecdote of a gentleman who, when sick, never used
medicine; giving, as reason, the example of a monkey
in'his possession, that, if ill, would abstain from  food
a few days, when'he was always sure to recover health
and spirits.
DOCTOR. But that the fascinated patients of the Egyptian temples  remembered their visions, -I should have
classed such cases in organic prevision: as an instance
of the latter faculty, I will quote a case from the report
of the commission of the Royal Academy of Medicine,
and vouched for' by- them.
" Pierre Cazot, twenty years of age, a working hatter,. born of an
epileptic mother, has been subject, from ten years of age, to attacks of
epilepsy, which have reciirred five or six times a week up to the time
when he entered. the.. H'opital de la- Charite,- in the early part of the
month of August, 1827. He was at once magnetized by M. Foissac, was
elaced in the magnetic sleept at the third sitting, and became somnambua




ORGANIC  PREV SION.                        t29
lie at the tenth, which took place on the 19th of August. It was on
that day, at nine o'clock in the morning, that he announced, that on the
same day, at four o'clock in the afternoon, he should have an attack of
epilepsy; but that it might be prevented, if he was magnetized a little
oefore that period.  The verification of his prediction was preferredand, therefore, no precaution was taken to prevent the paroxysm; we
contented ourselves with observing him, without his having any suspicion
that we were doing so.  At one o'clock he was seized with a violent
headache;-at three he was obliged to go to bed,-and at four o'clock
precisely the paroxysm attacked him  and lasted about five minutes.
Two days afterwards, Cazot being in somnambulism, M. Fouquier sud
denly thrust a pin, of an inch long, between the thumb and the forefinger of the right hand; with the same pin, he also pierced the lobe of the
ear;-and the eyelids being separated, the white of the eye itself was
repeatedly struck with the head of the pin without occasioning the
smallest indication of sensibility.
"The commission met at the Hopital de la Charit6 on the 24th of August,
at nine in the morning, in order to observe the experiments which M.
Fouquier, one of its members, proposed continuing upon this in.valid.
"At this seance, M. Fouquier took his station about six feet in front of
Cazot: he looked at him firmly-made use of no passes with the hands,observed the most perfect silence, and Cazot was asleep in eight minutes.
At three different times, a bottle of ammonia was held under his nosehe countenance became flushed-the breathing quickened, but he did
iot awaken.  M. Fouquier thrust a pin an inch long into the fore-arm;
fterwards, another pin was thrust to the depth of two lines, obliquely
inder the chest;-a third was similarly inserted into the pit of the stonach; and a fourth was thrust perpendicularly into the sole of the foot.
I. Guersent pinched him in the fore-arm so severely as to leave a bruise
snark;-and M. Itard leaned the whole weight of his body upon his
thigh.
"We endeavored to tickle him  by lightly passing a little piece of
paper under the nose, upon the lips, upon the eyebrows, the eyelashes,
the neck, and the soles of the feet-but nothing could awaken him. We
then urged him  with- questions.' How many more attacks will you
have?''During a year.'' Do you know whether these attacks will be
near to each other?'   No.'' Will you have one this month?''I shall
have a fit on Monday the 27th, at twenty minutes before three o'clock.', i I it be a strong one?'' It will not be half so strong as the last.''On
what other da;y will you have an attack?' After an expression of impaticmce, he answered,-' A fortnight hence, that is to say, on the 7th of
Septemlber.'' At what hour?'' At ten minutes before six in the morning.''The illness of one of his children obliged Cazot to leave la Charit6
on that very day, the 24th of August. But it was agreed that he should
return on Monday the 27th, early in the morning, in order that the fit




S.930                     CASE  OF  CAZOT.
which he had declared to be impending in the afternoonr >) that day, a
twenty minutes before three, might be accurately observed
"The steward, having refused to take him in wnen he presented him.
self for admittance, Cazot repaired to the house of M. Foissac in order to
complain of this refusal.  M. Foissac, as he afterwards told us, preferred
dissipating this attack by magnetism, to being a solitary wiitness to the;ccurrence,-and consequently we were unable to establish the exacti.
rude of this prevision.  But it still remained for us to observe the parox
sin which he had announced for the 7th of September.  M. Fouquie.r
hiaving caused Cazot to re-enter the hospitai on the 6ih, undler the pret:ex-t of paying him  some attentions, which he could not pay oiL of that
t'tablishmenet, had him magnetized in the conuse of the day of tie 6th
by M. Foissac, who put him  to sloep by the simple act of his will. and'y steadfastly looking at him.  In this sleep, Cazot repeated, that the next'l;y he should have an attack at ten minuites before six in the morning;-ld that it might be prevented if be ovas m11agnetized a litile before.  "At
-. signal agreed upon, and given by M. Flouqulied;, ML. Foissac, of whoso.::,resence Cazot was ignorant, awakened him in the stame   way as ihI hia;lit him to sle.ep, by the sole act of his w ill, notwithstanldiig the (uesblns which were addressed to the somnalbulist. anld which had no
<~i.her object than to conceal frotm him the momient in which he ought to,,   ia,ken.
"1 In order to be witnesses of this second attack, ite commission 11et.-m the 7th of Septenlbor, at a quarter bcfore six in the morning, in the
vFardt St. Michlel, at 1L Charite.  There they were informed, that the.vwening before, at eight o'clock. Cazot had been seized with headache,
which had tormented him all night, -that hinis pain had occasioned the
t:ensation of beating in his head, and that he had had siie darting sensa:'ions in his ears. Tens minutes before sir o'clock wewitnessed the epileptic
attack, characterized by contractiu and stiffness of the limbs,-by the
repeated and forcible tossing of the head backwards,-by the convulsive
-!osing of the eyelids,-by the retraction of the globe Qf the eye towards;the ro)f of the orbit,-by sighs,-by screams,-by insensibility to severe
pinching,-and by the biting of the tongue between the teeth.  This set
-.,' symptoms 0 lasted for about five minutes, during which, he had two
remissions of some seconds each, and then a painful relaxation of the
limbs, and sense of general exhaustion.
On the 10th of September, at ten o'clock at night, the commission':et again at the house of M. Itard, in order to continue its inquiries
upon Cazot: the latter was in the library, where conversation had beel
carried on with him till half-past seven, at which time, M. Foissac, who
had arrived since Cazot. and had waited in an ante-chamber separated
from the library by two closed doors, and a distance of twelve feet, began
to magnetize him.  Three minutes afterwards Ca2ot said, Itlhiik ihai
Foissac is theeie, for I feel myself oytressed and enfeebled.  At the




CASE OF CAZOT.                           131
expiration of eight minutes he was completely asleep.  lie was again
questioned, and assured us, that in three weeks from that day, that is,
on the first of October he should have an epi.kptic paroxysm at ten
minutes before noon.
"It was desirable to ooserve with equal care, as on the 7th of Septem.
ber. the epileptic attack which he had predicted for the 1st of October.
With this view, the commission met together en that day at half-past
eleven, at the house of M. Georges, manufacturer of hats, No. 17, Rue
des Menetriers, where Cazot lived and worked.'We learned from M
Georges, that he was a very regular workman, whose conduct was excellent,-and that he was, both by the simplicity of his mind, and by his
moral principles, absolutely incapable of lending himself to any decep.
tion; that he had had no attack of epilepsy since the one which the commission had witnessed at la Charite;-that not feeling himself well that
morning, he had remained in his own chamber, and was not at work;that at this moment, there was with him an intelligent man, whose vera.
city and discretion might be relied upon; that this man had not told him
he had predicted an attack for that day;-that it appeared that since the
7th of September, M. Foissac had had some communication with Cazot,
but without permitting the inference that he had in any way recalled to
him his prediction, since, on the contrary, M. Foissac attached the highest
importance to the circumstance, that no one should speak to the patient
on the subject of what he had announced.  At five minutes before twelve
M. Georges went up into a room  situated immediately under that occupied by Cazot, and in one minute afterwards he came to inform us that
the attack had supervened.  We hastily ran to the sixth story, that is,
MM. Guersent, Thillaye, Marc, Gueneau de Mussy, Itard, and the Reporter, where, on our arrival, the watch pointed at one minute to twelve
by the true time. Assembled around the bed of Cazot, we distinguished
the epileptic paroxysm characterized by the following symptoms: tetanic
stiffness of the body and of the limbs-tossing of the head, and occasion.
ally of the trunk of the body backwards,-a convulsive retraction, and
up-turning of the eye, so that the white of the' eye only is visible,-a
very remarkable fullness of the face and neck,-contraction of the jaws,partial convulsive movements of the fibres of the muscles of the. right arm
and fore-arm;-soon afterwards so decided a tetanic attack, that the trunk
of the body was so raised as to form the segment of a circle, of which the
only bases were formed by the head and the feet; which movements
terminated by a sudden collapse.  A few moments after this attack, that
is,.after one minute of relaxation, a new paroxysm, similar to the preced.
ing one, took place; theie were uttered inarticulate sounds-his respiration very frequent and interrupted,-the larynx being rapidly and vio
lontly raised and depressed; and the pulse beating from 132 to 160 in w
minute:-there was no frothing at the mouth, nor contraction of the
thttmbs to the inside of tte palm of the hand.  At the end of six minutes




132:ASE OF CAZC.'.
the paroxysm terminated by deep sighs, by relaxation of the limbs, and
opening of the eyelids.:' The invalid fixed an astonished look upon the persons present, and
complained of being painfully stiff, especially in the right arm."'Although the commission could not doubt the veritable action proiduced by magnetism upon Cazot, even without his knowledge, and at a
certain distance fromn him, yet they desired to acquire a new proof of this
state;-and as it had been proved at the last s6ance, that M. Foissac had
had some communication w-ith him, and therefore might have told him
that'he had announced an attack for the 1st of October, the commission
Were also desirous, while suibmitting Cazot to some new trials, to lead M.
Foissac himself into error as to the day on which his epileptic should
have atnou'ced as the next for the return of the paroxysm.  By this
plan we should shelter ourselves from every species of connivance, even
supposing that a man, whom we had always seen honest and upright,
could possibly have any secret or collusive understanding with a man
without education, without intelligence,-and that in order to deceive
us. We will confess: that we did'not ourselves do this injustice, even in
thought, to either the one or the other; and we feel bound to render the
i.ame testimony to MM. Dupotet.and Chapelain, of whom we have more
than once-had occasion to speak to you.'''The commission met again on the 6th of October at noon, in the
library'of M. Bourdois, at which hour Cazot arrived there with his child,
M. Foissac having been invited to come at half-past twelve: he was exact
to his appointment, and remained in the ante-room, without the cognizance of Cazot, and without any communication with us. We sent to
inform  him, however, by a' side door, that Cazot was seated on a sofa,
placed ten feet from the door, which was closed, and that the commission
requested he would magnetize, and awaken him also at that distance, he,
M. Foissac, remaining in the ante-room, and Cazot in the library.,
"'At twenty-three minutes before one, while Cazot was occupied with
the conversation which we carried on among ourselves, or examining the
pictures which adorn.the library, M. Foissac, placed in'the next room,
began to magnetize him: we remarked that in four minutes Cazot began
slightly to droop the eyelids-that he had a restless unquiet air-and that
in nine minutes he was asleep. M, Guersent, who had attended him for
his epileptic attacks at the Hopital des Enfants, asked him if he remembered him: —he answered affirmatively. -M. Itard inquired, when he
hould,: have a- paroxysm. He replied that it would be. this day four
weeks, (the 3rd of November,) at five minutes after four in the afternoon.
IHe:wasithen asked when he should have another, to which he answered,
after apparent reflection and:hesitation, that it would be five weeks after
the one which he had just indicated-the 9th of December, at half past
nine in the morning.' The proc6s verbal of this s6ance'having been read in the presenceof..




CASE  OF CAZOT.                          13S
M. Foissac in order that he might sign it with us, we wished, as it has
Deen above remarked, to lead him  into error: and in reading it to him,
before presenting it for signature to the members of the commission, the
reporter read, that the first attack of Cazot would take place on Sunday
the 4th of November, whereas the somnambulist had fixed Saturday the
3rd.  He practised the same deceit with regard to the second; and AM
Foissac took a memorandum of these erroneous indications as if they had
been exact; but having some days afterwards put Cazot into somnambulism, as he was accustomed to do, in order to dispel his headaches, he
learned fromn him, that it was the 3rd and not the 4th of November, that
he ought to have a return of the fit, and he informed M. Itard of this on
the 1st of November, believing that there had been an error in the proces verbal, of which, nevertheless, M. Itard maintained the assumed correctness.'" The commission again took all the necessary precautions to enable
them to observe the attack of the 3rd of November;-they met at four
o'clock in the afternoon at the house of M. Georges; they learned from
him,-from his wife,-and from one of the work-people, that Cazot had
gone through his customary labor all the morning, till two o'clook in the
afternoon, and that during his dinner, he had complained of headache;
that nevertheless he had returned to his work, but that the headache
increasing, and having felt giddy, he had retired to his own room-had
gone to bed, and to sleep,  MM. Bourdois, Fouquier, and the reporter,
preceded by M. Georges, then went up stairs to Cazot's rooml: M. Georges alone went in, and found him  in a profound sleep, which he begged
of ius to observe through the door, which was partially open to the staircase. M. Georges spoke loudly to him-shook him rather rudely, pulled
him by the arm without awakening him.  Cazot was then seized with
the painfull symptoms which constitute an attack of epilepsy, and precisely
similar to that which we had formerly observed upon him.
"The second attack announced at the seance of the 6th of October, for
the 9th of December, that is, two months beforehand, took place at half
past nine, or a quarter of an hour later than had been predicted, and was
characterized by the same precursory phenomena, and by the same
symptoms as those of the. 7th of September, 1st of October, and the 3rd of
November.' Lastly, on the 11th of February, 1828, Cazot fixed the period of a
new attack for the 22nd of the following April, at five minutes before.oon-, and this anno ncemelt, like the preceding ones, was verified
w-ithin five minutes, that is, at ten minutes before twelve.. This attack
was remarkable for its violence, for the species of madness with which
Cazot hit his halnd and fore-arm,-for the violent and repeated shocks
with which the body was distorted and for its having lasted thirty-five
minutes, when M. Foissac, who was present, magnetized  ni1n   Very
oun, this convulsiv  staV yielded to the state of magnetic sow, alamb;lisni.
12




' _13 4                   CASE  OF  CAZOT,.'trin'g which Cazot got out of bed, sat down upon a chair, and said tha;
he was very much fatigued; —that he shclild have two more attacks noa
of which-shoald be nine weeks from  to-morrow  (June 23rd,) at three
mniutes aFter six.  He would not fix the second attack, because he must
think of what would take place beforehand, (at this moment he sent away
his wife, who was present,) and added, that in about three weeks after
the attack of the 23rd of JuSe, he should go mad; that his m1adl  ss vwould
-.at three days, l uring which ht should be so mischievous. that he sbhould
attack every body;-that he should even ill-treat his wife and his child 
Ihat he ought not to be left alone with them;-and that he did not know,
that he should not kill an individual without intending it.  It would be
necessary to bleed him from both feet;' then,' said he,' I shall e well for
t,7e month of Augu st; anlZ once cured, the disoorder will not r'eturn, whatever cirecznstances may happen to me afterwards.'
"It was on the 22nd of April, that all these pievisions were announced
to us, and two (lays afterwards, the 24th, Cazot w.ishing to sat>  a 1rnaway horse which had got the bit between his teeth, was violently thrown
down against the wheel of a cabriolet, which occasioned a fracture of the
teft supra-orbitary ridge, and bruised him horribly.  He was conveyed to
the Hopital Beaujon, where he died on the 13th of May.  On inspecting
thel body, and opening the head, there were found traces of recent nmenbranous inflammartion,-purulent collections under the integuments of the
tkull, and at the extremity of the choroid plexus, a substance externally
white, but yellowish internally, and which contained s-)lne smlall hydatdls
"We see in this history a young man, subject for years to attacks of
epilepsy, for which he had been treated successively at the H-opital (es
Enfalnts, and at Saint Louis, and in consequence of which he had been
exempted from military service.  Magnetism  acted upon him, although
he was perfectly ignorant of what was going on,-and he became somnambulist.  The symptoms of his disorder wvere ameliorated; the paroxysms diminished inl frequency; —his headaches, his oppression disappeared under the inflfuenee of magnetism;-he prescribed for himself a
treatment appropriate to the nature of his malady, and fiom which he,roomised his restoration. Magnetized Jith.out hi s moewledge, and from a
distance, he fell into sonm-ambtuliism, and was aroused from it with the
_amne promptitude, as if he had been magnetized close at hand.  Finally,.
-e indicated with extraordinary precision, one or two months beforehand,.
the day and the hour of the return of the epileptic attack.  Yet notwvitfle
slandin.g he was theIs endowed w'ith7 p'reviZsion for attacks at so great a disI/ace of time, and even for attacks whiich swould never take place, h, di:'
rt.ot foresee, that in tiwo days he shonld meet with, a fatal accidcet.
"Without attempting to reconcile all which at first sight is apparently
contradictory in such a history, the commission would draw  your atteu
ion to the fact that tlhe previsions of Cazot related only to his attacks:-;'nar they are reducible to the kntowaledge of organic modifications i1 him




PREVVI.SON  OF S0CIt.TES.                    135i
ilf, which were preparing, and which would arrive as the necessary
result of the interiorfunctions; that these previsions, although of greater
extent, are really precisely similar to those of certain other epileptics, who
recognize by divers premonitory symptoms, such as headache, giddiness,
irritability, the autra epileptica, that they shall soon have an attack.  Is it
then surprising, that these somnanmblists, whose sensations, as yca have
seen, are extremely acute, should be able to foresee their attacks a long
time previously, according to some symptoms, or interior impressions,
which escape the notice of waking men?  It is in this way, gentlemen,
that we may understand the prevision attested by Aretaeus in two parts
of his immortal works,-by Sauvages, who also records an example, —and
by Cabanis. Let us also add, that the prevision of Cazot, was not absolute, and unalterable, but conditional; since in predicting an attack. he
announced that it would not take place, if he was magnetized, and that
in point of fact, it did not take place:-the prevision is;wholly organic,
wholly interior.  Thus we easily understand, why he did not foresee an
event wholly exterior,-that is to say, that accident led him to meet a runaway horse,-that he was imprudent enough to try to stop him, and that
he received a mortal injury.  Thus he might foresee an attack which was
not to happen. It is the hand of a v'atch. which in a given time, ought
to pass over a certain portion of its facial circle, and which does not describe that portion, because the watch is broken."
Cases of revealed prevision  are quite  as common ax
those of organic, and have been  known a much longer
oeriod.  Socrates  presented  a remarkable instance  of
-his kind. He informed his disciples that he possessed
a genius, who told him future events and directed his
conduct, and whom   he never failed to obey.  He often
warned  his friends (by the advice  he told  them   of his
genius,) against certain courses of action, and, in every
case where they refused to profit by his counsel, disastrous results fo!3owed.
He predicted all the events of any importance in his
own life, and lastly, his death and its mode.  After sentence  was passed  on  him, his enemies waited  but the
return of a ship to put it into execution.   The night before the  vessel was  expected  in, his  disciples  were
grieving  bitteiry to  think  that before another evening




136                PREVISION  )F CAZOTTE.
tile philosopher would be taken from them; he informed
the sorrowful group around him that the ship had been
injured at sea, and would not return for thiee days; and
the event happened as he predicted.
Cazotte's famous prediction was verified  even to the'minutest point, in the history of the French revolution.
Newnham  takes it from  La Harpe; you cannot fail to oe
intensely interested in its perusal-its truth is undoubted.
" It appears but as yesterday, -and yet, nevertheless, it was at the beginning of the year 1788. We were dining with one of our brethren at the
Academy-a man of considerable wealth and genius. The company was
numerous and diversified-courtiers, lawyers, academicians, etc., and,
according to custom, there had been a magnificent dinner. At dessert,
the wines of Malvoisin and Constantia added to the gayety of the guests
that sort of liberty which is sometimes forgetful of bon tonl:-we had
arrived in the world, just at that'time when anything was permitted that
would raise a laugh. Chamfort had read to us some of his impious and
libertine tales, and even the great ladies had listened without having
recourse to their fans. From this arose a deluge of jests against religion.
One quoted a tirade from the Pucelle; another recalled the philosophic
lines of Diderot-'Et des boyaux du dernier prgtre,
Serrez le cou du dernier roi'for the sake of applauding them. A third rose, and, holding his glass in
his hand, exclaimed: d   Yes, gentlemen, I am as sure that there is no God,,as I am sure that Homer is a fool;' and, in truth, he was as sure of the
one as of the other. The conversation became more serious; much admiration was expressed on the revolution which Voltaire had effected,
and it was agreed that it was his first claim to the reputation he enjoyed.
He had given the prevailing tone to his age, and had been read in the
ante-chamber as well as in the drawing-room.  One of the guests told us,
while bursting with laughter, that his hairdresser, while powdering his
hair, had said to him:' Do you observe, sir, that although I am but
poor miserable barber, I have no more religion than any other?' IW
concluded, that the revolution must soon be consummated; that it wa
indispensable that superstition and fanaticism should give place to philos 
ophy, and we began to calculate the probability of the period when this
should be, and which of the present company should live to see the reig&
of reason. The oldest complained that they could scarcely flatter them.
slves with the hope; the younger rejoiced that they might entertain
ibis very pr)bable expectation; and they congratulated the Academy




CAVZTTE.                           137
sbpecially for having prepared this great woric, and for having been the
great rallying point, the centre, and the prime mover (if the liberty,..
thought.
"One only of the guests had not taken part in all the joyousness of this
conversation, and had even gently and cheerfully checked our splendid
enthusiasm. This was Cazotte, an amiable and original man, but unhappily infatuated with the reveries of the illuminati.  He spoke, and with
the most serious tone.'Gentlemen,' said he,'be satisfied; you will all
see this great and sublime revolution, which you so much desire. You
know that I am a little inclined to prophesy; I repeat; you will see it.'
He-was answered by the common rejoinder:' One need not be a conjuror
to see that.''Be it so; but perhaps one must be a little more than conjuror for what remains for me to tell you. Do you know what will be
the consequence of this revolution-what will be the consequence to all
of you, and what will be the immediate result-the well-established
effect-the thoroughly-recognized consequence to all of you who are
here present?''Ah!' said Condorcet, with his insolent and half-suppressed smile,'let us hear-a philosopher is not sorry to encounter a
prophet.''You, Monsieur de Condorcet-you will yield up your last
breath on the floor of a dungeon; you will die from poison, which you
will have taken, in order to escape from execition-frorn poison which
tie happiness of that time will oblige you to carry about your person.'
"At first, astonishment was most marked; but it was soon recollected
that the good Cazotte is liable to dreaming, though apparently wide
awake, and a hearty laugh is the consequence.' Monsieur Cazotte, the
relation which you give us is not so agreeable as your Diable Amoureux,:,a novel of Cazotte's.)' But what diable has put into your head this prison, and this poison,
and these executioners'  What can all these have in: common with philosophy and the reign of reason?'This is exactly what I say to you; it
is in the name of philosophy-of humanity-of liberty; it is under the
reign of reason that it will happen to you thus to end your career; and it
will indeed be the reign of reason, for then she will have her temples,
and indeed, at that time, there will be no other temples in France than
the temples of reason.''By my truth,' said Chamfort, with a sarcastic
smile,'you will not be one of the priests of those temples.'.'I do not
hope it; but you, Monsieur de: Chamfort, who will be one, and. most
worthy to be so, you will open. your veins, with twenty-two cuts of a
razor,.and yet you will not die till some months afterward.' They
looked at each other, and laughed again.'You, Monsieur Vicq d'Azir,
you will not open your own veins, but you will cause yourself to be
bled six times in one day, during a paroxysm  of. the goat, in order
to make more sure of your end, and you will die in the night. Yout
Monsieur de.Nicolai,you will die upon the scaffold; you, Monsieur Bailly
on the scaffold; you, Monsieur de Malesherbes, on tie scaffold.''Ah
12*




138                           CAZOTTE.
t-od be thanked,' exclaimed Roucher,' it seems that Monsieur has no
eye but for the Academy; of it he has just made a terrible execution, and, thank heaven.....'You! you also will die upon the scaffold.'
Oh, what an admirable guesser,' was uttered on all sides;' he has sworn
so exterminate us all.'' No, it is not I who have sworn it.',  But shall
we, then, be conquered by the Turks or the Tartars?  Yet again..'
Not at all; I have already told you, you will then be governed only by
philosophy-only by reason.  They who will thus treat you will Le all
philosophers-will always have upon their lips the self-same phrases
which you have been putting forth for the last hour-will repeat all your
maxims —-and will quote, as you have done, the verses of Diderot, and
from  La Pucelle.' They then whispered among themselves:'You see
that he is gone mad;' for he preserved, all this time, the most serious and
solemn manner.'Do you not see that he is joking, and you know that,
in the character of his jokes, there is always much of the marvellous.''Yes,' replied Chamfort,' but his marvellousness is not cheerful; it savors too much of the gibbet; and when will all this happen?''Six
years will not pass over, before all that I have said to you shall be
accomplished.'
" Here are some astonishing miracles (and, this time, it was I myself
who spoke), but you have not included me in your list.''But you
will be there, as an equally extraordinary miracle; you will then be a
Christian.'
"Vehement exclamations on all sides.' Ah,' replied Chamfort,' I am
comforted; if we shall perish only when La Harpe shall be a Christian,
we are immortal.'
"'As for that,' then observed Madame la Duchesse de Gimnnmont,'we women, we are happy to be counted for nothing in these revolutions: when I say for nothing, it is not that we do not always mix ourselves up with them a little; but it is a received maxim that they take
no notice of us, and of our sex.'' Your sex, ladies, will not protect you
this time; and you had far better meddle with nothing, for you will be
treated entirely as men, without any difference whatever.'' But what,
then, are you really telling us of, Monsieur Cazotte? You are preaching
to us the end of the world.'' I know nothing on this subject; but what
I do know is, that you, Madame la Duchesse, will be conducted to the
scaffold, you and many other ladies with you, in the cart of the executioner, and with your hands tied behind your backs.'' Ah! I hope
that, in that case, I shall at least have a carriage hung in black.'' No,
madame; higher laclies than yourself will go, like iyo,, in the common
car, with their hands tied behind them.'   Higher ladies! what: the
princesses of the blood?''Still more exalted personages.'  Here a
sensible emotion pervaded the whole company, and the countenance of
the host was dark and lw-ering; they began to feel that the joke was
becruno too serious




JOAN  OF  ARC.                           139
Madame de Grammonot, in order to dissipate the cloud, took no notice
of the reply, and contented herself with saying in a careless tone:' You
see that he will not leave me even a confessor.'' No, madame, you wil;
not have one-neither you, nor any one besides.  The last victim  to
whom  Lhis ikvor will be afforded will be......' He stopped for a
moment.  * Well! who then will be the happy mortal to whom  this
prerogative will be given?''Tis the only one which he will have
then retained-and that will be the king of France.'
The master of the house rose hastily, and every one wvith him.  lie
walked up to Ml. Cuzotte, and addressed him with a tone of deep emotion:'My cear Monsieur Cazotte, this mournful joke has lasted loug
enough. You carry it too far-even so far as to derogate from  the society in which you are, and from your own character.'  Cazotte answered
not a word, and was preparing to leave, when Madame de Graminont,
who always sought to dissipate serious thought, and to restore the lost
gayety of the party, approached him, saying:' Monsieur the prophet,
who has foretold us of our good fortune, you have told us nothing of your
own.' HIe remained silent for some time, with dlowncast eyes.' Madame, have you ever read the siege of Jerusaleil i; Josephlus?'   Yes!
who has not read that! But answer as if I had. ver read it.''Well
then, madame, during the siege, a man. for seven days in succession.
went round the ramparts of the city, in sight of the besiegers and besieged, crying unceasingl. with an ominous and thundering voice: Wo
to Jerusalem!-and the seventh time he cried:  tVo to Jerusalem —wo to
myself!  And at that moment an enormous stone projected from one of
the machines of the besieging army, and struck him and destroyed him.''
Joan of Arc's case will appropriately follow that of
Cazotte; it is  also  a  matter  of history,  and  may  be
relied on without the slightest hesitation.   Like Socrates,
she openly  professed  herself under the  guidance  of a
familiar genius, whom   she  called  St. Michael.   She at
length fell into the  power of the English, by whom  she
was (as might be expected  fiom  the  ignorance  of the
iage), regarded  as a witch; they  tried  her as a heretic
and  sorceress  by  an  ecclesiastical tribunal, and  after
condemnation, burnt her at Rouen.   I will take the ac.
count from Newnham:
" On the 12th of February, 1428, on which -he disastrous battle of
Rouvray-Saint-Denis was fought, Joan said to M. Robert de Baudricourt




140                      JOAN  OF ARC.
Governor of Vatcouleurs, that the king had suffered great losses befort
Orleans, and would experience further losses unless she were sent to
him. The exactitude of this announcement determined Baudricourt to
send her.
"The next day, on her departure, many persons asked Joan how she
could possibly undertake this journey, since the whole country was overrun with soldiers; she answered that she should find the way clear. No
accident happened to her, nor to those who accompanied her, and even
very few difficulties during the whole journey, which lasted eleven days,
through an enemy's country, at the close of winter, over a distance of one
hundred and fifty leagues, and intersected by several deep rivers.
"On the 27th of February, when she was about to be presented to the
king, a man on horseback, who saw her passing, employed some blasphemous expressions. Joan heard him, and, turning her head, said,' Ha,
dost thou blaspheme the name of God, and yet so near to death?' In
about an hour afterwards, this man fell into the water and was drowned.
"The following month, Joan informed the doctors, who were commis
sioned to examine her at Poictiers,"1. That the English would be beaten; that they would raise the
seige (f Orleans; and that this city would be delivered from the said
English;
" 2. That the king would be consecrated at Rheims;
" 3. That the city of Paris would be restored to its loyalty;
"4. That the Duke of Orleans would return from England.
"The king, in coulcil, having determined to send Joan to Orleans,.
they commissioned her to conduct a convoy of provisions, of which the
place stood in the greatest need."  "It was observed to her, that it would
hie a difficult enterprise, considering its fortifications, and the English beeiegers, who were strong and powerful.' By the help of my God,' answered she,'we will put them  into Orleans easily, and without any
attempt to prevent us on the part of the English.'"
"The generals of Charles VII., not daring to take the route which
Joan of Arc pointed out to them. the convoy was obliged to halt at some
leagues from Orleans, from the want of water, and from adverse winds.
Everybody was confounded and in grief; but Joan announced that the
wind would soon change, and that the provisions would be easily thrown
into the town, in spite of the English; all which was completely verified.
"The English retained one of the heralds whom Joan had sent to
summon them to surrender;-they even' wished to burn him alive — and
they wrote to the university of Paris to consult upon the subject: Joan
assured them, that they would do him no harm.
"When Joan appeared on the redoubt called the boulevard die la
Belle-Croix, to summon them to raise the siege, these loaded her with
abuse, especially one of the officers, to whom Joan replied, that  he spoka'alsely, and in spite of them all, they would soon depart; but that hA




JOAN OF ARC.                  -      141
would never see it, and that many of his people would be killed. In fact
when the fort of Tournelles was taken this officer wished to make his
escape by the bridge which separated the fort from the suburbs; but an
arch gave way beneath his feet, and he, with all his men, were drowned.
"Having introduced the convoy of provisions and ammunition into
Orleans, Joan foretold to the inhabitants, that in five days not an English
man would remain before their walls.
"On the 6th of May, Joan informed her confessor, that on the next
day she should be wounded above the bosom, while before the fort at the
end of the bridge.  And in fact she received a lance between the neck
and the shoulder, which passed out nearly half a foot behind the neck.
"On the morning of the 7th, her host having invited her to partake of
some fish which had been brought him, she desired him to keep it till
night, because she would then bring him a stranger who would do. his
part in eating it. She added, that after having taking the Tournelles, she
would repass the bridge-a promise which seemed impossible to any
body; but which nevertheless was fulfilled, like all the other impossibili.
ties.
"The irresolution of the king was the greatest punishment to Joan:-'I shall only continue for a year, and a very little more,' said she;'I
must try to employ that year well.'
" The Duchesse d'Alengon was greatly alarmed, on seeing her husband
at the head of the army, which was about to enforce the coronation of
the king, at Rheims. Joan told her to fear nothing-that she would
bring hinm back safe and sound, and in a better condition than he was at
that moment.
"At the attack of Jargean, the Duc d'Alenqon was attentively reconnoitering the outworks of the town, when Joan told him to remove from
the spot on which he was standing, or that he would be killed by some
warlike missile.  The duke removed, and almost immediately afterwards,
a gentleman of Anjou, by the name of M. de Lade, was struck in the very
place which the duke had just left.
"The English generals, Talbot, Searles, and Falstaff, having arrived,
with four thousand men, to the relief of the Castle of Beaugenie, in order
to raise the siege of that place, Joan predicted that the English would
not defend themselves-wonld be conquered, and that this triumph
would be almost bloodless on the part of the royal army; and that there
would be very few-not quite to say no one-killed of the French com.
batants. In truth, they lost but. one man,, and lmost all the English
were killed or taken.; Joan had told the king not to fear any want of troops for the expedi
tirn to Rheims, for that there would be plenty of persons, and many:
would follow him; in truth, the army increased visibly from day to day
anjl numbered twelve thousand men by the end of June, 1429.'When the army had arrived before Troyes, that city shut its gates,




142                       JOAN  OF ARC.
and refused to yield.  After five days waiting, and useless efforts ofcapitut
lation, the majority of the council advised to return to Gien; but Joan
declared that in less than three days she would introduce the king inti
the city, by favor or by force.  The chancellor said that they would even
wait six days, if they could be sure of the truth of her promises.' Doubt
nothing,' said she-' you will be master of the city to-morrow.' Immediately preparations were made for the projected assault, which sc
alarmed the inhabitants and their garrison, that they capitulated next day.
"Charles feared that the city of Rheims would oppose a long resistance to his arms, and that it would be difficult to make himself master
of it, because he was deficient in artillery.' Have no doubt,' said Joan,' for the citizens of the town of Rheims will anticipate you.  Before you
are close to the city, the inhabitants will surrender.' On the 16th of July,
the principal inhabitants of the city laid its keys at the feet of the king.
"During her captivity, Joan made the following predictions, on the
first of March, 1430, in the presence of fifty-nine witnesses, whose names
are given faithfully by IM. le Brun de Charmettes:-' Before seven years
are past, the English will abandon a larger prize than they have done before Orleans, and will lose everything in France.  They will experience
the severest loss they have ever felt in France; and this will be by a
great victory which God will bestow upon the French.'
" Paris was actually retaken by the French, under the command of the
Marshal de Richeiont, and the Count de'Dunois, on the 14th of April,
1436.
"As to the great victory which should prove so fatal to the English, M.
le Brun thinks may be understood either the battle of Tormigny, gained
by the French in 1450, and which resulted in the conquest of Normandy,
or the battle of Castillon, fought in 1452, in which the renowned Gen,
Talbot perished, and which completed the submission of la Guienne to
France.
" In order to explain the expression, will lose everything in France, the
same author recalls the fact, that the people in general restricted the term
France to what had originally composed the immediate dominion of Hugo
Capet and his successors, as l'Isle de France, l'Orleannais, le Berri, la
Touraine, etc.  Thus Joan of Arc, born at Domremy, at the extremity of
la Champagne, said that St. Michael had ordered her to go into France.'
LADY. I have been reading a somewhat similar ac.
count, belonging, I presume, to the same class, in the
"Use of the Body in Relation to the Mind," by Moore;
he says:
" There is another form of supersensuous vision, for the existence of
which we can scarcely discover sufficient reason unless to intimate ax




IHE_ RICH  ZSCHOKKE.                        143
undeveloped faculty, which, in another state, may be proper to man.
rae nature and character of this strange endowment will be best
expressed in the language of one who believed himself to be possessed
of it. Heinrich Zschokke, a man remarkable for the extent of his honorable labors as a statesman and an author, solemnly writes the following
passage in his autobiography:' It has happened to me sometimes, on
mty first meeting with strangers, as I silently listened to their discourse,
that their former life, with lmazny trifling circumstances therewith connected, or frequently some particular scene in that life, has passed quite
involuntarily, and, as it were, dream-like, yet perfectly distinct, before
me.  During this time I usually feel so entirely absorbed in the contemplation of the stranger's life, that at last I no longer see clearly the face
of the unknown wherein I undesignedly read, Inor distinctly hear the
voices of the speakers, which before served in some measure as a commentary on the text of their features.  For a long time I held such
visions as delusions of the fancy, and the more so as they showed me
even the dress and emotions of the actors, rooms, furniture, and other accessories.' He was at length astonished to find his dream-pictures invariably confirmed as realities, and he relates this instance as an example
of his visionary gift:' One day, in the city of Waldshut, I entered an inn
(the Vine) in company with two young students.  We supped with a
numerous company at the table d'hote, where the guests were making
very merry with the peculiarities of the Swiss, with Mesmer's magnetism, Lavater's physiognomy, etc   One of my companions, whose national
pride was wounded by their mockery, begged me to make some reply,
particularly to a handsome young man who sat opposite to us, and who
had allowed himself extraordinary license. This man's life was at that
moment presented to my mind.  I turned to him, and asked whether he
would answer me candidly if I related to him some of the most secret
passages of his life, I knowing as little of him personally as he did of me.
lie promised, if I were correct, to admit it frankly. I then related what
ny vision had shown me, and the whole company were made acquainted
with the private history of the young merchant-his school years, his
youthful errors, and, lastly, with a fault committed in reference to the
strong-box of his principal.  I described the uninhabited room  with
whitened walls, where, to the right of the brown door, on a table, stood
o black money-box, etc.  A dead silence prevailed during the whole
narrative, which I alone occasionally interrupted by inquiring  whether I
spoke the truth.  The startled young man confirmed every particular,
and even, what I had scarcely expected, the last mentioned.  Touched
by his candor, I shook hands with him, and said no more.  He is, prow
rbly, still liing."'




CONVERSATION  IX.
SOMNAMIBULISM.
LADY. I have been reading Dendy's Philosophy of
Mystery, and have marked a number of cases which
seem to bear much resemblance to some of the stages
of fascination.
He says that somnambulism is the most perfect paradox among the phenomena of sleep, as it exhibits actions
without a consciousness of them; indeed so complete
is suspension of sensibility that contact, naV, intense
inflictions, do not produce that mental consciousness
which is calculated to excite alarm or even attention.
He says that in London, 1833, a man was brought
before Alderman Thorp, who had a parcel cut from his
arm, although he had strapped it tightly on to prevent
this, as he was often falling asleep during his walk.
Yet, even then, he usually took the parcels io the propel
directions.
The crew of a revenue boat, on the coast of Ireland,
about two o'clock in the morning, picked up a man
swimming in the water. He had, it appeared, left his
house about twelve, and walked two miles over a most
dangerous path, and had swam about one mile. After
he was taken into the boat he could not be persuaded
that he was not still in his warm bed at home.
In 1834, Marie Pan was admitted into the hospital at
Boideaux, France; her left arm and hand covered with




NATURAL SLEEPWAKING.              145
deep and bleeding gashes, its tendons projecting, and the
bones broken.  She had, in her sleep, gone into a loft to
cut wood with a hedging bill; thinking she was cutting
thle wood, she had hacked her forearm and hand until
she fainted away and fell, bathed in her own blood.
She had felt no pain, but merely a sensation, as if the
parts were pricked with pins.
In 1832 some fishermen near Brest, in France, were
surprised at finding, at two o'clock in the morning, a
boy about twelve years old, up to his waist in the sea,
fishing for flounders, of which he drew up five or six.
Their surprise, however, was increased  to wonder
when, on approaching him, they found he was fast
asleep.  He was taken home and put to bed, but was
immediately afterward attacked with a raging fever.
In 18-, says the Augsburg Gazette, Dresden was the
scene of a melancholy spectacle. As early as seven ir
the morning a female was seen walking on the roof of
one of the loftiest houses in this city, apparently occupied
in preparing some ornaments as a Christmas present
The house stood as it were alone, being much higher
than those adjoining it, and to draw  her from  her
perilous situation was ifmpossible.  Thousands df spectators had assembled in the streets. It was discovered
to be a handsome girl, nineteen years of age, the
daughter of a master baker, possessing a small independence, bequeathed to her by her mother.  She continued
her terrific promenade for hours, at times sitting on the
parapet and dressing her hair. The police came to the
spot, and various means of preservation were resorted
to. In a few minutes the street was thickly strewn
with straw, and beds were called for from the house,
but the heartless father, influenced by the girl's step18




146                  OPPOSITION
mother, refused them.  Nets were suspended from the
balcony of the first floor, and the neighbors fastened
sheets to their windows. All this time the poor girl
was walking in perfect unconsciousness, sometimes
gazing at the sky, and at others singing or talking to
herself.  Some persons succeeded in getting on the
roof, but dared not approach her for fear of the consequences if they awoke her.  Towards eleven o'clocl
she approached the very verge of the parapet, leaned
forward and gazed upon the multitude beneath; every
one felt that the moment of the catastrophe had arrived.
She rose up, however, and returned calmly to the
window by which she had got out.  When she saw
there were lights in the room, she uttered a piercing
shriek, which was re-echoed by thousands below, and
fell dead into the street.
DOCTOR. You  have  extracted  all that is worth
noticing in the Philosophy of Mystery; for a man is
certainly unfit to treat on physiology who believes, like
Dendy, that electricity is the source of life, and who,
driven to confess the fact of the existence of several cases
of apathetic trance produced by fascination, which he
quotes, says, "It is, I believe, quite true, that they were
unconscious of the operation; but even this is not safe.
Pain is given us as warning against extreme injury,
that by our complaint or suffering, the surgeon's mind
may be on its guard."
Newnham says that the phenomena of somnambulism
are established and recognized by the antagonists of
fascination. And that in fact the knowledge of somnambulism rescues many of these natura. phenomena
from the alledged dominion of sorcery and of the black.
nrt, under which they have been classed by the ignoranI




FAIRY STORIES.                14l
and the short-sighted, and restores them to their proper
position as the natural effects of natural causes.
Dendy, continually rushing into dilemmas from which
he cannot extricate himself without overthrowing his
former positions, remarks, "That whatever may be the
influence imparted by tractions, the phenomena of
excited somnambulism are similar or precisely to those
spontaneously occurring."  "In a word, mesmerism is
true in part: it may induce catalepsy, somnambulism,
exalted sensation, apathetic sensibility, suspended circulation, even death. Clairvoyance and prophecy alone
are the impositions as regards its effects," etc.
In both cases the parties remember nothing whatever
of the recurrences experienced in sleep-waking. The
actions of many natural sleep-wakers explain the origin
of many stories of pixey and fairy, who would enter, in
some cases, the houses of their friends at night, and do
up all their work for them, and in others cause much
trouble, to whom they bore ill-will, by breaking their
crockery, overturning chairs, etc. A tailor in this city,
who worked for a shop which furnished suits made to
order at twenty-four hours notice, had taken a coat to
finish by the next morning, under the expectation of his
wife assisting him. Arrived at home, his wife was ill,
and unable to do anything to help him beyond sewing
the sleeves. He worked steadily at his task during the
(lay, but so much did his unusual efforts exhaust him,
that despite himself he went to bed with a heavy heart,
for he dreaded, with good reason, the loss of his situation
from  the disappointment of his employers.  When
roused at an early hour the next morning, he hastily prepared to resume his work, when, to his utter astonishment, he found the coat perfectly finished, and done too,




148             rEIFORRMING DREAMS.
he confessed, in a much better manner than At was possi
ble for him to do it. Immediately perceiving that it
was the deed of his guardian angel, he fell on his kneez
and gave thanks. He told me that it was the only way
in which the coat could have been made; for, on
account of his exertions the preceding day, he was
utterly incapable of working, and the next morning could
do little more than stand. He had evidently risen in the
night and finished the coat himself, and must have done
this in complete darkness, for a light would have, in all
probability, (owing to a peculiar state,) awakened his
wife, and they had but one room.
Marcus, the freedman of Pliny, dreamed that a
barber, sitting on his bed, had shaved him, and awoke
well trimmed; Marcus had unconsciously shaved himself. Dendy mentions that early one morning, at a
farm-house in Sussex, England, an immense number of
foot-prints were observed by the men about a gate,
which were not there over night. On their return the
servant girl was relating her dream; that she was told
the cows had got into a wrong field, and that she had
gone out, opened the gate, and driven them back. She
had been observed by one of the family performing her
dream. A young gentleman at Brenstein was seen to
rise, get out of his window on the roof, and take a
brood of young magpies from their nest, and wrap them
in his cloak. He then returned quietly to his bed, and
in the morning related his dream to his two brothers,
They had slept with him and witnessed this feat, of
which he would not be persuaded until they showed him
the birds in his cloak.
Dr. Gall relates a case of a Mr. Roggenback, whc
informed him, in the presence of many persons, that he




NATURAL SLEEP-WAKING.                   149
nad been a somnambulist from  infancy.  In this state
his tutor had made him  read, look for places on the
map, (and which he found more readily than awake,)
and perform many other actions, all of which he per
formed more readily than in his waking moments. All
this time his eyes would be open and fixed; he did not
move them in the least, but would turn his head to vary
their direction.
A story is credited to Professor Upham of Bowdoin
College, relating to a farmer who rose in his sleep, went
to his barn, and thrashed out five bushels of rye in the
dark, separating the grain from  the straw  with great
exactness. Captain Brown, of Portland, Me., while at
sea, became very ill and confined to his berth. Those
on board noticed a peculiar stiffness and rigidity of his
limbs.  Though encompassed by timber, and unable to
go on deck, he saw  distinctly all that passed arocnd
him; describing  many vessels that passed  his own,
together with several at a great distance, at anchor;
and told all that took place on board of them. His
descriptions were confirmed in every instance where it
was possible to make inquiry.
The letter of Mr. John Wise, of Lancaster, Pa., will
aptly conclude our cases of natural somnambulism:"From the age of ten to fifteen, it was almost a nightly habit with me
to get up from my bed and travel through the whole house, unbariing the
doors and walking through the different apartments with the greatest ease
in utter darkness, sometimes unlocking the back door, and travelling into
the yard and out-houses, stopping at different places, and examining, apparently with the nicest precision, such articles as happened to fall in my
way.
"Yet after being awakened, not the slightest recollection remained of
what had happened. During some of these nocturna. excursions, I open
ed a dormar windlow, and crawled out thence to the very apex of the
roof? On one of these occasions, after getting on the top of the house, I
134




150                 CASE OF JOHN WISE.
was awakened by a slight shower of rain, and it was with difficulty I
made a safe descent by way of the next neighbor's house, which obliged
ne to rouse the family in order to get back to my bed again.
"The most singular feat, however, tha: I performed in the somnambu
lic state, was a situation that I got into, out of which I could not extricate
myself again in a waking state, neither could I, upon trial, without the
assistance of something to step on first, get into it again. The room in
which I slept at this time, had in it an old-fashioned cradle of double
~ength, made for twin babes. This was placed upon a long narrow keg,
which stood on its ends, so that when standing alongside of it, the sides
of the cradle cime within two inches of my chin, and it was so poised,
that a slight p ponderance either way would capsize it. During one of
my nocturnal erambulations in the middle of the night, by some means I
got into this.adle, without the assistance of anything that would enable
me to step 1 /, save some strange inexplicable cause. It was a cold winter night, and I became awakened while in the act of pulling books from
around me, which were in the cradle at the time. After being perfectly
awakened, it required a great deal of caution to support my centre of
gravity, until I had called the assistance of some of the family to enable
tne to get down.' In the somnambulic state, I am told my eyes are wide open, and
have a glassy appearance. Although I would answer questions, and talk
freely on subjects that were indicated by my conduct, yet it was next to
impossible to awaken me by any other process than the application of cold
water. After a more advanced age, these symptoms have taken a different
form. my nightly perambulations being confined to my chamber, and they
are more particularly connected with the organs of hearing and vision.
It does appear, that, like the inner vision without the aid of the external
eye, there is also a distinct faculty of hearing, independent of the external
ear. This has been experienced by persons of my acquaintance. I have
frequently hastened to the place from whence sounds appeared to come.
Generally it appears to be the calling of my name, by persons whose
voice I can recognize; but the most frequent delusions are through the
eye. These symptoms, from their frequency, although not fearful in themselves, have been of late a source of annoyance, and they always occur in
a half-waking condition. The clearer and smoother the chamber in
which I sleep, the less am I annoyed with these delusions. Of these
symptoms and their operations, I have a tolerable distinct recollection
afterwards. I generally find myself sitting up in bed, in the act of getting
up and moving towards the objects, which mostly appear to be human
beings, and often persons of my acquaintance. Although this happens te
me in a half-waking condition, still, I possess the faculty of reasoning
within myself upon the necessity of not minding these delusions, but
seldom become perfectly satisfied until I get up and try to touch the
object but invariably get awake on being touched by another person.




DISEASED SLEEP-WAKING.             151
After being awakened, it has often appeared to me that a conflict had
been going on between the material and spiritual functions."
LADY. Is somnambulism ever induced by disease?
DOCTOR. There have been a great number of cases
recorded by the medical profession, in which illness
developed the faculty, and when restored to health it
would be lost. Many of these cases present all the plienomena of induced prevision, clairvoyance, etc.; and,
what will seem  a strange fact regarding the matter,
none ever think of doubting them, not even the most
bitter opponents of fascination; yet speak of them in
connection with fascination, and you will but excite their
anger.
We find a case published by two French gentlemeln
of this character. The patient predicted a detail of the
principal events that should happen to her in the course
of the following years,-of the maladies to which she
would be subjected,-of the remedies which would be
necessary,-of the effect of these remedies,-of the
crisis which she would experience,-and of the precise
period of her cure; all of which were substantially cor
rect and accomplished.
LADY. Do medicines ever produce symptoms similar
to these?
DOCTOR. Quite a large number of cases produced by
medicinal substance, are also recorded; the cases vary
from those of intense mental exaltation and development
of the intellectual powers, to catalepsy and trance.
Dr. O'Shaughnessy, describing the effects of Indian
ilemp, tells us that in a lad of excellent habits, ten drops
of the tincture induced the most amusing effects. A
shout of laughter ushered in the symptoms, and a transi"
tion state of cataleptic rigidity, occurred for two of




152              WITCH CA 3LDRONS.
three minutes. lie enacted the part of a rajah giving
orders to his courtiers; he could recognize none of his
fellow-students or acquaintances; all to his mind seemed
as altered as his own condition; he spoke of many
years having passed since his student days; described
his teachers and friends with a piquancy a dramatist
would envy; detailed the adventures of an imaginary
series of years, his travels and his attainments of wealth
and power; he entered on discussions of religious, scientific, and political topics with astonishing eloquence,
and disclosed an extent of knowledge, reading, and a
ready apposite wit, which those who knew him best
were altogether unprepared for. For three hours and
upwards he maintained the character he at first assumed,
and with a degree of ease and dignity perfectly becoming
his high assumption.
Similar facts were known in ancient times. The
Thracians used to intoxicate themselves by casting the
seeds of certain poisonous plants into a fire made for
the purpose, around which they sat and inspired the
narcotic fumes. Moore says that there can be no
doubt that the incantations of witchcraft and magic
were generally attended with the practice of burning
herbs of a similar kind.  The ancients deemed certain
temperaments essential to the reception of the divine
eJflatus, and the melancholic was considered the most
suitable, especially when aggravated by rigid abstinence and the use of narcotics, (this exactly suits Swedenborg, etc.) Pliny informs us that the soothsayers
were accustomed to chew roots supposed to be of a
certain species of henbane. The Hindoos employ the
Indian hemp for the same purpose; and in St. Domingo,he supposed prophets chew a plant called cohaba, that




ORACLE OF DELPHOS.              153
Whey may be the better able to look int) the unseen
world and perceive the shadows of coming events.
Sophocles called the priestesses of Delphos laurel eaters,
because they were in the habit of chewing the leaves
of that shrub before they mounted the tripod, etc., etc.
Townshend tells us of a sleep-waker who played
beautifully on the flute, and was accustomed o improvise upon that instrument with all the musical genius
he possessed; but the charming strain, once uttered,
was lost forever.  One day, in sleep-waking, being
asked to write down a composition, he instantly seized.
music paper and a pen, and wrote down the air you
observe on this paper. I need not mention that he was
utterly incapable of such a display of talents in the
waking state.




~LIJ  LLI     LLH      LU L   4I 1  l. Iei
LL   Lt_LI I         I aA) (f m 
/~._u~,,,      I
I                  B^ 1         i L               1  1 A 
r.U^j      L4^ )  ( 4.I   ^ Liii^
Ii" I                                 ILL   ~I.I 11~ I
^  ^,4^1   ^    ^^) ^l              L          F i    (bi._LL', iLml L1                        ""'vFI
- ^ LLI  I!L
r-t^"I    ~lj          1_L,            I I...k.  I-I
I  I           I I 
LL - If   r 
(WIB  ~z~t   c~C ~ i  Pi~i




CASE  FROM  SANDBY.                        155
The  following  case  of  diseased  somnambulism   is
taken  from  Mr. Sandbv.  It is  related  with  singular
truthfulness and accuracy.
~  It is perfectly true, that our poor friend who has now been some
months with us, presents one of those singular and almost incredible
cases of hysterical or nervous affection, which are at distant intervals,
witnessed under the dispensation of the Almighty.
" The overthrow of the regular functions of the nervous system, was
occasioned by the almost sudden death of her father, to whom she was
most fondly attached, who was seized with illness, during her absence
from him, and died in a few hours after she returned to her home.  I
cannot enter into any longer details of the case, which has been attended
with all those varieties, which have long characterized the complaint,
among medical men as the Protean disorder.  The extraordinary powers
communlicated to the other senses by the temporary suspension of one o
two of them, are beyond credibility to all those who do not witness it; and
I really seldom  enter into any of the details, because it would be but
reasonable, that those who have not seen, should doubt the reality of
them.  All colors she cal distinguish with the greatest correctness by
night or by day, whether presented to her on cloth, silk, muslin, wax, or
even glass-and this I may safely say, as easily on any part of the body
as with the hands, although, of course, the ordinary routine of such an
exhibition of power, takes place with the hands —the other being that
of mere curiosity.  Her delicacy of mind, and high tone of religious
feeling, are such, that she has the greatest objection to make that which
she regards in the light of a heavy affliction from God a matter of show
or curiosity to others, although to ourselves, of course, all these unusual
extravagances of nervous sensibility, are manifest, for at least twelve out
of every twenty-four hours. She can not only read with the greatest
rapidity any writing that is legible to us, music, etc., with the mere
passing of her fingers over it, whether in a dark or light room, (for her
sight is for the most part suspended, when under the influence of the
attack, or paroxysm, although she is perfectly sensible,-nay, more acute
and clever than in her natural state,) but within this month past, she has
been able to collect the contents of any printing or MS., by merely laying
her hand on the page, without tracing the lines or letters;-and I saw her
last night only, declare the contents of a note just.rought into the room,
in this way. (when I could not decipher it myself without a candle,) and
with a rapidity with which I could not have read it by daylight. I have
ieen her develop hand-writing by the application of a note to the back
jf her hand, neck, or foot; and she can do it at any time. There is
nothing UNNATURAL in this, for of course the nervous susceptibility
extends all over the surface of the body, but use and habit cause us to




156                   CASE FROM  SANDBY.
limit its power more to the fingers.  Many, even medical men, take upon
themselves to declare, that we are all (her medical attendants as well)
under a mere delusion.  We ask none to believe anything, it they prefer not to do so, and only reply-The case is equally marvellous either
way;-either that this our poor patient should be thus afflicted, or that
eighteen or nineteen persons of my family and friends, in the daily habit
of seeing her, should fancy she is for every twelve hours out of the
tweny-four, doing at intervals, that which she is not doing. There are
many exhibitions of extravagant powers which she possesses, that we talk
of to no one; for finding it difficult to acquire credit for lesser things, we
do not venture on the greater.  Her power ceases the moment the attack
passes off. A considerable swelling has at times been visible at the back
of the head, which has yielded to the treatment.
" It is certainly a case which would be an instructive one, in the consideration of the physiology of the human frame: but she, poor thing!
is most averse to experiments being purposely made on her;-but in her
every day life among us, we have no lack of proof for all we believe and
know.
" Between the attacks, she is as perfectly in a natural state, as ever she
was in her life.  There is but one paradox in her state; and thdt is, that
she can at such times, hear some sounds and not others, though very much
louder —and see some things, and not others, though placed before her.
She could hear a tune whistled, when she could not hear a gun ired close
to her.  It is certainly the absorption or absence of mind that occasions
this; absent to some things, though present to:thers, like any abeesl
man; and thus Dr. Y — acounts for it."




CONVERSAI ION  X.
HISTORY OF FASC NATION.
DocrOR. We have now  l eviewed, with.~ rap'd
glance, the six stages, curative effects, and natural conditions, simulating the phenomena of fascination.  To
complete our plan, I have compiled a brief history of
the matter, which, with your permission. I will read.
LADY. I am anxious to hear it. It certainly appears
strange to me that the matter should have been forgotten through the middle ages, and, until very lately,
remain unknown.
DOCTO-R. That it was known and practised is an undoubted fact, but it was, after the Christian era, confined
to convents; and many a miracle at the tombs and other
depositories of the relics of saints, may safely be referred
to this agencv of fascination.  In some instances, the
Esculapean visions, prescriptions, etc.. were repeated.
St. Gregory, bishop of Tours, tells of the efficacy of
pilgrimages to the tombs of saints.  Says he: "Any
person filled with faith, coming near the tombs and
praying, will be speedily cured of whatever illness may
befall them.  Some affirm  that the saints appear to
themr in the night (of course while sleeping on or near
the tomb), during their dreams, and reveal the proper
remedies."  For any number of similar instances, see
accounts of St. Martin, Protegeno, Moses of Lysbia,
Julianus of Edessa, St. Litard, St. Fortunatus, etc., etc.
Leger quotes George Fabricius, who, in his Commr n
14




158               ROYAL TOUCHING,
tary on Poets, 1720, p. 73, says that he saw, in Padua,
country people who were going to the church of St.
Anthony for the purpose of obtaining salutary visions
during their sleep.  "This," says Fabricius, "exactly
resembles the ancient pagan worship.  And in truth,
even at the present day, the churches of saints are
resorted to, to receive the same kind of revelations foi
curing disease."
The king of France, from the time of Clovis, was the
royal fascinator of his day. Laurent tells us that one
of the officers of Clovis was afflicted with scrofula; the
king felt much concern for him, as the resources of
medicine had been tried in vain.  He dreamed, one
night, that if he touched the officer's neck, it would become well; he arose in the morning and did so; from
that time the power remained in his family.
Marino Cavalli, ambassador from Venice to France
in 1546, thus describes the operation of touching for the
scrofula. After giving a description of the reigning
monarch, Francis, he says: "Like all the monarchs of
France, he has received from heaven the singular gift
of curing the evil.  Even Spaniards flock hither to
profit by this miraculous property.  The ceremony
takes place some solemn day, like Easter, or Christmas,
or the festivals of the Virgin; the king first confesses
and receives the sacrament, then makes the sign of the
cross on the sick, saying:' The king touches, may God
cure thee!' If the sick were not restored, they would
not, doubtless, flock hither so far; and since the number augments always, we must believe that God takes
this method to deliver the infirm, and to increase, at the
same time, the dignity of the crown of France."  The
power, however, it seems only remained with them




;UEEN OF NAVARRE.               159
while virtuous; for the abbot of Nogent tells us that
Philip the First, who at first possessed the gift when he
ascended the throne in 1060, lost it by indulgence in
vice.
Many other monarchs, determined not to be outdone,
assumed the same power, not curing scrofula alone, but
all other diseases; in one instance it was of singular
benefit to one of the "Lord's anointed."  James, the
exiled king of England, engaged himself as a toucher
for scrofula in the public hospitals of France.  Fascination was also useful, in some cases, to the royal operators themselves: Tytler, speaking of Charles VI., tells
us that "he once narrowly escaped being burned to
death, and in consequence was seized with a dreadful
fit of frenzy. To relieve him, they sent for a magician
from Montpellier, and he became somewhat better."
We are told by Beniveni, a Florentine physician, that
he had a young man under his care, who was wounded
in the chest by an arrow, which surgical skill could not
extract.  After a time of great pain, this faculty of prevision became developed, and he told the day and hour
when the arrow-head should issue from the wound, and
the time of his perfect cure; said he would go to Rome,
die there, etc., with many other strange particulars, all
of which, to the astonishment of the narrator, happened
exactly as he had predicted them.
In the eighty-fourth page of the Life of the Queen of
Navarre, it tells, while lying at Metz, at the point of
death, in consequence of a severe fever, she described
the battle of Jarnac in every minute particular; told
the victory of her son; his falling to the ground, death
of the prince of Conde, and flight of the enemy; and
the information was confirmed the next night, 9' thQ




160              CHARLES R. HALL.
astonishment of her attendants, who had thought hei
delirious while giving it.
Van Helmont tells us, that "there exists in man a
certain energy which can act beyond his person, accord.
ing to his will or imagination, and impart virtues, and
exercise a durable influence, even on distant objects "
Cardanus at Naples, in 1501, performed extraordinary
cures by fascination.  He declared that nature had
endowed him with strange faculties. He could go into
sleep, waking at will, and in that state cure himself of
an occasional attack of the gout, prescribe remedies,
see at a distance, and correctly predict future events.
For all these faculties he was imprisoned, as a sorcerer,
at Bologna.
A volume might easily be filled with facts similar to,he above.  But it is unnecessary to recite them  all;
when once attention is awakened to the subject, enough
can be found in our every-day reading and observation.
Suffice it to say, that there is an uninterrupted chain of
evidence from the earliest times to the present. I shall
briefly, then, recount a few of the most remarkable,
which I will mainly extract fiom Dr. C. R. Hall, a bitter opponent of fascination, but who, despite himself,
gives such evidence in its favor-even his own experience proving it-that the perusal of his book, "The
Rise, Progress, Mysteries," etc., etc., will convince any
pel son of the reality of the subject he tries to injure,
and also of his own silliness in endeavoring to make
ridicule a test of truth.
In the seventeenth century there appeared in England
a gardener, Levret, an Irish gentleman, Valentine Greatraks, and a Dr. Streper; and in Italy, Francisco Bagnone, etc., all of whom possessed the power of curing




LIFE OF MESMER.                1G
diseases by touching or striking with the hand. The
most celebrated of these, Greatraka is represented by
the Lord Bishop of Derry, as being a simple, un'pretending man, and sincerely pious. The same authority
informs us, that not only had he seen, among other
cures, "dimness cleared and deafness cured by his
-ouch, etc., etc.; running sores of the king's evil dried
ap; and kernels brought to a suppuration by his hand 
grievous sores, of many months' date, in a few days
healed; obstructions and stoppages' removed;"  but
" even cancerous knots in the breast dissolved."
Gassner, in 1770, excited much attention in Germany
and performed several miraculous cures.  In 1794, a
Count Thun appeared at Leipsic, professing to cure
gout, palsy, and other complaints, by the imposition of
his hands; he was of a weak constitution, and his suc.
cess would vary.
Mesmer was born in 1734.  He was a severe student, and soon became a proficient and able physician.
It has been truly observed that from time immemorial
the mineral magnet was employed as a remedy in the
cure of burns, and other injuries, but it was not until
the sixteenth century, when alchemy was in its zenith,
that its use as a remedy for internal diseases became
general. At this time there was the earliest speculations on the extensive diffusion of the magnetic principle,
which, as in our own day, was made to explain the
motions of the planets and the laws of life.
Mesmer fell into the universal error, and commenced
treating the sick by means of magnetized rods, which
he obtained from Father Hell or Holl, a Jesuit, profes.
sor of Astronomy at Vienna.  His great success aston.
ished himself, and very- much chagrined the professor




1 2              LIFE OF MESMER
the consequence of which was an irreconcilable quarre
between the two. The acuteness of Mesmer soon led
him'to perceive that he might dispense with the rods,
and that he could produce the same effects by merely
drawing his own hands from above downwards in front
of his patient.
His success in fascination was wonderful; for a
great number of years nothing like it had been seen in
Europe, and the fame of Mesmer spread rapidly.  He
left Vienna, and travelled through various towns and
cities in Europe, met with considerable encouragement,
finally returned, and then left for Paris, where we find
him established in 1778. D'Eslon, one of the court
physicians, was his first convert; others soon followed.
and the majority of the Parisians declared in his favor
He finally surmounted the enmity of all -his opponents
adtd retired with a large fortune, the result of his benevolent exertions, after founding a school of pupils.
nearly all of whom became celebrated. The facts in
his experiments were allowed by the French Academy
of Medicine, but the idea of a fluid denied.
The Marquis de Puseygar, one of Mesmer's pupils,
having, in March, 1784, fascinated his gardener, found
that his patient was capable of holding a conversation
while wrapped in induced somnambulism.  He found,
moreover, that the patient not only understood the
words, but even the unexpressed thoughts of his master, and would answer with equal clearness the intended
question while it was yet a mere suggestion of the
mind, as after it had been conveyed to him in language
This was the origin (wrongly so called) of induced
somnambul ism.
In 1778 Perkins. an American surgeon practising iD




TRACTORS OF PERKINS.               163
London, invented and obtained a patent for his " metallic tractors."  The tractors were merely small pieces
of steel, strongly magnetized, (nothing more than a different form of the magnetized rod.)  They were applied
over the affected part, and gently moved about, touching the skin.  Gout, rheumatism. toothache, and palsy,
were a few of the diseases cured by the tractors, etc.
Among those who publicly vouched for the truth of' the
wonderful cures performed by means of the tractors,
were eight university professors, four being professors
of medicine; twenty  clergymen, ten  being D.D.s;
thirty-six Inedical men, nineteen being M. D.s.
To prove the error of these doctors of divinity and
medicine, two men in Bath had precisely similar instruments made of wood, painted and shaped so as exactly
to resemble the real ones.  These were publicly tried
with all due solemnity, at first upon  five  hospita.
patients.  Of these four were affected with chronic
rheumatism in the ancle, knee, wrist, and hips. The
fifth had chronic gout.  All were much relieved.  One
was sure that his knee was warmer, and thought that
he could walk across the room.  He did so, though hs
had previously been unable to stir. The following day
the real metallic tractors were applied, with results precisely similar. Mr. Smith applied the wooden tractors
to a patient with rheumatism of the shoulder, so severe
as to prevent his raising his hand; in four minutes th,
man was able to lift his hand.  In another patient the
fictitious tractors caused so much increase of suflering,
ihat he would on no account submit to a repetition of
the operation.  Had these sapient individuals but half
the talent of Mesmer, they would soon have discovered
the real scurce of action.




A                   GENERAL  _EELING.
Fascination  has  been  known  and   practised  to  d
greater or less extent in the United States since the
early part of the nineteenth century; at the presen:
time we have scores of lecturers traversing the country.
The people receive  it rather doubtingly;  they  want
some show of reasoning to sustain what they consider
experiments against the laws of nature. To show the
feeling I cannot do better than add an editorial from
one  of my  exchanges.   After  describing  the  scene,
performers, and examining committee, to the latter of
which he belonged, he says:"The first evening the lady's eyes were bandaged so that the committee were satisfied she could not see. On Thursday night more than
usual pains were taken. Adhesive plasters were put over her eyes, and
they did positively adhere so closely to her skin that they were with difficulty removed. Over these, soft kid gloves were spread, over these
again, a handkerchief was tied, secured above and below by tape strings.
"It was an unusual and very severe test. Her eyes were, without
ioubt, IN TOTAL DARKNESs-in regard to that, there is no possible mistake; but notwithstanding all our precautions in bandaging, SHE DID SEE.
She read the names of a score of newspapers, and some of the smaller
print on them-she read writing with a lead pencil-told the time by
numerous watches, though set far from the true hour, and described the
watches. She also read several bank notes.
"She held the papers, etc., over her forehead, at the lower edge of her
hair. While engaged in her readings she was very sprightly, and
evinced considerable smartness-but we have not room  for farther
detail.
"In regard to this matter, we can only say that we do not comprehend
it. If it be trickery, it is splendid trickery. The jugglers of the East
astound you, but they prepare all the machinery-here you are allowed
to prepare the subject to your own satisfaction. In regard to the pra.
sumption-that arises in the mind. as soon as we are convinced that she
cannot see with her eyes, that there is some series of cunningly devised
and secret signs by which communications are made to the young lady,
we have to say, that watches and papers were given to her that no eye
saw but our own, and yet she told as usual
"Our stubborn ske ticism prompts us to say, that though witnessing
such bewildering tests a thousand times we would believe we were a
thousand times deceived, before we wo.1 I grant that she saw with her
brain, up through her skull."




SUPrRSTITIONS.               166
LADY. I think there is evidence enough on the sub-,ect of fascination to convince the most incredulous, and
were the matter of our conversation published, no one
would rise from its perusal without being a thorough
believer.
DOCTOR. In advancing the various arguments, I have
merely reviewed the substance of the conclusions that
have convinced myself.  Some  curious phenomena
accidentally observed, led me to examine the matter
closely, and the result has been. not 2nly an entire conviction of its truth, but an equal conviction that that
truth may be made so plain as to appeal to the common
sense of all.
My knowledge of the subject has given me a, lue to
unravel much of the history of superstition in this
world. I have found fascination to be a most terrible
agent of imposture in all ages, as we have before seen
Jehovah punished its practice among the Jews with
death; that is, its practice as regarded the production
of spiritual clairvoyance for purposes of divination: in
other respects it was extensively known and practised
as a curative agent. Witness the case of David, etc.
In our own day, Robert Cochrans, Joseph Smiths,
Swedenborgs, etc., etc., are in turn gaining hosts of followers, and all through  ignorance on this subject.
Fascination, however, will most assuredly crush them,
and so well is this fact known, that, perceiving its
onwaid progress, many of them are even now endeavoring to wrest its phenomena to support their own
views.  Professor Bush says that the "Clairvoyance
of Swedenborg was not induced by human agency."
Gwanted.    That, unlike the magnetic seers, who are
n a state of internal, but not at the same time of extet



166          SWEDENBORG S SUL PORTERS.
nal consciousness, Swedenborg was in both at once
His prerogative was the opening of a SPIRITUAL sight
which left him still in the enjoyment of his NATURAL
sight. Hence he could know and distinctly describe in
his state of external consciousness, what he saw with
his spiritual eyes, and could know with perfect accu.
racy, free from all illusion, what was going on around
him in the natural world, at the same time that he perceived what was transpiring in the spiritual world; and
so perfectly was he in the possession of external consciousness while in the exercise of his spiritual perceptions, that on one occasion, when moving in a
funeral procession, he was actually engaged in conversation with the spirit of the person whose body he
was following to the grave."
If such be the case, and Swedenborg's supernatural
claims rest on the fact of his seeing and holding communication with both worlds at once, then must a single well-authenticated fact, like that of the boy who
possessed a similar power mentioned some pages back,
overthrow all such claims, or indefinitely extend them;
and this, too, without considering that Swedenborg's
revelations were a natural sequence to his former philosophical speculations, and but confirmed them. How.
ever, as my object in these conversations was more to
suggest thought than enter into detail, we will now end
them.
LADY. Will you be kind enough to give me some
directions with regard to the best manner of fascinating?  As you think ladies as well as gentlemen can
practise it, I would like to be able if ever called upon.
DOCTOR. With pleasure; and I do it the mrire readily
vecause I know your motives in such cases wou'd be




MODE OF OPERATING.                167
proper ones.  It is certainly one of the most remarka.
ble facts in the whole matter, that the moral feelings
exercise an extraordinary influence.  Philippe the First
of France has not been the only one who lost the
power by ill conduct; for the evil disposed often
become curbed and shorn of their strength in a surprising manner.
Both patient and operator should be comfortably
seated, so that neither will experience uneasiness in consequence of position. The seat of the operator should
be higher than  that of the  patient-the apartment
neither too hot nor too cold, and as few witnesses as
possible, but one person always present.  Never begin
the process if agitated, but wait until perfectly calm and
self-collected.  When all is ready, seat yourself oppo
site the patient, inclining sideways, and taking his hands
so that the inside of the thumbs of each press against
ihe other, the hands resting on a knee of each; keep
them  in that position a few  minutes, until an equal
warmth is felt, gazing, after the first minute, steadily,
but not with an effort, into his eyes.  Still gazing.
release his hands, and unite your own with the palms
touching each other; then separate them to the right
and left transversely, (remembering that while communicating the influence, the hands, when passing from the
patient, must always have the back turned to him, and
the naverse when taking him out of the state,) raise them
to the head, let them rest on it a few moments, slowly
carry them down the side and lower part of the head to
the shoulders; allow them to rest a few moments there
also, and then gradually pass down the arms to the end
of the fingers which should be resting on the knees; all,his time only the extremity of your own fingers should




168               FEEL NO AL.ARM.
touch, and that very gently; at the end of each pass
slightly shake your fingers, as if to throw  something
from them. You had better continue the' passes, as a
general rule, until the eyes of the patient close.  Then
allow your hands to rest two or three minutes on the
head, and keeping your fingers in a crooked position, so
as to directly point to but not touch the parts you
traverse, pass slowly over the eyes and chest to the
stomach, where the thumbs had better remain about
twice as long as they did on the head, the fingers resting on the sides; thence carry them down to the hips,
knees, and feet. Do this a few times, and then confine
your passes to the arms and body, without the head.
The sitting may continue from half an hour to two
hours; but forty rminutes I have found a good average
time. Of course, it depends, in a great measure, on the
impressibility of the patient, and the degree of relief
given.  When it is desirous to terminate it, make two
or three passes from the knees to the feet; then several
transverse passes before the face and chest in a brisk
manner.
Make up your mind, beforehand, not to be alarmed at
any strange and unexpected symptoms that present
themselves during the operation; and whatever does
occur, keep perfectly cool, and betray no agitation of
manner; if you let any signs of alarm escape you, your
patient is almost certain to go off into convulsions,
Mrs. W. came into my house, one day, in extreme pain,
arising from  a wrist that had bee-s twice sprained; at
times her agony was dreadful, nd opiates, etc., entirely
failed to relieve her. A few passes down the arm  and
wrist gave ease, and finally, by continuing the process
the pain ceased; at the end of twenty-four hours it re.




KEEP PERFECTLY CALM.              169
turned, and the same results followed the operation
The third tine, I proposed putting her to sleep; after a
while her eyes closed; she made a violent effort to
open them, and, failing, became much frightened, and
a cold perspiration broke out over her. I instantly
reversed the passes; but it was some time, after awa.
king, before she became calm.  She was afterward
courageous enough, went to sleep without trouble-, and
became finally cured.
One of the first cases upon whom  I ever operated
was a Miss L.  After a lapse of some ten minutes, she
declared herself incapable of breathing, and I could not
discern the pulse at the wrist. Her agitation became
extreme; she said death would surely ensue, and wished
her cousin, who was present, to call her mother.  The
cousin, equally with herself, was fiightened; so much
so, indeed, that she was incapable of obeying her request, though making great efforts to do so, seeming
like a person with the nightmare.  Though dreadfully
agitated, I continued the passes, directing them altogether from the knees to the feet, and making some in
in a transverse direction over the chest.  She soon
breathed and the heart beat; but, ere both actions were
regularly established, she was insensible. I have rarely
seen a person more benefited by the effects of fascination.
When you can be guided to the seat of pain, keep
your fingers over the spot, and make the passes in that
direction. Toothache, headache, sore-throat, rheumatism, etc., will vanish under such manipulation, often
with a rapidity that equally astonishes the operator and
the patient.
In operating, husband your strength as much as pos.
sible  use no more exertion than just enough to g:sv
15




170            TRY NO::xXPERIMENTS.
the requisite motion to the hands and arms. You will
lose enough by imparting the nervous fluid, without unnecessarily increasing the debility. This is a common
fault with young fascinators.
If the operator succeeds in giving relief from pain,
ht has produced the only phenomena he ought to expect. Do not allow the skepticism of those about you
to rashly involve you in the mazes of experimenting on
your patients.  Point the unbeliever to the results; if
he attributes them  to imagination or anything else,
don't dispute the matter-let him have his own way,
without your interference. Have patience-bide your
time-and your turn will come, and, when it does, will
richly recompense the delay, and satisfy your curiosity.
So great are the marvels, that our minds must be gradually prepared to receive them, or we could not bear
the communication with safety.
Newnham remarks, that the most important and fundamental characteristic of a good operator is, on his
part, the possession of sound thought and firm will; he
nust not employ his processes in a thoughtless or careless nanner, or they will be unsuccessful; but he must
really throw his mind into the duty-must be attentive
to what he is about-must wish to do good-not allowing himself to wander into distant or discrepant scenes,
but concentrating his will upon the object before him.
He should be free from impertinent curiosity-a capital
moral blemish in ordinary life, but still more so in
magnetic pursuits-because the good of the patient is
forgotten, the attention of the operator distracted, and
fixed upon any object rather than his patient's health;
in such cases, no satisfactory results can be expected.
Deleuze speaks of a process that may be employed




sOM AMB ULISM.                 171
w th great advantage it local pains; this is, to place a
piece of linen several times folded, or a fiagment ol
woollen or cotton cloth upon the suffering part; apply
the mouth above it and breathe through it; it excites a
lively sensation  of heat, and the breath, which  is
charged with the nervous fluid, introduces it into the
eystein. Then expel the pain by passes.
Somnanlbulism (says Deleuze) demonstrates the twofold existence of the external and internal man in a
single individual. It offers a direct proof of the spirituality of the soul, and an answer to all objections made
against its immortality.   It makes evident the truth,
known to the ancient sages, that man is an intelligence,
served by organs.  Never seek to produce it; but when
it comes naturally, profit by it as much as possible.. It
is dangerous to try to produce this state by directing
passes to the head; make them equally over the body.
If nature is disposed to this crisis, the fluid will, of
itself, be carried to the brain, and the tendency be manifested by the extreme tranquility of the patient.  Then,
after passing your fingers, five or six times, at a short
distance before his eyes, ask him  whether he sleeps,
and if he answers in the affirmative, you may ask him
regarding the treatment.  Don't press questions, if he
shbows no disposition to speak: let him alone —it is of
no consequence; it is not your object to render him a
sleep-waker, but to cure him. If such a state were
necessary, it would spontaneously develop itself.
IN CONCLJSION, I WOULD  REMARK, THAT THE ONLY
OBJECT OF THE OPERATOR SHOULD BE TO CURE HIS PATIENT; THIS CANNOT BE TOO STRONGLY INSISTED UPON.
TRY NO EXPERIMENTS; WAIT PATIENTLY, AND FOLLOW
THE TEACHINGS OF NATURE.




APPENDIX.
COMMUNICATION  FROM3  REV. BIR. BEECHER. 0'   a  N12'^'1.
"In October, 1842, on my way to the synod of Gene-ee I  rtten~t tla..ght at the house of Mr. Hall, at Byron.  In the evenig.1 called oB
Aev. Mr. Childs.  On entering the room, I found his son, an intelligent
boy aged ten years, then in a cataleptic fit, sitting in his fhther's arms
and his feet in warm water.
" In a few moments he recovered.  He frequently had from  three to
six fits a day-had received the best medical attendance in the region.
was no better —daily worse. He had lost entirely the power of speech,
for several days. Great fears were felt that he would never recover
There was a sore place on the back corner of his head, and on the spine,
occasioned by a fall, some months previous.  When the fits passed off
he became hungry, and not at all drowsy; and during the interval appeared preternaturally bright, and engaged in sports with companions, as
asual.
" After I had conversed a few minutes, I said,'I would have him
magnetized;' to which his father replied,' I don't believe in it at all,'
and the mother added,' If you'll put me to sleep, I'll believe, and not
without.' I replied,' I would try it: it may do good, and can do no
harm.' During this conversation, I made a few passes in front of the
child, chiefly with one hand, and without any particular concentration of
the mind or will, and mostly with my face toward the mother.  In less
than a minute the father said,' lie is in another fit!  No, he isn't, I de.
clare: I believe he is asleep.' Much surprised, (for I had never mag
netized one,) I said,' It surely cannot be what I have done; but if so I
can awaken him.' Then, with a few reversed passes, he awoke.' Well,
this is strange,' said I;' but I can put him asleep again, if it is real.' I
then seriously repeated the passes, with both hands, for one or tw3
minutes, and placed him in the perfect mesmeric sleep. I then fixed my
eyes on a lady on the opposite side of the room, the boy not yet having
spoken for three days, and said,'Henry, what do you see?' in a full,
decided voice.  He replied,' Azubah.' I then looked his mother in the
face, saying,' What do you see?' He gave a name unknown to me:
I looked to his father, who replied,' It is her maiden name.' I then took
vinegar into my mouth, and said,' What do you taste?'' inegar,' speak
ing with great tartness, and at the same time making many contortions




LETTER  FROM  REV. MR. IEECHER.                       173
Of the face.  The mother now whispered to one of the children, who
left her seat, and I said,'Henry, what is she going for?'' Sugar, and I
love it,' he answered.  She went to the closet, and brought the sugar, I
put some into my mouth, which seemed to give him the same pleasure as
if I had put it in his own.  I then said,' What kind of sugar is itI'Muscovado.'' What is its color?' Well, sir, a kind of light brown.'
A small glass jar, with a large cork, was now placed in my hand, when
immediately I observed the olfactory nerves affected, and the muscles
about the nose contracted at the same moment.  I said to the girl,' What
is it?' to which the boy answered,' Hartshorn.'' How do you know?'
I smell it.' I myself neither knew nor smelt.  I then took out the cork
and applied it to my own nose, when he instantly placed his fingers on
that part of the nose next the forehead, and said,' I feel it here,'-just
where I myself experienced the burning sensation.
"During all these experiments he sat on his father's knee, with his
head down on his breast, and reclining against his father.
"I now asked him,' What is the matter with you?''My brain is
sore.'' Where'' At tie bottom  of it.'' Where it joins the spinal
marrow,' (medulla oblon- ata?)' Yes.'' What occasioned it?'' I foll
from  the  ereat beam  in the barn.'  His mother here asked him,' Why
did you not tell us before?'' I feared you would not let me play thelre.'
Can Doct. A ~   cur!e you'' No.'' Why not?'  He don't knov
anything about it,' (very decidedly.)'Can Doct. C?'' No.''Why'''He don't understand it.'' Will the medicine you now use
do you good?'' No'' Of what is it composed'' There is turpentiltj)
in it.'' Does the Doctor give it you for tape-worm?''Yes.'' Iav,
you any?''No.''Would you like to wallk''Yes.''Well, walk.'
He arose promptly, stepped between the chairs, and said,'VWell. si:,
where shall I go?'' From  the wall to the door, and back.' This 1,
did, avoiding every obstruction; and(, at my direction, returned anll  sat
again with his father.  I now, without notice to any one, placed my fin.
fier on the organ of Benevolence, tlinking at the moment it performed
the office of Veneration, and said.' Would you like to pray?'  With somj
lightness, he said' No.' Some questions were asked, by his mother and
myself, about the Bible, etc.; but no Veneration appeared.  I then recol.
lected the true office of the organ, and said,' Have you anything in your
pocket'  He took out a knife.' Give it to me for my little boy,'which he did promptly.  I removed my hand.'Have you anything
else?''I have a pencil.'' Will you give me that for my other boy?''It has no head?'' Never mind; give it-won't y)oul''I shouldn't
like to.' Well, but you will!'' I couldn't come it!' (with peculiai
tmphasis.,  Azrubal said,' Ask him where the head of the pencil is.'
Where is it. Henry?'' Well, sir, in the parlor.''Where?''On the
window.'  Azubah said,' Why, I picked it up and put it there to-day!
(He certain'y did not know tlhis.)  I then said' Henry, can you get it?
115'




174                     ON  MAGNETISM
He arose, and went into the parlor in the dark, and took the head of the
pencil-case from the window, to the very great surprise of us all. In
deed, we were all so astonished, that it seemed a dream. During these
and subsequent proceedings, he  spoke with a promptness, boldness,
and propriety, in advance of his years, and beyond himself in his natural
state; and so perfectly evident was it that he was in a somnambulic state
that no skeptic, I verily believe, coul( have doubted.' At my request he returned to his seat.  I touched Benevolence, and
instantly le handed me the pencil-case.   For my boy?''Yes, sir.' I
then silently, and without any willing, and with a feeling of curiosity to
see and test the matter, touched Reverence. His countenance at once
assumed a softened and solemn aspect.'Henry, would you like to pray?''Yes, sir.'' You may.' He then commenced praying inaudibly.'You
may pray aloud.' He then prayed in a low, audible voice.  On touching
Tune, he sang a tune, though not in the habit of singing. On touching
Combativeness and Destructiveness, he raised his clenched fist to strike
me.  He was ignorant of Phrenology, and also of my intention to to-ch
any particula.r organ; nor did I, in any case, will the activity of the organ.
I now took out my watch, and holding the dial towards myself, and above
the line of his vision, his eyes being closed, and his head bowed forward,
and my hand also being between him  and the watch, I asked him,'Henry, what time is it?'' Eight o'clock, sir,'-which was exactly. thl
time by the watch, though by the clock in the room it was fifteen minutes
faster.' Henry, how long ought you to sleep?''Well, sir, I must sleep
two hours and five minutes.'' Will you then awake?''Yes, sir.'  Very
well.' This I did for the purpose of testing his knowledge of tine, as
stated by Townshend, an English clergyman, whose work on this sub.
ject I had read.
"I then said,' Will you go with me to Mr. Hall's?'   Yes.'' Well,
now we are there-now we are in the parlor: who is here?''Mr. and
Mrs. Hall; Mr. and Mrs. Bardwell.''Who else?' He did not give
their names, but intimated that they were strangers. He described the
room and position of things, all of which I found correct, on going to the
house shortly after.  These persons were not in the habit of being there
in the evening, but company having come in, they were all together at
that moment.  As this was in his own town, I did not deem it proof, and
so said,' Will you go to Batavia?''Yes.''Well, now we are there —
now we are at my house-now we will go into my room: what do you
see' 1 see a large table covered with black cloth, and with books and
papers scattered over it.'' How large is it?'' It is about five feet lcng,''  ow many boo —cases?''Three, sir.''What sort of a stove?' H?
could not or did not describe this, for it was so queer a thing as not to be
easily described. Nor (lid I press him, for all his answers had been per.
fectly correct, and I was sufficiently astonished; for he had never seen
my study; and no other minister, I am sore, has such a table, (five feet




LETTER  FROM. REV. MR. BEECHER.                    175
y' tnree and a half,) or has left it in such confusion as mine was at that
troment.
"  may here say that, during the whole period of his sleep, he could
hear the questions of others put to him, and would answer them, if I
were willing; but if I willed otherwise, or forbade him  to speak, as X
often did, he then would answer no one but myself, not even father or
mother; nor could he hear their conversation with me, nor with each
other.
" I novw left him for an hour, and went back to Mr. Hall's, giving him
leave to converse only with his father.  On my return, I found him in
the same state.  He utterly refused to speak to any one but his father.
ahd told him that he should not have another fit till the following Sab.
bath, (this was Monday evening,) which proved true; but when that day
came, he had several.
" At nine o'clock and three minutes, holding my watch as before, and]
standing eight or nine feet from him, I asked the time.  He gave'nine
o'clock and five minutes.''Look sharp,' said I.'Oh! three minutes,'
said he. We were now curious to see if he would awake himself at the
two hours and five minutes, and as he did not awake when the clock in
the room reached that time, I said,' Henry, did you mean by my watch,
or by the clock?''By your watch, sir.''Very well.' At the exact
moment he opened his eyes and looked around, and this without any act
or willing of mine; and what was very affecting and convincing, he could
no longer speak at all, and was unconscious of all that he had said or
don.e.
" I have said that he had no return of fits till the following Sabbath
One day after that Sabbath, he came in to his mother, much agitated, and
apparently going into a fit; and making the passes, he solicited his
mother to do it,-who, merely to pacify him, passed her fingers over him;
and soou he fell into the mesmeric sleep, and escaped the fit. After this.
he was so highly charged by his sister, that when she was in the next
room, in the closet, he would instantly taste anything she tasted, eat what
she ate, etc.
" In ten days I returned, and magnetized him again, and went through
several of the above experiments. He always, while in the mesmeric
state, declared that it benefited him, relieved all pain, and would cure
him.
"After I left, at my suggestion, he was daily magnetized: his fits left
him, his voice returned, the sore spots on his head and back were
removed, and he recovered rapidly, till the family could no longer mes
merize him. A man in the village was found, who could and daily did,
till he appeared entirely well.  On omitting it he had a fit or two, and it
was resumed; and when I last saw the father, he informed me that they
considered the child cured.
" I may add, I have since cured toothache, greatly relieved tic doloreux




176                        ON  MAGNETISM.
and removed other pains and swellings, as well as headache.  1 alm  ot,
however, a full believer in all which is affirmed of clairvoyants —what j
see and know, I believe.  In respect to many well-authenticated facts, J
neither affirm nor deny.  That there are many cases of gross deception
and imposition, I fully believe.  On such a subject, it can hardly be
otherwise.  This, however, is a reason why men of character and intelli
gence should investigate it, rathier than otherwise.' But it is deception.
Well, then, let us expose it by a fair trial.' But it is the work of the
devil!'  How do you know?  What is the evidence    What harm has
it done.' Oh, bad men have used it for bad ends 1' And what is there
in the world that has not been so used?  If it is the work of the devil,
then we are not to be ignorant of his devices, and should make the examnination for one's self; for ignorant and bad men will not expose his de
vices.  From experiment and observation, I have no doubt that, as a
remedial agent, mesmerism  is yet to accomplish much good; and no
aarm can result fiom it, except, like all other blessings, it be abused.
"WILLIAM  II. BEECHE.R.
"' B-m, June 28 1843 "
[Fowlers and Wella' American Phrenoigicv Journal




OF
\t         -aAND
PSYCHOLOGY.
IiN TWVO  VOTLTTm1 iS.
COMPRISING
Philosophy of Mesmerism,        Electrical Psychology,
On Fascination,                 The Macrocosm,
Science of the Soul.
"All are the parts of one stupendous whole,
Whose Body Nature is, and God the Soul."
-*40 —
VOL. II.
NEW YORK,
PUBLISHED  BY  SAMITEL  R. WELLS,
No. 389 BROADWAY.








THE  PHILOSOPHY
OF
ELECTRICAL PSYCIOLOGY:
is A COURSE OP
TWELVE LECTURES,
BY JOHN BOVEE DOD.D.
STEREOTTPE EDITION.
NEW YORK:
BAMUEL R. WELLS, 389 BROAlDWAY
18 7 4,




tSered, according to act of CongTess, m the year 1850, b3
C...    DO    S
he CleTrk'a O*ice of the District Court for the Southern'Dstric of New Yosr




DEDIC ATIO   I
TO  G. C. MARCHANT, M.D.
IY DEA R SIR-For twenty years past I have beem
inrtimately acquainted with you, and I enjoy the pleasing
reflection that we ha,ve, during that entire period, remained warm, personal friends. Fully sensible of your
steiling integrity and honor as a man and a distinguished
American citizen, and sensible that the science of Electrical Psychology will prove to be most deeply interesting to your discerning and gifted mind, and that you
will love, honor, and cherish it as you do the other
sciences of the day with which you have become familiar; and having so often and deeply felt your friendship in acts of kindness, I claim the favor, as an expression of my confidence in your goodness, and also in
your medical skill, to dedicate this work to you.  You
will perceive that I have intentionally written it in a
fanciful style, so as to make it pleasing to readers in
general; and surely you, as a critic, will overlook this,
as I have also endeavored to please the scholar by
throwing out before him  a fair and liberal specimen
of original thought.  As such it is most respectfully
)bscribcd to you by your sincere friend,
J. B. DODS,








CONTENTS.
DEDICATION,...o....  3
INTRODUCTION,............. 9-13
LECTURE I.
ELECTRICAL  PSYCHOLOGY-ITS  DEFINITION, AND
IMPORTANCE IN CURING DISEASES,.... 15-32
Invitation by members of United States Senate to lecture on the
Science of Electrical Psychology-Man should use his reason
-His space is small, yet his power extends to other worldsTne greatness and majesty of Nature-Her mysterious operations-Mar a progressive being-Author's reference to his
Mesmeric Lectures-Has for twenty years argued electricity
to be the connecting link between mind and matter-Letter
from Hon. Richard D. Davis, with editorial remarks on the
mysterious nature of the experiments-Hiram  Bostwick, Esq.,
cured of palsy-Two girls cured of deafness-Lady restored
to speech and sight-Editorial advice to physicians to learn
this Science-Resolutions of Dr. Dods' class of forty-five persons in favor of this Science-A lady cured who had not
walked for eighteen years-Distinction between Mesmerism
and Electrical Psychology.
LECTURE II.
BEAUTY OF INDEPENDENT THOUGHT AND FEARLESS EXPRESSION,........                              3..     4
Electrical Psychology has claims to philosophy-Its strangeness
awakens the deepest feelings of contempt among skepticsThose who scoff and sneer have received their ideas by inheritance, without labor, as they did their estate-Such,
though learned, are the greatest enemies of science-The
mnarch of intellect-Improvements of the day-The chariot
of science commenced its career at the morning of creation,
with but few on board, and will continue to roll on without
end-Its passengers here are mortals; in eternity, immortalsThe variety and richness of the intellectual and moral fieldUse of the school and college-Divines should not fear science
-It cannot destroy the Bible-Creation successive-Its vastness-All sciences have been opposed, and their discoverers
persecuted - Harvey-Galileo- Newton- Fulton -Gall -
Spurzheim -Combe —The Fowlers, of New York-Men
should seek for true fame, and not a momentary popularityTrue fame defined-A specimen of it in the example of
Christ.




6                        CONTENTS.
LECTURE  III.
CONNECTING  LINK  BETWEEN  MIND  AND  MATIER,
AND CIRCULATION OF THE BLOOD,.... 49-64
Let not opposition surprise-The characters from whom it comes
are pointed out-Immutability of truth-It cannot be affected
by the belief or unbelief of men-Electrical theory of the universe-Electricity eternal-The agent employed by the Creator
to move globes and carry on the operations of nature-It is a
universal agent, and the cause of light, heat, vegetation, twilight, evaporation, storms, earthquakes, and hurricanes-Man
an epitome of the universe-All substances in him-Mind has
both voluntary and involuntary powers-Brain is the fountain
of the nervous system-Mind the cause of all motion, and can
touch nothing but electricity-Frorm mind to dead matter is
seven links-Mind holds its royal throne in the brain, and executes its commands through electricity, its prime ministerCirculation of the blood-Its philosophy is new —Heart, with
its ventricles and auricles-Why nerves attend the arteries
aid not the veins-How the brain is supplied with electricity
-Why arterial blood is cherry-red, and venous blood purple.
LECTURE IV.
PHILOSOPHY OF DISEASE AND NERVOUS FORCE,  65-81
Circulation of the blood concluded-Circulating system is two
systems-Arterial blood is positive, venous blood is negativeThe notion refuted that the heart circulates the blood and exerts a force of 100,000 pounds-The heart is moved by the
involuntary force of the cerebellum-The blood is moved by
the positive and negative forces of electricity taken in at the
lungs by inspiration-Philosophy of disease-One cause only
for all diseases-Diseases do not originate ir the blood, but in
the electricity of the nerves-They begin in the finest invisible
substance in the body and end in the grossest-All convulsions
in nature begin and end thus-Blood not rendered impure by
foreign substances carried into it, but by being thrown out
of balance in its circulation-Diseases caused by mental or
physical impressions-Disease settles upon the weakest organ
or part of the body-Nervous fluid thrown out of balance is
disease, and when equalized is health-Half ocf the nervous
fluid is under the voluntary control of the mind-The other
half is not
LECTURE V.
CURE OF DISEASE AND BEING ACCLIMATED,.  8. 2-9
Philosophy of disease-Mental and physical impressions-Rationale of its cure-Man riding-Head aches-Meets a robber
-Headache cured-The healing principle is in us, not in medicine —Equalize circulation by nervous force-Emetics do not




CONTENTS.'.
pFI. B
possess the vomiting principle-Vomiting is pt duced by nervous force-Examples and proof-Diseases cured by mental
impressions, even though caused by physical impressionMedicines produce physical results-Example of a peachl-tree
-Physicians should state to the patients what medicines they
admiiister-How to preserve health-Bathings —No disease
cured by an opposite-Philosophy of becoming acclimatedMineral and vegetable kingdoms —Man a vegetable of second
growth-All vegetables and animals adapted to their climates
-Foreign substances should not be eaten-Change of our
flesh and bones-Clothing adapted to climtate-God has not
erred ih disposing the vegetable substances over the globeTruth immutable.
LECTURE VI.
EXISTENCE OF DEITY PROVED FROM  MOTION,. 99-118.eason fearless of consequences-The power of electricity-Its
awfil manifestations-Nothing comp)ared with Deity-Spirit
supposed to be ilmmaterial, but is not-Supposed to be the result of mechaiaisrm, but is not-Dr. Priestly-Alheists-Tlhe
resurrectionuSpirit is a substance-Electricity is universalMind is the opposite of dead matter-Body and nature compared-Eacl organ has but one functionl-The chain of elemenltary substances considered, from tle heaviest up to the
lightest —Only one substance las motion, tIis is mind-The
unseen is the reality, the visible is not-The tree is an outshoot from the invisible life of the seed-All powers are in the
unseen substanl-ces —Earthquakes-Man and nature alike-Involuntary powers of mind-Involuntary powers of God-His
volluntary  powers create-His involuntary govern through
estallisled laws-God's volultary powers cannot be thwarted,
Iiis ilnvolunitary can-First lhuman pair-Difference between
beinlg bhorn and created-The acorn and the oak, which was
first-Geology-Creation and government of the globe-Premature deaths argued-Two brains-Voluntary and involuntary powers-The office of each proved by preparing fbod
aicx eating it.
LECTURE VII.
SUBJECT OF CREATION CONSIDERED,...  119-147
ki1 motion originates in mind-Thouhgt is not mind-Creation
is a vast subject-Man's right to reason on any subject-Worlds
made otit of electricity-Nothi ng cannot be made into something —-Apostle l'aulB3ible sense of' create-Sometlling must
be eternal-God. space, and duration cotsidered-P'lilosophical necessity-Ellectricity is the body of God-Each animated
body is an outslioot from mind-God's mitnd is not omnipresent,
his body is-,Mind is frm —The serpent-The lobste —All
feeling in mind —Ampuutations — How mind moves the body



8                        CONTENTS.
F AG=
One hundred elements-Mode of creation —'radually from
the invisible to the visible forms-Boyle-Bishop Watson —
Requires electricity, out of which the globe was made, to gov
ern it-One hundred cords fastened on one hundred elements
in electricity-Positive and negative forces-Ultimates and
primates-Gold and phosphate of lime-Sun is electricityPhilosophy of twilight-The globe not yet finished-NewtonComets-Elliptical orbits-Volcanoes-Philosophy of variation
of the compass-The globe yet in its embryo-When finished
-What future generations will say of us.
LECTURE  VIII.
DOCTRINE OF IMPRESSIONS,........  136-151
Creation and Electrical Psychology —All substances in man-It
requires electricity, out of which he was made, to govern himPhilosophy of digestion-Chyle, serum, blood, flesh, tendons,
bones-Positive and negative forces-Blood the universal solvent of the body as water is of the globe-The brain-Stomach
-One hundred elements-Law of equilibrium-Nature like
man is thrown out of balance and becomes sick-Hurricane and
tornado-Rheumatisms and broken bones preceding a stormThunder storms-Cause of hail-Earthquakes-Earth may
have a bowel complaint-Volcanoes-Eruptions-Nature is
cured by her own impressions, and so is man-Sleeping in unhealthy climates-Keep positive to surrounding impressionsCitizens of Charleston, S.C.-Country fever-Dr. Mason Good
-Fear-Cholera-Salem  witchcraft-Pleading guilty-Danger of executing persons on their own confessions-Judges
and jurors.
LECTURE IX.
CONNECTION  BETWEEN  THE VOLUNTARY  AND INVOLUNTARY NERVES,.......... 152-1 1
Electricity the connecting link between mind and inert matterC ose pimples on the arm-Insulated stool-Nerves are magnetic-Electrometer-Why mind removes warts, king's-evil, or
tumors-Dr. Warren, of Boston-Electro-nervous fluid healsWhy it heals-The voluntary and involuntary powers-Throne
of the mind-Each person has two distinct brains through which
the mind acts-Connection between the voluntary and involuntary nerves-How one may affect the other-Death occasioned
by the want of sleep-Death is the sleep of the involuntary
powers-Suspended animation in alligators, toads, serpents,
raccoons, etc.-Suspended animation in some human beings
for several days-Its philosophy or cause-Danger of premature interments-A man in New Jersey, his case stated-The
circulating and nervous systems compared-The mind's throne
in the medulla oblongata-Philosophy of natural sleep-Conelusion-Poetry on Hope.




CONTENTS,                             f
Wealthy climates-Keep positive to scrour.ding impression.rCitizens of Charleston, S. C.-Countrv fever-Dr. Mason Good
-Fear-Cholera-Salem  witchcraft-Pleading guilty —Danger of executing persons on their own conlfessions-JLudgea
and jurors.
LECTURE IX.
(CONNECTION  BETWEEN  THE  VOLUNTARY  AND  IN
VOLUNTARY  NERVES,.......... 164-13)
Electricity the connecting link between mind and inert matterGoose pimples on the arm-Insulated stool —Nerves are magnetic-Electrometer-Why mind removes warts, king's evil,
or tumors- Dr. Warren, of Boston-Electro-nervous fluid heals
-Why it heals-The voluntary and involuntary powersThrone of tl- mind-Each person has two distinct brains
through which the mind acts-Connection between the voluntary and involuntary nerves-How one may affect the otherDeath occasioned by the want of sleep-Death is the sleep of
the involuntary powers-Suspended animation in alligators,
toads, serpents, racc0ons, etc.-Stuspended animation in some
human beings for s, veral days-Its philosophy or cause-Danger of premature ii.terments-A man in New Jersey, his case
stated-The circulating and nervous systems compared-The
mind's throne in the medulla oblongata-Philosophy of natural
sleep-Conclusion.
LECTURE X.
ELECTRO-CURAPATHY  IS  THE BEST  MEDICAL  SYSTEM   IN   BEING, AS  IT  INVOLVES  THE  EXCELLENCES OF ALL OTHER SYSTEMS,..,..181-18
Electrical Psychology is in its infancy-The power it is destined
to exert over disease in coming ages-It is the most sublime
system of philosophy in existence-Excels astronomy and geology, which are great-Its importance not realized-It uses
safe remedies-Discards poisons-It takes its medicines from
the fields of nature where the patient lives-Animals do the
same-The different medical systems noticed-They should all
be combined in one system  of Cilrapathy-Hydropathy considered-Aeriapathy considered —Electricity, galvanism, and
magnetism are useful-Called Electropath-y  Terrapathy considered, or earth cures-Eatths should be applied to the system
in various forms, particularly in inflammations-Man.needs but
little medicine-Attention to food as to quantity and quality is
about all he needs-Why Terrapathy cures is argued-Difficult
to solve-Can physicians tell why any medicine cures?-In.
stinct of the rattlesnake to cure himself when bitten-A negro,
on being bitten, ate the same plant and was cured-Most of
the valuable medicines were discovered by old country women,
uld hunters, and Indians, and n t by doctors-With mtch o.
1*




10                          CONTENTS.
position they were forced to adopt them-Their opposition to
Peruvian bark, the virtues of which were discovered by monks
-The clergy opposed it-A state of health and disease considered-Negative and positive forces considered-Positive electricity belongs to the air, negative to the earth-'There are positive and negative diseases —How cured-Herbs are the eldest
born children of mother earth-They always hang unpn her
breast-Clay poultices-The body buried in soils —Instances
where Terrapathy has cured-The Master and the blind man
-The clay and spittle-Absorbent power of earths-Sting of
a bee cured-Grease spots, how  removed from  silks or woolens-The scent of a skunk removed from  clothes by earthThe cause of this considered, and the supremacy of ElectroPsychological Curapathy shown over all medical systems in
being.
LECTURE XI.
FHE SECRET REVEALED, SO THAT ALL MAY KNOW
HOW  TO EXPERIMENT WITHOUT AN INSTRUCTOR.................                                     199-231
As this science involves all medical systems, ari I embraces other
agents besides, so it should be understood by all-Doctors
should understand it-It often saves life when medicines failIt can be thoroughly learned and practically understood in ten
hours-Dr. Dods will teach it if preferred-He is located in
New York-Will attend to imparting instruction and lecturing
abroad, if invited-Ignorant persons have gone abroad pretending to teach it for ten dollars, for two dollars, and some for
twenty-five cents-Some have changed its name to that of
Electro-Biology-To preven.t imposition the secret is revealed
-How  can those teach its philosophy and its application to
disease who are ignorant of thle human system?-iMore is here
taught. than by any lecturers-God has stamped simplicity on
his works-Each organ of the body performs but one function
-There is but one nerve through which iaeas are transmitted
to the mindd-Ideas are successive, not sim.ultaneous-We can
not attend to two public speakers at once-The mind has a
spiritual brain and spiritual organs-The nerve through whibc
impressions are communicated to the mind is located in the
organ of Individuality-All the organs are double-This nerve
has infinite branches to all the voluntary parts of the body to
communicate motion-A pebble thrown into Lake Superior —
Its illustration-Philosophy of sympathy-Personal ideutityThe brain is the earthly house-To control a person, a communication must first be established;-either by or without contact
-The philosophy of communilcation in general-Positive and
negative forces of male and fenmale elec.tricity-Every one has
h;.s electric circle-Ote in twenty-five is naturally in the psy
chological state-The various modes of taking coitllimxication
— But one way aftel all-Directions given-Thr  gip, —-The




CONTENTS.                          1
I'PAGE
Olnar, or Cubital Nerve-The Median Nerve-Both are compound nerves-The Median Nerve is the best for communication-Its branches connect with the five senses-Various directions given how to experiment-Effects produced upcn the
subject-The coin described, and how to use it —The number
of s-itings-Other substances may be used-The science divided into five plans-Mesmerism is No. 1-The gripe No. 2The coin No. 3-The experiments No. 4-And its application
to curing the diseases of those not in the state is No. 5-Each
of these plans explained-Directions how to mesmerize f ily
given-How to awake him by an impression —Can not experiment without a communication-All philosophy requires cause,
medium, and effect-God could not affect the globe, nor its inhabitants, if he were isolated-Why the experiments are conducive to health-Philosophy of a surgical operation without
pain while the patient is awake and rational-Connection between the mind and nerves of sensation-Case of Henry Clay
in an exciting speech in Congress-He felt not the insertion of
a pin into his flesh-Dr. Channing's remarks on no pain being
felt by the martyrs-None is felt from a wound in the heat of
battle-Inference.
LECTURE XII.
GENETOLOGY, OR HUMAN BEAUTY PHILOSOPHICALLY  CONSIDERED,............   233.-1 A
Human beauty founded on the doctrine of impressions-Our species gradually improved-Born into existence with such forms
as we desire-Beauty loved, desired, and praised by all-The
mother by mental impressions variously affects the fetus-Has
produced abortion-Was frightened at a cub and produced an
idiot who acted like a bear-A lady frightened by a parrotHer child born a mediocre-A son born with compressed temples, caused by the mother seeing a lamb's head crushed-A
child born with one arm and leg-Effects produced by longings-Color of wine transferred to the fetus-Strawberry,
blackberry, etc., transferred-Objections of medical writers
are groundless-It is no new truth-Old as human recordsLaban deceived Jacob-Rachael and Leah-Jacob's cattle
speckled-He used speckled rods-Its philosophy-Aqua regia
dissolves gold-Galvanizing metals-Making a bank plateIdentity of letters, marks, and engravings preserved on metals
-Application of this to the subject-Menses are the raw material to form the child-How it is formed-How to produce it
in her own image-How to make it resemble her husband, or
any one else-Influence of her love or hatred on the feetusEffects of jealousy-Every object she sees has a tendency to
produce a favorable or unfavorable result on the child-Mind
has spiritual organism —Philosophy of effects produced upon
the foetus-The mother's responsibility-Importance of gov



12                        CONTENTS.
PAGai
erning her passions, feelings, and emotins-Importance of
Phrenology-How  the highest specimens of human beauty
may be produced-A  talented  lady considered-Pictures,
countenances, forms, landscapes-Under what impressions to
conceive-Her room, its furniture-Her mind, how employed
in contemplating the beautiful in nature and art-Her food,
and how to proceed till the time of delivery-All great men
produced by talented mothers-Talent depends more on the
mother than father-But few are now  qualified to produce
beauty-Improvement gradual till the work shall be universally
consummated-Those in the psychological state considered, and
the husband's influence on such-Importance of educating
woman in all the sciences, and in political economy and history, equal to man-The responsibility of her station in rearing
her child-The inconsistency of committing her child to the
care of ignorant or base servants-The pulpit-Its moral power
-It neglects this great subject and must be aroused to nobler
action-The gospel of Christ-The millennitm-Agricultural
associations are improving both vegetables and animals-Rewards offered for the most beautiful specimens-But nothing
dene to improve and beautify the human form-We will begin
-~"Futare generations will consummate it-Poetry on hope.




I NTRO DUCTION.
THE anthor received the following invitation from tle under.
signed honorable gentlemen, members of the United States Senate,
to lecture in Washington city, District of Columbia:
" WASHINGTON, Feb. 12th, 1850.
" To DR. DODs:' DEAR SIR-Having received highly favorable accounts of the
addresses delivered by you, in different sections of the Union, on' Electrical Psychology,' a department of science said to treat of
the philosophy of disease, and the reciprocal action of mind and
matter upon each other, we would be gratified if you would deliver
a lecture on the subject in this city, at the earliest time consistent
with your convenience.  With a view to the accommodation of
members of Congress and the community generally, the Hall of
Representatives, if it can be procured, would be a suitable place
for the delivery of your discourse.
" Yours, truly,
" GEO. W. J, T. JES,.. RUSx,
" JOHN P. HALE,         SAM HOUSTON,
"H. CLAY,               H. S. FOOT.,
DAN. WEBSTER."
To the above the following answer was returned:
To the Hon. Tho. J. Rusk, Sam Houston, H. S. Foote, Geo. W,
Jones, John P. Hale, Henry Clay, and Daniel Webster, all of
the United States Senate:' GENTLEMEN:
" In reply to yours of Feb. 12th, I would respectfully say, that
I feel myself highly honored to receive an invitation from you, to
lecture upon the philosophy of Electrical Psychology in the United
States Capitol. With this invitation I comply, and it affords me
much pleasure to do so. Owing, however, to circumstances and
previous engagements, my earliest and only time during my present visit in Washington, will be on Saturday evening, Feb. 16th,
I will therefore appoint that time as most suitable to my conveni'
snce, and commence my lecture at half-past seven o'clock.
With sentiments of high consideration, I am; Yours, truly,
"J. B. Dos."




1 4                    INTR0OD  CT'O,:N. 
The so3ence of Electrical Psychology I b'hae taunht to more thas
a thousand indlividuals, and in ail cases I have uniformly charged
gentlemen ten dollars f(.r tuition, and ladies ive. I have also made
it a uniform practice to lay them indiscriminately under written
obligations, pledging most solemnly their sacred honor, as ladies
and gentlemen, that they would never teach it to any persons but
of good moral character, nor, in any instance, for a less price than
above stated, and that they would lay all those whom they taaght
under the same written obligations and pledges. But it s) happens, that unprincipled individuals, regardless of their pledges of
sacred honor, have, in numerous instances, violated them, and
taught, or at least pretended to teach, this science to others for any
price they could obtain. There are, however, many honorable exceptions to this course of conduct among my students, and I am
proud to bear this testimony to their faithfulness.
The substance of the first NINE of these LECTURES Was delivered, by request, in Washington city, last February, and immediately published.  The sale of the work has exceeded my expectations, and, in this Fourth Edition, I have fully revealed the secret,
so that the reader, by the faithful perusal of my Lectures XI. and
XII., will be as well qualified to experiment as those unprincipled
pretenders, above noticed, who go about as teachers.  They have
even nmade their pupils believe, that nothing was necessary for
them to know only the nerve or gripe to get a communication and
to speak in a positive manner and full tone of voice to the subject! But you will perceive, on reading this work, that they have
not taught you the A, B, C of this science. Its philosophy has
cost me seven years of intense study, and it can not be revealed
in a moment, not taught but by a workman. Honor and justice,
under all these circumstances, require me to publish the mode of
experimenting, so that those who shall teach it hereafter, will be
compelled to study and prepare themselves for the work, as qu.li~ed instructors, because something more;han the SECRET, WhiCl
Lecture XI. reveals, will now be required
J. B DOD.2h
FeW YOnx, September 26th, 1850.




ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGYo
LECTURE I
LADIES AND GENTLEMEN:
I HAVE received an invitation from several EMINENT
MEMBERS Of the United States Senate, to deliver a
Lecture on the Science of Electrical Psychology-the
philosophy of disease-the connecting link between
mind and matter-their reciprocal action upon each
other, and the grand operations of nature that this
science may involve.  In compliance with this invitation, I now stand before you for this purpose, and will
endeavor faithfully to discharge my duty. In order to
do my subject justice, I shall be under the necessity of
making a very liberal draft on your time and patience.
Sensible that I stand here by the invitation of those
distinguished orators, statesmen, and generals, whose
eloquence, in defence of LIBERTY, has been felt by
thrones —whose wisdom has given laws that are respected by all nations on earth, and malke millions o1




16           ELECTRICA. PSYCHOLOGY.
freemen happy —and whose heroism  has breasted the
battle storm  in defence of human rights —it may well
be expected that I should, in some measure at least,
feel the embarrassment that tle occasion itself must
naturally inspire.
As the Creator of the universe has endowed man
with reason, and assigned him a noble and intelligent
rank in the scale of intellectual and moral being-and
as he has commanded him  to use this faculty-so I
may with justice remark, that he who cannot reason is
a fool; he who dare not reason, is a coward; he who
will not reason, is a bigot; but he who can and dare
reason, is a MAN.
The realms of nature lie open in boundless prospect
above, beneath, and around us.  As inhabitants of
this globe, we occupy but a small spot-the centre, as
it were, of the immense universe that swarms with a
countless variety of animated beings, and contains endless sources of mental and moral delights.  Order,
harmony, and beauty are so perfectly woven together
and blended throughout NATURE, as to form  the magnificent ROBE she wears, and with which she not only
charms and even dazzles the eyes of the beholder, but
conceals the overwhelming power and majesty of her
PERSON.  As she moves, the most grand and awful
impressions mark her footsteps on the globe's surface,r centre-in air or ocean.  She smiles in the gentle,
iess of the calm, and frowns in the fury of the storm,




LECTURE 1.                   17
Bat whether silence reigns, earthquakes rumble, or
thunders roll, she keeps her mighty course unaffected
by the revolutions of ages.
At the same time that there is confessedly something
most grand in the operations of nature, and even while
the most gifted minds are reveling with delight amidst
her magnificence, and feasting upon her splendors,
there is still something humiliating in the thought, that
incomprehensibility continues to hold its dark and sullen empire over the causes of many of her most sub.
ime manifestations.  For a period of twice three
thousand years, she has concealed beneath the shadow
of her hand, not only the cause of worlds rolling in
their ceaseless course through the illimitable fields of
space, but also the rise and fall of vegetation, and the
phenomena of life and death.
Man is intellectually a progressive being.  Though
confined to a narrow  circumference of space, and.
chained to this earth, which is but a small part of the
unbounded universe, yet as his mind wears the stamp:f original greatness, he is nevertheless capable of extending his researches far beyond the boundaries of
this globe. His mind is capable of a ceaseless development of its powers.  From the faint glimmerings of
infantile reason, he passes on to that intellectual
strength and grandeur when he can take a survey of
the planets, the dimensions of the sun, trace the comet
ui its erratic course, analyze the works of God, and




18          ELECTRICAL PSYCTHOOGYL.
comprehend the vast and complicated operations of his
own mind.  How sublime is the contemplation, that he
can invade the territory of other worlds, bring thei:
within field-view of the ken of his telescope, and see
them play their aerial gambols under the superintendence of attraction and repulsion.
But before I proceed any further, it becomes necessary that I clearly state the subject of my present
course of Lectures, so that we may enter upon it understandingly, and, if possible, with a clear conception of
its nature and importance to the human race.  The
subject, upon which I am entering, is that to which I
have given the name of Electrical Psychology, as the
one which is, in my estimation, the most appropriate.
PSYCHOLOGY is a compound of two Greek words, viz.,
psuche, which means soul, and logos, which means
word, discourse, or wisdom.  Hence by PSYCHOLOGY
we are to understand the SCIENCE OF THE SOUL.
And as all impressions are made upon the soul through
the medium of electricity, as the only agent by which
it holds communication with the external world, so you
readily perceive not only the propriety but the entire
aptitude of the name ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
Twenty years ago, I discovered electricity to be the
connecting link between mind and inert matter, and on
this discovery the philosophy of the present science is
based. Ever since 1830, I have contended, that electricity is not only the connecting link between MINI?




LECTURE I.                   19
and inert MATTER, but is the gratnd agent employed by
the Creator to move and govern the universe. These
views, in opposition to the doctrine of inherent attraction in matter, I advocated in Taunton, Massachusetts,
in two Lectures I delivered before theyLyccdm in 1832.
The substance of these is embodied in six Lectures I
delivered at the MARLBORO CHAPEL, in Boston, January 1843, by request of members of both branches of
the Massachusetts Legislature then in session in that
city; and they have been most extensively published in
this country, and republished in England.  In that
work they are applied to the philosophy of Mesmerism.
I make these remarks so that ladies and gentlemen
present on this occasion may know, that my views of
the ELECTRICAL THEORY of the universe, and the CONNECTING LINK between mind and inert matter, are not
the breathings of a momentary impulse, but of long
and matured deliberation.
Electrical Psychology takes a most extensive range;
and embraces a field rich in variety of thought. It is
so startling to human credulity, that its truth cannot
be believed, only by: passing it through the ordeal of
the severest scrutiny by oft-repeated experiments. As
to the character and force of these experiments, I cannot better express them than in the following editorial
notice from the " Saratoga Republican."
The editor of the Saratoga Republican having rereived a letter from the Hon. Richard D. Davis, for



20           ELECTRICAL PSYCHO13G'Y
merly a member of Congress, in relation to this science,
writes as follows:
" Dr. Dods, who professes to have discovered a new
science, to which he applies the name of Electrical
Psychology, is at present giving a series of remarkable experiments, in our village, by way of illustrating
its truth and undoubted reality. By it he professes to
be able to perform the most startling and cunning experiments, upon persons fully awake, and in the most
perfect possession of all their faculties.  Controlling
their motions-standing up, they find it impossible to
sit down; if in a sitting posture, they are unable to
rise till the operator allows them to do so.. He claims
to have the power to take away the powers of hearing,
speech, sight, and the memory, etc., whenever -he
pleases, and to return again these faculties instantly;
that he can change the personal identity of certain
individuals, making them  imagine for the time being
that they are persons of color, that they belong to the
opposite sex, or that they are some renowned general,
orator, statesman, or what-not.  He professes to be
able to change the appearance and taste of water in
rapid succession to that of lemonade, honey, vinegar,
molasses, wormwood, coffee, milk, brandy; the latter
producing all the intoxicating effects of alcohol. He
brings before his subjects the threatening thundercloud.  They see the lightnings flash and hear the
thunders roll; the storm bursts over their heads, and




LECTURE I.                   21
they flee to a place of shelter, under a table, beheh,
Cor any thing that offers protection. All this while the
individuals experimented upon are perfectly awake and
in possession of their reasoning faculties.
" We are well aware, that the first impression upon
the mind of the reader will be, that all this is absurd,
ridiculous, and utterly impossible. This would be the
natural conclusion of every one who had never witnessed any of these surprising phenomena; but the
reality of all this is maintained by some of the most
respectable and talented men in the country.  We
have permission to refer to several individuals of the
highest standing and character, who are believers in
this science, and have been pupils of Dr. Dods.  We
have before us a letter written by Hon. RICHARD D,
DAVIS, from  which we make the following extract.
Mr. Davis says:
" The science which Dr. Dods teaches, is to my mind
alike novel, instructive, and useful-full of speculation
fit for the loftiest intellect, and replete with rich instructions for every condition of human life. So far
as I am able to judge, I can safely say, that no person
of ordinary capacity and intelligence can take the usual
course of lessons from the doctor, who will not at its end
sincerely acknowledge himself more than tenfold repaid
for its cost of time, trouble, and expense; and the more
the ability and information of the individual may be,
the more ready will be the acknowledgment. I am un.




22           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
willing to express more than half the gratification an i
instruction which I have received, and if my recommendation can prevail with any one to become his pupil, it is most cheerfully and earnestly given."
What I have now read in your hearing, will give you
some idea of the nature of the experiments, and also
what claims Electrical Psychology has, in the opinion
of distinguished men, in relation to its pretensions to
science and usefulness.  But there is no question, that
ladies and gentlemen, after admitting that these experiments are truly wonderful, and to them incomprehensible, will yet ask, of what use are they to the humar
race   - The great usefulness and transcendent import
ance of this science to the human race consist in it,
curative powers over those diseases that medicine can
not remove.  As facts come home to men's bosoms,
and rebuke the skeptic in a voice of thunder, so I cannot give a better answer to the question, nor render you
a better service, than to read a few extracts from the
city papers of Auburn, New York, where I last lectured and experimented.  It is as follows:
C HIRAM BOSTWICK, Esq., so long and so well known
in this city [Auburn] and county, during more than two
years before he saw Dr. Dods, did not take a natural
step.  For a year and a half last past, could only
slowly drag his feet along, as though they were attached
to wooden legs,:and, at that, did not attempt to drag
himself about the streets.  Besides an  attack last




LECTURE I.                  2
spring (which was the fifth stroke of palsy he had received), he could not even distinguish light from darkness, with his right eye.  In a word, he was dead to
happiness and usefulness.  He met Dr. Dods, and in
less than a week he was taking walks of a mile in
length.  With his right eye he distinguishes persons.
and is constantly improving, while he is daily promenading our streets with the perfect control and use of
every muscle, and is quite as happy as any man we
meet."
I will read again from another Auburn paper. It is
as follows:
" Do the dumb speak and the deaf hear?  In Au.
burn, in October, 1849, they do. This forenoon, two
girls went to the City Hall, neither of whom could hear
a conversation in an ordinary tone. They were operated upon some five or six minutes each, upon the
principles of Electrical Psychology as taught by Dr
Dods, and when they left, one of them could distinctly
hear an ordinary conversation, and the other could as
distinctly hear a whisper."
" Yesterday noon, a lady from Massachusetts called
upon Dr. Dods, at the Western Exchange.  Her eyelids were so drawn down over her eyes that she could
not see, and she could not talk.  In twenty minutes
she could both see and converse. If any one discredits
this statement, let him ask Gen  Wood, the gentlemanly proprietor of the Exchange   When this blind




44           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
and dumb lady came, her femaK attendant stated tc
Gen. Wood, that her friend had not opened her eyes
for three years, and for the last year had not uttered
a syllable.  The afflicted lady made the same statement, after the doctor had restored her wonted powers
of speech.  During the three years, she was for one of
them confined in a dark room, to avoid the supposed
injurious effects of light.  She could not raise the upper lids of the eyes.
" Such was her situation when she called upon Dr.
DoDS at the Exchange yesterday; and in half an hour
she left again, drinking in with delight the prospect
about her, and from which for years she had been entirely shut out, and while at the same time she poured
forth her joy in words which it may be well imagined
were those of the purest ecstasy.  Her friends tried
to prevail upon her, when she reached the carriage at
the door, to shield her eyes, lest the sudden change
from darkness to glare should have a deleterious influence upon those sensitive and delicate organs; but
a gaze about the city was too rich a treat to be
lost, and she availed herself of the opportunity to
enjoy it.
" As this lady had been so long and so severely
afflicted, had availed herself of the knowledge and skill
afforded by the medical profession, and was at the time
traveling in search of health, I thought the case wor,
thy of mention.




LECTURE.,                  2
D o not understand me to be one who, even if in
hiA power, would do any thing to depreciate the high
estimation in which the medical profession is so justl3
held. Not at all. I regard it as one of the n.oblest
of all pursuits, and believe that its practitioners, as a
class, are not excelled, if equaled, by any other in
kindness, self-denial, and humanity. But I will say,
that every physician ought to understand Dr. DODS'
system of Electrical Psychology.  There is no room to
doubt that it will not only give him a knowledge of laws
and phenomena of the human economy he does not now
know or comprehend, but will enable him to afford relief and restoration in cases where before it was out of
his power.
" Granting this to be so-and the appeal here is to
facts which cannot lie —-what is the duty of the honest
physician?  Is it to sneer at a system  or science
which, with a respectable face, makes even these pretensions?-which professes to unfold laws and powers
of mind and body which they do not understand, and
backed up by actual, tangible results, which utterly
dumbfound the whole of them?  Is sneering his duty,
when his hands hold the scales in which are deposited
life and death?  Is it not rather his duty to investigate the matter-to probe it to the bottom-to know
all that can be known about it?
" The community will answer these questions, be.
vause they are deeply interested in the answer*  In'2




26           ELECTRICAL PSYCIIOLOGY.
this city, cures will be performed within one year, by
the pupils of Dr. Dods, in cases where the present'nedical system has been exhausted in vain. This will
rest the question. And by this test, every physician
who sneers at Electrical Psychology will be compelled
to abide.  From  it he cannot, and will not escape.
I will refer now to only one beauty of the electropsychological treatment of pain  and  disease.  Its
pharmacy is always perfect-it is of God."
From  the extracts which I have now read in your
hearing, from  the Auburn papers, you will at once
perceive: the power and glory that hover around this
science, and the importance which is claimed in its
behalf as one of the greatest blessings ever vouchsafed
to the human race.  So that you may see the high
estimation in which this science is held by the citizens
of Auburn, generally, where these cures were performed, I will trouble my audience but once more, and
ask their indulgence while I read the resolutions they
unanimously passed in behalf of Electrical Psychology
as a great and important science, which resolutions
were published in the Auburn papers.  I will also
read the prefaced remarks of the editor   They are as
follows:.'ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.-Dr. Dods closed his
Lectures, in Auburn, on Saturday evening. It will be
seen by our columns this afternoon, that the gentlemen
composing his CLASS, availed themselves of the occa.




LECTTURE I                   21
sion to express their views of Electrical Psychology,
and of the manner in which the DOCTOR sustained his
relations as their Instructor in his system.  It is
enough to say that the CLASS numbered gentlemen of
undoubted intelligence."
" Proceedings adopted by the.uburn Psychological
Class.
l At a meeting of the CLASS of forty-five persons,
who had taken private lessons of Dr. J. B. DODS in
the science of Electrical Psychology, held at the City
Hall, in the city of Auburn, on the 27th day of Octo.
ber, 1849, John P. Hulbert was called to the chair,
and Dr. S. N. Smith appointed secretary.
" On motion, a committee of three was appointed
by the chairman to draft and report to the meeting
resolutions expressive of the views and feelings of Dr.
Dods' pupils, in the city of Auburn, in respect to the
lessons and lectures given them by him."
" On  motion, the chairman  and  secretary were
added to the committee.
" The committee reported the following resolutions,
which were unanimously adopted by the meeting.
"Resolved, That the science of ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY, as taught to this class, by Dr. J. Be DOD,
in a series of private instructions and lectures, we be.
lieve to be founded in IMMUTABLS  TRUTT,) and that it




28           ELECrRICAL, PSYCHOLOGY,
will accomplish for the human race an inappreciable
amount of good.
" Resolved, That we believe ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY has been, and will be eminently useful in allevi
ating the pains of the suffering, and in the cure of dis
eases; that it is as comprehensive as it is beautiful
and beneficent; and that it is not only eminently calculated to enlarge and elevate the mind, but to impress
upon it more exalted ideas of the infinite wisdom and
goodness of the DEITY.
" Resolved, That we tender to Dr. DODS our thanks
for the courteous and gentlemanly manner in which he
has discharged his duties to us as his pupils. That
he has, in all respects, redeemed every pledge or assurance that he gave us when we became his pupils,
and that in parting from him we give him our warmest
wishes for his prosperity and happiness.
" On motion, resolved, That the proceedings of this
meeting be signed by the chairman and secretary, and
delivered to Dr. DODS, and that they be published in
the newspapers of the city.
" JOHN P. HULBERT, Chairman.
"' S. N. SMITH, Secretary."
The subject of these Lectures is now fairly open
fore us. I have explained what I mean by the term
ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY, and why I saw fit to give
the science this name. The wonderful and startling




LECTURE.l                    29
phenomena that hover around it, like so many invisible angels, and which are made manifest in the experi 
ments produced, I have also candidly stated.  They
consist in the fact, that one human being can, through
a certain nervous influence, obtain and exercise a
power over another, so as to perfectly control his voluntary motions and muscular force; and also produce
various impressions on his mind, however extravagant,
ludicrous, or wild-and that too while he is in a perfectly wakeful state. I have stated, that it is one of
the most powerful remedial agents to alleviate the
pains of the suffering, and to cure those diseases that
set the power of medicine, and the skill of the ablest
practitioner, at defiance.  And from  the published
newspaper articles, letters, and resolutions of most
highly reputable, and even distinguished men, which I
have just read in your hearing, you can form an opinion of the effects produced, of the cures performed, of
the high estimation in which this science is held by
those who have acquainted themselves with its secret
powers, and of their high estimate of its incalculable
importance to the human race, and the future amount
of good it is ultimately destined to achieve.
I have only read to you the testimony of the citizens
of Auburn, but could produce the testimony of thousands more, from  the various portions of the United
States where I have lectured-of the importance of
this science in the cure of diseases; and those, too, ox




80           ELECTRICAL PS' CIOLOGY.
a more startling character than any I have named. I
can produce the testimony of hundreds, that this science has, in fifty minutes, restored to Lucy Ann Allen,
of Lynchburg, Virginia, the use of her limbs; who
had not walked a step in eighteen years, nor had she
even been able to raise herself up from her pillow so as
to sit in her bed for more than fourteen years.  Such
is the nature and intrinsic grandeur of this SCIENCE;
such are the experiments and facts connected with it;
such are its results that stamp it with the high impress of its sterling importance to mankind; and
such are its lofty end and aim; and as such it must
stand when the pillars of strength and beauty that
support our Capitol shall fall and be crumbled to
dust.
Some have the impression, that Electrical Psychology
is, after all, but Mesmerism.  In answer to such I will
say, that there is a very marked difference between the
two sciences, and this difference is easily pointed out.
MESMERISMf is the doctrine of sympathy; ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY is the doctrine of IMPRESSIONS.
In Mesmerism there is a sympathy so perfect between
the magnetizer and subject, that what he sees, the subject sees-what he hears, the subject hears-what he
feels, the subject feels-what he tastes, the subject
tastes-and what he smells, the subject also smells;
and lastly, what the magnetizer wills, is likewise the
will of his subject.  But the person in the electro



LECTURE I.                   31
psychological state has no-such sympathies with hig
operator.  His sight, hearing, feeling, taste, and
smell are entirely independent of the operator, and he
continually exerts his will against him, and resists him
with all his muscular force.  The person who is
aroused from  the mesmeric slumber, has no remembrance of what transpired in it; while the person in
the electro-psychological state, is a witness of his own
actions, and knows all that transpired. The person in
the mesmeric state can hear no voice but that of his
magnetizer, or the voices of those with whom he is put
in communication.  But the person in the electropsychological state, can hear and converse with all as
usual.
If these distinctions are not sufficiently marked to
settle the points of difference, then I will mention two
more.  I have found persons entirely and naturally in
the electro-psychological state, who never could be
mesmerized at all, nor in the least affected, under repeated trials. The other point is, that no person is
naturally in the mesmeric state, but thousands are
naturally in the electro-psychological state, and live
and die in it.  MESMERISM  and SOMNAMBULISM  are
identical; they are one and the same state.  And as
no person is naturally in the somnambulic state, so na
one is naturally in the mesmeric state.  Though the
experiments of both these states are performed by the
same nervous fluid, yet this does not rerder the two




I2            ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGYo
sciences identical, any more than that they are rens
dered identical with fits, or insanity, which are caused
by the same nervous force.  These observations being
sufficient for my purpose, are respectfully submitted to
pm  for your candid consideration.




LECTURE II.                  83
LECTURE II.
LADIES AND GENTLEMEN:
As the subject of Electrical Psychology is now fairly
introduced, its phenomena stated, and its importance
to the human race clearly pointed out, we are now pre-.
pared to enter the diversified fields of nature; to
glance at the operations of mental and material existences; and to proceed nnderstandingly to the consideration of its claims to PHILOSOPHY, as the foundation
on which it rests, and the power by which its existence
must be sustained.  But as I am fully sensible that
such strange facts as I have stated are most trying to
human credulity-sensible that they are calculated to
awaken the deepest feelings of contempt in the bosoms
of the skeptical, and to draw forth the sneers of mankind-so I must be indulged to speak, in the first
place, of the march of science, the beauty of the independent expression of our thoughts, and to notice the
fate of the opponents of science in all ages of the
world.
Entering, as I do, upon a theme entirely new, I am
by no means insensible of the embarrassments thLa
2 f




34           LLECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
surround me.  Were I called to address you upon any
other subject than that of ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY,
I should stand before you with other feelings than
those that now pervade my breast. It is by no means
an enviable task to step aside from the long beaten
path of science into the unexplored and trackless regions of solitude and silence.  By s. doing, and daring
to think for myself, I am well aware that I assume no
very enviable position as it regards popularity. Independent thought and fearless expression have ever
drawn forth the scoffs and sneers of that portion of our
race who have adopted, without investigation, the scientific opinions of others. I refer to those only who
have received their ideas from others by inheritance, as
they did their real estate.  For the one they never
labored, and for the other they never thought.
Such persons, though professing to be learned, and
perchance even claiming to be the guardians of science,
are nevertheless its greatest enemies; and by exerting
their influence in favor of old opinions, however absurd,
and against any innovations, however true, useful, or
grand, are checking the mighty march of mind.  They
are clogs of more than leaden weight hanging upon the
chariot wheels of science that are rolling through our
world.  It commenced its career at the breaking morn
of creation, with but few passengers on board, and has
continued its course with increasing speed and growing
glory down.to the present moment.  It now travels




LECTURE II.                   85
with the brilliancy and rapidity of the lightniig's blaze,
and even compels the very lightnings to speak in a
familiar voice to. man! Yes; they even write, not
only their forky gambols on the bosom  of the dark
cloud, but they write on paper, and transmit human
thought as swift as thought can move.
The chariot of science is destined to continue its
majestic course, in duration coeval with our globe!
Still more! it is destined to outlive the dark and sullen
catastrophe of worlds! The chariot of science, with
ever increasing power, magnificence, and glory, is destined to pass the boundaries of the rouldering tombto snatch immortality from the iron grasp of death, and
roll on in living grandeur through the eternal world,
gathering new  accessions of intellectual beauty and
unending delight. Its passengers here are mortal men.
There they will be angel, archangel, cherubim, seraphim, and the glorified millions of our race!  The
mind of man wears the impression of divinity, the
stamp of original greatness; and is destined to ripen
in mental vigor as the wasteless ages of ETERNITY roll.
Hence the very principles of our nature as an impression from  the hand of God, forbid us to stand still.
Their command is ONWARD.
If no human being had dared to hazard the expression of an original thought, then nothing in the realms
of science would have been disclosed by speech, not
penned in books.  A  dreary, barren waste, wrapped




86           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY
in solitude and night, would have reigned for  luman
contemplation.  But instead of this frightful picture
of desolation, we see those fruitful fields of mental and
moral beauty, so rich in the scenery of thought, and in
endless variety, present themselves to our view. A
secret rapture of thrilling delight fills the heart as we
glance over this lovely scene, on which human research
has thrown a splendor surpassing that of the noontide
blaze.
Had not some master spirits dared to freely speak
and write their thoughts, then those pretended friends
of science, who now oppose every thing that may appear to them  both new and strange, would have been
destitute of that knowledge they obtained from books;
and not daring to think for themselves, they would have
remained in mental night. It is by daring to step aside
from the beaten track of books, and bringing forth from
the dark arcana of nature into the light of day some
new truth, that we add our mite to the common stock
of knowledge already accumulated.  He who denies us
this grand right of our nature is a scientific bigot, and
has yet to learn, that even the school and college were
only established to discipline the mind for action.
There the student, through books and instructors, is
only made to see how other men have dared to think,
and speak, and write, and thus his mind, being made
to feel its innate freedom: power, and greatness, becomes inspired with a self-determinaticn to do the




LECIURE rl.                  3
same.  This makes the MAN, and answers the lofty
end of human existence.  On the other hand, he who
goes through life, leaning entirely upon books and the
opinions of others, without thinking for himself, ren
ders his present existence a blank, inasmuch as he lays
his head in the dust, without its having bequeathed one
original thought to the world, for the benefit of'after
generations.
The truths that God has established inherent in nature, are not only infinitely diversified, but are at the
same time immutable and eternal.  No possible addition can be made to their number, nor is it in the power
of man to create or annihilate a single truth in the EMPIRE of NATURE.  They exist independent of his belief or unbelief; and all he can do is to search them
out, and bring them forth from darkness into the light
of day.  And he who has the magnanimity to do this,
so far from being opposed and persecuted, should be
sustained and encouraged as the benefactor of his race.
The Creator of the universe is the Author and Proprietor of the great volumes of nature and revelation.
Hence divines, at least those who are men of letters,
should not start at any new scientific revelations, and
exclaim: " If this be true we must give up our Bibles!"
As men of science, they have nothing to fear from new
discoveries in the shoreless ocean of truth.  The voluames of NATURE and REVELATION both claim the same
perfect Authcr, who had every thing open and naked




O8a      ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
to his ormniscient inspection, and exercised infinite wiss
dom in producing and establishing the order and harf
mony of the universe.
Though this globe, and perhaps the whole of our
planetary system, was finished six thousand years ago,
yet we have no reason to suppose that this was the first
effort of his creating energy.  We are floating in an
immensity of space that knows no bounds, like the
mote in the sunbeam.  This is peopled with rolling
worlds, in number beyond an angel's computation.
And the residue, which has not yet become the abodes
of light, life, order, and beauty, is filled up with matter still in its uncreated state.  Hence the work of
creation has been going on from eternity, and will continue to progress, so long as the throne of the self-existent Jehovah endures, without ever arriving at an end
in the sublime career of creation! New brother creations are every moment rolling from his omnific hand,
and that creating fiat will never, never cease.
These ideas of the wonder-working Jehovah, from
whose all-forming hand worlds and systems of worlds
are continually rolling, and have been, for millions on
millions of ages, force upon us those amazing conceptions of the oppressive grandeur of his works under
which the mind labors and struggles in its contempla.
tions, but is borne down, and lost and bewildered in
the immensity of the theme.  ORDER, VARIETY, AND
BEAUTY, in endless succession meet us on every handL




LECTURE II.                  3
All this has been accomplished by the Infinite Mind,
through electrical action, and bespeaks the vastness
and sublimity of the subject. It is the science of the
living mind, its silent, mysterious workings, and ener.
getic powers.  It is a science that involves the majestic movement of rolling worlds, the falling leaf, and
claims the GREAT LAW of the universe as its own.
The vastness, as well as the transcendent importance
of the subject, clearly evince that it is worthy to be
embraced by every independent, noble, and generous
mind.  You will pardon me, Ladies and Gentlemen,
for having, by a momentary digression from the present chain of my subject, anticipated a few ideas in
relation to the creation and its vastness.  These more
properly belong to a future Lecture, when I shall come
to show what connection this science has with the universe-with rolling worlds-yes, with a falling leaf.
The fall of a single leaf is a catastrophe as dreadful to
the thousands of inhabitants of its surface as the destruction of this globe would be to us. And the blotting out of our globe from  the catalogue of worlds,
would no more be missed amid the immensity of creation than the fall of a leaf compared to the sublime
magnificence of the countless forests on this globe.
From this digression I return to my subject.
That Electrical Psychology should meet with oppo
Biticn from men of a peculiar constitution of mind, and
a certain degree of scientific attainments, is nothing




:0           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
strange. Nor is it at all miraculous, that a few who
are deemed iren of talents, should oppose, and even
deride it as a humbug.  But as GENIUS is supremely
higher than TALENTS, SO I boldly and safely make the
declaration that no man of GENIUS has ever opposed
Electrical Psychology; nor in any age of the world
has GENIUS ever been enlisted in opposing the dawning
light of any of the sciences that have arisen on earth
from the morning of creation to the present day.  But
as before remarked, that this science should meet with
opposition from  that class of scientific men, who always stand watching the direction in which the breeze
of popularity may chance to blow with the strongest
force, and who are anxious, through these means, to
bring themselves into notice, and thus gain a momentary fame from  the passing crowd, is nothing
strange.  It only proves the fact that ELECTRICAL
PSYCHOLOGY is, in the infancy of its being, destined
to share the fate of all great and useful sciences, that
now stand unshaken in the republic of letters.  All,
in their infancy, received from such men a like opposition, and upon their founders they freely breathed out
their derision, scorn, and sneers.
Harvey discovered the CIRCULATION of the blood 
and disclosed it to the world.  He was opposed and
derided, and much of that talent, learning, and cuwn
Fting we have referred to, was enlisted (against hliim
Threy sought to paralyze the towering wing of his




LECTURE II.                  41
ENr is; to blast his reputation; to witier the fairest
flowers of his domestic love, hope, and joy; and to
hurl his brilliant discovery from the light of day to the
darkness of night.  But Harvey's name stands immortal on the records of true fame, and the blood still
continues to frolic in crimson streams through its liv..
ing channels, while his learned opposers are forgotten.
Galileo discovered the rotation of this globe on its axis.
So great was the opposition of the learned powers combined against him, that they arraigned him  and his
theory at the august and awful bar of humbug. There
they fairly tried him and his discovery under the splendid and majestic witnesses of derision, sneer, and
scorn; and the court very gravely decided, that his
discovery was a heresy, and that he must openly acknowledge it to be so to the world. To this sentence
he submitted-acknowledged his theory to be a heresy,
but remarked, that he nevertheless believed it true.
Galileo lives in the bright page of history. That sentence did not arrest the globe in its mighty course. It
still continues to roll on its axis as he discovered ana
proclaimed, while the learned opposers of his theory,
who courted popular favor at the expense of honor, are
sunk into merited oblivion.
NEWTON'S GENIUS, when he was but a boy, intuitively drove him  to study gravitation by piling up
small heaps of sand, and to.notice more strictly this
power in the falling apple.  It drove him  to study




i2           ELECTRICAL PSYIHOLOGY.
adhesion by watching the union of the pat ticled wate
at the side of some favorite stream; and to perfect
this science he is next at the centre of the globe.
From gathering pebbles in boyish sport on the ocean's
shore, he is next among the stars, and at length proclaims to the world his system  of PHILOSOPHY and
ASTRONOMY.  He was derided and mocked as a sillyheaded fool, and his whole magnificent system was
spurned with sneering contempt and pronounced a
humbug by the old school of philosophers and astronomers.  But substances continue to respect the law of
gravitation, and rolling worlds to obey the law of
attraction  and repulsion.   NEWTON  lives in the
brightest blaze of fame; for his name is written in
starry coronals on the deep bosom of night, and from
thence is reflected to the centre of the globe; while
the opposers of his magnificent discovery are sunk to
the shades of unremembered nothingness.  The clouds
and mists of their own evanescent fame have become
their winding sheet.
Fulton was derided, and even men of science pointed
at him the finger of indignant scorn, because he declared that steam-a light and bland vapor, which
could be blown away by human breath-could move an
engine of tremend3us power, and propel vessels of
thousands of tons burthen against wind and waves and
tides.  They declared it to be the greatest of humbugs,
and the most silly idea that ever entered a silly brain;




LECTURE II.                  43
or else the trick of a knave to make men invest capital in order to effect their ruin. His friends, even
though not over-sanguine of success, yet defended him
as a man of honor.  But FULTON " stood firm amidst
the varying tides of party like the rock far from land,
that lifts its majestic head above the waves, and remains unshaken by the storms that agitate the ocean."
So stern was the opposition, that some of the committed skeptics, who sailed from New York to Albany in
the steamboat that first tried the experiment, declared,
that it was impossible they had been conveyed a distance of one hundred and fifty miles by steam power I
and that it must, after all, have been some power aside
from steam, by which they had been enabled to reach
Albany!  The impression of FULTON'S GENIUS is
seen on all the machinery moved in our happy country
by this subtile power.  It is seen in railroad and
steamboat communications, that bring the distant portions of the United States in conjunction. It is seen
in the majestic STEAMSHIPS of England, that bring
her and the transatlantic world into neigborhood with
us, by a power that triumphs over all the stormy elements of nature.  FULTON, as a man of GENIUS, is
remembered as one of the great men of the universe,
while his opposers are silent and forgotten.
Thus far, I have spoken of the physical and meehanical sciences only, involving the chemical propers
ties of material substances, and the general operations




44           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
of nature.  I now come to those that relate to the irma
provement of the mind.  I come still nearer h, me.
The SCMEN(CE of PHRENOLOGY, SO beautiful, eleval ing,
and useful in its nature, and having so strong a bearing
upon the character and destiny of man, as an intellectual, social, and moral being, and even involving the
dearest interest of our race-has been, and by some
still is, most shamefully abused.  GALL, its discoverer, was persecuted; and SPURZHEIM, COMBE, and
FOWLER have received unmerited abuse.  The two
Fowlers, of New York, have for years withstood the
storm of opposition. Thus far, they have most successfully met and repulsed the assaults of men-won
the victory-gathered new accessions of strength, and
still hold the field. They are business men, who never
slumber at the post of duty.  They have made new
discoveries and improvements; gathered an immense
variety of cabinet specimens of skulls and busts, from
the idiot up to the most brilliant intellect-from the
cold-blooded murderer up to the melting soul of a benevolent and philanthropic Howard.  They have made
a righteous development of true character in the phrenological examinations of thousands of human heads -
have directed the anxious parent how to train up the
child of his affections; have pointed out to the sighing
lover how to choose a congenial spirit of companionship
for life; and have poured the light of mental and moral
ir.prevement in silvery streams on the CRAND EMFIRR




.ECTURE i.                  46
OF MIND. Yet such a science as this has been called
a humbug! and such men as these have been assailed.'their bones are worthy to repose with the great men
of the universe, and their names shall live on the
bright scroll of fame down to the last vibrating pendulum of time-shall live when the opposers of phrenological science shall have sunk from human remembrance.
Such has been the fate of all sciences in the infancy
of their existence. The moment they were born into
life, the battle-axe was raised against them, and each
in succession has fought its way up to manhood. The
victory in favor of truth has always been sure, and
millions of sycophants in the contest have perished.
How lamertable is the consideration, that there are
those in this day of light, who, regardless of the warning voice of past generations, coming up from ten thousand graves, still shut their ears and close their eyesand even sacrifice principle, to keep popular with thoseon whom  they depend for a momentary fame.  Bat
they are not the men whose names will stand imperishable in the annals of history, to be handed down to
future generations. They are destined to perish from
human remembrance, and not a trace of them be left
on earth.
I would not be understood as dissuading you from
the pursuit of true fame. I do not despise its noble
glory; but am fully sensible, that of all characters ever




16           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
formed and sustained by human beings, that of tiue
fame stands unrivaled and supreme on the page of history.
Though man is mortal, and his present existence
ephemeral, yet during the short span of three-score
years and ten, to what a transcendent height in the cultivation of his powers is he capable of soaring! True,
his station is humble, yet he who, with an unstained
hand, has honorably grasped the meed of righteous
fame, has clothed himself with power, has wreathed his
brow with undying laurels, and invested himself with
the true majesty of his nature. Fame has been alternately assigned to the hero, the statesman, the philosopher, astronomer, theologian.  But fame is not confined
to any rank or pursuit in life. It can only exist in the
breathings of righteousness. The philosopher and astronomer, though chained down to earth by the law of
gravitation, and tabernacled with the worm, may feel
within a stirring greatness that allies them to higher
intelligences in future worlds, and that bids them bear
their brow aloft.  They may station themselves on a
mental elevation above the world, and lift their towering heads to the stars. From this pinnacle of glory,
they may range in loftiest thought the universe of God
and even struggle to grasp the unbounded empire over
which Jehovah reigns, with all its moving worlds, and
yet, if this be all, true fame does not lie here. It is
not the birthright of the philosopher or astronomer, ui>




axECTURE II.                  4E
]ess they are mn possession of something more than in
tellectual power.
True fame is not the birthright of the hero.  The
blaze of glory that has for ages encircled his head, and
with its brilliancy so long dazzled the world, is beginning to grow dim.  The laurels that decorate his sullen
brow have been gathered at the cannon's mouth, from
a soil enriched with human gore, and watered by the
tears of bereavement.  That fancied pinnacle of glory
on which he proudly stands, has been gained by conquest and slaughter.  His way to it lay over thousands
of his fellow-creatures, whose warm hearts had ceased
to throb; and the music that followed his march, was
the widow's moan and the orphan's wail.  True fame
does not lie here.  It sounds not in the cannon's roar,
the clashing steel, the rattling drum, nor in the fright
ful crash of resounding arms!  It is not heard in mar.
tial thunder.  It is not seen in villages on fire, nor in
Mloscow's conflagration-that ocean of flame!  True
fame breathes not in the deep-heaving sigh of despairing love, nor draws its immortality from dying groans
on fields of war.  It has a higher origin-a nobler
birth —a more elevated aim.  True fame consists in
the LOFTY ASPIRATIONS AFTER INTELLECTUAL AND
MORAL TRUTIT  and when these are found and cherished, that so deep will be the convictions of duty, sustained by sterling honor, that no popularity —no bribes
of wealth and splendor-no fear of frowns, nor evei




48           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGYo
the hazard of life exposed to wasting tortures shall
deter that man from  expressing and maintaining such
truth.  He who does this, possesses true and righteous
fame.
Should the scoffers of rising science challenge me to
produce such an example of true fame ever being set
on earth, I would point them to one perfect specimen.on the sacred page.  I would point them to the SoN oy
MAN, in the majesty of whose virtues, honor, and firmness in proclaimirg truth, language is impoverished, all
buman description fails, and the living lght of MaltAience is darkened freves




LECTUE III.                   49
LECTURE IIM
LADIES AND GENTLEMEN:
PERHAPS I have dwelt sufficiently long upcn the pre.
liminaries of my subject. I have done so to bring distinctly before you its nature, and clearly state its incalculable importance to the human family.  I have done
so to remind you of the opposition, sneers, and scorns
that the noblest sciences have encountered in the infancy of their being, and in all ages of the world.  I have
reminded you that this has been done, not by men of
GENIUS, whose names are registered on the scroll of
true fame, and have come down to future generations.
but it has been done by that particular class of the
learned who have so large a share of the love of approbation as to study public opinion, and follow it, right
or wrong, and thus beg a momentary fame from the
passing crowd, which is destined to expire in darkness
and vanish from human remembrance, before the breal
ing light of trutbh.  I have dwelt thus long upon the
points so that opposition to this science may not s
prise you, ror the real character of the opponent
Mistaken.
3




50 -         ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
Having removed every obstacle that might embarrass
my course, and having plenty of sea-room, I am now
ready to embark in defence of one of the greatest of
causes. I stand before you to lecture upon the wonderful and mysterious science of Electrical Psychology.
I stand here to exhibit by tangible experiments those
wonderful phenomena that cluster around it, and philosophically to defend its paramount claims to immutable
truth.  The successful discharge of this incumbent
duty, forces upon us the necessity of ranging the universe, and summoning the vast works of earth and
heaven to the bar of reason, in order to investigate their
effects, and trace them back to their correspondent
causes. You are the empanneled jury to try this cause,
and I rejoice that I have the honor to argue so interesting a point before the CONGREGATED TALENT AND WISDOM OF MY COUNTRY.  However skeptical men may be
in relation to any thing new, yet so far as stern reality
is in its nature concerned, we have this pleasing consideration, that the unbelief of men cannot frown truth
into falsehood, nor can the belief of men smile falsehood into truth. Hence the belief or unbelief of mortals cannot in the least affect those truths that God has
established inherent in nature, and with which his unbounded universe swarms.
I stand here to defend the electrical theory of the
universe against the assaults of men, to notice the immense variety of material existences, to glance at the




iE CTURN  III.                    51
aninmated forms of ti'rng beauty, to scrutinize Ihe chemical properties of created substances, and to pour, if
possible, the light of truth on rolling worlds.  Let us
even venture to step back beyond the threshold of creation —venture  to lift the dark  curtains of primeval
night, and muse upon that original, eternal material,
that slumbered in the deep bosom of chaos, and out of
which all the tangible substances we see and admire
were made.  That eternal substance is electricity, and
contains all the original properties of all things in being.  Hence all worlds and their splendid appendages
were made out of electricity, and by that powerful, allpervading agent, under Deity, they are kept in motion
from age to age.  Electricity actuates the whole frame
of nature, and produces all the phenomena that transpire throughout the realms of unbounded space.  it is
the most powerful and subtile agent employed by the
Creator in the government of the universe, and in carrying on the multifarious operations of nature.  MIaking a slight variation in the language of the poet, 1 may
with propriety say-'It warms in the sun, reiteshes in the breeze,
Glows in the stars, and blossoms in the trees;
Lives through all life, extends through all extent,,
Spreads undivided, o'perates unspe-at;
Breathes inr our souls, informs our mortal part:
As full, as perfect, in a hair as heart;
As full, as perfect, in vile man that mouris,
Sg the rsat seraph, that adores and burnsg$




52            ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
It Liims all high and low, all great and small 
It fills, it bounds, connects, and equals all."
It is immaterial to what department of this globe
and its surrounding elements we turn our attention,
electricity is there.  Wherever we witness convulsions
in nature, the workings of this mighty, unseen power
are there.  It writes its path in lightning on the sullen brow of the dark cloud, and breathes out rolling
thunder.  Though cold and invisible in its equalized
and slumbering state, yet it is the cause of light and
heat, which it creates by the inconceivable rapidity of
its motion and friction on other particles of matter.
It is the cause of evaporation from basined oceans and
silvery lakes-from majestic rivers and rolling streams,
and from the common humidity of the earth.  It forms
aerial conductors in the heavens, through which this
moisture in vapory oceans is borne to the highest portions of our globe, and stored up in magazines of rain,
and snow, and hail!  It is electricity that, by its coldness, condenses the storm, and opens these various
magazines in mild beauty or awful terror on the world.
It is electricity that, by the production of heat, rarefies the air, gives wings to the wind, and directs their
course.  It is this unseen agent, that causes the gentle zephyrs of heaven to fan the human brow  with a
touch of delight-that moves the stirring gale — that
arms the sweeping hurricane with power-that gives
to the rcaring tornado all its dreadful eloquence of




LECTURE II  58
vengeance and terror, and clothes the mid. iay sun in
light.  It gives us the soft, pleasing touches of the
evening twilight, and the crimson blushes of the rising
morn.  It is electricity that, by its effects of light and
heat, produces the blossoms of spring, the fruits of
summer, the laden bounties of autumn, and moves on
the vast mass of vegetation in all the varieties and
blended beauties of creation.  It bids winter close the
varied scene.  It is electricity that, by its most awful
impressions, causes the earthquake to awake from its
Tartarean den, to speak its rumbling thunder, convulse
the globe, and mark out its path of ruin.
If we turn to mar, and investigate the secret stirrings of his nature, we shall find, that he is but an
epitome of the universe.  The chemical properties of
all the various substances in existence, and in the
most exact proportions, are congregated and concen.
trated in him, and form and constitute the very elements of his being.  In the composition of his body
are involved all the mineral and vegetable substances
of the globe, even from  the grossest matter, step by
step, up to the most rarefied and fine.  And, lastly,
to finish this masterpiece of creation, the brain is invested with a living spirit.  This incomprehensible
spirit, like an enthroned deity, presides over, and governs through electricity, as its agent, all the voluntary
motions of this organized, corporeal universe; while
its living presence, and its involuntary, self-moving




54           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
powers cause all the involuntary functions of life to
proceed in their destined course.  Hence human be.
ings and all animated existences are subject to the
same grand electrical law that pervades the universe,
and moves all worlds under the superintendence of the
involuntary powers of the infinite Spirit.
On this principle, it will be plainly perceived, that
as man is subjected to the same common law that pervades the universe, so electricity is the connecting
link between MIND and MATTER.  As it is co-eternal
with spirit or mind, so it is the only substance in being that mind can directly touch, or through which
it can manifest its powers.  It is tile servant of the
mind to obey its will and execute its commands.  It
is through electricity, that the mind conveys its various impressions and emotions to others, and through
this same medium receives all its impressions from the
external world.  It is by electricity that the mind
contracts the muscles, raises the arm, and performs
all the voluntary motions of this organized body. This
I will now proceed to prove.
It will be readily perceived by every one acquainted
with electrical science, that if I can find an individual
standing in a negative relationship to myself, or by
any process render him so, then I, being the positive
power, can, by producing electrical impressions from
my own mind upon his, control his muscles with the
moat perfect ease.  This is evident, because the pos



LECTURE III.                   55
hie and negative forces electrically and magnetically
blend, are equal in power, and paralyze each other;
or, on the contrary, produce motion.  This great and
interesting truth I will prove to a demonstration, by
experiments upon ladies and gentlemen in this audience, while they are entirely awake, and in perfect
possession of all their reasoning faculties. Before I
proceed to produce these astonishing and even startling
results, I will, in the first place, prova that ELECTRICITY is the CONNECTING LINK between MIND' and inert
MATTER, and is the AGENT that the mind employs to
contract and relax the muscles, and to produce all the
voluntary and involuntary motions of the body.
To bring this before you in the most plain and intelligible manner, I would first remark that the brain is
the fountain of the nervous system, from  whence it
sends out its millions of branches to every part of the
body.  Indeed, the brain is but a congeries of nerves,
and is the immediate residence of the living spirit.
This spirit or mind is the cause of all motion, whether
that motion be voluntary or involuntary.  It wills the
arm to rise, and immediately the arm  obeys the mandate; while the very presence of this mind in the
brain, even though wrapped in the insensibility of
sleep, produces all the involuntary motions of the
vitals, and executes the functions of life.
To establish the fact that electricity is, indeed, the
esuneclinrg link between the MIND and the BonmD   I




66           ELECrRIC.i, PS  CHOLOGY.
would in the first place distinctly remark, that mind
cannot come in direct contact with gross matter.  My
mind can no more directly touch my hand, than it can
the mountain rock.  Mv mind cannot touch the bones
of my arm, nor the sinews, the muscles, the blood-vessels, nor the blood that rolls in them.  In proof of this
position, let one hemisphere of the brain receive what
is called a stroke of the palsy. Let the paralysis be
complete, and one half of the system will be rendered
motionless.  In this case, the mind may will with all
its energies-may exert all its mental powers-yet the
arm will not rise, nor the foot stir. Yet the bones,
sinews, muscles, and blood-vessels are all there, and
the blood as usual continues to flow.  Here then we
have proof the most irresistible, that mind can touch
none of these; for what the mind'can touch it can
move, as easily as what the hand can physically touch
it can move.  Our proof is so far philosophically conelusive.
I would now remark, that it is equally certain my
mind can touch some matter in my body, otherwise I
could never raise my arm at a11, The question, then,
arises, What is that mysterious substance which the
mind can touch, as its prime agent, by which it produces muscular motion?  In the light our subject now
stands, the answer is most simple.  It is that very
substance which was disturbed in this paralysis, and
that is the nervous fluid, which is animal electricity,




LEC TURE III.                  5'
and forms the connecting link between mind and matter.  Mind is the only substance in the universe that
possesses inherent motion and living power as its twc
PRIMEVAL EFFICIENTS.  These two seem to be inseparable, because there can be no manifestation of power
except through motion.  Hence MIND is the first grand
moving cause.  It is the first link in the magnificent
chain of existing substances.  This mind wills.  This
mental energy, as the creative force, is the second link,
and stirs the nervous force, which is electricity.  This
is the third link.  This electricity causes the nerve to
vibrate.  This is thefourth link.  The vibration of
the nerve contracts the fibre of the muscle. This is
the fifth link.  The contraction of the muscle raises
the bone or the arm.  This is the sixth link.  And
the arm raises dead matter.  This is the seventh link.
So it is through a chain of seven links that mind comes
in contact with dead matter; that is, if we allow the
creative force-the will-to be one link.  This will,
however, is not a substance, but a mere energy, or result of mind.  To be plain, it is mind that touches
electricity-electricity touches nerve-nerve  touches
muscle  muscle touches bone-and bone raises dead
matter.  It is, therefore, through this concatenation or
chain, link by link, that the mind gives motion to and
controls living or dead matter, and not by direct contact with all substances.  Hence the proof is clear and
positive, that the mind can come in contact with, and
3,.




58           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
by its volition control, the electricity of the body, and
collect this subtile agent with fearful power upon any
part of the system.
It is evident that the mind holds its residence in the
brain, and that it is not diffused over the whole system.
Were it so, then our hands and feet would think, and
in case they were amputated, we should lose part of
our minds.  If, then, the MIND, invested with ROYALTY, is enthroned in the brain-and if the mind command the foot to move, or the hand to rise, then it
must send forth from  its presence an agent, as its
PRIME MINISTER, to execute this command.  This
prime minister is ELECTRICITY, which passes from the
brain through the nerves, as so many telegraphic wires.
to give motion to the extremities. On this principle,
how easy it is to understand the philosophy of a paralysis.  The nerve, as the grand conductor of the motive
power, is obstructed by some spasmodic collapse, and
the prime minister cannot pass the barrier that obstructs its path.  In this case, the mind, as the enthroned monarch, may WILL the arm  to rise, but the
arm remains motionless.  But remove that barrier, the
agent passes, and the arm  must rise.  Hence it is
easily seen, that all motion and power originate in
mind.
I have now broughlt before you the connecting link
between mind and matter, and through this have shown
you the philosophy of the contraction of the human




LECTURE mII.                   59
maa&... trough mental energy.  This has ev cr been,
and stiff., onsidered an inscrutable mystery in Physiology.  Whether it is now revealed or not, is submitted to your decision.  To my inind, the argument in its
defence is irresistible.
Having clearly and philosophically established the
truth, that electricity, in the form of nervous fluid, is
indeed the connecting link between mind and inert
matter, the question now presents itself-If the mind
continually throws off electricity from  the brain by its
mental operations, and by muscular motion, then how
is the supply kept up in the brain-through what
source is it introduced intk the system, and how conveyed to the brain?  I answer, through the respiratory organs electricity is taken into the blood at the
lungs, and from  the blood it is thrown to nerves and
conducted to the brain, and is there secreted and prepared for the use of the mind.  It will be impossible
for me to argue this point fully unless I explain at the
same instant the philosophy of the circulation of the
blood.  As I differ also with physiologists on this
point, and as I do not believe that the heart circulates
the blood at all, either on the hydraulic, or any other
principle, so I will turn your attention to this subject.
The philosophy of the circulation of the blood is one
of the grandest themes that can be presented for hu.
man contemplation.  While discussing this matter, it
will be clearly mad  to appear how electricity is gath



60           ELECTRICAL PSYCHIOL~ Y.
ered from the surrounding elements, carried into the
system  and stored up in the brain to feed the mind
with impressions.  I desire it to be distinctly understood, that when I speak of the electricity, galvanism,
and magnetism of the human system, or of the nerv.
ousfluid, I mean one and the same thing. But before
I proceed to notice the philosophy of the circulation of
the blood, and the secretion of the nervous fluid, I will
first make a few observations in relation to the nerves
and blood-vessels, so that I may be distinctly understood.
I have already stated, that the brain is the fountain
of the nervous system, and that both its hemispheres
are made up of a congeries of nerves. They both pass
to the cerebellum; and the spinal marrow, continued
to the bottom of the trunk, is but the brain continued.
In the spinal marrow, which is the grand conductor
from  the brain, is lodged the whole strength of the
system.  From this spinal marrow, branch out thirtytwo pairs of nerves, embracing the nerves of motion
and those of sensation. From these branch out others,
and others again from  these  and so on till they are
spread out over the human system in network so infinitely fine that we cannot put down the point of a needle without feeling it-and we cannot f-el, unless we
touch a nerve.  We see, therefore, how inconceivably
fine the nervous system  is.  In all these millions of
nerves there is no blood.  They contain the electric




LECTUR;E III.                61
fluid only, while the blood is confined to the veins and
arteries. I am well aware that the bloo i-vessels pass
round among the convolutions of the brain, and through
them the blood freely flows to give that mighty organ
action; but in the nerves themselves there is no blood,
They are the residence of the living mind, and its
prime agent, the electric fluid.
Though I have frequently, in my public lectures,
touched upon the philosophy of the circulation of the
blood, and hence those remarks were reported and
published in my " Lectures on the Philosophy of Animal Magnetism, in 1843," in connection with my
views of the connecting link between mind and matter,
yet I have never taken up the subject in an exact, full,
and connected detail of argument.  This I will now
proceed to do in connection with the secretion of the
nervous fluid.
I would, then, in the first instance remark, that the
air we breathe, as to its component parts, is computed
to consist of twenty-one parts OXYGEN, and seventynine parts NITROGEN.  Electricity, as a universal
agent, pervades the entire atmosphere.  We cannot
turn the electric machine in any dry spot on earth
without collecting it.  Oxygen is that element which
sustains flame and animal life.  Neither can exist a
moment without it, while nitrogen, on the contrary,
just as suddenly extinguishes both.  The atmosyhere,
in this compound state, is taken into the lungs,  The




62            LLECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
oxygen  and electricity, having a strong affinity foi
moisture, instantly rush to the blood, while the nitrogen is disengaged and expired.  The blood, being oxy
genized and  electrified, instantly assumes a bright
cherry-red appearance, and by this energizing process
has become purified and prepared for circulation. The
Jungs, and the blood they contain, are both rendered
electrically positive; and we know  that in electrical
science two positives resist each other and fly apart.
Hence the lungs resist the blood and force it into the
left ventricle of the heart.  The valve closes and the
blood passes into the arteries.  Hence arterial blood is
of a bright cherry-red hue.  It is by the positive force
of ele'ctric action, propelled through every possible
ramification of the arterial system till all its thousands
of minute capillary vessels are charged.  Along these
arteries and all their thousands of capillary branches
are laid nerves of involuntary motion, but no nerves
whatever attend the veins.  Why is this so?  Why is
it, that nerves, like so many telegraphic wires, are laid
along the whole arterial system in all its minute ramifications, but that none are laid along the venous systenm     I press this question-Why do nerves attend
the arteries, while none attend the veins?  I answer.
that nerves are laid along the arteries to receive the
electric charge from  the positive blood that rolls in
them, artlich charge the blood received from the air inopired by the lungs.  But as the venous blood is nega



LECTURE III.                   63
tive, it has no electricity to throw off, and hence needs
no attendant nerves to receive a charge-because that
very electric charge, which the blood receives from
each inspiration at the lungs, is thrown off into the
nerves by friction, as it rolls through its destined channels in crimson streams.  At the extremities of the
arterial system —at the very terminus of its thousands
of capillaries, the last item of the electric charge takes
its departure from the positive blood, escapes into the
attendant nerves, through them is instantly conducted.to the brain, and is there basined up for the use of the
mind.
The arterial blood, having thrown off its electricity
as above described, assumes a dark-a purplish hue.
It enters the capillaries of the veins, which are as numerous as those of the arteries.  The blood is now
negative, and as the lungs, by new inspirations, are
kept in a positive state, so the venous blood returns
through the right ventricle of the heart to the lungs,
on the same principle that the negative and positive
forces rush together. There it is again electrified and
oxygenized, changed to a bright cherry-red color, is
again rendered positive, and is thus purified and prepared once more for arterial circulation.  We now
clearly perceive that it is electrically the blood circulztes, and electrically it recedes from, and returns to,
the lungs through the two ventricles of the heart.
The heart does not circulate the blood at all, as phys.




64           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
iologists contend.  The heart is the SUPREME REGULATOR of this sublime and constantly ebbing and flow.
ing OCEAN of crimson life, with all its majestic rivers
and frolicking streams, and determines with exactness
how rapidly the whole shall flow.




LECTURE rI.                    Of
LECTURE IV.
LJ^DIES AND GENTLEMEN'
I HAVE in my last Lecture touched upon the philosophy of the circulation of the blood, the nervous system, and the secretion of electricity upon the brain,
which I call the nervous fluid. As this part of my
subject must, on account of its importance, possess
peculiar interest to us all, I desire to dwell upon it a
few moments longer. 
From the arguments already offered, it will be clearly
perceived by every philosophic mind, that the circulating system is in reality two distinct systems.  The
first is the ARTERIAL SYSTEM, that carries the positive blood, which is, as before stated, of a bright
cherry-red color, and is ever flowing from the heart to
the extremities.  The second is the VENOUS SYSTEM,
that carries the NEGATIVE BLOOD, which is of a purple
color, and is ever flowing from  the extremities to the
heart.  To these two circulating systems, the heart,
with its two auricles, two ventricles, and valves, is
exactly adapted, so as to keep the positive and nega.
tive blood apart, and to regulate the motion of bola,




66           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
And it will be perceived that the nervous system most
perfectly corresponds with what I have said of the
circulating system.  I mean that nerves of involuntary
motion are laid along the arteries to receive the charge
of electricity from the positive blood that flows in them.
These views of the circulation of the blood are strengthened by the fact, that the blood contains a certain portion of iron; and we well know that iron becomes a
magnet only by induction, and loses its magnetic power
the moment the electric current passes from it.  Hence
the blood, through the agency of the iron it contains,
can easily assume a positive state at the instant it receives the electric charge from the air at- the lungs.
It can then pass into the arteries, and by friction throw
off its electricity into the nerves, and again assume a
negative state as it enters the veins.
I now consider the ELECTRIC or MAGNETIC CIRCULALATION of the blood philosophically and irresistibly
proved.  Hence the position which many assume, that
the heart circulates the blood on the hydraulic or
vacuum principle, is utterly unfounded in truth.  And
that the heart, in accomplishing this, exerts a force, as
they contend, of more than one hundred thousand
pounds, is too preposterous to be believed. I grant
that the heart is the strongest muscle in the human
Bystem; but who can for one moment believe that its
motive power is equal to fifty tons?  The heart, as I
have alreaiy observed, does not circulate the blood at




LECTURE IV.                   67
all; ncr on the contrary does the blood cause the heart
to throb. The heart and lungs both receive their motions from the cerebellum, which is the fountain and
origin of organic life and involuntary motion. Hence
the involuntary nerves from  the cerebellum  throb the
heart and heave the lungs, and the electricity contained
in the air they inspire, circulates the blood and supplies the brain with nervous fluid, as I have already
explained.
Perhaps, however, the inquiry may here arise, What
proof is there that the involuntary nerves from  the
cerebellum throb the heart and heave the lungs, and
that the blood is not mrade to circulate from the same
cause?   
This double interrogatory is easily answered.  Insert for instance, a surgical knife between the joints of
the vertebrae, and cut off the spinal marrow below the
lungs and heart-all the parts below this incision will
be so completely paralyzed, and voluntary motion and
sensation so entirely destroyed, that we have no power
to move the limbs by any volition we may exert; nor
have we any power to feel, even though the paralyzed
limbs should be broken to pieces by a hammer, or
burned with fire.  Yet in these immovable and unfeeling parts the blood continues to circulate as usual
through the veins and arteries.  This is proof positive
that the blood is not made to flow by any power whatever invested in the cerebellum, but5 as before provedl




68          EELECTRICAL PSYCHOLCOIaT.
by the positive and negative forces of that electricity
contained in the air inspired by the lungs.  But let
the spinal marrow  be severed above the lungs and
heart, and both will be instantly paralyzed and cease
their motions; yet the last inspiration taken in by the
lungs will cause the blood to circulate till it floods the
right ventricle of the heart with venous blood, and
empties the left ventricle of its arterial blood.  This is
proof the most irresistible, that the HEART AND LUNGS
ARE MOVED BY AN INVOLUNTARY NERVOUS FORCE
ORIGINATING IN THE CEREBELLUM, while the blood is
circulated by the positive and negative forces of that
electricity which is taken in with the air at the lungs.
The lungs merely act as a double force-pump to bring
in the surrounding atmosphere, extract from  it a
proper supply of the vital principle to feed the bright
and burning flame of life, and to reject and expire the
dregs unfit for that end. This is perhaps as much as
it is necessary to say in relation to the circulation of
the blood, and the constant secretion of the nervous
fluid from the arterial blood to the brain. I now turn
to the philosophy of disease, and will be brief as possible.
It is generally supposed by medical men, that there
are innumerable causes for the various diseases in existence, and that even one disease may have many
causes in nature to produce it.  But I contend, that
there is but one grand CAUSE for all diseases, and this




LECTURE IV.,                 69
is the disturbing of the vital force of the body. There
is in every human being a certain amount of electricity.
This is, as I have said, the most subtile and fine material in the body; is the power, as has been shown, that
moves the blood; and is the agent by which the mind,
through the nerves, contracts the muscles and produces
motion.  And as all the convulsions and operations in
nature and in man invariably begin in the invisible and
finest substances in being, and end in the most gross,
so electricity, in the human system, is the cause of all
the effects there produced, whether salutary or otherwise.  When this electricity is equalized throughout
the nervous system, the blood will also be equalized in
its circulation, and the natural result is health.  But
when it is thrown out of balance, the blood will, in like
manner, be also disturbed, and the natural result is
disease; and the disease will be severe or mild in
the same ratio as the vital force is more or less disturbed.
I am well aware that medical men are much inclined
to examine the patient's pulse, and watch the movements of the blood.  They seem to think that nearly
all diseases originate in the blood, and hence, under this
impression, hundreds of specifics, or nostrums, have
arisen to purify the blood, as though it contained some
foreign properties that rendered it impure, and that
these, by some medical treatment, must be extracted or
removed from  the system.  But all this is fallacious,




I70      ELECTRICAL PSYC!HOLOG Y.
as the blood contains no foreign properties to render it
impure.  The blood becomes impure only through a
disturbed circulation.  It can bepurified by no other
substances in being, except what are contained in the
air at the lungs.  These are oxygen and electricity.
The whole blood in the body must, every few moments,
be passed through the lungs to be purified and preserved
from putrefaction.  If the circulation, in any part of
the body, be obstructed, or thrown out of balance, so
that the blood cannot pay its timely visit to the lungs,
it must become extravasated and impure.  If, in any
part of the body, there is a complete obstruction, so
that the blood is entirely retained, then inflammation,
ulceration, and corruption must ensue.
I now turn directly to the subject, and call your undivided attention to the philosophy of disease. The
operations of the mind, and the nervous system  of
man, have been too much overlooked by medical men,
who have paid great attention to the blood, and to the
more gross and solid parts of the body.  But it is evident that disease begins in the electricity of the nerves,
and not in the blood.  Electricity is the starting point.
From thence it is communicated to the blood, from the
blood to the flesh, and from the flesh to the bones,
which are the last effected.  It begins in the finest, and
ends in the grossest particles of the system. The un.
seen are the starting powers.
I have already remarked that the brain is the foun.




jCr URE IV.                    71
dain[  ~    nfw G erous system, and sends forth its millions
of branches to every possib.e part and extremity of the
body.  This nervous system  is filled with electricity,
which is the agent or servant of the royal mind, who,
as monarch, holds his throne in the brain.  From
thence the mind, by its volitions, controls one half of
the electricity of the system.  It controls all that is
contained in the voluntary nerves, but has no such
control over the other half, which is confined to the involuntary nerves.
Though there is but one grand cause of disease,
which is the electricity of the system thrown out of
balance, yet there are, nevertheless, two modes by
which this may be done.  It may be done by mental
impressions.  And so it may be done by physical impressions from external nature. I will first notice how
diseases are produced by mental impressions.
Millions of our race have been swept from the light
of life to the darkness of death by various diseases
caused by mental impressions.  Misfortulle and distress have fallen upon many a father, a mother, and
many a child.  They have shut up in their bosoms all
these mental woes, and brooded over their misfortunes
in secret, concealed grief.  Melancholy took possession
of the heart, the vital force was disturbed, the system
was thrown out of balance, disease was engendered,
and they went to their graves.
r am now addressing this audience.  The action of




72           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
my mind has called the electricity of the system from
the extremities to the brain.  The blood has followed
it.  My feet being robbed of their due proportion of
the vital force, are, in the same ratio, cold, and hence,
this is, so far, disease. And unless I ceased speaking,
and suffered a reaction to take place, it would bring me
to my grave.
A man accumnalates a fortune of tywo hundred thousand dollars.  He loses one half of it, and is hurled
in distress.  He broods over his misfortune.  The
mind is in trouble; it shrinks back on itself.  The
electricity of the system, this servant of the mind,
leaves the extremities and approaches the brain, the
throne of the master.  The blood follows on; the excitement becomes great, and he believes he shall die in
an almshouse.  He is a monomaniac.  Suppose he
now loses the other half of his fortune, and his mind
will become involved in still greater distress. This
mental action calls an increased quantity of electricity,
that is, of nervous fluid, to the brain, and an equal
amount of blood follows on.  He is now entirely deranged, and his feet are incessantly cold, because the
brain has robbed them of their due proportion of the vital
force.  Now do you not perceive, that if these forces
are dispersed from the brain, and the circulation equalized, that his reason will be restored?  There is not
too much of blood and electricity in the system, but
there may be too much in any one department of the




LECTURE IV,                   73
aystem.  I will now suppose him once more in possession of his reason.  Now bring him  intelligence that
his darling child is crushed to atoms. The mind suddenly shrinks back on itself; the electric, or nervous
fluid, instantly darts to the brain, like a faithful servant to see what distresses the master.  The blood as
suddenly follows the servant. The storm rages, and a
fit ensues. Let the news be still more startling, and
the congregated forces will, in the same ratio, be increased upon the brain, and he drops a corpse!  So we
perceive that, in all these instances, there is but one
cause of disease.  The only difference we have witnessed in the effects produced, was a gradually increased action, occasioned by an increased power of the
same cause, even from the slightest excitement, gradually up to that fearful point where it produced instant
death.  An instance analagous to this, transpired here
among you, in the case of the distinguished statesman,
John Quincy Adams.  Perhaps too much anxiety and
thought for the welfare of his country, at his advanced
age, called the forces to the brain, and the brilliant
lamp of reason and life was extinguished! lie has entered on other scenes!
I have thus far confined my remarks to effects produced upon the brain by the electro-nervous fluid and
blood, which were called there by the various emotions,
passions, and sensations of the mind. But that these
forces should invade the territory of the brain, and
4




74           ELECTRICAL rSYCHOLG f.
produce such results, depends, however, upon the condition of the brain as to its comparative physicas
strength with the other parts of the system.  In this
view of the subject, had the same misfortunes as tc
loss of property above stated been visited upon this
same individual when his brain was firm, a different
disease would have been the result.  Suppose that his
brain, as to its physical structure, had been strong and
firm, but that his lungs had been weak.  Now let the
same misfortunes befall him. His mind again shrinks
back on itself; the electro-nervous force, as before,
starts for the brain, but is not allowed to enter this
palace of the distressed monarch, and it stops at the
lungs, the weakest and nearest post.  The blood next
follows on in pursuit of the servant, and takes up its
abode with him.  Inflammation sets in, and, if the
trouble of the monarch continues, tubercles form, ulceration takes place, and death ensues.  It was consumption.
But suppose thv. lungs had been strong, and that the
stomach had been, by some trivial circumstance, rendered the weakest part. The electro-nervous fluid and
blood would, in this case, have gone thire, and taken
possession of that post.  Inflammation, canker, with
morbid secretions would have ensued, and even ulcers
might have beei formed.  The dig.stive organs would
have been weaken~ri, and dyspepsia, with all its horror
of horrors, would nave been tne result. If the liver




LTECTUiRE IV.                T7
had been t.e weaker spot, the same forces, under the
same mental impressions, would have congregated there,
and produced the liver complaint.  IF the stomach and
liver had both been strong, and the spine weak, it would
have been a spinal complaint. If all these had been
physically firm, and the kidneys weak, the same forces
would have produced a disease of the kidneys.  And
if all in the regions of the brain and trunk had been
firm, and a mere blow had been inflicted upon the hip,
knee, or any part of the lower limbs, the electro-nervous force and the attendant blood would have gone
there, and produced the white swelling, or any other
species of inflammation and distress.  So we perceive,
that the same CAUSE, under MENTAL IMPRESSIONS, may
produce any of these diseases.  As to the character
of the disease, it merely takes its name from the organ
or place in the body where it may locate itself. Hence
diseases differ one from another only as the various diseased organs, their motions, secretions, and functions
may differ-or as the various located parts of the body
invaded by disease may differ from each other. But
the producing CAUSE of all these diseases is one and the
same.  It is the ELECTRO-NERVOUS FLUID of the body.
Having said all that I at present deem necessary ix
relation to the disturbing of the nervous force by rMENTAL IMPRESSIONs, I will now turn your attention to
the disturbing of the nervous force o'y Pr YSIAL Ini
PRESSIONS




T7           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
As the mnind in distress-in secret melancholy anJ
grief-has disturbed the nervous force, which has engendered disease by calling the blood and other fluids
Df the body to its presence, and thus sent millions to
their graves-as it has produced all the diseases we
have mentioned and even hundreds mor —so the same
diseases and hundreds more are also produced by the
nervous force when it is disturbed by physical impressions from external nature.
I am well aware that mental and physical impressions may be termed causes of disease; but it will be
remembered, that medical men contend that there are
remote and proximate causes of disease.  I am on the
latter, and contend that there are not thousands of
proximate causes, but only one grand PROXIMATE
CAUSE of disease, and this is the disturbing of the
nervous fluid, or throwing the electricity of the system
out of balance; and that diseases begin in the electric
force of the nerves, and not in the blood.  They begin
in the invisible and finest substance of the body, and
end in the gross.  Hence the same cause that produces
monomania, produces entire derangement, fits, headache, and even the common excitement of the brain in
a public speaker.  The same cause produces consumption, dyspepsia, liver complaint, spinal affections, pleu.
risy, cholera, dysentery, inflammations, fevers, etc,'this subtile, disease-causing principle, is the ELECmr.-NERvcUS FLUID, When equalized throughout the




LECTURE IV.                     71
system, it is the cause of health for it controls the
blood and other fluids, and when thrown out of balance,
it is the cause of disease. Hence the minister of health
and sickness-of life and death-is within us, and is
oi.e and the same principle.  As electricity is the efficient cause of all convulsions, calms, and storms in nature, and of all the pleasing or awful phenomena that
transpire in earth, air, or ocean, or in the vegetable or
mineral kingdom, so, as man is but an epitome of the
universe, it is electricity in the form of nervous fluid
that produces all the convulsions, calms, and storms in
his own system.
We have seen the various secret stirrings of electricity in the human nerves under mental impressions, in
producing insanity, fits, consumptions, etc.  We witness the same mournful results when that subtile power
is moved by physical impressions.  A  wet foot, for
instance, may throw  the electro-nervous fluid out of
balance, and this subtile force may suddenly check the
lacteal or other secretions, and also produce insanity,
or fits, or by locating itself upon the lungs, it may produce consumption.  The fact is, that the electro-nervous fluid, when disturbed at the extremities, or on the
surface of the body, always retires inward, and locates
itself upon the weakest organ, or upon some weak portion of the vitals-the blood follows, and disease is the
result.  As T have fully explained this when noticing
mental impressions, so there is no occasion of my par




78           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOG.
ticularizing. I will merely say, that a sudden exposure
to a damp air, sitting upon a cold rock, lying upon the
ground and suddenly falling asleep, or sitting with the
back to a current of air while in a perspiration-all, or
any of these, may at times disturb the electro-nervous
force, and arouse this disease-causing power from its
slumberings. This may throw the blood out of balance,
and by locating themselves upon the weakest organ or
weakest part of the system, engender disease. Or the
nervous force may be disturbed by eating or drinking
too much or too little of wholesome substances, or by
eating and drinking unwholesome or poisonous substances, and all these correspondent diseases produced.
It is now clearly seen how vmental and'physical impressions disturb the electricity of the system, which
locates itself upon the weakest organ, calls the blood
to its aid, and brings disease, pain, and death. So we
perceive, that the same nervous fluid which, when
equalized, produces health, is, when thrown out of balance, the cause of disease.  The whole electricity of
the nerves is, of course, one hundred per cent.  Fifty
per cent. is under the voluntary control of the mind,
and belongs to the voluntary nerves, and the other fifty
per cent. is under the control of the involuntary powers
of the mind, and belongs to the involuntary nerves.
Now if the whole fifty per cent. of either of these
forces, which when equalized is health, should be suddenly collected upon any one organ, it would be the




LECTURE IV.                   79
destruction of that organ.  If the mind, on hearing
bad news, or by some sudden distress, should call the
whole fifty per cent. of electricity under its control to
the brain, apoplexy and death must ensue. This would
be done by a mental impression on the voluntary nervous force, causing the mind to shrink back on itself and
become passive. But the same melancholy result could
be produced by eating, drinking, or some other physical
impression on the involuntary force over which the
mind has no such control. Hence it will be understood,
that all diseases, originating under mental impressions,
are produced by the fifty per cent. of voluntary nerv —
ous force. But those diseases, originating under physical impressions, are produced by the fifty per cent. of
involuntary nervous force, and over which the mind has
no control
If either of these electro-nervous forces, to a certain
amount, should be called to a muscle, it would be pain.
If called to a still greater extent, it would be inflammation; and if the whole fifty per cent. were called
there, it would be mortification, and the ultimate and
absolute destruction of the muscle.  The same result
would follow in case either of these forces were called
to any organ in the system. It would be the destruction of that organ.
There are three kinds of pain: First, a pain produced by negative electricity, which attracts the blood
to the spot, and is ever attended with inflammation,




80           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
Second, a pain produced by positive electricity, which
repels the blood, and, though equally severe, is never
attended with inflammation.  Third, a pain produced
by the confused mixture of the two forces, and consists
in a burning, itching, or prickly sensation, and is often
very distressing.
I have now given you a few hints on the philosophy
of disease, which are of course novel to you all; but
they are, nevertheless, as interesting and important to
the welfare of our race, as they are novel and strange.
Medical men have ever noticed the great effect that the
mind has upon the body, both as it regards a disastrous
or salutary result.  Hence they keep up the brightest
hopes of their patients as to recovery, and carefully
guard every one against uttering to them a word of discouragement.  These effects they have seen, but not
understanding the connecting link between mind and
matter, the true philosophy of disease has been by them
entirely overlooked, and in relation to this science they
may after all cry " humbug."  But this will avail them
nothing, for truth, after all, will stand unshaken, and
be appreciated by after generations, when opposition
shall have been interred, with no hope of its resurrection.  In view of our subject, so far as it regards mental impressions, we see the supreme importance of
maintaining a reconciled state of mind. Equanimity
of mind is the parent of health, peace, and happiness
and the noblest test of the true Christian.  When wi




LECTURE [V.                   81
see thous/nds always restless, complaining of cold and
heat, and wet and dry-complaining of their own condition, and finding fault with others, and dissatisfied
with the events of Providence-we need not marvel
that so many complain of indisposition and disease,
This state of raind oroduces them.  So bewaiel




U8            ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGBo
LECTURE V.
LADIES ANl C;=\'TLEMEN:
WHEN we reflect how extensive a field the philsgo~
phy of disease naturally occupies, and how  vast a
range we must take in order to inspect minutely its
several parts, it will thon be seen that my remarks,
in my last Lecture, have been brief in comparison with
the vastness of the subject.  I flatter myself, however,
that my views are understood, and that the importance
of the doctrine of mental and physical impressions, in
relation to disease, is clearly seen, and fully appreciated by you all,  I believe it to be founded in immutable truth, and that it will survive the crush of
empires and the revolution of ages.
Having brought forward the PHILOSOPHY  OF DISEASE in my last Lecture, I now turn to the RATIONALE OF ITS CURE in this.
In discussing the doctrine of mental impressions, I
have clearly and irresistibly proved that the mind by
shrinking back on itself in fear? melancholy, and grief,
in the day of adversity, misfortune, and distress, can
disturb the electro-nervous fluid, and allow it to con.




LECTURE V.                   88
centrate itself upon any organ of the body and engender disease. If, then, the mind can disturb the equilibrium  of the nervo-electric force and call it to some
organ so as to produce disease, then the mind can also
Iisperse it, equalize the circulation, and restore health.
This it can do by a mental impression, admitting the
epression to be sufficiently great.  For example: A
I;an in possession of five thousand dollars is riding
homeward on horseback in the evening.  He is within
a mile of his house.  He is weary and his head aches
so severely that he is obliged to walk his horse.  Ile
is so indisposed and faint that he can but just keep his
saddle.  From a lonely dismal spot at the road side,
a robber springs and seizes his horse's bridle-presents a pistol, and exclaims, " Your money, or your
life!"  The rider, with a loaded whip, and at the impulse of the moment, suddenly strikes the robber's
arm.  This causes the pistol to discharge, and adds to
the confusion of the moment.  The rider, scarcely
knowing what he is about, puts spurs to his horse.
He darts off at the top of his speed.  Before he is
aware, he is at his own door.  He dismounts and finds
himself safe.  The vital force is driven to the extremities, and his hands and feet are warm.  Where is his
headache now?  It is gone.  The supreme impression
of his mind drove the electro-nervous fluid from his
brain —the blood followed it-a reaction took place,
and he was well.  Is there any thing strange in this I




84           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOL3GY.
No. Then there is nothing strange in this sciencee
for it is the curing of diseases by the doctrine of impressions.
I desire it to be distinctly understood how this power
operates. Remember mind touches the electro-nervous
fluid, moves it —and this fluid moves the blood.  Electrical Psychology is the doctrine of impressions, and
the same disease that mind, or even physical impressions can cause, the mind can remove, if the patient
be in the psychological state. Because mental impressions to any extent we please can be produced upon
him.  It is therefore immaterial from  what source a
disease may arise, or what kind of a disease it may be,
the mind can, by its impressions, cause the nervous
fluid to cure it, or at least to produce upon it a salutary influence. If exposure to heat or cold, dampness
or dryness, or to any of the changing elements, should
call the nervous fluid to the lungs, and disturb the circulation of the blood, so as to produce inflammation,
the mind could disperse and equalize it, and thus effect
a cure as readily as though this inflammation of the
lungs had been brought on by melancholy and grief,
or by any other mental distress. Or if these exposures
had caused any other disease or pain in the system,
the mind could have had the same power to remcve it,
as though it had been caused by mental distress.  Or
if by eating, drinking, or by sedentary habits, dyspepsia had been produced, the mind could have had the




LECT..'RE V.  86
sama power to produce a salutary result, or even to
cure it as though it had been caused by mental distress. I do not mean that a cure car be effected by
the electro-nervous force, through mental impressions
if there be any organic destruction of the parts diseased.  The consumption, for instance, could not be
cured if the lungs were ulcerated; sight could not be
restored if the optic nerve were destroyed; nor could
deafness be removed if the auditory nerve were destroyed. In these cases, even, medical remedies, it
must be granted, would be of no avail, because there
is no foundation on which to build.  In all I have
said, or may say in regard to cures, I have reference
only to curable cases.  I mean, that the fifty per cent.
of electro-nervous force, under the control of the mind,
could effect a cure where there is no organic destruction, and where there is, at the same time, a sufficiency of vital force left to build upon, so as to be able
to produce a sanative result.  Nor do I mean to be
understood that this science alone can at all times
cure.  It may require medicines to co-operate with it.
As diseases are produced through mental and physical
impressions, so through mental and physical impressions they must be cured.
Medicine produces a physical impression on the system, but never heals a disease.  If a disease were
ever healed through medicines, it was healed by the
same sanative power as though it had been done by a




~86       ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
mental impression in accordance with the teachings of
Electrical Psychology.  This is evident; because the
sanative power is in the individual, and not in the
medicine.  Medicines and mental impressions only call
that sanative principle to the right spot in the system
so as to enable it to do its work. The following example will explain my meaning on this particular
point:
You enter a garden and see a peach-tree with its
fruit not fully grown, but so heavily laden, that one of
its limbs is partially split from the trunk. The gardener is aware that if it be neglected till the fruit
grows to maturity, the limb will be entirely parted
from the tree and die.  He carefully raises the limb
till the split closes, and puts under it a prop to keep it
to its place.  He winds canvas around the wounded
part, and over this he puts tar.  Now there is certainly no healing principle in the prop-there is none
in the canvas-nor is there any in the tar.  The prop
merely sustains the weight of the limb, and keeps the
split together; the canvas is wound around it to prevent the tar from entering the split; and the tar was
applied to protect the whole from the air, rains, and
external elements; while the tree is left to the inherent operations of its own sanative principles.  The
sanative principle being in the tree, it must heal itself.
So the healing principle is in mnan, as much so as it is
in   e tree.  The healing principle in the tree is the




LECTURE V.                      87
jnvisible ele tro-vegetative fluid.   This moves and
equalizes the sap, and the sap affects the wood.  It is
the electricity of the tree that does the work; and this
electricity is under the control of its vegetable life.
So the healing principle in man is the invisible electronervous fluid.  This moves and equalizes the blood,
and the blood affects the flesh.  It is the electricity of
the system, under the control of the mind.
The position is incontrovertible, that the healing
principle is in man. Admitting it to be electricity, or
what I call the electro-nervous fluid of the system, it
is then easily seen that there is no healing principle in
medicine, and it is also understood what effect medicine
must have upon the system in order to produce a salutary influence.   It must equalize the electricity, as
before remarked, and call it to the proper spot, so as
to enable it to do its healing work.  Hence, if the
mind can so operate upon the fifty per cent. of the
electro-nervous force under its control, as to equalize
it, then it follows, as a matter of course, that the same
healing result will be obtained as is effected by medi
cine.  In either case there is no difference in the healing power.  In both instances it is the same.  The
only difference is, that in the one case the healing
power was made to act by the mind, which produced
its nental impression, and in the other case by the
medicine, which produced its physical impression.
It may now  be asked, If medicine has no healing




88           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
property in it, then how can an emetic remove impurni
ties from  the stomach by vomiting the patient?  In
reply I would state, that it has never done so. In
this I desire to be distinctly understood. I mean that
an emetic is not the vomiting principle.  The vomiting
principle is in the man.  It is the electricity of the
system.  The electro-nervous fluid of the brain is the
vomiting principle.  Let us understand the philosophy
of this.  Emetics, whether mineral or vegetable, possess those peculiar chemical properties that cause immense secretions.  This effect is the whole secret of
their power.  An emetic, talken into the stomach, produces secretions most freely from the glands of the
stomach, from  the mucous membrane of the lungs,
from the glands of the trache, and from the glands of
tile mouth and tongue.  It robs them of their moisture
which is continually accumulating upon the stomach.
The parts being robbed of their moisture by this artificial action, the electricity from the nerves follows it,
because electricity has a strong affinity for moisture.
When a sufficiency of the electric force is drawn from
the brain, and the blood havin:g in the same ratio followed it, the countenance becomes pale-an expansion
and collapse of the stomach takes place, and vomiting
is the result. This is its philosophy. In proof of the
fact, electricity sannot be gathered in damp weather.
The moisture  %or wLich  it has a strong affinity,
holds it,




LECTURE V.                    as
After all I have said of medicine and its operations.
it may yet be supposed that it possesses some healing
principle, and that the emetic does vomit the patient,
Why then will it not vomit a dead man?  The answer
is, because the vital force is gone, and the emetic is
powerless.  But why will it not vomit the man when
he is worn out with disease and near his end?  I
answer, because the vital force in the man, on which
vomiting depends, is wasted; and as it does not exist
in the medicine, so the emetic, in its chemical action
having no material to work upon, or to call to its aid,
is powerless.
If this is not satisfactory to your minds in the settlement of the question whether the vomiting principle is
in the medicine or in the patient, I will pursue the
subject still farther.  Suppose while eating strawberries and cream, you tell a sensitive lady that she has
taken into the stomach a worm, or even a fly-she
stops eating, and in a minute she vomits freely.  How
is this, when she has swallowed, in fact, neither worm
nor fly?  I answer, that the vomiting principle is in
the brain.  She believed that she had taken into the
stomach what was stated; she kept her attention
steadily and most intently upon it-and the mind
threw the electro-nervous force from  the brain to the
stomach, until there was a sufficient quantity to produce an expansion and collapse of the stomach, and cause
vomiting.  Now the vomiting in this case and in the




90           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
case of the emetic was occasioned by one and the same
thing, and that is the electro-nervous fluid.  The only
difference in the two cases is, that the emetic called it
from the brain by a physical impression, and the mind
forced it from the brain by a mental impression.
If the vomiting principle is not in us, why then does
it turn the stomach to see an animal eating any thing
very filthy, like the dog returning to his vomit? If
this principle is not in us, how can it produce nausea?
How can the motion of a vessel, and sometimes even
the motion of a carriage, produce vomiting, unless it
exists in the nervous force of the brain?  Why will a
fall, or blow upon the head, produce it.
The same is true in relation to cathartics, which
excite the secretions of the glands, but of other glands
than those affected by an emetic. A cathartic excites
the secretions of the mucous glands of the alimentary
canal. This draws the electric action from the brain,
but mostly from the nerves on the surface of the body
there, and produces its results. I have been thus particular upon the action and operation of emetics, as
this one hint is sufficient to lead any reflecting mind to
a correct impression of-the relation in which medicines
stand to the human system.  They are the mere props
and supports of some weak part, to aid nature in restoring herself to health and vigor. A cathartic, taken
into the stomach of a very sensitive individual, wil
produce the result of an emetic j and an emetic, to




LECTURE V.                   9'
iohg in effecting its end in the first stomach, will, after
passing the duodenum, t roduce the result of a cathartic
in the second stomach.
I have now said all that is necessary in relation tc
the curing of diseases by the ELECTRO-NERVOUS FORCE,
and have clearly shown how this force can be made to
act by mind, or by medicine.  I will now give advice
in relation to avoiding disease and preserving health,
which it will be well for every one to observe who is
desirous of securing this inestimable blessing.  As life
is dear to all, I shall be pardoned when I say that
medical gentlemen are mad who administer medicine in
silence to the patient without candidly informing him
what the medicine is, and what effect or effects he intends it to produce.  If the patient were thus instructed by a physician in whom he had full confidence, then
he would be in constant expectation of the anticipated
effect; and the mind, by its mental impressions, acting
in concert with the physical impressions of the medicine, would produce a salutary and happy result.  I
grant that this information cannot be given to infants,
nor to deranged persons; but it should be done in all
possible cases.
Inorder to preserve health, the body should be kept
clean, and the mind pure and calm.  There are extremes in every thing, and these should le carefully
avoided.  The body should be carefully washed all
over, or bathed, except the head, in wateir moderately




12           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
cool.  No soap should be used in either case, and the
process should not occupy more than three or fouT
minutes.  It should be briskly rubbed with a coarse
towel, and mostly downward, so as not to disturb the
minute scales that cover the pores.  In cold weather,
colder water should be used than in moderate weather.
Indeed, the water should be about the temperature of
the elements.  But in freezing weather the body should
be merely immersed, and almost immediately extricated, and the washing process should not occupy more
than a moment of time.  In cold weather, twice per
week is sufficient; and in warm weather, every alternate day is abundant, in ordinary cases. Too frequent
washings and bathings, and of too long continuance, to
persohs in ordinary health, is deleterious, as it destroys
too much of the natural oil of the skin, which the
Creator has supplied to give it a soft and silky texture.
The system of hydropathy has great force, if rightly
managed.  In cases of heat, or inflammation, warm
water should be applied, and the reaction would be
coolness; and in cases of cold feet, they should be
washed on going to bed each night in cold water, till
they remain continually warm.  The coldest water
will extract the frost from a frozen hand, whereas if it
were immersed in the warmest water that could be
borne, it would perhaps destroy it, so as to render even
amputation necessary.. But if the hand be burned or
scalded, immersing it in the warmest water that can be




LE TURE Vc                   93
borne, or holding it to the fire, will produce a salutary
result, even though lhe remedy be a harsh one.  On
this principle, you see the inconsistency of cold water
applications, and even of ice to the head in brain
fevers, or where there is a severe inflammation of the
brain, occasioned by a fall, a blow, or any concussion.
I now turn the attention of ladies and gentlemen to
eating, drinking, and wearing apparel, and will endeavor, in few words as possible, to show the bearing
of these upon the human constitution.
Our bodies are made up of the elements, and, as I
have already observed, are an epitome of the universe.
In order to insure perfect health, we should subsist entirely upon the provisions, whether vegetable or animal,
that are produced in that part of the earth where we
were born and reared, or in that part of the earth where
we intend to spend our days.  And, moreover, our
wearing appai el should also be the product of the same
section where we live.  Cotton should never be worn
where the snow covers the earth, or in that part of the
earth's latitude where it cannot be raised. Hemp, flax,
cotton, wool, and silk may be worn with perfect safety
in those latitudes of the earth's surface where they can
be cultivated.  The Creator's works are perfect.  He
has established complete harmony between the vegetables, and the soil where they grow, and the climate that
fostered their existence and warmed them  into life.
He, therefore, who eats the food belonging to his own




94           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
latitule, who 1drinks the water that gushes from hIa
own springs, and wears the clothing produced in his
own climate establishes a perfect harmony and apti
tude between his own body and the surrounding elements.  I mean that he does this in case he uses these
blessings temperately, as not abusing them.
The truth of this will appear perfectly clear, if we
have a correct understanding of inuring ourselves to
another climate, entirely different from the one to which
we have been accustomed.  I will therefore call your
attention to the PHILOSOPHY  OF  BECOMING ACCILHATED.
The mineral kingdom lays a foundation for the vege
table, and the vegetable for the animal kingdom.  It is
therefore perfectly clear that no animals could have
had an existence till there were vegetables, because an
animal is but a vegetable of the second growth. Each
latitude of the globe has vegetables peculiar to itself,
and these make up all the varieties that exist on earth.
But the same species of vegetables differ from  each
other in different latitudes, as far as the climates and
elements or soils may differ from  each other.  An
apple, pear, or peach, grown in forty degrees north
latitude, differs considerably from the same fruit raisel
in thirty degrees north latitude.  This is certain, because it is the result of surrounding elements that gave
it being.  The same may be said of corn, wheat, and
rye in different latitudes. And as animals are but




LECI URE V,                  95
veg. tables of the second growth, hence tlbe same animals vary in accordance with their latitudes.  The
beef, mutton, and pork, raised in thirty and forty degrees north latitude, are therefore unlike, each being
adapted to its own climate and the vegetables that sustained them.
I have already stated, that our bodies are made of
the water, the vegetables, and animals upon which we
subsist, and are adapted to the climate and surrounding
elements where we were born and reared.  Our bodies
are continually wasting away, and by food and drink
are continually repaired.  We lose the fleshy particles
of our bodies about once a year, and the bones in about
seven years.  Hence in seven years we have possessed
seven bodies of flesh and blood, and one frame of bones.
We have not now, in all probability, a particle of flesh
and bones we had seven years ago.  The water we
have drank, and the fesh and vegetables we have eaten,
having made up the component parts of our bodies,
cause us to hanker and long for the same substances of
which our bodies are composed. Like substance in us
calls for like substance without, to supply the waste
of the system.  This is habitude.
Now suppose we suddenly change our climate from
farty to thirty degrees north latitude.  The air, water,
fruits, vegetables, and flesh all differ.  The old particles composing our bodies, and brought from forty detees north latitude, fly off as usual  This produces




9 6  ~    ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
hlunger and thirst and we supply our wani3 by the
water and food of thirty degrees north latitude and
continue for weeks to do so.  This creates a co.fliet
between the old substances of our bodies and the new
flesh and blood continually forming, throws the electronervous force out of balance, and engenders disease.
If we live and struggle on, for about seven years, we
become ACCLIMATED, because our old flesh and bones,
formed by the substances of one latitude, have disappeared, and our entire systems are made up of the
substances of another latitude.  Hence we see the
danger of changing our positions on the globe to any
great extent, which may, however, in some instances,
prove beneficial to the constitution.  Such is the PHiiLOSOPHY of being ACCLIMATED.
In view of what I have now brought forward, it wil
be clearly perceived, by ladies and gentlemen, that we
should confine ourselves to the water, fruits, grains,
and animal food, and even to the medicines produced
in that climate where we live, and reject those of distant latitudes and foreign climates.  To drink tea and
coffee, and eat oranges, lemons, citrons, pineapples,
and the productions of all parts of the globe, is like
changing, in some measure, our climate for another, or
for several others, and thus keeping up a continual
conflict between the elementary particles that are constantly entering the composition of our bodies.  There
is an incessant war, waged between the climate where




LE TURE V.                   97
we live, and the productions of another region, and
those of our own.  To all this, add the clothing of
other distant climes to be worn by us, and who can
marvel that almost every man, woman, and child is
complaining of some indisposition, or else groaning
under disease and pain? Abandon luxuries of foreign
growth; avoid dissipation; keep your bodies clean;
your minds calm and contented; eat the productions of
your own climate; drink the clear crystal water of your
own spring; wear the flax, hemp, cotton, or wool that is
raised in your own latitude; take all the rest of sleep
that your nature and temperament require; have your
hours of study, labor, exercise, and serious contemplation all regulated; and be temperate in all things.
Follow these directions, and no doctor will enter your
house.  If you must have ted, use sage, pennyroyal,
and hemlock.  These are wholesome, and habit will
transform  them  into luxuries far transcending the
nerve-destroying plant of China.
It is imApossible that the Creator could have erred in
adapting all the fruits, grains, and other vegetable substances to each latitude of the earth, so that man and
other creatures can subsist there in health, peace, and
happiness.  And man no more requires the products
of other climes to increase these blessings, than the
animals around him, who find not only their food
and drink, but even their medicines produced by the
soil on which they tread, without resorting to foreign
5




98           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
importations. At the novelty of these ideas you may
smile, but they are based upon immutable truth, and
established, constituted, and sustained by HIM  who
founded the pillars of strength and beauty that support the,fabric of nature, and must stand till they
shall fall.




LECTURE Vf.
LECTURE V.
LAPiYLS AND GENTLEMEN:
THE nlature and importance of Electrical Psych )lo0
gy I have clearly and philosophically argued, in a free,
unchained, and fearless expression of my thoughts.
For this, even if I have erred, I am  entitled to your
approbation,  rather than  your condemnation.  For
what is man, when he makes himself a cowering,
cringing slave to the opinions of others, and tamely
bows to win the momentary smiles of popular applause
from the passing crowd?  What I have said in relation
to this science, has been the sincere breathings of my
own convictions.  I have, therefore, reasoned fearless
of consequences; and if I have in so doing met your
approbation, I rejoice at it; if I have met your disapprobation, I regret it-yet you will pardon me when I
say that I 3annot alter my course and accommodate
myself to the opinions of others, however elevated may
be their stations.  Fully sensible of the duty I owe to
my fellow-men, and to the Supreme Ruler of the universe, and when I discharge this to the best of my ability,
I little care what men may think or even say of moe




100          ELECTIICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
If, however, what I have argued of the human system
-the electro-nervous force-the connecting link-between mind and matter-the circulation of the bloodthe philosophy of disease-the rationale of its curethe laws of health, and the philosophy of being acclimated —if these excite your surprise, ladies and gen.
tlemen may then prepare themselves for still greater
surprise in the arguments now to be offered on spirit,
and the creation and government of the universe.
Being myself perfectly unshackled and free, I shall
exert myself in that freedom while pursuing this department of my subject.
In'my introductory remarks in my THIRD Lecture, I
took a general survey of the powers and operations of
electricity throughout the empire of nature.  We saw
its secret workings, and its alternately sublime or
awful manifestations.  But all these operations and
convulsions, however magnificently grand, will appear
but as the drop of the bucket to the fountain, when
compared with the UNSEEN POWER that stirs the universe.  Electricity, so swift in its movement as to rival
the lightning glance of thought, and so inconceivably
awful in its rending force as to convulse the globe to its
centre, is yet as nothing, and less than nothing, compared with that Eternal One who arms it with powerwho gives it all its expansive force, and who makes it
the messenger of his attributes to both nature and man,,
With his finger he has written the truth of this science




LECTURE IVT.                  101
on every object throughout the realms of nature.  It
is written in the beams of the mid-day sun —in the
descending rains and gentle dews.  It is written in the
flowery field and shady grove.  It is written in stars
on the scroll of night.  It is written in lightning on
the bosom of the dark cloud.  It is written deep in
sympathy on the soul, and controls the most powerful
affections and stormy passions of the human heart.
In this Lecture I will turn your attention to SPIRIT.
or MIND-by which I mean one and the same thingand will endeavor to prove the existence of an Infinite
Spirit.
Though the powers of mind and its complicated
operations can be seen, felt, and in a good degree comprehended, yet, after all, we know but little of mind as
it regards its properties, or substance. Some suppose
it to be absolutely and positively immaterial, because
it is purely spirit.  Others believe mind to be the result of organism, and contend that it cannot exist without a brain, which is the grand organ that secretes
thought, even as the liver secretes its bile, or the stomrn
ach its gastric juice!  The former of these suppositions is the one generally adopted by the Christian
community who believe spirit to be an immateriality.
The latter supposition is embraced by those Christians
who wholly rely upon the resurrection of the body for
the future existence of the spirit.  They are called
Materialists, because they make out the spirit to be no




102          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY,
substance at all, but merely the result cf organized
matter.  Of this faith was the celebrated Dr. Priestly.
This latter position is also adopted by the Atheists,
who contend that spirit cannot exist independent of an
organized brain; and as they reject the Christian hope
of the resurrection; so they contend that mind is extinguished in the night of the grave, and sleeps in nonentity, to wake no more.  Hence the idea of a God,
as an intelligent Spirit, they regard as a freak of fancy
-a mere chimera of the human brain.  Both of these
positions as it regards spirit I reject, and will give my
reasons for doing so.
T reject the immateriality of the spirit, because
that which is positively and absolutely immaterial
cannot of course possess either length, breadth, thickness, nor occupy any space. Indeed, it cannot, in this
case, possess any form; and that which possesses no
form, cannot, in the nature of things, occupy any space.
And to talk of a thing having an existence, which, at
tho same time, has no"form, nor occupies space, is the
most consummate nonsense.  Hence an immateriality
is a nonentity-a blank nothing.  On the other hand,
if mind is merely the result of organism, and if it cannct exist independent of an organized brain, then who
made the first brain?  Did it not require an intelligent
spirit to organize its several parts, and adapt the eye
to light, the ear to sound, and make these organs the
inlets of sensation to the inhabitant in that brain I




,LECTURE T I.                103
Surely the brain did not make itself, for this would
only be saying, that the brain acted before it existed!
Having given my reasons for rejecting both these
ideas of mind, I am now ready to introduce the question, What is MIND?  I answer, it is a substance-an
element-as really so as air or water, but differs materially from  all inert substances in being.  I regard
mrind as living and embodied form —as that incomprehensible element whose nature it is to possess life and
motion, as much so as it is the nature of other substances to yossess inertia.  Hence, mind is, in these
two respects —namely, liJe and motion-directly the
opposite of dead matter.
In the first place I will start with the assertion that
there must be in the universe an Infinite Mind.  It is
impossible, in the very nature and constitution of
things, that an absolute perfection of substances can
be philosophically maintained without this admission.
For the truth of this position I rely upon motion. By
MOTION, then, I am to prove the existence of an Eternal Mind.
In the first place permit me to remark, that inherent motion is not an attribute common to all substances in nature.  This globe, as a body, is moved
by the positive and negative forces of electrical action.
And all the operations of nature in the earth and elements are carried on by the same power.  Whether it
be crystalizations, or petrifactions, the growth of vege.




104          ELECTRICAL PS CIO^xiOGY.
tation, or its decomposition-motions and changes in
air and water-or the crumbling particles of the mountain rock —all the motions, visible and invisible, that
transpire in the mineral and vegetable kingdoms, and
in all their multifarious operations, are produced by
electricity, which is the universal agent appointed to
keep up the order and harmony of the universe.  And
yet it is certain that electricity does not possess inherent motion as its attribute.  Motion belongs to one
substance only, and that is mind.
There is certainly as much order in the universe as
there is in the human body. Let us, then, look truth
calmly in the face. Each organ of the body performs
but one function.  The eye sees-the ear hears-the
olfactories smell-the glands taste-the heart throbs
to regulate the blood-the hands handle-the feet
walk, and the liver secretes its bile. The eye never
hears, and the ear never sees.  So there is but ONE
SUBSTANCE in nature whose attribute is inherent motion, and that is MIND.  Not one single part of the
human body possesses independent motion.  Electricity is there also the grand agent to move the limbs
and vitals, and the living mind is the only moving
power.
The point upon which 1 am now entering is one of
most deep and thrilling interest.  It is no less than to
prove the existence of an Eternal Mind from mnotion
rnd the absolute perfection of the chain of elenemedzr




LECTURE VI.                   105
substances.  But while accomplishing this, I must call
to my aid the relative subtilties of different portions of
matter with which we are surrounded.  Let us, for a
moment, turn our attention to a few of the most obvious substances in nature, and then glance at her absolute perfection as a whole.  Let us carefully notice
the gradation  these substances occupy toward  each
other in their relation to motion, and then the intrinsic beauty of the subject will appear.  I will begin at
the heaviest matter that may first suggest itself to my
mind, and leisurely pass on, rising higher and still
higher, through its various grades, up to that which is.
more and more rarefied, subtile, and light, till we arrive at that which must necessarily possess inherent
motion, and therefore living power.
The heaviest of gross substances in existence is the
most difficult to move, and hence must be at the greatest possible distance from motion.  Though there are
several solid substances heavier than lead, yet I choose
to begin at this, as the idea I wish to convey is all that
is worthy of your consideration in the present argument.  Lead, then, on account of the density of its
particles, is difficult to move.  Were it the heaviest
substance in nature, it would take its position farther
distant from motion than any other substance.  Rock
being more easily moved than lead, takes its relative
position nearer to motion.  In like manner earth is
more easily moved than rock.  Water is more easily
5*




106          ELECTIICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
moved than earth.  Air is more easily moved thar
water.  The gaseous fluids are more easily moved than
air, and electricity is more easily moved than the gaseous fluids.
It will now be perceived, by ladies and gentlemen,
that as we mount the rounds of the ladder in the magnificent scale of material substances, there is a gradual
approximation toward motion.  Each substance as we
rise, being more rarefied and light than the one below
it, is of course nearer to motion than its grosser neighbor.  And it will be perceived by every philosophic
mind, that we cannot continually approximate motion
without at last reaching motion, or that substance to
which motion belongs.
VWe have now mounted from lead up to electricity;
and though as we rose we found each successive substance more easily moved than the one below it, still
we have not as yet found a single material that posse.ses inherent motion as its attribute.  Lead, rock,
earth, and water are moved by impulse.  Air is moved
by rarefication, and electricity is moved by the positive
and negative forces. Tr-ue we have mounted up, as before remarked, to electricity, but even this cannot move,
unless it is thrown out of balance in relation to quantity as to its positive and negative forces.  In such
oases it flies, equalizes itself, and again sinks to rest.
I am fully sensible that electricity is a fluid most inconeeiv;bly subtile, rarefied, and fine.  It is computed to




LECTURE VI.                   107
take foul million particles of our air to make a speck
as large as the smallest visible grain of sand, and yet
electricity is more than seven hundred thousand times
finer than air! It is almost unparticled matter, and is
not only invisible, but, sc far as we can judge, it is imponderable.  It cannot be seen-it cannot be weighed!
A thousand empty Leyden jars, capable of containing
a gallon each, may be placed upon the nicest scale, and
most accurately weighed. Then let these be fii' d with
electricity, and, so far as human sagacity can determine, they will weigh no more. - Hence to our perception, a thousand gallons weigh nothing.
As electricity, in regard to motion, stands uponc tho
poise, being completely balanced by the posit've ard
negative forces, that equalize each other, so it is easily
perceived, that if we mount one step higher, we must
come to that substance whose nature it is to mo've, and
the result of that motion is thought and power.  It is
MIND.  Hence it will be distinctly perceived, in view
of the argument now offered, that we cnnt, as philosophers, stop short of motion in the highest ai;d most
sublime substance in being.  This conclusion, as the
result of the argument, is absolutely and pcsitively
irresistible, and challenges refutation.
When we mount Lip in our contemplations throulg
the various grades of matter, and see it cortinually
brightening as we progress onward in our delightful
career of rapture, till we arrive a  that sublimated




108           ELECTRICAL PSYChE: LOGY.
substance which can neither be seen nor weighed..which moves with a velocity of twelve million miles
per minute, and can travel around this globe in the
eighth part of a second, we are struck with astonishment and awe! But as this is not the last link in the
immeasurable chain, we are forced to proceed onward
till we arrive at the finest, most sublime, and brilliant
substance in being-a substance that possesses the
attributes of inherent or self-motion and living power,
and from which all other motion' and power throughout
the immeasurable universe are derived.  This is the
INFINITE MIND, and possesses embodied form.  He is
a living being.  This Infinite Mind comes in contact
with electricity, gives to it motion, arms it with power,
and, through this mighty unseen agent, moves the universe, and carries on all the multifarious operations of
nature, whether minute or grand.  Hence there is not
a motion that transpires amidst the immensity of his
works, from rolling globes down to the falling leaf, but
what originates in the ETERNAL MIND, and by Him is
performed, through electricity as his agent.  Mind is,
therefore, the absolute perfection of all substances in
being; and as it possesses self-motion as its grand
attribute, so it is, in this respect, exactly the reverse
of all other substances, which are, of themselves, mo
tionless.  MIND, or SPIRIT, is above all, and absolutely
dirposes of and controls all.  Hence mind and its agents




LECTURE VI.                    109
electricity, are both imponderable —are both invisible,
and coeternal.
As the Eternal One wraps clouds and darkness
round about him, and holds back the face of his throne,
so many do not believe in his existence, because he is
unseen, while all the visible objects of creation are to
them  so many realities.  But the very position here
assumed is an erroneous one.  The very reverse of
this is true.  What is seen is not the reality, but is
only the manifestation of the unseen, which is the real
ity.  Let us carefully look at this point.  There is an
apple-tree; it is plainly seen; but is that tree the reality?  No; but it is the result of an invisible cause,
and that unseen cause is the reality. But what was it?
I reply, that it was not even the seed, but the life of
that seed was the reality; and that unseenz life possessed the embodied form of that tree.  All its shapes
and colors were there.  By ceming in contact with the
soil and moisture, in a proper temperature of climate,
it was enabled to throw out its own invisible and living
form.  First, then, the life; next the seed in which it
dwells; next the trunk of the tree appears.  Then its
limbs and branches-its buds, leaves, blossoms, and
fruit again end in living beauty.  It began in life, and
in seed or life it ended. It performed an electric circle.
The tree, then, is nothing more than a visible outshoot
-— an ultimate of an invisible substance, which is the
reality.




[1o          ELECTRICA' PSYCHOLOGY,
All the powers and operations of nature are lcdged
in the unseen and finest portions of matter-they pass
on through every grade, and end in the gross and heaviest parts.  The unseen power that stirs the earthquake and convulses the globe is the reality.  It
passes through every grade of matter, and ends in rending the solid rocks and hurling cities in the vortex of
ruin.  The power that moves this globe in its orbit at
the rate of sixty-eight thousand miles per hour, is an
invisible agent, moved by omnipotent Power-for all
operations and effects begin in the finest substance in
being, which is the unseen cause, and therefore the
reality.  Hence it is the same in nature as in the hu 
man system, as I have already shown in my arguments
on the philosophy of disease.  The disease begins in
the finest substance of the body-in the electricity of
the nerves-passes on to the blood and flesh, and ends
in the bones.  There is, indeed, but one common mode
of operation in nature and in man.
Ladies and Gentlemen —I desire now to turn your
attention to one important point in relation to mind,
which has been entirely overlooked by philosophers.  I
mean its involuntary powers.  To speak of the involuntary powers of mind will certainly produce a singular impression on your hearts; and the strangeness
of the idea may, perhaps, fill you with surprise.  But
strange as it may appear, it is nevertheless true that
mind possesses the two grand attributes of voluwtary




LECTURE VI.                  Ill
and ir..vol, ntarb  power.  These two constitute the
mind as a living being of embodied form.  If mind
make use of electricity as its agent, then it must possess the voluntary and involuntary powers to meet the
positive and negative forces in electricity.  If this
be not so, then the Infinite Mind cannot be the Creator and Governor of the universe; because it is by
his voluntary power that he creates a universe, but it
is by his involuntary power that he sustains and governs it.  Each of these powers, from a philosophical
necessity, and from the very nature of his being, perform their own peculiar functions, and in perfect har.
mony preside over their own respective departments,
It is the peculiar province of the voluntary power of
the Infinite Mind to plan, arrange, dispose, and create
worlds and their inhabitants, and it is the peculiar
province of his irlvoluntary power to govern and con.
trol these worlds and their inhabitants through the
fixed laws of nature.  Let us reason this point, and its
consistency will appear.
In the first place —if the voluntary power of the Creator governed the universe, then no possible contingencies could happen-and nothing once commenced could
ever perish prematurely.  For instance: if God determined to create a human pair, and by his voluntary
power commenced the work, they could not perish
when his work was but partially accomplished.  They
are destined to come to matuity, invested with the




112          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
true lineaments of form —and destined t) gaze aipuv
each other as perfect specimens of living beauty.  If
not, then God in his voluntary and absolute determinations can be thwarted and disappointed.
The first male and female, at least, of each species,
were produced, and the whole living chain of animated
existence was placed upon this globe by the voluntary
powers of God, without any previous parents from
whom they received their being.  They were not born,
but created, for there is philosophically and strictly a
very wide difference between being created and born.
The former we call miracle, the latter, an order of
nature.  To produce a human pair without a previous
father and mother, is not in the order or power of nature, for she never changes her mode of operation in
the production of her animated existences.
The same is true in relation to the vegetable kingdom.  The whole species of vegetable life was produced by the voluntary powers of God. In the order
of nature there never was an acorn but what grew on
an oak; and there never was an oak but what came
from an acorn.  Geology proves that there has been a
period when there were no vegetables or animals on
this globe.  Which then was first-the acorn or the
oak? If you reply that the acorn was first, then there
was an acorn that did not grow on an oak.  If you say
that the oak was first, then there was an oak that did
aot come from an acorn.   Whence then is the starting




LECTURE VI.                  118
point of creation, if there is no God? for nature cannot
start herself, as this would only be saying that she
acted before she existed.  Whether the Creator, in
the first place, produced by his voluntary powers the
seeds or the plants, is of no consequence to my present
purpose.  It is enough to say, that they were brought
into existence without any parent stock, and in per.
forming this work there could be no uncertainty, nor
could any thing perish prematurely, because it was
under the voluntary powers of the Infinite Mind.
But after this globe was created, and the first link
of every species of vegetable and animal life was moved
into existence by the voluntary powers of the Creator,
it then naturally and of philosophical necessity passed
from the control of the voluntary powers to the control
of the involuntary powers of the Infinite Mind, and by
them  to be governed through the established laws of
nature.  Here then casualties may naturally arise, but
no where else under the government of the Supreme.
This view of mind removes the many difficulties and
perplexities we encounter, when we contemplate the
unchangeable character of the Creator in the govern.
ment of the world.  Millions of our race are continually perishing by premature birth!  The eye was most
skillfully organized and adapted to see light, but saw it
not.  The ear was formed —all its vocal chambers
were arranged, and the whole adapted to the roverberations of sound, but it never heard.  It had hands,




11i          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOG1.
but they never handled-feet, but they never walkedt
lungs, but they never breathed-and a mouth, but it
never spoke, nor tasted food.
Again-how many millions of our race die under ten
years of age! And though they were constituted, and
ripening for the enjoyment of the social and domestic
affections, and the multiplication of their race, yet they
were prematurely cut off, and left no progeny on earth,
Now if these events are under the government of the
voluntary powers of the Creator, would he not, I ask,
be arrested in the execution of his voluntary will, and
would not his designs fail of being accomplished?  The
conclusion is absolutely irresistible, for how can we
judge of designs only as we see the adaptation of
means to ends?  If an eye and ear are formed, and
adapted to light and sound, does not this prove the
will and design of God, that the one shall see, and the
other shall hear?  It does.  If then the infant prematurely dies and never sees an object, nor hears a
sound, are not those two organs formed in vain, and
are not the design and will of the Creator both frustrated? If the girl that died at ten years of age, and
never bore nor nursed children-if it is admitted that
she did not answer the full measure and end of her existence, in common with her sex, is not then the will
of God rendered abortive, and do not his dezigns in
this case fail?  It must be so, if the governmentc of




LECTURE VI.                  115
the world is under the voluntary powers of the Infinite
Mind.
That this part of my subject may be understood,
and its consistency clearly seen, I will endeavor to present it before you in a very plain and simple form.  I
will take for illustration the human mind in connection
with this body.  We have two distinct brains-the
cerebrum, with its two hemispheres and six lobes, commencing at the frontal part of the skull, and occupying
the greater portion of the cavity; and the cerebellum,
which occupies the back portion of the skull.  The
spinal marrow, extending through the vertebrae to the
bottom of the trunk, is but the continuation of these
two brains. From the spinal marrow branch out, as I
have before stated, thirty-two pairs of nerves, embracing both the nerves of motion and those of sensation.  From  these again branch out others, and in
thousands of ramifications carry out the full power of
both brains into every part of the system.
The cerebrum is the great fountain of the voluntary
nerves, through which the voluntary powers of the
mind ever act.  The cerebellum is the fountain of the
involuntary nerves, through which  the  involuntary
powers of the mind ever act.  Though the voluntary
and involuntary nerves from these two brains seem to
blend in the spinal marrow, yet they preserve their
distinct character, even to their final termination in
the system, and execute the functions appertaining to




116          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY,
their own office in producing voluntary and iuvoluntary
motion.  Such is the residence of the living mind,
which seems to hold its throne in the medulla obiongata, at the fountain-head of the voluntary and in.
voluntary nerves.  From  thence my mind, by its volitions, controls all the voluntary motions of my body,
through the cerebrum.  At will I move my hands in
any possible direction I please to handle substances,
and at will I move my feet to walk.
But ovbr the throbbings of my heart, the ultimate
heaving of my lungs, the circulation of my blood, and
the digestion of food by the stomach, I have no voluntary control.  Awake, asleep, at home, abroad, the
heart continues its motions, and the functions of life
are executed, whether I will it or not.  These then
receive their motions from  the involuntary powers of
my mind, acting through the cerebellum. That these
are all moved by mind is certain-because, take the
mind or spirit from the body, and all motions, whether
voluntary or involuntary, instantly cease.
I will now make an application of this to the Infinite Mind, in creating and governing the universe.  If,
for, instance, you make machinery of various kinds,
these are your own creations, for they are made by
the voluntary powers of your mind. If you cultivate
the earth, and raise grain and the various vegetables,
to sustain your existence, these again are your own
creations, for they are produced by your voluntary




LECTURE VI.                  117
powers.  You prepare them, by various processes, fot
your use-you cook and place them on the table.  You
eat them, and thus far they are under your voluntary
action.  But the moment they are eaten, your creations are finished, and the whole, naturally and of
philosophical necessity, passes beyond your direct volition, and is subjected to the involuntary powers of
your mind.  These now tale charge of this new crea.
tion, and govern it in all its involuntary motions and
revolutions, according to the fixed laws of the organized system.
In like manner the voluntary powers of Deity are
unchangeably employed in planning, arranging, and
creating new worlds, and systems of worlds, and peopling them with inhabitants. When the whole of any
such system is finished, and all its laws established for
the rolling of worlds, and for the operations of the
mineral, vegetable, and animal kingdoms, the whole
naturally passes, according to the principles of philosophical necessity, from the action and control of his
voluntary, miraculous power, and submits itself to be
governed through the fixed laws of the universe, by the
involuntary powers of the same Infinite Mind.  As
the bare presence of the human mind in the brain
causes the heart to throb and the functions of life to
proceed, even when that mind is wrapped in sleep so
profound, that not a thought is stirring in its voluntary
department, so the bare presence and majesty of the




118         ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
Infinite Mind, even if he should not exercise a thought,
would cause all worlds to roll through immensity, and
cause all the operations of nature in the mineral, vegetable, and animal kingdoms to proceed on in their
ceaseless changes; for these are under the control ot
the involuntary powers of the Deity, acting through
the laws of the universe.




LECTURE VI.                    9
LECTURE VII.
LADIES ANE GIENTLEMEN:
IN my last Lecture the momentous question was
presented for our consideration-Where is the starting
point of all motion and power, whether voluntary or
involuntary, in both nature and man? The transcendent importance of this question clothes it with the eloquence of its own splendor.  I have humbly endeavored to answer it by showing that all motion and
power originate in mind.  And surely the idea that
mind possesses the attribute of innate motion and living power, is both majestic and sublime.  I have
shown that mind has two grand forces.  I mean its
voluntary and involuntary powers, by which the world
was created and is governed. I have proved the existence of the Infinite Mind from motion and the absolute
oerfection of material existences. I have shown that
mind must be some substance, and not the result of
organism, nor an absolute immateriality, which is but
as nonentity.
I am well aware that thought, reason, and understanding are considered to be mind, and that these are




120           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY,
immaterial.  Bat they are not mind, as I have clearly
proved in my Lectures on the Philosophy of Mesmer.
-ism.  Thought and reason are but the results of mind,
What is it that thinks and reasons  It is the mind.
Then mind is something distinct from  these mental
operations, which are only its effects.  When the voluntary powers of the mind are stilled in sleep, reason
and thought are gone.  Hence if these are nmind, then
the mind is annihilated in sleep.  But if we admit
mind to be a substance, a living and spiritually organized being, then all is plain.  Sleep stops its motion,
and thought is gone.  Remove that pressure, and release the mind, and instantly it resumes its inherent
motion, and the result of that motion is thought and
power.  On this point I add no more,, but refer you to
my Lectures on Mesmerism  to learn my views more
fully.
I now turn your attention to the subject of creation,
Entering upon this, I feel the incompetency of my fee.
ble powers to do it justice.  Like a drop to an ocean,
or an atom  to a. universe, any possible representation
of the intrinsic grandeur of this subject must fall so
far short of its reality, as to render any attempt at an
adequate description the unpardonable presumption of
impotent folly.  Yet, as we are endowed with reason,
and as the inspiration of the Almighty hath given us
understanding, so we are bound, by the very laws of
our being, to extend our researches to  the utmost




LECrURE VII.                 121
verge of our mental capacity.  He who would curb the
human intellect and say this or that is a subjeot with
which we have no right to meddle, and into which we
have no right to inquire, is not only recreant to duty
as an intellectual and moral being, but betrays his own
ignorance, and proves himself a scientific bigot. Give
the mind full scope and sea-room-let it feel the deep
stirrings of its own powers, and soar, if it can, into
the light of eternity, and survey tle very throne of
God, and him who sitteth thereon; and, if possible,
let it scan the secret energies of his creating fat, and
even examine the raw material out of which worlds
were manufactured.
It is the most commonly received opinion in the
Christian world, that God made all things out of nothing. It is true the inspired book does not say, or
even hint this.  It simply says —  In the beginning
God created the heavens and the earth;" but it does
not add the words-out of nothing.  It is absolutely
and philosophically impossible, in the very nature and
constitution of things, that something can be made out
of nothing. It implies, at the same time, a contradiction in terms.  We cannot form  even a notion in our
imaginations how much of nothing it would take to
make the least imaginable something.  I am speaking
of no.ting in the strictest sense of the word.  But
using the word nothing in its common acceptation, we
can easily perceive how all things could have been
6




122          ELECTRICAL PSYCHc.CGY.
made out of nothing.  When all vi'ible objects are
removed from a room, we say there is nothing in itit is empty.  Yet we know that it is filled with air,
because we continue to breathe. But if the air, by a
force-pump, were removed from an air-tight room, we
might, with much more propriety, say there is nothing
in it; yet electricity would be there.  If solid substances were therefore made out of air, in an empty
room, we could say that they were made out of nothing,
for the room, according to the usual mode of expression,
had nothing in it. But admitting the air to have been
extracted from  the room, and nothing but electricity
left, and if solid substances were produced from this
ethereal and invisible fluid, we could with much more
apparent consistency say, that they were made out of
nothing.  In this sense, I grant that all things were
made out of nothing.  Paul says-" The things that
are seen were not made of things that do appear."
Here he plainly states, that the substances seen were
made of invisible substances, or such as did not appear-for by things he only means substances.
If, however, it be said, to create must mean to bring
into existence something from nothing, I have only to
say, that this is not so; for it says, " God created man
out of the dust of the earth."  Here he created him
out of something —it was out of dust, and yet it was
cireation.  The Hebrew  word rendered create, more
strictly means to gather together by concretion, or to




LECTURE V1I.                   128
form by consolidation-but never can it mean to bring
soencthing into existence from absolutely and positively
nothing.  I therefore contend that all things were
made out of electricity, which is not only an invisible
and imponderable substance, but is primeval and eternal matter.  It contains the invisible and imponderable properties of all things in being.  That this is
electricity is certain, because there is no other substance with which the Infinite Mind could have come
in direct contact, so as to have produced by his creating power the solid and visible substances that compose
the globe.  It is, as I have a.lready proved, in nmy third
and fourth Lectures, philosophically impossible for mind
to come in direct contact with any substance in nature
except electricity.  Hence electricity contains the elementary principles of all things in being, and contains
them  in their original, invisible, and imponderable
state.
There must be something eternal.  God, duration,
and  3,pace exist of philosophical necessity, and that
space was eternally filled with primeval matter.  When
I say that they exist of necessity, I mean that the contrary of space and duration cannot possibly be conceived.  If infinite space were filled with an infinite
globe, it would be space filled.  If that globe were
struck out of existence, it would be space empty. Filled or empty, it would still be space.  As space exists
of necessity, it is absolutely and positively eternal, and




124          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY,
hence could nlever have been created nor changed.  AFh
same is true in relation to duration.  Duration must
have rolled on, even if there had been no revolutions
of suns and worlds to mark its periods.  The contrary
cannot possibly be conceived.  Hence duration and
space both exist of philosophical necessity, and are absolutely eternal.  Endless duration is the age of Jehovah, and space is the empire in which he dwells and
reigns. This space was eternally filled with mind and
invisible matter in its original state. They both exist
of philosophical necessity.
Hence matter is eternal, because if there ever had
been a period when there was nothing in existence as it
regards matter, then nothing would now have been, for
nothing cannot create itself into something. The same
is true in relation to mind.  If there ever had been a
period when there was no mind in existence, then no
mind could now have been, for mind could not have
created itself, as this would be admitting mind to have
acted before it existed.  Hence mind and primeval
matter are both coexistent and coeternal. Indeed, the
one could not exist without the other, because that
electricity, which is original and eternal matter, is the
body of God.  All other bodies are therefore emanations from his body, and all other spirits are emanations from  his spirit.  Hence all things are of God.
Ite has poured himself throughout all his works.  Ho
bas poured spirit from spirit's awful fountain, and kin.




LECTbRE v.I                  12).1 ed into existence a world of rationais.  J-I  cis prin
cipie it wili oe seen, that the Eternal Mind is not ab
solutely omnipresent, while his electrical body is, be
cause it pervades immensity of space.  Mind must be
enthroned, and not diffused over the whole body.  And
as the mind of Jehovah actuates his body, so he produces impressions throughout the boundlessness of
space, and  makes himself instantly felt throughout the
immensity of his works, even as the human mind, which
is located in the brain, still makes its presence felt
throughout the body, even to every possible'extremity,
and produces the impressions of its existence on others.
Mind or spirit is of itself embodied and living form.
It is spiritual organism in absolute perfection, and from
mind itself all form  and beauty emanate.  The body
of man is but an outshoot or manifestation of his mindo
If I may be indulged the expression, it is the ultimate
of his mind.  Hence every creature in existence has a
body which is the shape of its mind, admitting that the
physical laws of the system were not interrupted in
producing the natural form  of the body from  mind.
The serpent is all length-is all concentration, and no
wonder that he can charm the bird and other creatures
around him.  What a singular mind the lobster must
have, for he has a singular body!
We touch the finger to any substance, and in the finger we appear to feel it.  But this is not so, because
&11 feeling is in the mind, If we, amputate the arm cr




126          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
leg, ye the fingers and toes as usual can be felt.  For
insttlace, we move a finger or wield the arm.  How is
this done?  I answer this question by saying, that the
mind has its spiritual fingers, arms, limbs, and all its
lineaments of form corresponding to those of the body.
The mind holds its throne in the brain, and possessing
in itself the power of feeling and motion, it merely stirs
its spiritual fingers, or wields its spiritual arm, and
through the electric action of the nerves, which are
laid, like so many telegraphic wires, between the two,
the natural finger and the natural arm are compelled to
make an exactly correspondent motion.  This solves
the mystery why the man who has his arm amputated,
even up to the shoulder, yet feels his arm and his fingers as long as he lives, and often feels in them an itching sensation, or even pain, and that, too, at the same
distance from his body which the fingers and arm occupied before amputation took place.  All operations,
convulsions, and motions begin in the unseen substance
of the body, and end in its gross and solid parts.
These are last moved, and last affected.  This is not
only so in muscular motion, but throughout nature.
Having the great principles of mind and matter before us, T will now proceed to notice the creation of
worlds.  I have already remarked, that all the chemi.
val properties of all substances in existence, belonging
to our globe and its surro.lnding elements, were n-de
mut of electricity.  Hence electricity contains all the




LECJTURE VII.                 127
elementary principles of all things in being.  The an.
cients supposed there to be but four elements —namely,
earth, air, fire, and water.  It so happens, however,
that heat is no element at all, any more than cold.  It
is merely an effect of substances in motion, produced.
by their friction. Though the ancients supposed there
to be but four elements, yet as the science of chemistry
advances onward toward perfection, more elements are
detected.  I believe that about forty have been already
discovered, yet we have no reason to believe that even
these are all. I will suppose, however, that there are
one hundred elements belonging to this globe.  Then'here are one hundred elements in electricity, out of
which this globe was created.  We will step back in
our imaginations to that period when this globe, as
such, had no existence.  For the sake of perspicuity,
we will suppose one hundred cords to be fastened on
those one hundred elements in electricity. Please to
bear this fact in mind.
Now, as the Eternal Mind can come in direct contact with electricity only, so he exerted his voluntary
powers that constitute his creative energy, and condensed t'hose one hundred elements that constitute
electricity, down to a more gross and dense state, each
element sliding down its own cord in its progress toward
creation.  Though mind can directly touch nothing but
electricity, yet electricity, as the universal agent under
Dleity, can touch all substances in being.  The Creator




128          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
again acts, through another volume of electricity upyj2
those one hundred partially condensed elements, and
moves them down a grade farther onward toward their
ultimate, or created state.  And thus the work progresses; wave successively following wave down its
own cord, till they all become air.  Hence air contains
the one hundred elements; and all the chemical properties of all things in being are involved in it.  And
so the work of creation progresses, under the never
ceasing action of the Infinite Mind, from whom all motion and power emanate, till those one hundred elements
are made into water.  Hence water contains all the
chemical properties of all things in being.  Matter,
from its invisible electric state, has now become visible
in the crystal, volatile, and colorless state called water.
The whole one hundred elements are here in solution 
and from water, which is the universal solvent of nature, earth, and all mineral and crystalized substances
were made.  Boyle has proved, that by transmutation,
as he terms it, nature turns water into earth; and
Bishop Watson, in his "Chemical Essays," admits
the same, and says, " it has never been disproved by
any writer."  Boyle should not have said that naturec
by transmutation, does this; but that the CREATOR,
by his own power of inherent motion, turns water into
earth.  I resume this interesting subject.
The one hundred elements, having reached the lower
extremity of the one hundred cords, have now attained




LECT U R    fii.               129
their ultimate created condition and form, anl the in.
ished globe, in all its youth, beauty, and variety, ap
pears.  At the top of those cords are the one hundred
elements in their original electrical state, resting in
their own invisibility; and as we descend we see the
continual change each successive wave passed through,
as the whole one hundred substances were, under thee
action of the Creator, gradually al proaching their created state, till at length they emerged from invisibility
and chaotic night into the light of day, and rendered
the variegated beauties of their created forms visible
to the eye of the beholder.
The globe being finished, it required electricity, the
original substance out of which it was made, to be
brought upon it by the Creator, so that his infinite
mind, through this agent, might come in contact with
it, in order to move and govern it, not only in its revolutions by the attractiva and repulsive forces, but in
producing all the changes and operations in its mineraL
vegetable, and animal kingdoms.  As this great work
is submitted to the involuntary powers of the Infinite
Mind, and as mind cannot come in direct contact with
gross matter, so the beauty and simplicity of the subject appear in the grandeur of the idea, that electricity,
being uncreated and eternal matter, is the only substance that mind can touch, and hence is the great
physical agent the Creator employs in the government
of all worlds.  The unchanging laws of the universe
6*




130           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
are b ut the unchanging thoughts of God.  Ladies and
gentlemen, I desire you to bear in mind that it requires electricity, the very substance out of which the
globe was made, to govern it by its positive and negative forces under the energy of Infinite Power.
As this subject is somewhat intricate, permit me to
be very explicit in making myself understood.  When
I say that it requires electricity to govern the globe, I
mean as follows: Electricity, being the uncreated substance, is the positive force, and the globe, being the
created substance, is the negative force.  In the next
place it will be clearly perceived, that all the substances existing in the globe as so many ULTIMATES,
exist in electricity as so many PRIMATES.  For instance: If there is gold in the globe, then there is gold
in electricity, out of which it was made. If there is
phosphate of lime in the globe, out of which the shells
of the ocean and bones are formed, then there is phosphate of lime in electricity, out of which it was made.
The gold in electricity is in a gaseous and invisible
state, and is the positive force, and the gold in the
globe is in a solid and visible state, and is the negative force.  As the positive and negative forces always
come together, so the gold in electricity entirely con
trols and mineralizes the gold in the globe, but lets its
ninety-nine kindred elements alone.  Each one keeps
its own cord of oemmunication from  top to bottomfrom prim ta e to udlfiw2n     — from positive to negative.




LECTURE VII.                  181
The same is true, not only of the gold, and of the
p:hosphate of lime, but also of the ninety-eight remaining elements.  The whole one hundred  elements in
electricity, as the positive forces, are brought to act
upon the one hundred corresponding elements of the
globe, as the negative forces, and thus not only move
it on its axis, and in its revolutions around the sun,
but produce all the changes and operations in these
elementary substances of which the globe is composed.
These ideas of the creation and government of the
world are in reality sublime.  And when we reflect
that the Infinite Mind comes in contact with electricity, and, through that eternal, invisible agent, governs
all worlds by his involuntary powers, sublimity rises
into infinite magnificence, and overwhelms the soul
with awe!
The sun being pure electricity is, of course, a cold,
invisible body. He is placed, as is supposed, in the
centre of a retinue of worlds composing our planetary
system, and that to these worlds he gives light, heat,
and vegetation.  But to my mind it is evident that
there can be no light above our atmosphere which surrounds the globe to the height of about fifty miles. As
electricity travels from  the sun to the globe in neverceasing streams, so when it strikes the top of our atmosphere it becomes faintly visible, and i.ot before.
This is proved by the morning and evening twilight,
when the sun is so far below the eastern hills as to




132           ELECTRICAL 2SYC-:OLOGT.
strike the very top of our atmosphere, apparentl'y on
a level with our fields, and affords a feeble light on
account of the thinness of our air at that height.  But
as it rises higher, its rays shoot deeper, and the ail
growing denser as they approach the earth where we
stand, till they touch it, the friction on the particles
of air is of course greater, and the light and heat are
rendered more intense by this density of atmosphere,
and by their final reflection and reaction from  the
globe.  Hence could we rise to the top of our atmosphere, the sun would disappear, and we should there
be shrouded in total darkness.  Electricity is cold and
invisible) and as it travels from the sun to the globe at
the rate of twelve million miles per minute, so it sets
the particles of the air on fire by the rapidity of its
motion and friction.  Such is the philosophy of the
morning and evening twilight, which never has been,
and cannot be explained on any other principle than
the electrical invisibility of our sun, and tile absence
of all light above our atmosphere.  And electricity,
thrown from  the sun to the globe, is the mode employed by the Creator to bring it to its full growth and
perfection, as a meet habitation for man.
As electricity is, in its one hundred elements, continually pouring from the sun upon the globe, why does
it not continue to increase it in bulk?  I reply that it
does, and hence its entire creation, as to its size, vegetables, and animals, is not yet perfected, but will be in




LECTSTRE VII.                l18
future ages,. Its distance from  tLa sun, and its cxact
relation to 3urrounding worlds, will then forbid its in.
crease in bulk.  The human body, when completely
developed by food and drink, ceases its growth, even
though the same sustenance, both in quality and quantity, is continued.  This I will more fully explain, and
hence the cause of the variation of the compass, which
in philosophy yet remains inscrutable, will be made to
appear.
Comets are declared by Newton and others to be
melted globes, and he computed the heat of one to be
several thousand times hotter than that of red-hot iron,
and that it would take a comet the size of this globe,
fifty thousand years to cool to its centre.  Comets move
in very elliptical orbits, and are deemed, on this account,
to be very eccentric bodies.  The cause of this is, that
while they are chained by the attractive and repulsive
forces to keep a circle, yet as they are propelled in a
straight line, sky-rocket-like, by their own internal
gaseous flames that stream  in their course, so their
orbits are elliptical. As they cool, their own internal
force is lessened, and their orbits become more circular,
because there is less trespassing on the attractive and
repulsive forces, which if left to their own operation,
independent of foreign influences, would move all worlds
in perfect circles.  Immensity of space is not square,
for then worlds would move in a square, buv it is round,
if I may be indulged in the expression in regard to that




18,4      ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGYO
boundless field, " whose centre is everywhere, and its
circumference nowhere.       Electricity, aninfluencedl
always moves in circles.
The globe yet moves in an elliptical orbit, because
its bowels are melted lava, and perhaps not more than
one hundred miles in depth of its crust are as yet cooled.  And the two hundred volcanoes now in existence,
are so many spiracles to the subterranean furnace, and
continually throw off the gaseous substances generated
in its bosom, and cause it to transgress in some measure the attractive and repulsive forces that move it,
As it cools, it continually approximates, in its orbit,
nearer. to a circle.  This will cause the variation of the
compass to continue, till its own internal forces cease
to affect its motion, and allow the law of attraction and
repulsion to move it in a perfect circle around the sun.
And when it shall perform an exact circle in its annual
revolution, it will be perfectly finished as to its size,
and yet the quantity of electricity thrown upon it from
the sun, will be the same as it now is, and ever has
been.  But this redundancy will be thrown off at its
north and south poles, and in such increased quantities
as to warm and enlighten those extremities of the globe,
and bring them into the fruitfulness and bloom of the
garden of Eden.  Then the variation of the compass
will cease, inasmuch as the cause will be removed that
produces it. The cause of its variation is the elliptical
Drbit in which cur globe mcves, and its continual and




LECTURE Vll.                  185
unceasing approach to a circle.  And when that circle
shall be obtained, the globe will be finished, and the
variation of the compass will disappear.
The globe is yet in its infancy-yes, in the embryo
of its being-and it will require many thousand years
to finish it.  And this must be done, because under
the voluntary powers of the Creator, nothing can perish prematurely.  Many species of vegetables and animals now in existence, will become extinct, and disappear from  the page of the naturalist, and others of a
more improved and superior character will be awakened
into being. They will be perfectly adapted to the future and ultimate perfection that this globe, under the
energies of the Infinite Mind, is destined to attain. Its
creation will then be perfected.  The soil upon which
we now stand, will then be some deep stratum  in its
crust, containing our present vegetables and animals in
a state of petrifaction.  These will be pronounced, by
coming generations, the strange nondescript remains of
past centuries, and afford to the future geologist and
naturalist abundant materials for their loftiest specuulations. This subject, in connection with the boundlessness of the universe, and the successive creation of
worlds, I should like to pursue to a greater extent, but
lest I weary your patience, I now turn your attention
to the creation of the vegetable and animal species,
As globes were successively produced, so vegetables
and animals were no created at once, but successively




1380          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
thrcugh a long series of intervening ages.  Does no1
lhe Creator act through the established laws of generation in producing the human species?  He does,
While I freely admit that God originally produced
man by what we call miracle, yet by miracle I only
mean, that the first human beings were produced without any parent stock from  whom  they received their
existence through ordinary generation, as we witness
in the present day.  And they were evidently produced full-grown, otherwise they could not have sustained their existence by procuring their own food:
because the infant is helpless.  Bat the miracle by
which existence was thus conferred was not contrary
to the laws of nature, but was effected by the voluntary powers of Deity exerted through the laws of
nature.  It was thus he established both the vegetable
and animal kingdoms, not simultaneously, but successively and progressively through various ages, from the
lowest vegetable life up to man, who is the glory of
this lower world.
While I contend that the Creator produced the
whole vegetable and animal creation at first, without
any parent stock or the ordinary mode of generation,
yet I would not be understood to say that there were
no germs of life existing as a primordial cause adequate
t3 the effect produced.  But while I contend that there
were, for instance, no acorns, nor other seeds in being,
yet it is evident that the germ necessary to produce au




LECTURE VIl.                 lg^
emrn or an oak eternally existed in God.  Hence the
spirit of all life, whether vegetable or animal, even
irom the highest reasoning powers, through every link
of the animal chain down to the lowest creature, and
through every link of the vegetable chain, eternally
existed in God, and is absolutely immortal.  The
whole of this immense variety combined in Deity constitutes the fullness and perfection of the ETERNAL
MIND.  Hence the lowest animal or vegetable life is
but a part of the lowest life in God's spirit, which is
the correspondent germ  from  whence it emanated.
And the matter that form's the visible substance of
11 animal and vegetable bodies  eternally existed
in electricity, which is the original, invisible, and immortal condition of inert matter, and constitutes the
body of God.  Hence God and electricity are both
immortal and eternal.  From electricity, which is the
invisible body of God, have emanated all the visible
substances that constitute globes, and from the fullness of his spirit have emanated all life, form, and
motion.  And as all organism  exists in spirit, so each
animal und vegetable have developed a, physical body
correspcnding in form to the germ of life they received
from the inexhaustible fountain of the Infinite Mind.
If God does not create througl the laws of nature, but
by miracle, in the arbitrary sense it is generally understct'd by Christians, he would in this case have finished
the globe before he produced the vegetable and animal




138          ELECTRICAL PSYCHIOLOGY.
kingdams) and then moved them both into existence at
the same time.  But hi can not, from the vcry nature
of his perfections, suspend the production of life while
forming a globe of dead matter, because he pours forth
Bimultaneou3ly and unchangeably all his perfections
which are transmitted through correspondent laws for
the production of life, so far as a globe may be finished.  And as this globe was progressively forming
through successive ages, and one elementary department finished before another, so the successive creation
of plants and animals, as geology proves, is easily and.rationally accounted for.
God could not create a fish until there was water
adapted to its existence.  And the moment the water
was perfected, it stood in a philosophical aptitude to
the marine laws of the universe, and through these
emanated from  the Creator that portion only of his
spirit which stood in aptitude to the aqueous depart
ment, and this spirit became the living germ or life of
that fish, and produced its body through the positive
and negative forces of electric action. Hence the body
of this fish was but the developed and visible shape of
its mind.  But as the water was progressively created,
and for many ages covered the earth before dry land
appeared, therefore, while in its turbid and unfinished
state, many of the inferior species, from  the lowest
life up to shell-fish, and from thence up through every
grade, existed before the most highly organized and




LECTURE VII.                 139
perfect fish was created.  And each of these giades,
in like manner, through the laws of nature received
their life from the infinite fountain of spirit, which betame the germ of their being.  The various shapes of
their organic structures were but visible manifestations
of the various shapes of their minds, and the most
perfectly organized fish in the ocean involves in his
body the organism of all below him, and his intelligence
is equal in amount to the intelligence in all.
It is evident that vegetables, in some form, must
have preceded animals, for an animal is but a vegetable of the second growth.  May there not be a marine
vegetation of as great variety and abundance in the
caverned vales of the ocean as there is on earth? Of
this, however, we are certain, that terrestrial plants
and trees could not have been created till the dry land
appeared, because the Deity does not create by any
arbitrary mode of procedure, but through the immutable laws of nature. As soon as the dry land stood in
a philosophical aptitude to the laws of the universe,
and as the Spirit of the Creator gives out, like the sun,
its unchangeable and never-ceasing emanations, so it
communicated a portion of itself as the germinating
principle of life, and vegetation appeared, commencing
at the humblest and most imperfect formation of plants,
and rising higher and still higher in the beauty of organlc perfection, till the noblest fruit-trees and most
powerful sons of the forest stood erect, and the finest




140          ELECTRICAL FSYCHOLOGY.
organized plants and mcst beautiful flowers giced
Oreation, and robed the new —born earth in smiles.
As each of these vegetable tribes rose in succession,
one above another with increasing splendor, so each
superior tribe involved in its own perfection the perfection and organism  of all below it.  For instance,
the first species of plants on the yet marshy earth was
ordinary; the second, more perfect, retained its own,
and involved all contained in thefirst; the third, still
advancing, retained its own perfection, and involved all
contained in the one below it; the fourth makes its
appearance one grade higher, and involves all the organic perfections of the three below it. And should
we be able, in this vast range, to find the thousandth
different species, that thousandth one would retain its
own, and involve all the complicated beauties of organic structure and life contained in the 999 below it;
because, as the form of the earth, in its progressive
creation, became more and more perfect and dense,
each rising vegetable species, standing in a full and
exact aptitude to all the laws of nature then in action,
so far as the globe was finished, would avail itself of
all the life from  the Creator which thus far acted
through, and filled these laws.
It was the same, as we have already noticed, with
all animal life in the ocean.  Each higher involved in
itself the perfections of all below  it,  It was the
same with all animated beings in earth and air. The




LECTUR1S VlI.                141
imphibious animal is, of course, the connecting link
between the aqueous and terrestrial race.  From  the
humblest land animal up to man, the same grand lav
obtains.  Each higher involves in its constitution the
perfections of all below it, even up to man.  When
the earth was fintished, man was produced.  And all
the laws of nature in relation to this globe being in
action, so in man's organism was involved the organism of the whole animal and vegetable creation, and in. his spirit was involved the spirit of all life and intelli.
gence in universal nature below him.  And, standing
in a complete relationship to the finished globe and all
its perfect laws, he, of course, drank in a portion of
all the perfections contained in the Infinite Spirit, and
hence he was strictly in the image of God.  Man is,
therefore, in every sense, a perfect and grand epitome
of the universeo  As he is in the image of his God, he
stands at the fountain-head of creation, and drinks in
all the powers of universal nature, and is sustained by
being fed with a due portion of both spiritual and
physical sustenance.  His mind is fed and developed
with impressions as his body is with food.
God is a spirit, and in his spirit are involved all
life, all form, and the germinating principle of all animal and vegetable spirit.  And in hi3 body, which is
electricity: are involved the invisible and ethereal substances of all inert matter, out of which all globes and
the bodies of all creatures were produced.  In God is,




142          ELECTRICAL PSYC-HOLOGY.
therefore, involved the invisible and primal essence of
all matter and spirit existing in all globes and theim
inhabitants.
But, after all, what is spirit?  It is that sub.
stance which possesses self-motion, intelligence, sensation, and power.  Spirit is a union of two grand
forces. -The first is voluntary; the second is involuntary.  The first is the grand magazine in which are
stored up all the voluntary powers of Infinite Intelligence. All the schemes, plans, and arrangements that
appertain to all worlds and their countless inhabitants
are there.  The second contains all the involuntary
powers of the Infinite Mind by which all worlds and
their inhabitants, after having been created, are controlled through the fixed laws of nature.  The first
plans, arranges, and creates through the laws of its
own omniscient being, which become the laws of the
universe; and the second controls, moves, and gov.
erns all worlds and their inhabitants through the fixed
laws of nature.  The first is the positive force; the
second is the negative force.  The first is male; the
second is female.  Hence of the male and female we
may say, that the one begins in the voluntary, and the
other in the involuntary power of the Infinite Spirit:
They both run through every department of the universe, and thread universal nature.
There are likewise two electricities, called the posi.
tive and negative.  The positive is male, the negative




LECTUrRE VH.                   143
is female.  The male electricity belongs to the heavw
ens; the female electricity belongs to the earth.  The
male and fernale also extend through every possible
link of the immense vegetable chain, as well as through
every link of the animal chain, and retain their separate existence and equal powers in the positive anm
negative electricities, which are the primeval, eternal,
and invisible efficients of all visible matter.
Nature, as a whole, is one entire and absolute pert
fection, and stands in this beautiful relationship to the
Creator, from  whom  she emanated.  All the objects
of creation, upon which we gaze with so much admiration —all the diversified glories of the landscape-the
mineral, vegetable, and animal kingdoms, taken in one
grand whole-are an exact and visible impression of
the eternal perfections of his own character and invisible being, even as the stamp impresses the wax
and leaves its perfect image.  Nature is the visible
daguerreotype shadow of his own invisible being.  She
is the offspring of God.  The poet breathes out,
" Man, bear tiy brow aloft! view every grace
In God's great OFFSPRING, beauteous NATURE'S face."
Creation is therefore no arbitrary act in God, but, like
the ever-streaming rays of light from the sun, it is the
natural result, the visible emanation and outshoot of
his own invisible existence, and was progressively crePted through the laws of the universe, and as soon as
tllaht part of the globe in which life was to be producer




44          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGIo
stood in a finished relationship to those laws. Hence
the laws of nature are but the result of the unchanging
thoughts of God.  One part of the globe was finished
before another, and the creation of life, both vegetable
-nd animal, was in like manner progressive, from the
lowest grade and most imperfect organism, step by step,
np to man, who is the perfection of all, and is in the
image of God.
In this view of our subject it will be perceived that
spirit is a substance eternal in its nature, and not the
result of an organized brain, and that man has not received his existence by climbing gradually from the
lowest link of the vegetable or animal chain up to his
present perfection and grandeur.  He was never in his
creation a vegetable, or even a lower animal; was never
a mushroom or a plant, a tadpole or a horse, as some
writers contend. His existence was never ingermed and
involved in any one or all of the six grand links of the
living chain below him, which naturalists divide into the
vegetable, the pisces, the saurian, the aves, the maroupial, and mammalia kingdoms, making man the
seventh link. Throwing aside the useless technicalities
of foreign language, these seven links of the living chain
embraced in the seven grand kingdoms of nature can
be expressed in plain English,  Their rising order is as
follows: FIRST-The vegetable kingdom.  SECOND —
The fish kingdom. THIRD-The reptile kingdom, embracing lizards, turtles, crocodiles, erc. FOURT —The




LECT       iJ                1- i  X411
bird kingdom.  FIFTH-The pouch kingdom, embracing all who protect their young by carrying them in
pouches.  SIXTHr-The breast kingdom, cr those that
suckle their young; and SEVENTH  Man.
It will also be perceived, in view of my position, that
gross, inert matter cannot be transmuted into mindcannot possibly secrete mind-nor can it, in any sense
whatever, become spirit through any refining process,
as is contended for by some. In this case it must have
preceded God, and hence on this principle God is not
eternal.  In the face of this theory, there must have
been a period when there was nothing but inert matter
in being, and if all motion originates in mind, how then
was dead matter set in motion so as to produce spirit or
mind through a successive series of elementary transmutations?
~The same is in like manner equally true of each and
every link of the animal chain below man. The monkey
was never a bird nor a fish, and the horse was never a
snake nor an oyster.  The horse-kind, for instance,
however much they may have been improved by amalgamation, have ever retained their circle, and have never
broken from their link in the chain, and emerged into any
other link above them. The same remarks are equally
applicable to the vegetable chain.  The rose-bush can
never become an oak, nor the oak a peach-tree.  The
family involved in each link, however much they may
be improved by amalgamation or culture, can never
T




146          ELECTRIC(AL PSYCHOLOGY.
break their circle, nor emerge into another link above
them.  The individual life of every link of the whole
animal and vegetable chain is an emanation from  the
Infinite Mind, and each acting through its correspondent
law, and through that elementary department of the
globe to which this law is unerringly adapted, has manifested its own invisible form in the visible body it produced.  What the life of the seed is to the production
and shape of the plant, the mind of each creature is to
the production and shape of its body. Hence the brain
does not produce mind, as the atheist contends, but
mind was the original germ that produced and developed
the brain.  All vegetable life, as well as animal, is
therefore a species of mind. They are both emanations
from the Creator, are both immortal, and will retain
their separate existence and identity without end.
Substances, in their infinite variety, pay a visit'to
time, assume visible forms, so as to manifest their in.
trinsic beauties for a moment to the eye of the beholder,
and then step back ifito eternity, and reassume their
native invisibility in their own immortality. As man
is now constituted, were there but one object presented
for his contemplation, the mind would soon become
wearied and disgusted with sameness. But the infinite
variety and beauty of the animal and vegetable creation
here presented by the Deity, open to the mind sources
of inexpressible and never-ceasing delight. It seems
irnational, therefore, to conclude that the whole chain




LECTURE VrI.                 1 4.
of being, which is perfect on earth, will be struck out
of existence (except man, who is the highest link), and
leave a cheerless blank in the realms of glory.  For
one, I expect to meet the whole animated chain, and to
witness immortal groves, unwithering plants, and neverfading flowers in that world whore deadth and pain, and
change shall be ne moreo




148     EXLEC'I ICAL PSiCHOLOSTY
LECTURE VIIL
LADIES AND GENTLEMEN:
THE query may perhaps now arise in your minds3
What bearing has the subject of the creation of this
globe, and the original materials out of which it was
made, advanced in the last Lecture, upon the science
of Electrical Psychology?  The answer to this query
will be fully made to appear in the arguments I have to
offer on the present occasion.  I have already stated in
my third Lecture, that man is an epitome of the universe, and that the chemical properties of all the various substances in existence are congregated in him, and
form and constitute the very elements of his being.  I
have stated, that in the composition of this body are
involved all the mineral and vegetable substances of
this globe, even from the grossest and heaviest matter
up to the most rarefied and light. And lastly, to finish
this masterpiece of creation, I stated that the brain
was invested with a living spirit, that, like an enthroned
deity, presides over, and governs, through electricity
as its agent, all the voluntary motions of this little, organized, corporeal universe; while its living presenceq




LECTURE VIII.                  1-1- 
and invcluntary seif-moving powers, cause all the invol
untary functions of life to proceed in their destined
course.  Hence human beings, and all animated existences, are sabject to the same common electrical law
that pervades the universe, and moves all worlds under
the superintendence of the involuntary powers of the
Infinite Spirit.
That all substances are incorporated in the body of
man is irresistibly true, otherwise he could not inure
himself to all, even to the most deadly poisons, and render them, in a good degree, harmless in his system.
He may so accustom  himself to the use of tobacco,
rum, or even opium, that he can take into the stomach
a quantity sufficient to produce the death of several
individuals, while he himself will experience from  it
but a slight effect.  He may even commence the use
of arsenic in small quantities, gradually increasing the
dose, till he gets incorporated into his system a sufficient quantity to kill, for instance, five men.  As in
this case it forms a part of his body, so it causes a
longing for it in proportion to the quantity in the system.  Should he now take a portion sufficient to kill
five men, it would only produce a balance of power
with that already in his system.  It would meet the
dematnd.  This is habitude.  But should he take one
portion more, sufficient to kill any other man, he would
die.  Now it would be impossible for a man to inure
himself to any such substances, unless there were some




150          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
small particle in the composition of his body on which
to build. Hence it is philosophically true, that man is
an epitome of the universe, and that all the elements,
in exact proportions, are most skillfully combined in
his system, by the hand of the Creator; and these pro.
portions should never be disturbed and thrown out of
balance by dissipation.
Having these facts distinctly before us, I would now
state, that if there are one hundred elements in the
globe which was made out of the same number in elece
tricity, then there are one hundred in the composition
of man's body, for he is but an epitome of the universe.
As his body was created out of the dust of the earth,
and is but- a vegetable of the second growth, so it is the
same as though it had been originally made out of electricity. And as the globe, after its creation, required
electricity, the original substance from whence, under
Deity, it sprung, to move, control, and govern it, so,
after man was organized, and his brain invested with a
living spirit, it required electricity, the primeval substance out of which he was made, to be inhaled with
the air into his lungs, and carried to every part of his
system, and by which, under the impulse of mind, it
must be moved, controlled, and governed by the positive and negative forces that move all worlds.  You
now perceive what connection Electrical Psychology has
with the creation of our globe. It is a science that in.




LECTURE V lI.                151
volves the electrical theory of the universe, and all tie
multifarious operations of nature.
We know not, as yet, how many elements there may
be in existence.  I desire it, however, to be distinctly
borne in mind, that if there are one hundred in electricity, which is primal and eternal matter, then there
are one hundred in the globe, one hundred in the vegetables that the globe produces, and one hundred in the
human body, which is sustained by, and, therefore,
made up of vegetables.  The stomach is the great
workshop of the system, to manufacture new materials
to supply the demand occasioned by its constant wastes.
The food and water taken into the stomach contain the
one hundred elements to meet the supply of the one
hundred that are contained in the composition of the
body.  Electricity, containing also one hundred, is inspired by the lungs, communicated to the blood, from
the blood to the nerves, and conducted to the brain,
and there laid up for the use of the mind, as I have
explained in my THIRD LECTURE.  This electricity is
sent by the involuntary powers of the mind from the
cerebellum  through the pneumagastric and other involuntary nerves to the stomach, to produce digestion.
The one hundred elements in electricity meet the one
hundred corresponding elements in the food, and convert the whole mass into one homogeneous chyle.  This
is done by the positive and negative forces, without the
least confusion or interference of one element with its




152           ELECTRICA. PSYCIOLOGG.
kindred elements.  The nutritious parts of this chyld
are taken up by the absorbents, and, in the form of serum, are thrown into the circulating system, and transmuted into blood.  The blood is the universal solvent
of the system, containing, in solution, all the chemical
properties that are to constitute the body, even from
its finest particles down to the solid bones-the same
as water is the universal solvent of nature, out of
which all the constituent principles of this globe are
formed, through electrical action.
The finest particles of the blood are taken up, and,
by the positive and negative forces of electricity, are
transmuted into flesh, tendons, bones, and all the substances that constitute the animal economy, and by the
same forces the old particles of the body are thrown
off, to mingle again with those of the globe.  When I
say that all this is effected by the one hundred electrical elements, each acting upon its own element in the
food, without interfering with any of its ninety-nine
kindred elements, I desire to be distinctly understood.
In order to express clearly so intricate an idea, I will
take one of these elements, and carry it through in all
its principal bearings.
Phosphate of lime is the substance that forms our
bones.  It may not be a simple element, but in order
to convey my ideas on this point, I will consider it so,
As our bones are continually wasting away, so this
waste must he supplied; and as they are often frac.




LECTURE VIHl, 
tured, so they require new parif'ics tc reunite tie:n
by ossification.  Hence there must be phosphate of
lime in our food as well as in electricity.  This is certain, because that hard, bony-like substance collected
on the teeth in the act of mastication, is fiom the phos,
phate of lime in our fod and water.  Having these
facts before us, I now turn to the point under consideration, and ask your undivided attention.
The food is taken into the stomach.  The phosphate
of lime in electricity being the positive force, moves
from the brain-from  the cerebellum-through the involuntary nerves to the stomach.  It takes hold of the
phosphate of lime in the food, which is the negative
force, and leaves the other ninety-nine elements of the
food unmolested.  This is perfectly philosophical, for
the positive and negative invariably rush together.  It
converts this phosphate of lime into chyle, and takes it
up through the absorbents, and transmutes it into serum and blood.  This phosphate of lime from the food
now forms a constituent part of the blood.  In the next
place, the phosphate of lime in electricity takes hold of
the phosphate of lime in the blood, and moves it on
through all its destined avenues till it reaches the liver,
which, while it secretes the bile, seems to act as the
bolter of the system, to separate these one hundred elements to be distributed to thleir destined, correspondeint
parts of the body.  The phosphate of lime in electricity
extracts the like substance from the blood at the lilver




15.        ELECTRICAL PSYCHOL(.GY
conveys it to the various bones of the body, tiansmuite
it into an osseous substance, and lays it down, particlo
after particle, and thus forms anew the solid framework of the system, while the dregs are passed off
through the urinary secretions.  But before it lays
down the new, it removes the old particle by its repulsive force, and compels it tc fly off by insensible perspiration. Fully sensible that I am now understood in
reference to the operation of this one element, I am
satisfied that you understand me also in relation to the
operations of the other ninety-and-nine, in carrying on
the work of digestion to keep up the repairs of the
body.
These ideas, though somewhat intricate, are nevertheless interesting and sublime, as they unfold the
relation in which man stands to the globe, to surround.
ing worlds and his Creator, as an epitome of the uni.
verse. If their novelty produce surprise in any breast,
yet this is no reason that they should awaken resent.
ment, or kindle indignation against the speaker.  We
are finite beings, can know but little, and we should
ever  be ready  and  willing to  freely express  our
thoughts reciprocally to each other, independent of the
opposition of men. By this mutual interchange of sentiment and feeling we should increase in knowledge,
and grow wiser and better.  Indeed, we need not go,
in our contemplations, out of ourselves to learn the
great principles and operations of both mind and mat



LECTURE VIII.                 Js
ter, of God and his works.  As it regards human
research, the words of the poet are unchangeably true,
and must stand unshaken when thrones and kingdoms
fall. He immortalized his verse when he breathed out,
"The proper study of mankind is MAN."
I now turn to another department of my subject,
equally interesting.  I mean the DOCTRINE OF IMDRESSIONS' by wvhich both nature and man are thrown
ut of balance, made siek and cured.  In this also we.hall see the relation between man and nature.'The philosophy of disease I have briefly, but faithfully argued in my FOURTII LECTURE, and shown how
it may be produced by both mental and physical impressiuns. Hence there is no occasion that I should
weary your attention by ranging that field of pestilence
and death. I shall confine my observations principally
t) nature, and even in these I shall be brief.  The
lsw of EQUILIBRIUM  is the grand central LAW of the
Lniverse.  It holds over nature the reins of government, and allows her, in her operations and changes,
t) stray, but not too far, from  the central track.  She
miay rise above, or fall below this law, but to its mandt.te she must ever bow, and at stated periods resume
her medium course.
Electricity, being a universal agent, produces all the
phenomena and changes that transpire in our globe
anud its surrounding elements. By heat, which is g




156           ELEC RICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
electrical effect, the air is rarefied and water is evapo
rated.  When the rarefication of the air is carried to
an extreme, then that portion of the earth and its inhabitants suffer.  Nature is diseased, and the densei
portion of the atmosphere is, at length, aroused from
its slumberings and armed with force.  The sweeping
hurricane rushes, or the dreadful tornado roars in its
awful movement to fill up, and rescue that rarefied and
diseased portion of the air, and continues its force till
an equilibrium is attained in her aerial realms. At
this point all action ceases, and nature is well.  She
was cured by her own impressions.
In like manner evaporation may continue till the
air is filled, in its upper regions, with vapors. As
electricity has a strong affinity for moisture, it leaves
the drier portions of the atmosphere near the earth,
and ascends to the moist and vapory regions above.
By this process electricity is thrown out of balance.
The man who has had a broken bone, even years ago,
or who is subject to rheumatism, will feel an inconvenience in that spot, or in his system, as harbingers of
The approaching storm.  The cause of this is, that he
does not inspire as much electricity as usual with the
air into the lungs, and feels the inconvenience.  And
the storm will surely burst, if there are no upper currents of air to disperse the vapor.  The electricity
being thrown out of balance condenses the vapors into
thick  clouds by its coldness, and thus darkens the




LECTURE vlII.                  15T
he ivens.  The lightnings flash, the thunders roll, the
rains descend, and the war of elements will continue
till that subtile fluid is equally dispersed throughout
the atmosphere.  Nature having gained her equilibrium, in her electrical realms, is at rest.  By these
awful impressions of her voice she is cured. Here it
is distinctly perceived that electricity is a cold body,
because it condenses the storm, and when its quantity
is sufficiently great it produces hail, even in the warmest weather in our southern climates.  In these few
ideas we see also the philosophy of storms.
Even the globe may be sick. She may have a bowel
complaint.  By the confined air and continually generating gases in the lava contained in her bowels she
is thrown out of balance.  The earthquake awakes
from  slumber, and springs from  its dreadful couch.
It starts to discharge its force at the nearest volcano.
In its fearful march it sounds its rumbling thunders
and convulses the globe.  Flames start up through
fissures of the opening earth, and from the bottom of
the ocean burning islands arise! Volcanoes bellow
and disembogue.  Their lava overwhelms devoted citles, and their shock hurls others in crumbling ruins 
A reaction takes place, an equilibrium is produced in
her subterranean realms, and she is well.  By these
awful impressions of her own power she is cured.
I.might extend my observations to every visible department of nature, and notice her more minute operas




t58           ELECT.'ICA'L PSYCHOLOYTo
Lions, but these few remarks, in reference to her most,
stupendous and obvious convulsions, are sufficient to
give you my ideas how she becomes diseased by being
thrown out of her equilibrium, and how she is cured
by the inherent force of her own impressions.  As
ran, then, is aln epitome of the universe, the full force
of my arguments on the philosophy of disease and the
rationale of its cure, advanced in my FOURTH  and
FIFTH LECTURES, will be clearly seen, and the rel.
tion in which man stands to the unix rse will be more
distinctly understood.
As I am  now on the doctrine of impressions, I take
the liberty to say, that we should endeavor, at all times,
to keep ourselves positive to the surrounding impressions of nature.  We take disease much more easily tW
fall asleep in an unhealthy spot than to keep awake.
While traveling in stages through some low, damp, and
unhealthy places in the southern states, and where the
mail stage runs both night and day, the traveler unused
to that climate should be careful to take short naps
during the day, so as n t to fall asleep in the night
stage.  It renders him passive and negative to the surrounding IMPRESSIONS of nature, when she receives no
salutary influence from the beams of the sun. These
impressions become the positive force, and the electricity of the air inspired by the lungs enters the systems
disturbs the nervous force and the circulation, thrown
the whole out of balance, and disease ensues.




L.:CTURp  VII                15
A ciizen of C(harleston, South Carolina, may ride
out, in warm  wieather, three or four miles into the
country, and, returning the same day, will experience
no inconvenience from the change.  But should he remain over night and sleep there, he would, in all probability, have an attack of what is there called " the
country fever,  and in a few hours he might be a
corpse, as it is considered to be even more fatal than
the yellow fever.  On the contrary, a person from the
country visiting Charleston and returning the same day,
receives no harm.  But should he remain over night,
and sleep there, the same mournful results might ensue.
My views on the philosophy of becoming acclimated,
in my SIXTH LECTURE, will throw  some light on this
point. And when we reflect that a person, while awake,
is active and positive to surrounding impressions, wo
can easily perceive that he resists them, and consequently avoids disease.
In view of the above, it will be readily perceived
why one person, even in the wakeful state, will take
disease much more easily than another.  Those who
are firm in mind as a rock, are immovably calm, and
have no fear of disease, even when some startling malady visits their neighborhood.  These will not take it;
even if they visit the bedside of the sick.  This deterrnined action of their minds throws a constant and
powerful current of the electro-nervous force from their
brains and systems, keeps them positive to surrounding




180          ELECTRICAL F SYCHOLOGYe
impressions, md enables them  to resist their force,
But those who are in constant fear of some disease,
who are always complaining of their feelings, pains,
and aches, keep themselves constantly unwell by thus
concentrating their thoughts upon their own systems,
and watching each movement.  When fever or cholera
visits their neighborhood, these are the very persons
who are in danger of an attack.  Even fleeing to another section will not save the:, unless this circumstance should be the means of changing their thoughts
and removing their fears.  The difficulty is, that fear,
as Dr. Mason Good remarks, depresses the vital energy
of the muscles, and slackens the motions of life.  It
causes the mind to shrink back on itself, and to render
the system negative to the surrounding impressions of
the elements, and thus engenders disease.  More than
one half the cases of cholera that have occurred during
the past year, owe their existence to the fears and excitemepts of such persons, who, if they had not heard
that it was in their midst, would not have been afflicted
with it.
Tlie cholera is a sudden collapse of the whole cutile, occasioned by the electricity of the nerves at the
surface suddenly retiring to the stomach and bowels.
I'he pores of the skin being closed, the blood and other
Rluids follow the electricity, and retire internally. The
venous circulation is obstructed and weakened, and the
turds seem to rush to the stomach and bowels, and imi




LEC.'TRE T ilh.                 161
mense seereti( ns ensue.  Intense fever and inflamma.
tion il the entire alimentary canal aggravate the other
difficulties, and the storm bursts in fearful terror. The
external and internal parts of the system being thrown
out of balance in their electrical action, and the arterial
and venous circulation having lost their equilibrium, the
most dreadful cramps and convulsions ensue.  All that'
is necessary to effect a cure is, to procure a reaction
from the centre to the surface, and thus restore the
usual equilibrium  between the arterial and venous circulation, by equalizing the electricity of the system.
What I have now argued in relation to keeping the
mind posiive to surrounding impressions, will account
for the well-known fact, that an individual sitting with
his back to a current of air, while in a state of perspi.ration, will take cold much sooner than if he faced it.
The cause is obvious.  The front part of the brain
contains tk o positive electro-nervous'forces, under the
control of tle voluntary powers of the mind, and the
back part con tmins the negative electro-nervous forces,
under the ctl-rol of the involuntary powers of the
mind.  As the positive forces, under an absolute volition of mind, roeist all external impression, so the fact
is. readily seen wLy dhey hav   l more power than the negative forces to resist discaso, oy any enrraehmen Ds that
may be made upon the system.
I would now remark, that the science of Electrical
Psychology, being the doctrine of impre sin,, throws




162          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
an imwense flood of light on the human mind, and its
susceptibility to the most strange and unreasonable impressions in the power of man to conceive.  There are
some minds so constituted, that it is absolutely impossible for them to resist the impressions that others may
make upon them.  This science unfolds what was considered an inscrutable mystery in relation to the conduct of several individuals who perished in the excitement of the Salem witchcraft.  Persons of well-known
character-yes, of a stainless moral reputation-were
executed on their own confession! They were charged
with  being  bewitched, and with having bewitched
others.  They plead guilty to the charge, firmly be.
lieved it to be true, and, on their own confession, were
sentenced to die, and were cut off from the land of the
living. They were in the psychological state. In my
public experiments, I have taken persons who are
naturally in the psychological state, and have produced
such impressions upon them.  I have made them confess that they were bewitched, and that they had rode
on broomsticks through the air to bewitch others, and
deserved to die.
Hundreds of instances have occurred in our world,
where persons have been charged with murder, have
confessed themselves guilty of the deed, and, on that
confession, have been solemnly sentenced to die. And
yet, before the day of execution arrived, the supposed
murdered man was found alive in some distant section,




I.ECTURE- Vl.                 163
knd hurried home just in time to save an innocent feL
low- creature from an ignominious death.  Turn to the
criminal calendar, and you will find some most striking
instances of this character, and that, too, in our own
country, and even in New England, the; boasted land
of light and morals.  All such persons were naturally
in the psychological state, and really believed what
they confessed.  How many may have, through such
means, innocently lost their lives, the opening scenes
of eternity alone can disclose.  Judges and jurors have
yet to learn that no man should be hung on his own
confession. If he must die, let it be in the face of the
most indubitable evidence, and, even then, let him be
recommended to mercy, for often murder, as well as
suicide, is committtel unler some strange hallucination
of iand




I {14       ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGT.
LECTURE IX.
LADIES AND GENTLEMEN:
MUCH has been advanced in relation to niaid gnIl
matter, their various operations, powers, and manifestations, and the countless mental and physical impressions of which they are susceptible. I have also said
not a little of the electro-nervous force, as the agent of
the mind, and how the functions of every part of the
system are executed under its energy. I have proved
it to be the connecting link between mind and inert
matter, and the agent by which the Creator moves all
worlds through the boundless fields of space. I have
shown the connection existing between man and nature,
and the relationship he sustains to her as an epitome
of the universe. As I have made electricity the grand
agent that, under mind, moves on all the multifarious
operations appertaining to the human system, it may be
asked, what proof is there to establish this truth, independent of what has already been offered? If the arguments already advanced to proTe that mind touches
aad moves electricity as its prime agent, are not suffi



LECTURE IX..165
sient and entirely satisfactory, I will then refer you to
a visible and tangible experiment, the result of which
you can witness, and thus test the truth of my position.
Let any gentleman of eloquence, feeling, and pathos
strip up his sleeve, and lay his bare arm on a table
where it shall be perfectly at rest; let him'then repeat
some impressive poetry, or any prose sentences of stirring eloquence, paying no attention to his arm till his
feelings are moved, and at that instant he will see his
arm  covered with what are called goose-pimples.  If
he cease speaking, they will gradually disappear, as his
mind sinks into calmness. Indeed, he can see them
rise and fall with his feelings and emotions. These are
occasioned by the redundant electricity which is thrown
to the surface by the strong emotions and positive impulses of the excited mind.  These pimples rise up at
the root of each hair, and as hair is a non-conductor.
and resists electricity, so the internal pressure of the
electro-nervous force, propelled to the surface by the
mind, causes these minute eminences to arise.  Electricity is, in its nature, a cold substance. Hence,
when the weather is cold, the air, being dense, contains
an excess of electricity and oxygen. These, being inspired by the lungs in greater quantities than usual,
brace the system, and render these pimples in the same
ratie more prominent and visible than in warm weather.
This circumstance confirms the proof that it is elec.
tricity moved by mind, that causes these to rise when




166          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
the feelings are excited by an eloquence that causea
er —n cold chills to pass over the body.
The proof now produced I consider to be absolutely
and positively irresistible, and abundant to satisfy any
philosophic mind, that electricity is the connecting link
between mind and inert matter, and is, therefore, the
agent through which the mind manifests its motions and
powers.  But should this not be sufficient to send a
bold and firm conviction to the mind of the greatest
skeptic, then I will endeavor to carry the proof still
farther, and firmly nail the matter beyond his power to
remove it.  I will show him how abundant the proof
is by which this position is sustained.  Let the skeptic
place himself on an insulated stool, with his arm entirely bare, and charge his body from a powerful electric machine. -The hairs and pimples will rise up even
as they do under an intense action of the mind.  When
the body is electrically charged on an insulated stool,
even the hairs of the head rise up erect, and the same
result follows when the mind is greatly excited by fear
or moved by strong and stormy emotions.
If these evidences are. not sufficient to strike the
skeptic speechless in his opposition, then let him take
a needle, and, after satisfying himself that it has no
magnetic power to attract the smallest atom, let him
insert it in the nerve of an animal, and it will become
sufficiently magnetic to take up fine iron filings.  In.
deed, ladies: and gentlemen, I have no doubt that the




LECTURE IX.                  167
naked arm, under sufficintly strong and stirring emotions of mind to raise those pimples, would, while in
that condition, produce an effect upon the electrometer.
We now perceive why the mind, when involved in
trouble and distress, has so powerffilly affected the
body, not only in bringing upon it various diseases, but
often sudden, or even instant death.  And we moreover see why the mind, when calm, serene, and happy,
when buoyant with hope, and animated with confidence,
faith, and joy, has produced such powerful and salutary
results in removing pains and diseases.  We see why,
under -the energy of such a favorable state of mind,
warts, and even king's-evil, cancers, and various tumors have been made to disappear.
Dr. John C. Warren, of Boston, Massachusetts
states, in his work on tumors, that a lady called upon
him to ask his advice in relation to an experiment she
thought of trying on a tumor with which she was
afflicted.  It was to rub it with the hand of a dead
person; and, as she had a good opportunity, she asked
Dr. Warren whether she had not better improve it.
He states, that he at first thought of dissuading her
from it, but sensible of the power of the imagination,
he advised her to try the experiment.  She did so, and
in a few weeks the tumor disappeared!
Dr. Warren calls it the imagination; but it is the
effect of a mental impression, as I have just stated,
producing the result by the action of electricity through




it8          ELECTRICAL I YCIIOLOGYo
the voluntary nerves.  The philosophy of this is sia
pie, and in a few words I will notice it.
The old particles of our flesh are thrown off through
the electro-nervous force of the involuntary nerves, a1nd
by the same force the new particles from the blood are
laid down in their stead.  Hence the wastes and repairs of the system are about balanced.  We change,
as I have stated, the fleshy particles of our bodies
about once per year, and the bones in seven years.
While, therefore, the involuntary nerves are keeping
up this balance of power between the wastes and repairs of the flesh, so the same tumor that is thrown off
once per year with the other particles of the body, is
gradually replaced each year by the same involuntary
electro-nervous force from  the new particles of the
blood.  Over this the mind has no direct control, because it acts through the voluntary nerves.  Hence
when the mind is under the influence of confidenceg
faith, hope, and joy, organic activity is heightened,
and by keeping the mind upon the tumor while in this
happy state, and believing it will disappear, creates a
surplus of action at that spot through the voluntary
nerves, and this surplus action throws off this surplus
protuberance to return no more.  Such is the philosophy of what is called imagination.
The point being understood how the electro-nervous
fluid removes a tumor, the query may now  arise in
your minds, Why does it heal a wound or cure a dis,




LECTUB.E IX.
easel'  In answer to this question I vould first romark, that I am  well aware that the healing properties are in the individual, or in the electricity of the
system, and not in the medicine.  And the question,
Why does the electro-nervous fluid heal, has been indirectly considered in my last Lecture, when explaining the process of digestion.  Because if all things
were made out of electricity, then it is certain that
electricity contains all the elementary principles, and
therefore all the healing properties of all things in
being. All the balms, oils, and minerals in existence
are contained in electricity, and in their most skillfully
combined  proportions.  This  electricity is inspired
with the air into the lungs, and passed through the
blood into the nerves of the brain, and becomes the
electro-nervous fluid. It is the positive, moving power, in all its one hundred elements, and meets the same
one hundred kindred elements that compose the body,
and are the negative power.  And the positive and
negative forces coming together, and the one hundred
elements in electricity meeting the one hundred of the
same kind in the body, each tending to its own, produce the healing result, on the same principle that
they produce digestion, repair the system, and equalize circulation.  For a full explanation of this point
you will please call to mind my remarks on the digestive process in my last Lecture, and the whole will be
easily comiprehended.
(Q




170          ELECTRICAL PSYCIIi,,)G Y.
I now leave this point and call your attention to the
brain, which is the palace and throne of the mind,
where it dwells and reigns.  I shall briefly notice its
operations in its earthly house, point out the connection between the voluntary and involuntary nerves
through which the mind acts, and conclude by noticing
the philosophy of sleep.
I have stated in a former Lecture, that each indi-'iidual has two distinct brains-namely, the cerebrum,
which occupies the frontal part of the cranium, filling
the principal part of its cavity, and the cerebellum,
which occupies the back portion of the cranium.  The
voluntary nerves belong to the  cerebrum, through
which the voluntary powers of the mind act, and the
involuntary nerves belong to the cerebellum, through
which the involuntary powers of the mind act.  And
though in their intricate convolutions through every
part of the cranium, they seem  to interweave and
blend in ten thousand ways, and both dive into the
spine, and there combine to form the spinal marrow,
set by some secret charm they preserve their entirely
distinct character as to their voluntary and involuntary powers, and thus carry out the separate forces of
both brains into every part of the entire system.
Our voluntary powers by which we reason, and by
which we move our limbs and bodies, being the positive force during our wakeful moments, soon tire, and
require the refreshment of sleep to restore them. But




LECTUrE TX.                  171
om  in-voluntary powers, by which the healt and lungs
are moved, and the functions of life performed, commenee their career of action at birth, and often continue it, without any apparent weariness, for seventy,
eighty, or even a hundred years.'They, however,
tire at last, and also require sleep.  But when they
sleep; it is death.  Natural sleep, which involves the
sleep of the voluntary powers only in a state of entire
insensibility, is so far on the road to death.  It is the
half-way house to the land of silence.  By natural
sleep our exhausted voluntary powers are restored, we
wake up refreshed, our weariness has disappeared, and
we are prepared for renewed action.  There is at the
same time another important end gained by our insensibility in sleep.  The involuntary powers, being left
free from  the exciting action of the voluntary powers,
were allowed to gradually slacken their movements,
and regain their true and healthful equilibrium.
In order that this part of my subject may be dis.
tinctly understood, I must point out the connection
between the voluntary and involuntary powers, and the
manner in which they may reciprocally affect each
other.  Our pulsations are more frequent in the evening than in the morning.  This is owing to the mental and physical action of our voluntary powers. during
our wakeful moments.  They, being the positirve force,
trespass upon the involuntary powers, which are the
negative force, and hence one grand object of sleep is




E12          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGlY
to allow  the heart to come down to its due  natura
slowness of pulsation.  The voluntary powers, being
the positive force, can of course trespass upon the involuntary, till they become tired out and sink to rest
in the sleep of death.   This I will endeavor to nake
plain by the following circumstances.
In the barbarous ages of the world, crimina.ls have
been, in some instances, doomed to die through deprivation of sleep. Guards, who took charge of them by
turns, both night and day, were ordered to keep them
incessantly awake.  This they did do by touching
them with some instrument of torture, and sometimes
with fire, whenever exhausted nature would yield to
repose.  In such instances the pulsations of the heart
are gradually increased above their usual throb, becoming more and more frequent, till between the third
and fourth day, when they rise to about one hundred
and twenty per minute, which is a fever heat.  And
so on, gradually increasing, till the seventh or eighth
day, when the pulse is only perceived by a tremulous
motion, inconsistent with the continuance of life, and
the sufferer expires.  You now perceive that the voluntary powers, by being kept awake, trespass upon the
involuntary powers till they too are tired, and fall
asleep;.but that sleep is death.
I have already remarked, that when our voluntary
powers are exhausted they fall asleep at night, and in
the morning we wake up restored.  This brought us




LECTURE IX.                   I 7
half way on our journey to the door of death, and well
may sleep, in all ages, have been considered its emblem.  Buit when the involuntary powers are entirely
exhausted by pain, by fevers, or by sickness in general, they also require rest, and therefore fall asleep.
This is death.  Now, if there were no positive organic
destruction, and could the laws of chemistry that decompose our bodies be suspended, and could the entire
system, blood and all, be kept precisely in the same
condition as it was when we expired, we should wake
up after a few  days in perfect health.  This is no
revery of fancy, no chimera of the speak er's brain, but
absolutely and positively true, and in perfect accordance with the principles of philosophy.  As this subject is new, I will take it into consideration, as it must
be not only interesting, but vastly important to us all.
In the first place, we know  that the serpent and
toad species, the alligator tribe, and nearly all insects,
fall into torpidity in winter, and in the spring they are
aroused from  this state in perfect health, and with
regenerated vigor. Not only their voluntary, but also
their involuntary powers were asleep.  The breathing
lungs and throbbing heart were motionless, and the
circulating blood was stilled. The raccoon and several other species of animals burrow, and fall into a
torpid state as winter approaches, and remain till
spring without any sustenance  whatever, and then
make their appearance without any loss of flesh.  In




t 4          E.ECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
all these creatures the foramen ovale, an opening be.
awoen the auricles of the heart, never closes, and hence
they can live without breathing.
It may, Lowever, be said, that this is by no means
applicable to human beings, for they cannot live without breathing.  Ihow then do we live without breathing, or even withoat the throbbing of the heart, or the
circulation of the blood, till we were born into existance?  I answer Ly saying, that the foramen ovale was
not closed, but generally closes soon after our birth takes
place.  We know that the new-born infant requires but
little air, and can live where we should be smothered
and perish.  Again, there is occasionally an individual
in whom  this never closes.  It is true, that these instances are exceedingly rare, and such persons are
liable, when disease or pain exhausts the involuntary
powers, to sink into a torpid state, which has been
mistaken for death.  The lungs and heart suspended
their motions, the blood ceased to circulate, and the
limbs grew stiff and cold. Thousands in this condition
have been prematurely buried, caine to life, struggled,
turned over in their coffins, and perished. On being
disinterred they have been found with the face downward.  Some, placed in tombs, have revived, been
accidentally heard, and  fortunately rescued.   And
though they expired with a distressing disease, yet they
awoke to life in health.
An instance of this kind occurred in New Jersey,




LECTURE IX.                  175
where an individual was apparently in a state of death.
He was cold and motionless.  The lungs heaved not;
the heart in its pulsations was stilled; the blood was
stagnated in its channels, and had ceased to flow.  His
funeral was two or three times appointed, the friends
and neighbors assembled, and through the entreaties
of the physician it was postponed to another time. He
at length awoke from this state to life, and awoke in
health.  Some call this singular condition, where circulation is suspended, a trance; but it is the sleep of the
involuntary powers in those individuals only where the
foramen ovale is not closed.  In all other persons it
would be death.
In view of these facts we should be warned not to
inter our friends too soon after we suppose they are
dead.  And as death is only the sleep of the involuntary powers, so dying cannot be a painful process, but
one that must afford the greatest pleasure and delight
of which we can conceive.  It must certainly afford. as
much real enjoyment to die as to lie down upon cur
beds and sink into natural sleep.  All sufferings arise
from the nature of the disease that tires out the involuntary powers, and not from the gasping struggles of
the dying.  The fatigues, toils, and sufferings of the
day,,that prepare our voluntary powers for a night's
repose, are not to be taxed upon the process of our
dropping into natural sleep.  This is of itself pleas.
arable, and se is also the process of dropping into the




176          ELECTRICAL PS CI-IOLOGY.
sleep of death.  In this respect it is not 6 the king of
terrors," but the welcome angel of soothing smiles and
crowning joys.
You now perceive that though the voluilmary and involuntary powers of the mind are entirely distinct, and
seem to act independently of each other through two
distinct sets of nerves, yet there must be some secret
link between the two that unites them in one bond of
everlasting and indissoluble union.  That this point
may be settled as accurately as possible, I must call
your attention to the voluntary and involuntary nerves,
to determine the connection between them, and also to
ascertain the throne of the mind, or in what particular
part of the brain it may be located.
Though I have faithfully explained the philosophy
of the circulation of the blood in my third Lecture, yet
I am compelled to glance at the position in which the
arterial and venous circulation stand in relation to each
other, and notice the connection between them, and
then see if this will not throw some light on the voluntary and involuntary nervous forces of the brain.
The circulating  system  is in reality two distinct
systems.  The arterial carries the cherry-red blood,
which is positive, and ever flows from the lungs and
heart to the extremities, and the venous carries the
dark blood, which is negative, and ever flows from  the
extremities to the heart and lungs.  The arterial sys.
tem, commencing at the lung3 and heart, divides into




LEfTURE IX.                  41T
arious branches, and these again into others, and se
on, till they spread out in thousands of small blood.
vessels called capillaries, too minute for the dissecting
knife to trace, or the naked eye to see.  Indeed, they
run out and seem to end, if I may so speak, in millions
of nothings.  At their terminations, and in just as
many millions of nothings, the venous system begins.
Though there is no visible connection, that the dissector can trace between the two, yet we know that
such a connection must exist, otherwise the blood could
never pass from the capillaries of the arteries into those
of the veins.
As the nervous system  must correspond with the
circulating system, so these remarks will prepare your
minds for a correct understanding of my views in re
lation to the voluntary and involuntary nerves and
the throne of the mind.  The involuntary nerves have
their origin in the cerebellum, which is the organ of
involuntary motion, wind round in intricate mazes, and
form its convolutions.  They pass into the spine, and
form  the spinal marrow, a part of which is but the
cerebellum continued, and from thence they branch out
to the heart, lungs, and to all the involuntary parts of
the system, so that motion may be communicated to
them  by the involuntary powers of the mind..They
return through another department of the spinal marrow to the brain, and terminate in the medulla oblon.
gata in thousands of nothings, by which I only mean
80




178          ELECTRICAL PSY~LOLOGY.
invisible fibres.  In just as many thousands of nothings9
the voluntary nerves begin-wind round in like in.
tricate mazes, and form  the convolutions of the cere,
brum, which is the great organ of voluntary imotion.
They pass into the spine and form the spinal marrow,
which is but the continuation of the two brains, and
f-om thence they branch out to all the voluntary parts
of the system, so that motion may be communicated
to them  at pleasure by the voluntary powers of the
mind.
It is evident that the same secret and invisible connection exists between the voluntary and involuntary
nerves of the two brains that exists between the arteries and veins of the two circulating systems which
carry the positive and negative blood.  If this connec
tion between the voluntary and involuntary nerves of
the two brains does not exist, then the voluntary po.wers could not, by their wakefulness, produce the least
possible effect upon the involuntary powers, so as to
tire them  out and produce death, nor could they even
cause the least disease.  And on the other hand, the
involuntary could not produce the least possible effect
upon the voluntary powers.
The mind is certainly not diffus.ed throughout both
brains, because a part of the- brain may be destroycd,
and the mind still retain all its powers and faculties.
If it were thus diffused, being an active principle, it
would keep every organ of the brain uniformly excited



LECTURE IX.                  1
Hence it appears most reasonable, that the mind holds
its throne between the TERMINATION of the invohlntary nerves of the cerebellum and the COIMENCEMENT
of the  voluntary nerves of the cerebrum.  This will
appear rational, if we reflect that any sudden, irregu 
lar motion of the heart for instance, or of any other
involuntary organ, will instantly convey the warning to
the mind, and bid it beware.  But this sensation could
not be comnmunicated to the mind unless it held its
throne between the voluntary and involuntary nerves.
This, though difficult to determine, seems to be in the:EDIULLA OBLONGATA.  There the royal monarch sits
enthroned.  From  the external world, through one
common nerve, he receives all his impressions, and
from thence he transmits them by electric telegraph to
the various departments of his palace-or, to speak
more phrenologically, to the different organs of the
brain, and thus manifests the true impression of his
character to the world.
In the light our subject now stands, the philosophy
of natural sleep can be stated in very few  words
Heat expands, and cold shrinks the nerves of the
brain.  As the mind is that sublimated substance we
3all spirit, and is a living being of embodied form, and
being the reverse of dead matter, it is its nature to
move, and the result of that motion is thought and
power.  B7 the shrinking of the nerves of the cere.




180          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
brum  its motions are stilled, and thought is gone,
This is sleep.
I am  done, and though errors may be detected, I
care not.  I have spoken freely, and meant to do so.
And though skeptics may sneer, yet I see and feel the
full weight, importance, and majesty of my subject. I
have every thing to hope for in its favor, as a powerful
agent to remove disease, and pain, and to succor the
stress   d.




LECTURE X.                   181
LECTURE X.
jLAIES AND GENTLEMEN:
THE science of Electrical Psychology is yet in the
infancy of its existence, and as so many astonishing
cures have been already effected under its energy while
yet in the very dawn of its being, so we can at present form but a faint conception of that supreme empire over disease which it is ultimately destined in
some future age to attain, or of that magnificence and
power with which coming generations will see it invested. The time will come when it shall stand forth
in the full vigor and beauty of its manhood, clothed in
its meridian splendor, and shedding the pure light and
heat of its own healing power over the millions of our
race.  In the great field of sciences already known to
the philosopher, that of Electrical Psychology stands
pre-eminent.  In making this declaration I do not detract one iota from their value or greatness, but on the
contrary yield to them all their grandeur. They are
worthy of the Creator who established them  when he
founded the empire of nature, and worthy of the master spirits who revealed themz to the world.  They are




182          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
gi eat, and the various ranks of greatness they occupy
in the scale of sciences were assigned them by that
unerring Being who arranged the order and harmony
of the universe, and not by erring man.  Then censure me not for the declaration I make as it regards
their relative importance.
I am not insensible of the fact that astronomy is a
science of that peculiar and lofty character that knocks
at the door of the heart, calls aloud for the most bold
and daring thought, and bids it soar into the regions
of unbounded space to survey, measure, weigh, and
balance suns and worlds.  The bare sublimity of the
conception that man, who is but " an atom of an atomworld,; can enter those vast dominions of the Creator
and take cognizance of the grandeur of their expansiveness, the wisdom of their arrangements, the beauty
of their variety, and the order and harmony of their
motions, bespeaks the high origin of his nature and
destiny as an intellectual and moral being.  But
astronomy, however vast may be its fields of brilliant
suns and blooming worlds, and however strong may be
its claims upon the human intellect for the exercise of
its highest powers and most deep-stirring energies is,
after all, but a physical science, and therefore inferior
to the science.of mind.
If, from this lofty and daring flight among countless
suns and worlds, we descend and dive into the depths
of the globe on which we tread, and should we be able




LECTURE X.                  183
o explore its dark subterranean dens and deepest caverns, even down to its centre-or should we only range
its known geological departments and survey the various strata of its crust, and scrutinize the marine, vegetable, and animal remains they contain as so many
deposits and mementoes marking the footsteps of nature in former ages, we shall also find a call for the
deepest thought to scan the mysteries of geological science, and to search out and explain the operations and
convulsions of nature in these subterranean regions.
These contemplations on the heavens above, or on the
structure of the earth beneath, are certainly sublime,
and challenge the noblest powers of the human soul.
But high as the science of astronomy may call the
mind to soar, or deep as the science of geology may
urge it to descend, yet these, after all, are only physical
in their character, end, and aim.
But, on the other hand, the science of Electrical Psychology being the science of the living mind, its silent
energetic workings and mysterious powers are as'far
above these and all others of a like character as mind
is supreme over senseless matter.  And as the object
of this science is to produce such mental and moral
impressions upon the sick and afflicted as shall restore
them to health and happiness, and as this can positively be accomplished upon all who are in the electron
psychological state, so the vast importance and utility
of this science are but faintly realized by the public at




184          ELECTRICA1 PSYCHOLOGY.
large-are but dimly seen.  Even when these mental
impressions can not be made upon an individual so as
even to paralyze a muscle, still I can, in the great majority of cases, either cure or greatly benefit the sufferer by physical impressions upon his body, provided
that he will faithfully follow my directions.
The remedies this science prescribes are always safe
because its pharmacy is of God, and rests on the bosom of nature.  Even in those cases where they can
do no good they will do no harm.  It discards those
powerful, poisonous; and dangerous medicines of the
old-school practice which, in their experiments, have
proved so fatal to the lives of millions of our race.  It
selects those only from  the fields of nature which
grow in that part of the earth's latitude where we live,
and such must be adapted to our constitution and condition by the wisdom of the Creator, who has provided
both food and medicine to all animals and creatures in
that part of the globe where he awakened them  into
existence.  If we watch the actions of the animal creation we shall learn that there is, and indeed must be,
as milch simplicity in our medicine as there is in our
food.  Allopathy, Thompsonianism, Homeopathy, Hydropalthy, Electropathy, and I will add, Aeripathy and
Terrapathy, should never be made to exist as so many
separate medical schools, but the excellences of them
ll, so far as they are applicable to the relief of human
1dffierings in  any corresponding  latitude on earth,




LECTURE X.                    185
lsEould be combined into one grand system  TO CUREs
and call it CURAPATIIY.
Water is nature's universal solvent, and when prop
erly applied, in its various degrees of heat and cold, to
the different parts of the system, either externally or
internally as the case may require, it is a most powerful agent to restore the equilibrium of the circulating
forces and remove disease.  But water alone is not
sufficient in every case.  The air in its application
and various temperatures should not be overlooked,
nor the quality and temperature of that which is inhaled into the lungs. We can live longer without food
or water than we can without air.  In very warm
weather, when the air is greatly rarefied by heat, let
the invalid, and even the well person, descend into a
dry cellar, entirely under ground, undress, and there
not only breathe the pure, cool, and earth-impregnated
air for half an hour or more each day, but let the
body at the same time be exposed to its action.  This
will brace the feeble system of the invalid, gradually
raising it up to soundness, and impart vigor and energy to the healthy.  Call this Aeripathy.  But this
is not sufficient to remove every case of disease.  Electricity, galvanism, and magnetism, in all their forms,
should n t be forgotten.  Electricity is the agent of
mind and the invisible power of matter.  These three
should be passed through different parts of the human
system to ease pain and remcve nervous obstructions




186         EfLECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
and nervous diseases by thus equalizing the nervous
force. This is Electropathy, and requires not only a
familiar acquaintance with electrical science, but also
great skill ir its correct application to the diseased.
But this alone is not sufficient.  We must not be
unmindful of our mother earth, nor wholly forget to
lean upon her bosom.  Our bodies take into their com-.
position, not only due portions of electricity, air, and
water, these three grand divisions of nature, but they
also claim a large portion of earth, out of which they
are said to have been formeed.  We are, indeed, an
epitome of the universe, and stand in an exact aptitude and relationship to nature. This being so, permit me to remark, that diseased persons, during the
summer season or warm  months, should seek some
farmer's secluded plough-field or garden, expose their
naked bodies, except the covered head, for several
minutes to the rays of the sun.  When well heated
and rubbed, cover them up in the fresh earth for half
an hour or more, then wash and rub briskly with a
towel, dry well in the sun, and dress. At other times,
and as often as convenient, let the invalid follow the
ploughman, and as he turns up the fresh earth let him
breathe the air while charged with the invisible life.
giving substances that rise from the ground.
As the above advantages can only be enjoyed by
those in the country, what shall be done for those in
cities I In order to bo, more explicit on this interest.




LECTURE X.                  187
ing point, when you build you a house make provisions
for a room  that can admit the sun through its windows.  It might be connected  with  your bathing
establishment, and in the same room.  Have at least
three articles permanently constructed like the tub in
which you lie down to bathe the body.  Let one be
filled with a pure, rich, fertile earth-another with a
light, sandy soil, and a third with clay.  Here let the
invalid each day bury his body in one of the first tw:,
and remain at least half an hour, after first having
exposed it to the action of the sun.  Then let him
wash, rub well with a towel, and dry-thoroughly in
the sun before dressing.  But in case of severe chronic diseases, apply pure water to the clay till it becomes a mortar in which the body will sink, and let
the patient bathe his body in this.  If the disease is
attended with inflammation, let the mortar be warm
as can be conveniently borne, and then wash the body
in water of the same temperature.  If there is no inflammation, let the water be cold as its usual summer
temperature, and wash the body in water of the same,
rub briskly with a towel, and always dry thoroughly
in the sun, if possible, before dressing. By this mode
of treatment an empire over many diseases will be obtained, when all other modes have failed. This I will
name TERRAPATHY.  Simple internal medicines, of
an animal or vegetable nature, may at times be taken
into the stomach, but nothing of a poisonous charac.




188          EILECTRICAL FSYCHOLOGYo
ter.  I therefore repeat, that Electrical Psychology
is the doctrine of mental and physical impressions
to cure the sick.  This can often be done without
any medicine at all, by simply a mental impression,
which this science involves.  But when I use physical impressions, I can not restrict my action to the
narrow  sectarian   medical schools' set up by men,
but avail myself of a free and untrammeled range
in the extensive fields of nature.  Hence I sum
up the whole matter by re-affirming, that Allopathy,
Thompsonianism, Homeopathy, Hydropathy, Electropathy, to which I add Aeripathy and Terrapathy,
should never be established as so many separate medical schools. In the splendid science of Electrical
Psychology I embrace the excellences of them all so
far as they are applicable to the relief of human suffer-ngs, and combine them in one grand system to cure,
and call it CURAPATHY.
I presume the question will arise in some minds, wh)
should Terrapathy, or the various applications of different kinds of earth to the body, have a tendency to cure'
This question is somewhat difficult of solution, but no
more so than to solve why water, air, or any medicine
has a tendency to produce a sanative result upon the
human system.  If, however, you will recall my argu
ments on the philosophy of digestion in'my eighth lecture, and what I said on the philosophy of cure in my
ninth, you will have my answer to the question, IT4'h




LECTURE L.                  189
hould Terrapa iy have a tendency to cure? No phy.
sician pretends to explain why his medicines produce
certain effects upon the system. He merely knows the
fact, and acts accordingly.  These facts, as tc the
medicinal virtues of certain substances, have in many
cases, at least, been learned from the animal creation
or been discovered by accident. When one rattlesnake
bites another, the wounded one will invariably eat a
certain plant and live. A negro, laboring in the Dismal
Swamp, in North Carolina, observing this, ate the same
on being bitten by a rattlesnake, and was cured. Others
laboring there have practiced it with the same success.
Indeed, nearly every useful vegetable medicine now in
possession of doctors, has been discovered by some old
woman in the country, or by old hunters and Indians:
and, after much learned opposition and medical sneering, it has been at length received as their adopted child,
and one after another has been, after passing through
a like ordeal, introduced into the medical family, and
claimed as their lawful paternity. Even Peruvian bark
was discovered by the Jesuits to be an excellent specific
for ague and fever. For this they were persecuted by
the medical profession, who sneered at the remedy,
laughed its discoverers to scorn, and moved the clergy
to fulminate their thunders against them  and their
medicine.  But they have long ago adopted this perse
cuted child into the medical family and school.  Now,
they can not treat an intermittent fever without this




190          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
darling.  You know that quinine, which is manufactured from Peruvian bark, is in our day   all the rage"
in treating ague and fever. But setting aside the manner in which the medical properties of substances wero
first discovered, let us come directly to the subject
under consideration.
What evidence, we may now ask, is there that Terrapathy possesses any power to cure? It will be remembered that I have contended throughout these Lectures
that electricity is the power that controls matter, even
from the smallest particle up to the most ponderous
globes, and that mind is a self-moving substance that
controls electricity, and that hence all power and motion
consubstantially dwell in, and emanate from mind.  I
have contended that the sanative principle is in the
man, and is involved in the electro-nervous fluid, which
is the positive force breathed in from the atmosphere,
and the food taken into the stomach is the negative
force abstracted from the earth, and answering to it.
These two forces in man, being the positive and n:ega
five, meet together and embrace each other. All the
elements of the positive electro-nervous force of the
brain blend with all the corresponding elements of the
negative electro-vegetative force of the food in the
stomach, and digestion, which is but the transmutation
of food into the elements of the system, proceeds.
Th-e body, being the medium between these two forces,
is gradually and incessantly changing, by the oll par



LECTURE X.                  191
tiles being dismissed from its service and new ones
enlisted to supply the waste of this unceasing war.
But the electricity inspired with the air into the lungs,
in being secreted by the brain, undergoes a change from
what it was in the atmosphere equal in degree and corresponding to that of earth transmuted into vegetables
This is evidently so, because in order to enable it to
act upon the negative electric force of the food in the
stomach, it must stand in the same positive relationship
to this that the positive electricity of the atmosphere
does to the negative electricity of the globe in order to
transmute its earthy particles into vegetable substances.
Should the electricity of the atmosphere, when taken
into the lungs, remain in its unchanged state, it could
never carry on a perfect digestion, so as to transmute
food into flesh and bones, because a perfect, aptitude
between this electricity, the food, and the living body
does not exist.  This can only be done by electricity,
after having been secreted and changed by the brain
into an electro-nervous fluid. But, on the other hand,
this electro-nervous fluid can not possibly transmute
earthy particles into vegetables, because a perfect
aptitude  between  these  three  changing  properties
does not exist.  This can only be done by the electricities of the atmosphere and globe acting in conjunction.
Having these general facts distinctly before us, we
ihal1 now be able to discover and appreciate the fact,




192           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
that T ERRAPATHY possesses also, and that too in an
eminent degree, its distinet powers to cure.  To a
candid consideration of this point I now invite your
particular attention.
In my Fourth Lecture I have argued the philosophy
of health and disease. and trust that the ideas there
advanced are retained by you all.  When the mind is
serene, and its mental.and moral attributes are so bal-,anced as to act in perfect unison; when all the internal circulating forces of the body are. equalized so as
to move on in one harmonious and beautiful round in
their destined channels; and when the body externally
stands in the same well-balanced and beautiful relation to
the air, water, vegetables, and earth, then health must
be the natural result of this state of things, on the
principle of the common law of equilibrium, in which
11 other laws are involved.  But when any or all of
these are thrown out of balance, disease ensues.  HoIw,
then, are these difficulties to be overconie the circulating forces equalized, the mind restored to its wonted
serenity, and health and happiness regained?  In reply to these important and interesting queries, I would
in the first place observe, that it is admitted by all
who are acquainted with the principles of electrical
science, that the atmosphere is charged with positive
electricity, and  the earth with  negatitve electricitya
Each of these electricities possess, of course, the 
tractive and repulsive forces.




LECTURE X.                  fl93
Now, as all diseases are either of a positive or negative character, so they must be cured by the positive
or negative electricities, or by the application of substances that contain them.  We should first attempt
a cure by the science of Electrical Psychology alone.
Whether this, of itself, would prove successful or not,
could be tested in a few moments, by an immediate
trial of mental impressions upon the patient.  If these
were successful, the mind would resume the balance
of its powers.  Its peace and contentment would be
restored, and by its mental energies the nervous, and
other circulating forces of the body would be equalized,
and health and happiness ensue.  But if the disease
can not be psychologically cured by direct mental impressions, then we are compelled to resort to physical
remedies, and make what I call physical impressions
upon the body, and through these to reach the mind,
because the mind and body intermutually and recipro
cally affect each other.
Suppose, then, the disease to be a positive one, occasioned by the positive electricity of the system being
thrown out of balance.  In all diseases of this character, even though they may be attended with severe
pain, yet there is never any inflammation.  To these
make cold applications, or the positive electric forces.
Opposites should seldom be used, for they can not act
as permanent alteratives.  Or suppose the disease to
bo a negative one, occasioned by the negative electrico




194          ELECTRICAL PSYCIIHOOGY.
ity of the system  being thrown out of balane.  All
diseases of this character will be attended, not only
with pain, but inflammation.  To these we should apply the negative forces, which belong in a peculiar
sense to the earth.
Here permit me to exhibit this interesting subject in
a more definite and orderly arrangement, so as to he
readily understood.  Now, do you not perceive that,
according to the peculiar nature of the disease, we
should apply electricity, galvanism, or magnetism, or
else air in its various temperatures, from the coldest
to the warmest that can be borne?  Do you not perceive that when the disease requires it, that water, in
its various temperatures, should be applied, either externally or internally? And do you not perceive that
herbs, in their various decocted combinations, or otherwise, should also, when the disease requires it, be taken
internally or applied externally, and of such tempera.
tures as to produce a salutary result?  We have nom
descended from electricity, the finest known inert substance in being, through all the grand elementary de.
partments of nature, down to the vegetable kingdom.
Now, shall we stop here, or proceed down to EARTH,
the MOTHER of us all, and draw relief from her generous bosom?  Shall we stop at herbs, earth's eldest.
born children, who torever hang upon her breast, o,
shall we approach the maternal germinating and generating power and source from whence they draw theit




LECTURE X.                    195
vital being?  As the earth is electrically negative, and
peculiarly so, how supreme must her powers be over all
diseases attended with inflammation!  Earthy substances, in various clayey or other combinations, and in
the form of poultices, either cold or warm, as the case
may require, can be applied to the diseased part, and
with the same convenience that we do any other substance.  Or, when necessary, let the whole body be
buried in soils of various kinds, in their natural vegotating temperature.  Or should the disease require it,
let the body be immersed in various mortars made of
one or several kinds of clay, or other earthy compounds,
The only thing requisite is a good knowledge of their
chemical properties, and good judgment and skill how,
and when; and in what manner to apply them  to any
giyen disease.
Consistent and even irresistible as all this may appear, yet the question comes up —Can any facts be
produced as evidence of the sanative results of Terrapltlhy?  Certainly; there are thousands of instances
of its power.  But as it has never occurred to any
mind to bring it into practice as a system, so the in-,tances of its power are merely incidental. I have made
it my study occasionally for five years, and yet I am
now only ready to introduce it into the service of my
grand system of Electro-Psychological Curapathy, and
eorrmence its practice.  But to the point.
I might refer, with more force than many are awares




'196         EaLECTRICAL PSYCHOLOG.
to the spittle and clay prepared by the AMaster, and
put on the eyes of a blind man, whoia he then ordered
to go and wash in the Pool of Siloam, and on doing of
which he received his sights  Most of Christians suppose that all this was useless, and that he employed
some other agent to restore his sight besides the means
he manifestly employed.  But it is in vain for any one
to contend that Christ practiced a fra.ud, by putting
clay upon his eyes to produce no possible effect, and
then secretly and deceptively restored his sight by some
other power.  It was done by the very means that he
thus openly employed, and by which he pretended it
was done, and without a shade of deception through
fear of men.  It was accomplished by the combined
forces of Terrapathy, Hydropathy, and the faith and
confidence inspired in the blind man's mind by a strong
psychological impression.
But without any reference whatever to the Master, I
will, in as few words as possible, show that the various
earths possess a most powerful electro-absorbent force
to draw  out inflammation from  the human system,
and with which no other known substances in existence
can compare.  The smallest effect we witness on earth
is often pregnant with the greatest power, and portends
the most-salutary or awful results. A straw shows the
direction of the current, however deep its waters, o
secret its irresistible movement.
Take then, for example, the sting of the bee, or the




LECrURE X.                   197
bite of any poisonous insect, where the pain, swelling,
and inflammation would be great.  Tle moment the
circumstance occurs take almost any kind of earth at
hand capable of producing vegetation, moisten it with
spittle or blood-warm water, apply it to the wound, and
in a few moments the poison will be extracted, and
every painful result arrested. But a blue or white clay
soil, moistened with warm water or spittle, is preferable, if it can be obtained without delay.
As to the drawing and absorbent powers of clay and
other earths, I might bring a few simple facts.  For
instance, let oil or grease be spilled upon the floor, and
remain till the board be saturated. No soap and water
can remove it-no washings can make it disappear; yet
clay, rightly prepared, will extract it.  Or suppose
there are oil or grease spots upon a silk dress. Rub
pulverized magnesia on the opposite or wrong side of
the dress, then press a hot iron to the grease spot on the
right side, and the whole will instantly disappear, and
leave the silk as bright and fair as ever.  The same
result may be obtained by using pulverized French
chalk on any beautiful woolen dresses or shawls. Now
it is utterly impossible that these effects could be produced unless these substances possessed a supreme
electro-absorbent power.  Or let clothing be saturated
with any substance producing the strongest possible and
the most pungent and enduring scent, even that of the
skunk, and when no washing, no airing can remove it




i98.ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY
let it be buried in any soil capable of producing a fre
vegetation, and in three or four days the whole will
entirely disappear.
The question arises-What is the cause of this?  I
answer by saying, that the human stomach can not,
neither can that of any other animal, digest any crea.
ture swallowed alive, so long as it possesses animal life.
It must die before the stomach can digest and appropriate it to the elements that compose the body, and
until then the creature must sustain its existence by
drawing its sustenance from the vital force of the body.
So the earth can not digest, that is, decompose, any
substance while that substance has either animal or
vegetable life. These both draw strength and substance
from her.  But the moment they are dead she can digest and appropriate them to her own use, and thus invigorate and fructify herself. Hence it is seen why
Terrapathy can cure.  It is because all substances in
the human system that are adverse to animal life and
health, the earth can appropriate to herself, and so she
can all essences of the most pungent smell. She digests
the whole, and manufactures and re-absorbs them again
into the elements that compose her maternal body.
She removes every substance from the human system
adverse to the laws of animal life, and leaves perfect
health. Hence the supremacy of Electro-Psychological
Curapathy over all medical systems in being is clearly
manifest. and I add no more.




8LCTUDE XI                   199
LECTtRE Xl.
PRIVATE INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CLASS.
THE  SECRET REVEALE.D.
UN.TLEMEN:
IN my last Lecture I have argued the supremacy:f
Curapathy over all medical systems in existence, for in
it are combined the excellences of them  all; and, in
addition to these, it contains modes of treatment that
no medical science as yet involves.  In this peculiar
position of my subject it will be perceived by all those
who have paid any attention to the science of Electrical
Psychology, that it is of most paramount importance
to the human race, as a curative agent, and should,
therefore, be understood by all, so far, at least, as to
apply it successfully to the removal of disease and
pain. It should be practically understood by all medical men.  This will cost them only the trifling sum of
ten dollars, and in the course of their practice it would
be worth thousands to them, and at the same time
afifrd them the supreme ple'lsure of having saved many
a life, where medicine must have failed.  To obtain a
good knowledge of this science will require about'Iwr




200          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
LESSONS OF TWO HOURS EACH; and as I am now permanently settled in New York city, I am  ready to im.
part these instructions to all persons of good mo:'al
character who may call.  If persons at a distance will
form a class sufficiently large to warrant the expense,
and address me a letter at New York, I will visit them
one week, and not only give private instructions to the
class, but will deliver, in the mean time, five public
evening lectures besides, and perform most interesting
experiments, of which the class may have the profit of
the admission fee.  This would generally pay their tuition, and in many instances exceed it.
I make this proposal, because hundreds of ignorant
individuals have undertaken to lecture upon, and even
to teach this science, who have never received any instruction from  me, either verbal or written.  These
persons pretend to teach it, and that, too, for any price
they can obtain, from five dollars down to twenty-five
cents! They had better receive " a penny for their
thoughts' so as to adapt the price of tuition to the
amount of information they impart.  All the regular
students to whom I have taught the science of Electrical Psychology have been laid under written obligations, and have seriously pledged their sacred honor
never to teach it under ten dollars.  Those, therefore2
who re cqualified teachers and honorable men do still
continue to adhere to the obligations they signed, and
charge the original fee, Those who vary from it hava




LECTURE XI                     201
either forfeited their obligaticns, oi else nev'er learned
the science as they Ought; and hence th.e public will
know who and what they are.
It is due to myself to state, that some have cha.nged
the name of this science to that of   E'LECrRO BIOL
OGY,/  and have claimed authorship as to its discovery,
and have even stated that Electro Biology has no connection whatever with Electrical Psychology, but is an
entirely distinct science.  This I am compelled to give
a most decided and unqualified denial.  I have visited
some of the principal places where the Biologists have
lectured, and have gathered all the facts in relation to
their proceedings and the character of their experiments.  I am  acquainted with its whole history, and
the circumstances under which it received its name,
and why Electrical Psychology was first called " Elec-:ro Biology."   Should I, in a future day, be compelled
in sEif-defense to take this subject in hand, I shall
make all the necessary disclosures, which the interest
and advancement of this science may require, or justice and duty demand.  Fol the present they must rest
in my bosom  till circumstances slyall call them forth.
I would now only say, that the science of Electrical
Psychology is identical with t{hat Oc'.lee cro Biolo gy
and that the latter has no existe).  onlmy wJ (at it
rravus from  the former, unless it L.e th'e me-rC hai''f'is name.
I have already stated, that there are aerai inmdi'
~,- a'




202          ELECTRICAL PSY,.HOLOGYt
vidaals who have gone through the country lecturing,
and pretending to teach this science for one or two dollars, and even for twenty-five cents, when they could
get no more, who are utterly ignorant of the human
system-ignorant of those diseases that assail it, and
ignorant of the common principles involved in any of the
sciences. Such may be able to inform you how to close
a man's eyes-how to paralyze or move his limbs, and
how to make a psychological impression on his mind.
But how can they teach any one its philoscphical ap —
plication to disease, or to any useful medical purpose.
Every man of common sense must perceive that this is
impossible without the knowledge of science in general.
Such incompetent individuals have done Electrical
Psychology a serious injury, and in several places have
brought it into disrepute.
Under all these circumstances, I feel it my duty to
put an end to the worse than useless labors of such
individuals, by fully explaining the secret mode of
operation-how an individual may be controlled by
mental and physical imprebsions.  I would not be understood that this can be wholly done by language.  It
requires a visible and personal application of what the
theory involves-a practical illustration as to performing experiments, and low to apply it successfully te
disease.  I will, however, do it faithfully, so fa.r as
language can accomplish it, and far beyond what any
lecturer now in tih field attempts to explain to his class




LECTURE XI,                   203
of pupils.  The most have failed to give satisfaction
to those whom they have undertaken to instruct, and
mn many cases serious difficulties have occurred in rela,
tion to the sum paid for instruction.  I have therefore
come to the conclusion not to suffer odium in future to
be brought upon this science, if in my power to prevent
it.  I proceed, therefore, to give the instructions to all,
so that they may know how to experiment upon their
fellow-men, as well as those generally who go about as
lecturers and teachers of this science.  In the accomplishment of this I shall be brief as possible. What
requires ten hours of instruction can not, by any means,
be communicated fully in two lectures of half an hour
each.  Yet I will embody all, and even more than is
generally given to any class of pupils by those claiming
to be teachers.
I would, in the first place, remark, that the Creator
has stamped simplicity, as far as possible, upon each
separate part of the human system.  As I remarked in
my sixth Lecture, each organ of the body performs but
one function.  The eye sees, the ear hears, the olfactories smell, the glands taste, the heart throbs to regulate the blood, the hands handle, the feet walk, the
liver secretes its bile, and the stomach digests its food.
The eye never hears, and the ear never sees.  So there
evidently is but one nerve or set of nerves through
which impressions from  the external world are com.
municated to the mind.  This is certain, because the




204          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
mtind can ieceive but one idea at a time.  It is imrra,
terial how rapidly soever ideas may be transmitted to
the mind, they are nevertheless successive, and two
ideas can not possibly be conceived, at the same instant,l by the mind. One must succeed the other. But
as there are millions of nerves in the human brain, and
if it were alike the office of each to communicate ideas
to the mind, then as many millions of ideas as there
are nerves might be transmitted to the mind at the
same instant.  But we are conscious that they are successively and not simultaneously conceived.  We can
not attend to two public speakers at once, so as to understand their ideas, if both were before us, and each
addressing us upon a different subject.  With the same
earnestness that we give heed to the one, we must neglect the other.  Indeed, there can be no doubt in relation to the fact of ideas being successively communicated to the mind, if we reflect that even one public
speaker by too rapid a delivery often confuses the
hearer.
The mind, as a living being of embodied form, has
its spiritual brain and spiritual organs answering to
the correspondent phrenological organs of the physical
brain through which it manifests itself.  The latter
[ae, indeed, a production from  the former, as much so
as the plant and its form are a production from the life
of the seed.  The nerve, or family of nerves, through
which imnDressiona   are communicated to the mind, and




LECTI RE XI.                 205
by the mind to the oody, to move its various parts, is
located in the organ of Individuality.  All the organs
of the brain, and, indeed, of the whole system, are
double, and so are the senses likewise.  The brain has
its two hemispheres, its two eyes, two ears, two glands
of taste, and two olfactories of smell.  We have two
hands, two feet, and the heart has its two auricles and
two ventricles.  The organ of Individuality is also
dcuble.  It is located in the centre of the lower part
of the forehead, sends off branches to the optic, auditory, and olfactory nerves-extends through both hemispheres of the brain, passes down the spinal marrow,
and in its course sends off branches to the arms and
lower limbs, and, indeed, to all the voluntary parts of
the body.  Hence all voluntary motion originating in
mind is communicated to the organ of Individuality,
and from  thence is transmitted through correspondent
nerves to that part of the body where the mind directs
motion to be made.  Hence the organ of Individuality
is the one that constitutes our individualism, or personal
identity, and by which we identify all individual objects
in the external womld.  And though this organ, like all
the other phrenological organs of the brain) is made up
of a congeries of nerves, yet I am satisfied that it has
but one single identical nerve that is moved by a mental impression, and that one moves by sympathy the
whole family of nerves dwelling in that organ; and
thum motion is ci)mmunicated to every voluntary de




206          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
partment of the body where the mind, as the motive
power, directs.
For illustration of the above, suppose a pebble were
thrown into the centre of Lake Superior.  It would
displace its waters, and produce a circle. That circle
would produce a second, and that second would produce
a third circle, and so on, each continuing to lessen in
its action until it apparently died away.  But though
imperceptible to the naked eye, yet the successive action would be continued even to the distant shores, and
move every drop of water from the centre to the circumference.  And not only so, but that pebble would
displace, by sympathy, every particle of water in the
basined lake, even to its greatest depth. This is evident, because if a rock, half the size of that mighty
lake, were thrown into its centre, the universal disturb.
ance of every particle of water would be evident and
perceptible.  On the same principle, a pebble-yes, a
single grain of sand-would produce the same result,
only on a smaller scale.  So the centre nerve (if I may
so speak) of the organ of Individuality is moved by a
mental impression, and this movement communicates
motion by sympathetic impulse to each and every voluntary part of the body where the mind directs. Is not
this the true philosophy of what we call sympathy existing between the different parts of the human body
and the various attributes of the soul, and between one
individual and another I  And is not this the true




LECTURE XI,                  207
philosophy of perscnal identity, on the mystery of
which so much has been written?  Did not the mind
of man possess a spiritual organ of Individuality corresponding to the physical one of the brain, how then
could either personal identity or sympathy be recog.
nized, or even exist? This one spiritual organ constitutes the unity of all the attributes of the mind, spirit,
soul, or whatever you please to call that part of man
which is to exist immortal in a future world.  The
phrenological organs of the human brain are but a
daguerreotype manifestation-a result of the correspondent spiritual organs of the living mind.  They
constitute the physical apartments of the earthly house
which is fitted up as a temporary residence for the in
visible inhabitant within, during its continuance here.
Having clearly placed before you those interesting
points that involve the ever sweet and pleasing doctrine
of sympathy, I will now proceed to instruct you how an
individual can be electrically and psychologically controlled. This is a subject involving vast utility as a
curative power to the sick and distressed, and is therefore full of deep and stirring interest to every feeling
heart.  To control is to cure.  In order to affect an
individual, and to successfully control his mind and
muscles, it is, in the first place, necessary that he
should stand in a negative relation to the operator:s to the doctrine of impressions.  Some persons are
naturall) in this condition, were born in it, live in it.




108           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
and will die in it.  Others are not in this state, and
hence means must be used to bring them  there before
they can be controlled.  In order to determine whether
an individual stands in this negative relation to yom 
self, as the operator, you must first proceed to ta.ke
the communication, as we term  it.  This is invariably and philosophically done through the medium of
two points.  I care not whether it be effected by visible
contact or otherwise, it is still done through the medium of two points, or the negative and positive electric
fbrces, and through the same nerve, or family of nerves,
that constitutes, phrenologically, our individualism  or
peron-al identibty
Before I proceed to notice the most easy, sure, and
Airect mode by which an electro-psychological commu.
nicatiepn may be established, I will, in the first place,
speak of the philosophy of communication in general.
It is evident that the positive and negative forces of
the two electricities pervade all nature.  These I call
in my seventh Lecture the male and female electricities.  These two forces not only permeate, more or
less, all substances in nature, but they also unceasingly
emanate from them in electric circles.  Hence, as man
is a, part of the universe, he constantly takes into his
system large portions of electricity with the air he inspires, with the water he drinks, and with the food he
et s.  And by mental and muscular action, and the.rmlmon  operations of animal life, he  unceasingly




LECTURE XI.                  209
throws it off through the nervous force.  On passing
fi'rom his system into the surrounding elements, it forms,
around him his electric or magnetic circle.  How large
this circle may be is as yet to us unknown.  Hence)
when two individuals come within a certain distance of
each other, their circles meet, and touch each other at
two points.  And if one of these individuals is in the
electro-psychological state, the communication will be
taken through the positive and negative forces.  And
though this communication was taken without personal
contact, yet it was done through the nerve that constitutes our individualism or personal identity.  A communication in this manner can be established with those
persons only who are very sensitive.  As only about
one in twenty-five is naturally in this state, so I can
step before an audience of a thousand persons, state to
them what I intend to do, so that all shall understand
me; then request them all to close their eyes firmly,
and say, You can not open your eyes! and forty out
of the thousand will be unable to do so.  All this can
be performed in five minutes after entering the hall.
It is, however, certain, that no effect can be produced
till you establish a thorough communication between
yourself and the subject through the nervous force of
the organ of Individuality that constitutes his personal
identity.  And as the centre or moving nerve of this
organ has sympathy with all the voluntary nerves of
he system  and as they reciprocally affect each other




210         ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
so you can establish a psychological communication by
touching any part of the system where voluntary nerves
are located, and particularly of those individuals who
are very sensitive and impressible. But the most natural mode to get a good communication, and the one
least liable to be detected by the audience, is to take
the individual by the hand, and in the same manner as
though you were going to shake hands. Press your
thumb with moderate force upon the ULNAR NERVE~
which spreads its branches to the ring and little finger
of the hand.  The pressure should be nearly an inch
above the knuckle, and in range of the ring finger.
Lay the ball of the thumb fiat and partially crosswise,
so as to cover the minute branches of this nerve of
motion and sensation.  The pressure, though firm,
should not be so great as to produce pain or the least
uneasiness to the subject.  When you first take him
by the hand, request him to place his eyes upon yours,
and to keep them fixed, so that he may see every emotion of your mind expressed in the countenance. Con.
tinue this position and also the pressure upon this cu,
Hital nerve for half a minute or more. Then request
nim  to close his eyes, and with your fingers gently
brush downward several times over the eyelids, as
though fastening them firmly together. Throughout the
whole process feel within yourself a fixed determination to close them, so as to express that determination
fully in your countenance and manner.  Having done




LECTURE XI.                 211
this, place your hand on the top of his head and press
your thumb firmly on the organ of Individuality, bear.
ing partially downward, and with the other thumb still
pressing the ULNAR NERVE, tell him-you can not
open your eyes!  Remember, that your manner, your
expression of countenance, your motions, and your lan
guage must all be of the most positive character. If
he succeed in opening his eyes, try it once or twice
more, because impressions, whether physical or mental,
continue to deepen by repetition. In case, however,
that you can not close his eyes, nor see any effect produced upon them, you should cease making any further
efforts, because you have now fairly tested that his
mind and body both stand in a positive relation to
yours as it regards the doctrine of impressions.
There is yet another mode of communication that I
have discovered, which is far preferable to the one just
noticed, is supreme over all others, and will remain so
till Omnipotence shall see fit to change the nervous
system of man.  This is the MEDIAN NERVE, which
is the second of the brachial plexus. It is a compound
nerve having the power of both motion and sensation. It
is located in the centre of the upper part of the palm of
the hand near where it joins the wrist. In order to take
the communication through this medium, you must take
the subject by the hand with the palm upward, and
place the ball of your thumb in the centre of his hand
near the root of his thumb, and give a moderate but




212          ELECTRICAL PSYCIOLOGY.
firm pressure. The astonishing nature of the impres.
sion can only be equaled by the result produced. It
is a nerve of voluntary motion as well as sensation,
and therefore belongs to, and has its origin in, the cerebrum.  True, like the other nerves, it can be traced
directly no farther than the spinal cord, yet there is no
difficulty in determining its origin to be in the cerebrum, because that is the organ of all voluntary motion, even as the cerebellum is the organ of all involuntary motion.  This mode of communication transcends all others, and will answer in all possible cases,
even upon persons the most difficult to control, as well
as upon those who are the most sensitive and impressible.  I care not how you obtain the communication
with an individual-whether it be without contact, or
by touching any part of the body, yet the communication must ultimately- be established through the MIEDIAN NERVE as the centre telegraphic force from the
organ of Individuality, through which organ all ideas
and all impressions are transmitted from the external
world to the mind, and through that same organ are
transmitted by the volitions of the mind to the different
parts of the body.  Even if the communication is
taken by pressure on the ulnar nerve, yet it is nevertheless communicated by sympathy to the MEDIAN NERVE,
and through which alone the communication becomes
perfect.  There is no question9 in my mind, that the
optiCj the auditory, and the olfactory nerves, as well




LECTURE XI.                 218
as those of taste, are but branches of the same comr
mon nerve by which impressions or ideas are transmit
ted to the mind through the organ of Individuality.
Those whom I have instructed, will please to remember
this. I desire you, and all, in order to experiment
with power, to keep up a perfect uniformity in taking
the communication through the MEDIAN NERVE, and
through this to transmit the electric current to the
brain and electrify the body.
I am aware that the exact location of this nerve is
somewhat difficult to find, unless you are personally instructed.  If you succeed in closing the subject's eyes
by the above mode, you may then request him to put
his hands on his head, or in any other position you
choose, and tell him, You can not stir them!  In case
you succeed, request him to be seated, and tell him,
You can not rise!  If you are successful in this, request him to put his hands in motion, and tell him,
You can not stop them!  If you succeed, request him
to walk the floor, and tell him, You can not cease
walking.!  And so you may continue to perform ex.
periments involving muscular motion and paralysis of
any kind that may occur to your mind, till you can
completely control him, in arresting or moving all the
voluntary parts of his system.  When this is accomplished, we say, for the sake of convenience, he is in
the electrical state.
You may, perhaps, not be able to affect him any fur




214          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
ther; and as you can not know how this matter stands
without the trial, so you will next proceed to produce
mental impressions by operating upon his mind only,
If he is entirely in the state, you can make him see that
a cane is a living snake or eel; that a hat is a halibut
or flounder; a handkerchief is a bird, child, or rabbit;
or that the moon or a star falls on a person in the
audience, and sets him on fire, and you can make him
hasten to extinguish it. You can make him see a river.
and on it a steamboat crowded with human beings.
You can make him see the boiler burst, and the boat
blow up, with his father or mother, brother or sister,
or wife or child on board.  You can lay out the lifeless
corpse before him in state, cause him to kneel at its
side, and to freely shed over it the tears of affection
and bereavement.  You can suddenly show him a boy
or girl, and he sees in them the lost father or mother
standing before him, and gives the warm  embrace.
You can change his own personal identity, and make
him believe that he is a child two or three years old,
and inspire him with the artless feelings of that age;
or that he is an aged man, or even a woman, or a negro,
or some renowned statesman or hero. You can change
the taste of water to that of vinegar, wormwood, honey,
or of any liquors you please. In like manner you can
operate on his hearing and smelling, as well as on his
sight, feeling, and taste. When you can produce such
mental hallucinations as these on all his senses, or




LECTURE XI.                  216
thousands of others that may suggest themselves to
your mind, we say, for the sake of convenience, that
he is in the psychological state.
I have thus far confined my remarks to that class of
individuals who are naturally in the electro-psychological state, and shown you clearly how a communication in its various modes may be taken, so as to successfully control them  both physically and mentally.
The average number of persons in the United States
who are naturally in the psychological state is about
one in twenty-five.  These can be cured of any functional diseases with which they may be assailed, by
simply performing upon them  the experiments I have
just named, or any others of a like character.  And
not only so, but upon such any surgical operation may
be performed without the slightest degree of pain, and
that, too, while they are wide awake, and in perfect
possession of all their reasoning faculties.  But while
only one in twenty-five is entirely in this state, and naturally so, yet there is, perhaps, one in twelve who is
partially in the state, and on whom experiments can be
performed to a greater or less extent. All these, in
connection wvith those on whom  you can produce no
effect whatever, are to be subjected to a process to
bring them into the electro-psychological state, and we
see, too, how vastly important it is that this, if possible, should be (lone. This, indeed, would be the nobleat triumph ever achieved by man.  It would he a




616           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
triumph o er disease and pain, and prepare the human
race t) wear out with age.
In order to bring about this result, I know, at press
ent, of no better process than the following: Take
pure zinc and silver, with a copper wire, as a conductor,
passed through the zinc, so as to come in contact with
the silver.  For convenience, take a piece of zinc the
size of a cent, but somewhat thicker, and imbed a fivecent piece in its centre, and pass a small copper wirer
as a rivet, through both.  Place this coin in the palm
of the hand, with the silver side up, and request him
to bring it within about a foot of his eyes.  Let him
take a position, either sitting or standing, which he can
retain twenty minutes or more, without any motion of
his feet, hands, lips, head, or any part of his body,
lHe must remain motionless as a statue, except the natural winking of the eye.  His mind should be perfectly
resigned and kept entirely passive to surrounding impressions.  The eyes should be placed upon the coin
as though they were riveted there,, and during the whole
twenty or twenty-five minutes they should, on no consideration, be raised to look at any person or object
whatever, and the spectators should be still as the
grave. If the eyes have a tendency to close, he should
not strive to keep them open, but let them close.  Follow nature.  In a public audience, when lecturing, Jyo
should seat, if possible, a class of thirty persons,
When the time has expired, collect your coin so as




I E'CTURe XI.               21f
relieve the class from  their wearisome position, and
then try each individual, always taking the communication in the manner I have described, and proceed to
experiment upon them  the same as you do upon those
who are naturally in the state.  If one sitting do not
bring them  entirely into the psychological state, then
let it be repeated on the next evening, and so continue
on till the work is consumnmated.  All, with few exceptions, can be, by perseverance, brought into this
state.  Some are naturally in it-some are brought
into it by one sitting-some by two-some by threeand some may require a hundred sittings of half an
hour each before they can be brought to the participation of this inestimable blessing.  No two individuals
are alike impressible in any thing whatever, whether it
be mental effort, moral power and moral suasion, or
physical endurance.  Hence we should not be surprised, that they all differ from each other as to nervous
impressibility in this science, and that, too, in the same
ratio as they may differ in their phrenological developments and cerebral excitability. It is enough for us to
know an this point that no two individuals are in any
respect exactly alike.
Having described the electro-magnetic coin which I
conceive to be the best, under all circumstances, to
produce the result, and having directed you how to use
it, I would now apprise you, that this state may be in,
daced by other substances as agents in nature.  It




218          ELECTRICAL PSYC'II(LO6tC
may be induced by fixing the eyes upon a piece of zinc
alone, and observing the directions already given.  It
may be induced by a piece of silver, (r a piece of copper, iron, lead, or any other metal.  It may be induced
by a piece of wood, or any other substance in nature,
Or it may be done by a mere mental abstraction, with
no substance, only the surrounding elements.  But
when no substance is used, the process to the state is
slow and tedious. Then, again, there is every possible
grade of power from the feeblest substance placed in
the hand up to the galvanic battery, which is more
powerful than the coin I have adopted as a matter of
convenience and utility.  The galvanic battery I should
prefer, if it could be carried in the pocket, or be accessible to all. If thirty persons should join hands,
and the two individuals at the extremes of the line
each take a handle of a galvanic battery, and let the
current be so graduated as to be but faintly felt, and a
greater number would be affected than by any other
agent that could be employed.  In this case, as in all
others, it is to be understood, that the same stillness of
muscles, the same fixed position of the eye upon some
object or spot, and the same passivity of mind are to
be strictly observed.
The query may now arise in the minds of some of
the class-Why should all substances in existence havs
a greater or less tendency to produce this state?  I
answer, that electricity is the great and universal




LEC(TURE XI.                 219
rger. ordained by the Creator to form, to transmutes
or to decompose all substances that swarm in the empire of nature.  Hence all substances ill existence
throw off a never-ceasing electro-atmospheric emanation in a greater or less degree, otherwise.they could
never change.  And these emanations by their impressions more or less affect all human beings according to
the relative position in which they may be placed to
receive and feel the force of such impressions.  Therefore sleep and wakefulness, health and sickness, pain
and ease, and all the various sensations and changes to
which the human system is subject, are experienced.
Hence when we fix our attention upon one substance,
and become mentally and physically passive to surrounding impressions, we render ourselves, by this volition,
relatively negtlive, as far as in our power, to the positive force of the substance with which we are engaged,
and drowsiness, or some other cerebral change or phenomenon ensues, because by passivity the electro-nervous fluid is supplied through the lungs and stomach for
the brain more freely than it is thrown off.  But when
we resume the activity of our mental and physical
energies, we, by this volition and action, become relatively positive to the surrounding impressions of all
substances in nature, and wakefulness, with all its attendant delights, is the result, because by mental and
musiular action we throw off from the brain the electroV    




Q20          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
nervous fluid more rapidly than it is supplied through
the lungs and stomach.
In order, therefore, to render the subject as simple
as possible, and to establish and perpetuate a uniformity of procedure in the use of a substance to be placed
in the hand: I desire you to insist upon the electromagnetic coin as being alone sufficients under the directions given, to induce the state.  And I desire you to
insist that the pressure on the MEDIAN NERVE is alone
sufficient to establish a communication between the
operator and the subject to perform all the experiments,
both electrical and psychological, that this science may
involve.  Indeed, all substances, so far as their electroemanating power extends, produce the same effect in
degree as the coin I recommend.  Hence, strictly and
philosophically speaking, the electro-magnetic coin, as
the true mode of inducing the state) is all in all. And as
all possible modes of obtaining communication, whether
by contact or otherwise, must meet in the organ of Individuality, through which all impressions are transmitted to the mind, and from  the mind, through that
same organ, to all the voluntary parts of the body, so
there is strictly and philosophically speaking but one
mode of taking communication, and hence the MEDIAN
NERVE is all in all.  If, however, you could remember
the exposition I have given you on this intricate and
interesting subject, you would then find no difficulty in
defer ding yourself against th  assaults of skeptical




nt.C Ur   xia..~221
men.  But as it is, I must leave you with the two sim
ple forms I recommend-the ELECTRO-MAGNETIC COIN
and the MEDIAN NEPRVE.
As the general points of the subject are now distinctly before you, I would next state, that we divide
this science, for the sake of perspicuity, into FIVE
PLANS.  The first three regard the mediums through
which persons are brought into the electro-psychological state.  The first is through Mesmerism.  Hence
you will call Mesmerism plan NUMBER ONE.  The second is the pressure on the nerve by which we detect
those who are naturally in the electro-psychologica.
state.  This you will call plan NUM,1BER TWO.  The
third is the coin by which others are to be brought into
this state.  The coin you will therefore call plan NUMBER THREE.  The fourth involves all the experiments,
whether electrical or psychological, as a sanative
agent, by which those who are already in this state are
to be relieved of pain, cured of diseases or prepared
for any surgical operation without suffering.'Tis you
will call plan NUMBER FOUR.  And the fifth, in order
to cure the diseases of those who are not in the state,
involves the application of physical impressions upon
their bodies, and the administering of remedlie,, whether
externally or internally applied.  This you will call
plan NUMrBnER FIVE.  On each of these five plans I
now proceed to impart all the necessar f informaltion;
An(i in as clear and con cise a manner as -Possible.




222          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
In regard to Mesmerism, which is plan NUMBER ONEs
I would say, that if you desire to mesmerize a person,
who has never been put into the state, nor in the least
affected, I know of no better mode than to seat him in
an easy posture, and request him to be calm and resigned.  Take him by both hands, or else by one hand
and place your other gently on his forehead. But with
whatever part of his body you may choose to come in
contact, be sure to always touch two points, answering
to the positive and negative forces. Having taken him
by both hands, fix your eyes firmly upon his, and, if
possible, let him contentedly and steadily look you in
the face.  Remain in this position till his eyes close.
Then place both your hands on his head, gently pass
them to his shoulders, down the arms, and off at the ends
of his fingers. Throw your hands outward as you return them to his head, and continue these passes till
he can hear no voice but yours. He is then entirely in
the mesmeric state.
The reason why I desire you to throw your hands
outward on returning them to his head when making
the passes is, to avoid waking him by passing them upward in front and near to his body. It is a well-known
fact, that by the downward passes of an eleetro-magnet,
attached to a galvanic battery, the steel magnet becomes
ilstar.tly charged so as to lift a pound of iron.  But
by the upward passes it becomes instantly demagnet.
iBed so that it will lift nothing. By the dowrnward




LECTURE X:.                  223
passes I mean from the bow or centre of the magnet to
the extremities, and by upward passes I mean the
reverse, regardless -of the position in which the magnet
may be held.  The same applies to the human being
when his mind is left uninfluenced. But if you apprise
the subject when in the magnetic state. that the upward
passes will not awake him, then by the force of his own
mind he can retain his condition, in defiance of all the
passes you may make.  The mind, when in the mes~
meric state, has the power of appropriating electricity or magnetism  to itself, or of rejecting it, at
pleasure.
in case, however, that the person whom you seat to
be mesmerized is not affected, and feels no inclination
whatever to close his eyes after fifteen or twenty min
utes' trial, you will still proceed, as directed, to make
the passes, and continue them also for fifteen or twenty
minutes.  Then take him again by the hands, as at
first, and continue this position about the same length
of time, then resume the passes, as before directed,
and continue these two modes of operation alternately
till about an hour is- consumed at a sitting.  Before
you leave him, reverse the passes for the space of a
minute or so, as though waking him up, even though
you see no visible effect produced. On the next day,
give him  another sitting of an hour; and so on, day
after day, till you get him into the mesmeric state.
Remember, that all the influence you produce upon him




224          ELECTRICAL PS YCHOLOGT
at one sitting. however minute or imperceptible it mav
be, he fully retains to all subsequent daily sittings.
When a person is in the mesmeric state, whether
put there by yourself or by some other one, take the
oommunication by NUMBER TWO and awake him by the
upward passes; or else do it by an impression, as follows: Tell him, " I will count three, and at the same
instant I say three I will slap my hands together, and
you will be wide awake and in your perfect senses.
Are you ready?"  If he answer in the affirmative,
you wil proceed to count-" One, TWO, THREE!'
The word three should be spoken suddenly, and in a
very loud voice, and at the same instant the palms of
the hands should be smitten together.  This will instantly awake him.  Those who are thus aronsed from
mesmeric slumber to wakefulness are, with few exceptions, in the electro-psychological state, and you can
immediately proceed to experiment upon them. Here,
then, is an individual who was brought into this state
through NUMBER ONE, and he stands in a negative relation to you as it regards the doctrine of impressions,
and his body is principally charged with negative electricity, which is from the earth, and which alone is susceptible of being successfully controlled.
Having given you all the necessary directions how to
mesrmerize, and how to bring a person into the electro.
psychological state througlh NUMBER ONE, and shown
the relation in which he stands to you as the operator.




LECTURE XI.                  225
I now proceed to instruct you in relation to NUMBEr
Two.  This can be done in a very few words, as it has
been already pretty fully noticed.  In the first place,
you may go into a public audience, or among youll social
friends, and take one individual after another by the
hand, press the MEDIAN NERN E, as I have directed, and
if you succeed in controlling some one, both physically
and mentally, then such individual is recognized as in
the electro-psychological state through NUMBER TWO.
Though this person has never been mesmerized, nor
operated upon, yet. he is found to be naturally in the
same state, through NUMBER TWO, as is-the individual
who was brought into it through NUMBER ONE.  Seat
them side by side, and they both feel the same nervous
sympathy toward each other, are both charged with the
same negative electricity, and both stand in a negative
relation to you as it regards the doctrine of impressions.
Take NUMBER THREE,'which is the electro-magnetic
coin, and place it in the hand of an individual whom
you can not affect, as you did either of the persons mentioned, and subject him to the process of looking at it
as I have directed.  When the time of the sitting has
expired, take the usual communication, NUMBER TWO,
and in case you can control him, both physically and
mentally, he is recognized as brought Into the electropsychological state through NUMBER THREE.  Here,
then, are three individuals in the same state of nerv3us impressibility, charged with the same negative
10*




226          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
electricity, stand in the same negative relation to you,
as it regards the doctrine of impressions, and by the
same impression they can all be controlled, collectively
or separately.  They are all in the electro-psychologi
cal state, but were brought there through three different plans.  But by whatever means individuals may be
brought into this state, yet bear in mind, that through
NUMBER TWO, either with or without contact, you take
the communication, which is the secret, invisible, and
subtile link of controlling power, and without which no
effect whatever can be produced. Every principle of
philosophy is based upon cause, medium, and effect
Even the Creator himself, were he completely isolated
from this globe, could produce no possible effect upon
it, nor upon the inhabitants of its surface, because there
would be, in such case, no medium of communicatior
by which he could come in contact with it, or in the
least affect its animal and vegetable kingdoms.  Touch
what nerve you please, or obtain the communication
with or without contact, as you may-I care not how,
yet it must be transmitted to the brain through the
MEDIAN NER VE to the organ of Individuality, and from
thence to the mind.  Even if you press the ulnar nerve
yet it must be by sympathy communicated from this tc
the MIEDIAN NERVE, which is much larger, runs parallel along the arm with it to the spinal cord, and fron
thence th(y both unquestionably pass to the organ of
individual ty in the oerobrum.  They are both cunm



LECTURE XI.                  22?
pound nerves, by which we mean, that they are both
susceptible of voluntary motion and sensation, being
connected with the mind as its agents to transmit the
electro-nervous fluid to and from it, and through wliich
it holds a correspondence with the external world.
Through this it receives by impressions its messages,
and through this by impressions it returns its answers.
To take the communication, therefore, by acting directly
upon the MEDIAN NERVE is far preferable to any other
mode, and particularly so upon persons who are not
very sensitive or impressible.  The more remote we
take our communication from this nerve, the longer we
must labor to get control, and perhaps often fail, and
the more feeble will be our action and impression in
producing any interesting, brilliant, and startling experiments.  The next'best mode to get a communication is, as I have uniformly taught, through the ULNAR
NER.VE, and is the best mode to conceal the secret from
others.
I have now briefly noticed the first THREE PLANS,
through which individuals may be brought into the psychological state, and the subtile medium of communication through which they may be controlled by mental
impressions.  In regard to plan NUMBER FOUR I would
remark, that as it involves all the experiments, both
electrical and psychological, and as I have already sufficiently noticed these in giving directions how to perform
them, so this part of my subject has been anticipated.




228          ELECTRICAL PSYCIOLOGY,
and is fully before you.  Permit me, however, W re.
mark, that it may be well for you to know why these
experiments are conducive to health, and how it is possible to perform an operation without pain, when the
patient is wide awake and in his perfect senses. These
two points I will now philosophically explain.
Why the experiments, when properly conducted, are
conducive to health, is because the mind, by coming in
contact with the electricity of the nerves, moves it with
a force equal to the impression which the operator
makes on the patient, and sends it to that part of the
system  to which the patient's attention is directed.
Under its energy the limbs are paralyzed, so that the
subject, by all his exertions, is unable to walk, nor
when walking is he able to stop, and when seated it is
not in his power to rise.  His arms, in an instant, are
paralyzed, so that he can not move them, or they are set in
motion, and he has no power to stop them.  By a mental impression he is made to see his clothes on fire,
or the house falling, and his limbs crushed to pieces.
Or he is made to see a lion, a tiger,.or a huge serpent
close in pursuit to devour him. Or, at pleasure, he may
be wrought up to the most supreme ecstasy of joy and
delight, or be made to feel, in the extreme, any other
emotion or passion of the soul.  These various impressions throw the electricity of the nerves to every pars
of the system with such power as to burst through all
functional obstructions, equalize the nervous force, and




LECTURE XI.                   229
also the circulation of the blood, and thus remove dis.
ease and still pain.  it is a well-known fact in medical
jurisprudence, that such supreme and sudden excitements have often cured rheumatism, and made even the
lame walk.
On plan NUMBER FIVE) which involves the cure of
persons who are not in this state, I can say but little.
It embraces physical action upon their bodies, according to the nature of the disease, and impressions upon
their minds so far as it is possible to produce them.  It
involves external applications or internal remedCies, as
the case may require.  In a word, it involves the excellences of all mnedical systems in being, and sums them
all up in the supreme beauties of one bright and glorious system, and that system  is Electro-Cura.pathy.
I now turn to the consideration of the last point I prom.
ised to notice.
The true philosophical cause, why a tooth can be extracted, or a surgical operation performed, without pain,
is, that all feeling or sensation is in the mind, which
holds its residence in the brain, and which, as a living
being of immortal form, has its spiritual hands, feet,
and organs corresponding to those of the body.  In.
deed, the body, in all its complicated organism, is but
a visible daguerreotype picture of the invisible spirit
in the brain, and fro-m which it has drawn all its linea
ments of form.  Strictly speaking, the body itself has
no feeling,  If you touch, for instance, the point of a




280          E 2ECTRICAL PS Y.HOLOGY.
needle to the forefinger, it irritates some minute branch
of a nerve of sensation.  This irritation disturbs the
electricity of the nerve that serves as a telegraph wire
along which the disturbed electricity passes, and a
shock is produced upon the identical correspondent spot
of the forefinger of the spirit, disturbs the harmony of
its own beautiful movements in its spiritual sphere, and
this impression produces pain.
If, then, the communication between the mind and
the electricity of the nerve to which you touched the
needle could be cut off —if the telegraph wire should be
so impaired, that the electricity could not pass to the
mind to shock it, then no pain could be felt.  This is
always the case in palsy, when the nerves of sensation
are paralyzed.  Amputation could then be performed
without pain.  Now, excitement will cause the same
insensibility to suffering and pain, if the impression be
sufficiently great to produce it.  This is evident, be.
cause as there is, in the human system, but a certain
amount of feeling, therefore in the same ratio that you
excite one part to sensibility the other parts are so far
robbed. The following anecdote related to me of Henry
Clay will illustrate this.  It is as follows:
A gentleman on the floor in Congress, in his speech,
made a severe personal attack on Henry Clay. Mr. Clay
was, at the time, very much indisposed, and considered
unable to speak. He whispered to the gentleman who sat
text to him, and said, I must answer him, but beg of you




LECTURE XI.                 281
not to let me speak over half an hour. He commenced,
and was soon on wing-soaring, and uniting the language of earth and heaven in his defense till every
period seemed to shake the universe. He was aroused
-was excited-his brain stirred proudly.  His half
hour expired, and the gentleman pulled his coat, but
Clay paid no attention to the signal.  He kicked his
limbs, but it made no impression.  He run a pin several times half its length into the calf of his leg. Clay
heeded it not, spoke two hours, sunk exhausted into his
seat, and upbraided the sentinel for not stopping him!
iHe had felt nothing. Excitement called the electricity
of his system to his brain, and he threw it off by mental effort. In the same degree that sensation was called
to his brain the limbs were robbed.
Dr. Channing, in his sermon on the burning of the
steamboat Lexington, when so many lives were lost,
most eloquently explains this very point. He says:
" We are created with a susceptibility of pain, and
severe pain. This is a part of our nature, as truly as
our susceptibility of enjoyment. God has implanted it,
and has thus opened in the very centre of our being a
fountain of suffering. We carry it within us, and can
no more escape it than we can our power of thought.
We are apt to throw our pains on outward things as
their causes  It is the fire, the sea, the sword, or humar enmity, which gives us pain.  But there is no
pan in the file or the sword, which passes thence in't




32$           ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGfo
our souls. The pain begins and ends in the soul itself,
Outward things are only the occasions. Even the body
has no pain in it, which it infuses into the mind.  Of
itself it is incapable of suffering. This hand may be
cracked, crushed in the rack of the inquisitor, and that
burnt in a slow fire; but in these cases it is not tho
fibres, the blood-vessels, the bones of the hand which
endure pain.  These are merely connected, by the will
of the Creator, with the springs of pain in the soul.
Here, here is the only origin and seat of suffering.  If
God so willed, the gashing of the flesh with a knife,
the piercing of the heart with a dagger, might be the
occasion of exquisite delight.  We know that, in the
heat of battle, a wound is not felt, and that men, dying
for their faith by instruments of torture, have expired
with triumph on their lips.  In these cases, the spring
of suffering in the mind is not touched by the lacerations of the body, in consequence of the absorbing
action of other principles of the soul.  All suffering is
to be traced to the susceptibility, the capacity of pain,
which belongs to our nature, and which the Creator hat
implanted ineradicably within us."
I close by remarking, that as the science of Electrical Psychology is the doctrine of supreme impressiVns,
so you will readily perceive why a sargical operation  m
be perforrmed without pain,




L CTURE XII.                    283
I.ECTURE XII.
[ rhe following Lecture upon the science of G-ENETOLOGrV, which
a as then called NATALOLOGY, was delivered, by request, to the Ladies of Troy, N. Y., in the Morris Place Hall, in February, 1844.
And, as it belongs to the subject of Electrical Psychology and the
great doctrine of impressions that this science involves, it is here
inserted in its appropriate place. The Author has generally delivered it as the last lecture of the course, to his private classes,
when giving them instructions in Electrical Psychology.]
LADIES:
THE purpose for which we are now  assembled is to
take into consideration the science of GENETOLOGY or
HUMAN BEAUTY, as founded upon the doctrine of impresstons. I contend that the human species can be
gradually improved through the harmonious operation
of mental impressions, exercised by the mother, and that
the time will come when they will be born into existence
with just such lineaments of form as we may choose.
This is no idle dream-no infatuation of a disturbed
brain, but sober reality. Human Beauty has been, in
all ages, admired, praised, loved, and desired by the
millions of our race.  Its charms have been sung by
the poet in thoughts that burn; have taxed the finest
ivnceptions of the artist and the sculptor, and hav3




234          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY 
been made to breathe upon the canvas, and to speak
in the marble.  The charms of Beauty have been
dwelt upon, an. painted by the eloquent orator, and
have moved the hearts of all human kind.  All know
and feel the power of Beauty, and ardently covet the
gem.
The  subject now to be considered is, whether,
through the power of the mental impressions of the
mother, her unborn child, during the period from conception to birth, can be moulded into beauty, and born
into existence with those admirable lineaments of form
that so much delight the beholder.  To the candid
consideration of this interesting subject [ new invite
attention.
That the mother can greatly affect her unborn child
is unquestionably true.  No one will deny, that by
some sudden impulse of mind-such as extreme fear
or joy, she has often produced abortion, or else greatly
injured her offspring.  I know of one well-authenticated case, where the mother was extremely terrified
at a young cub when she was about three months en-.
ciente.  It was her twelfth child, and was born -arn
idiot, while her other eleven children were intelligent
and active.  It was a boy.  He lived to fourteen
years of age, and had many actions peculiar to the
bear.  There are instances, too numerous to mention,
where human beings have not only acted like, but even
mesembled, some species of the brute or bird mrae




LECTURE XtI.                235
And as the uniform testimony of mothers is, that they
were frightened during pregnancy by the creature to
which the offspring was likened, so no other satisfactory
cause ever has been assigned for the effect produced.
A wealthy lady, in Boston, was frightened by a parrot. Her daughter, now ten or twelve years of age, is
a mediocre, and her voice and manner of speaking resemble those of this bird.  A lady of my acquaintance, on seeing the head of her cosset lamb suddenly
crushed, brought forth a son, about six months after
this occurrence, whose temples were much pressed in,
and the forehead protruded as did that of the injured
lamb, yet his intellect was not in the least impaired.
A singular circumstance occurred a few years ago in
Bunkum County, N. C.  A girl was there exhibited,
who was born with only one leg and one arm. A lady
who was about two months advanced in her time, had
a strong desire to see this girl.  Her curiosity being
great, she examined the deformed object with long and
unwearied attention.  Her friends had to force her,
as it were, from the exhibition. She went home, but
*he image of the unfortunate girl was but too deeply
impressed upon her mind to be forgotten.  She conversed about it by day, and it was the subject of her
dreams by night.  She at length got an impression
that her child would be born like the object that
haunted her brain.  Her time of delivery came, and




A86          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
her fears were realized.  She brought forth a daugh
ter with only one leg and one arm!
How often it has occurred, where a lady has had a
strong desire, or longing for wine, that she has communicated the color of the liquor by impression to her
child.-  In like manner, through strong mental impressions, she has stamped upon the unborn child a strawberry,.blackberry, grape, or any fruit for which she
had an ardent longing, and made it perfect both as it
regards its color and shape.  Endless instances of this
character can be produced, and also the uniform testimony of the mother that she had a longing desire for
what appears upon the child.  Against this, the arguments and objections of some medical writers and their
adherents are of no weight, as they are evidently entirely ignorant of the electrical philosophy of this subject.  The mental impression, or longing of the mother must, however, far exceed her usual impressions in
order to produce this result upon her offspring.
I am not arguing any new truth, nor the discovery of
any new principle of action, but what has been known from
the earliest of human records. The Bible history admits
the principle even in its application to the brute race.
Laban deceived Jacob by giving to him Leah for a wife
instead of Rachel, for whom he had served him seven
years, by tending his flocks.  He then proposed, that he
should serve him  seven years more for Rachel.  To
pacify Jacob, Laban offered him what he supposed to be




LECTURE XII.                287
a poor chance for wvges.  He told him, that all the
speckled cattle should be his.  But Jacob. resorted to
La plan by which he sufficiently punished the selfish
spirit of Laban.  He put speckled rods at the bottom
of the watering troughs. He kept the male and female
cattle apart. There is no question, that he allowed the
males to have free access to water, but kept the females away till they were very thirsty, even bellowing
and bleating for water.  In this condition he allowed
them to mingle only at the troughs.  And as water is
colorless, nothing but the speckled rods could be seen
by the thirsty and drinking females, and under this
strong impression they conceived. But this is not allJacob understood his subject sufficiently well to go over
the same ground again the next day, and keep up the
female herd till the same great thirst returned. This
would bring to their minds what seemed to them a
speckled fluid, and to those already conceived the impression would continue to deepen.  True, Laban repeatedly changed the wages even up to ten times; but
this was of no avail, because Jacob as often changed
the scene of action by preparing the causes that must
philosophically produce their corresponding results in
the animal economy.  Hence I again assert that I am
not arguing any new principle of action.  I claim no
such discovery, but merely claim  the discovery of its
philosophy, and of having reduced it to a system capa.
ble of improving and ennobling our race.




238          ELECTRTCAI PSYCHOLCIGY.
Such are its facts, and I now turn to its philosophy.
Gold can be dissolved in aqua regia.  A five-doliar
gold piece thrown into this liquid dissolves and soon
disappears, only as the whole liquid assumes the color
of the gold. Let this liquid be properly prepared, and
Sip the ends of the two wires of a galvanic battery into
it. In this liquid you may then immerse any metallic
article you please.  Take, for instance, a silver watchcase with your own name engraved upon it, and many
curiously wrought characters and devices; immerse
this in the liquid, and the positive and negative forces
of galvanic action passing from the battery through
these two wires into the solution will seize the inconceivably fine particles of gold and lay them upon the
watch-case as solid as though they had been melted
there.  You may continue this process until every parsole of the half-eagle shall be placed upon the watchcase, and yet the perfect identity of your name, and
all the marks and characters engraved upon it, will be
retained. This is called galvanizing metals. A second
copper bank-plate can be made from  the original by
galvanism, so that every letter and mark shall be exact,
and the plate be a perfect fac-simile of the original.
Hence we perceive that through the positive and negative forces of galvanism, which is but one form of elec.
tricity, a perfect identity is preserved.
We will now apply this great principle to the argue
nent umder consideration.  The monthly evacuations




-.ECTURE XII.                239
of the female are a universal solvent in which are involved exact proportions of all the constituent elements
of her body.  This redundancy is given her by the
Creator for the propagation of her race.  As soon as
she conceives, the womb closes up, and this same redundant compound of her being is secreted in the
womb, as the fluid in which the foetus is immersed and
swims, and is the raw material out of which its body
is to be manufactured.  And while I am  upon this
point, permit me to remark, that as soon as the'child
is born this same redundant substance is carried through
the lacteal secretions and manufactured into nourishment which the infant draws from  its mother's bosom.
Hence the menses are the prepared substance to produce the child's body in the womb, and to sustain it at
the breast.
Through the galvanic action of the positive and negative forces of her involuntary nerves the foetus is
formed.  These forces seize the elementary particles
of this solution, and convey them  to the conception,
which is the nebulo-centre or nucleus to which' they all
tend, similar to the particles of gold in solution to the
watch-case.  Hence if a woman were to conceive while
wrapped in total darkness, and never see the man by
whom she conceived, nor get the most distant impression of his image, and could she, at the moment of
conception, be consigned to a sleep of profound insensibility till the time of her delivery came, she would




240          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
unquestionably bring forth an offspring exactly in her
own image.  It would be as perfect a fac-simile of her
own organism, form, and features as the second bankplate was of the first from which by galvanic action it
was produced.  But while the galvanic powers of hex
involuntary nerves, through the positive forces, are forming the new being in her own image, the voluntary
nerves, through which the voluntary powers of her
mind act, are also producing their effects by moulding
the new being in the image of the person on whom her
mind is most powerfully placed.  Hence if her selfesteem is great, and she fancies herself superior to her
husband, and has great self-love, and but little regard
for him, she will often consult her mirror, and her child
will most resemble herself notwithstanding the impression of her husband's countenance and the features
of all others around her.
But if she, on the contrary, cherishes a warm and
generous affection to her husband, and if he be far distant from home and exposed to dangers on land or
ocean, her mind goes with him and lingers in imagination upon his image.  The child is born, but it is in
the likeness of its father.  If her love and esteem toward herself and husband are about equally divided
and balanced, the child will be a blended picture of the
two. The opposite passions of hatred and dislike will
produce the same result as it regards form of features
and personal appearance.  Or if the mother shoulid




LECTU E XII.                 241
entertain a very high regard for her minister, doctor,
or any friend, and circumstances should occur to bring
him frequently to her mind, her child would resemble
him.  Suppose her husband should be jealous of any of
these, or of some boarder in the family whom she even
hated, and charge her with conjugal infidelity, she would
be inclined, under such circumstances, to keep her mind
upon him in detestation, fear that her child might resemble him, and when born all her fears would be realized.  Such circumstances have separated many a husband and wife, and broken up many a family when the
wife was virtuous, and her honor unsullied and pure as
the snowflake ere it falls.
In this view of the subject it will be seen that every
countenance upon which the enciente mother gazes, and
every object, whether animate or inanimate, presented
to her view, has a tendency to produce an impression,
either favorable or unfavorable, upon the foetus.  And
as all form, motion, and power belong to, and exist in,
mind, and can be communicated through electric action
from the mother's mind to the foetus, so when beautiful
forms and pleasing sights are presented to her with sufficient power, she transmits them by a mental impression to the embryo being as a part of its future beauty.
So, on the other hand, whlen horrid forms and fearful
sights are presented to her mind with sufficient power,
skd as her mind'iow contains these deformitie  she
It




iXi      ELECTRICAL  IYCHOLOGY.
transmits them also by mental impression to her chilc,
and perchance effects its ruin.
If we contemplate all form, motion, and power as
existing in mind, and if the mind has, indeed, its spiritual arms, hands, and fingers, and limbs, feet, and
toes, and of which the natural ones are only correspond.
ent manifestations, may not, then, the withdrawing of
the. spiritual arm  from action in the mother's mind be
the cause of preventing the natural one in the foetus
from being developed and produced? She deeply contemplates a girl without an arm, and hence sends no
motion from her spiritual arm, and therefore produces
no electric action through the corresponding nerves to
organize the natural arm of the foetus, and hence her
child is born without an arm. The voluntary impression of her mind may be sufficiently great to overpower
all involuntary action in that part.  This would account for the crush of the lamb's head, before stated,
and for all mishaps being transmitted by a deep impression from the mother's mind to the corresponding
part of the foetus.  It would account for the color of
Jacob's cattle, because all colors exist only in the rays
of light which are but a result of electric action.  It
would account rhilosophically for the fact how the color of wine and the colors and shapes of berries are in?  ke manner stamped upon the unborn being.  It would
account for the fact how even the mother's disposition
may be phrenologically and hereditarily communicated




LEUCURE XI.                  243
to her offspring.  By exercising too much her acquisitiveness or secretiveness-or by exciting too deeply her
combativeness, destructiveness, or revengeful feelings,
she may communicate these hereditarily to her child,
and thus sow, in the embryo, the seeds of the future
robber, liar, or even murderer.  The lady, while enceinte, walks upon enchanted ground.  She can not
stir without touching some string that may vibrate
either harmony or discord in her offspring's soul long
after her head shall have been laid in the dust.  Phrenology must take one step farther back.  She must
commence her instructions at the commencement of
our embryo being.  She must there take her stand at
the fountain- head of existence, and thunder her lessons
of eloquence as she moves down the stream of human
life to the silent grave, nor cease her warning voice till
the finger of death shall touch her lip.
The subject, Ladies, of Human Beauty is now fairly
open before us, and its vast importance seems to
awaken in your minds, as we proceed, an increasing
interest.  I am now ready to have the grand question
introduced-How are our children to he born into
existence with just such lineaments of form, or Human
Beauty, as we may desire?
To answer this question understandingly, I will take
into consideration the general directions to be pursued and the means to be used in order to produce
the noblest specimen of Human Beauty.. desire, at




244          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
the very onset, to introduce the subject to you in its
highest perfection, so far as I am able.  To this end
I must select a lady of brilliant talents, and who is
highly educated and accomplished as an ornament of
her sex, but whose features and form are but of ordinary mould.  I merely desire one who is capable of
producing the strongest possible mental impression.
Let this lady select, before she conceives, a portrait,
bust, miniature, or picture of some beautiful, talented,
and distinguished individual, or the living person, she
would desire her child to be like both in appearance
and character.  Let it. be a picture that she greatly
admires for its fine proportions and beauty of person.
Let her keep her mind upon it until she entirely familiarizes herself with its features and form.  Let her
now conceive with this deep impression on her mind;
and after this, let her still continue to gaze upon, and
daily contemplate, the admirable grace of its form, and
the charming expression of its countenance. Let her
place it where it can be readily seen. Let her imbibe
for this image a sentimental passion, indelibly impress it upon the heart, and interweave and blend it,
as it were, with her being. Let her contemplate it by
day with such intense interest and devotion as to
transplant, if possible, its image to her midnight
dreams.  And let her constantly long and desire, and
ardently hope and expect, that her child shall be like




LECTURE XII.                 245
this in form and soul.  These are to be her constant
feelings and impressions till the day of delivery.
In addition to this, let the most admirable order,
arrangement, and comfort pervade her house, and particularly her own apartment.  Let its furniture be
beautiful.  Let it be adorned with pictures of the
most pleasing and delightful landscapes embracing all
the beauties and varieties of nature, and such life-like
scenery as shall awaken and rouse the noblest powers
of her ideality, sublimity, and imagination. Let her
frequently go out to gaze upon, and contemplate nature
as she is, whether on the earth beneath, or in the
starry fields that mantle the bosom  of night.  By
these means she will keep her mind in balance, and
bring it into harmony with all that is grand and beautiful in the works of the Creator.  And not only so,
but let her soul be kept serene. Let her passions not
be excited.  Let her anger, jealousy, and vengeance
remain in slumber, and no language be used to ruffle
her tranquillity. I am speaking of a highly educated,
accomplished, and talented woman.  And, lastly, let
her food be wholesome, plain, and. prepared to her
wishes, and adapted to her appetite. Let these direc.
tions be faithfully observed during her entire period
of gestation, and her child will be moulded in the
image of the picture, or living person she contemplated,
and be born into existence a noble specimen of Iuman
Beauty; and under proper phrenological culture it can




246          ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
be borne on in the path of improvement, and finally
elevated to the highest physical beauty, and intellectual
and moral perfection of our nature.
I have now  considered what I call a perfect case,
the noblest specimen of man.  And in order to produce this happy result, we perceive that the mother
must be highly educated, enlightened, and refined. It
depends more upon her than the father. If the father
should possess the talents of an angel, and the mother
be deficient in intellect, her offspring, particularly the
sons, would never rise above mediocrity.  In such
case the best intellect is in favor of the daughters.
But reverse it, and let the father be deficient, and the
mother highly talented, and she will produce intelligent children of both sexes, but this intelligence will
be far more strongly developed in the sons than in the
daughters.  An instance can not be found where an
imbecile mother ever produced a man of sterling talents, even though the father, as such, were most emi
nently distinguished.  All talented and great men
have had great mothers who, even if they were uneducated, still possessed the elements of original great
ness.
Owing, therefore, to this great diversity of intellec
t.ual, moral, and physical beauty and deformity in
females, it can not be expected, that the grand period
will soon arrive when all these difficulties will be surmounted, and when our race shall attain that physicsal




LECTU E XII.                 247
mental, and moral beauty which our subject involves,
foreshadows, and insures. Compjaratively but few females are as yet qualified to successfully introduce
their offspring into existence in Human Beauty, yet
the most deformed and ignorant female can be instructed and directed how to improve her progeny,
Her children again can be still farther improved and
elevated, and so on to succeeding generations till the
end, we contemplate, shall be obtained, and the highest
hopes, and the brightest mid-day dream of the philanthropist, as to the perfection of humanity, shall be
consummated.
My argument, thus far, relates to those of the female race who are not yet in the electro-psychological
state, but who are still capable of gradually perfecting
their progeny in proportion to the strength and power
of their impressions, and thus moving them onward to
the fair fields of Human Beauty.  But in all these
cases it can be effected by the wife only, independent
of her husband.  But there are many who are naturally in the psychological state, and millions more
who, by a slight exertion, can be brought into it.
Upon all such a mental and moral impression can be
made to any extent we choose. In all these instances
it would be in the power of the husband to select the
portrait or picture in the likeness and beauty of which
he would desire his child to be moulded.  And by producing the impression psychologically upon the mind




248          EI.ECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
of his companion once or twice per day, the end would
be obtained, and in all such cases the finest specimens
of Human Beauty could now be produced.  How im.
portant, then, that the science of Electrical Psychology
should be thoroughly learned and understood by all, so
that, through their assistance, as many as possible
may be, by perseverance, brought into the state, and
that the great work of producing these sublime impressions may now  be understandingly commenced,
and, some rare specimens of Human Beauty, under the
energy of this science, be presented to the world.
We see then, Ladies, the supreme importance of
woman being highly educated and accomplished. Colleges should be dedicated to her, and all the great and
useful sciences, that strengthen, expand, and elevate
the mind, should be laid at her feet. Her mind should
be early imbued with political science, and taught the
value of liberty, and the deep-toned love of country.
She should be taught the history of fallen empires,
kingdoms, and republics, and be made acquainted with
the hardships, toils, and sufferings of our revolutionary
heroes. She should be taught the lofty dignity, honor,
and heroism  of George Washington, the cradled son
of Columbia.  She should be educated in every sense
equal to the man.  It has been generally supposed, in
by-gone days, that if woman could barely read and
write, it was abundant, as she had nothing to do but
attend to her domestic concerns, and to take care of




LECTURE x r.                 249
chilUren.  But the arrest of her progre;s in science
has but proved to be an arrest of the intellectual,
moral, and social advancement of the world.  Her station, so far from being insignificant, is indeed a most
responsible one.  She holds in her silken grasp the
destiny of empires, and the weal and woe of our race.
She has not only a moulding power over her unborn
offspring, but during the first ten years of its existence, as it is almost exclusively confined to her society, so from her it still continues to draw, in a great
measure, its cast of character.  Hence she should be
educated and qualified to breathe to her child the
purest thoughts and noblest principles, and to inspire
its tender bosom with the deep-toned love of country.
She should be qualified to impress upon it a high sense
of honor and true greatness, and the most patriotic
and exalted sentiments.  And, in order to do this successfully, she should be well acquainted with phrenological science and human nature, so as to make her
impressions understandingly and forcibly upon  the
proper organs of the-brain.  These organs would then
be more and more harmoniously developed, and the child
would continue to improve in beauty of person, and in
intellectual and moral greatness, as he advanced to
maturity.
In the light our subject now stands, how lamentablej
end how awful is the consideration, that our children
Ehould be committed to the care of ignorant, degraded




50            RELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
and too often of wicked and unprincipled,ervants, to
be almost exclusively reared by them!  There the
seeds of ignorance, if not of vice, ar( early sown,
How elevated and responsible is the mother's station 
H-ow fatal to the character and welfare of her offspring
are ignorance and vice!  How dreadful, how alarming
and fearful, to see her resign her fond charge, and
commit its destiny, for weal or woe, to such unskilled
hands!  She had better resign her child to the silent
grave, where, even though her lids are filled with
tears, she can yet smile, that its pains are o'er, that
its beating pulse is still, its spirit unstained, and its
burning brow is cold! Yes, Ladies, the contemplation of this subject is so painful, that I choose to leave
you to draw your own conclusions rather than to ex.,
press my thoughts.
True, the pulpit insists on her social and religious
rights, because this is popular.  But by neglecting to
plead in behalf of her civil, her POLITICAL, and INTELLECTUAL RIGHTS it has forgotten her elevated station and high destiny, fallen from heaven to earth, and,
by its fall, crushed the dearest hopes of the philanthropist for the speedy, intellectual, and moral advancement of our race.  It will not, and dare not speak in
a bold, firm, and untrembling voice in defense of tbhse
rising sciences and improvements of the age, however
useful, against which the current of popular opinion
gtrmgly sets.  It has ceased to breathe the pure,




LECTURaE XlT.                 251
healthful, and invigorating breezes of Paradise, that
inspire an independent and godlike heroism.  Woman
is thus, in a voice of pretended mercy, oppressed, and
it dare not even rebuke oppression and crime, -when
clothed in gold and sustained by popular impulse.
The pulpit is the great engine of moral power and
moral reform.  But by neglecting the science of tIu.
man Beauty, and the general and extensive education
of woman, its energies are in a great degree paralyzed.  But it is destined, by the decree of the Ruling
Heavens, to be aroused from its dreadful slumberings
upon the monster POPULARITY, whose breath is consuming it, and to thunder its energizing and regenerating powers for the accomplishment of this great end
which involves the moral elevation and the intellectual
grandeur of man.  The science of GENETOLOGY, embracing the doctrine of psychological impressions, in
connection with the gospel of Jesus Christ, is destined
to renovate the world and usher in the millennial
morn.  Extensive combinations are formed, and the:host untiring exertions are constantly made to improve,
not only the animal, but even the vegetable race.
Fruits and grains, in a few years, have been brought
to great perfection, by man simply co-operating with
nature so as to enable her to make the most favorable impressions to produce what is beautiful in her vegetable
department.  So also in the animal kingdom.  Horses,
sheep, and oxen, and even the race of swine, are annu



252            ELECTRICAL PSYCHOLOGY.
ally improviin form  and beauty, and premiums are
offered for the finest specimens, both as to s)mmetry
and size.  But not a single thought is bestowed as to
improving and beautifying the godlike lineaments of
the human form.  To improve these through the educating of woman, and enlightening her how to make a
psychological impression upon her embryo-child, is but
to improve the morals of our race.  The theme is a
great one, and it will require future generations to
move it on, and to develop and present it perfect to
the world.  It will be the scroll of Human Beat'
arnmiled.  This is indeed a sublime hope.'; Eternal hope! when yonder spheres sublime
Peal'd their first notes to sound the march of time,
Thy joyous birth began; but not to fade
When all the sister planets have decayed.
When wrapt in fire, the realms of ether glow,
And heaven's last thunder shakes the earth belo,
Thou, undismayed, shalt o'er the ruin smile,
And light thy torch at nature's funeral pile.'




SIX LECTURES
ON Thft
PHILOSOPHY OF MESMERISM.
DELIVERED IN THI
BA JOHN BOVEE DODSo. P 0 R TE D B Y A HI EA R EZ
TWE LFTH THOUSAND.
NEW  YORK:
PUBLISHED BY SAMUEL R. WELLS,
No. 389 BROADWAY.
1 974.




Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1873, by'SAMUEL R. WELLS,
In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, D. 0C




ADVERTISEMENT
TO THE IMPROVED AND STEREOTYPED EDITION.
WITHIN ONE MONTH after these highly popular
lectures were first delivered, an edition of TI12RE.
THOUSAND COPIES was published and sold, and a
second edition called for, which has also been
exhausted, and the demand is still increasing.*
Under these circumstances the author was pre..
vailed on to REVISE, ENLARGE, and so IMPROV1t
the work as to render it, if possible, even much
more desirable.
The MERITS of the work may be inferred from
this fact: an audience of OVER TWO THOUSAND
PEOPLE, composed of the most intelligent citizens
of New England, was held six evenings in succession, chained in the most profound silence,
listening to these truly philosophical lectures, and
* This work has recently been re-published in England, and has,een favorably received by the most scientific men of Europe.




iV               ADVER' SEMENT.
witnessing sutgical operations without pain; and
other experiments, at once convincing, and fall
of great practical utility to every human being.
The author, Dr. Dods, is a man of extensive
experience and general information.  He first
qualified himself for the medical profession, then
engaged in the study of theology, and has been
in the ministry for more than twenty years, and
is favorably known as a lecturer on many of the
natural sciences.




C0 ONTENTS
LECTURE I.
NlIMAL MA.GNETIheM, INTRODUCTORY LECTURE  ON.... page 7-11
Invitation by Members of the Legislature to lecture on the Science of Animal Magnetism-Wresting the Science from the hands of ignorant and designing Individuals-Skepticism-The cry of Humbug and Collusion supplies the place of sound
prif-n evpt_-~.liloo  HP'-yvv  Fl1tan —Th T. Sviec(e of Pluenology-Truth can
never die-Denouncing before investigation-Aesmnerism embraced by men whose
names will live always-Animal Magnetism an inappropriate Name-Mind, and
its powers-The Law of Equilibrium-The Eatrth not Elternall-Mountains-Water-Experiments-Electrical Science-Causes of Thunder and Lightning-The
Nervo-vital Fluid passing from  one Body to anothel —The Nervous SystemBlood —Brain —Insensibility-Who can and who ought to be Mesmerized-Physica. b'ergy-. rr'ce fKs (' Magnetizing.
LECTURE II.
iENTAL ELECTRICITY, OR SPIRITUALISM........... 18-2
The Why and Wherefore of Mesmerism-Experimnent-Fact —Physical, Iental, and
Moral Power-A Lesser Powermay Mesmerize a Greater Power-Galvanic Battery-Coloring of the Blood-Voluntary and Involuntary Mlotion-Power of the
Will-Execution of Criminals-Experiments on the Body after death-Tho
Corpse made to move-Attraction and Repulsion-Insanity-Time requisite to
produce Insensibility-A Child can Mesmerize its Father-Importance of'eing
Mesmerized.
LECTURE III.
AN A'PPEAL 1N BEHALF OI  THE SCIENCE........            50.-1i
The lower of the Creator-The Origin of Matter-John Milton-The World not
creaturi out of Nothin —The Eternal Existence of Electricity-Spirit and MIatter
—'Te Gradual Creation of Plants-The Sun pure Electricity-Worlds Electrically
and Magnrttically suspended-Experiments with the Electrifying Machine-Tho
Mag'iet-The Beauty, Order, and Harmony of all the Laws if Nature.




G                               CONTENTS.
LECTURE IV.
THE PHILOSOPHY OF CLAIRVOYANCE                                           44..,....  -58
Mind-Motion-The Brain-The Expansion and Contraction c.f Sodies,y Heat
and Cold-Vision without the Natural Orga-ns-Somnambulism-lrramingCatalepsy- Dr. Pattevson-Well-authenticated facts-An Appeal to Medical Gen.
tlemen-Great Feats Io Climbing and Walking on House-tops in the Dark while
in a State of Unconsciousness-Painting in the Dark-A Remarkable Fact-Seeing,
Hearing, Tasting, and Smelling-The Transparency of Objects-Ma getic or Galvanic Light-Distinguished Clairvoyants in the United States-Additional Experiments-Philosophy of Hearing-Amputated Limb-Hon. T. G. Greenwood
-,-A Fact
LECTURE V.'RE NUMBER OF DEGREES IN MESMERISM..........                            60-71
The First Degree-Attraction by the Magnetizer-Second Degree-Third DegreeFourth Degree-Fifth Degree  Clairvoyance-Communication-ExperimentWhy is not Magnetism  more generally understood-Objections answeredDemosthenes-Cicero-The Methodists-Muscular Power-Concentrstion-Th;
Dangers and Abuse of Mesmerism-Every blessing abused-Crime-Causes —
Magnetizing a part, and not the whole body-A Surgical Operation-A Broken
Arm-A Tumor extracted without Pain-Rev. John Pierpont testifies publicly to
tee Truth and Utility of Mesmerisml-The Wonderful Power to Charm all Pain.
LECTURE VIo'UR SAVIOUR AND THE APOSTLES.............  7The right to think for ourselves-Restrictions-The Command of Christ to his
Apostles to Heal the Sick. as well as to Preach-Miracles-Palsied Arm —The
Saviorr and the Woman-The Apostolic Power- John the Retveiator-Tranpfgure.ion-Moses and Elias-The (Crciflxioa:f C.ris —His desurrection, ts:-a
-Dr Chasming en Dying without Ptn.




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.
LECTURE I.
LADIES AND GENTLEMEN: It is with much pleasu;re
that I present myself before you this evening, to lecture
upon the science of Animal Magnetism. I do this by
special invitation from several distinguished members
of both branches of our legislature, now in session in
this city; and this thronged congregation of more than
two thousand hearers speak the interest which is awakened in the bosoms of our citizens in relation to this
subject. This dense and anxious crowd too plainly
manifest the high expectations which are entertained
of the feeble abilities of the speaker to do it justiceexpectations which I am fully sensible I shall be unable
to answer. Leaning, however, upon the solid grandeur
of truth, and believing THAT to be stirring eloquence
and living power, I have, therefore, even as things now
are, with all your roused expectations crowding upon
me, but little to hazard, for I am fully sensible that I
am standing before a learned and an intelligent congregation. And when I inform  you that I have never
written: any thing upon this subject, and am, therefore,
obliged to speak from the fortuitous suggestions of the




8                   LECTURES ON
moment, I am'onscious that you will do me justice,
by making every reasonable tllowance.
It is not my profession to lecture upon this subject.
I have other means for my subsistence, and for that
of those who depend upon me. Circumstances have
called me into the field. Many, very many ignorant
individuals, who know nothing of the human system,
nor of the common principles of any science, have gone
into the field as lecturers on Animal Magnetism, and
by making it a mere puppet-show, have brought it into
degradation in the public mind. Such persons are
doing the cause, which is one of benevolence and mercy,
an irreparable injury. They had better qualify themselves for the work, or else retire from  the field. In
this state of things, I was urged, by several scientific
gentlemen, to step forward in defence of the cause of
righteousness and truth, and to lend my aid in raising
it from the dust, in wiping off the sneers of men, and in
placing it on a foundation where it should command not
only the attention, but the respect and admiration which
are justly due to it from men of science and talents
In this city, I find but one noble spirit laboring and
toiling, who is well qualified for the work, and who is
deserving a better patronage than he receives.* As
these are the circumstances under which I have entered the field, so, of course, I vis't those places only
where I am invited to lecture upon this science.
I have had the subject of Mesmerism under consideration foi about seven years, reading all that came in
my way fior and against it. Five cf these years I rewained  a stubborn, a most confirmed  sceptic, and
* Dr Gilbert.




NI MAL MAGNRTISMI.                9."efusod even to attend a lecture, or to witness an ex,
periment, until I was persuade I by a particular friend
of nine to accompany him, and see and hear for myself.
I am, therefore, prepared to make aq1 due allowance for
honest sceptics; and, in their opposition to me during
this course of lectures, I shall maintain an entire empire over my feelings; and being fully sensible of
their condition, I well know how to sympathize with
them. But there is yet another class of sceptics, who
have witnessed experiments which they cannot resist
and still cry, "HUMBUG AND  COLLUSION!"  Of these,
there are two kinds. First, those who never investigate anything for themselves, and who do not know
the definitions of the words, "humbug and collusion;"
but who, nevertheless, use them very freely, because.hey have heard their minister, their doctor, or, perchance, their schoolmaster, use them. They do it by
imitation, on the same principle that the parrot imitates
the sound of the human voice, and they do it just about
as understandingly.  Second, those who are talented
and desire to keep on the wings of the popular breeze,
and catch the breath of fame. These may be known by
the ridicule, wit, and sarcasm they employ, through the
press and otherwise. But, "humbug and collusion" have
become stereotyped words, and their use costs but little
labor; and they answer most admirably to supply the
place of sound argument and common sense in the most
of minds. If my hearers will please turn their attention to all the talented writers, who' have, in various
ages, vehemently opposed those now well-established
sciences which, in their infancy, appeared incredible
and who assailed them with the bitterest invective and
sarcasm, hey will learn that they were men who were




10                  LECTURES ON
always studying what was popular, and who had a
large share of self-esteem, and of the love of approbation. This test will hold good from the opposers of the
earth's revolution on its axis, discovered by Galileo;
from the scoffers at the science of the circulation of the
human blood, discovered by Harvey, step by step,
down to the scoffers at Fulton's application of steampower,-yes, even down to the opposers of, and scoffers
at, the brilliant science of Phrenology, which is now
spreading with a power that can never be successfully
resisted, a zeal that cannot be quenched, and a living energy that can never die. True, a candid man, as
well as any other, may doubt a new science; yet, however strange or incomprehensible it may appear, he will
not denounce till he has given the subject a candid investigation. I am speaking of those only who denounce
without investigation, and who can assign no other
reason for so doing, but their own willing ignorance,
or because the popular voice is against it.
I am, however, proud in the reflection that the science
of Mesmerism is embraced by men of the first talents
and science in both continents, and whose names will
live in the republic of letters, and shine with lustre long
after those of fawning sycophants shall have been lost
in unremembered nothingness.  It is embraced here
among us by a Pierpont, the Fowlers, a Gilbert, a Neal,
and a Wayland.  It is embraced by men who have
forgotten more than those who cry " humbug and collusion" ever knew.
I have been ir. the field as an occasional lecturer ever
since October, 1841, and have uniformly advocated the
same plin iples which I am now about to advance and
sustain in the course'f lectures I am pledged to deliver




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                 11
n this city. This fact, many now present well know
who have heard me in other sections, or who have
seen the substance of what I have now to offer on
Mesmerism, reported by the editor of the Yarmoutht)ort Register, in March, 1842. I shall here contend
for the same principles, and endeavor to sustain them
by fair experiments, in electricity, galvanism, and common magnetism.
There is one apology, however, to be offered in favor
of honest sceptics. It is this: Those who have lectured
upon  Mesmerism  have not pretended to give any
cause for the wonderful phenomena produced-have
held them in mystery, and perhaps pronounced them
inscrutable to the human intellect.  Hence, it is not
strange that thousands, under such  an  impression
slould refuse to investigate a subject which its advocates held in mystery.  That there are mysteries in
Mesmerism I readily admit; but that there are more
than in any other science, I deny.  We may, for instance, tell the chemical properties of earth, water, and
air, and the degree of warmth necessary to produce
vegetation. But still no one can solve the mystery
how an acorn becomes an oak, or a seed becomes a
plant. There is no science in the universe, but what has
some incomprehensibilities resting upon its face; but
this circumstance is considered no objection to the truth
of any science. Hence there is no reason why Mesmerism should be rejected on this ground. Yet thousands do reject it, because they contend that it is
ihcolnprehensibly strange! They know  nothing but
what is strange, and yet what is strange they cannot
believe! All the operations of nature going on around
us are strange, and the only reason we have ceased to




12         i       LECTURES ON
wonder is, because they are common. Ahi such ob.
iections are therefore futile.
Before I proceed any further, I would remark that I
consider "ANIMAL MAGNETISM" a very inappropriate
name. It should be called SPIRITUALISM, or MENTAL
ELECTRICITY, because it is the direct impulse of mind
upon the minds and bodies of others. As it is the science
of MIND AND ITS POWERS, SO it is the highest and most
sublime science in the whole realms of nature, and as
far transcends all others as godlike mind transcends
matter.
Having made these introductory remarks, I now
proceed more directly to the consideration of the subject before me. In presenting before you "the war
and the WHEREFORE" of these interesting phenomena,
and, in order to make them plain to the humblest capacity, it will be necessary to associate the subject with
other principles in philosophy which are well understood by all, and thus rise from the consideration of the
more gross and dense particles of matter, step by step,
up to those which are the most rarified and subtil of
which we can form any conception. In doing this, I
shall not take into consideration every possible grade
or species of matter, but those substances only which
belong to the great classifications of nature's empire,
and which are the most obvious to every observer.
In the first place, then, I contend that there is but
one common LAW pervading the whole universe of God,
which is the law of EQUILIBRIUM. In perfect accordance with this law there is kept up a constant ACTION
and REACTION throughout every department of nature.
It is true there has been much written, anrj still more
said, about the multiplicity and variety  f the laws of




ANIMAL MAGNETlSM.                 13
ture   But this is, at least to me, wholly unintelligible.
While, however, I contend for but one COMMCN LAW, it
is still conceded that this law is so varied as to be
perfectly adapted to all the variety of substances in
being.  On this principle the earth is certainly not
eternal, for were it so, the hills and mountains would
long ago have been washed to a level by the storms of
heaven; yes, it would have been done by the gentle
descending dews. Indeed, I hazard nothing in saying,
tIat even the mountains of solid granite would have
been crumbled into atoms ages ago, by the very opera.
tion of the particles of air —" the fingers of Time;"
because every thing in nature is tending to an equilibrium.
Having begun at the grossest particles of matter, let
us now rise gradually in our contemplations, step by
step, up to those that are the most rarified and subtil of
which we can form any conception.  WATER is a body
lighter than earth.  Let a canal be dug of one hundred
feet in depth, one hundred in width, and a thousand
feet in length. Let a strong lock be constructed across
its centre, and one half filled with water. Let the gate
be hoisted, and the water in the one division will fall,
and in the other rise, until an equilibrium of height is
attained.  Nature, having gained  a.r end, is then at
rest. And the action of this element will be great in
proportion as it was thrown out of balance.  The
rush wil. be at firsf tremendous, but continue gradually to lessen until it finds its perfect slumber in equal
i i elht
The same is true in relation to our atmosphere, a suL.
stance lighter than water. The air in this room is now
arified by I-eat, and is thus thrown out of balance with
2




I  LLE JTURES ON
the circumambient air which is more cold and dense
Hence, through every key-hole and crevice there is a
rush of this element into the room, which will continue
until the equilibrium  of density is attained.  Then, andl
not before, nature, having gained her end, will be at
rest.  The air in ons section of the globe is more rarified by heat than in another; and hence the gentle
zephyrs of heaven are continually fanning the human
brow with a touch'of delight, and carrying health to
human habitations.  If this element be thrown still
farther out of balance, we witness the stirring gale;
and if carried, in this respect, to its extreme, we witness the sweeping hurricane, or the roaring tornado,
which prostrates human habitations in its mighty course,
and bows the mountain forest to the earth.
The same is true in relation to electricity, a substance
more rarified and light than air.'If two clouds are
equally charged with this subtil fluid, they may pass
and repass each other, or mingle into one, yet not a
flash of lightning will be seen. But if they are unequally charged, or what is called in electrical science,
"positively and negatively charged," then the heavens
will stream with forked lightning, till both clouds are
equally charged. By long drought and heat, electricity
becomes very unequally diffused throughout the atmosphere.  One portion of air contains a much greater
quantity than another, and when thus thrown out of
balance to a certain extreme, nature can hold out no
longer.  A  reaction must take place.  Convolving
clouds roll the heavens in darkness-the lightnings
flash, the thunders roll, and the war of eltements continues unti. the electric fluid is equally diffused through.
out the atmosphe re, and also equalized with the eaxth,




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                1
Nature, having thus gained her end in he equilibrium
produced, is at rest-all is calrn.
If we pass on from inert matter to animated nature,
we shall find that the same law there also holds its empire. If, for instance, a healthy child, three or four
years of age, be permitted to sleep every night for a
year or two between two very old, decrepit grandparents,
it will pine away, and if not removed, perchance it may
die. There is, perhaps, not one under the sound of my
voice, but what has heard the remark, that "it is very
unnealthy for young children to sleep with very old, infirm people."  It is even so, and parents should beware.
The child is full of animal life, and its nervous system
is charged with' the vital fluid, secreted by the brain.
This gives that suppleness to the limbs, and that buoyancy to the heart which we witness in the young. The
grandparents lack the proper quantity of this nervovital fluid, which occasions that rigidity of the limbs
we witness in the aged. The same common law of
equilibrium that pervades the universe, is here also in
operation. The nervo-vital fluid passes from this child
to the two aged persons in conjunction.  The child
loses, and they continue to revive, and as this little one
can never bring those infirm persons up to an equilibrium with itself, so it must go down to them. Nature
will have her equilibrium, if she has it in death.
Once more: there is in the nervous system no blood.
By the NERVOUS SYSTEM I mean the brain and all its
rarlifications.  The blood belongs exclusively to the
circulating system, which embraces the veins and arteries. I grant that the blood-vessels pass round tile
convolutions of the brain, but in the nerve iiself there is
11o blood, and the whole mass of brain is but a congeries




16                  IECTURES ON
of nerves.  These a e charged with a nervo-vitai fluid
which is manufactured from  electricity.  Hence, the
circulating system containing the blood, and the nervous
system containing the magnetic fluid, are not to be
blended, but distinctly considered.  Now, as a human
being may lack the proper quantity of blood in his circulating system, so he may lack the proper quantum of
the nervo-vital fluid in his nervous system.  This is
certainly rational.  And, moreover, it may be easily
known when such is the case.  When we see persons
who, on hearing suddenly some good or bad news,
are thrown into great excitement, tremor, and agitation,
we may be certain that their nervous systems lack the
due measure of the nervo-vital fluid.'Now let a person
whose brain is fully charged, come in contact with one
whose brain is greatly wanting in its due measure of
this fluid, and let the person possessing the full brain
gently and unchangeably hold his mind upon the other,
and by the action of the WILL, the fluid will pass from
the full brain to the other, until the equilibrium between
the fluids in the two brains is attained.  The sudden
change in the receiving brain produces a coolness and a
singular state of insensibility. This is MAGNETISM; and
it is in perfect accordance with all the principles of
philosophy in the known realms of nature.  If any one
denies the operation of the law of equilibrium in this case,
then he here makes a chasm, amidst the immensity of
God's works, which he can nowhere else discover
I have clearly shown him that, from the grossest matter
in the universe, step by step, through every grade, up to
electricity, the same law holds its empire, and lmatter is
continually equalizing itself with matter.
On this principle, it will be readily perceived that, if




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                1I
a person.ias a great deficiency of the nervo-vital fluid,
he can be mesmerized the first sitting, and probably in
an hour's time, or a much less period.  These we call
easy subjects.  But if the deficiency be less, it will take
a longer period in proportion, and if the brain have
nearly its proper quantity of fluid, then the* effect produced, at the first sitting, will be small, yet still it
will be visible.
From the premises laid down, and in accordance with
the law of equilibrium, it will probably be said, that only
few persons can be mesmerized.  This, however, is not
correct. I contend that every person in existence CAN
be, and indeed OUGHT to be thrown into the mesmeric
state. This, I am well aware, is contrary to the opinion
of the advocates of this science. The most liberal calculation I have as yet heard, is that about one in nine of
the human family can be mesmerized.  But every one
can be, and that, too, in perfect accordance with the
principles laid down. Let two persons of equal brains,
both in size and fluid, sit down. Let one of these individuals remain perfectly passive, and let the other exercise his mental and physical energies according to the
true principles of mesmerizing, and he will displace
some of the nervo-vital fluid from the passive brain and
deposit his own in its stead. The next day let them sit
another hour, and so on, day after day, until the acting
brain shall have displaced the major part of the nervovita fluid from the passive brain and filled up that space
with his own nervous force, and the person will yield to
ie mIagnetic power, and sweetly slumber in its inexyTre.
sibl] quietude.




LECTUREE  11
LArlES AND GENTLEMEN: On the last evening, 1;iaa
lte pleasure to deliver before you my introductory lee
ture on the science of SPIRITUALISM, and to explain
"the wHY and the WHEREFORE" of the effect produced
I clearly showed that Mesmerism  was in perfect ac
cordance with the universal law of nature, which I ca'.
the law of Equilibrium; and, as I, in concluding my lecture, contended that every person in the world could
oe mesmerized, some, as I suspected would be the case,
nave to-day argued that, according to the principle laid
down by the speaker, two brains of equal power can no
more mesmerize each other, than one of a less power
can mesmerize a greater; and hence, that the argu
ments of the lecturer are contradictory and irreconcila,
ble. But this objection is by no means valid: It is
readily conceded  that two  brains equally full and
healthy cannot affect each other, admitting both persons
to be equal in muscular eretrgv, and to make at the same
time the same mental and physical effort. But, if one
person sit down and passively resign himself, and another even of less power and less nerve-vital fluid exert
al his energies, then the law of equilibrium  requires
that t.iere shall be an effect produced in the PASSIVE
object equal to all the power exerted by the ACTIVE
agent.  Hence, a weaker person can mesmerize one of
superior power. and the same persons mav alternately




ANIMAL MAGNET jM.                19
throw each other into the mesmeric state. I i. ave
known the instance where a small girl, only nine years
of age, mesmeiized a young man twenty years old, and
of uncommon strength.  Though it is a well known
law, that two bodies of water will seek a level when a
communication is made between them, yet it is equally
true that, by a pump, water may be thrown from a
lower to a higher cistern; and who will deny that it is
in perfect accordance with the law  of equilibrium?
Surely, no one. It is by physical energy that the air is
removed from  the pump, and the circumambient air
pressing upon the water in the cistern, causes it to rise
ti11 an equilibrium of height is attained-exactly equal
to all the powers employed.  But so far as the mesmeric state is concerned, it will be remembered, that
man, in acting on his fellow-man, exerts not only a
PHYSICAL, but a MENTAL, and MORAL power.  These
must all be taken into consideration, and duly weighed,
in order to form a correct idea of the law of equilibrium in the employment of the magnetic forces. If this
common law in nature extended no farther than merely
to bring substances that are out of balance down to a
common level, then all action in the various elements
would soon cease.
It will be remembered that no one kindred element ever
disturbs itself, or ever throws itself out of balance. It
requires another element to do this. The water would
always keep on a perfect level with itself, throughout
lie globe, if air and heat never disturbed it. By heat
it is rarified into vapors, carried over the globe in
aerial conductors, condensed by cold into drops, and
rained upon the mountains and more elevated portions
of the g'obe, and tl'en again seeks its level with the




20                  LE CTURE, ON
parent ocean.  So there is a power that rarities the air
and the denser po:tions rush to its aid, and the winds
are in action to keep up a perfect balance in its own
empire, while air, abstractly, could never disturb itself.
Hience it is even the law of equilibrium  by which one
porticn of water is thrown out of balance with itself;
and the same is also true in relation to the atmosphere.
If heat, which is but the action of electricity, rarifies the
water so as to cause it in subtility to approximate itself,
then surely it is according to the law of equilibrium
that water is thrown out of balance with itself by forcing it into a partial equ'librium with some more rarifiee
substance.  Carrying out this principle, and applying it
to Mesmerism, it will be readily understood not only
how two persons of equal power may mesmerize each
other, but even how one of less physical power may
mesmerize a greater, and yet the whole be effected in
perfect accordance with the law of equilibrium.
Having made these remarks, which the occasion
seems to demand, I will now proceed to a direct consideration of the nervo-vital fluid in the human brain.
It is admitted, that the air we breathe is composed of
two substances, namely, OXYGEN and NITROGEN.  Their
relative qualities are about one-fifth oxygen and fourfifths nitrogen. But these are not all. It is evident,.hat hydrogen and electricity are also component parts
of air. Oxygen and electricity are the principles of
flame and of animal life. while nitrogen extinguishes
both.,There is not a single square inch of air but what
contains more or less electricity.  The air in its compound state is drawn into the lungs. The oxygen and
electricity are communicated to the blood, which is
charged w'th iron, while the nitrogen is disengaged




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                21
and expired. This iron, which gives color to tLe blood
is instantly rendered magnetic under the influence of
electricity, analogous to the needles in the galvanic bat.
tery which become magnets merely by induction. The
blood itself is, at the same time, oxydized by the oxygen
of the air, and instantly becomes cherry red.  This.xygen generates an acidity in the blood, in some degree answering to the solution of the sulphate of copper
in the galvanic battery   The biood, thus magnetically
prepared at the lungs, is thrown upon the heart, aid
forced into the arteries.  Hence, arterial blood is red.
It is propelled to the extremities, driven into every possible ramification, and is collected and carried back in
the veins, through the other ventricle of the heart, to
the lungs, for a fresh supply of the electro-magnetic
power.  Hence, venous blood is dark, and is unfit to
be thrown into the arterial system a second time till it
has again come in contact with the oxygen and electricity of the air.  The blood, thus discharged, is propelled through its living channels, and this friction
causes the electro-magnetic power to escape from the
circulating system into the nervous system, for which
it has a strong affinity, and, being secreted by the brain,
it becomes the nerve-vital fluid, or animal galvanism.
It is important here to remark, that the blood, in its
friction through the arteries, has given off its electromagnetic power into the nervous system.  The blood,
thus freed, assumes a dark appearance in the veins, and
becomes entirely NEGATIVE. The lungs, oeing charged
with a fresh supply of electricity, become POSITIVE.
Hence the blood is drawn from the veins to the lungs
on the same principle that the negative and the positive
ir electricity rush together.




92B^  ~        LECTURES ON
From  the altove observations, it will be jerceived
that every muscle of the human body, every organ and
gland, is polar, and by the negative and positive prinm
ciples, as above noticed, animal life is sustained and
perpetuated through the action of the lungs and blood.
We thus perceive that the nervo-vital fluid is manufactured out of electricity, taken into the lungs at every
inspiration.  It completely charges the whole brain.
when that organ is in a healthy state. The nerves
composing the brain, are of three kinds, namely: the
nerves of sensation, the nerves of VOLUNTARY motion,
and the nerves of INVOLUNTARY motion.  I make these
three divisions, so that I may be the more readily understood when speaking of nervous action.  I desire you
to bear in mind that these three classes of nerves are
all charged with the nervo-vital fluid, which is exactly
prepared to come in contact with mind.
We put forth a WILL. That WILL stirs the nervovital fluid in the voluntary nerves. This fluid causes
the voluntary nerves to vibrate. The galvanic vibration of these nerves contracts the muscles.  The muscles, contracting, raise the arm, and that arm raises
foreign matter. So we perceive that it is through this
concatenation, or chain, that the mind comes in contact
with the grossest matter in the universe.
It is evident that there is no direct contact between
mind and gross matter.  There is no direct contact
between the length of a thought and the breadth of thlit
door. Nor is there any more direct contact between
my mind and hand, than there is betweer my min i an.d
the stage upon which I stand.  Thought cannot touch
my hand; yet it must be true th t mind can come
mi contact with lnatter; otlhc  wise, I could not raise m



ANIMA  MAGN ETISM.               23
hand at all by the energies of my will.  Hence, it must
be true, that the highest and most subtil of inert mattei in the universe, being the next step to spirit, can
cotle  in  contact with the mind.  And  electricity,
changed into nervo-vital fluid, (which is living galvanism,) is certainly the highest and most etherial inert
substance of which we can  form  any conception.
Hence, as before remarked, it must be true, that we
put forth a will. By the energies of that will this galvanic substance, or nervous fluid, is proudly stirred;
that stirring vibrates the nerves; this vibrates and
(contracts the muscles; the muscles raise the arm, and
that arm moves dead matter.
Notwithstanding the plausibility of this argument, it
will yet be said that, as physiologists contend that no
one can explain through what medium the mind comes
in cotact with matter, nor even how a muscle is made
to contract, and raise the arm, and as the lecturer has
undertaken to explain it, we have a right to demand
POSITIVE proof.  This demand being rational, I will endeavor to meet it.- I am, then, to prove that the nervovital fluid, (which is perfect galvanism,) is indeed the
agent by which we contract the muscles and raise the
arm.  That being done, my point is gained, and the
medium  through which mind comes in contact with
matter is established.
I would first remark, that it is common when criminals are executed, that their bodies are delivered over
to medical men for dissection.  Now  take a human
body, and let it be conveyed from the gallows to the'h.arnel-house, and laid upon the dissecting-table. Let a
continuous shock from  a strong g.lvanic battery be
given, and the muscles of the dead nan will contract,




24                   IECTURES C N
and exhibit many frightful contort ons.  Many interest
ing experiments of this character have been published
The dead man has been known to spring upon his knees
jolt them  upon the floor, make violent gesticulations
with his hands, move his head, roll his eyes, and chatter
his teeth. The student, unused to such ghastly exhibi.
tions, has left the room, or fainted away; and even the
experienced physician has started back with horror at
the fiightful contortions which he himself had made.
Now, what was it that contracted the muscles of this
dead man?  There is but one answer to the question.
It was galvanism.  And what is galvanism, but electricity in a changed form; so that, instead of giving the
system  a sudden shock, like electricity, it merely produces a singular vibrating sensation upon the nerves,
which causes the muscles to contract?  It is nothing
else. Electricity, galvanism, magnetism, or attraction
and repulsion, are but different dispositions of the same
common fluid.  Now, as galvanism contracts the muscles of a dead man, and is the only power known that,
when artificially applied, can contract the muscles of
the living, so it must be the agent employed by the will
to contract the muscles, and enable us to perform  all
the voluntary motions of life.  Whatever may be the
opinions of others, I consider this argument irresistible,
and shall hold it as such, until it be fairly refuted.
It must now appear plain to every candid mind, that
by the action of the will, and the exercise of all the mental powers, the nervo-vital fluid, this living galvanism,
is continually thrown off from the voluntary nerves, and
through the respiratory organs is again supplied. There.s still, however, a greater waste.  The involuntary
serves throw off another large portion through the action




ANIMAL MAGNETISM                  25
of the heart and lungs, and the digestive apparatus.
And the nexves of sensation, also. do their part in throwing off: this fluid.  Let me here particularize.  The
nerves of sensation are those by which feeling is colnveyed to the mind.  The voluntary nerves are those
through which the mind gives motion to those parts of
the body that are under the control of the will. The
involuntar) nerves are those that give motion to such
parts of our system as are not under the control of the
will. None but the involuntary nerves pass to the heart,
stomach, and liver. So the heart will throb, the stomach
digest its food, and the liver secrete its gall, when we
are awake or asleep, whether we will it or not.  But to
the lungs go both the voluntary and involuntary nerves.
The involuntary ones are, however, the most numerous,
so that though a man may hold his breath and keep the
lungs in suspension till he ifints, yet the involuntary
nerves will get the mastery, and restore him.  Through
these three sets of nerves the galvanic fluid is contin vally wasting and passing from the whole system.
That I am correct, as to the nature of this nervous
fluid, is certain. Take an animal, and tie off the involuntary nerves that lead to the stomach, and digestion
will instantly cease. Then pour a moderate current of
galvanism from the battery into the stomach, and digestion will immediately commence.  Hence, I have clearly
proved that the nervv-vital fluid, secreted by the brain,
is of a galvanic nat. re, and is manufactured from electricity which we breathe into the lungs every inspirutiioi we take. And I have, moreover, proved that this
electro-magnetic power is the only matter that can come
n contact with mind, and is the only agent by which
the will contuacts the muscles.  Hence, the conclusion




26                   LECTURES ON
is absolutely unavoidable, that, by the c.oncentration of
the mind upon an individual, and by the action of the
will, this fluid can be thrown upon another person till
his nervous system  is fully charged.  This is Mesmer
isin.
IHaving these important facts before us, we perceive
that the subject is. one of momentous interest.  The nervous system, embracing the brain and all its ramifications, when once diseased, seems to baffle all medical aid
and skill. Hence, those upon whom fits of derangement
are permanently settled, are abandoned as hopeless; and
of both of these states, we are all more or less in danger.
Those persons, particularly, who, on hearing the least
good or bad news, are thrown into tremor and agitation,
are in danger. Their brains lack the proper quantity
of the nervo-vital fluid.  It will be remembered that in
the nerves of the brain there is no blood. The blood is
exclusively confined to the veins and arteries, while the
nerves are charged with this nervo-vital fluid-a galvanic
substance.  Now if the veins and arteries are filled with
blood, and if the nerves are fully charged with the galvanic fluid; in one word, if the circulating system anthe nervous system are in perfect balance, health an
firmness are the result.  But if the circulating systel,
lack its proper quantity of blood, then languor and debility of body are the result. But if, on the other hand,
the nervous system lack its proper quantity of galvanic
fluid, then nervous excitability is the result, and the person is in danger of fits, derangement, and all the nervous
diseases that attend the human race. This is evident
from the following facts: Take a person who has a sufficiency of bliod in the circulating system, but who, at
the same time, has not enough of the galvanic fluid in




ANIMAL MAGNETISM i.                 2
his nervous systen.  By some circumstance the biood
is suddenly thrown to his head. and the veins and arteries which pass round among the convolutions of the
brain are swelled with this pressure.  The nerves composing the brain not being sufficiently filled and braced
with the galvanic fluid, spasmodically collapse, and a fit
is the result.  How often do persons, who suppose they
are well, suddenly drop down dead in the streets! How
often has a father or mother retired to rest, and apparently in health, yet in the morning the children found
one or the other a corpse! Here, through eating too
much, or some other cause, the blood was suddenly propelled to the brain, and the nerves. not being sufficienlly
braced with the galvanic fluid, collapsed, and by apoplexy, instant death ensued. Even the bosom companion, slumbering upon the same pillow, never felt a motion.
Now if these persons had been mesmerized, no such
calamity would have ensued.  Their nervous system,
by which I mean the whole brain and all its ramifications, would have been charged from a full and healthy
brain, and having been thus charged, it would have
stood the war of internal elements, and outrode the rushing storm.
In the light our subject now stands, we perceive how
vastly important it is that every person while at ease, ot
even in health, should be operated upon until the brain
is magnetically subdued.  As stated in my first lecture,
one person can be mesmerized in an hour or less another in two hours, and so on up to thirty hours.  Let a
hiealthy friend of yours sit down, one hour each day,
until he subdues your brain.  No person should nesmer'ze more than one hour in twenty-four  The exer.




28                 LLLCTURES ON
liol. s so great, he will injure himself if ne do.  Bus
here is the glory oF this science. Though you may labor an hour each day for twenty or thirty days in succession, yet what you gain, you hold, until the work is
accomplished.  And not only so, but after the brain is
once magnetically subdued, you can then throw the per.
son into the state in five minutes.  Yes, a child ten years
old can then mesmerize a giant father.  Your brain be.
ing magnetically subdued, it is worth hundreds of dollars
to you.  You are then ready for the day of distress
Come what may-toothache, headache, tic doloreux,
neuralgia, or any plin of which you can conceive; let
some one mesmerize you and then wake you up, and the
pain is gone. The whole process need not occupy more
than ten minutes.  Should you fall and break your arm,
then let some person mesmerize the arm only, which can
be done in one minute.  You are free from  pain, and
though in your wakeful state, yet you can look quietly
on, and see the bones put to their places.  Your arm
can then be kept in the mesmeric state, and thoroughly
and rapidly healed without having ever experienced one
single throb of pain. Or by simply mesmerizing your
arm or leg, you can sit in the wakeful state and see them
amputated, and feel no pain.  But if you neglect to have
your brain magnetically subdued, then when the day of
distress comes upon you, as it might require several
hours to put you into this state, it will then be too late
to avail yourse.f of the blessings this science is calculated to bestow.
It is not only a preventative of fits, insanity, anid of
tne most frightful nervous dis ases, and a safegu]ard
against pain, but it will (ure fits, if no congestion of tile
brain has taken place.  It never fails to remove the




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                29
ague and fever, however long it may have been upon
the indiv'dual, and will prevent any fevers prevalent in
northern climates, if the individual be mesmerized as
soon as taken.
Here, then, are opening before us new fielGs of action,
where those who have hearts of benevolence may freely
roam at large, and find ample scope for the full gratification of all their sympathetic and Christian feelings
and those who scoff and sneer at this science, do scoff
and sneer at human wo and human pain, and know ncqA
what thev do.
e




LECTURES ON
LECTURE III
LADIZS AND GENTLEMEN: The two lectures I have
had the pleasure to deli er, and the successful experiments I have, during the last two evenings, performed
in your presence, have awakened opposition, and the
excitement has tru.y become tremendous.  Hundreds
cannot gain admittance into this capacious chapel, and
the breathless anxiety and stillness of this crowded
congregation, show the deep and stirring interest which
ylu feel in the science of Mesmerism, which is the science of mind and its godlike powers. For many ages
men have turned their attention to matter, and confined
all their investigations to the realms of material philosophy.  It is true, that here and there a noble spirit has
turned his attention to scan the nature and powers of
the human mind itself.  But she seemed to close her
laboratory against their entrance, and forbid them to
lay their hands upon her sacred shrine. In this condition,there was no alternative but to judge of mind itself
from its vast and complicated operations, both mnental
and moral. But that the mind itself could directly produce a physical rsult by its own living energies, seems
never to have entered their hearts. But new fields of
thought are opened to the human soul, and the mysterious and wonderful powers of the living mind are now
seen and felt. Circumstances require me to say that 1
regard not the opposition or the scepticism of men. I
challenge investigation both as to the experiments I perform, or the arguments I ffer.  stand mailed with imn




ANIMAL MAGNE'ISM.                 31
mutable truth; and hence, on this subject, am ins alnerable to every attack. Truth is immutable, cannc t bend
to circumstances, and must stand independent of the
belief or unbelief of men. It must soar on towering
wing far above the reach of scorn, ana sooner or later
triumph over all opposition.
I now come to speak of mind and its powers. I have
clearly shown that the WILL raises the arm through the
agency of electricity.  Perhaps I should not call it
electricity, but NERVO-VITAL FLUID, or GALVANIC FLUID,
manufactured from electricity taken in at the lungs
The WILL is not an attribute of the mind, but the resul
of all the attributes brought into council and action.
It is the executive of the mind.  The question now
comes up in proper order before us: Is there any power
in mind to produce a result by simply WILLING it? I contend that there is, while the opposers of Mesmerism contend that there is not. Mesmerism, then, must stand or
fall on the existence or non-existence of such a power
And first, let me appeal to you as Christians. If you
deny that mind, or spirit, has any power to produce a
physical result, then how does the Creator govern the
universe?  How can his Spirit come in contact with
inatter s') as to produce any physical results?  The
creation and government of the world are represented
in scripture as the result of the divine will. " He doeth
according to his will in the army of heaven, and among
the inhabitants of earth." The creation of the world
and all its appendages is represented as the effect of
his will.  "He said, let there be light, and there was
light."  "He spake, and it was done; He commanded
and it stood fast."  If, then, the infinite Spirit, by holding
his will unchangeably upon all the multifarious objects




32                   LECTURES ON
of creation, moves unnumbered worlds, ard governs
the universe, then there is also an energy and power in
the human spirit proportionate to its greatness.  If you
grant that the infinite Spirit, by putting forth an infinite
wli, can produce infinite results, then surely a feeble
finite spirit, by putting forth a feeble finite will, can produce a feeble finite result.  I only ask you, as Christiari
philosophers, the admission that the same CAUSE shall
produce the same EFFECT.
If, however, you deny the correctness of this conclusion, then I have only to say, that you furnish the
atheist with a weapon by which he is sure to defeat
you.  Argue as long as you please, and even drive the
honest atheist from  any other ground, he will at last
say: "Well, admit there is a God, yet he can do nothing."
Your Bible says, "God is a spirit."  Hence, he has no
hands, feet, nor physical body, as we have.  He may
therefore, WILL and WILL to all eternity; yet he can do
nothing, because spirit, by its mere mental action, cannot come in contact with, nor in the least affect matter
We know this, says the atheist, from observation and
experience. " And what can we reason but from what
we know?" A human being, for instance, may sit down
and exercise all his mental energies.  He may WILL
and WILL to endless ages, yet he can do nothing-cannot produce the least physical result, unless he uses his
hands or comes in bodily contact. I now  ask those
Christians who deny that the mind has such power as
we are contending for, how can they answer this argument of the atheist?  I contend that they are not able
So meet it. There is no human ingenuity beneath these
heavens that the Christian opposers of the mesmeric
power can summon to their aid adequate to the task.




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                 33
Indeed, it inplies a contradiction in terms, and involves
them in the following compound dilemma::If the infinite Spirit, by the energies of his will, can produce.nfinite results, then a finite spirit, byits will, can produce a finite result.  But a finite spirit, by its will, cannot produce any result, so an infinite spirit, by its will,
cannot produce any result I Of this dilemma, they may
take either horn.  Now  for the consistency of these
sapient opposers.  They admit that the infinite Spirit,
by its will, governs the universe, and produces infinite
effects, and yet deny that a finite spirit, by its.will, can
produce the least physical effect; which is most philosophically absurd! But, if a finite spirit, by its living
energies, can produce a finite result, then there is a God,
and the heavens do rule.  I am willing to meet any intelligent clergyman in controversy who denies the truth
of Mesmerism; and before this enlightened congregation, who shall be our jurors, I will either make him
acknowledge the mesmeric power, or drive him  to
atheism.  I will leave him no other alternative.
We have, thus far, confined our inquiries to the fact,
whether there was ANY power at all in mind to produce
results independent of bodily contact. I now take a still
higher stand, and deny, in total, that there is any POWER
or MOTION whatever, in the whole immeasurable universe, except in mind. There can be no power without
motion, nor can there be motion except it originate in
mind.  I care not through how many concatenations
of cause and effect you may trace motion, it is after all
but secondary, and must be traced back to mind as its
starting point.  For instance: suppose a ball should lie
at rest upon this floor. It would never stir unless moe
tion were commun''ated to it by some extraneous power.




34                  LECTURES ON
If another ball entered that door, ana came in contact
with the ball at rest, it would communicate motion to it
by impulse, losing iust as much as it communicated
But here is no beginning of motion, and every one would
look around for the cause. If, while gazing, you should
see another ball enter the door, struck by a bat, you
might not yet be satisfied whether that bat was held in
a man's hand, or whether it was fastened in some machinery prepared, and put in motion by human ingenuity. But you see a third ball enter the door, and not
only discover the bat but the hand that grasps it. You
are now satisfied. You know that the hand is connected
with a body, and that body with a brain and mind.
Now, in these three instances, there is no beginning of
motion.  The man's hand, the bat, and first ball, are
but the three instruments through which motion was
communicated to the ball at rest, and the man's mind
was sole mover.
As the subject of Mesmerism  is directly connected
with the powers of mind, and as this is the pivot on
which the question between its advocates and opposers
must eventually turn, you will permit me to take a wider
range in this extensive field. There must be some medium through which the eternal mind comes in contact
with gross matter, moves unnumbered worlds accordng to nature's law, and sustains and governs the unbounded universe.  That medium  must be the finest,
tne most rarified, and subtil of inert matter in being. It
must be the last link in the material chain of inert substances that fastens on the mind. This is electricity.
Lience. it is through electricity that the Great Spirit
Comes in contact with his universe.  This is evident,
because it is electricity as it exists ir the human sys.




AN MAL IAGNETISM.               35
^sn., through which our spirits come in contact with
matter.  We are but an epitome of God's universe, and
in us is contained every variety of matter and substance
in being. " The proper study of mankind is man;" and
in this study, the most unbounded fields are opened to
the range of human thought.
It m'y now be asked, if electricity is that substance
tl(iough which the Creator comes in contact with matter, how then could he act when that splendid substance
had no existence? or, in other words, how could he
create " all things out of nothing?"  I dony the assertion, that God created all things out of nothing, and
challenge the proof. Space and duration exist of necessity, and that space was eternally filled with primal
matter, which I contend is electricity. The scriptures
do not inform us that God created all things out of
nothing, and surely philosophy cannot inform us how
many nothings it will take to make the least conceivable something! Though it is the commonly received
opinion that all things were created out of nothing, yet
in ail ages of the Christian church, there have been
some eminent.men of all denominations, who have reected this idea, and contended that all things were created out of some substance.  I have not time to refer
to those persons this evening, yet permit m. to name
one. A more orthodox man than John Milton never
lived, as all know who have ever read that astonishing
production of the human intellect, his "Paradise Lost."
EHe was at war with the idea that all things were created o'at of nothing. I will present you with an extract
from his " Treatise on Christian Doctrine," volume 1
pages 236 and 237.  As I quote  romn memory, I mat
%ot be co rect in every word,




36                  LF.CTULES ON
He says: "It'  clear, then, that the world was
framed out of matter of some kind or other. For, since
action and passion are relative terms, and since, consequently, no agent can act externally, unless there be
some patient suck as matter, it appe1ars impossible that
God could have created this world out of nothing; not
from any defect of power on his part, but because it
was necessary that something should previously have
existed capable of receiving passively the exertion of
the divine efficacy. Since, therefore, both scripture
and reason concur in pronouncing that all these things
were made, not out of nothing, but out of matter, it
necessarily follows that matter must always have existed independent of God, or have originated from God
at some particular point of time."
So you perceive, Milton contends that both scripture
and reason teach that all things were made out of matter. I am under no obligations to prove that all things
were not made out of nothing, for no man is bound by
the rules of logic to prove a negative. But I will, for a
moment, depart from this established rule of schoolmen,
and undertake to prove that all things were not made
out of nothing. To this end, I will call into my service
the following argument:
We raise an axe, and at a single blow cut in two a
piece of wood one inch in diameter. Now it is certain
that this wood was not severed instantly in all its parts.
If it were. then the lower part would have been cut at
the same instant that the upper part was, which is perfectly absurd, and therefore impossible.  The axe
certainly passed gradually through that wood, and progressively separated one grain after another. This you
ail perceive. By INSTANTLY, we are to  inderstands




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                 37
that no time shall elapse between the accomplishment
of any two objects.  It may, however, be said, that
there are bodies that move with greater velocity than
this axe. I will. then, take another. There is nothing
with which we are acquainted, that moves with greater
velocity than light; its motion being about twelve million miles in a minute. Hence, the passage of a ray of
light from the sun to the earth, would be about eight
minutes.  It is, therefore, absurd to say that a ray of
light could be at the sun and at the earth at the same
instant, as it would allow no time for its passage.  I
will now apply the above argument to the subject before us.
If SOMETHING were created out of NOTHING, it could
not, in the nature of things, have been done PROGRESSIVELY or GRADUALLY, because the instant it became the
least possible remove from nothing it would be something.  It must, in the very nature of things, remain
nothing till it becomes something, because there is no
possible process by which it can be gradually brought
forward into something, for there is no existing medium
bctween something and nothing. Now, if nothing were
created into something, it must have been done instantly;
and if instantly, then it must have been something and
nothing at the same instant, which is the climax of
absurdity. It is just as absurd as to contend that the
piece of wood before mentioned was severed at the
bottom at the same time that it was at the top, or that
a ray of light could be at the sun and the earth at the
saine instant. I shall hold this argument sund until
some one is able to refute it.
Hlenr e, I contend for the eternal existence of PRIMAL
matter w iich is electri ity. But even this primal mat.
4




38                  LECTURE$ ON
ter does nit exist independent of Leity.  It is the natuw
ral atmosphere or substance emanating from Him. It
is evident that every substance in being has its atmospheric emanation, by which it may be detected beforo
we arrive at the body. I say AT.LMOSPHERIC EMANATION
because I know of no other more convenient term, by
which I can express my ideas.  For instance, the rose,
and every species of the flower tribe, have their emanations, which like an atmosphere surround them, and by
which we detect their existence before we come in contact with them.  For the sake of perspicuity, suffer me
to call it atmospheric emanation, which in the above
cases is detected by smell. The same is true of every
species of trees and plants in being.  The same is true
of every species of earth, and rock, and mineral, in existence.  Each substance has an atmospheric emanation
peculiar to itself, and by which it can be discovered by
man, or by some other living creature.  The camel on
the desert will detect water twenty miles distant. The
same is true in relation to all the races and tribes of animated beings.  Each has its own peculiar atmospheric
emanation, by which it may be detected by some other
creature, by some instinctive sense of which we have
little or no conception. As, then, every substance in
being has its own peculiar emanation, so the atmospheric
emanation of the self-existent Spirit, is electricity, which,
proceeding forth from  Him, does not therefore exist in
dependent of him.
It will now be said that, on this principle of reasoning
the speaker will make it out that SPIRIT itself is MATTER.
If by SPIRIT'ou mean that which has neither length,
breadth, nor thickness, nor occupies any space, then I
have only to say that it is a mere chimera of the hutm:




ANIMAL MAGNETISM                 39
brain, a nonentity, a nothing! Does Deity fill all space?
Then he is of course a substance, a real, living, acting
and thinking being; otherwise, as Christians, we rise
words without knowledge, when we say that he fills immensity with his presence.  But it may be said that
MIND is THOUGHT, REASON, and UNDERSTANDING, and then
be asked, whether thought, reason, understanding, etc.,
occupy any space?  But I deny that these are mind.
Thought, reason, and understanding are not mind, but
the EFFECTS of mind. Mind is something supremely
higher than all these.  I yet ask what is that which
thinks, reasons, and understands? It is the mind. Then
mind is something distinct from those effects by which
it is made manifest.  What, then, it may be asked, is
mind?  I answer, it is that substance which has innate
or living motion; and the result of that motion is
thought, reason, understanding, and, therefore, power.
As electricity is the highest and most subtil of INERT
substances, as it fastens on mind, and is, therefore, more
easily moved than any other inert substance in being, so
mind is the next step above electricity, is the crowning
perfection of all other substances in immensity-is living motion; and the result of that motion is thought and
power. It is the living Spirit from whom  emanates
electricity, and who, out of that electricity, has created
all worlds. Hence, the Creator is a real substance or
being, possessing personal identity, and is infinite in
every perfection of his adorable character.
Electricity, which is an atmospheric emanation from
God, and which is moved by his will, is that substance
out of which all worlds and their splendid appendages
were made. Hence, it will be perceived, that electricity
contains all the original properties of all the variousi




40                LECTURES ON
substances in being.  All the varieties of tLe universe
around us-all the beauties and glories of crea tion upon
which we look with so many thrilling emotions of de.
light, were produced from electricity, which is the inex
haustible fountain of primal matter.  By the living ener
gies of the Divine Mind. electricity was condensed into
globes; not instantly, but gradually.  " he heaviest particles took the lowest point, or common centre, of our
globe, and so on, step by step, lighter and lighter, till we
reach the surface, which is a vegetable mould.  On this
we find water, a substance still lighter than earth; next
air, which is lighter than water, and so on till we reach
the sun, which is the highest point in relation to our system, because it is the common centre.  The sun is,
therefore, pure electricity.  Hence, the twenty-nine
globes, belonging to our system, are electrically, geologically, and magnetically made. They are but twentynine magnets revolving around our sun as a common
centre.
The sun, being pure electricity or primal matter, is
but an emanation from  the Deity.  It is, consequently,
in a positive state.  Hence, electricity is continually
passing from the sun, as a common centre, to the twentv-nine surrounding worlds; on the same principle that
it passes from a positive to a negative cloud.  Having
done its duty in giving light, heat, and vegetation, as
well as magnetic power to globes, it is returned by reaction to the sun, and these two motions form the vortices that roll worlds around him. It is impossible that
there can be any inherent attraction and repulsion in
matter. Attraction and repulsion are but different dis.
positi Ins of electricity. The best magnets are now
made fron  the galvanic battery.  Hence electricity




ANIMAL MA'NETISM.                       41
gal vanism, and magnetism are but in substance one and
the same fluid, and as this is primal matter, an emana
tion from  the Eternal Mind, so all the powers of attraction and repulsion originate in Deity.  His will comes
in contact with electricity, and through that subtil agent
he moves the whole immeasurable universe in accordance with  nature's law.  All worlds are in motion.
They roll rapid as the lightning's blaze, and in the most
apparent confusion; yet all is calm, regular, and harmonious.  God is, therefore, connected with his universe,
and superintends all its multifarious operations. Though
he is thus intimately united to inert matter, yet he is dis
tinct from  the whole.
" Thou apart,
Above, beyond; 0 tell me, mighty Mind,
Where art thou? Shall I dive into the deep?
Call to the sun? or ask the roaring winds
For their Creator? Shall I question loud
The thunder, if in that the Almighty dwells?
Or holds he furious storms in straitened reins,
And bids fierce whirlwinds wheel his rapid car?
The nameless He! whose nod is nature's birth
And nature's shield the shadow of his hand;
Her dissolution his suspended smile!
The great First Last! pavilioned high he sits
In darkness, from excessive splendor borne,
By gods unseen, unless through lustre lost.
His glory, to created glory, bright,
As that to central horrors; he looks down
On all that soars, and spans immensity."
Worlds are not only electrically, geologicall)   aLa
magnetically made, but they are electrically and l.agnetically suspended and moved by the immediate energies of the Divine Mind.  Here is an image in papec
costume. I will attach it to this electrizing machile and
charge it.  See! those papers are now  all suspended,
and  be'ng equally charged  they repel each other.  I
4*




42                 LECTURES 3N
will now put my fingers near them.  See! how they
are attracted by my hand. They tou:h me, give off
their electricity, become equalized with my fingers, and
then fall. Here, then, is suspension, attraction, and repulsion, by electricity.  It may, however, be said, that
if worlds are moved by electricity, that they must necessarily move as quick as lightning. This does not
follow.  Here is an orrery, with which the most of you
are acquainted. I attach it to the electrical machine,
and charge.  You see it is moved by giving off electricity at its points. But though electrically moved, yet it
does not move as quick as lightning.  The magnet I
hold in my hand was charged from the galvanic battery,
ant by one single stroke of the battery from the prongs
of this magnet towards the bow, I can destroy all its
magnetic powers, and by reversing the action, I can just
as suddenly restore them.
I have now clearly shown that all motion and power
originate in mind, and as the human spirit, through an
electro-magnetic medium, comes in contact with matter,
so the infinite Spirit does the same, and through this
medium he governs the universe.  Hence, those who
deny the mesmeric powe, must, to be consistent with
themselves, deny that there is any medium  through
which mind can come in contact with matter, or else
deny that mind, abstractly considered, has any power
to produce results. But the denial of either of these is
a denial of an all-powerful, self-existent Spirit, the Creator and Governor of the universe.  But, on the other
hand, how sublime the idea, that God is electrically and
magnetically connected. with his universe; that, by the
energies of his own will, he has'condensed and formed
worlds fi m electricity, which is but the atmosphe ic




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                43
emanation of his own spirit, and that by electricity he
sustains, rolls, and governs them from age to age.  And
how sublime the idea, that he has " poured spirit from
spirit's awful fountain, and kindled i.to existence a
world of rationals."  He has poured hilrself through all
his works and stamped upon them  BEAUTY, ORDER, and
H[ARMONY which are but the reflected impressions of his
Plwn SPLB NDOB




44                  LECTURES ON
LECTURE IV.
LADIES AND GENTLEMEN: It is a source of gratifica,
tion to me that public attention, in Boston and vicinity
is completely awakened to the interests of Spiritualism,
and that they are giving this subject that investigation
which its importance demands.  We live emphatically
in an age of investigation and improvement, when light
seems to be pouring in oceans on our world; and he who
shuts his eyes, and then scoffs and sneers because others
open theirs and see, is not only recreant to duty, hut does
society an irreparable wrong. But those who remain in
scepticism much longer on the subject of Mesmerism,
will be suspected either of ignorance or dishonesty. I
make this remark, because there is no possible apology
that any man of common sense should remain in scepticism another day.  He can go home and try it upon his
children or friends, and test its power, and know  its
truth, and this every man is bound to do who desires to
mitigate human pain, and assuage human woes. The
subject is one of paramount consideration, and is worthy of your best affections, your most ardent zeal, and
your warmest hopes.
In my last lecture, I took into consideration MIND AND
ITS PoWER.S, and the medium through which it comes in
contact with matter. This medium is electricity, and is
that eternal, PRIMAL matter out of which all other substances were macd  It fills immensity of space; and




AIJ MAL MAGAETISM.               45
worlds are successively and continually formed by the
condensation of electricity under the living and ever-acting energies of the Eternal Mind.  We. are floating in
an immensity of space that knows no bounds, like the
mote in the sunbeam.  This is peopled with swarming
worlds, in number beyond an angel's computation; and
the residue, which has not yet become the abodes of life,
order, and beauty, is filled up with primal matter still in
its electrical state. Hence, the work of creation has
been going on from eternity, and will continue to progress so long as the throne of the self-existent Jehovah
endures, without ever arriving at an end in the sublime
career of creation.  New brother creations are, therefore, every moment rolling from his omnific hand, and
that creating fiat will never, never cease. All this is
effected by the energies of mind.
In my last lecture, I stated, and, as I thought, conclu.
sively proved, that thought, reason, understanding, etc.,
were not mind, but merely the results of mind, and gave
what I considered conclusive evidence.  I, moreover,
stated that mind was a substance that occupied space,
that it possessed living motion, and that the result of
that motion was thought, reason, and power, and gave
w.hat I considered proof.  But it seems that both of
these positions have been disputed, and hence I will
once more touch these two points.
If thought, reason, and understanding are mind, then
our minds are annihilated every night in sleep.  Be.
cause, if all the organs of the brain are wrapped in
profound slumber, then there is not a single thought
stirring in the whole intellectual realm. It will not answer to parry the force of this argument, by saying that
the action of blood upon the brain produces thought,




46                  LECTURES ON
and that this action is suspended,n slumber, because
the blood flows and acts upon the brain in sleep as well
as when we are aw:ake; and hence we should, on this
principle, think and reason when asleep nearly as well
as when awake.  This, however, is not the case.  If
then, thought and reason are mind, I must insist that, in
profound slumber, the mind is annihilated, for thought
is gone.  Hence it is plain, that thought, reason, and
understanding are not mind, but the effects of mind.
I will now take a different argument from the one
offered in my last lecture, to prove that mind is a substance that has innate motion, and that this motion
produces thought.  It is admitted on all hands, that'-ve
mind resides in the brain, not in the blood-vessels, but
in the nerves themselves. Now, if the nerves are very
much expanded by heat, it is impossible to sleep.  By
lying perfectly still upon our beds, there is a coolness
steals over the brain. The nerves, by coolness, are
made to contract. They continue gently to shrink until
they press upon the living substance that they contain,
and stop its motion. That moment all thought ceases.
Recollect, MIND is that substance whose nature is motion,
and the result of that motion is thoirht.  By pressure,
by FORCE, it is stopped, and thought is gone. The moment our rest is complete, a nervous warmth comes
over the brain. The nerves expand, leave the mind
disengaged, it resumes its motion, arnd thought is the
result.  As cold shrinks, and heat expands the nervous
system, so that we alternately sleep and wake under
this double action, so the mind is a living, self-moving,
and invisible substance, which is capable of being compressed sufficient: at least, to prevent its motion.
Having made.hese remarks, which the circumstances




ANIMAL M txNET1SM.                4"?
tl the occasion seemed to require at my hands, I now
invite your attention to what is called by sceptics the in
omnprellensibility and marvellousness of magnetic sleep
and who, on this account, openly avow the impossibility
and inconsistency of any one being thrown into such a
state; and who, whenever they witness experiments tl
test it, freely use the stereotyped words, " HUMBUG AND
COLLUsion," and that, too, with great emphasis, without
being able, however, to detect this great, this wonderful
imposition on public credulity!
The greatest objection to the truth of the science
of Mesmerism arises from the circumstance, that the subject can see in a manner different from  the ordinary
mode of vision. That any person can see out of the
templar region, or out of the top, or back part of the
s kull, and through solid walls, and in the darkest night
ley contend is too preposterous to be believed. I deeply
egret to say that medical men not only give countelaance to such declarations made by the common mass,
but are engaged in making the same themselves.  But I
seriously appeal to them whether they have never seen
any patients in a certain state of the nervous system, induced by disease, where they could ihus see, and when
sensation was so perfectly extinct that amputation might
have taken place without pain?  Have they never seen a
case of catalepsy?  If not, have they never seen in medical works well-authenticated cases of this disease reported? Surely they will not deny these things. I further inquire, have they never seen a case nor heard one reported,
where patients in a state of catalepsy have been entirely
c.air 7oyant? where they have seen, as no person in the
ordinary way of vision can see?  I am conscious ihat,hey will not hazard their medica reputation by giving




48                   LECTURES ON'
these interrogatories an unqualified denial. Of all per.
ions beneath these heavens, medical gentlemen should be
lie last to sneer at t he idea of clairvoyance, or even to-,al insensibility of a person in the magnetic state.
Catalepsy is a sudden suppression of motion and sensation; a kind of apoplex, in which the patient is in a
fixed posture.  If the case be an aggravated one, the patient is sometimes senseless and even speechless.  To
bring this subject directly and plainly before you, I will
relate to you an incident which was stated to me about
six months acgo by Dr. Patterson, an eminent physician
of Lynchburg, Virginia. A young lady was taken sick.
Her physician, who lived some eight or ten miles distant,
was sent for.  He found her in a state of catalepsy
Though there was no sensation in her body, yet she had
occasional fits of talking. He prescribed, stated that he
should be there the next evening, and left.  The evening
came, and a most tremendous storm  of rain, with high
winds, set in.  The darkness was profound. As the family were sealed in silence and anxiety in the same roonl
where the patient lay, some one said, " Well, our doctor
will not be here to-night."  The sick lady answered;
"Yes he will; he is coming now; he is riding on horseback, and is all drenched with rain."  the family supposing this to be a mere reverie of the brain, a touch of delirium, made no reply. Nearly an hour passed on; and
the storm continuing with unabating violence, one of the
pensive group again broke the silence, and exclaimed
with a feeling of regret, "Well, it is certain our doctor
will not be here this dark stormy night!"  The sufferer
again answered, "Yes he will; he is most here now;
there he is hitching his horse; he is coming to the door.'
The) heard the raps: the door was opened, and in came




ANIMAL MAGNETTISM.                49
the doctor  I now ask, how did this lady in a state cf cat
alepsy see the physician several miles distant, through
the walls of her house, and in so dark a night?
This report was given in a medical journal and well
authenticated. And moreover, there are many of a similar character; and of these facts medical men are well
aware. Now I appeal to them, who are present on this
occasion, that if it is possible to throw the nervous system
into a condition by disease, so that the patient can see in
a manner entirely distinct from the ordinary mode of vis.
ion, THEN, how can they, without presumption, affirm
that a person cannot be thrown into a similar state by
Mesmerism?  It is proved by medical works that such a
state of the brain is possible; and who will take upon
himself to affirm, that it can be induced by no other
means than disease?  As a state of catalepsy is thus fre.
quently attended with clairvoyance, and with total insensibility, so that amputation could be performed without
pain, then why should we marvel when we see the same
identical phenomena clustering around Mesmerism? I
have only to say that our surprise is wholly gratuitous.
I appeal to medical gentlemen present. Have you
never seen a case of natural somnambulism?  There
are hundreds of them occur in this city; and, in every
town there are those who rise in their sleep, perform
labors, and return to their beds without knowing it. In
this state they have gone to the top of house-frames,
walked on the ridgepoles, and safely descended. They
have, in the darkest nights, walked over dangerous and
"apid streams on a mere scantling in safety, where a
slight loss of balance would have been death, and
where it would be impossible for them to have crossed
in their wakeful state    Women have arisen, and in
5




50                 LECTURES ON
this state have done the nicest needle-work. And how
did these see?  Surely not with the natural organ oA
vision. A young lady at boarding-school, learning to
paint miniatures, and on preparing one for examinationday, found that she could be excelled by the other
pupils. It worried her much, and to her suprise she
found in the morning, that her picture had greatly advanced under the delicate touch of some experienced
hand. She charged the deed upon her teacher, who
disclaimed all knowledge of the fact.  But on the next
morning the picture was nearly finished, but the transgressor could not be found.  The Preceptress being
strongly suspected, secretly sat up and watched.  In
the dead of night, when all was still, the young lady
arose, and in a dark room arranged her work, mixed her
colors, and began to paint. Her Preceptress lit a lamp,
entered the room, and saw that lady finish her picture.
She then awakened her. How did she see how to mix
her colors, and to give the nicest touch with her pencil
where no human eye in the wakeful state could discern
an object? Such facts as these, and even more wonderful, are well known to medical gentlemen. Now, ii
persons can by some cause be thrown into somnambulism upon their beds, then reason teaches that they may
be thrown into the same state and even a much deeper
sleep by the magnetic power.
We will now take into consideration the philosophy
of Clairvoyance. It is evident that SEEING, HEARING,
FEELING, TASTING, and SMELLING, belong exclusively to
the mind. And as we have already clearly proved that
electricity is the only substance that can come in con.
tact with mind, so it is through the agency of this flaid
that sensations are transmitted to the mind   Hence, it




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                 5}
id through the. edium  of electricity that we see hear
feel, taste, and smell.
The power of sight being in the mind, it is evident
that we never saw anything out of our eyes.  The whole
of this congregation, with all their different costunes,
their various complexions and different appearances,'and
all their relative distances fiom each other, are struck
upon the retina of the speaker's eye, on about the b:gness
of a quarter of an inch. By the agency of electricity,
it is conveyed through the optic nerve to the mind
where it is seen.  Hence, we never saw a piece of matter, but only its shadow, the same as when you look into a mirror, it is not yourself, but your image that you
see. Electricity is that substance that passes through
all other substances.  Air cannot pass through your
cranium, nor through these walls, nor metallic substances.  But as all these have countless millions of pores,
electricity can pass through them. Now if our nervous
system could be charged with the nervo-vital fluid, so
as to render the brain positive, and thus bring it into an
exact equilibrium  or balance with external electricity.
then we should be clairvoyant.  Because the nervous
system  being duly charged, and even surcharged, the
great quantity of this fluid passing in right lines fior,
the mind, as a common centre, and in every direction
through the pores of the skull, renders it transparent
Uniting with external electricity which passes through
these walls and all substances, which are also transparent, the iniage of the whole universe, as it were, in
thiis transparent form, is thrown upon the mind, and is
t.here seen, and seen, too, independent of the retina.  On
this principle the whole of those objects which are
opaque to natural vision, are rendered transparent to




62                  LECTURES ON
the clairvoyant, and he sees through wa.: s rn succes.
sion, and takes cognizance of their relative distances, on
the same principle that we in a wakeful state could look
through said walls if they were thin, transparent glass.
On this principle, if the subject be charged too much or
too little, he cannot see clearly. Or if the night be
rainy, or even damp, and unfavorable to electricity, then
experiments in clairvoyanee must fail, or be very imperfect.  The subject must be magnetically charged
exactly to that degree which will bring him into magnetic equilibrium with external electricity.  Then, if the
night be favorable, the experiments will most likely
prove successful.
For the sake of perspicuity, I will take another position. Why can you see through that window?  You
answer, because the glass is transparent. But why is it
transparent?  You again answer, because upon every
square inch of its surface there are several thousand
pores, and the glass is of that chemical property that it
will admit the rays of atmospheric light to pass through
them. This is philosophically correct. But remember,
it is not the WINDOW that SEES, but it is the INHABITANT
in the house that looks out of the window. The question now arises, why can you not see through that wall?
If you answer, because it is opaque, yet the query arises,
why is it opaque?  The wall. has certainly as many
pores upon the square inch as that glass.  The answer's, because the wall is of that chemical property that
resists the rays of atmospheric light; and where no light
passes through the pores of a substance, tliat substance
must be opaque. This is so far philosophically correct
We are now ready to ask, why can you see through
he eye? Because it i' formed on the transparent prin.




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                 53:iple, has a cerlain number of pores upon "he square
inch. and, by the skill of the Creator, it is so constituted
as to chemically receive- the rays of atmospheric light.
But you will please to bear in mind that it is not those
translucent ORBS that see, but it is the INIIABITANT in the
earthly house that looks out of those windows of the
soul. Even the good book says, when speaking of the
faded vision of the aged,-" AND THOSE THAT LOOK OUT
OF THE WINDOWS SHALL BE DARKENED"-thus calling
these eyes but the windows of the soul.  It is the spirit
only that sees-that alone possesses the inward living
eye; for take the spirit from its earthly house, and what
can these eyes-these windows of the fleshly tabernacle
— see?  They can see just as much as the hands or
feet, but no more.  Let another question be here proposed.  Why can you not see through the skull?  You
will again answer-because it is opaque.  But I again
ask, why is it opaque?  You reply-because it chemically resists the rays of atmospheric light, and will not
allow them to pass through its pores, even though they
are as numerous as the pores of the eye.  This answer
is also philosophically correct; and in this wonderful
constitution of the human cranium is made manifest the
wisdom of the Creator. For were light admitted through
it upon every portion of the brain, it would stimulate its
organs to such an unnatural degree as to render the
mind incapable of manifesting itself through them in a
harmonious and rational manner.  Indeed, it would be
inconsistent with the continuance of life itself.
As the remarks now made are perfectly simple, and
can be comprehended by all, I will now ask-if there
were a light so much finer than atmospheric light, and
of thrt peculiar property that it could be made to pass'.




64                  LECTURES ON
through all substances in existence, could you not then
see through that wall as easily as through that glass 
Certainly; because the wall would be rendered trans.
parent through the action of that light, and whereveT
light passes, there must exist the possibility to see objects. The question then naturally presents itself to the
mind-is there such a light?  I answer-there is, and
it is MAGNETIC, or GALVANIC LIGHT. It exists not only
around, but within us. Go into a dungeon of total darkness, and strike your head a sudden blow, and you will
see a flash of light. From whence comes that light?
It is within you: it is the nervous fluid-the living light
of the brain, which is of a galvanic nature.  By this
concussion it was thrown into confusion, forced from its
accustomed channels, and laid suddenly at the footstool
of the living mind; and the mind saw the flash. Hence,
it is electrically that we SEE, and HEAR, and FEEL, and
TASTE, and SMELL. All mesmeric subjects cannot, however, see with the same brilliancy in clairvoyance, when
the brain is surcharged with this light. The most distinguished clairvoyants now in the United States, are
Jackson Davis, Lucius E. Burkmar, and Walter S. Tarbox, who have astonished thousands; and by their examinations of the diseased, and saving the lives of many,
have rendered themselves the benefactors of suffering
humanity   This galvanic light can be conveyc.d to the
brain independent of the natural eye-the outward
organ of vision.
That the above principles are correct, and that TASTE,
SEEING, etc., are electrically conveyed to the mind, try
the following experiments.  Take a half dollar, and a
piece of zinc of the same size: touch them separately to
the tongue, and you will not perceive any taste; but




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.               d$
put tlie tongue between them, and, in this position, touch
the edges of the two pieces together over the end of the
tongue, and you will taste a pungent acid. This taste
is produced electrically. Zinc contains a greater por.
lion of electricity than the silver, and when they come
m contact it gives it off to the silver, and conveys the
tensation of taste through the glands to the mind. - In
further proof of this being electricity, put the half dollar against the gums under the upper lip; open the
mouth, and lay the zinc upon the tongue. by moving
the tongue up and down, you will touch the pieces together, and every time they come in contact you will
not only perceive the same taste before described, but
you will see a flash of lightning.  Now that this lightning is seen directly by the mind, and independent of
the natural organ of the eye, you may enter a dark
room, and in the darkest night close your eyes, and
even bandage them,-and yet when you touch those
pieces, as described, you will see the flash, even when
one from the heavens could not be seen.  This flash is
conveyed through the nervous system  directly to the
mind, where alone exists the power of vision.  This is
sot only proof that taste and sight are electrically conveyed to the mind, but also that electricity is that substance which alone comes in contact with mind.
It is the same in relation to the other senses.  Even
HEARING is not produced by the concussion of the particles of o tr air, but by the vibration of the particles of
electricity conveyed to the mind, and in that tremulous
inainer through the organ of the ear coming in direct
contact with mind. It is impossible, in the nature of
things, hat so gross a substance as air can pass the
barriers of the ear and enter the brain to produce any




56                  LECTURES ON
sound, But it may be said, that though the particles ol
air do not enter the brain, yet with a vibrating motion
they strike the drum of the ear and convey sound to the
mind. This cannot be, because there is no air in the
brain itself; and he:we, th,:e is no internal aerial medium through which souna 2ould be transmitted to the
mind, even if we admit that the concussion of the particles of external air con-veyed it to the drum. I yet ask,
what is the internal medium beyond, through which that
sound is conveyed to the mind?  There is no air there;
and if it be a vacuum, then no sound whatever can be
conveyed.  The truth is, that the same substance in
tremulous motion, which conveys sound to the drum of
the ear, also passes through it into the nervous system,
and conveys its oracle to the very throne of the living
mind.  This is electricity, which is the only correspondent or mediator between mind and matter, laying its
brilliant hand upon both parties, and bringing them into
communication.
The sense of smell exists in the mind, and from surrounding substances the sensation is electrically conveyed to it. But as smell is so nearly related to taste,
the same argument may be applied to both. I will
therefore proceed to notice the sense of feeling.
It is generally said that the sense of feeling is in the
nerves.  But I contend that it belongs exclusively to
the mind, the nerves being the mere medium through
which it is electrically conveyed to the mind.  Indeed,
all our sensations, whether of seeing, hearing, feeling,
tasting, or smelling, are conveyed to the mind, through
the nervous system, from their correspondent organs,
which. are but the mere starting points, or inlets of sensation   And as the nervo-vita' fluid, which is of an




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                51
electric nature, is the only substance that acts through
the nerves, so electricity is the agent which conveys alP
our sensations to the mind.  Though it is said that feel
ing is diffused over the whole system, yet, strictl3
speaking, this is not true. All feeling is in the mind
It is evident that the mind resides in the brain.  It is
not diffused over the whole nervous system, for when
we might be as sensible that thought proceeded from
the hand or foot, as from the head. In this case, the
oss of a hand or foot would be the loss of some portion
of our minds.  The spinal marrow is but a continuation
of the brain.  Branches shoot out, and from these, other branches in infinite variety, until they are spread out
over the whole system ten thousand times finer than the
finest hair-sieve, —so fine that you cannot put down the
Doint of a cambric needle without feeling it, and you
cannot feel unless you touch a nerve.  Hence you perceive how very fine the nervous system  must be!  Of
this system, the brain is the fountain, and is the local
habitation of the mind.
Now touch the finger to any object, and that touch
produces a corresponding action upon the brain, and
through the agency of the electro-magnetic fluid, that
sensation is conveyed to the mind.  It is the mind that
feels it, and by habit we associate the feeling with the
end of the finger.  But amputate the arm, and then
touch the correspondent nerve at the end of the stump
and he will yet associate the feeling with the end of the
finger. But the feeling is not even in the end of the
stump.  It is in the mind which has its residence in the
brain.
I knew  a t.aksmith who had his leg amputated
above the kne   When healed, ne put on a wooden leg




t58:               LECTURES ON
and resumed his labors in the shop.  He could feel his
leg and toes as usual, and many times in a lay, he
would, without reflection, put down his hand to scratch
his wooden leg. Being unlearned and superstitious, he
supposed that his leg was buried in an uncomfortable
position, and therefore, haunted its wooden substitute.
He dug it up, placed under it a soft cotton bed, and reburied it; but all to no purpose. He mnade the circumstance known to his physician, who told him to find the
corresponding nerve on the stump, and he could cause
the itching sensation to cease. He did so, and the difficulties were at once overcome.
A gentleman called upon me, in October, 1842, at the
aouse of:the Hon. T. J. Greenwood, in Marlboro'. He
stated, that he injured his arm, the cords contracted
and drew up his fingers, so as perfectly to clench the
hand.  It gave him great pain, and the arm was amputated just above the elbow.  And though three years
had passed away, he said there was yet a constant pain
as though the fingers were drawn up; and from that
contraction the pain seemed to proceed.  Now  the
whole of this difficulty was felt in the brain. If I may
be allowed the expression, the brain has its legs and
arms, and toes, and fingers. Or allow me to go entirely back. It is the mind which has its limbs and all its
lineaments of form, and from which all form, proportion,
and beauty emanate.
I observed a moment ago, that the spinal cord was
but the brain continued. Now let a knife be inserted
between:the joints of the spine, and let this cord be seveied, and all the parts of the body, below the incision,
will be paralyzed. You may now cut or burn the legs,
but all feeling is gone; neither can they be moved by the




ANIM.iL MAGNETISM.               59
will. The will cannot come in contact with flesh ana
blood, only through the electro-magnetic fluid.  The
mind is in the brain, and as the spinal marrow is severed,
so the lower parts are separated from the fountain of feeling.  The communication of the electrical influence is
destroyed between the extremities and the.mind, and
hence, the extremities can convey sensations to the mind
no more.
I might continue the argument to an indefinite extent
to prove that all our senses (seeing, hearing, feeling, tast
ing, and smelling) are in the mind, and that these sensa
tions, through their corresponding organs, are electrical
ly conveyed to the mind, through the nervous system, but
I forbe r, aud proceed, as usual, to the anticipated exper.
iments of the evening.




60                LECTURES O0
LECTURE V.
LADIES AND GENTLEMEN: We are again assemble I to
take into consideration the subject of Mesmerism.  Its
growing interest in the public mind is manifest, by the
increasing throngs that assemble in this chapel, to investigate its claims to truth and science, and the multitudes
that are obliged to retire, unable to gain admittance.
As several notes, since my entrance into this house,
have been handed me, I shall be obliged to omit intro.
ductory remarks, and attend to two or three importantA
requests.
An inquiry is made as to the number of deg ees or
states into which a subject may be thrown. In reply to
this, I would say, that there are but FIvE degrees which
have, as yet, come under my observation.  The FIRST
degree is, when the hands or even the whole body of the
subject can be attracted by the conjoint action of the
mental and physical energies of the magnetizer.  The
SECOND degree is, when the hands, or body of the subject.
can be attracted by the mental energies alone, or by the
physical energies independent of any mental effort. The
THIRD degree is, when the subject can neither hear nor
answer any person but the magnetizer and those who
are in communication.  The FOURTH degree is, when the
subject can taste what the magnetizer tastes, and smell
what lie smells. The FIFTH degree is clairvoyance.  I
would not be understood that these five degrees alwava




ANIMAL MAGNETISM. I61 
oc ur in the order I have now stated them; but I mean
that there are these five different degrees. Some never
seem to go further than the third degree, and no surgical
operation should be performed, unless the subject be put
completely into this third state, so that no voice but the
magnetizer's can be heard.  It can then be performed
without any pain.
Another inquiry is made, whether any person can put
himself into communication with the subject without the
magnetizer's consent? I answer, yes. Any person may
put himself into communication by ardently fixing his
attention upon the subject while another is magnetizing
him, especially if he sits near him.  Or he may do it
by touching, or too freely handling him.  He may do
it by violently throwing his hands towards him, and
within a foot of his body. Or, lastly, he may take two
or three electric shocks from a charged Leyden jar,
within eight or ten feet of the subject, being careful to
fix his eyes firmly upon him  while taking the shock.
The second or third shock; the subject will start with
him who receives it  and when he starts he is in cor
munication.
A third inquiry is made, whether any one but the
tnagnetizer:can awaken the subject? Certainly, any per.
son who is put in communication with him can take him
out of the state.  Or'by a firm  determination, he can
awaken himself.  In fact, he may be put in bed, and in
a few hours, say from  eight to fourteen, he will come
out of it the natural way.
A fourth, and last inquiry is made, if magnetism  be
true, why has not more of t been seen, at least in some
small degree, in different ages?  I answer, that its history dates back to a very early age which I cannot now
6




62                  LECTURES ON
pursue, but woald refer to "FASCINATION, or the Philos.
ophy of Charming, illustrating the principles of life in
connection with spirit and matter," published in New
York city by Fowlers & Wells; also to the AMERICAN
PIIRENOLOGICAL JOURNAL.  They are conducted with
great ability, and should be in possession of every family
But the inquirer asks, "why has not more of it been
seen, at least in some small degree, in different ages?"
I answer, it has been seen and felt. Have you nevei
read the bold, lofty, and full-gushing eloquence of De.
mosthenes, whose thunders roused Greece into action,
and moved her sons as the wind in its rushing majesty
moves the sublime magnificence of ten thousand forests?
This was but the magnetic principle, the lightning of
the mind, by which they were electrified, and made to
act as one man against the powers of Philip. The same
is true of Cicero, who shook the Roman senate with his
voice, and beneath the electric glance of whose awful
eye, even Cataline quailed.  I am well aware that you
will call this sympathy.  But what is sympathy?  It is
the nervo-vital fluid thrown from a full, energetic brain,
upon another of kindred feeling.  That brain being
roused affects another, and that still another, till the whole
assembly are brought into magnetic sympathy with the
speaker, and by him are moved as the soul of one man.
As a further answer to this question. I will notice one
fact more; and in doing this, I shall remove what has
long been considered as a stigma on a large and respect.
able denomination. I mean the Methodists. Ever since
that,lass of Christians had a religious existence in the
United States, persons have fallen down into a species
of trance. Other denominations call this delusion, and
nmriy call it deception, because such things never occur




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                 63
in their meetings. But there is no deception in this —it
is really the magnetic state-or more properly the spiritual state. Every preacher cannot do it, and as it is
done without contact, comparatively few are subjects
of it.
But take a preacher of strong muscular powers; one
who has large concentrativeness, and eye of. lightning,
and a warm, a sincere, and ardent soul.  He enters a
tent at camp-meeting, where there are fifteen or twenty
persons.  He kneels down and prays most fervently;
he rises and sings most devotionally. He is in close
contact with his little group. He begins to exhort most
sincerely; and soon the deep fountains of his soul are
broken up.  A female, perchance, is moved to tears.
His concentration being large, he keeps his eye steadily
fixed upon her, and he wills and desires, that she shall
feel as he feels, and be converted to God. At length
she falls into this singular state.  She has gone there in
the preacher's feelings, and in his feelings she will come
out of it.  Now, if he would fillow my directions, he
could restore her in two minutes. I will pledge lnyself
to arouse any one from  this magnetic state in five
minutes. Dr. Cannon, of this city, took a lady out of
this state a few weeks ago, in Provincetown, who was
thrown into it in a religious meeting, and who appeared
nearly lifeless. A report of this was published in the
"Christian Freeman."  Now all these are really magnetlc effects that we have seen, and for many years in
succession. So the inquiries are all answered, and I
hope, to the satisfaction of the inquirers and the congre.
gation.
I must now proceed to notice the dangers and abuses
of M\esmerism.  It is often said by its opposers, that




64                  LECTURES ON
even if it be tlie yet it is dangerous, because it can b;e
abused, and therefore ought not to be practised.  But'o you know of any blessing beneath these heavens but
wh-lt has been, and still continues to be abused?  TNo
you do not. Do you know of a more common blessing
than taste? yet to gratify their taste, millions on millions
have gone down to a drunkard's tomb   M Mothers have
been more than widowed, and children more than orphanized.  They have been beaten and abused, and
suffered cold, and hunger, and nakedness.  Under it,
crimes have been committed, and the state prisons filled
with wretched men. Human beings have also by millions gone down to their graves through excess in eating.
But is taste a curse because men abuse it? and must it,
therefore, be struck from the catalogue of Heaven's
mercies?  All answer, no. Acquisitiveness, benevolence, and comb: tiveness can be abused, and so can all
the organs of the human brain. But ought they not on
that account to be indulged?
Once more: there is not a greater blessing than the
Gospel of Christ. It teaches us to love and forgive our
enemies; to resist not evil, and to do unto others as we
would that they should do unto us. It is calculated to
moderate our feelings in prosperity-to comfort us in
the day of adversity-and to sustain us under all the
troubles and disappointments incident to mortal life.
When our parents, friends and children are on their
dying bed, we can shake the farewell hand of mortal
separation, with the hope of meeting them again in future
realms. And not only so, but when we lie down upon
the bed of death, and the embers of life feebly glimmner
in the socket of existence, then the Gospel of Christ
points us to brighter scenes —s;enes beyond the toamib




ANIMAL MAGNETISM..5
Yet nlen have abused that gospel, and one denomination
has risen up against another, and doomed each other to
the stake.  Rivers of human blood have flowed in the
holy wars.  But is the gospel a curse, and should it he
struck from  existence merely because men abuse it?
No, is the answer of every Chriistian heart.  Then the
objection fails. One thing must settle this point. There
is nothing that God has established as a law in our nature, but what was designed to be a blessing to his
creatures.  The magnetic principle is not of man, but
one the Creator has established, and is, therefore, a
blessing. And if it could not be abused, it would diffel
firom all other blessings he has bestowed on man.
But it is said, that a man upon the high-way may be
thrown into the state and robbed.  But I deny that any
person can be thrown into the state against his will, if
he will at the same time use physical resistance. And
when in the magnetic state, he has twice the strength to
resist, and defend himself, that he has when out of it,
We generally know  with whom we have to deal, and
surely we would not suffer an enemy, nor the unprincipled, to put us into the mesmeric slumber.  But if you
wish to be safe, and are really fearful of consequences,
I will give you a rule of action.  It is this: never allow
any one to magnetize you unless it be in the presence of
a third person. Observe this rule, and no danger arising
from this source will ever cross your path.
Having answered these objections, I will now  show
you where there are real dangers  In the first place,
thougllh every person can be mesmerized, yet there are
but few who can be easily thrown into this state. The
greatel proportion, by far, would require several hours
of hard labor  Hence, whea one is found who is easy
In




ft6                 LEC TURES ON
to mesmerize, curiosity is awakened, and every one
wishes to make the trial of his power and skill. One
mesmerizes this individual in the morning, another in the
evening and a new set of operators perform the same
task on the next day, and so on. Now, in such cases,
there is that mixing and crossing of all these different
fluids in the subject's brain, which, if persisted in too
long. will prove injurious, even if all these magnetizers
are healthy persons. If you mesmerize a person, and
thoroughly wake him, yet the whole of that fluid does
not completely pass from his brain short of a week.
Select one healthy magnetizer, and continue him. If
you change to another, then wait a fortnight before you
allow him to operate.  Too much care in this respect
cannot be taken. But I point out to you a still more serious danger.
There are persons who undertake to mesmerize others,
who have some local disease, or are in feeble health.
By so doing, they injure themselves, and also the subject. Such persons have no nervo-vital fluid to spare,
and what little they have is in a diseased state, and unfit
to be thrown upon the nervous system of another.  I
care not what the disease may be, by long persisting in
mesmerizing a person, that disease will be, at length,
communicated to the subject. Great caution, in this re.
spect, should be observed by both parties, if they would
not impair their health. Weakness of lungs, and even
consumption. may be, by thirty or forty magnetizings,
brought upon an individual, and send him to his grave
I therefore seriously admonish you to beware of this
common danger.  Never allow any person of a poor
constitution to put you into this state; and I also warn
those wh, are diseased, or even in delicate health, never




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                 67
to mesmerize others, for they will, by so doing, inflict
upon themselves a serious injury
But, on the other hand, there is no danger in a healthy
person magnetizing those who are diseased.  As the
operator imparts the nervo-vital fluid, and does not receive any in return, he is in no danger of taking the disease of his patient. Caution is, however, to be observed
in taking the patient out of this state.  He should not
make the upward passes in such a manner as to throw
the fluid on himself. If he do, he is in some danger of
contracting the disease. An experienced magnetizel
will understand how to avail himself of this caution.
Once more: there are persons who undertake to mag
netize others who are entirely ignorant as to the mode
of operatlon, and frequently bring persons into serious
difficulty by getting alarmed, or otherwise thrown out
of bias in their feelings. Several cases of this kind I
have been called to attend to, in various sections, and
some of a very serious character.  No persons should
undertake to mesmerize others until they shall have
learned of some experienced magnetizer how to perform
it, and made themselves acquainted with all the difficulties that may cluster around it.
Having attended to these important points, I will now
turn your attention to local magnetism. By local magnetism, I mean the magnetizing of some part of the
human body without charging the whole brain. Hence,
the finger, the hand, the arm, the leg, yes, even the eyelid, the lip, or the tongue, may be mesmerized while the
person is in the wakeful state, and so may be any of the
phrenological organs.  It is true, that this cannot be Qo
easily done on persons who have never been mesmerized
at all, as on thnse who have been thrown into the stpte.




~68            I CLECTURES ON
If the brain has leen once magnetically siLdued, ihen
there is no occasion, even if the amputation of a iimb is
to be performed, to magnetize any other part than the
one to be subjected to the operation.  If a person be
very hard to mesmerize, then it will be proportionally
difficult to mesmerize any limb.  But it will be borne in
mind, that however long it may take in successive sittings to magnetically subdue the brain, yet after that is
once accomplished, then the person can, in future, be
wholly mesmerized at any time in five minutes, and
locally so in a much less period.- Hence, should an arm
be broken or mutilated, it will only be necessar: to put
that limb into the magnetic state, and it can be set or
amputated without pain; and thus, by occasionally renewing the mesmeric action, it can be eopt in this state
and healed, without ever experiencing any suffering
whatever.
I perceive that some smile in view  of these statements.  They are truly so wonderful, that incredulity
adjures us to reject them.  But they are, nevertheless,
Heaven's unchanging truths, which cannot bend to circumstar.ces, nor shape themselves to the belief cr scepticism of men. They stand out in bold relief, and bid
defiance to the sneers and scorns of mankind. A surgical operation has just been performed in Lowell on a
lady while in the mesmeric state.  A tumor was extracted from the shoulder, where it was necessary to
cut to the depth of two inches. ADr. Shattuck was the
magnetizer; and in the presence of several medical men
of Lowell, one of wvhom was the operator, this tumor
was removed without the slightest sensation of pain.
This was not done in a corner, but publicly, and in the
presence of several hundred sp ctators.  It is loo late




ANIMAL MAGNETISM. 
in the day to cry "HUMBUG AND (C LLUSION," ior the bat.
die is fought, and the victory is won, and the scale has
turned in favor of truth, and turned with most preponderating weight, and on the stereotyped  argument
" IIUMBUG AND COLLUSION," is written " TEKEL."
Well authenticated facts, and medical reports of ope.
rations in surgery iand dentistry, performed under the
energies of Mesmerism; in both continents, and without
pain, are continually reaching us., And v ith this flood
of light pouring upon the world, and when men of the
first talents and science in the republic of letters, and
out of all the various professions and denominations, are
among its advocates, scepticism is not only waning, but
justly losin-g its popularity.  Those men have seriously
investigated ard weighed the matter, and they severally
dteclare, as did the Rev. Mr. Pierpont, on the last evening, before two thousand hearers, in this h:ouse, "I have
no B3ELIEF' nor UNBELIEF on this subject.  I KNOW, I
KNOW  it to be so!"  And now I ask, what ought tho,IPMIRE OPINION, or the expressed UNBELIEP of even an
honest sceptic, to weigh against the absolute and certain
KNOWLEDGE of an equally honest, intelligent, and scientific mran. whose character is above suspicion?  I leave
the candid to judge, and have only to say, that in the
face of modestvy they have no right to call this science
U IiUMBUG AND COLLUSION."
Others pretend that the science of animal Magnetism
was condemned by the French Committee in Paris.
amongl' whom  our illustrious Franklin was numbered.
And( as it received its condemnation under the scrutiny
of sue}lh minds, therefore they conclude that it has no
foundation in truth   There always have been,:nd still
are, nw'i who dare i_-t think for themselves, but wholly




70                  LECTURES ON
lean upon the opinions of others. Their father, thei't
doctor, their lawyer, and their min ster, thought thus and
so, and they think just so, too. Their fathers put down
a central stake, gave them their length of line, and bid
them travel round in that circle of revolving thought
till the day of their death! All beyond that circle is
darkness! Their field of thought is as exactly measured
off to them, and just as legally bequeathed to them, as
their farms. They received them both by inheritance.
For the one they never LABORED, and for the other they
never THOUGHT! And they never questioned the TRUTH
of the one, any more than they did their title to the
other!
But surely the French Committee did not deny the
truth of the experiments produced, nor pronounce them
4" HUMBUG AND COLLUSION." They simply decided that the
evidence adduced was not sufficient to prove that the
magnetic state was caused by a FLUID proceeding from
the magnetizer. They attributed the singular effects
they witnessed to the power of the imagination.  But it
will also be remembered, that this committee were not
all agreed, and hence appeared the remonstrance of the
minority, which it would be well for modern sceptics to
read, side by side with the report.
Many sceptics have been obliged, like the French
Committee, to admit certain results as being truly wonderful, and, like them, attribute it to the force of the
imagination. But to believe that the imagination can
bring human beings into a state where limbs can be amputated, tumors cut out, teeth extracted, and breken
bones set, and the vhtlole healed without experiencing
one throb of pain-to believe, I say, that the imagination can do all these wonders, in giving such boundless




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                71
tnull.    " pain, requires a far greater stretch of cre.
dulity      0.: o believe in the magnetic powert And
surely if t'I  agination possesses the wonderful charm
to bring the irvous system into a condition where we
can bid defiance to pain, and gain a complete victory
vever the whole frightful army of human woes, then surely
the science is equally important, possesses the samn.
transcendent claims upon our benevolence, and the man
who discovered that the imagination possessed this
charm is worthy of the united thanks of all human-kind 
and being dead, his bones are worthy to repose with the
great men of the universe. In this case it will only be
necessary to change its name, and call it-THE SCIENCE
OF TIlE WONDERFUL POWER OF THE HUMAN IMAOI(tlTIQO
FO CHARM ALL PAIN.




LECTURE VI.
LaSIES AND GENTLEMEN: In the first four lectures I
delivered of the present course, I brought forward the
philosophy of Mesmerism, and flatter myself that I have
not only succeeded in establishing it as a science, but
have shown it to be one of transcendent interest to the
human race. Here love and benevolence stretch out a
healing hand over a world groaning and travailing in
pain.  Those groans, by that silken hand, shall be
hushed, and those pains be removed. There is a powel
basined up in the fountains of the soul, that has long
been dormant. But it is rousing up and stirring itself for
some mighty action, and is already beginning to gush
forth in healing streams on the world. This science is
in its infancy, is imperfectly understood, but yet it
breathes the breath of mercy as a sovereign cure for
all human woes.
In my last lecture, I answered several notes of
inquiry, pointed out the dangers of Magnetism, refuted
several common objections in re ation to its abuses,
noticed the utility of the science in performing painful
surgical operations, and took a friendly glance at the
conduct of men in justifying their scepticism by pleading
the general issue of the Report of the French Committee, and concluded by touching lightly upon the
power of the human imagination.
I nowv stand before you in the confident conviction




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                  73
that much good will result from my labors to the cause
of benevolence and mercy.  I am urged to repeat my
course of lectures next week, but it will be out of,ny
power to comply with this request at tha- time, but havy
consented to do so, week after next. As this will bc
my closing lecture for the present, I can render you no
greater service than to show what connection this subject has with divine revelation.  I am well aware that
many will call me an enthusiast, and sneer at, and condemn me for thinking independently.  But when the
path of duty is plain, and when I am once satisfied of
truth, I then go on, and reason, fearless of all consequences.  Under such circumstances, I have nothing to
do with the inquiry, what will men think of me? I care
lot what they'think, and much less do I care what they
say. I suffer no man to invade the sanctuary of my
civil and religious rights, and dictate to me how I shall
think, or what I shall believe, or what I shall proclaim.
i therefore hold no one responsible for what I shall
advance in this lecture, nor do I know as there is one,
with whom I am connected, who will endorse my ideas.
I believe the doctrine of our Saviour to be a perfect
doctrine, and exactly adapted to the bodies as well as
to the souls of men. I believe that he is our example to
follow, and as he went about doing good, healing sickness, and relieving distress of body, as well as preaching
the gospel to heal the moral maladies of the soul, so it
is our duty to do the same.  It is, moreover, most evi
dent that his doctrine, to the full extent he commanded
his apostles to preach it, was -to go down to all subse.
quent ages, so long as human beings should  have a
habitation on earth. And our Saviour just as much cormmanded his apostles to heal the sick, as he did to preach
7




74                   LECTURES ON
the gospel.  Now I cannot believe tlhaL one half of the
power and mercy of his doctrine should cease with the
ninstry of his apostles, and the other half continue.  I
cannot believe that its healing efficacy, so far as the
body is concerned, should cease, and what was applicable to the soul should continue. If this be so, then what
a favored generation of Christians existed in that day,
so far, at least, as healing the body was concerned. It
was said, in the apostolic age, "Is any man sick, let him
send for the elders of the church, and let them lay their
hands upon him and pray, and the sick shall recover."
I believe this now, and so far as we have power and
faith, it can be accomplished now as well as ever.
There is a difference between a miracle and a gift of
healing. If an arm be palsied, we know that the difficulty exists in the brain, and that nothing more is necessary than to throw upon it a sufficient quantity of the
nervous fluid to bring it into healthy action.  The
moment this is accomplished, the difficulty existing in
the arm, which is but secondary, will be relieved. To
restore this, would be a gift of healing, but not a
miracle.  What, then, would be a miracle?  Answei;
amputate an arm, and then cause a new one to grow
out. Though healing diseases is sometimes called a
miracle, yet when speaking of them specifically, they
are not so denominated. Paul says, "God hath set some
in the church; first, apostles; secondarily, prophets;
thirdly, teachers; after that, miracles, then gifts of healings, helps, governmnents," etc.  And there is not a
scrap of evidence that these things were ever to cease
while the generations of men endured.
Now if our Saviour restored a palsied arm, then there
must something have passed from  lhim to the person




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                75
healed, in perfect accordance with the principles f animal life  It must, therefore, in this case, have been the
nervous fluid, as this was the only substance that could
have restored this arm.
It is undeniably true, that there was always somnething passed from our Saviour, when he exercised the
gilt of healing, to the person whom  he restored.  In
evidence of this, you will recollect, that on one occasion,
when he was called to visit a sick person, a multitude
followed after, and thronged him. As he passed by, a
woman, who had been afflicted with an issue of blood
for twelve years, touched the hem of his garment, and
was made whole.  He turned himself around, and said,
" Who touched me?" His disciples exclaimed, "Master
the multitude throng thee, and  sayest thou,' Who
touched me?' But he perceived that virtue had gone
out of him."  The word VIRTUE, in this instance, does
not mean moral goodness.  It means FORCE, POWER,
EFFICACY; the same as when we say a medicine has
great VIRTUE in it.
Our Saviour so lived, and breathed, and moved in the
divine Being, that he became one in communication
with him; so that when the Father WILLE), he felt that
will-He himself then willed, and it was accomplished.
So, if any one bowed in reconciliation to God, he
became one with the Saviour, so that the Redeemer
also, felt that one's will. Such was the case of this
woman. She willed in faith to be healed. The Saviour
flit that will-He willed, and it was done. Now every
being has power in proportion to the energy of his own
will; but the energy of the will, depends upon the
intrinsic greatness of that being's mind. And as a
miracle is a thing performed by the energy of the will




T76                 LECTURES ON
so THAT mind must be great in power an.l goodness,
that is capable of performing a miracle.  We sit down,
and put forth the energy of a thousand wills, and at last
produce but a small result.
The apostolic power was far greater, and in the same
ratio, their results were more splendid and glorious.
But still they had not the power of Christ. The leper
said, "Lord, if thou WILT, thou canst make me clean.
Jesus stretched forth his hand, and touched him, and
said, I WILL, be thou  clean, and  his leprosy was
cleansed."  By a word, he put to right disabled limbs,
and drew back life and warm  gushing health to their
abode.  He put forth a greater energy-and said to the
winds. and waves, Peace! be still! His will fastened
upon electricity in the heavens, equalized that fluid
hushed the winds, and calmed the waves.  He opened
the blind eye to the splendor of the noon-tide blaze, and
instantly penciled on  its retina, the universe.  He
opened the deaf ear, and poured into its once silent, but
now vocal chambers, the hqrmony of rejoicing nature.
lie spoke, and the dead stirred in their graves, and rose
up from their icy beds before him, and walked. That
same dread voice shall speak with a living energy, that
the very heavens shall hear, and the dead shall rise to
die no more, and turn their eyes from the dark, ruinable
tomb on the scenes of eternity! Mind and will in the
Creator, still more increased, move unnumbered worlds.
That same will, now infinite and immutable. puts forth
creative energy.  He spake, and it was done; He commanded. and it stood fast; laid the measures thereof,
and stretched the line upon it when the morning stars
sang together, and all the sons of God shouted for joy.
Hence, every grade of mind, from the humblest up to




ANIM AL  MAGNETISM                7
apostolic great.ess; up to angel and archangel, cheruhim and seraphim; up to Jesus Christ, till it reach the
infinite Jehovah, has power proportionate to its greatness and goodness.  Hence, it will be readily understood, that a miracle is nothing more than a result produced by mind itself, independent of all physical energy,
except that one substance which is put into motion by
the living mind.
It may perhaps be said, that the apostles were inspired
to heal. and as we are not inspired, therefore we do not
possess the gift to heal.  On this principle I might
reply, that the apostles were inspired to preach, and as
w;, are not inspired, therefore, we have no gift to
preach!  I grant that the apostles were inspired to
preach and to heal, because it was not possible, that at
the starting point, they had any other means for preparation.  But now men preach, not by inspiration, but
because they feel it to be their duty. So men must now
&eal because they feel it to be their duty.
It is by no means to be expected that we can come
up, at once, to apostolic power. No; our faith is too
weak. But let us bring up our children in the faith as
we ought, and they will learn to mesmerize as naturally
as they learn to walk.  Their concentrativeness will
become largely developed. Their children will be born.
with more favorably developed heads, and  become
greater in goodness, until at length the whole apostolic
power will return to the earth in all its primitive splendor. It is SPIRITUALISM, because it is the innate power
of tne living mind, executed through the agency of the
will. It is that power which created worlds, for this
was done by the will of God. It is that power by which
worlds are governed. and creatures ruled, fot this'
7*




78                  I ECTURES ON
also done by the will of God. It is that power by
which we make impressions reciprocally upon each
other, for this is done by the will of man. And lastly,
it is "that power which shall awake the dead from
dreamless slumber into thoughts of heaven," for this will
be done by the will of God, and there is no medium,
only electricity, through which he can come in contact
with his creatures.
I will now bring forward a few cases from Scripture,
to show that the living have been thrown into a singular
slumber by the very presence of immortal beings.  In.
deed, there is' scarcely an instance where angels have
appeared to men, but what it has had this effect. I will
bring forward those that first strike my mind, regardless
of their arrangement.
It will be remembered, that when John the Revelator
was in the isle of Patmos, he had this vision: "And
being turned, I saw seven golden candlesticks, and in
the midst of the seven candlesticks, one like unto the
Son of man, clothed with a garment down to the foc
and girt about the paps with a golden girdle. His heao
and his hair were white like wool; as white as snow,
and his eyes were as a flame of fire; and his feet like
unto fine brass as if +hey had been burned in a furnace,
and his voice as the sound of many waters. And he
had in his right hand seven stars, and out of his mouth
went a sharp two-edged sword, and his countenance
was as the sun shineth in his strength. And when I
saw him I fell down at his feet as one that is dead."
Here then, is a singular slumber approximating death.
Our Saviour, when he was transfigured on Mount'Tabor, t'n.k Peter, James, and John with him. For a
moment he was changed into his resurrection splendor




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                79
and met Moses and Elias in glory.  The sacred historian, in describing the scene, says, " And his face did
shine as the sun, and his raiment became shining, ex.
ceeding white as snow, white as the light, so as no fille,
on earth can white them, and there appeared unto them
Moses and Elias. talking with him. And Peter and them
that were with him were heavy with sleep; and Peter
said, Lord, it is good for us to be here.  Let us build
here three tabernacles; one for thee, one for M gses,
arid one for Elias; not knowing what he said." That is,
when he came out of this sleep he did not recollect
what he had said. They were thrown into this state by
the very presence of these minds.
Do you remember that after our Lord had eaten his
valedictory supper with his disciples, he went into the
garden oif Gethsemane, and commanded them to watch?
He went a few steps from them  and prayed in agony,
and sweat as it were drops of blood falling to the
ground.  The guardian angel of Jesus Christ appeared
from heaven strengthening him.  The apostles fell into
a deep sleep.  Though this was a scene of great interest
to them, yet it seems that the presence of this ange
thus affected them.
He was nailed to the cross between two malefactors,
to darken his glory and blot his name. The Jews were
nis accusers, and the Romans his executioners. Hence,
the world was combined against him, while his own
disciples forsook him in that dark hour of peril. The
universe thus combined against him, mocking and de.
riding him, and covering him with disgrace, even nature
herself stepped for ward as it were, and with a mighty
hand wiped off that disgrace, and sustained him in his
majesty.  The sun w thdrew his light, rolled back his




80                  LECTURES ON
chariot, midnight darkness spread her robe of sacK,
cloth upon his brilliant disc, and hung the world in the
dark shroud of mourning.  Earthquakes awoke frotn
their tartarean dens and thundered.  The earth shook,
the rocks rent, the graves opened, all nature reused up
and there brought to a centre all that is grand, awful, and
sublime in her realms, as the magnanimous sufferer expired! lie was conveyed to his tomb, and Roman soldiers were there stationed to guard it.  Soldiers whose
business it was to die,-who had been brought up in
tented fields of war, and who had from childhood encountered hardships and toils, fatigues and dangers.
They were men, who had often bared their bosons to
the shafts of battle, and undismayed listened to its stormy
voice, and who knew not what it was to quail beneath
the glance of a mortal eye. Such men as these, were
stationed to guard that tomb, and hold the Prince of Lifo
in death. But-' An angel's arm can't snatch him from the grave;
Legions of angels can't confine him there."
On the morning of the third day, the last grand scene
in this interesting drama was opened.  The guardian
angel of Jesus Christ was once more dispatched from
the eternal throne.  He descended from heaven, and an
earthquake shook creation.  He approached the tomb
of the Holy Sleeper, and stood before it. "He rolled
back the stone from the door of the sepulchre and sat
upon it. Iis countenance was like the lightning, and
his raiment white as snow; and for fear of him. the
keepers did shake, and become as dead men!"
What, I ask, was it that threw them into this slumber
with feelings of a cold shuddering fear, so nigh approaching the dead? I answer, it was the WILL of this




ANIMAL MAGNETISM.                81
angel, whose counterance was like the lightning, that
sunk them  into a motionless sleep. It was his WILL
which struck the vibrations of terror through the dark
chambers of their souls, and withered them to the earth.
I should like to notice the circumstance of Paul being
caught up into the third heavens-whether out of the
body or in the body, he could not tell-of Peter falling
into a trance when he went upon the house-top to pray,
and of Zacharias being struck dumb in the temple; but
time will not permit.
I close, by returning my sincere thanks to the Moderators, for the good order they have preserved; to, the
various Committees, for their patient examinations'and
impartial reports of the experiments performed; and to
the ladies and gentlemen, for their faithful attendance
and respectful attention, and also for the good feelings
they have uniformly manifested. towards the lecturer
during the entire course, which is now  brought to a
termination.




82            THE SOUL TIIE SEAT OF PAIN.
NOTE.-FROM CHANN ING.'WE are created with a susceptibility of pain, ano
severe pain. This is a part of our nature, as truly as
our susceptibility of enjoyment. God has implanted it.
and aas thus opened in the very centre of our being a
fountain of suffering.  We carry it within us, and can
no more escape it than we can our power of thought.
We are apt to throw  our pains on outward things as
their causes.  It is the fire, the sea, the sword, or human
enmity, which gives us pain. But there is no pain in the
fire or the sword, which passes thence into our souls.
The pain begins and ends in the soul itself.  Outward
things are only the occasions. Even the body has no
pain in it, which it infuses into the mind. Of itself, it is
incapable of suffering.  This hand may be cracked,
crushed in the rack of the inquisitor, and that burnt in a
slow  fire; but in these cases it is not the fibres, the
blood-vessels, the bones of the hand which endure pain.
These are merely connected, by the will of the Creator,
with the springs of pain in the soul. Here, here is the
only origin and seat of suffering.  If God so willed, the
gashing of the flesh with a knife, the piercing of the
heart with a dagger, might be the occasion of exquisite
delight.  We know that, in the heat of battle, a wound
is not felt, and that men, dying for their faith by instruments of torture, have expired with triumph on their lips.
In these cases, the spring of suffering in the mind is not
touched by the lacerations of the body, in consequence
of the absorbing action of other principles of the soul,
All suffering is to be traced to the susceptibility, the capacity of pain, which belongs to our nature, and which
the Creator has implanted ineradicably within us."




PSYCHOLOGY;
OR'THE
SCIENCE OF THE SOUL,
CONSIDERED
PHYSIOLOGICALLY AND PHILOSOPHICALLY.
rITH AN APPENDIX, CONTAINING NOTES OF MESMERIC ANS
PSYCIICAL EXPERIENCE.
ef JOSEPH HADDOCK, aM.D..
WITH ENGRAVINGS OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM.
NEW YORK:
PUBLISHED BY SAMUEL R. WELLS
No. 389 BROADWAY.
1874.




E,telt accoring to act of Congress, in the year',, 
FOWLERS AND WELLS,
tsh Clerk's O(ce of the District Court for the Soutoern District of  e a Aisd




PREFACE.
T'HIS work was recently published in LONDON under
the following title: " SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM3
otherwise VITAL MAGNETISM or MESMERISM: considered Physiologically and Philosophically: being the
substance of lectures delivered under the auspices of
the Bolton Miechanics' Institution; with an Appendix,
containing notes of Mesmeric and Psychical experiWe have taken the liberty to omit, in our title, such
terms as may not be fully understood by all readers;
taking care, however, to make it equally appropriate.
The subject on which this work treats, is fast becoming of the most absorbing interest to our people,
and it gives us pleasure to place before the American
public the conclusions of those who have penetrated
most deeply into these supposed mysteries of nature.
We look forward, hopefully, for the time when we
may IcNOW those things which the world have always
" believed" to be truths.  Nor is it POSSIBLE for ANY
influence to LIMTT the desires of the human mind to in.




PREFACE.
vestigate, until it has penetrated every subject which
comes within the range of its comprehension.
May this work go forth to "open the eyes of the
(spiritually) blind," and excite to further investigation
and reflection those minds best capacitated to evolve
" new light" on intellectual and spiritual vision.
This is a progressive age, not only in moral and
physical development, but in spiritual science.
AMERICAN PUBLISHBzb.
CLINTON HALL,
181 NASSAU ST.,NEW YoU.




TABLE  OF CONTENT-S.
PAGE~
INTRODUCTION TO PSYCHOLOGY.... 8-12
Characteristics of the age.-Chemistry a new science.-Geology.-A new world
without and a new world within man.-Knowledge not confined to superstitions, assumptions, barren negations, nor skeptical philosophy, but something
real-the nature, powers, and capabilities of his being.-Assistance afforded us
by a knowledge of magnetism, or psycheism.-Discoveries and doctrines of
an enlightened physiology.-Laws and developments of the world of mind
capable of being displayed belore our physical sight.-The curious and interesting phenomena displayed by mesmerism too often neglected.-Authority too
often nu aid in eliciting truth. The most astounding statements of mesmeric
experiments not more wonderful than universally admitted facts.-Wonderworking telegraph.-A dreaming theory or enthusiastic vision a reality.-MAesmerism the discovery of a new method of working an old medium.-A spiritual and a natural body.-The blessing of sight a fact that all philosophers have
been heretofore unable to explain.-Our present standard of knowledge should
not be the measure of future acquirements.-Psycheism a means of acquainting ourselves with the distinctive qualities of mind.
ORIGIN  OF  MESMERISM,....          12-17
In records ofpast ages extraordinary cures ascribed to miracle, or magic.NMagnetism disciovered toward the close of the last century.-Brief history of
M5esmer and his discovery, and method of applying it.
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY OF MESMERISM,. 17-60
Stages or degrees of mnesmeric influence.-How they are to be understood and
accounted for.-The brain and nervous system the medium through which the
mind acts upon the body.-Illustrations and descriptions of the brain, etc. (see
list cf illustrations).-Methods of inducing the somnolent state.-Remarkable
facts.-Catalepsy. -Phantasy.-Transfer of Feeling.-Phreno-mesmerism.Ccretral lucidity, or clairvoyance.
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY OF MESMERISM, 60-78
Clairvoyance the internal sight of the soul.-Sight without the aid of the eye not
more difficult of explanation, when thoroughly examined, than ordinary viaion.-Description of the human eye.-Clairvoyance and ordinary vision as.
sune the same basis.-Mind find matter, soul and body, psyche or animus.The external of the spirit.-Psycheism, or the science of the soul as manifested in nature.-Psychological change induced by mesrnerism.-The superior
etate.-lndependent clairvoyance.-The general power of the sensorium to
form images within itself of objects that are without itself.Are all persons
subject to mesmeric influence? and why all cannot be made clairvoyant




TABLE OF CON-TENTS.
APPENDIX.
PAGB.
MESMERIC AND PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCE,.    78-95
Case of E. L.-Injury of the knee.-Treatment.-The vapor of ether.-Its effects.
-Hypnotism. -Phreno-magnetic developments. -Catalepsy.-figidity. —Attraction.-Delusion.-Susceptibility without the mesmeric sleep.-Personal influence.-Mesmerism without contact.-Tooth extraction. —Discovery of lucidity and clairvoyance.-Reading in a mesmeric state.-Pictures a reality.-De.
scription of absent persons and objects.-Picture of the cat.-Emma's visit to
the queen.-To the planets.-Omnipresent vision.-The cash-box stolen.-Suc.
cessful clairvoyant search for it, and interview with the thief.-Tracing the
route and circumstances of a traveler.
CLAIRVOYANCE AS APPLIED TO PHYSIOLOGY AND
MEDICINE,.......  95-100
Description of man's internal structure.-The application of this power one of
the most legitimate uses of clairvoyance.-Discovery of disease by the handwriting of a person at a distance, also by a lock of hair.-Remarkable cure of
insanity by the aid of clairvoyant prescriptions.-Tasting medicines through
bottles.-The exalted sense.
SPONTANEOUS EXTASIS, OR TRANCE,..                            101-106
A higher and more interior character.-Scenery and nature of the spirit-world.Recollections, predictions, and verifications.-Rigidity and insensibility to pan
during a trance.-Communications with the spirits of the dead.-Finding a
Bible and a particular place in it.-Man represented as a spiritual being after
death, and his sensational perception.-The male and female sexes retained -
Growth of infants.-The living influenced by the spirits of the dead.-Spirits
not subject to the laws of time or space.-The body only the "e/ell' of th-d
spirit.
PRACTICE AND USE OF MESMERISM,.. 106-109
A simple process.-Depends more on peculiar constitution of the subject that
power of the operator.-Modes of operating.-Curative influence of mnesmer
ism.-Necessity of Mesmerisers.-Mesmeric institutions.
ILLUSTRATIONS.
1 Cerebro-Spinal Axis.                 9. Horizontal Section of the Brain.
2. The Nerves of the Brain.           10. The Cerebellum, etc.
3. View of the Top of the Brain.       1. Parts about the Base of the Brain,
4. Side View of the Brain.            12. Right Hemisphere of the. Brain.
5, Front View of a Section of the  13. Vertical Section ot the Brain.
Spinal Cord and Nerve.            14. Perpendicular Section of the Brain
3. View of the Structure of the Brain  15. Right Hemisphere of the Brain.
7. The Right Hemisphere of the Brain  16.' Ganglionic System of Vegetable Life
B. The Cerebellum.                    17. Spinal Cord, etc.'




IN TRODUCTIO N.
1. ON  of the striking characteristics of the present
age, is the vast amount of knowledge respecting external objects, which has been accumulated in a comparatively short period. For within the compass of
human life, so extensive has been the discovery of
the physical properties of natural substances, that
Chemistry, although of ancient date, may be considered as a new science; and Geology has opened a new
world to human enquiry.  While man has thus been
permitted to increase his knowledge of the world without him, we might reasonably expect that some additional knowledge would be acquired of the world
within him.  That his knowledge would not be confined to the superstitions of the dark ages, or to the
assumptions of self-constituted authority on the one
hand; nor to the barren negations of a sceptical philosophy on the other hand; but that something real,
positive, and satisfactory, should be learnt respecting
his own constitution.  For what knowledge can be so
interesting to man, as a knowledge of himself? of the
nature, powers, and capabilities of his own being.
2. To every calm, and well-informed enquirer, it
will, I think, be evident, that the remarkable pheno
mena of what is called Mesmerism-or, as it is con



^8  ~        ~~ INTRODUCTION.
sidered that it may more properly be called —PsYCIEISM, rightly interpreted, do afford us the means of
acquiring a knowledge of the laws and nature of the
psychical, or mental part of our being, as much transcending what is commonly known, as the recent discoveries in magnetism and electricity exceed the ancient
ideas of those natural powers; and at the same time,
they afford us the means of becoming better acquainted
with the more abstruse points in our bodily organization also.
3. The discoveries and doctrines of an enlightened
physiology, teach us, that all the forms and forces of
the entire universe are found in their highest perfection in the bodily form of man; and that in him, as
the JMicrocosm, or little world; is to be found all that
exists in the Macrocosm, or great world of the universe.  And as in the great world without us, the
most astonishing and transforming powers are displayed
by those subtle, imponderable, and invisible elements,
which elude the most acute physical senses, even when
aided by the highest artificial means; so in the world
within us, the most wonderful and unexpected powers
are manifested by those psychical or mental operations,
by which the laws and developments of the world of
mind are capable of openly being displayed before our
physical sight.
4. But the curious and interesting phenomena displayed by Mesmerism, instead of being calmly and
carefully investigated by all enquiring minds, especially
by those whose profession or pursuits ought to havo
interested them in the enquiry, have, in too many in.
stances, been scornfully and contemptuously neglected.




INTRODUC ION. 
Authority, instead of lending its aid to elicit the truth,
has rather scowled upon the attempt which has been
made to lift the veil under which truth has been con
cealed; and in some cases, has misrepresented the
character and intentions of those, who, at any cost,
were determined to seek her for themselves.  It is
possible indeed, that the very remarkable results said
to flow from the enquiry —results, so different to the
expectations and ideas of a materializing age, and in
some respects, disclosing matters which seem to clash
with established opinions-may have been the reason,
for this unfair, and certainly unphilosophical mode of
proceeding.  But, granting that the most astounding
statements made by mesmeric experiments are true,
they are not, when properly considered, more wonderful
than things now universally admitted as facts. Look
at the wonder-working electric telegraph!  The elements on which that invention rests, must be as old as
the present order of things; yet if any one in the middle of the last century had ventured to assert that, by
human ingenuity, electricity or magnetism  could be
made to transmit human thought with mathematical
precision, and yet with the velocity of light, he would
have been set down by the practical authorities of that
age as a dreaming theorist, or an enthusiastic visionary.
To us, however, the visionary theory has become a
reality; and yet what magnetism or electricity really
are, is no more known to us than it was to our greatgrandfathers.. The truth is, the mode has been elicited,
by which certain comparative unknown mediums may
be practically applied to subserve the purposes of social life; and herein, and for all practical purposes1
I*




10               INTRODUCTION.
consists the f:seful discovery.  If we shall never know
what magnetism  and electricity in themselves really
are, we certainly do know much of the mode by which
their laws and powers may be developed and manifested: we have discovered a mode of working mediums
altogether unknown to our ancestors.
5. Just so, I apprehend, it is with the discoveries
of Mesmerism.  Here is, in fact, a discovery of a new
mode of working an old medium.. That mind and matter are both necessary to form the peculiar organism
we call man, is no new doctrine; but the true nature
of the body, as the mind's medium or instrument, and
of the necessary organization of that superior indwelling power-the soul or mind, which directs and
controls the outward form, has been somewhat overlooked.  Metaphysicians have studied mind irrespective of form or matter; and some philosophers would
resolve all things into material operation, irrespective
of mind, I believe that fact and demonstrative evidence will prove both classes of philosophers to be
wrong.  From Divine Revelation we know that there
is both spirit or mind, and matter; both a spiritual
body and a natural body.  These cardinal truths will
be found to lie at the bottom of all mesmeric experience, and from that experience, the a priori statements
of the Scriptures will receive abundant confirmation.
And we shall see that in our present state of existence,
if we wish to study mind or spirit, we must study it as
manifestcd in its divinely appointed, and true corres
pondent instrument, the material bodily organization.
6. With some of the mind's operations, and the
bodily functions andt sensations thence ensuing, we have




INTRODUCTION'          11
become so familiar, that we scarcely eve: stop to think
of the perpetual miracles involved in our daily experience.  Thus the great blessing of sight involves, as
we shall point out presently, a fact which all the
philosophers that have ever lived have been unable tc
explain!  Yet when some manifestation of mind or
spirit, which has hitherto eluded general notice, is
brought before us, although it may not be more inexplicable than natural sight, yet we are apt to deny
the possibility of the declared manifestation, simply
because we were not previously acquainted with itapt to make our present standard of knowledge the
measure by which all future acquisitions are to be
estimated.  Sometimes too, we are told authoritatively,
that it is impossible for us to know any thing of mind
or spirit.  What, I ask, do we know  of matter?
Simply some of its laws and properties; and from
these we predicate its qualities.  So it is with mind
or spirit; Mesmerism, or more truly Psycheism, fur
nishes us with a means of acquiring an experimental
acquaintance with some of its most distinctive qualities
-distinctive I mean with respect to the qualities of
inert matter.  Whether we shall ever know what spirit
or what matter really is, remains for a higher stage of
existence to determine. It is privilege enough to be
enabled to know something of the laws and properties
of that higher and imperishable organism, to which oui
outward bodily organism is subservient.




SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM
ORIGIN OF MESMERISM.
7. IN the records of past ages, we have many state,
ments of remarkable mental or psychical manifestations, and also of the performance of extraordinary
cures, by mental or moral agency, which ignorance and
superstition have ascribed to miracle or magic.  And
hence, cases resting on the best historical authority,
have been doubted, and even denied in later times.
Toward the close of the last century, the existence of
some of these powers was discovered, partly from accident and partly from research; and to the agency by
which they were accomplished, the name of Animal
Magnetism  was applied by its modern discovererMesmer.  This individual has been represented in
works of authority as an impostor and cheat, and& as
owing his celebrity entirely to the silly credulity of
imaginative people.  Few  persons who have really
taken the trouble to enquire into the matter, would
now  hazard such an assertion; yet, whether from
ignorance of the true cause of the phenomena lhe witnessed, or from a desire to mystify the subject, it must
be admitted that he both did and said many things
which Justified suspicion




ORIGIN OF' MESMERISM.             13
8. Anton Mesmer was born in 1734, at Mersburg,
in the shores of the Lake of Constance; and died in
nis native place in 1815, at the advanced age of eightyone.  At the age of forty-two he took the degree of
Doctor of Medicine, in the University of Vienna.  He
appears to have been a man of an imaginative cast of
mind; for the inaugural Thesis he published on ob.
taining his degree, was "On the influence of the
Planets on the Human Body."  Such a mind, if likely
to fall into many errors, was still open for the reception of any new ideas which might present themselves;
and was not prone, as men of a more sceptical cast, to
reject any new truth, because it did not harmonize
with preconceived opinions.  The then Professor of
Astronomy, at Vienna, believed in the efficacy of the
loadstone as a remedy in human disease; and he had
invented a peculiar form of magnetized steel plates,
which, it is said, he applied to the cure of disease with
much success. Mesmer obtained from the Astronomer,
who was his personal friend, these magnets, and applied them in his own way; and it is said, with such
striking results, that he communicated them to the
Astronomer, who published an account of them, but
attributed the cures performed to the form  of the
plates, and merely represented Mesmer as a physician
employed by him to use them.  Mesmer, who had discovered the peculiar mode of using them to insure success —that was, in fact, by manipulations, now called
PAssEs-was indignant at this, and accused his friend
of a violation of the confidence placed in him. The
result was a controversy between the parties; each
accusing the oth r.  Notwithstanding this quarlelI




14          SOMNOLISM AND PSYCGIEISM.
Mesmer proceeded in his own way, and acquired con.
siderable popularity.  But, whether from indiscretion
on his part, or jealousy on the part of others, he waa
opposed by the scientific authorities of Vienna, and
was ultimately obliged to quit that city.
9. In the year 1778, two years after obtaining his
degree, he arrived at Paris, whither his popularity appears to have preceded him; for we are told, even by
his enemies, that upon his opening public apartments
in that gay metropolis, for the reception of patients,
they were speedily crowded by the numbers who daily
resorted to them, including all classes, from the peer
to the peasant; and that hundreds were ready to testify to the cures wrought upon their own persons by
the Great Magnetizer.  Now, making every allowance
for imagination or fancy, striking results must have
followed his treatment, or no such enthusiasm could
have been raised in his behalf.  A French physician
became a disciple of Mesmer, and is said speedily to
have acquired the best practice in Paris. So great, in
fact, was Mesmer's success, that the French Government took up the matter, and offered him a large annual income, if he would communicate his secret, and
they appear to have thought so highly of the USE to
which this new agent might be applied, that they actually proposed to guarantee him a large sum, even if
a commission appointed to examine the subject should
make an unfavorable report! Mesmer, however, did
not accede to the government proposal.  After some
time, and divers vicissitudes, the sum of ~14,000 was
raised by his disciples, whom he had instracted in his
art, but whom he did not consider entitled to practice




ORIGIN OF MESMERISM.                15
it publicly —a right which they considered themselvea
to possess. o Mesmer then returned to his native place 
and this has been represented as " running away from
his dupes;" but it appears that he retained faith in
Vks views, and in his last illness sought relief from his
own discovery.
10. As Mesmer's discoveries arose out of the use
of magnets, it is not surprising that he should consider
Magnetism  as the agent by which the effects he witnessed were produced.  He therefore taught that there
was a fluid, or gas, universally diffused, which influenced
the earth, and planets, and all animated bodies, and
this fluid he called " Animal Magnetism."  He considered that it was capable of healing diseases of the
nerves immediately, and other diseases mediately; that
it perfected the action of medicines, and tended to promote favorable crises in disease; and that in Animal
Magnetism, nature presented a universal method of
healing the diseases, and preserving the health of man.
kind.  The great end of Mesmer's proceedings, appears, therefore, to have been USE-the application of
a remedy for human suffering; and he does not appear
to have been aware of the more curious, and distinctly
psychical phenomena elicited by later enquirers.  To
the Marquis de Puysegur, a French nobleman, one of
Mesmer's disciples, is attributed the discovery of the
faculty called Clairvoyance, in the year 1784.
11. For the sake of brevity, I omit describing Mesner/s mode of operating, save that among other means
for acting on his patients, he had a sort of box, filled
withl iron filings and pounded glass, placed in the centre
of the room where they assembled; and that they each




16          SOMN3T.: SM AND PSYCHEISM.
were placed in connection with it, by means of polished
metal rods, which they held in their hands; and the
patients were further united and connected by means
of a chain encircling them.  When the French Commissioners applied to this box the usual tests for terrestrial magnetism, and found no indication of ordinary magnetic influence, they reported that the whole
was the work of imagination, meaningfancy; yet admitting that cures were effected. This Commission
seems to have been both a prejudiced and unfair one.
Trhe name of Dr. Franklin occurs among the Commissioners, but he was at the time unwell, and incapable
of attending to the enquiry; and while the public report condemned Mesmer and his proceedings, one of
the Commissioners, who had paid the greatest attention to the proceedings, published a private or individual report favorable to him. But in the year 1826,
the French Government appointed a second Commission, and their Report, published in 1831, fully admits
the truth of all the phenomena usually ascribed to Animal Magnetism.  However, our business is not so
much with the opinions of Mesmer, or that of his
friends or enemies, as with that of the facts and phenomena associated with his name.  It was soon discovered that the steel rods had but little if any thing
to do with the phenomena produced; but the name of
Animal Magnetism continued to be used, and is still
used on the Continent, and by this name the practice
was introduced into England a few years ago. But
the English enquirers into this remarkable human faculty, finding that the use of a name, which implied
the existence of a fluid which could not be demon.




PHENOMENA, LTC. OF MESMERISM.          17
strated to the senses, was frequently turned into an
argument against facts which admitted of complete
demonstration, adopted out of respect to the memory
of Mesmer, and to avoid the appearance of the adoption of any theory of their own, the name of MESMERISr; just as Magnetism is applied to the properties
of the loadstone, from Magnes, the ancient reputed
discoverer of its powers, or Galvanism, to the discoveries of Galvani.  We therefore proceed to notice
the facts and phenomena associated with the names of
Mesmerism, or Animal Magnetism, and shall endeavor
to ascertain the Laws and Causes to which these phenomena may be referred.
PHENOMENA AND PHYSIOLOGY OF
MESMERISM.
12. There are several stages or degrees of what is
called Mesmeric Influence; or, in other words, the
Mesmeric or Psychic State, involves a variety of states,
having one common character, but presenting widely
differing phenomena.  Thus, there is simple JMesmeric
DROWSINESS or SLEEP; COMA, or more profound
sleep; INSENSIBILITY TO PAIN; this, I believe, only
occurs when the Mesmeric Coma is fully established,
and most of the external senses, together with the
proper consciousness of external objects is rendered dormant; and the internal faculty of imagination is called
into activity, without the guidance of true reason.
PHANTASY, Or that state in which the Mesmerisce




1.8        SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM.
person takes the mere suggestions of the mind of the
operator to be realities.  PHRENO-MESMERISM, or the
manifestation of the Phrenological sentiments and feelings, which is but another form of simple imaginative
action; TRANSFER OF STATE AND FEELING, or that
Imaginative action which causes the patient to feel
what is done to the Mesmeriser, as if it were done to
him;  MENTAL ATTRACTION, or apparent Magnetic
drawing of the person of the patient, even contrary to
his inclination.  CEREBRAL LUCIDITY, or apparent
illumination of the Brain; with other forms of what
is.Jl d1 CLAIRVOYANCE; but which I think would be
Detter called INNER VISION, or INTERNAL, or SPIRIT..
UAL SIGHT.  Assurning, therefore, for the present,
that these phenomena exhibit a series of great and important facts, which cannot be set aside, neither by
reason nor ridicule, I proceed at once to enquireHow we are to understand them?  In what way to
account for the curious and interesting manifestations
thus cast upon our notice?
13. We must now therefore examine the medium
by which the mind acts upon the bodily organizationnamely, the BRAIN and  NERVOUS SYSTEM.  It is
common to speak of the nervous system, as consisting of the brain, the spinal marrow, and the nerves
springing from them. This arrangement is true enough
as far as it goes; but it is not sufficiently particular
for our purpose. For upon examining the interior of
a human head, it will be found that every individual
has two distinct brains.  These two brains are very
different in size as well as form and cou;ioluti n. The
~upper and very much larger portion, and which in fact




ILLUSTRATIONS.
MMEBRO-SPINAL AXIS.
4~74
e le braiL
r Cerebellum.
f, Medulla oblonr.ta.
Sa, Nerves distributed to the arms.
h k, Great sciatic nerve distributed to tee to weI, Dorsal, and n, Lumber nerves.
i, Plexus of cervical nerves.
1, Olfactory nerve.
8, Optic nerve.
8,4,,'6, The third, fourth, fifth, and eixth  wv
7, Portio dura of the seventh nerve
8, Auditory nbrve and par vagum
6, Hypoglossal nerve.
(~, t (icpial aett.




20                  SOMNOLISM AND?SYCHEISM.
THE NERVES OF THE BRAIN.
a a a, Convolutions of the brain.
b, Cerebellum and arbor vita, or tree of l1.
c, Medulla oblongata.
d, Upper part of the spinal cord.
e, Eye.
f, Lateral ventricle.
o, Corpus callosum
n, Pineal gland. 
a, Quadrigeminal bodies.
1, Olfactory nerve.
2, Optic nerve.
3, 4, 5,6, Third, fourth, fifth, and sixth narve
5', 5", Branches of the fifth nerve,
7, Portio dura of the seventh nerve.
7', Auditory nerve.
8, Glossopharyngeal nerve.
8', Par vagum.
8", Spinal accessory nerve.
9, Hypoglossal nerve.
10, Sub-occipitaL nerve.
ilt 12l First and second cervical nrao




ILLUSTRATIONS. 
WVIW  OP THE TOP OF THE BRAIN.
A             A
AA, Ifon> art of the bmla
6a BB, 3.ht.     at k hb upira




22)                    SOMNOLISM AND PS CHEISM.
SIDE VIEW  OF THE BRAIN.
C-Cerebrum. D —Cerebellum. E-Medullaoblongata.
FRONT VIEW OF A SECTION OF THE SPINAL CORD AND NERVID
A —Spiia. cord. B-Spinal Nerve. C-Motor branch ospinal nerve.
D) —Ganglion At I)ose          u'Eor branch of piBaa   brv




ILLUSTRATIONS.                                             23
VIEW OF THE STRUCTURE OF THE BRAIW.
A                       A
B   B
AB, AB, Are the right and left hemispheres of the brain.
FF, The cerebellum.
AA, The anterior lobe.
e e, The line which denotes the separation between the anterior lobe and the mid(dle lobe
DD, The middle lobe.
BB, The posterior loble.
e, Tleponzs Varolii, wrllicl brings thle t vo sides of thle cerebellum into commrnication.  It iu 2g
htmed thle Ttber?annorsaroe.
t; Tlie tMedulloa oblorngata.
r r, Tlre Corpora pysramridalia.
B s, Tlre Corpora olivaria.
t t, The CrVorra reslfwrormia are   the Oppos te asde ol  re corpora pyraridalia.i




24                        SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM.
i.Flras  pair, or olfactory  nerves, arise by tl.iee origins. These unite and prol ecd forwsanrand
rnward in a groove in the inferior surface of the anterior lohes of the brain, and form  a gteVsh
swelling or ganglion. From this ganglion a great number of filaments proceed through the cribri.
f:rm plate of tie ethmoid Lone, and are distributed upon the mucous membrane of the i ose.  It is
the nerve of the senseof snell.
2. Second pair, or optic, arise principally from  the anterior corpora quadrigemenoa.  Each nerva
passes outward through the optic foramen Lu the sphenoid bone, and is expanded upon the retina
It is tile nerve of the sense of sigl:'
3. Third pair, or motor es oculorum, originate from the motor tract of the spinal cord, immediately
after they have passed througll the ponts Varolii.  Each nerve escapes through the sphenoidal
fissure, and supplies five of the muscles within the orbit with motor filaments.
4. Fourth pair, or trochleares, originate from  the processus e cerebe!lo ad testes and valvu;a of
Vieussens.  Eacl nerve passes out from the cranium at the sphenoidal fissure, and is entirely distributed upon tile superior oblique r. acles of the eyeball.  It is a motor nerve.
6. Filth pair. Tlleee nerves issue from  the surface of the brain, near the junction of the pon
Varolii and cruscerebelli, but actually arise from  the restiform  oodles. Each nerve escapes from
the cranium  by three separate openings, and is extensively distributed upon tihe orbit and other
parts of tlhe face.  Part of tlne filaments of this nerve are sensitive, and part motor.
6. Sixth pair originate from the'pyramidal bodies, as they are about to enter tile pons Varolii.
Eacll nerve escapes through tlhe sphenoidal fissure, and is entirely distributed upon tile external
rectus muscle-of tlie eyeball. It is a motor nerve.
7. Portio dura oftile seventh pair originate from tile restiform bodies. Each nerve is extensio ely
distributed in tlhe muscles of the face and external ear.  It is tile motor nerve of the muscles of eapression of the fhace.
8. Portio m7ollis of tle seventh pair, or auditory nerves, (eightll pair of some authors), arise pril.
cipally from a small grey swelling on the upper surface of the restiform  bodies at the side of the
iourtl ventricle.  Eachl nerve is distributed upon the internal ear, and is the nerve of tile sense
of hearing.
9. Glossopharyngeal nerves, or upper division of the eightl  pair, (ninth pair of some authors),
arise from  tlhe restiform bodies near tlhe sulcus which separates them  from  the olivary, and are
distributed upon tile pharynx and mucous membrane at the back part of the tongue. It is a
sensitive nerve.
10. Par vagurm, or pneurmogastric'nerves, or principal division of tlhe eighth pair, (tenth pair ol
aome authors), originate in tile same line with, and close upon, the glossoplaryn geal.  These nerves
are extensively  distributed  upon tlhe larynx, pharynx, trachea,  esophagus, heart, lungs, and
stomach.  Part of tle filaments of this nerve are sensitive, and part are motor.
1. Spinal acressory nerves, or lower division of tihe eighth pair, (eleventh pair of some authors),
originate from tlhe upper part of the spinal cord, in the same line with tlhe two preceding nerves.
They enter tlhe cranium  by the foramen magnum, and pass out again from  tile cranium  thlrough
tlie foramen lacerum, along wit:  tlhe.;lhertwo divisions of the eighth pair.  It is principally, if not
entirely, a motor nerve.
12. Hypoglossal or ninth pair, (twelftlh pair of some authors).  Each originates from Blhe sulcas
between ttle pyramiJal and olivary bodies, and escapes from  the base of the cranium  through tignteri ir condyloid firasen, and is Jistributed  tpFan the mnuaclec of the tangue   It is the moto
wrve of the tcrgas




ILLUSTRATIONS.                                           2f
THE RIGHT HEMISPHERE OF THE BRAIN.
MM, Convolutions, flat-color, reddish grey.
A, Medulla oblongata cut through the medium line.. Color-outer portion, bliush whit; w
xortion, reddish grey.
9, Pyramidal body.
B, Pons Varolii, or tuber annoiare. Color-white outside; inside, reddish grey
c. Tubercsila quadrigemina.
D, Crus cerebri.,., The great inferior ganglion-posterior striated body (thalamnu )-color, bluish whte*.
f, The great superior ganglion-anterior striated body-color, reddiah grey.;. Annular ganglion.
A., Corpus callosum-color, bluish white.
K, Fissura Silvii.
L, The cerebellum.
a, The arbor vit2e-color, white, mt the reddise fey grouna of the incied cerebellum.
T  The tentorum, separating the cerebellum from the bh ai.
a, Locus niger
2




26                       SOMN-OLISM ANE PSYCHEISM
THE CEREBEILU^I.
A, LThe ce:Betrllnu-color, t-eddish grey
8, l'rocessus veerlIicualares.
a, Processus e cerebeilo ad ttesta —-selni-trtrasnrlrr —tcoor, bluish white.
a a The poste'ior corpera qnadrige iina —color, bluishl white.
c. Tie anterior corpora qlnadrigei ina-color, billisl white.
d d, Thie g tat inferior garglions —pe jterior striated bodies (ttt aamts) —color. bluish thi*
m iu, Posterior part of the great sua erior gangliois —anterio' s rtzted bodiea —color od4i ah p*
B, F'ntal gland —color, reAdd's  g
h'6 v rsats.




ILLUSTRA.TIONS.
HORIZONTAL SECTION OF THE BRAIlN
so, C -nv,lutiors, or cortical part of the brain; aoor, reddish grey., Fourth; ventricle.
r, Posterior commlissure; color, white.
a, Third ventricle, c: separation between the great ganglioo.,
dd, Great inferior ghiglions; color, blulis  white.
x, Mi ille commissure.
a, Ailterior commissure.
I p, 3reat superior gangllions —strated; color, reddisa gr6.s. nterior opeiing into tle laterat ventricle.




28                       SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM.
%HE CEREBELLUM, ETC.
M                                    [t1
N                     N
MM,'Ile anterior part of the brain.
NN, Posterior part of the brain.
e e, Vertical sections of the great inferior ganglions; color, bluish white.;, Thle black stbstance in the centre of the great inferior ganglioli.
\, Tlle cords of the manlmmary bodies which plunge into the.nteri ~ of the gre.t inferta ganaliom
t, Mammary body of the right side, the left being c t away.
rr, Optic ner-es.
a n, Olfactory nerves.
a a, Great superior eang'. ns; color, reddish grey.




ILLUSTRATIONS.                                           29
VARIOUS PARTS ABOUT THE BASE OF TtiiE BRlEtA
r, Medulla oblorgata.
c c, Decussation of the fibres of the pyramidal bodies, which explains the influence of the lateral
cerebral parts of the brain upon the opposite sides of the body. These fibres cross tne mesia, inr
of the body one above another from below, upward, like plaited straw.  Those,f the right side
come from the left pyramidal body, and those of the left side from the right pyramidal body, au.d is
S constant peculiarity, modified only by the number of decussating fibres. They are contracted in
their courbe in passing the,  ivary bodies a a, and then diverge as seen in the figure.
m, Auditory nerve.
n. Facial nerve. The primary bundle of fibres of the cerebellum a.i here seen to plunge abo is
stwreen these nerves.
k, Part of the annular protuberance, or pens VaroSii, plunging into the cetebeanaL
-'erelar tnglion.




80                     SOMNOLISM  ANL PSYCIIEISM.
p, Malnmary bodit s, wi hli the diverging cords to which they are attached.
u, Optic ner e. " Tie optic ner'es decussate partially, and is the carlse why thie eye is irequle. S
deranged on the salnle sid.e as that on which thle brain is diseased." —Sp1m'lzeim.
hI, "Nervous fibres that expand in the convolutionss and contribute to their {twratioa.",rurSizheinm.
i i, (lfactory nerves.
v, Eide of the great lateral ventric.
34, 35, 36, 37, 38, The fibres wlich pa.ss tl rough the great -erebr.i ganglioln, and Alt^"nely nS
r rnd into the convolutions of the brain.
DD, Converging convolutions.
RIGHT HEMISPIHERE OF.TIE BRAIN,
c, Internal structure of the convolitions.
*, Fib'es of tle convolutions aggultinated by a very delicate neurilema.
fhis engraving represents tie right liemi-phelre of tle briin, in which the convolutions are cut
away to tie deptli of about three qiarters of an inchl, to slhow the fibres radiating from the centra
of tire outer surfaie of the great infirrieor grangl. n ilto thle cor rolution.
Tke w^ite spot in tlhe  entie of  the figure represents t!e r oter surface ofl the great inteera
ge.Sgl' a, ovser whih)i tl.e   r res are d rawt witll great asrel    xi s    -.. m hre TiriginaL




ILLUSTRATIONq                                                31
VERTICAL SECTION OF THE BRAIN
A fine view of a vertical section of the brain through the convolutions, the white substaince, thlo
great inferior ganglion, and the cerebellum.
l'his section is made through the ganglion to the depth of about the quarter of an iuch fioi
tts )uter surface. anl through the middle of the cerebellar ganglidn.
o, Great;nferior ganglion.
m, Fibres radiating from the surface of the ganglion.
1, Cerebellar ganglion (cotpus dentatum).
a, Alborvitte.
Szime of the principal organs formed by the convolutions of the brain ar numbered thu., Amativeness, or sexual love.
a, Philoprogenitiveness, or love of offspring.
I. lnhabitiveness, or attachment to home.
4, Concentrativeness, or power of mental concentration
b, Approbativenes, or love of approbation.
6, Self ateaea.




82                       SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISMo
7, Firllllerb6
8, Reverence.
9, Ben:evolence
t I   initation.
II, Comparison. or powrr of comparing *ne thing w.th another
12 Eventualitry, or power of observing action.
13. Indivirilllity, or power of observing existence.
14, Ln.glare, or power  of learning or usingverbal signs
PERPENDICULAR SECTION CP THE BRAiN.
The fibres of the white or medullary substance radiate, as seen in the figure, from the base of the
brain into the convolutions. the folds of which are plunged into the -wite substance, generally from
a liH:e to an inch deep.
e e,  is a section of one of thle copora restfoema.
i, 18 a section of one of the corpora pyramidalia.
b, 3I the pon.  Vartolii.
g, Is on i of'the c1r?'a of tlhe brein.
a  Is the cerebellar ganglion, surrounded by the arbor vitae.:-., 3.5, 8'7, 38, and 11, Are'he cerebral fi.res, whicll, origin-lting in tt.e medulla ohlongata, pa.s
under tle pins Varolii, tllrc gl thie crtr.'a, and corpeota str-ita, and great iferior  angtlint, an
u     t   atel-y aexanr  into t.l-e  -.nvolutions of te   Itrain.




II,LUSTRATIONS.                                                 83
4t. 48, Situat.on of the cerebellum within the skull.
These crura contain cineriterous matter in their interior, from  which arlddi.nal fibres are eon.
anually seat off as they adlvance to join and strengthen t]iose that have come from below.
The cerebral crura are besides divided into two parts, viz.: an anterior and external, and a posterior and internal mass, the lirnit -' wllicrh are marked by two superticial lurrows. They are the
roote of tile primary brlndate olfisres of tle brain, wlhicl'diverge as they advance to iorm: tle immetrse mass of tlhe lheinspheres.
A  great portion of ti-ese fibres pass to and through tile ganglions in their course to the (ono.'>lutions, from which another set of fibres converge throluglh tile rwhite substance, and corpus calloaim
to tlie same ganglions in the centre ao thle brain.
RIGHT HEMISPHIERE OF THE BRAIN.
A, Front part of the rigilt ihemiphere of thle brar.
B, Great inferior ganglion.
C, Great superior ge iglion.?s\i^~;;




SOMNOLISM A-ND PSYCHEISM.
Q  ~                   ji 




ILLUSTRATIONS. 
GANGLIONIC SYSTEM OF VEGETATIVE LIFE.
A view of' the ganglions of the organs of the body, and other structures, connected w'th the groat
sympathetic nerve, reduced from Manec's grand plate, by Jolhn Harriso   Clrtis, Esq., London.
AAAA, Semiiunar  ranglion and solar plexus. The ganglion is placed upon the base of the ttw
pillars oftthe diaphragm, one being oil each side, and the right generally larger than the lett.
B, Small splanchnic nerve. Consists in the union of two or three twigs, furnished by the n!as
thoracic ganglia.
C, Great splancllnic nerve. Formed bythe junction of t:ee, four, five, or eight twigs, com'ng
from as many thoracic ganglia.
I)DD, Thoracic ganglia.  Ten or eleven in number, corresponding with the posterior part of thle
ateral side of the body of the dorsal vertebra; most of them rest on the head of the ribs; others
correspond with thle level of the intercostal space.
E, Internal branches. All of them  are attached upon the body of the vertebrae, and advance,
ramifynag and communicating fith each other, toward the medium line, wlere they are distributed
over tle cesopllagus and the aorta.
F, Exterral branches.  Two for each ganglion, very different from  each other; one large, red,
pulpous, and going to tile intercostal nerve; tlhe other much smaller, white, giving off no twigs, anc
passing from, the intercostal to the ganglion.
G, Right coronary plexus.  Passes between thle pulmonary artery and tile aorta, and accompanies
the anterior coronary artery.
H, Left coronary  plexus.  Passes before tire left branch of the pulmonary artery, goes to the
posterior sie of te heart, anlld accompanies tile left coronary artery.
I, Illferior cervical ganglion.   Placcd behind tile vertebral artery.
J, Infvrior twigs.  Comnlonlly a single brancll communicating with the first thoracic ganglion.
K, External tlreads.  Very slender, and comnmnicating with the last cervical and tle last twn,
dorsal pairs; some filaments pass round tl:e subclavian artery.
L, Intern:d twigs. Very minute, andl dtstributed to the longus colli, upon tile anterior part of tho
apkle; some of them descend to tlse pulmonary plexus.
M, Anterior threads. Two or three in number, constituting the interior cardiac nerves.
N, liddle cervical ganglion,  Placed on a level witl the body of tile fifth or sixth cervical vel
telbrE, and covered by tile internal jugular vein.
O, Interior twigs. Three or four in numller, all passing over the inferior cervical ganglion.
P, External twigs. Vary much in number, and give off ramifications communicating with the
rervical pairs anti tlte phrenic nerve.
Q, Saperior cervical ganglion, Situated on the anterior and lateral part of tile second,. ard, and
Foulhll cervical vertenrar.
IL, Superior t ranches.  Two in number, and placed behind tlhe internal carotid artery.
S, Inferior branch.  Iarely double, and descends upon the great rectus muscle as far as thl
middie cervical ganglion.
T, External branches. Their number very Nariable; they communicate with the first, second,
and third cervical pair.
UI, Sbismaxillary ganglion. Situated upon the isternal side of tle slubmaxillary  gland, a little
belrow  tlhe styloglossal muscle.
V, V idian nerve.  A branch springing from tile posteriotr side ofthe splieno-palatine ganglion.
WV, Naso; palatie branch   One of' tilt internal brancles of tle spheno-palatine ganglion, entering
tie nasal fossswe by tlhe spheno palatine foramen.
X, Splleno pialtine ganglion.  Placed in tile summit of tle zygomatic fossa.
Y, O)pial!nic ganglion.  Situated  in the orbit, and  occupies tile external side o' the optic
Z, Auditrry nerve and membrane of the tympanum, containing, within its cavity,.bur 8sma1
ltlr'.a  -'i   the stapes. the incus, the malleus, and the os orbiculara.




86                     SOMNOL1SM AND PSYCIIEISM.
I, Renal plexuses. Furnished by threads coming from the solar and cceliac plexuses, ane frara
the last dorsal ganglion, the first lumbar, and the small splanchnic nervre.
22, Lumbar ganglia. Commonly oser or five; the first corresponds with the body of tLe first
lumbar vertebrae, the last with the fifth.
3, Internal branches.  Numerous; go downward a id inward, to.an.'.rta, where they/are lost in
the aortic plexus.
4, External brancles. Two of these, at least, arise from each.g.g!vn; they Ifo rw a.oura
more or less lexuous isward the anterior brmshes of th.e anma.' s:rvs.
6, Aoitic flia",. 7str-   by thbreads fo. S   a solar se xuo, suea.ior anuea  rio   reasl., iss. l
lanctwrc   asres and intmr-a ortachla ofs at..aV sia..




ILLUSTRATIONS..A.
07/.'                                  0...............
o0//  ~iP                  O. —
A, Spinal cord.
BE, Spinal nerves connected with the right and left arms.
FOG, Lungs. HH, Stomach. I, Liver. J, Spleen.
R, Small intestines and mesentary. L, Kidneys. MM  UtSa
EN, Spinal nerves connected with the sacrum.
OPO, Spinal nerves disetbuted to the lower limbe




38           SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM.
occupies the greater part of tile cranium, or skull, is
called the CEREBRUM.  The smaller portion is situated
in the hinder part of the head, just above the spinal
marrow, and is called the CEREBELLUM — a word meaning " the little brain."   The cerebrum  is laterally
divided into halves, called hemispheres, and also into
smaller divisions, called lobes.  Tie interior portion is
made up of various cavities, and delicately-arranged
%tidnute fibres, which commence in extremely minute
bodies, called cortical glands, which every where occupy the surface of the Cerebrum; some of these fibres
afterwards converge to form the spinal marrow.  The
surface of the cerebrun  is also every where disposed
in wavy furrows, not unlike the folds of the intestines.
But the cerebellum, not only differs in size and situation, but also, in exterior and interior form; for the
exterior, instead of the wavy folds, is arranged in what
are called lamina, or plates; and the interior has an arborescent or tree-like appearance-so much so, that it
is called arbor vite, the tree of life.  Now, viewing
man as formed according to the Infinite Wisdom  and
perfect order of a Divine Creator, we must expect to
find consummate order and design within him, and that
every organ of his body should be formed for some specific and determinate Use; for USE is the great end
of all the Creator's opel ations.  Hence we may conclude
that each of these brains has its own specific use, and
such we find to be the case; and I will endeavor to
point out such of. those uses as bear upon the subject
we are now considering-my object at present being,
not to present you with a full view of the physiology of
the humar brail, but only so much as is indispensably




PHENOMENA) ETC.> OF.:IESMERISM.          39
necessary to be known in order to comprehend the phe.
nomena of Mesmerism.
14. On the base, or lower part of the cerebrum, are
found various nerves, which may be easily seen in any
good anatomical engraving.  Thus in front are found
the bulbs of the olfactory nerves, or nerves of smell,
which, to use a familiar phrase, grow out of the base
of the cerebrum, and expand towards the forehead, and
from these bulbs a multitude of filaments depend, which
are spread out on the delicate membrane in the upper
part of the nose. The optic nerves, or nerves of sight,
also issue from the under part of the cerebrum, then
approach each other and form a union, called the commissure; they then separate, and proceed in the form
of a round white cord to the ball of each eye, which
they enter behind, and then spread out to form  the
delicate nervous expansion called the retina.   The
nerves which move the eyes and eyelids, also issue from
the base of the cerebrum.  There are also other nerves
arising from  different portions of the cerebrum; but
except those by which sensation is experienced, they
have no particular reference to the phenomena of Mesmerism.  There are other important nerves which arise
within the cranium, but not from  the cerebrum, and
in respect to mesmeric phenomena, the chief are the
seventh and eighth pairs, which arise from the cerebellun, and the great sympathetic nerves, which, by
means of the eighth pair of nerves, are also connected
with the lesser brain.  It is also worthy of notice, that
all the nerves of the cerebrum issue from its base, thus
leaving the fibrous and cortical portions free; and by
this means the General Ser-.orium is placed irn. re.




t0          SOMNOLISX.iND PSYCHEISM.
glon above the ministering nerves, and thus, as it were,
midway between the mind and outward nature.
15. Now it is essentially necessary to be known, in
order to form any correct idea of the physiological
phenomena of Mesmerism, that all the nerves of the
body, innumerable as they may appear to be, arise
either directly or indirectly from the cerebrum or cerebellum; but in speaking of the origin of the nerves,
my remarks have no reference to their development in
the embryo, but to their situation and use in the perfect organism.  And also, that whatever may be the
parental character, so to speak, of any nerve, that
character it preserves to its termination, however circuitous its course may be, and however its filament
may be mixed up with filaments of nerves of another
order, so as to form  a compound nerve.  This is one
of those traits of Divine simplicity which are so mani
fest in the Animal Economy.  Now all the nerves by
which wefeel or act-that is, all what are called the
voluntary and sensory nerves, may be said to arise,
either directly from  this larger portion of the entire
brain, called the cerebrum, or indirectly from it, by
means of the spinal marrow-which may be considered
as a continuation of the cerebrum in the body.  The
SPINAL MARROW  is composed of three distinct columns-the anterior, or front column, being formed of
what are styled motor nerves; that is, nerves that are
concerned in voluntary motion.'rhe posterior column,
or hinder part, of nerves of sensation; and the middle
part of the column contains the roots of the nerve" of
respiration.  If the brain is attentively examined, portions of nervous fibres may be seen passing by and




PHENOMENA) ETC., OF MESMERISM.         41
through other nervous portions, and yet having no con
nection with them.  Thus, portions of the motor fibres
of the cerebrum, may be traced under the arch of the
optic nerves, and through that appendage of the cerebellum called the Bridge of Varolius; and yet they are
uninfluenced by the cerebellum, but preserve their cerebral character, and pass intact and directly into the
fore part of the spinal marrow; and portions of sensoryfibres may be traced in the same manner going by
and through nervous substances of another character
without losing their own specific character, and then
passing into the hinder part of the spinal column.
Now it is by this mode of arrangement, that the true
character of the nerves at their origin is preserved to
their extremities; and so carefully is this distinction
preserved, that even if filaments of motor or sensory
nerves appear to be united in one cord, yet each ordei
of filaments retains its original character.  If I raise
my arm, I do so by muscular power, communicated by
nerves having their true origin in the cerebrum; the
same may be said of walking, or of any other action
under the control of the will. All these voluntary and
external actions, are done by and through the medium
of the cerebrum.  Thus one great use of the cerebrum,
is to originate and control the voluntary and sensory
nerves; it is thus the soul's medium  for external
knowledge and voluntary action-the great organ of
what is called JInimal Life.  Hence pressure on the
cerebrum, by paralyzing its action, instantly suspends
all sensation and capability of motion.
16. But the office of the CEREBELLUM, the smaller,
and curiously organized portion of the entire brain is




{i          SOMNOLIS&I AND PSYCIEISM.
of a. other kind.  This is the great organ or fountain
of organic life; that is, of the life of the internal organs of the body, and of the involuntary motions:
the pulsations of the heart; the circulation of the
blood; the digestive actions of the stomach and bowels;
the action of the reproductive organs; in a word, of
the thousand functions performing within us, and over
which our will has no control.  All these internal
functions are under the direction and control of nerves
proceeding directly or indirectly from the cerebellum
or its appendages; and this chiefly, by the aid of the
great sympathetic nerves, and the eighth pair already
alluded to.
17. The eighth pair of cranial nerves, called also
the par vagum, arises from  the cerebellum, and its
connections, and gives off numerous branches which
ramify plentifully on the stomach and lungs, and in
fact are continued to nearly all the viscera. The great
sympathetic nerves differ from all the other nerves in
the body, both in their arrangement and form: they
are studded with small kernels called ganglia, or
knots, into which, and out of which, numberless nervous twigs have their entrance and exit; and in the
neck, by some of these branches they are connected
with the par vagum, and thus with the cerebellum.
These two pairs of important nerves may be considered
as forming the trunk of the system of the cerebellum,
just as the spinal marrow forms the trunk of the system of the cerebrum.  And to perfect the operation of
the animal economy, twigs from each are united with
each other; and from  the great sympathetic with all
the nerves of ftt.e lbdy.  Now the existence, and dis.




PHENOMENA, RTC.  OF MESMERISM.           43
tinct functions of these two brains, and the systems of
nerves depending on them, must be carefully remembered, if we would understand the phenomena of Somnolism, or ordinary Mesmerism.  And to enable you
to comprehend the physiology of this wonderful discovery, I will, as the first step, point out the principal
difference between a state of wakefulness and sleep,
and the immediate physical cause of this difference.
18. During wakefulness, both brains are more or
less in a state of activity; but of the action of the
larger portion-that is of the cerebrum —we are conscious, so that our will bears rule in the animal
economy, and the sensory nerves convey to the sensorium  within the cerebrum, the various impressions
made by outward objects.  But when sleep seals uy
the eyelids the activity of the cerebrum  ceases, and
hence we become insensible to outward things; and
then nature, or the involuntary portion of our nervous
centre-that is the Cerebellum, with its derivativeshas the entire control and direction of the animal kingdom.  It is well known that " balmy sleep" is " tired
nature's kind restorer," but it is not so generallyknownthat one great reason for the refreshing and restorative
nature of sleep consists in the complete suspension of
the faculties of the cerebrum, and the operations of
nature being carried on by the cerebellum, without any
of those manifold disturbing causes which arise from
our voluntary and conscious activities. The cerebrum
is composed, as I have already observed, of innumerable fibres, originating in little lobules or glands.  In
the active state of this portion of the entire brain, or in'ther words' in the wakeful state, these fibres are erect.




44          SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEIS3I.
and, with their lobules oi glands, point towards the orcumference of the cranium, and there is a capability of
moving them  either singly, or in greater or lesser
groups; and hence arises the power of the will to exercise such an immense variety of muscular actions,
and the rapidity and delicacy with which the behests
of the will are transmitted by the nerves.  In a state
of inactivity or sleep, the fibres collapse, or fall together, and hence the capability of this individual action ceases, and a more general or combined action
only remains possible.  This general or combined
action is similar to the true natural action of the cere.
bellum, which, from its peculiar organization, is incapable of the individual action which distinguishes
the cerebrum.  But with the cessation of individual
or separate action in the cerebrum, all ordinary sensation ceases; and hence the unconsciousness of a state
of sound sleep.
19. Another physical cause for the state of insensibility in sleep is, that by the collapse, or falling
together of the fibres of the cerebrum, the blood is prevented from entering the finer channels of the brain,
but courses along the pia mater, or membrane investing the brain. This is occasioned by a law generally
overlooked, namely, that the brain has an automatic
movement of its own, synchronous, not with the action
of the heart, but with the respiration of the lungs;
and on this account the brain has the control of the
blood circulating within its substance, independant of
the action of the heart.  Hence the vertebral and
carotid arteries which supply the blood to the brain,
have a peculiar erratic course, more so than any othor




PHENOMENA, ETC., OF MESMERISM.          45
arterial truhks; and every mechanical precaution ia
taken to impede the propulsive force of the heart, so
that the brain may imbibe or reject the vital and stimulating fluid just according to the state induced upon
it. Whatever, therefore, induces a change in the state
of the fibres and cortical glands of the cerebrum,
changes the state of its automatic action, and thence
produces either somnolency or wakefulness.
20. Now let us apply these anatomical and physiological facts to the illustration of mesmeric phenomena,
and I think we shall be able to understand something
of the mode by which they are produced, that we shall
find ourselves in possession of the true key to unlock
these generally considered mysteries. But first I will
briefly describe the most usual manifestations.
21. The simplest visible state is that called mesmeric sleep.  This I have induced both by the ordinary
method, and also by Dr. Braid's mode of making the
patient steadfastly gaze upon some small fixed object,
called by him Hypnotizing; but I consider the mesmeric mode the best way, where the patient is susceptible of its influence, and by it, and, as far as my present experience goes, by it only, can the higher
developments be produced.  Whatever the mode of
operating employed, the primary effect is on the state
of the cerebrum, which, by modifying the circulation
of its blood, collapses in various degrees, and thus assumes the somnolent state.  But in using the ordinary
mesmeric mode, I altogether discard those formal and
mystic modes of proceeding sometimes practised and
Cecommended by some writers on Animal Magnetism.
I have reason to believe, as I shall point out in the




16          SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM.
sequel, that mind is the grand agent in all really
mesmeric phenomena, and the manipulations are merely
so many means of fixing mental action.  My usual
mode of proceeding is simply to place the subjects or
patients in a sitting posture, and take both their hands
in my left hand, and then place my right hand on their
head.  Where there is any degree of mesmeric sensibility, this is the best and most gentle mode of proceeding; but in more difficult cases, the desired effect
may be sooner produced by gentle passes, made from
the crown of the head over the forehead downwards,
or, in some cases, by making the passes over the entire
head backwards.  In this simple mesmeric sleek, just
as in ordinary sleep, we find different degrees of auundness.  Some persons merely feel a little drowsiness;
others find it impossible to open the eyelids, and yet
are perfectly conscious, and, in other respects, awake.
Other persons of greater susceptibility, either the result
of continued experiment, or peculiar nervous temperament, proceed quickly into a sound sleep, or, as I propose to call it, SOMNOLISM.  This state may quickly
pass into one having all the characteristics of somnambulism, or what is commonly called sleep-walking;
in fact, I can see no difference between this state aMr
natural somnambulism, except that the latter is the
result of spontaneous natural causes, while the former
is the direct result of human agency.  I have also
reason to believe that natural somnambulists will maks
the best mesmeric subjects.
22. The induction of the true somnolent state, is all
that is required to produce the curious and manifold
phenomena of mesmerism, save and except the higher




PIrENOMENA, ETC., OF MESMERISM.         47
stages of cerebral lucidity and clairvoyance.  Some of
these states I will now proceed to notice; and, first,
INSENSIBILITY TO LIGHT AND PAIN.  If the eye of a
patient in the somnolent state is examined, it will te
generally found drawn upwards and inwards, and this,
perhaps, in proportion to the complete development of
the state; but it will exhibit little, if any, susceptibility
to the influence of light.  In fact, I have satisfied myself, by repeated and careful observation, that all external vision is withdrawn. There is the perfect visual
organ, but the party sees not.  There is also the
healthy skin, with its infinitude of nervous papillae,
but it exhibits io sign of feeling.  The most sensitive
parts may be pinched, or pricked with needles or pins,
but the patient will exhibit no consciousness of suffering, or, in fact, of any kind of feeling, but will continue
to converse with the mesmeriser or the experimenter
without noticing in the least degree the apparently
painful experiment to which he is being subjected.
Nay, more, it is an undoubted fact, that the most
severe surgical operations have been performed, both
in this country and on the continent, without the patient
evincing any susceptibility.  I will mention one only,
recorded in the French medical journals, and also in
the Penny Cyclopcedia, under the article Somnambulism. An elderly French lady was the subject of cancer
in the breast. Her physician was a practiser of mesmerism, and he had frequently employed that agency,
in conjunction with other means, to abate, and, if
possible, cure that dreadful malady.  But he found
that although he could always allay pain, and put the
lady into a state of complete ease by mesmerising her,




48          SOMNOLISM AND PSY(HEISM.
yet the disease continued its ravages, and the only hope
was in an operation-that is, by amputating the breast,
When this only alternative was proposed to her in the
wakeful or normal state, it produced the most intense
anguish and apprehension; but in the abnormal mesmeric state, she would calmly discuss the matter with
her physician and friends. At last the operation was
determined on, and Jules Colquet, the eminent Parisian
surgeon, was chosen for the operator.  The surgeon,
in his narrative of the case, says that he found the lady
seated in a chair, her eyes closer as if in sleep, yet
conversing with her physician, who had, in fact, put
her into the mesmeric or somnolent state some short
time before.  She spoke calmly of the intended proceedings, removed her own dress to expose her bosom
to the surgeon's knife, and during the operation, which
lasted about a quarter of an hour, she conversed cheerfully both with the surgeon and physician who was
seated by her, and supported the arm on the diseased
side, without exhibiting the slightest pain or consciousness of what was going on. The lady was then put to
bed and carefully attended to, without being awaked
from the mesmeric state.  On the next day but one
the first dressings were removed-usually a most painful trial to the patient-the wound dressed again, and
then, after the lapse of some hours, she was arouses
having been kept for more than two days in the somnolent state.  When awakened she was unconscious
of all that had transpired since she was put into the
sleep, more than two days before! When she found
that her breast had been removed, that the wound had
agfin been dressed, and found herself surrounded by




PHENOMENAA, QIIC.,  F MESMERISM.         49
anxious and sympathising relatives, her feelings may
be better imagined than described! But I will here
make a cautionary remark.  It must not be supposed
that because persons in a state of somnolency feel no
pain, that, therefore, they will be unconscious of any
injury inflicted on them in that state when they return
to the normal condition; on the contrary, when they
are aroused they will feel the effect of any injury just
in proportion to its severity. Common humanity therefore requires, that experiments made to ascertain the
state of the sensibility, should be) such as only to occasion transient pain.
23. CATALEPSY, or rigidity of the muscles; PHANTASY; TRANSFER OF FEELING from the operator to
the patient; and what is called MAGNETIC ATTRACTION.-These are all interesting displays of mesmeric,
or rather psychic states, and will be better understood
when we come to the consideration of the psy hological
part of our subject.  The facility with wh-ch these
states can be produced depends entirely on the susceptibility of the subject. In the majority of cases,
manipulations, actual contact, or audibly spoken words
are necessary to produce the desired result; but in
some cases the mere volition of the operator is sufficient.
Thus in case of catalepsy, by merely drawing the hand
over the patient's arm, that is, in mesmeric language,
ma ing passes from the shoulder towards the tips of
the fingers, the muscles of the arms may be rendered
iperfectly rigid, so that by no effort of the patient could
they be put down, nor could a stranger render them flexible; by the application of great force the shoulder joint
may be moved, but as soon as the pressure is removed
3




50          SOMNOLISM AND PSYCUEISM.
the arm will instantly resume the position in which ii
had been placed by the operator. If the hand of a
person of about the same physical strength as the
mesmerised subject is placed in the hand of the subject.
and the fingers made to clasp it, it will be found almost
impossible to withdraw it, so tight will be the grasp;
and yet, notwithstanding this great apparent exertion
of muscular power, the mesmerised subjects will continue to converse on various topics, and evince neither
mental nor physical consciousness of the power they
are displaying!  This peculiar characteristic of the
somnolent state can be most beneficially employed as a
curative agent in the restoration to strength of palsied
or weakened limbs, provided the somnolent state can
be induced on the diseased person.
24. But the phenomena above alludcd to are among
the simplest of these displays. By a single touch the
mouth of the patient may be closed, so instantaneously,
us to leave a word half pronounced; and by a single
pass, as speedily set at liberty. Even the nostrils may,
by a single pinch, be partially closed, so as instantly
to produce the nasal twang common upon stoppage of
the nasal passages by cold or otherwise; and then as
quickly, by a wave of the hand, be restored to perfect
freedom.  Some patients, while putting themselves into
various postures, may be instantly rendered immovable
and statue-like in any posture.  If a rod, or any other
suitable article, be put into the hand, and the hand
closed by the operator, by no effort can the patient let
it go, although he may be so far demesmerised as to be
fully conscious of his state and of all around him. On
the other hand, by a mere pass of the hand of the mes



PHENOMENAA ETC., OF MIESMERISM.          51
moriser, or it may be, by a motion of his will, the
mesmerised party finds it equally impossible to retain
his hold.  By a single pass or pressure, an individual
may be rooted, as it were, by his feet to the floor, fixed
immovable in his chair, or his hands fixed firmly to a
wall or bench, or any other object.  Some of these experiments are highly interesting and amusing, but the
most wonderful, and apparently inexplicable, are but
varied manifestations of the simplest forms of catalepsy
and are, as we shall see, explainable by the same sim
pie law which also explains other phenomena.
25. PHANTASY.-By this is meant such an action
on the mind of the mesmerised party, that the mere
suggestions of the mesmeriser-sometimes not audibly
expressed, but merely silently willed-are taken for
realities.  Thus a handkerchief may be thrown into
the:lap and silently willed to be a rabbit, a guinea-pig,
a child, or even any disagreeable object, as a snake, or
other reptile; aknd upon directing the attention to the
object, as by simply asking " What have you got in
your lap?" the action and language soon evince that
it is considered to be just the object the operator wills
it to be; nor can the subject conceive it to be anything
else, or divest himself of the Phantasy.  The effects
of this mere imaginative action will generally be more
strikingly displayed by touching such of the phrenological organs as have an affinity with the sentiment or
feeling intended to be produced.  Thus philoprogenitiveness and benevolence, in case an infant or an inoffensive animal is suggested; and cautiousness, in
suggesting the idea of a snake, or other disagreeable
objects.  Again, an empty glass may be offered, and




62         SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHE. S}M.
by stating it to contain strong hot brandy and water,
the same coughing and difficulty of swallowing will be
produced as would follow the attempt to swallow such
a liquid by a child, or a person wholly unaccustomed to
it. Then, by taking the glass away and immediately
presenting it again, saying that it contains cold water,
but care must be taken lest it cause toothache, immediately all the effects of an intense cold draught will
Lc manifested.  Once a mesmeric subject asked me for
a particular drink; I presented an empty glass and
silently willed it to be castor oil. No sooner had the
glass touched the lips than it was dashed away and
broken to atoms, at the same time the party exclaiming, ( Ah, it's so nasty!"  Many more striking and
interesting experiments may be exhibited, but they may
be all referred to the same primary causes.
26. TRANSFER OF STATE.-By this is meant that
remarkable phenomena exhibited by good mesmeric
subjects, in feeling whatever may be done to the mesmeriser as done to themselves. This I have witnessed
so often, and under such a variety of circumstances as
to admit of no doubt as to its correctness. Thus, on
one occasion, while lecturing, one of the audience, to
test the matter, came unawares and pricked my leg.
I looked round for a moment with surprise and some
little indignation, but by the time I comprehended the
motive of the seeming offender, the mesmerised subject
felt it, and screamed out loudly " that some one had
pricked her leg," and pointing at the same time to the
corresponding portion on her own leg which had been
pricked in mine. At the same time a pin might have
been thrust really.into her leg without her evircing




PHENGOMENA, EItC. OF MESMLRISM..5
any consciousness. I have got individuals to tread on
my toes, pull my hair, or pinch different parts of the
body, and I have invariably found that with this subject not many seconds would elapse before she would
omnplain of exactly similar treatment, and refer the
pain to the exact corresponding part; and sometimes I
have experienced considerable difficulty in dispelling
the illusion.  These undoubted facts shed much light
bn what may be called the highly spiritualized, or purely
mental origin of some diseases, and will afford some clue
to the apparently miraculous manner in which some
peculiar diseases have been removed.
27. PHRENO-MESMERISM.-This is the name usually
applied to the manifestation of the phrenological sentiaents and feelings of a mesmeric subject.  It has been
considered as affording a triumph to the materializing
class of phrenologists, and hence has been decried and
attempted to be set aside by the metaphysical spiritualists.  Possibly both classes of reasoners may be
wrong.  Certainly the mere placing of the finger -of
the operator on any part of the head, and it being followed by the nmnifestation of a sentiment or feeling
proper to the organ said to be situated in the part
touched, is no proof that such organ is really there;
because the idea of the feeling or sentiment is in the
operator's mind, and the fact may be accounted for by
mesmeric imaginative action and the transfer of feelings.
Again, anatomy reveals nothing within the cranium
analogous to the arbitrary divisions marked on phrenological busts. Besides, when we touch the head, the
skull prevents us acting directly on the brain; we only




54          SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM,
excite the extremities of those cranial nerves which
ramify in the scalp.  On the other hand, the opportunities I have had for acquiring experience enables me
positively tc assert, that contact with at least certain
parts of the head will produce those feelings phrenologically ascribed to those particular portions. Thus,
for example, I have seen alinentiveness powerfully excited in a mesmerised subject who, when left alone for
a little while, accidentally reclined, so that a portion
of the head where " alimentiveness" is situated was
brought into contact with the edge of a table. Again,
I have seen philoprogenitiveness excited by a subject
accidentally rubbing the occipital portion of the head
against a high-backed chair-not to mention other instances.  But this apparent proof of the material view
of the question is not the whole one; for I have seen
some of the phrenological sentiments excited without
touching the head!  Thus, upon simply taking the
hand and silently thinking reverently of the Deity, the
mesmerised subject has fallen down on the knees and
manifested the most profound veneration.  On other
occasions, when more than one subject had been mesmerised, on touching the " organs" on the head of
one, the other, without any touch or connection, or
any knowledge of any action, would instantly manifest
the sentiment.  Upon the whole, I think the real evidence afforded by mesmerism is favorable to phrenology;
but I am far from  thinking that the evidence properly
interpreted necessarily leads to that sort of materialism
which is, by many persons, associated with phrenological
doctrines.  The brair. is undoubtedly the mind's organ;




PHENOMENA, ETC.; OF MESMERISM.           55
this position remains, whether we suppose the mind
uses the whole brain in every mental action or only an
appropriate part.
28. It has been said that phreno-mesmerism  is the
result of electrical acti(n, and that, in fact, all mesmeric action is but an electrical phenomena-the operator being positively electrified, the patient negatively
so. For this, I believe, there is no evidence whatever.
It is true that electricity may be made to stimulate
certain vital actions, but it is admitted by the best
physiologists that there is no identity between them.
I have carefully experimented, and cannot find that
there is any perceptible difference between the electrical
and magnetic state of the mesmerised subject and that
of the operator, where, according to electrical theory,
the greatest difference ought to be manifested.  Whatever name or cause may be assigned to mesmeric agency
it is undoubtedly a vital one. It is true, as I observed
at the outset, that within the living organism  are collated all the powers of the universe; but they are in
the organism  in its own peculiar manner.  The magnetism and chemistry, the attractions and repulsions,
and the other internal operations of the body, are not
the magnetism  and chemistry, the attractions and repulsions of outward nature; but they are living actions,
analogous to outward cosmical and terrestrial activities,
but perfectly distinct from them, and existing in a degree altogether above them.  They are, in fact, the
antitypes of which the types are found in outward
nature.
29. With the exception of CEREBRAL LUCIDITY,
magnetic vision, as it is sometimes called, and CLAMB.




56           SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEiSM.
VO YANCE, the foregoing classification may be male t
embrace all ordinary mesmeric or somnolent phenomena; lucid and clairvoyant manifestations are so
evidently of a psychical nature, that before noticing
them, let us apply ourselves to the solution of the
physiology of the states we have briefly described.
30. We have seen that within the skull there are,
in reality, two distinct brains, although popularly called
the brain; that there are twodistinct systems of nerves
connected with these two brains; that by the larger
brain, or cerebrum, and its nerves, we feel, think, and
act; and that it is thus the soul's medium of conscious
intercourse with the external world.  That by the
cerebellum, or little brain and its nerves, are directed
and controlled all the involuntary and vegetative functions of our bodies; that the brain has an automatic,
or in other words, an independent action of its own,
by which it has the control of the blood circulating
within it, and that in the state of sleep the fibres of
the cerebrum collapse or fall together, and the blood is
prevented entering the finer channels and  thereby
stimulating the brain to activity, and that from this
state of collapse and altered circulation of the blood
arises the unconsciousness and insensibility of profound
sleep.
31. The true mesmeric action is, as will be presently
shown, primarily and fundamentally of a psychological
character, but it induces a peculiar physiological state.
The direct effect of the passes, or whatever means
are employed, is to produce a somnolent state of the
brain, in some respects resembling common sleep, but
in others widely differing from  it.  When the true




PHENOMENA, ETC.. OF MESMERISM.            5
mesmeric, or rather psychicl, relation between the
operator and his subject is established, the cerebrum of
the latter is rendered dormant, the cerebellum and its
dependencies alone preserving their normal state. In
the first place all consciousness appears to be suspended, but by degrees an inner consciousness, similar
to the consciousness of dreaming is awakened, and from
this inner consciousness the somnolized person speaks
and acts.  The optic nerves and the other nerves of
the eye belong to the cerebrum, hence one of the first
visible effects of mesmeric influence is an inability to
open the eyelids, although the eyeball may be as yet
uninfluenced; but as the somnolent state continues, the
optic nerves, or nerves of sight contract, and the ball
of the eye rolls upwards, and all power and perception
of vision is withdrawn.  Then, as observed, withthe increase of the somnolency the fountain-head of all the other
sensory nerves becomes dormant, and that of the motory
too, in a partial degree.  The sensorium being by this
change in the internal state of the cerebrum  removed
from its connection with the external world, all sense
of pain is of course absent; and hence the seeming
mysterious phenomenon of a person conversing with another and yet being unconscious of feeling, is at once
solved by a knowledge of the simple fact, that the state
of the cerebrum is changed by the somnolent.influence,
and an inner consciousness awakened.
32. Another physiological state, arising also prim-.
arily from  a psychological cause, is now perceptible;
for although the operator and his subject or subjects
are of course two or more persons, yet, in respect to
cerebral action, or more distinctly, in respect to t.h
C) 3




58           SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM.
action of the cerebrum  thley are ONE.  In each person
the cerebellum and its system of nerves is in the normal
condition, but there is only one normal and active cerebrum, namely, that of the mesmeriser or operator.
Hence, however many may be the subjects, if they have
all been mesmerised by the same operator, and are all
fully susceptible of the somnolent influence, they are all
so intimately, interiorly blended with him, that the absence of their own external cerebral consciousness causes
them to feel his cerebral consciousness as their own.
Here then we discover the physiological reason for the
strange and anomalous states exhibited.  Thus, in ca3es
of phantasy, the idea existing externally in the cerebrum of the mesmeriser is, when willed by him, perceived by the subject as if existing in his or her cerebrum.  So also in cases of catalepsy, the somnolency
of the subject's cerebrum permits those muscles which
are influenced by the voluntary nerves to be actuatea
by the will of the operator's cerebrum.  Hence, in the
best cases, the silent operation of the mesmeriser's will,
that is, of the power of his cerebrum, is sufficient to
throw the subject into a state of statue-like rigidity;
but generally it requires the aid of passes, which determine more efficaciously the downward nervous currents. Hence, also, any pain inflicted on the operator,
which, of course, he feels in the sensorium connected
with the origin of the sensory nerves, is felt as if the
impression was made on the cerebrum of the subject.
33. But we shall generally find that although sight
and feeling are withdrawn the subject retains a perfect
capability of HEARING.  He may sometimes be so indrawn as to evince no perception of sounds similar, in




PHENOMENA, ETC., OF MESMERISM.            59
this respect, to a person engaged in deep thought; but
by patiently persevering until the attention is excited,
or the desire of the operator is felt, we shall generally
be able to demonstrate that the sense of hearing remains.  Yet by no means can sight and feeling be
restored except by partially or wholly demesmerising
the subject.  This fact may be thought to militate
against the theory of cerebral action I am endeavoring
to inculcate, but it in reality tends to confirm  it —fcr
the nerve of hearing which is a portion of the seventh
pair of cranial nerves, has its roots in what is called
the corpora restiformia:  which is directly connected
with the cerebellum.  Sight is solely under the direction of the cerebrum, and we can exert that faculty or
not at our pleasure, but we cannot help hearing if we
are within the influence of sound, that is, by no organism connected with our ears can we shut out sound.
The ears of a person in deep sleep are still open to the
modulations of the air, on which sound depends; but
the dormant state of the cerebrum  prevents the conscious perception of sound, unless it is so loud as to
produce that state of partial wakefulness on which
dreaming depends; and the mesmerised party is conscious of sound, because, as we have already observed,
the state of inner consciousness is in some respects
analogous to the state of dreaming.  But hearing is not
so entirely dependent on the cerebellum as the internal
involuntary functions, but is somewhat of a mixed
nature, like the functions of respiration.
34. Here then is the whole physiology of the mes
meric or somnolent state, and the reason for the seeming mystery and contrariety to our usual feelings and




60          SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM.
common experience.  The cerebrum cf the subject is
dormant, the cerebellum  continues its normal state
of activity, while, from the peculiar -relationship of the
parties, to which we shall presently allude, the cerebrum of the operator dominates over his subject, and
is, in a degree, the common cerebrum of both parties.
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY OF
MESMERISM.
35. CLAIRVOYANCE.-Of all the extraordinary phenomena of mesmerism, none appear to stagger the
general belief more than the different manifestations of
clairvoyance or magnetic vision, or to speak more truly
and plainly, the internal sight of the soul.  To say
that a person can see without the aid of the eye, or by
any other means than light entering into the pupil of
the eye in the usual manner, seems like uttering an
absurdity, or declaring the possibility of an impossibility.  Yet, strange as it may sound to those who
have had no experience in this matter, there is no
mesmeric phenomena more capable of positve proof,
provided the necessary care be taken in making the
experiment, and the subject be placed in proper circumstances; and I trust this evening to afford you
ocular demonstration of the fact.
36. But before proceeding further, I wish that it may
be distinctly impressed upon you, that when we care.
fully examine the eyc  and the brain, we shall sea




PHILOSOPHY,  C EC) )F MESMERISM.        61
reason to acknowledge that an internal function of
sight, altnough remarkable and unexpected, and generally unknown, is not more difficult to explain than
ordinary vision when thoroughly examined.  0O) referring to the human eye, or any correct representation
of it, we shall find that it is a hollow ball, filled with
three different kinds of fluids arranged in a determinate
order.  In front is a horny transparent lens, something like a small watch-glass, to admit the rays of
light; behind it is the small chamber containing the
aqueous humor, then a hole, called the pupil, through
the iris, to allow the rays of light from different objects
to pass into the interior parts of the eye, first passing
through the crystalline lens and through the vitreous
humor, and then forming an image of the objects on
the delicate membrane called the retina, which is spread
out on the back of the eye.  Now up to this point ordinary vision may be explained on optical principles,
and the eye shown to be the most perfect optical instrument.  But the moment we attempt to pass beyond
the retina, science is at fault; no natural philosopher
has been able to explain how the optic nerve conveys
the image to the brain; we know that the mind is conscious of the images formed on the retina-or, in more
familiar language, of the things seen by the eyes-but
in what manner an opaque nervous cord, differing in no
essential particulars from othler nervous cords, conveys
that impression to the mind, we are entirely ignorant.
Ordinary sight has, therefore, a psychological basi —
and this is admitted by the best physiologists.
37. Clairvoyance, or internal sight, assumes the same
BASIS necessary to perfect ordinary vision: but as it




62           SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISAM.
acts independently of the external visual organs, so it
is not trammelled by those natural laws to which they
are necessarily subject. Thus by this internal sight,
and by light issuing from within, and not from without,
as in common sight, things may be seen which are out
of the range of natural sight, and altogether above its
nature.  For instance, our physical sight can see the
remote starry orbs, placed at the distance of perhaps
thousands of millions of miles, because the undulations
of light proceeding from them in straight lines can imoinge, or strike upon the retina of our eyes.  Yet the
ntervention of any opaque body immediately shuts out
the vision of the object, even if placed in close connection with us; so that if our penetrating powers of
sight were immensely increased, whether naturally or
artificially, still the rotundity and opacity of the earth
would prevent us seeing beyond a certain distance. But
opacity is no barrier to internal sight; objects to which
the mind is directed, either designedly or spontaneously,
will be equally visible through doors and walls as if
placed directly before the face.  Nay, to the higher
stages of clairvoyance there seems, comparatively speaking, no bounds; for whether the object sought be in
the same house, or town, or country, or. across the
broad Atlantic, or still remoter Pacific oceans, it appears to be found and seen with equal facility, and to
be equally near to the internal perception of the truly
clairvoyant individual.  The human body is seen as
clearly, and its living actions described as plainly, as
if the external and internal parts were alike as transparent as glass, and this also, without any bodily connection, such as by bringing the clairvoyant and tlh




PHILOS'PHY, ETC,, OF MESMERISM.          68
person to be described together, but, as I have proved,
when more than one hundred miles have intervened between them.
38. But we have now arrived at a stage in our enquiry where physiology ceases to afford us light; for
physiology as such, that is, as the science of our outward
living organism, knows nothing of an internal or supersolar light, or of sight that can penetrate alike through
opaque and- transparent substances.  To psychology
and philosophy we must therefore look for aid in our
endeavor to investigate'the apparent mystery of this
interesting subject.  And I regret that the abstruse
nature of the enquiry, the littlethat is generally known
in this branch of knowledge together with the necessary brevity of popular lectures, will only permit me to
present you with a sketch of the views opened to the
eye of rational research.
39. It is usual to represent man as composed of
mind and matter-SOUL and body.  This is correct.
And as we find that the body is not a mere simple uncompounded substance, but a collection of innumerable
parts and organs, so, by parity of reasoning, we may
conclude, that the mind, or spiritual body, as the parent and director of the natural body, cannot be that
simple entity, that abstract nothingness so generally
represented by metaphysical writers; but rather that
the controller of the animal organism must be itself or.
ganized according to the laws of its own peculiar nature,
and' capable of manifesting those laws, under certain
circumstances, through thcse organs of the body, that
is, of the brain and nervous system, which are united
with it by the law of correspondent activity and con.




GI           SOMNOLISM AND PSV,'EISM.
nection.  St. Paul, therefore, spokes the language of
the profoundest philosophy, when he declared that there
were spiritual bodies and natural bodies, and that the
natural body was the first in its development, anJ
afterwards the spiritual body; and when, on another
occasion, he defined the entire human organism, as exist
ing here, to be a compound of " spirit, soul, and body,;
in this respect giving his apostolic sanction to the doc
trine of the ancient sages of Greece.  The two firsi
terms used by the apostle to describe the spiritual part
of man, are, in the original Greek, Pneuma and
Psyche, and the latter term, which in our version of
the Scriptures is, in the passage alluded to, translated
soul, is, by the Latin writers called the " animus;"
and this term is always used to signify the animal soul,
as distinguished from  the pneuma, or more interior
human spirit.
40. And here it will be as well to observe, tLit no
truth is more evident to sound rational enquiry than
that the Creator has given to every department of his
" handy-work" a specific character, and that from the
Creator to the lowest inert matter, there exists a chain
of DEGREES-and that each object of creation can only
be well and truly studied by viewing it in its own degree, and comparing it with objects in another degree.
But if we confound this distinction of degrees, we shall
never arrive at a clear and satisfactory solution of many
important facts.  Each degree will be found to have
laws or properties peculiar to itself, and if we transcend
the degree of the object of our enquiry, by applying to
it qualities or properties belonging to another distinct
degree, we may expect nothing but confusion and mys




PHILOSOPHY, ETC.; OF MESMERISM.         65
tery.  Now, in our investigation of the nature of man,
it is especially necessary not to overlook these distinctions. By no process can matter be sublimed into
spirit; and spirit having, according to apostolic authority, and the general law of analogy observable in all
things, its distinctions and degrees, the properties of
the lower degree may not apply to a higher one. True
philosophy also teaches, that if spirit in no degree is
material, that is, does not possess those properties which
we apply to ponderable matter, still it is no less on
that account a truly real and substantial existencemore truly substantial than the granite rock, because:
more unchanging and more enduring.
41. Now viewing the spiritual organism  of man as
consisting of two distinct degrees, called by the apostle
the pneuma and psyche, or as possessing both a spiritual internal and external, together forming, while in
this mortal life, the common internal of the natural
organism, the PSYCHE or ANIMUS will be the connecting medium  between the pure human spirit and the
nervous system of the natural body.  By its connection, through correspondence and vital affinity, with the
body, it is placed in relation with outward nature, while
as a spiritual entity, and by its indissoluble union with
the higher spiritual principle, it has, at the same time,
immediate connection with the spirit-world; and because it is a subject of the laws, and possesses the
properties of that world which have nothing in common
with time, space, or common matter, it displays tbse
powers which can be explained by no merely natural
or physiological knowledge, but which receive an easy,
rational, and satisfactory solution, when man is really




66          SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM.
seen to be that which revelation, philosophy, and tile
statements of true clairvoyants declare that he isnamely, a compound of spiritual and natural organisms
intimately united by the exactest correspondence or
analogy.  And that altb ugh the lower, or natural organism, cannot act without the continued influence of;
the higher, or spiritual organism, nor can the spiritual
organism  be developed without the medium  of the
natural one, yet, when developed, the higher organism
can act, not only by and through the lower organism,
but even independently and when disconnected from it.
42. It is this psyche or animus-the external of the
spirit-that, from all that I have yet learned on the subject, I take to be the true seat of what is called mesmeric influence; the psyche, or animal soul of the
operator, influences the same external spiritual organic
principle in the subject, and from the animus the influence flows downwards, to use analogous natural
terms, and thence affects the brain and nervous system
-and hence I propose to call that part of mesmerism,
which manifests mental and super-sensual phenomena,
by the name of PSYCHEISM, or, the Science of the Soul
as manifested in nature-while to the lower and physical stages, the name of SOMNOLISM may be applied,
as indicative of its sleep-like and dream-like character.
43. Now as to the psychological change induced by
mesmerism.-It is a common law of our being that
conscious perception should have its apparent seat in
the ultimate, or extreme, of every development. Thus,
although it is a well-established fact, that the sensorium
is within the brain, and that if a sensory nerve be diviled- no sensaticu will be experienced: yet it is as well




PHILOSOPHY, ETC., OF MESMERISM.         67
known that if we prick a finger, the pain will be felt
where the wound is inflicted.  So, notwithstanding the
body feels and acts by and through the spirit, our conscious perception, in the usual normal condition, is
confined to the bodily organization-because, while in
the present state, the body is the ultimate development
of the spirit. When death severs the connection between mind and body, the ultimate of the immortal
man is the psyche or animus, and to it is transferred
all conscious perceptions and sensations.  It is from
this differing seat of the conscious perceptions that, in
our ordinary state, we have no sensational knowledge
of the spirit-world, or of its laws.  But psycheism, or
the higher stage of mesmerism, may aptly be compared
to partial death-for it is a closing of the common external of our being, a transfer of the sensational perceptions from the ultimate of the body to the ultimate
of the spirit-and thence, and simply from this transfer of ultimates, arises an awakening of the conscious
sensational perception of the inner man, or spirit. All
those apparently miraculous powers which we sometimes
see displayed by good mesmeric subjects, are, in fact,
but the result of the psyche or animus being so far set
free from the bodily ultimate as to enable the spiritual
body to act nearly, if not quite independently of the
sensual organs, and by perception, and in light from an
inner world; but the connection of the mind and body
is yet sufficient to enable the soul's sight and feeling to
be manifested to our physical senses by and through
the natural organization of a clairvoyant.
44. From this transfer of consciousness and sensa.
tional perception, we may also account for the a'onm




68          SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM.
lois, and often incongruous, statements and descrirtionu
of clairvoyants.  They forget much of that mode of
speaking of things which is common to our external
condition, but which, in itself, is often purely arbitrary
and conventional; and they speak according to their
newly-awakened and uninformed consciousness.  As
we have to learn to talk, and even to see, or rather
rightly to interpret what the eye reveals, so do clairvoyants require a continued exercise of their peculiar
power to familiarize them with its use.
45. We now proceed to explain the manner by which
the influence of the operator is brought to bear upon
his subject, and that sometimes too, at considerable dis.
tance; for I have found a subject affected by my in
fluence, even when mesmerising another party, at the
distance of a mile-but this may be considered an unusual case. It is a law of nature that all things should
be surrounded by an effluvium or sphere which emanates
from them, and is always of the peculiar nature or
quality of the body from which it emanates; and these
effluvia are regulated by certain definite laws. Thug
the fragrance which surrounds the rose is the effluvium,
or sphere emanating from it; and this effluvium, by
being dissolved in the surrounding serial atmosphere,
becomes sensible to our organs of smell, and an idea of
its existence and quality is then transmitted to our
general sensorium.  But there are effluvia of which we
should for ever remain ignorant, did we not perceive
them rationally by their EFFECTS.  Thus around magnetized and unmagnetized iron, aneffluvium or sphere
prevails, of which, in their separated state our senses
give us no evidence.  But we have only to bring them




,fHILOSOPEIY  ETC., )F MESMERISM.        69
into such proximity as to be within the infuence of the
law regulating the activity of their respective spheres,
and their existence may then be instantly perceived in
their mutual attraction and coherence.  For it has been
shown by one of the profoundest of philosophers, that
these single spheres have the property of blending into
one larger sphere, and that hence arises what is called
magnetic attraction.
46. One of the results of the higher stages of clairvoyance, or independent internal sight, is the knowledge, that an effluvium or sphere analogous to what we
have alluded to, surrounds the mental organism or spiritual body of every individual. Following the general
law of nature, this sphere possesses the peculiar mental
qualities of the organism from which it emanates. And
hence arises the repugnance which is felt to the society
of some persons, and the pleasure which is experienced
in the company of others; and to it are referable all
the remarkable instances of SYMPATHY and ANTIPATHY SO frequently observed.  But in these ordinary
cases the active cause is latent or hidden; yet in the
higher mesmeric, or rather psychic state, it often becomes sufficiently obvious even to our physical senses,
for we may here see that, similar to what we have said
of terrestrial magnetism, there is an actual blending of
spheres.  The magnet induces its state on the iron, so
that it becomes magnetical; and the operator induces his
sphere on his patient or subject, so that the subject becomes, as it were, one bcdy with himself-the egoism
or self-conscibusness of the one being blended with the
egoism or self-consciousness of the other.
47. Here then is the psychological cause for the




TO          SOMNOLISM AN.) PSYCIIEISM.
phy:.iological state already mentioned.  The change
of state induced upon the animus of the subject is the
primary cause of the change in the condition of the
cerebrum; the collapse of the cerebrum  closes the external consciousness, while the union of the spheres
emanating from the animus of both operator and subject, causes the latter to perceive, as in himself, what
really is felt in the active cerebrum of the former.
And this change of state affords, I believe, the true
psychological solution of the whole apparent mystery
of catalepsy, phantasy, and many other curious mesmeric phenomena.  As regards phreno-mesmerism, the
arousing into activity one particular organ of the brain,
as it would be called by one class of phrenologists, or
faculty of the mind, as it would perhaps be called by
another class, without the guidance, control, or balanci;g powers of the other organs or faculties, is a sufficient
reason for the effects we see displayed.
48. But although the transfer of consciousness, and
the blending of the spheres of the operator and subject,
will account for many curious and otherwise inexplicable phenomena, it does not account for independent
clairvoyance.  Nor do I think it can be reasonably accounted for, but on the grounds already intimatednamely, the awakening of the sensational consciousness
of the external of the immortal body, that is, of the
psyche or animus. For I reject as purely hypothetical,
altogether without evidence, and contrary to established
laws, that theory which would attempt to solve it by
an imaginary change of poles, or the transfer of life
from the animal to the organic system.  According to
the latter theory, the lowest mollusk ought tc possess a




PHILOSOPHY, ETC., OF' MESMERISM.        71
more extended and spiritual perception than man; and
man is to be spiritually elevated by being degraded to
a level with the lowest forms of organic life.
49. The great difficulty hitherto experienced in arriving at a knowledge of the real cause of clairvoyance,
has arisen from two causes; first, the different states
of the clairvoyant subject and the observer, and the impossibility of their having the same sensational perceptions-so that the observer cannot sensationally
perceive how the clairvoyant sees, nor can the clairvoyant adequately describe his perceptions.  And,
secondly, the necessity for the opening of a higher degree of consciousness in order fully to comprehend the
lower.  For instance, an animal can have no proper
idea of its own nature; but man is enabled, by the
possession of an internal spiritual principle, rationally
and sensationally to investigate his animal body. And
the mere induction of the faculty of clairvoyance does
not enable the possessor of that faculty sensationally
to perceive the cause of that phenomenon; this requires the awakening of a higher consciousness, though
still probably belonging to the psyche, or animal part
of the spiritual organism. But in this respect I have
an advantage over most enquirers, in possessing a subject, who in addition to the ordinary induced mesmeric
extasis or trance, has repeatedly been in states of spontaneous extasis of a far higher and more interior character, and the reality of these states has been proved
to me by the most convincing evidence.  One striking
difference between these two states is, that whatever
occurs to, or is seen by, the ordinary mesmeric extatic,
is completely forgotten, or, more correctly, is altogether




72: SOMNOLISM AND PSYC[IEISM.
unknown upon the return to the normal statr while
the true extatic, or subject of the SUPERIOR state, aa
Davis, the American clairvoyant styles it, upon returning to the normal condition, recollects all that has been
manifested to'him in the abnormal condition.  This
siagular fact receives an easy solution, if we admit the
psychological doctrine, that man possesses both an internal and external memory.  In the normal wakeful
condition these memories act as a one, and hence we
are onlv coniscious of one memory.  In the abnormal
state of induced mesmerism, the internal memory is
active while the external is dormant; and from  this
want of connection between the two memories arises
thle oblivion invariably witnessed.  But in the superioi
state, or true spiritual extasis, both memories are active, but from a more interior degree than in ordinary
life; and hence the extatic subject can recollect in the
normal state what has transpired in the spontaneous
abnormal state, and, at the same time, possesses a full
consciousness of the great difference between these
states, so as not to confound the perceptions and knowledges of one with those of the other.
50. A remarkable revealment of this superior state,
or spontaneous extasis is, that every man while in this
mortal life, is by the very laws of his being, and hence,
of course, by the design of the Creator, intimately,
though unconsciously, associated with the spirit-world,
and this especially by what may be styled his associate
spirit, and that in the memory of this associated spirit
is, as it were, a reflection of all that exists in the memory of the associated man;: so that distinctly to per.
ceive the associated spirit is tantamount to a full per.




PHILOSOPHY, ETC., OF MESMERISM.           78
ception of the character, both mentally and physically,
of the associated man, as well as of the information
possessed by him.  There is also a reflection of the
natural organism of the man, both externally and internally, and also of the scenery perceivable by his
natural senses.
51. A true clairvoyant is one who, by the opening
of the internal consciousness, has a sensational perception of the objects of an inner or spirit-world, that
is, provided the clairvoyance exists in a sufficient deogree.  If the attention of the clairvoyant is directed to
any individual, the effect is to bring the clairvoyant
into a sensational connection with the associate spirit
of the person sought for; and from  the normal recollections being treasured up in the internal memory,
while the external memory, and all immediately connected with it is quiescent, this associate spirit appears
to the clairvoyant to be the real individual soughtand from this source, and the reflection of memory
above alluded to, is often obtained much of the information the clairvoyant is able to communicate respecting
persons and scenery.  But as man, even in this mortal
life, is internally a true spiritual organism, and as such
is, as we have already observed, a subject of the laws
of the spirit-world, a clairvoyant may have a sensational perception of this spiritual organism, and thence
of the natural organism, and thus of the entire man
hirnself, however distant they may be from  each other
ts to their natural bodies. Yet still, it is probable, that
this, direct connection is mediately effected by the aid
of the associate spirit.  Here then is the simple and
rational, though deeply interesting solution of the un4




74          SOMNOLISM AND PS 1CHEI2SM,
doubted fact, that by clairvoyance the actual condition
of a person totally unknown to the mesmeriser and his
subject, and across the broad Atlantic, has been correctly told. This I have seen extremely useful in a
medicinal view-for by directing the attention of a
sufficiently lucid clairvoyant to a distant" patient, the
disease under which the patient was laboring has been
discovered, and every interior organ of the body de.
scribed, both as to its actual condition and general
action.
52. Most clairvoyants, strictly so called, are alsc
LUCID, that is, they can see natural objects by an interior perception, independent of the usual visual organs, and, on this account, even when opaque substances intervene.  How the impression of these out.
ward objects is conveyed to the sensorium is difficult to
understand; the fact that such is the case cannot be
doubted by any one who has carefully examined the
subject.  In ordinary vision the mind does not actually
contemplate the outward visible object, but the perception of that object as existing in the imagination.
I do not use the term in the sense of mere foncy, as is
sometimes done; but by imagination I mean the general
power of the sensorium to form images within itself
of objects that are without itself.  I, therefore, consider it a true and proper faculty of the psyche, or
animal mind, and thence as a sense above the ordinary
senses of the body, and to which they are subservient.
For it is by the outward senses, which depend on nervous influence, and their connection with this inward
inage-forming faculty, that mind and matter are
brought into  mutual  relationship  and  connectiot,




BHILOSOPHY, ETC., OF MESMERISM.         75
Whether, there ore, it is by ordinary sight, by cerebral
lucidity, or by the suggestions of another's mind, that
the ideas of the objects are transmitted to the sensorium, they are equally subjects of the image-forming
faculty when there, and equally real. I have partially
demesmerised a lucid subject, so as to restore the
normal conscious state, without demesmerising the eyes,
and by that means produced conscious lucidity. Every
thing was then stated to be seen in a most brilliant
light, altogether different to common light, whether
solar or artificial; and at the same time all the surrounding objects were seen at once, and yet a sense of
their separate  identity  remained.  Generally they
seemed greatly magnified, and to have more or less. of
brilliancy about them; all which seems to indicate that
the independent action of the sensorium produces more
vivid images of the objects impressed upon it; and this
might be expected from the exaltation of the senses by
the opening of the perceptions of a higher ultimate.
53. We have now taken a brief survey of the principal mesmeric phenomena, and endeavored to account
for them, as far as experience, observation, and reason,
and necessary brevity will permit.  Before concluding,
I will notice two questions often proposed, though not
always in the spirit of calm enquiry, but rather in that
of querulous objection.  It is asked, " Whether all
persons are subject to mesmeric influence? and why
all cannot be made clairvoyant?" In reply to the first,
I answer unreservedly, that I believe all persons are
susceptible of mesmeric influence, but in a very different
degree; and this difference we might anticipate from
the widely differing nervous temperaments and idiosyn



76           SOMNOLISM AND PSYCHEISM.
crasies of individuals.  Some will scarcely feel the in.
fluence, while others will soon fall into the "sleep."
But as regards the curative influence of mesmerism,
experience has fully proved that very great benefit may
be derived without any loss of consciousness, or even
any perceptible change of state.  Yet the inducing of
the coma, or mesmeric sleep, generally gives the operator more power over the patient.  Let it be remembered, that the great use of mesmeric influence is as a
curative agent, auxiliary or supplemental to medicine,
and that the various exhibitions of catalepsy, phantasy,
phreno-mesmerism, etc., are only useful as manifestations of the true nature and capabilities of the human
organism.  With respect to the second question I would
observe, that I have been enabled to learn, that lucidity
and clairvoyance can only be developed in individuals
who possess a peculiar cerebral organization.  This peculiar:organization mray be normal in some few cases,
that is, it may consist with a good state of health; but
in many cases it may be traced to some affection of the
brain consequent on disease, and the possesscr of the
faculty will be delicate in health, and less fitted for the
ordinary avocations of life. It is not, therefore, a
faculty to be generally looked for or desired; but where
it does exist, it may be most beneficially employed;
and, on the other hand, it may, like all other things, be
abused, though possibly, not without ultimately entailing punishment on the offender.  In proper hands it
may be advantageously used to ascertain the cause of
disease, and the best method of effecting a cure; and
it affords us a means tc acquire most interesting in.




PHILCSOPHY, ETC., OF MESMERISM.          7J
formation as to the true nature of our indwelling immortal spirit.
54. In conclusion, permit me to observe, that a calm
nvestigation of the psychical phenomena developed by
mesmerism, may become of great use in furthering the
interests of religion and morality.  By this means we
may demonstrate that there is an internal way tothe
mnnd, as well as the usual external way of the outward
senses.  This, although admitted by believers in the
authority of the Holy Scriptures, has been generally
denied by an influential class of writers. It also tends
to illustrate and confirm some of those striking and interesting Scripture narratives which have been so often
assailed by scepticism and infidelity; and it presents
man to us, both in his relation to the spirit-world and
the natural world, being, even while tabernacling in
mortal flesh, as to his interior, mental, or spiritual organism, in direct communication with a spiritual world,
and thus capable, by the very laws of his being, of receiving influences from God and spiritual intelligences,
while, by his material organism, he is constituted in
direct relation with all outward things.  Man is thus
presented to.us just in the light we might expect, considering that he is the crowning work of the Great
Creator's skill.  For we may see that he is really and
truly that link in the great chain of creation, which
God has made to join heaven to earth and earth to
heaven!




APPENDIX.
MESMIERIC AND PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCE.
1. E. L., the young woman who is the chief subject of the
following notes, is a native of Worcestershire.  She is about
five feet two inches in height, rather sallow complexion, and of
a nervous-bilious temperament. Her health, although at times
tolerably good, is not robust, nor is ahe capable of much continued exertion.  Before coming into my house, she had been
the subject of inflammatory disease of the chest, and of fever,
and not long before coming to Bolton, she had been an innmate
of the General Hospital, Birmingham, on account of an injury
received in the knee. The treatment there had reduced her
general health, but improved the knee.  She was in this state
when I first saw her. Her head is well formed and fully developed. Before the time about to be referred to, she was
wholly ignorant that she possessed any peculiar mesmeric susceptibilities. She has since expressed an opinion, that the extraordinary condition of her brain is the result of a very large
dose of opium, which she once took by mistake, and which, for
a day or two, occasioned very serious symptoms. But this may
ne considered as very doubtful. She completed her twentysecond year in December, 1848.  She will be constantly referred to by the name of EMMA.
2. Towards the close of the autumn of 1846, my attention was
directed to the action of the vapor of ether in obliterating the sense
of pain-it having been recently brought into public notice for
that purpose. Before this time I had seen the vapor of ether
used as a substitute for the nitric oxyde, or laughing gas, and had




MESMERIC AND PSYCHIC AL EXPERIENCE.                79
noticed the intoxicating and exciting effects it produced;,ut I
was, like others, ignorant that it blunted, and in some cases,
entirely removed, the sense of pain.  Hearing me talk of the
effects of ether, Emma-said that a cousin of hers had " mesmerised" her and another young woman with ether, which they
"' sucked" out of a bottle-indeed, she called it " The mesmerise."
Being anxious to test the truth of the reports then in circulation, I asked her if she had any objection to let me see her inhale some of the vapor?  She replied, "None at all, for she
had no fear of its hurting her."  I, therefore, fitted up a common Winchester quart bottle, merely by putting a piece of
brass tubing through the cork, which went half way down the
bottle, and two or three inches above it. About half an ounce
of sulphuric ether was put into the bottle, and the bottle well
shaken, to mix the vapor with the contained air; I then gave it
ier, and told her to put the pipe to her mouth and gently draw
in the air in the bottle, without closing the nose, or using any
of the valvular apparatus then in use. In less than five minutes
I observed that her hands began to loosen their hold of the bottle,
which I then removed, the pupils of her eyes became dilated,
and presently the eyelids closed. I now found her insensible
to pain, or rather to evince no feeling, which was ascertained
in various ways, such as pinching and pricking various parts of
the body, endeavoring to excite tittilation, and even by thrusting pins under the finger nails, but she did not evince the
slightest consciousness of these experiments; on the contrary,
she was soon in a merry mood, and believed herself to be
among her old companions in her native place, rambling through
fields, and performing, as she supposed, many rural and domestic occupations.  She would laugh, dance, sing, and do
many things which were suggested to her; but when awakened,
she had scarcely any, if any, recollection of what had uccurred.
These abnormal states were continued longer than intended,
on account of the difficulty experienced in arousing her; for
on one or two occasions, nearly two hours were expended in
fully restoring her.
3. Other individuals were r.w tried, but only one was found,




80                       APPENDIX.
at that time, at all similar to her in susceptibility to the ethereal
influence, and that was a youth who had been mesmerised by
Mr. Spencer Hall, when that gentleman was lecturing in
Bolton.  The same bottle, in like manner, with about half an
ounce of ether in it, was given to him, and in five minutes
lie became insensible, and then exhibited similar phenomena
to Emma, but not so striking.  He talked and acted, and,
like her, imagined himself to be in another place than
where he really was. In about half an hour he spontaneously
awakened.
4. The very small quantity of ether subsequently found sufficient, merely enough to scent the bottle, induced an opinion
that, in Eipma's case, the ether had very little to do with the
strange things witnessed, but that she was, in a manner, mesmerised, or rather hypnotized, by looking at the bottle whila
inhaling through the tube. It was therefore resolved to try
another experiment.  One evening I told her to sit down, and
taking a small pocket-comb desired her to look steadfastly at it.
She did so, and in a few minutes fell into the simple mesmeric
or hypnotic sleep. Afterwards a small magnet was used for
the same purpose and with the same results.  A few  days
further on, I mesmerised her in the usual mode, that is, by
looking fixedly at her. The youth mentioned above was also
submitted to a similar experiment, by causing him  to gaze
steadfastly on a small magnet held a few inches from his eyes.
In both cases, results were obtained similar to those following
the use of the ether, namely, insensibility to pain, and a sort of
somnambulic wakeful dreaming. In both these cases the only
difference yet perceptible between the effects of the ether and
those resulting from hypnotizing or mesmerising was, that by
the latter mode the limbs could be made rigid-cataleptic, as it
is ca!led-while no such rigidity could be induced after the inhalation of the ether.  Up to this time, dancing, singing, and
doing various things which were audibly suggested, as if they
were real, and rigidity of the limbs, after downward passes,
were the only phenomena noticed; and it was thought that
the statements made by some writers, of the personal influencs




MESMERIC AND PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCE.    81
of the operator over the subject, were merely fanciful, and not
warranted by fact.
5. Some time in the summer of 1847, while experimenting
with Emma, I accidently placed my hand on the part of the
head marked on busts as the organ of veneration; she immediately began repeating the Apostle's creed; when nmy hand
was. removed she ceased, and when it was replaced she commenced repeating where she left off. This was the first manifestation I got of the phrenological sentiments, and interested
me greatly; but it was some weeks before I succeeded in exciting the other sentiments or feelings. Afterwards benevolence, veneration, firmness, self-esteem, philoprogenitiveness,
acquisitiveness, combativeness, etc., were easily excited, and
often most powerfully manifested. Up to this time, no absolute
proof of personal influence was discovered, but she became
more easily and quickly mesmerised, and as easily awakened
into the normal state.
6. It was now found that Emma would exhibit all the usual
mesmeric phenomena, such as catalepsy, or rigidity of the
limbs-for she could be fixed immovably in any position by the
action of a few passes; she could be so far demesmerised as to
be restored to outward consciousness, and yet be unable to move
the mesmerised arm or leg.  Attraction she could also manifest,
even in the same conscious state, as I often had the opportunity
of showing to friends and neighbors, who were as much surprised as amused.  For example, a piece of money would be
placed on a table at a distant part of the room, and it was told
her she might have it for fetching it. She frequenly essayed
to do so, and would sometimes very nearly reach the money; but
invariably, my will, and the drawing passes I made towards myself. overcame her power, and notwithstanding her determined
efforts, would draw her to myself, and render all her endeavors
to secure the money ineffectual.  On these occasions, she described the sensations she experienced as being like cords
wound round her and drawing her. The various phenomena
of phantasy could also be most readily produced; but when she
became c]air-oyant, if she was desired to look at Jae object that
4*




82                      APPENDIX.
she imagined to oe so widely different lo what it really was,.sh  would instantly perceive the delusion, and dash it from her;
and yet, with n a minute or two, she could be as easily deluded
again. But the investigation of these ordinary mesmeric states
was not confined to those exhibited by Emlna, but their truthfulness was further confirmed in the case of several youths, who
were experimented upon, both privately and publicly, and who
exhibited the san. ~ phenomena, but modified in each case by
the general character of the individual.  Since the period referred to, Emma's susceptibility has considerably increased.
and now I can fasten the arms, hands, or mouth, or fix her to
the spot on which she may be standing or sitting, by a single
movement or pressure of my hand, without putting her into the
mesmeric sleep.
7. It was not long, after Emma became so fully susceptible,
before opportunities occurred for proving the reality of personal influence, and that a highly mesmeric subject may be
acted upon, even when wholly unaware of the exertion of such
influence. Many experiments were tried to ascertain the truth
on this point; but I will only mention three among many cases
that took place spontaneously, or rather, which occurred without n)y mind being directed to her. Once a gentleman asked
me unexpectedly, in a neighbor's house, several doors from
mine, to mesmerise him. I tried, but did not succeed.  On
returning home, I found Emma in the mesmeric state, and,
upon enquiry, found that she had gone into that state while I
was endeavoring to mesmerise the gentleman.  On another
occasion, I was wishful to induce the mesmeric sleep on a lady,
for the relief of a rheunatic affection from which she was suffering.  Finding the continual stare very fatiguing to my eyes,
and also expecting to be called away by patients, it occurred to
me, that if I directed her to look steadfastly at something, it
might answer the same purpose, and allow  me to leave her,
withlout interrupting the mesmeric action.  I therefore arose
and took a small magnet and suspended't by a wire fiom a
hook in the ceiling.  Emma was in a room under where I
was operatlng, and knew nothing of my movements.  In a few




MESMERIC AND PSX CHICAL EXPERIENCE.    83
minutes the smell of burning linen arrested my attention, and
I desired my daughter to go down stairs and ascertain the
cause.  She called to me quickly to come down; I did so, and
found Emma mesmerised, and on her knees before the fire,
engaged in sweeping the hearth, and her apron on fire, from
contact with a burning coal that had fallen fiom the grate-but
of this she was unconscious, and her attention was wholly
directed to a point in the ceiling of the room.  Having asked
"What she was ding or looking at?" she replied, "I want
that magnet."  Upon enquiry, I found that she had been engaged just under where I was sitting; the influence had passed
through the floor -and ceiling and affected her unconsciously in
the room  below, and being flow clairvoyant, she immediately
saw the magnet through the ceiling, etc., and pointed accurately to its situation.  But fiom the locality of the room, and
the magnet having been used without any previous intimation
tf my intention-in fact it did not occur to me to do so until
the patient had been some time seated-she could not possibly
know of its being in the situation in which I had placed it, by
any normal means.  Here then was one, among numerous
spontaneous instances, of the transmission and reception of a
personal influence, and of the reality of clairvoyance.  On another occasion, I was called to see a patient residing more than
a mile and a half fiom  my residence; the case was one of
delirium  tremens, and I resolved to try the soothing influenco
of mesmerism, and, in this instance, succeeded in a few minutes.
On returning home, I found that Emma had gone into the
mesmeric state at the time I was operating on my patient; but,
fortunately, she was in a situation where no harm happened to
her.  By way of experiment, I firequently mesmerlised her
when in another room, and unknown to her; but in the aboveniamed, and other -iases, I did not think of her; and the circumstance can only be explained fiom  her known susceptibility
and my being actuilly englrged in exerting a Inesmeric influence
and intention.  This extreme susceptibility to my personal in.
fluence. for a considerable period, prevented my using mesmerism as a curative agent, inasmuch as [ feared to exercie




64                       APPENI IX.
the power, unless I knew that Emma was in a place of safety,
and would be kept from danger, in case she should become
unawares mesmerised.
8. In the early part of 1847, Emma wished to have the
vapor of ether administered, with the view of having an aching
tooth removed without pain'; but the striking effects I had seen
follow upon mesmerising her, induced me to refuse the ether,
and, in the evening. to mesmerise her, and thus further test
the power of the mesmeric sleep to subdue pain.  About
9 o'clock that evening I desired her to sit down; induced the
mesmieric sleep, and then leisurely got the necessary instruments; lanced her gum; extracted the tooth; as soon as the
bleeding was arrested, washed her mouth, and then aroused
her.  The entire time from  sitting down until fully aroused,
was just fifteen minutes.  During the operation she did not
evince the slightest sensibility; but as soon as the removal of
the instrument gave liberty to her mouth, she began to hum a
tune, even while the blood was flowing.  On awakening. she
knew nothing of what had taken place after going into the sleep.
and could hardly be persuaded that the tooth on the table before her had been extracted from her jaw! Some time afterwards, Mr. Patrick, surgeon-dentist, of Bolton, extracted a
large decayed molar tooth from her lower jaw, under similar
circumstances.  On.the latter occasion, several fiiends weie
witnesses of the operation.
9. DISCOVERY OF LUCIDITY AND CLAIRVOYANCI:.-In the
autumn of 1847, it was told me, that there was a young woman
in Bolton, who had travelled the country with a mesmeric lecturer, and who had been for a long time CLAIRVOYANT. Having heard much of this wonderful faculty, I was desirous to see
her. She was soon afterwards introduced to me for examination.
I found that she was very easily mesmerised, and in that state
she knew me and others in the room: also, that she was fully
susceptible of feeling; in these respects differing widely from
Emma.  I could not, therefore, fully satisfy myself as to thd
reaiity of the mesmeric state. The young woman said, that
she had formerly been in the same state as Emma, but had




MESMERIC AND PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCE.                 85
passed beyond it; anld, from  subsequent experience, I think
this may be correct.  She told ne that she had been taken by
several London physicians to examine the internal organs of
patients by the faculty of clairvoyance; but when I saw  her,
her powers seemed to be confined to reading books with large
print, with the eyes bandaged.  I tried the experiment several
times, but never felt satisfied with the result; as from  the
position in which she placed the book, the time occupied in the
endeavor, and the occasional wriggling, I could never be certain
that she did not see under the bandages. At other timens, I
was certainly much surprised at the readiness she evinced in
describing a book I had in my hand.  On the whole, I concluded, that her possession of the faculty of clairvoyance was,
to say the least, doubtful.  But it soon after occurred to me,
that if she ever could see in the manner she stated, perhaps
Emma could see in the same manner.  At all events, 1 had
the iiost positive assurance that she went into the mesmeric
state, and that in that state she could not see, but that the
power of vision was wholly withdrawn; the sense of hearing
alone connecting her consciously with the external world.
10. One evening I determined to try her. But at this period
she could not read, anJ was ignorant even of the letters of the
alphabet.  I therefore chose pictorial representations for the
test, as being a universal language, understood alike both by the
learned and the unlearned. I took a school book belonging to
my daughter, which contained various wood-cuts, and opening it at one, I placed it in her hand, saying, " Emma, what is
this picture?"  She took the book, and as if by instinct, placed
it open over her forehead and upper part of the cranium, without the least attempt to look at it in the ordinary way, and said,
almost directly, "Oh yes, it is a naughty hoy catching fliPs at.he window, and his mother is looking at him."  This was the
subject of the picture and the story annexed.  There was a
figure of a boy at a window, endeavoring to catch a fly, and
another figureF of a female standing in the room observing him.
I felt most exceedingly surprised and astorished at the correctnes of the description, being assured Tr,at she could not see if




86                       APrENDIX.
by any ordinary use of the eye, or, in fact. by the eye at al.
This experiment was repeated with many different pictures,
and invariabl with the same result; colored pictures were also
tried, and it was found that she knew the different colors accurately; but on no occasion did she attempt to use the eyeshe invariably placed the object over her head.
11. It was now thought, that as mesmerism evidently rested
on a psychological basis, and that a manifest connection was
discoverable between the mind of the mesmeriser and the nesmerised subject, she might possibly see these pictures somehow in my memory, and not from  any independent power of
vision.  I, therefore, requested my daughter to select the pie
tures, and then to put them  into my hand, without telling me
the subject, or letting me see them.  This was repeatedly
done, and the pictures as accurately described as when I knew
the subject.  Still it was thought that my giving her the pictures might have some effect upon her; others, therefore
gave her them, or she was allowed to take them herself fiom a
number, or to turn over the pages of a book, without any one
Knowing what she had taken. or had turned to, until she had
described what she had selected.  But it was found that it
made no difference. and demonstrated, that whatever was the
power, or wherever the seat of vision, it was her own, and independent of any one else.
12. These, and similar experiments, have been successfully
performed, in private, before a select company, and also before
large public audiences; and this too, with her eyes covered
with plaisters, and a bandage tied over the plaisters.  Not that
the plaisters or bandages made any difference; but they were
used for the sake of convincing sceptical people. At this time,
in ascertaining the subject of a picture, she first passed the tips
of the fingers of the right hand gently over it (the left hand did
not seem to possess the same power), and then placed it over
that part of the head, marked on phrenological busts as the
organ of IMIrATION.  If a book with prints on the pages was
given her, she would pass her right fingers gently over the
pge,. and if it was letter-press or blank, she would say, "It




MESMERIC AND PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCE.                   87
was nothing."  But when she had thus found out the situation of the print, she would exclaim, " Oh yes! here it is;" or
* I've got it."  But whether the print was a wood-cut, or
copper-plate, did not appear to make any difference.
13. A very curious phenomenon was now  observed.  Pictures of things did not appear to her as pictures, but as the
things represented.  So that the picture of a rose would convey
as vivid and real an idea to her sensorium, as the rose itsel/
would do to an individual in the ordinary state.  Hence it was
found, that if a picture of thistles, teazels, or other prickly plants,
or of bees, was given into her hand, the moment the tips of her
right fingers came into contact with the picture, she would exclaim that she was pricked or stung, and throw  the picture
from her with much violence and passion! Evidently proving,
that the representations of things were to her real; and also
suggesting, that she had a perception of the form of the objects,
before placing the picture on her head.  These experiments
were performed many times, both publicly and privately. And
Fromn her invariable use of the tips of the right fingers, it was
supposed that there existed some unknown but remarkable
affinity, between the senses of touch and sight.
14. By the commencement of 1848, her power of internal
sight had become so developed, or she had become so familiarized with her new faculty, that it was evident, from  many
things observed, that she could see such things as he, mind uas
diirected to, without any contact.  As an experiment, small
pic;ures, and various small objects, were placed singly, first
in a card box, and afterwards in a wooden box; and these she.:old, at times, as readily as when out of the box and in her
hands.  At other times, more difficulty was experienced in
satisfactorily determining that she could see them.  This dif.
ficulty arose fiom two causes: first, from the manner in which
she would describe what she saw; and, secondly, from  an
obstinacy of temper frequently displayed, when removed by
mesmeric influence  from  external habit and control.  Her
usual manner was to describe things as they appeared to her in
the internal stafe, regardless of the names imposed upon thple




88                       APPENDIX.
by custom; sometimes she refused to call things by their apcustomed name. and would always describe them in her ownt
way, before she called them by the common name.  As an in
stance, the following may be given.  At the second public
lecture, in the Temperance Hall, Bolton, oi. the 9th of March,
1848, a gentleman in fiont of the platform  suggested that a
picture, from among others lying on the floor, should be put
into a box, and given to her-she had then been bandaged for
some time.  A print of a cat was selected, and put into a card
box; she put the box over her head, felt it carefully with her
right fingers, and then, having by a smile and ejaculation evinced that she saw the contents, she began-" It is a thing; it is
a dark thing; it ]as four legs, a tail, a head and two eyes;
things round its mouth, and it sits by the fire and says mew,
and it's a cat."
15. One cause of difficulty in attaining clear descriptions of
the things to which her attention was directed, and sometimes
even in getting her to notice them, was very early perceivable.
In the exalted condition of mesmerism, her mind was peculiarly susceptible of impressions from the minds of surrounding
persons; hence, when environed by a knot of sceptics, as was
sometimes the case, their mental influence, unconsciously to
themselves, would seriously impede the faculties of the clairvoyant; and then the feeling that something was preventing
the usual development of her powers, caused irritation and
obstinacy.  At the period alluded to, when Emma was asked
"How she saw things?" she would say, that suddenly "glasses"
canme to her, and also, that she sees every thing in light through
these "glasses;" and the situation of these " glasses" she
always referred to the organs of imitation. When this doubting,
opposing influence was brought to bear upon her, she would exclaim, " They are darkening my glasses;" or " They have taken
away my glasses."  I fiequently found that by making passes
from the upper part of the head, across the organs of imitation,
I could produce and increase the clairvoyant power, which she
would evince by exclaiming, " Oh, its so light now,;" while by
making longitudinal passes, fiom the vortex, over the forehead




MESMERIC AND PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCE.                 8S
and down to the face, the sight could be immediately closed, and
she would be ilaced in a state of darkness.  Bodily fatigue, or
indisposition, would, at that time, and also does at the present
time, considerably impair the powers, not only of clairvoyance,
but all the other mesmeric capabilities.
16. Besides the description of pictures, etc., already noticed,
s8e frequently described persons in another room, and said what
they were doing; frequently, without having her attention
directed to the inquiry. At other times she would unexpect
edly, and unasked, tell individuals what they had in their pockets, or what sort of food was contained in their stomach.  This
often afforded matter for interesting experiments; and has been
witnessed by many respectable persons in the neighborhood.
17. For a considerable time after she exhibited the most distinct lucidity, with respect to objects placed near her, no trace
could be found of that distant clairvoyance manifested by some
mesmeric subjects: but, eventually, this faculty became as
clearly developed as the other.  The first time I observed this
power, was in the case of some near relatives in London. She
described minutely the dress and appearance of these parties;
their occupation at a certain time, and many other particulars,
which were subsequently found to be correct. Once I directed
her attention to a female relative in London. Emma speedily
found her, and began to describe her residence, etc., but suddenly her attention ceased to be directed to my relative, and she
became engrossed with the description of a magnificent residence, with its elegant and costly furniture; a lady lying in a
superb bed; a beautifully dressed baby; well dressed ladies in
and about the room; and another room in which were older
children, also beautifully dressed, and attended by ladies. From
many replies to my inquiries, I considered that the only place
to which her impassioned descriptions could refer, was Buckingham Palace, for the accouchment of the queen had then recently occurred.  I therefore said, " Do you see any soldiers
there?"' Yes," she replied, " there are soldiers at the door."
I then saw that my conjecture was correct; but why she should
have spontaneously gone there, without any request on my




90                       APPENDIX.
part, or, indeed, any thought or desire in that respect, I could
not understand.  But after I had informed my relative of this
occurrence, I obtained the clue to this singular transition fromn
one subject to another.  For I was informed that she had been
thinking of the queen, and the interesting circumstances in
which she was then placed; and had felt desirous that I should,
as an experiment, try whether Emma had the power to visit
and describe the interior of the palace at that time. The cause
therefore, of Emma's unexpected visit to royalty was this: my
relative had wished her to go there; when brought into mesmeric connection with her, the active sentiment of her mind,
was communicated to Emma's mind; and by this means, her
attention was unconsciously directed to the royal residence.
But there was further confirmation that this was the true cause,
and of the possibility of a mesmerised subject receiving impressions fiom the parties to whom their attention is directed. For
when I knew, fiomn my relative's letter, what had been the subject of her thoughts, I put Emma into the mesmeric state, and
then asked her, " How and why she went to see the queen?"
She directly replied, " L-  took me."  But how did you get
in if there were soldiers at the door?  "! I jumped over th
soldiers; but L-     could not jump over them, and therefore
she could not get in."
18. At this tine, whenever sent on these distant excursions,
she exhibited great fatigue and excitement; panting, and suffering fiom violent action of the heart.  When asked why she
panted so? she would say, " I've gone su fast,"-and " It is such
a way!" She would also take my right hand and place it on her
bosom: if I removed it, she said, "They are gone away now."
But latterly she has not required any personal contact to enable
her to exercise this faculty.  Very many expel' nents were
made to test this faculty: in some cases she was strikingly correct; in others only appioximately so; for she would sometimes
confound the recollection of bygone transactions existing in the
minas of distant individuals, with present circumstances, and thus
present a representation which required some explanation t
ttaravel.




MESMERIC AND PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCE.    91
19. Having heard of clairvoyants vtsiting the planets, I delermined to try the experiment with Emma. I therefore pioposed an excuision to the moon; and not then knowing how to
direct her attention to such distant objects; and she herself
being, at the time alluded to, wholly ignorant of the mode by
which a knowlege of distant things is obtained; and fancying
that she actually traveled by some mode, I suggested the electric telegraph as an expeditious mode of conveyance. The sug
gestion answered the purpose, and she was, mentally, soon on
our satelite. But on that and: subsequent occasions, the great
excitement produced by the strangeness of what she saw, and
the distance traveled, caused such a palpitation of the heart, as
to render it necessary to shorten the visit, by de-mesmerising
her; being fearful that the great physical excitement might
produce some serious effect on her health, if not immediate
danger. Her description of what she saw was conveyed in very
ejaculatory language; fiom the surprise and pleasure she experienced. Her statements were:to the effect, that the moon
is inhabited; that; the inhabitants she saw were very smalldwarfs-not larger than children on our earth; their heads
were large in proportion to their bodies, and the mouth vertical
rather than horizontal; their voices harsh, and rough, and resembling the sound of distant thunder; iand when they spoke,
the speech seemed to come up from the bowels. Their "insides" were not quite like ours; the lungs especially were dif.
ferent. She saw some food, something that looked somewhat
like bread, but they did not call it by that name. She saw only
one animal, something like a very small pig.' There dwellings
were constructed of pieces of rocks, covered over with green
stuff resembling gorse: they were very low, for she could put her
nand to the top. The place did not look like what she conceived
the moon to be; but a large place, and very rocky, with immense
precipices, and lofty mountains. The "little folks," asshe called
the inhabitants, could clamber up these rocks with their hands
and feet, so fast that she could not catch them. "Is there any
water there?" "Yes: but it does not look like our water, but
more like milk and water, ant yet it is.lear. /Meaning prob



92                      APPENDIX.
ably, that it is of greater density than our water.) It lies in
the bottom of hollows, and down the steep precipices. The'little folks' can walk upon this water and not sink; they are
very light. They wear clothes; but they are very simple and
all alike. They seem good sort of people. They have a curious
way of jumping on the back of each other. A very little baby
was seen in a sort of cradle; it died: they said what signified
that, it had gone to sleep; but they did not meatl sleep, but that
it was dead."
20. At another time I attempted to send her to JUPITER;
but the physical excitement was so great, that I thought it prudent to call off her attention, before I haQ obtained any definite
remarks.  She spoke of having beenfurther than where she
had before seen the "little folks;" and of seeing them as she
came back.
21. Besides the power of seeing, by an internal sight, such
things as were put into her hands, or to which her attention
was directed, Emma would sometimes manifest a sort of apparently omnipresent vision. Thus she has frequently been asked
to find missing or lost articles. After a few minutes consideration, she has said where they might be found; or, in other
cases, got up and pointed out the place where they lay concealed. And this she has repeatedly done, when there was
the most undoubted evidence, that neither herself, in the nor.
mal condition, nor the mesmeriser, nor any other individual,
knew the situation of the articles she was desired to look for
Thus proving, that not only can an unusual mode of seeing be
developed by mesmerism, but also an exalted degree of power,
which makes all things, whatever their local position, appear
directly within the sphere of vision. This power has been, on
most occasions, called into exercise chiefly for the sake of experiment, and to test its reality; but it has also been applied to
purposes of use. The following is a remarkable instance; and
also valuable as placing the reality and powers of clairvoyance,
or internal sight, beyond the reach of cavil or contradiction.
22. On Wednesday evening, December 20th, 1848, Mr.
Wood, grocer, of Cheapside, Bolton, had his cash box, with its




BIESMERIC AND PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCE.    93
contents, stolen fiom his counting house. After applying t the
police, and taking other precautionary steps, and having no clue
to the thief, although he suspected what was proved to be an
innocent party; and having heard of Emma's powers as a clairvoyant, he applied to me, to ascertain whether, by her means,
he could discover the party who had taken it, or recover his
property.  I felt considerable hesitation in employing Emma's
powers for such a purpose; fearing that both the motive and
agency might be grossly misrepresented.  But the amount at
stake, the opportunity for experiment, and Mr. Wood being a
neighbor, induced me to comply with his request; and nine
o'clock, next morning, was appointed for the trial. At that
hour Mr. Wood came to my residence, and I then put Emma,
by mesmerism, into the internal state, and then told her that
Mr. Wood (whom I put en rapport, as it is called, with her)
had lost his cash box, and that I wished her to tell us, if she
could, where the box was taken from. what was in it, and who
took it. She remained silent a few  minutes, evidently mentally seeking for what she had been requested to discover
Presently she began to talk with an imaginary personage, as if
present in the room with us; but as it subsequently proved,
although invisible and imaginary to us, he was both real and
visible to her; for she had discovered the thief, and was conversing with his minC on the robbery.  She described, in the
course of this apparent conversation, and afterward to us, where
the box was placed; what the general nature of its contents
was, particularizing some documents it contained; how he took
it, and that he did not take it away to his residence at once, but
hid it up an entry; and her description of his person, dress,
associations, etc., was so vivid, that Mr. W. immediately recognized the purloiner of his property, in a person the last to be
suspected.  Feeling satisfied, from the general accuracy of her
descriptions, and also fiom  her describing the contents of the
box, that she had really pointed out the delinquent, Mr. W.
went directly to the house where he resided, and which she
had pointed out, even to the letters on the door-plate; and insisted on his accompanying him to my house; or, in case of




9n6                     APPENDIX.
but, as might be expected, in very homely language. I thought
her at fault once; but found, that while I was thinking about
the heart, she had wandered to the windpipe, with its rings.
It was some time after the discovery of this faculty, before it
could be used without inconvenience; for when her attention
was directed to the internal organs of the body, the strangeness
of the sight, together with the universal motion, and circulating
blood, so terrified her, that she would tremble from  head to
foot; and, when awakened, complained of being ill and frightened, without knowing the cause.  But, by degrees, she became familiarized with these investigations, and she will now
calmly, and without any fear, examine and describe the internal organs. Her manner on these occasions is always serious
and kind; her language soft, but,. from her want of education,
imperfect. Had she received an anatomical education, her gift
would be more valuable, or rather, more accurate descriptions
could be given; but, on the other hand, her want of education
proves that she does not derive the knowledge of the internal
organism  of the body which she evinces, frinm her previously
stored memory.  The application of this power, appears to be
one of the most legitimate uSE:s of clairvoyance, and perhaps
the most beneficial in its application.  By it an accurate diagnosis may be formed of many i aternal diseases, which elude the
ordinary mode of research.  But to make a clairvoyant diagnosis, truly satisfactory, it often requires the aid of the medical
practitioner, or the professed anatomist and physiologist, rightly
to interpret the language of the clairvoyant.  Many curious
points in physiology, which, from the nature of the case, rested
rather upon rational induction than positive demonstration,
have, to my mind, been satisfactorily determined by the revealments of clairvoyance; especially as regards the action of the
brain and nervous system, and the action of the heart; and the
Rnowledges thus obtained have an important bearing on the
mode by which diseases of these important organs may be
rured.
26. On the 4th of August, 1848, a gentleman of Bolton
rcought a letter, written by a lady the wife of a physician in




MESMERIC AND PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCE.    95
Bailed had long arrived.  In a state:f t atxiety the young man's
mother came twenty miles to Bolton, to see whether, by Em ma's
means, she could learn any thing of him.  After a little time,
Emma found him; described his appearance correctly; and
entered into so many details, as to induce his mother to rely upon
her statements; and to request me to make inquiries at intervals
of about a fortnight.  I did so, and traced him by her means to
several places; and the information thus acquired, I transmitted
to his parents.  On the 24th of January, in the present year, I
received a note firom the young man's father, informing me that
i letter had arrived from his son, and that " it was a most strik
ing confirmation of Emma's testimony from first to last"
CLAIRVOYANCE AS APPLIED TO PHYSIOLOGY
AND MEDICINE.
25. For more than eighteen months, Emma has been able
to see the internal organs of the human body. At first, only
when placed in personal connection with the individual to be
examined; but subsequently, when the parties were many
miles distant.  In her best state, the human body seems to her
completely transparent, and might be compared to, a watch,
whose case and works were all of the most transparent chrystel.  I discovered this power from  her remarks on myself
One evening she began to describe my longs, as "pink things,"
full of holes like a sponge, with air in the holes, and thousands
of little veins in all directions.  She said the right lung was not
so good a color as the left, and that it stuck at the middle flap.
This I knew to be the case, and thought she might only be
giving utterance to my own ideas. But I soon found that this
was not the case; but, as in the case of the pictures, she really
iid see what she described.  I asked her some questions about
the heart, which she accurately described, as to the auricles
and ventricles; the contained arterial and venous blood, etc 




94                      APPENDIX.
refusal, to the police office. When brought, and placed in connection with Emma, she started back from him, as if he had
been a serpent; telling him that he was a bad man, and observing, also, that he had not the same clothes on as when he took
the box; which was the fact.  He denied strenuously all
knowledge of the robbery, then, and up to a late hour in the
afternoon; but as he was not permitted to go at large, and thus
had no opportunity for destroying, or effectually concealing tte
box; and as Mr. Wood had promised, for the sake of his connections, not to prosecute, if confession was made, and the box
and contents recovered, he, at last, admitted that he had taken
it, and in the manner described by Emma; and the box and
contents were found in the place where he had secreted them;
broken open; but the property safe.  It should be observed,
that Emma had pointed out the place where the box was concealed, but we could not be certain of the place she meant,
without permitting her, while in the internal state, to lead us
to it: this the confession rendered unnecessary.
23. In other cases Emma has described articles that have
been lost by parties placed en rapport with her, without her
being asked to do so, or, indeed, anything being said respecting
them. In some instances these have been most interesting experiments, affording evidence of her being able to trace a series
of events, totally unknown to her in the normal state, back
through a number of years.
24. Several times she has been directed to seek for persons
in distant regions of the globe. Whenever she has found them,
her statements of time and season, invariably coincided with
the latitude and longitude of the places to which she has been
directed. At present, one complete proof only has been obtained of her really having a distinct and truthful perception of
such distant objects. A young man had sailed fiom Liverpool
for New York, without apprising his parents of his intention of
doing so, until the day the ship sailed. His parents immediately
remitted him a sum of money by the mail steamer; but they
were subsequently informed, that he had not applied for it; nor
had any thing been heard of him, although the ship in which he




MESMERIC AND PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCE.    97
Gloucestershire, and this lady, who had heard of other clairvoyants describing the diseases of distant people, merely by
using their handwriting as a medium of communication, desired
that it should be given to Emma, to ascertain whether she could
discover the condition of the writer.  It must be remeirbered
that Emma could not read printing, much less writing; the subject matter of the letter was of no consequence, it was the
handwriting, as a medium  of connection. Emma put it over
her head, as she used to do with pictures, and carefully felt it
with her right fingers, and then said *" it was a lady's up and
down strokes," meaning by that phrase, the handwriting of a
lady.  She described the lady, as to her personal appearance,
accurately, even to a small blemish occasioned by an accident;
the internal organs of the body; an affection of the spine under
which she was laboring; the situation and appearance of the
place where she resided, and many more particulars.  The
accuracy of her descriptions was admitted by the doctor; and,
subsequently, I had an opportunity, personally, to verify some
of her statements.  The envelope of the letter was directed by
the doctor; him she described correctly, both as to his personal
character, general pursuits, and literary tendencies.  This was
an entirely new experiment; and finding the result so unexpected and striking, it led to many more; some of which were,
apparently, more remarkable. Among others, I may mention
the case of a letter written by a gentleman at Cairo,.which was
put into her hand.  She soon said it was written by a gentleman, and described him, as to the condition of his health, and
the place where he was residing, together with the climate and
appearance of the people there, even to the peculiar veil worn
by the Egyptian ladies.  The correctness of her statement, as
to the gentleman's condition, was ascertained from a subsequent
letter.  Locks of hair have also been similarly used as a medium; hut the handwriting appeared to be the easier and better
mode of forming the connection.
27. On the 29th of September, 1849, an opportunity was
afforded for an entirely new manifestation of Emma's powers.
& highly respectable gentlerman of Manchester, hav'ng, at that
5




Q8                     APPENDIX.
time, a daughter seriously ill with a cerebral disease, which
baffled the ordinary medical treatment, and which, in aldition
to bodily infirmity, had produced a state of insanity, had been
recommended to try whether by clairvoyance a mode of cure
could be discovered. He came on the previous day; but Emmia
then being in the state of trance, to be presently described, hb
could not obtain the information sought.  He left with me a
few pencil marks made by the lady, as a means of forming a
medium of connection. On the date above, I gave this piece of
paper to Emma, and asked her if she could find the person who
made the marks, and tell me what was the matter with her;
for at that time I had no idea of her selecting any appropriate
remedies. She soon found the lady; described, accurately, the
external symptoms of her complaint, and also the internal con
dition of her brain; to which organ she referred the whole
cause of illness. After recommending various mesmeric passes,
she exclaimed, pointing at the same time toward the ceiling of
the room-" There is what will cure that lady, along with
mesmerism; Eh! what little bottles!"  These she described as
containing little things like the small comfits, generally called'thousands."  I said, "Is there any thing like them in my
shop or surgery?"  "iNo! you have nothing like them."
"W here can they be obtained?"  "There-in that big town
(pointing toward Manchester), in that shop with a hcad in the
window; they are kept there in a drawer." It would not have
occurred tome what medicines she meant, but that in the provious month, when in London, I had been shown, by a lady,
a case of homeopathic medicines. I do not recollect ever before
seeing any; and I was quite ignorant at that time as to the
mode of preparing and using them. I am certain also, that in
her normal state Emma knew nothing about, nor had ever seen,
any of these medicines.  The shop, I subsequently found, was
Mr. Turner's, homeopathic chemist, Piccadilly, Manchester,
and in the shop window, there was a bust of Hahneman, the
founder of homeopathy. But I was ignorant that there was
such a shop in tiat neighborhood, having seldom occasion to go
to that part of the city   I wrote to the gentleman inormiag




MESMERIC  AND PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCE.    99
nilt of Emma's remarks; and he directly purchased a case from
Mr. Turner, and came over to Bolton to ascertain the particulars. The sealed box was put into Emma's hand, and as soon
as she had put it over her head, she said that it contained the
medicines she before saw; and pointed especially to the situation
of one bottle in the case.  When the case was opened, she
selected a bottle from the place she had pointed out, and tasted
the globules through the glass, without attempting to draw the
cork.  By way of test, the bottle was put into another part of
the case, and other bottles slipped into her hand; but she inviariably detected the change, by tasting through the glass, and
putting the bottle to her forehead.  From that time, the prescribed globules were daily administered, and the mesmeric
passes regularly made; and the result is, the restoration of the
lady to health, both in mind and body.
28. The result of this experiment opened a new  field for
inquiry, and led to repeated trials.  A quantity of the usual
medicines were mixed with sugar, and put into small vials, and
given her with the homeopathic medicines, and these she would
select and. test in the same way; namely, by tasting them
through the bottle.  Sometimes she would select homeopathic
remedies; at other times, the usual ones.  She invariably calls
those which she considers suitable for the disease, nice; the
others she calls nasty; but I sometimes found, that the " nice"
medicines were intensely bitter; such, for instance, as the sulphate of quinine.  How she obtains this intuitive knowledge of
medicines I cannot discover. The homeopathic remedies have
generally been the best that could be selected according to that
theory of therapeutics; and the usual medicines have been quite
as judiciously prescribed, as to their qualities; but of the quantity, and mode of preparation she was unable to speak. Sometimes she was unable to point out any remedies for the disorders she described; and hence the necessity for a knowledge
of the properties of medicine, in some one, in order to profit by
her revealments.  Her powers appear to be chiefly applicable
to nervous diseases, and diseases of the lungs, liver, and heart.
M any cases have been submitted to her, from  different pa.*




100                      APPENDIX.
of the coltntry; f.nd some of these, of a most serious character
have been rapidly cured by an adoption of the means recoin
mended. Since the period when this faculty for examining and
prescribing for distant patients was discovered, a change has
passed over her; and she can now do without any medium of
Jrnnnection; but requires the name and address of the party
seeking relief, and that appears to be sufficient to enable her to
discover them. But the handwriting of the patient, or the intervention of some friend, seems to insure greater accuracy.
Upon awakening from  these clairvoyant examinations, Emma
has no recollection of any thing she has said or done; they
being, in this respect, like all other mesmeric trances.  But of
course, the information thus obtained is available to the medical
practitioner in all similar cases.
29. Her statements of the way in which some diseases are
removed, and of the permeability of the solid tissues of the body,
are very remarkable; but at the same time are in accordance
with the suggestions of profound physiologists; and, moreover,
they seem to be borne out by the facts of the case.
30. That exalted sense, before referred to, which enables her
to see things to which her attention is directed, as apparently
within the sphere of vision, whatever their locality, is also manifest, though in another mode, in her selection of medicines; for
by tasting through the bottle, she has been enabled to identify
the homeopathic globules with the tinctures from which they
are prepared! This may be considered one of the strongest
proofs that a medicinal virtue resides in them; for so highly
attenuated are the dilutions with which they are saturated, that
to the ordinary sense, they all taste alike, and merely of the
sugar of milk, of which the body of the globule is composed;
and I understand that tl.ey are not cognizable, even by chamial
cal test.




MESMERIC AND PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCE.   101
SPONTANEOUS EXTASIS, OR TRANCE.
31. The foregoing notes refer to the phenomena witnessed
1i the state of induced extasis, or mesmeric trance; the ensuing
very briefly relate states of a much higher, or more interior
character, and differing, in some respects essentially, from tle
observedfacts of ordinary mesmerism.
32. Frequently during the spring and summer, Emma would,
in the mesmeric state, speak of the scenery and nature of the
spirit-world, in such a w.y as to impress the beholder with a
conviction that the descriptions she gave could not be the result
of any previously acquired knowledge, or of an active imagination.  She also occasionally spoke of things which had actually
occurred, but which it was impossible for her to know by any
ordinary meanrs.  Her ideas of religion were principally derived from'the teachings of a village schoolmistress, in connection with the Church of England, and from  occasional attendance at the public services of the church. She had been taught
to read a little when a child, but had lost the acquirement
through a fever; and, as before observed, at this time she could
not read, nor even correctly tell the letters of the alphabet; and
yet the ideas to which sle sometimes gave utterance were of
an elegant and exalted description.  As she still continued to
have no recollection of what she uttered when she returned to
the normal state, I one day said to her, "Emma, I have heard
of some persons having seen such things as you speak of, but
they could recollect what they saw, and write an account of it
in books."  Shle replied, " Yes; because it was permitted them;
and she should also be permitted by and by to 7ecollect what she
saw." I did not tell her this when she awoke; nor did I expect
then th'at her prediction would be verified.  But subsequent
events lpoved that she was correct in making this assertion.
33. The first of these spontaneous states of extasis, or spirit,
ual trance, occurred on the 3rd of July, 1848, without any ex 
pectation or forewarning on her part.  This did not last more
than a quarter of an hour. Afterward she had seeoral which




10 T                    APPENDIX..asted about half an hour; and. since these, some wiich have
exten led from four to ten hours.  Of most of these states, she
had a presentiment while in the mesmeric state; and in one
instance foretold the occurrence nearly two months before it
happened.  But she knew nothing of what was forthcoming
while in her ordinary wakeful state; and for the sake of experl
ment, and to test the truthfulness of her predictions, she was
never informed when these trances were to occur; yet she was
found correct, even to the exact time. They have usually been
preceded by a feeling of quietness, and a somewhat confused
sensation in the head, but no pain.  Several gentlemen whom
I had apprised of her statements, have been witnesses of their
accuracy, and of the genuineness of.this abnormal condition.
34. In these states she preserved a recollection, at times, of
the place she was actually in, and of the persons by whom she
was surrounded, and, at the same time, she had a distinct and
sensational perception of a higher and spiritual state of existence, and of a class of beings living in such a state. She would
speak of. these things while in the trance, and on her return to
the normal state she could recollect, and would again describe
what she had seen and heard.  During the first trance, of four
hours duration, which occurred on the 28th of September, 1848,
she was so far elevated in her perceptions that she spoke of this
world, as the other world, just as if she had passed from  this
life by death.  She said, also, that the perons in the room with
her appeared only like shadows, and a long way from her.
Upon examination she was found, in this and other trances,
insensible to, pain, and her eyes upturned, as in the ordinary
mesmeric state, and her limbs continued flexible. At times she
would seem wholly indrawn, and then she would, as it were,
return and speak of what was passing before her mental vision.
But in the next trance, of six hours' duration, and subsequently,
she became for apart of it quite insensible to all outward things,
nnd perfectly cataleptic fiom hand to foot. A gentlemn friom
Mancheste)", who was present with me on this occasion, assisted
me to raise her body, antc we fl:md it as still and inflexible es
e log of wiod.




MESMERIC  AND  PSYCHICAL EXPEiIENCE.   103
35. I took the opportunity, during one of these trances, to
ascertain whether she could see concealed natural substances,
as in the ordinary mesmeric state. I put my hand in my pocket
and withdrew it with a shilling concealed in the closed fist.  1
inquired, "W\hat have I in my hand?"  "Only a shilling,"
was the immediate reply.  It must be remembered that the
eyelids were closed, and the eyeballs up-turned, so as totally to
prevent ordinary vision.  1 then put my hand into my pocket
again, and withdrew  it with a half-a-crown and a shilling enclosed, and asked her, " Can you see what is now in my hand?"
she replied, " Stop a little, till I've seen these," alluding to the
spiritual objects then engrossing her attention; but when I again
asked her, she was about coming out of the trance, and could
not then see.
36. One instance of her sight will be related, because it is a
proof that there is a reality in her extatic perceptions, and that
she then eminently possesses a super-sensual gift.  On the
11th of July she told me, when in the mesmeric state, that an
individual whom I well knew, but who had been dead fir some
years, had told her that on the following night they shoi;ud come
to her, and show her a book with some writing in, whAich she
was to take and show to me.  From  some of her remarks, I
concluded that one of three books was intended:-on.), a small
bible, not then in the house.  Former experience hal ing convinced me of the reality of her observations, and the certainty
of her predictions, I got this little bible, and put it with the
other books, among many more. In the night she a voke in a
state of trance, similar to somnambulism, and descending two
flights of stairs, selected this book fiom all the others, and then
brought it open to me. Owing to the darkness, I inadvertently
knocked the book out of her hand, while seeking a light.  She
speedily found the place again, by turning over the pages right
and left, over her head, in her usual mesmeric manner.  The
passage selected was Joshua, chap. 1st, verses 8, 9. Frequently
afterward, by way of test, this bible was -given to her to point
out this text; and this she invariably did before many persons,
witlb:,ut attempting to look at it, but by feeling the pages and




t04                     APPENDI.
turning them over while the book was over her h3ad. She
also told me circumstances connected with the histry of that
book, which I am  positive she could not know by any of the
usual means; for some were:nly known to myself. She was
asked to tell by what means sh  found the passage, as she could
not read, and was also in the dark.  She replied, that the individuals alluded to, whom she said she saw in their spiritual
body, had a similar book, but a larger one, open upon the left
arm, and that they pointed with the right hand to the pages,
and the same text; that her hands seemed guided in their
imovements, and when she had got the right place, she could
no longer turn the pages, either to the right or to the left!
Another instance of a similar kind occurred a few weeks later.
After the lapse of some months, she was again tried with the
small bible; but having then lost the connecting influence, she
could no longer find the passage as she had previously done.
37. The subjects of these trances would afford matter for
many pages; but some were of a private character, and, although highly interesting to the parties concerned, would not
se interesting to others, except as illustrating the nature of the
spirit's home, and some of the general laws by which spiritual
associations are regulated.  All that she has said tends to confirm the distinction between moral good and moral evil, and the
impossibility of those who depart this life in a state of moral
evil, attaining hereafter, to a state of moral goodness; in this
respect, being strikingly dissimilar to the statements of Davis,
the American clairvoyant; but who, according to his own subsequent statements, had never been in the state of true spiritual
extasis, when he delivered his lectures in the mesmeric state.
38. Her general statements represent man as a spiritual
being, rising from the shell of the dead body immediately after
death, a perfectly organized existence, and having a complete
sensational perception of his fellow spiritual beings, and of the
beautiful scenery of the spiritual spheres; that is, provided he
possessed during his natural life a moral state, in harmony with
those spheres.  The male and female sex retaining all the
characteristcs necessary to a s} ritual state of existence, and




MESMIERIC  AND PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCE.  105
living together in a state of angelic union.  Those who have
been interiorly united here, coming again into a state of union
hereaftel.  She represents male and female spiritual beings.
thus united, as appearing at a distance as one, and says that
they are not called two, nor the married, but the ONE.  Infants
and young children, who have passed from this world by death,
are stated to grow to a state of adolescence, blat more speedily
than in the natural world. During infancy and early childhood,
they are confided to the care of good female spirits, or angels,
whose delight it is to instruct them by various methods, especially by representatives of things.  These spiritual spheres,
and their spiritual inhabitants, are in close association with us,
and exercise an influence over us, although we are unconscious
of it.  All that is wanted to have a sensational knowledge of
their existence, is the closing of the external consciousness, and
a full awakening of the internal consciousness.  In the highest
state of trance, she appeared to herself, to be among spiritual
beings, as one of themselves; at other times she appeared to
them  more shadowy.  The first receptacle of the departed
spirit she describes as a sort of middle place or state, fiom
which the good gradually ascend to higher and more delightful
places; those that are the best having higher abodes than the
others.  All are welcomed by angelic spirits, on their arrival in
tho spirit-world; but the evil will not associate with the good,
and recede of their own accord, more or less rapidly, to darker
places below and to the left; but of these darker places, she
had not been permitted to know so much as of the abodes of
the good.
39. Being asked, in one of these long trances, if she now
could explain loiv she saw distant individuals in the mesmeric
state; she said, " Yes; I can see how it is now, but I could not
before;" and then stated that if spirits wished to see each other,
distance is no interruption; and words to the effect that spirits
are not subject to our laws of space and time; and that man,
as to his spirit, is a su )ject of the laws of the spirit-world, even
while united to the natural body.  The opening of her spiritual
eonsce)usness, gives her a sensational perception of the spirits
fi               --           ~ 




106                     APPENDIX.
of all to whom her attention is directed; and thus, however dis.
tant the individual, he can be mentally present with her.  But
this she further represented, as being accomplished by the aid
of intermediate associate spirits, by whom  the connection is
completed; and she further represented every one, as having a
connection with the spirit-world generally; and a more par.
ticular one, by means of this associate spirit. Whenever Emma
speaks of going into a trance, she always represents it as "going
away," and " going a very long way."  Of any one that is dead,
she says, " They have left their shell and gone away," and will
never admit that they are dead.
40. In the mesmeric state, Emma represented the fibres of
her brain as falling forward, and the hemispheres separating at
the top, when she became lucid; and she further said, that a
brain capable of these movements was necessary in order to
attain a state of lucidity. In one of the spontaneous trances,
I asked her if she could see me in the same manner as when
mesmerised.  She replied, that she had no recollection of
the state of her brain while in the mesmeric state; but that in
the state she then was, every thing seemed light, or rather was
seen in light.  She knew that she did not see with th.e eye,
and yet somehow she seemed to use her eyes.  She saw me
plainly; yet I did not appear as I ordinarily did; she could not
explain the difference, only that I appeared light. It appeared
to her, that light issued from within, outward.  During a subsequent long trance, I inquired whether she could see my lungs
then as she had done when  mesmerised.  She replied in the
negative, and said, " I can only see you as a cloud; yet I know
it is you."
PRACTICE AND USE OF MESAIERISM.
41. The induction of the mesmeric sleep, or the practice of
mesmerism as a curative agent, is a very simple process. I am
mnclined to relieve, that the result depends more on the peu



MESMERIC AND) PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCE.  107
liar constitntion of the subject, than the power of the mesmer.
iser  All that is required, is patience, and a proper disposition
in both parties. Let the subject sit down in the easiest and
most comfortable posture.  The operator should be seated in
front, and take both hands of his patient in his left hand, placing
his right hand on the head.  Then gently and slowly continue
to make passes forward o 31r the face-the operator looking
steadfastly at the eyes of the subject. The room should not be
too light, and every thing kept quiet. The subject should keep
his eyes fixed on those of the operator, and yield himself unreservedly to his influence. If this course is persevered in for
twenty or thirty minutes, some effect will generally be observ
ed; and if the subject is susceptible, probably within five or ten
minutes the sleep may be induced. If the front passes do not
succeed, then it will be well to try backward passes fiom  the
forehead, over the head and partly down the spine, each party
steadfistly regarding each other's eyes as before.
42. As a general rule, more striking effects may be expected,
when the sleep can be produced; but it must not be forgotten
that good may be done where the patient cannot go into the
state of coma.  Where the object is to relieve pain, first try
to produce the coma; but if not practicable, or the patient objects, then simply make passes with both hands downwards,
slowly and gently, over the parts affected, allowing the fingers
lightly to touch the person of the patient, and well shaking the
hands after each pass. This may be smiled at by the incredulous and inexperienced in these matters; but I have had proof
that disease may be put into the system, and transmitted by
passes fiom one subject to another. In cases of what are called
nervous headaches, the passes should be made firom the forehead over the head to the nape of the neck; and then from the
forehead along the base of the brain; that is, just over, and behind the ears and a little way down the neck, and then shake
the hands after each pass, as before. This will generally relieve
headache in five or ten minutes, if properly performed.  No
fear neeO be felt as to the arousing of the patient.  Fresh pationts will gelerally awaken spontaneously.  But by continued




APPENDIX.
back and upward passes, from the chest over the face and head,
or by upwardly finning the face, the patient will be ar'used.
43. The curative influence of mesmerism, as it proceeds
primarily from the will of the operator, though generally requiring the proper manipulations to make it susceptible, I propose to call PARAPsrcnEIsM, from the Greek words Parapsyche,
to soothe or comfort, psyche, the animal soul or mind.
44. The diseases to which parapsycheism, or the curative
influence of mesmerism, may be most beneficially applied, are
those of the brain, and nervous and functional diseases. Painful affections of the head, incipient and partial insanity, determinations of blood to the brain, giddiness and stupor, delirium
tremens, and other affections of the brain may be, in most cases,
speedily relieved by the application of the parapsycheic, or
mesmeric influence, especially if combined with proper medical treatment, and due management. But none of the old system of treatment, bleeding and blistering, setoning and purging,
must be allowed. The same remark applies to the whole range
of neuralgic, and what are called rheumatic affections; and
organic, as well as functional diseases of the heart, liver, and
lungs. In all painful cases, it would be well to endeavor to
bring this soothing influence into operation.  No harm  will
ever be done, if the passes are made in the manner directed,
and with a proper feeling and desire to do good. But while
censuring the old practice of medicine, in the cases above
alluded to, fairness obliges me to say that equal blame attaches
to some enthusiastic mesmerists, who, from their partial knowledge are led to despise and misrepresent all medical treatment.  The very circumstance of true clairvoyants prescribing
medicines, proves that those most under its influence perceive
mesmerism to be only one among other means of restoring and
preserving health.
45. But the full use of mesmerism, as a curative agent, will
never be thoroughly known until there are better opportunities
tor its practice than at present exist.  It cannot be expected
tlhat nw-dical men should generally be the actual mesmerisers.
gs they would nor be able, except in a few cases, to bestow thl




A STRANGE STORY.                     1 O
necessary time.  It, therefore, requires a class of trained male
and female mesmerisers to act under the superintendence of
qualified medical practitioners, and perhaps it would be most
successfully carried out in establishments similar to Hydropathic Institutions, but more universal in their means of cure.
46. In conclusion, I would observe to those who may read
these pages doubtingly-experiment for yourselves, not confin.
ing your attention to one or two cases, but patiently investigating wherever opportunity offers; and the probability is, that
you will speedily be convinced, by actual observation, of the
general truths of mesmerism, and of its efficacy, as an agent
for the relief of human affliction.
THE following appeared in the LONDON TIMES of Septem
ber 13, 1849, and has been kindly sent us by WILLIAM TURNER.
MD., of New York.
A STRANGE STORY.
[From the Bolton Chronicle.]
ON Saturday, July 14, a letter was received by Messrs. C.
R. Arrowsmith & Co., of this town, fiom Bradford, Yorkshire,
containing a Bank of England note for  O500, another for o50,
and a bill of exchange for X100.  These Mr. Arrowsmith
handed over, in the regular mode of business, to Mr. William
Lomax, his cashier, who took, or sent, as he supposed, the
whole to the bank of Bolton, and made an entry accordingly
in his cash-book.  The bank-book was then at the bank, so that
no memorandum of the payment was received or expected.
After the expiration of about five weeks, upon comparing the
ba.nk-book with the cash-book, it vwas found that no entry for
these sums was in the bank-book. Inquiry was then made at
the bank, but noth ag was known of the money, nor was there
any entry existing in any Look or paper there; and, after
searching. no trace.ould be found of the missing money.  In




110                      APPENDIX.
fact, the parties at the bank denied ever having r3t(eived the
sums, or knowing any thing of the transaction.  Before the
discovery of the loss the bill had become due, but upon inquiring after the loss was discovered, it was found that it had not
been presented for payment.  It was, therefore, concluded
that as the notes and bill could not be found at the bank, nor
any trace or entry connected with them, the probability was
that they were lost or stolen, and that the bill had been destroyed to avoid detection.  Mr. Lomax had a distinct recollection of having received the notes, etc., from  Mr. Arrowsmith,
but fiom the length of time that had elapsed when the loss was
discovered, he could not remember what he had done with
them-whether he had taken them to the bank, or sent them
by the accustomed messenger-nor could the messenger recollect any thing about them.
As might be expected, this unaccountable loss occasioned
great anxiety to Mr. Lomax, and in this emergency he applied
to a friend, to whom the discovery of Mr. Wood's cash-box was
known, to ascertain the probability of the notes, etc., being
found by the aid of clairvoyance.  The friend replied that he
saw no greater difficulty in this case than in Wood's, and recommended him to make the inquiry, which he said he would
c(o, it only for his own satisfaction.
On Friday, August 24, Mr. Lomax, accompanied by Mr. 4'
Jones, of Ashbourne street, Bolton, called on Mr. Haddock tfo
this purpose.  The clairvoyante was put into a psychic tatte.
and then into connection with Mr. Lomax. She directly asked
for " the paper," meaning the letter in which the notes and bill
were inclosed; blt this Mr. Lomax did not appear to have in
his possession, and she said she could not tell any thing without
it. This sitting, therefore, was so far useless.  The next day
Mr. Iomax brought the letter, and Mr. Hadtockk requested
that the contents might not be communicated to him, lest it
should be supposed that he had suggested any thing to her.
After considerable thought, the c!airvoyante said that there had
been three differont papers fo'r money in that lettel-not postDffles or-lers, but papers that came cut of a place where people




A STRANGE STORY.                      Ill
kept money in (a bank), and were to be taken to another place
cf a similar kind; that these papers came in the letter to another
gentlemanl  (Mr. Arrowsmith), who gave them to the one present
(Mr. Lomnax), who put them  in a paper, and put them  in a
red book that wrapped round (a pocket-book).  Mr. Lornax
then, to the surprise of Mr. Haddock, pulled from  his coatpocket a deep, red pocket-book, made just as she had described
it, and said that was the book in which he was in the habit of
placing similar papers.
Mr. Lomax said the clairvoyante was right; that the letter
contained two Bank of England notes and a bill of exchange;
but did not say what was the value of the notes.  Mr. Haddock
then put a 10 Bank of England note into the clairvoyante's hand.
She said that two of the papers were like that, but more valuable, and that the black and white word at the corner was
longer.  She further said that these notes, etc., were taken to
a place where money was kept (a bank), down there (pointing
toward Deansgate). Beyond this no further inquiry was made
at that sitting.
On Monday, Mr. Lomax called again.  The clairvoyante
went over the case again, entering more minutely into particulars.  She persisted in her former statements, that she could
see the " marks' of the notes in the red pocket-book, and could
see them in the banking-house; that they were in paper, and
put along with many more papers in a part of the bank; that
they were taken by a man at the bank, who put them  aside
without making any entry, or taking any further notice of them.
She said that the people at the bank did not mean to do wrong,
but that it arose from  the want of due attention.  Upon its
being stated that she might be wrong, and requesting her to
look elsewhere, she said that it was no use; that she could see
they were in the bank, and no where else; that she could not
say any thing else, without saying what was not true: and that
if search were made at the bank, there, she said, they would
be found.  In the evening, t1r. Arrowsmith, Mr. Makant, and
Mr. Jones came again, and she was put in a psychic state, to
repeat these particulars in their presence, which was done.




112                     APPENDIX.
Mr. Haddock then said to Mr. Arrowsmith, that he wag
tolerably confident that the clairvoyante was right, and that he
should recommend him to go next day to the bank, and insist
on a further search, stating that he felt convinced, from inqui 
ries he had made, that his cashier had brought the money
there. Mr. Makant also urged the same course on Mr. 1rrowsmith.
The following morning (Tuesday, August 28), Mr. Arrowsmith went to the bank, and insisted on further search.  IIe
was told that, after such a search as had been made, it was
useless, but that, to satisfy him, it should be made again. Mr.
Arrowsmith left for Manchester, and after his departure a
further search was made; and among a lot of papers, in an inner room of the bank, which were not likely to have been meldied with again probably for years, or which might never have
been noticed again, were found the notes and bill, wrapped in
paper, just as the clairvoyante had described them.




Works on Phrenology and Physiognomy,
Published by S. IR. WELLS, 389 Broadway, N. Y.' GOOD BooKs FOR ALL."-Here are the best Works on these subjects,
Each covers ground not covered by others.  Copies of one or all will be
sent by return post, on receipt of price.  Please address as above.
American Phrenological Jour.-  Iow  to Read Character. A New
NAL AND LIFEz llustrated,. Devoted to   Illustrated Hand-Book of Phrenology andi
Ethnology,  Physiology,  Phrenology,   Physiognomy, for Students and ExaminPhysiognomy, Psychology, Biography,   ers, with a Chart for recording the sizes
Education, Art, Literature, with Meas-   of the different Organs of the Brain, in
ures to Beformn, Elevate and Improve   the Delineafion of Character, with upMankind Physically, Mentally and Spir-   wards of 170 Engravings. Latest and
itnally. Edited by S. R. WELLS. Pub-   best. Paper, $1. Musln, $1.25.
Aished monthly, in octavo form, at $3 a 
year in advance, or 80 cents a number.    Memory and  Intollectual  i-l
PROYEMENT applied to Cultivation of
Annuals  of Pghrenology  and    Memory. Very useful. $1.50.
PHYsOGN-oxr.  One yearly 12mo volnime. Price 25 cents for the current Lectures  on  Phrenology.  By
year. For 18856,'66,'67,'68,'69,'T0,'71.   GBORQG  COMB. With Notes. An EaThe seven containing over four hundred   say on the Phrenological Mode of Inves- 
pages, many portraits and biographies of   tigation, and a Historical Sketch. By
distinguished personages, together with    BOARDMAN, M.D. 1 vol. 12mo. $1.75.
articles on "How to Study Plrenology,"   Iental  cience.  Lectures on  a"  Bashfilness, Diffidence, Stammering,    cording to the Philosophy of Phrenology.
"The Marriage of Cousins," "Jealousy,   Delivered before the Anthropological
its Cause and Cure," etc. The seven    Society. By G. S. WAvxi. $1.50.
bound in one volume, muslin, $i.50.
Constitution  of Man. Considered  M[oral Phillosophy.  By GOonoa
in relation to External Objects.   y   C. Or,theDuties of  an conid
Goo  ComRa. The only authorized    ered in his Individual, Domestic and
merican Edition.  With Twenty En-  rSocial Capacities. From the Edinburgh
a, and a Portrait of the Author.   Edition. With the Author's latest corMuslin, a$1.5.                          rections. $1.75.
i Chart of EPhlvysiognor  ly  T       aus   Natural Laws of Man. Questions
TRATED. Designed for Framino and for   with Answer. A Capital Work. By J.
Lecturers. Map forrm. 25 cents.         G. Spurzheim, M.D. Muslin, 7E cents.
efetnce of PIrenology; Contain- New  Physiognomy; or, Signs of
ing an Essay on the Nature and Value   Character, as manifested through Temof Phrenological Evidence. A Vindica-   perament and External Forms and estion of Phrenology against the Attacks   pecially in the " Human Face Divine."
of its opponents, and a View of the Facts   With more than One Thousand llustrarelied on by Phrenoloists as proof that   tions. By S. R. WXLLS. In three styles
the Cerebellum is the seat of the repro-   of binding. Price, in one 12mo volume,
ductive instinct. By BOARDaMAN. $1.50.   768 pp., handsomely bound in muslin,
$5; in heavy calf, marbled edges, $8Domestic Li/fe, Thoughts on;   turkey morocco, full gilt, $10.
or, Marriage Vindicated and Free Love
Exposed. By N. SizsR. 25 cents.        lPhrenology and the Scrlptures.
Harmony between Phrenology and Bible.
Eduication: Its elementary Principles   By JoiN  PIERPONT. 25 cents.
founded on the Nature ot Mlan. By J. G.
SPulRznErM, M.D. With an Appendix, Plhrenological Busts, Showing the
containing the Temperaments, and a    atest classification, and exact locations
Brief Analysis of the Faculties. An ex-   of the Organs of the Brain, fully developcellent work. Illustrated. $1.50.       ed, designed for Learners. In this Bust,
all the newly-discovered  Organs are
Education  and  SelE-Improve-   given. It is divided so as to show each
MENT COMP'LETz. Comprising Physiol-  Individual Organ on one side; and all
ogy-Animal and Mental; Self-Culture   the groups-Social, Executive, Intellcoand Farfection of Character; including   tual, and Moral-properly classified, on
the Management of Youth; Memory and   the other side. There are two sizes, the
Intellectual Improvement. Complete in   largest is sold in box, at $2.00. The
one large 12mo vol. Muslin, $4.00.      smaller, at $1.00. Sent by express.




IPhreaaolooy  Proved, Illnstra-  Your  Character  frorm    Vosa
TED AND AFPL!aD. Embracing an An-    LIKxrNES. For particulars, how to have
alysis of the Primary MXental Powers in
their Varions Devfrees o-f DlevelopTment,    pictures taken, inclose stamp for a copy
and Location of the Phrenological Or-    of "Mirror of the Mind."
g ns. Illustrated. $1.75.
Sl;f-iultiare aaid Perfection of
CHARACTER; Including the Trainingand  To Phlyslcias, Lecturers, and
Management of Children. $1.50.            EXAMINERS. We have a'abinet of 40
Self.Bsistructoo r in  Phlrelnology         Casts of Heads, selected from Our Ml.
AND lf'YSuOLOr. With over One Hlun-    senm. which are sold at $35.00. Also a
dred Engravings and a Chart for Phren-    set of Phrenological Drawigs, on canologists, for the Recording of Phrenolog-    vas, size of life, 40 in number. price
lcar Developmnents.  Paper, 50 cents.      40.00.  A set of six Anatomical and
Muslitn, D     cents.                     Physiological plates, colored and mountyMbolica, lT centsa                       ed, $20. Another set of twenty, in sheets,
lSymabolical Head. and Plireno-    plain, $             c5. Colored and mounted, 6,0.
LOCICAL MAP, on fine tinted paper, for    Skeletons, from  20 to $60. Manikins,
Framing. 25 cents.                        $250 to $1000. Portraits in oil from  $5f
WVells   Newv  Descriptive Chart    upwards. Woodcuts, $3.50 to $5. Symfor Use of Examiners, giving a Delinea-    bolical Heads, Electrotypes, $3 to $5,
tion of Character. 25 cents.              and $7.50, according to size.
All Works pertaining to the "SCIENCE OF MAN," including Phrenology, Physiognomy, Ethnology, Psychology, Physiology, Anatomy,
Hygiene, Dietetics, etc., supplied.  Enclose stamp for Wholesale Terms
to Agents.  Address S. R. WVELLS, 889 Broadway, New York.
Works on Physiology and Hygiene.
[It has been said that, a man at Forty Years of Age, is either a "Physician or a Fool."
That at this Age, he ought to know how to treat, and take care of himself. These
Works are intended to give instruction on "How to Live," How to avoid Diseases
and of Premature Decay. They are practical, adapted to both People and Profession.]
Anatonmical! aad Physiologlcal  lFood and ID~et, With observations
PLATES Arranged expressly for Lectures    onthe Dietical Itegimen suited for Dison Health, Physiology, etc. By R. T.    ordered States of the Digestive Organs,
Traill M.  D. They are Fix in number   IDietaries of the Principal Metropolitan
representing the normal position and    Establishments for Lunatics, Criminals,
life-size of all the internal viscera mag-    Children, the Sick, Paupers, etc.  A
nified illustrations of the organs of the    thorough scientific Work. By Jonathan
special senses, and a view of the nerves,    Pereira, M. D., F. R. S. and L. S. Edited
arteries, veins, muscles, etc. Fully col-   by Charles A. Lee, M. D. $1.75.
ored, backed, and mounted on rollers.
Price for the set, net $20.             Pruits  and   Farinacea,   the
Avoidable  Causes  of Disease,    PROPEB FOOD OF  1AN. Vegetarian. By
INSANITY, AND DEFORMITY, including    John Smith. With Notes and IllustrtMarriage and its Violations. By Dr.   tions. By R.T. Trail, M.D. Muslin, $1.75.
John Ellis. $2.
Challsdre.a, their Management in Health  Hydropatihic Cook B-loolk. With
and t)isease. A Descriptive and Practi-    Recipes for Cooking on Hygienic Princical Work. By Dr. Shew. $1.75.             pies. By Dr. Trail. $1.50.
Diseaases  of the  Tihroat  and                                                 A
LUvNs.  Vith Treatment. 25 cents.
System  of  Hydropathy and Hygiene.
bosae stie, Practice  of Hydro-    Embracing Outlines of Anatomy; PhyPATHY, with a form of a Report tor the    siology of the Human Body; HIyrienic
assistance of Patients in consulting their    Agencies,  and  the  Preservation  of
Physicians. By E. Johnson, M. D..        Health; Theory and Practice; Special
Fasmiry  Gymsaapsiuan. Containing    Pathology, inclnding the Nature, Causes,
the most improved methods of applying    Symptoms, and Treatment of all known
Gymnastic, Calisthenic, Kinesipathic,    Diseases. Designed    a a Guide to Famiand Vocal Exercises, to the Develop-   lies and Students, and a Text-Book lor
ment of the Bodily Organs. By. DIr.   Physicians. By R. T. Trail, M.D. $4.50.
Tral  Many Illustrations. $1.75.          The most complete Work on the subJect.




Family Plhyilcian. A Ready Pres-  Principles of Physlology applied tt 
criner and Hygienic Adviser. With Ref-   the Preservation of Health and to thr
erenc( to tne Nature, Ceases, Preven-   Improvement of Physical add Mental
tien, and Treatment of Diseases, Acci-   Education. By Andrew Combe. $1.T5.
dents, and casualties  tf every kind. 
With a Glossary, and Copious Index.  Science of  numan Life, Le3tures o
By Joel Shew. M.D. Mluslin, $4.          THE. By Sylvester Graham.- With h
i',             lcopious Index and Biographicai Sketck,
Ilaniamgemenelt of tIifaney, Physio-    of the Author. llustrated. 3.50.
logical and Moral Treatment. By Andrew Combe, M. D. With Notes and a  Sober and Temperate Life  The DisSupplementary Chapter. Muslin, $1.50.   courses and Letters of Louis Cornaro.
IMlidwrtfery and die Diseases of    With a Biography of the Author, who
WOMIEN.  A Descriptive and Practical   died at 15u years of age. 50 ents.
Work.  With the general management  Tea and Coffee, their Physical, Intel- 
of Child Birth, Nursery, etc. $1.75.     lectual, and Moral Effects onthe System
3ltovremesswit- Cue reI An Exposition of   By Dr. Alcott, 25 cents.
the Swedish IMovement-Cure. Embrac-  The Alcoholic Controversr. A Reing the History ald Philosophy of this   view of the Westminster P vsew on tle
System of Medical Treatment. with Ex-    Physiological Errors of Teetotalism. By
amples of Movements, and Directions for   Dr Trall. 50 cents.
their Use in Varilus Forms of Chronic
Diseases.  Illustr ted.  By George H.  The Story of a Stomacs. By a ReTaylor, iM.D. Mtslin, $1.75.             formed  Dyspeptic. Pape, 50 cents;
muslin, 75 cents.
Notes on Beaujy ViFor and D e-                o s cent
VELOPMEINT; or, Iow to Acquire Plump- Three Hoours' School a tay. A Serinss of Form, Strength of Limb, and    ous Talk with Parents. By William L.
Beauty of Complexion. 12 cents.          Crandal. Muslin, $1.50.
PlhysIoloegy of  HigestioBI.  Con-  Water-Cure in Chronic Diseases.
sidered with relation to the Principles    An Exposition of the (ases, Pro-ress
of Dietetics. Ily  ndrew Combe, D.M.   and Terminations of Vaous Chronic
Illustrated. 50 ceuts.                   Diseases of the Digestive Grgans, Lungs,!Phlloso-lhy of tihe Water-Cure.    Nerves. and Skin, and of their TreatA Development of the true Principles of   ment. With engraved View of the Lungs,
Health and Longevity. By John Balbir-   Heart, tomach,S    and Bowel. By J. M.
nie, M.D. 50 cent.                       Gully, M. D. $2.
Practice ofthe Water-Cure. Con- 
taining a Detailed account of the various  i 
Btaiingf processes. 60 cents. f       "A Special List " of 70 r more Private
Batting processes.'50 cents..'c^~^iolo~.iZA'          Medical, Surgical and Anatomical Works,
Physiology, An3i*al and Xental:
Applied to the Presirvation and Restor-   invaluable to those who ~eed th   sent
ation of Health of Body and Power of   on receipt of stamp. Addaess S. R. Wells,
Mind. Illustrated. Muslin, $1.50..       89 Broadway, New Yok
The READER wil greatly oblige by exhibiting this CAAILOGUE  to a
neighbor, who woild, perhaps, be glad to procure some 4f the Works;
or, would like to become a subscriber to the ILLUSTRATED PHRENOLOGICAL JOURNAL, or engage in the sale of these publications.
Works for Home Improvement.
This List embraces just such Works as are suited to every member of the familyold and young. These Works will serve as guides in Self-Improvement, and are almost
indispensable to those who have not the advantages of a liberal education.
Aims and Aids for Girls and Young.2sop's Fables. The People's Pictorial
WosEN, on the various Duties of Life,    Edition.  Beautifully illustrated  with
Physical, Intellectual, and Moral, Self-    nearly Sixty Engravings.  Cioth, gilt,
Culture, Improvement. Dress, Beauty,    beveled boards. Only  1.
Employment, the Home Relations, Du-  Benny. An Ilusrated Poem. By Anna
ti~es to   mgMen,   Marriae,   Woman-    Chambers Ketchum. Published in the
hool, and Happiness. By Rev. G  S|.  elegant style of EnochArde. Abeautli
Weaver. Mu lin, $1.5.                    fill Christmaspresent.  $1.50.




Chemistry, and its application to Phys-  Oratory-Sacred and Secular; or,
iology, Agriculate, and Commerce. By,ne Extemporaneous Speaker. Including
Liebig. 50 cents;                        Chairman's Guide for conducting Public
fp!. w^4. ^f T^-P~. ^ ^p^'h ~na -KIo Meetings according'to the best ParliaFootprints of  ife;e or, Faith and Na-   Meetings acorsdin tol    Pttenger. $1 Par
ture Reconciled.,A Poem in Three Parts.    mentary orms. By Wi. Pittenger. 1.1. j
qThe Body. The Soul. The Deity. By.' Temperance in Congress. Ten Mmin 
Philip Harvey, MlJD. $1.25.
hilip Harvey,   D.'$1.25.        nites' Speeches deliverea in the I-ouse of 
Fl'ruit Culture for the  lillion. A    Representatives. 25 cents.
Hand-Book. Being a Guide to the Cultivation and Management of Fruit Trees.  The Christian Household. EmbracDescriptions of the Best Varieties, and    ing the Christian Home, Husband, Wife,
How to Propagate them                    Father, Mother, Child, Brother, and Sister. By Rev. G. S. Weaver. $1.
Good Ban's Legacy. A Sermon by
Rev. Dr. Osgoocf  25 cents. Gospel  The.Imphatic Diaglott; or, The New
Among the Animals; or, Christ    Testament in Greek and English. Conwith the Cattle.  ame  25 cents.         taining the Original Greek Text of the
New Testament, with an Interlinears
Hand-Book for  Home  Improve-    Word-for-Word English Translation. A
MENT: comprising " How  to Write,"    work for Students in Theology, and S. S.
hIIow to Talk," "How to Behave," and    Teachers. By Benjamin Wilson. Price,
" How to do Business," in one vol. $2.25.    $4, extra fine binding, $5.
How to Live; Saving and Wasting, or,  The Planchette Mystery  An Inquiry
Domestic Economy made plain.  By    into the Nature, Origin, import, and
Solon Robinson. $1.50.                   Tendencies of Modern Signs and Wonders. How to Work Planchette. Wc.
Home for All; The Concrete, or Gra-              How WorkPlanchett
vel Wall. New, Cheap, Superior Mode  The  Right Word  in  the  Right
of Building. $1.50                       Place. A New Pocket Dictionary and
opes and   elp r the  oung of    Reference Book. Embracing Synonyms,
BoT  SEXES, Relafig to the Fo-mation    Technical Terms, Abbreviations, Forof Character, Choici of Avocation, Health,    ign Phases Writing  for thePres,
Punctuation, Proof-Reading, and other
Conversation, Cultivation of Intellect,roof-ea                        ad other
Moral Sentiment, Social Affection, Court-    Valuable Information  Cloth, 75 cents.
ship and Xarriage? By Weaver. $1.50.
ship and Marriae   By Weaver. $1.50.  The Temperance Reformation. Its
Library of Xlesinerism  and Psy-    History from the first Temperance SociCHOLOGY. Compisiing the Philosophy    ety in the United States. By Rev. J.
of Mesmerism,  Clairvoyance, and Men-   Armstrong'. With Portrait. $1.50.
tal Electricity;  ascination, or the Pow-      
er of Charming:,The Macrocosm, or the  Wasnt oWlfe, showing te Right  ay
World of Sense Electrical Psychology,       te      ro     ay. By   ev...he Doctrine o Impressions The  ci-   Weaver.  uslin, $1.
ence of the Souln treated Physiologically    er'  Works   r  t 
and Philosophically. One large vol. It-  Weavers Works or the Young
a   Plustrated. lsaoliu, $4.00.           Comprising "Hopes and Helps for the
lustrated. Mi*lin, $4.00.Young of both Sexes,"' "Aims and Aids
Life at HomeI; or, The Family and itss a   Y                   W        
Members. A dapital work. By William      of Life  or, the Right Way and the
Aikman, D. D. $1.650; gilt, $2.          Wrong Way."  A great work. $3.
<ife in the West; or, Stories of the  Wedlock; or, the Right Relations cf the
Mississippi Valley.:Where to buy Pub-    Sexes. Disclosing the Laws of Conjugal
lie Lands. By N. C.eeker. $2.       Selection, and showing who may aad
K,:".   ~.who may not Marry.:For both Sexes.'an, in Genesis and in Geology;    By S. R. Wells. Plain, $1.50: gilt, $2.
or the Bibliqal Account of Man's Crea-. tion, tested by Scientific Theories of his  Capital Punishment; or, the Proper
Origin and Antiquity. By Joseph P.    Treatment of Criminals. Single copies,
Thompson, D.D. LL.D. One vol. $1.        10 cents. ]Education of sh-) Heart.
>i.~~..        By Hon. Schuyler Colfax.  10 cents.
Pope's s Esay on /an. With Notes.   Father 3Cathew, the Temperance
Beautifully allustrated. Cloth, gilt, bev-   Apostle, his Portrait, Character, and
eled boards; Best edition' $1.           Biography. 10 cents.                   |
We have all works on Phonography and a large stock- of Mechanical
and Scientific Books for sale.  Any book wherever published rma  he
ordered at advertised price, and will be promptly sent, by return post,
I from this office. English, French, Spanish and German Works, imported
to order.  Agents wanted.  Address, S. B. WELLS, 389 Broadway, N. Y.